JP7381934B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent years, pachinko gaming machines have drawn a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the starting hole on the game board surface (playing area), and if you win the jackpot lottery, you win a jackpot (special game ) state, and pachinko gaming machines are mainstream, where a large prize opening provided on the game board opens and a large amount of prize balls can be won. The pachinko gaming machine configured in this manner includes a probability-changing gaming state that increases the probability of winning in the jackpot drawing, and a time-saving gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot drawing. There are also gaming machines that increase the interest of the game by creating game progress states that are advantageous to the player based on these game states. There are also gaming machines that increase the interest of the game by devising the structure of the game board or the content of the presentation. An example of a configuration for devising the content of the performance is a configuration that changes the performance by executing a pending change performance.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-136435

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem in that it is desired to develop a model that can realize even more innovative gaming features.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
an operable operation member;
A sub-gaming section that controls the presentation display on the presentation display section;
Equipped with
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
When the permission condition for determining whether the validity judgment is satisfied regarding a certain hold is satisfied, the determination is executed based on the random number regarding the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the changing display mode of the identification information are determined based on the result of the validity judgment. A game content determining means,
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner.
Equipped with
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
Equipped with
There are multiple types of operation effects that enable the operation of the operation member and enable a predetermined effect to be executed by operating the operation member. There are cases where it is carried out,
In a situation where the operation of the operating member is enabled during the operation performance, a specific image can be displayed on the performance display section,
When performing an operation member movement when an operation effect is executed, the operation member movement can be executed by operating the operation member in a situation where a specific image is displayed on the effect display section, and the specific image It is configured so that it can be switched to hidden.
The specific images include at least a specific image A and a specific image B which has a display mode different from that of the specific image A, and the operation member is easier to operate when the specific image B is displayed than when the specific image A is displayed. It is structured so that the expectation of execution of the action is relatively high,
If there is a certain hold and one or more preemptive holds that satisfy the identification information change display start condition before the certain hold, the identification information change display start condition for the preemptive hold is satisfied. While the identification information is being displayed as a change at the time of the suspension, it is possible to perform at least one of a plurality of types of look-ahead effects that foretell the degree of expectation for execution of a special game in the future due to the certain suspension;
As a plurality of types of look-ahead effects, there is at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B which is a different performance form from the look-ahead effect A, and where the look-ahead effect B is executed more than the look-ahead effect A is executed. is configured such that the expected degree of execution of the operation member movement is relatively high,
Compared to the case where the prefetch effect A caused by a certain hold is executed and the specific image B is displayed during the fluctuation display of the identification information regarding the certain hold, the prefetch effect B caused by the certain hold is executed and the specific image B is displayed while the identification information regarding the certain hold is executed. When the specific image A is displayed while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the expected degree of execution of the operating member operation when the operating member is operated in a situation where the specific image A or the specific image B is displayed is relatively higher. It is configured to be high,
The operating member has a light emitting part,
As the light emission mode of the light emitting part of the operation member during execution of the operation performance, there are multiple types of light emission modes depending on the type of operation performance,
As the light emission mode of the light emitting part of the operation member during execution of the operation member operation, there are multiple types of light emission modes depending on the execution timing of the operation member operation,
When a power outage occurs and the power is subsequently restored, the light emission mode of the light emitting portion of the operating member triggered by the power recovery is configured to be a light emission mode different from the specific light emission mode during execution of the operation effect. ,
A special performance can be displayed on the performance display unit in response to an operation of the operating member under a specific situation where a specific image is displayed on the performance display unit,
When the specific image and the first production design are displayed at the same time, the display of the specific image has a higher display priority than the display of the first production design,
In a situation where a special effect is displayed in response to an operation of an operating member under a specific situation where a specific image is displayed on the effect display section, the special effect, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol are displayed. are displayed at the same time, the display of the special effect has higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol, while the display of the special effect has higher display priority than the display of the second effect symbol. low degree,
The display area of the special effect is larger than the display area of the specific image, and while the display area of the specific image and the display area of the first effect pattern may overlap, the display area of the specific image and the second effect pattern may overlap. does not overlap with the display area of
In a situation where a special effect is displayed in response to an operation of an operating member under a specific situation where a specific image is displayed on the effect display section, the display area of the special effect is the display area of the first effect symbol. It is configured to overlap with the display area of the second production design.
This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:
<Additional notes>
Note that other aspects different from this aspect are listed below, but it is possible to implement the present invention without being limited to these in any way.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The gaming state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
It has multiple types of production modes, and can display any of the plurality of production modes on the production display section, and when displaying production display contents, displays the one corresponding to the displayed production mode. configured to allow
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
The production mode includes at least a normal production mode (for example, stage A) corresponding to the normal gaming state and a specific production mode (for example, stage D) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
In the normal performance mode (for example, stage A), when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed in response to a new ball entering the starting port, the first light emitting section While configured to be able to emit light in two modes (for example, red), in the specific production mode (for example, Stage D), the second variable right display (for example, The first light emitting section is configured not to emit light in the second mode (for example, red) when a white square icon) is displayed;
In the normal production mode (for example, stage A), the certain variable right display is displayed as the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) when a variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. The first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode (e.g., red) when the first light emitting part is in the second mode (e.g., red), while in the specific production mode (e.g., stage D), a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied. When the certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display (for example, a white square icon), the first light emitting section emits light in the second mode (for example, red). This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it does not play.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize even more novel gameplay in a gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of electric accessory drive determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative pattern presentation table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative pattern presentation table on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the determination of loading and stopping symbols on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is an image diagram of the display mode of decorative symbols on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative pattern production table on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram related to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to modification example 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an image diagram of transparent effect execution in the pachinko gaming machine according to modification example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the pre-read pending content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol reservation content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the advance notice production/drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative pattern display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the first main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the second main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is an image diagram of a pending change in a specific notice performance on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending consumption transmission image display process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image diagram illustrating a change in the holding and digesting transmission image on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first drawing content determination process during time saving on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the time-saving decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right hit instruction display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram of the display mode and display position of decorative symbols in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram of the variable display period of decorative symbols in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram of decorative patterns used in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram of a stop display mode of decorative symbols in the Pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of display priorities in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram of priorities in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram of changes in the hold display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram of the hold display for each gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram of erasing the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an operational view of the distribution member unit of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the Pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of reservation change display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of a hold occurrence display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the pending and extinguished display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a hold passing route in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of performance content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative symbol presentation content determination table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative pattern presentation content determination table on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a pre-reading display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative pattern display control process on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of the stop symbol display at the time of jackpot in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an image diagram of interrupt performance execution in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of accessory drive control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern content determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative symbol presentation content determination table on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a screen display during fluctuation standby in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a screen display for volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the transition of updating the hold display in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the playing warning display (left-handed hitting warning display, right-handed hitting warning display) in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability that a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed during a look-ahead effect display and the probability that a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed during a trigger fluctuation, in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between a power outage (RAM is not cleared) and decorative symbols after power outage recovery in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power off (RAM clear) and the decorative symbols after the power off and recovery in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reach voice and the probability that a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a full rotation performance in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing how the decorative symbols change for each stage in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the display contents of decorative symbols during fluctuation in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern when re-variation is executed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed to create a super reach effect in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 145 is an image diagram illustrating a display transition when development symbols are displayed in accordance with the preview type and a super reach effect is achieved in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an image diagram illustrating a display transition when a super reach effect occurs when different display modes of the same notice type are performed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super reach effect is achieved in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different display modes of the same pre-read effect type are performed to become a super reach effect in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the same super reach effect develops through different displays in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment progresses to the super reach effect via the button effect. FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach performance is performed in a different performance stage in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-variation is executed in a different performance stage in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo consecutive symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo consecutive symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the first decorative patterns are displayed in an overlapping manner in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 157 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power outage occurs during execution of loss variation in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 158 is an image diagram of a case where a power outage occurs during jackpot fluctuation execution in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 159 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power cut occurs when a pre-read effect is not executed in the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 160 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power outage occurs during execution of a pre-read effect in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 161 is an image diagram regarding the execution of the accessory performance in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 162 is an image diagram regarding the effect of the non-time saving gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 163 is an image diagram regarding the final change in the time reduction gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 164 is an image diagram regarding the display priority in the event of an error in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 165 is an image diagram regarding the display priority when button effects are executed in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 166 is an image diagram regarding the first decorative pattern and the gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 167 is an image diagram regarding the characteristics of the first decorative pattern depending on the gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each action, etc. in a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in a non-time saving gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each action, etc. in the variable standby state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 170 shows the execution of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, right column, and middle column in a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timing and execution time. FIG. 171 shows the execution of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, right column, and middle column in a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in a non-time saving gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timing and execution time. FIG. 172 shows the execution timing of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left, right, and middle rows in a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows execution time. FIG. 173 is an image diagram of the Pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment from the finalization of losing symbols to the first re-fluctuation of pseudo-continuous symbols. FIG. 174 is an image diagram from the action 2 at the start of fluctuation to the fixed position action 2 of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 175 is an image diagram of the first decorative pattern in the middle row from the fixed position action 2 to the swinging action 2 in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 176 is an image diagram of the first decorative pattern in the middle row from the fixed position action 3 to the fixed stop in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 177 shows the pattern of the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time reduction gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an image diagram of the display from the state in which the first decorative pattern, which has changed in response to the fluctuation, is determined to be a losing pattern and stops until the second shaking action, and the display from the jackpot end demonstration to the second shaking action. . FIG. 178 shows the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle row in the normal symbol fluctuations and reach fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. 1 is an image diagram showing an overlapping relationship with a decorative pattern. FIG. 179 shows a fixed position action when performing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of a first main game symbol in a non-time reduction gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 180 shows a fixed position action in response to a trigger hold when performing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of a first main game symbol in a pachinko gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment. This is an image diagram. FIG. 181 shows a fixed position action when executing a chance prediction performance with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of a second main game symbol in a time reduction gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 182 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 183 shows a detailed configuration of the display device. FIG. 184 is an example of a lighting pattern of the first main game symbol reservation display section. FIG. 185 is an example of a lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section. FIG. 186 is a diagram regarding a comparison of the sizes of the display device and the game balls. FIG. 187 is a diagram regarding the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section and the display mode of the second decorative symbol. FIG. 188 is a diagram regarding the positions of the round indicator light and the round indicator. FIG. 189 is a diagram regarding checking the operation of the movable accessory after the power is turned off. FIG. 190 is a timing chart regarding the occurrence of power failure. FIG. 191 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 192 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 195 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 196 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the button continuous press performance execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 198 is a flowchart of a single button performance execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 199 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 200 is an image diagram of executing a continuous hit effect in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 201 is a flowchart of the button-hitting performance execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 202 is a first modified example of an image diagram for executing a continuous hit effect in a Pachinko gaming machine according to a first modified example from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 203 is an example of the first main game win/fail lottery table (second main game win/fail lottery table) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 204 is a transition diagram regarding a setting change method in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 205 is a transition diagram regarding a setting change method in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 206 is a transition diagram regarding the setting confirmation method in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 207 is an image diagram regarding a button vibe in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 208 is an action diagram regarding power cut-off in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 209 is an image diagram regarding button effects in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 210 is a list of button lamp lighting modes in the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 211 is an image diagram regarding button effects in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 212 is an operational diagram regarding the execution of a special game in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 213 is a list of instruction displays in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 214 is an image diagram regarding the performance during a jackpot in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 215 is an image diagram regarding button effects in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 216 is an image diagram regarding the pending change effect that can be executed in stage A in the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 217 is an image diagram regarding the pending change performance that can be executed in stage B in the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 218 is an image diagram regarding specific effects and gaming machine settings that can be executed in a non-time saving gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 219 is an image diagram regarding the specific performance during execution of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 220 is an image diagram regarding the hold change production that can be executed in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the holding tone and the light emission timing of the board lamp in the non-time reduction gaming state in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 222 is an image diagram of a pending change effect that can be executed during a special effect, during a special effect, or during a super reach effect in a non-time reduction gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 223 is an image diagram regarding a pending change performance that can be executed during an initialization operation based on power-on in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 224 is an image diagram regarding the initialization operation during symbol variation and the pending change effect after the initialization operation in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 225 is an image diagram of a pending change performance accompanied by a specific preview performance suggesting an icon change in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 226 is an image diagram of a pending change effect accompanied by a specific notice effect in the next pattern change after a certain pattern change in a Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 227 is an image diagram regarding the hold change performance when an alternative display is executed in a pachinko gaming machine.

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. "Entering a ball" includes not only entering a prize where a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a gate where a prize ball is not paid out. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" mean, for example, in the configuration of a general big winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It becomes an easy state. In addition, for example, a state in which it protrudes from the game board (on the player's side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the advancing state) and a state in which it retracts into the game board (on the side opposite to the player's side) (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) In a configuration (so-called vero type attacker) in which the player can take the above-mentioned configuration, the advancing state = the winning state is easy, and the withdrawal state = the winning state is not easy. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (electronic computer lottery) to determine some kind of game content in pachinko gaming machines, and includes not only random numbers in a narrow sense but also pseudo-random numbers (for example, as a random number, a hard Random numbers, pseudo-random numbers (soft random numbers). For example, it determines the so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the results of games, specifically the "winning random numbers (random numbers for winning/losing drawings)" related to the transition to special games, and the fluctuation mode (or fluctuation time) of identification information. ``Fluctuating pattern determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, ``symbol determining random number'' to determine the stopping pattern, and ``winning pattern determining random number'' to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, a probability variable game) after the special game. be able to. Note that when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the confirmed identification information, etc., it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a random number or a plurality of random numbers, but the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. ) is referred to as one random number. ). Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). "Game state" means, for example, a special game state in which the big prize opening can be opened, or a non-probability fluctuating game state (low probability state) in which the lottery probability of transitioning to the special game state is a predetermined value. A variable probability gaming state (high probability state) with a high lottery probability for transitioning to a gaming state, and an auxiliary gaming state (so-called high base state, e.g. starting If a variable member is attached to the mouth, it is possible to lengthen the opening period of the variable member, increase the probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and shorten the notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. A state where all of these are valid or a state where at least one of these is valid), a non-subsidized game state (low base state) where there is no support for winning in the starting opening that triggers the lottery to move to a special game, etc. A combination of one or more of the following. "Fluctuating display suspension time" is the time for which identification information is held in a stopped state when the fluctuating display of identification information is stopped.If there is a hold remaining after the fluctuating display stops, this fluctuating display suspension time is After the period has elapsed, the fluctuation related to the remaining suspension is started (the fluctuation start condition and the validity judgment permission condition are satisfied). In addition, in this specification, "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (a performance symbol, a design). The main game design (special design) is identification information that is displayed and controlled on the main control board side, and the decorative design (design for performance, illustration) is identification information as a performance that is displayed on the sub-control board side. It is. "Identification information can be displayed" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emitted by a light emitting means (e.g. liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also differences in color), physical (For example, the symbols drawn on the reel strip are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). "Production" refers to display content that increases the interest of the game, such as changes/stops of identification information, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live-action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. A combination of these can be mentioned. The "decorative design" may be in any form as long as the type of design can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably an image object such as a card shape or character shape. Visual items, such as numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, pictures, designs, etc., are described. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image objects with the same combination of numbers and symbols on the active line, it is announced that a jackpot has occurred. The "first decorative design (first performance design)" and "second decorative design (second performance design)" are both "decorative designs (design for performance, decoration)" However, each of them is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a jackpot (for example, when the "first decorative pattern (first performance pattern)" becomes "777", the occurrence of a jackpot is notified. It is possible, and it is also possible that the "second decorative pattern (second performance pattern)" becomes "777" to notify the occurrence of a jackpot). "Variation mode" includes, for example, variation time (including variation time of main game symbols (special symbols), variation time of decorative symbols (designs for performance, decoration), variation time of normal symbols), decorative symbols. Decorative symbols (designs for performance, decorations) that are scrolled from top to bottom (others such as scrolling from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc. are also possible) and can be visually recognized by the player. Decorative designs (designs for performance, decorations) that can be visually recognized by the player by switching the type of decorative designs (designs for performance, decoration), rotating and displaying the decorative designs (designs for performance, decoration) on the spot and rotating half a rotation or once , illustration) (such scrolling display, rotating display, etc. are sometimes referred to as "switched display mode"). "Temporarily stopping (or not temporarily stopping) decorative designs (designs for production, decoration)" means "temporarily stopping → changing again" as one set, and performing/doing this one set. It is synonymous with not doing it. "Re-fluctuation" refers to a situation such as "temporarily stopping a decorative pattern (design for performance, design) → re-fluctuation", "starting fluctuation → temporarily changing a decorative design (design for performance, design)", etc. It is a term that includes situations such as "stopping" and "starting re-fluctuation → temporarily stopping the decorative design (design for production, illustration) (temporary stopping from the second time onwards)", and is used in pseudo-continuous production. Pseudo fluctuations and resurrection fluctuations in the revival performance (for example, during the super reach performance, the combination of decorative symbols (designs for performance, illustrations) indicating a loss is temporarily stopped, and the stage moves to after the end of the super reach performance. This is a term used to refer to fluctuations in which the ball changes again at , temporarily stops at a decorative pattern indicating a win, and then stops definitively. It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically thereafter, the stop display is definitely stopped and displayed together with the stop display of the so-called main game symbols) to notify whether or not a jackpot has occurred. In addition, "decorative designs (designs for production, illustrations)" are based on the second element (for example, numbers), and the first element (presence/content of additional information such as characters and "SUPER") and the third element (For example, a color effect) etc. may be included. In addition, when the production mode is different, "decorative designs (designs for production, illustrations)" are different from the first element even if the second element is the same (same number, same alphabet, same character, same symbol, etc.). The element and/or the third element may be configured differently. In addition, due to the difference in the first element and/or the third element, the expectation that the reach fluctuation will be a jackpot, and the expectation that the symbol fluctuation related to the look-ahead effect will be a jackpot when a specific symbol combination is stopped when executing a look-ahead effect. It may be configured such that the profit rate for the player is different depending on the number of rounds when a jackpot is achieved or the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In addition, in such a configuration, a high probability state and a high base state (high probability high base state), a low probability state and a high base state (low probability high base state), a high probability state and a low base state (high probability state) The first element and/or the third element is an advantageous element for the player in the low probability state and low base state (low probability low base state), which is the normal gaming state. It may be configured as follows. In addition, the "information display section" is something that displays information including preview performances, etc., and is, for example, a performance display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. However, it may also indicate a combination (the entire unit) of a plurality of display media such as an effect display device + 7 segment LED + LED lamp. In addition, the "effect display section" is for displaying effects including preview effects, etc., and is, for example, a effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. However, it may also indicate a combination (the entire unit) of a plurality of display media such as a production display device + 7 segment LED + LED lamp.

The following embodiment is a model (first type, first type multifunction machine) in which two conventional first type pachinko game machines are mixed together. However, this is not limited to this in any way, and applications to other gaming machines (for example, conventional 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and general pachinko machines) are also within the scope. . Note that this embodiment is just an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. The present invention is not limited to the following embodiments. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications of one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table among the various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table, or vice versa.

Here, prior to detailed description of the present invention, a brief configuration according to the present invention will be explained.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, two types of decorative patterns (performance patterns, decorations) are provided: a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is hidden or visible. A configuration for displaying (variably displaying) the second decorative pattern in difficult situations will be described in detail in this embodiment.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), special symbols and specific numbers (numbers consisting only of numbers) are displayed at the temporary stop timing of the middle row when pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed. A configuration modified to allow temporary stop will be described in detail in (Example 1 of modification from this embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the later the temporary stop timing becomes {or the number of pseudo continuous changes within the fluctuation (Modification Example 2 from the Present Embodiment) will be described in detail in (Modification Example 2 from the Present Embodiment), which is modified so that the number of stopping modes in which temporary stopping increases (the number of temporary stops in the middle row) increases.

The pachinko game machine according to the present invention is configured to be able to execute a transparent effect in which the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG becomes transparent and the role objects in the effect display device SG are visible, and during the execution of the transparent effect. A configuration in which the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is executed even when the first decorative pattern is hidden will be described in detail in (modification example 3 from the present embodiment).

The pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern as decorative patterns (designs for performance, illustrations), is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead performance, and has a special design in which: A configuration that can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol of the final variation of the look-ahead performance (variation related to trigger hold) and as a pseudo-continuous symbol of pseudo-continuous variation will be explained in detail in (second embodiment). .

In the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, from the configuration of the second embodiment, when a hold change performance (a performance in which the hold display form changes) based on a win in the pre-read lottery is executed, the hold display mode changes to a specific hold display mode. A configuration modified to provide a preview effect that is executed only when the user agrees to the event will be described in detail in (Modification Example 1 from the Second Embodiment). The hold change performance is a performance that suggests that there is a trigger hold within the hold by the display mode of the hold icon. Further, the hold change performance is a performance that suggests that the symbol change is trigger hold based on the display mode of the change icon.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (second embodiment), the appearance rate of special symbols (pre-read lottery winning rate and angel zone A configuration in which the transition lottery winning rate) is changed to be different will be described in detail in (Example 2 of modification from the second embodiment).

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, in the time reduction game state, one variation time of the first decorative symbol can become a time value equivalent to multiple variation times of the second decorative symbol (or main game symbol). The configuration will be explained in detail in (third embodiment).

Various configurations regarding the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern that can be applied to the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in (Fourth Embodiment). explain.

The Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has a configuration in which displays corresponding to two holds, a first hold display and a second hold display, are displayed on the effect display device (Modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment). ) will be explained in detail.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, it is possible to execute a parallel lottery, and the decorative patterns (designs for presentation, design) corresponding to the fluctuations of the first main game pattern are changed between the first decorative pattern and the second main game pattern. A configuration in which a decorative pattern (design for performance, illustration) corresponding to the fluctuation is used as a second decorative pattern will be explained in detail in (fifth embodiment).

Among the Pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration in which the configuration regarding the area where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed is changed from the configuration of the (fifth embodiment) is changed from the configuration of the (fifth embodiment). This will be explained in detail in Example 1).

A configuration applicable to the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained in detail in (Sixth Embodiment).

(This embodiment)

Here, before explaining each component, the characteristics (outline) of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. These will be explained in order below.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at the position where it is to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for removably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, feeding the game balls to the firing rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and output sounds (sound effects) depending on the gaming state and the like.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the gaming area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning holes, there are a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, an auxiliary game starting port H10, 1st big winning hole C10, 2nd big winning hole C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out port D36 is installed. Each element will be explained in detail below.

Next, the first main game starting port A10 is installed as a starting port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting port A10 includes a first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game starting port A10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the first main game starting port. Generate ball entry information.

Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting opening B10 includes a second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s and a second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting port entry ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second main game starting port B10, and indicates the entry of the ball when the ball enters the second main game starting port B11s. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is variable between a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the second main game starting port B10 than in the normal state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged to overlap vertically, and due to the existence of the first main game starting port A10, The upper part of the second main game starting port B10 is closed. Furthermore, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are connected to the first main game starting port A10. and is configured to be guided to the second main game starting port B10.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory may be provided on the first main game starting port A10 side. It's okay. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged to overlap vertically, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 may be arranged apart from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to close the upper part of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. In addition, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, A game ball flowing down on the right side (with reference to the center of the gaming area) may be configured so that it is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game starting port B10. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "hard to be guided" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of balls that enter when 10,000 game balls are fired to the right and left sides respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 includes an auxiliary game starting port entrance ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting port entry ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and generates auxiliary game starting port entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10. do. In addition, the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 becomes an opportunity for a lottery to expand the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is such that a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easily guided. It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {However, it is not limited to this, and it is configured so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. (For example, auxiliary game starting ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30, respectively)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out port D36, a first big winning hole C10 and a second big winning hole C20 are arranged so as to overlap, and flow down the right side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 is a horizontally oblong hole that becomes open when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is shaped like a cylindrical opening and is located on the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize winning opening detection device C11s) and a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the first big winning hole C11s. generate. The first big winning hole electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning hole C10 between a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first big winning hole C10 and an open state in which it is easy for game balls to win. 1st prize opening solenoid C13 is excited and variable). In addition, in this embodiment, the aspect of the big prize opening is made into a horizontal rectangular shape and is made to be variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that becomes open when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at a jackpot symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize winning opening detection device C21s) and a mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second grand prize opening C20, and the second grand prize opening ball entry information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the second grand prize opening C20. generate. The game ball that enters the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d operates the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening C20 and in an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the prize. Make it variable. In addition, in this embodiment, the aspect of the big prize opening is made into a horizontal rectangular shape and is made to be variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win. is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which the rod-shaped member provided in the grand prize opening can take an advanced state in which it protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted from the player side (so-called It is also possible to use a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is connected to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). This is a device that executes the displayed information, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) has a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g), and a first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g). It includes a symbol retention display section A21h (second main game symbol retention display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h (second main game symbol reservation display section B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". '' and ``-'' to indicate a loss. It is preferable to display the information using a symbol or the like. In addition, the display of the number of pending items is not limited to four lamps, but can display a maximum of four pending items (for example, if the number of pending items is composed of one lamp, Number 1: On, number 2 on hold: Flashing at low speed, Number on hold 3: Flashing at medium speed, Number 4 on hold: Flashing at high speed.

In addition, since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a performance role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The size is set to an inconspicuous level. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) themselves have a dramatic role and the decorative symbols on the first main game side (decorative symbols on the second main game side) are not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as an effect display device SG which will be described later.

Next, the performance display device SG displays a performance image including a decorative pattern (a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern) that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern. It is a device that does Here, as a specific configuration, the performance display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which a performance including a variable display of decorative symbols and the like is executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display area SG12 (and a second hold display area SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a plurality of rows of decorative patterns (first decorative patterns) imitating slot machine games, for example. It has a decorative pattern display area SG11 that displays a moving image of variation (design and second decorative pattern). Although the effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in this embodiment, it may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display area SG12 (and the second hold display area SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that performs display regarding auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations suspended (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a passage for the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays the role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular controls the overall game operation (i.e., the lottery when a ball enters the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10)). a main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players; a sub-main control unit SM that performs display control related to various performances on the performance display device SG that adds interest to game content; A sub-control board S that is equipped with a sub-sub control unit SS that executes performance display and controls the overall performance, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a prize ball tank KT that is supplied according to winnings to each prize opening. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE that includes a payout unit KE10 etc. that pays out game balls to the upper ball tray D20, a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game of the upper ball tray D20. A firing device D42 that fires balls (reserved balls) one ball at a time into the gaming area D30, a firing control board D40 that controls the firing operation of the firing device D42, and a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the Pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on and off the power of the Pachinko gaming machine, etc., are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the gaming side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 3. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and a payout of game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH and the main control board M to be controlled, the effect display device SG changes or stops the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern). A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are integrated into one board (located above) and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation and stop of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols), sounds from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , a sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and a display process such as a variable display, a stop display, a hold display, a notice display, etc. of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) on the performance display device SG. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS for execution. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various calculation processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that specifies the calculation processes of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the game (various data generated during gaming, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). Although not particularly shown in the drawings, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so that no unused area is provided in order to prevent programs, etc. that have been modified by unauthorized acts from being written. This is suitable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0s, writing used areas to smaller addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraudulent activity, unused data (for example, data that is referenced in gaming machines with different specifications, or data that is used only for testing during the development stage) It is preferable that the configuration is such that no data is provided. Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to use the area at a lower address and to avoid creating an unused program area. The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection between each board and device will be outlined below.

First, the main control board M includes the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s, second main game starting opening ball entering detection device B11s, auxiliary game starting opening ball entering detection device H11s, 1st prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (not shown, but a general winning opening is an opening where there is a prize ball but no symbol lottery is performed) )}, drive solenoids (not shown) (first big winning hole solenoid C13, second big winning hole solenoid C23, etc. mentioned above), information display LED (not shown), etc., input/output that are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control unit SM/sub-sub control unit SS), and controls the prize ball payout based on the progress of the game. It is configured to be able to transmit information (commands) regarding the prize ball payout control board KH, etc., and information (commands) regarding the performance, game progress, etc. to the sub-control board S, respectively. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC etc. via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal by wiring. The system is configured so that game-related information can be output from the player to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). Note that communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for loaning game balls and sends the prize ball payout control board KH to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits the information. Although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, a control circuit for the firing device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the firing device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device) etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided as a separate device adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money etc. may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes the effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effects for the effect. It is connected to a drive device (not shown). In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control board S includes a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( The lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantive display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is composed of In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (they may be configured as separate boards). However, by configuring them in an integrated manner, there are advantages such as saving space and reducing the situation where noise gets mixed in with the wiring, etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control sections can be changed as appropriate, for example, by having the sub-sub control section SS execute the audio control (suitable when adopting a VDP with an integrated audio control circuit). Moreover, electronic value may be provided as the prize ball without providing a physical prize ball.

Next, various functions of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 4. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the production is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, etc. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE that includes a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. In addition, the main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of elements such as ROM and RAM used for processing, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In addition, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in peripheral equipment (for example, gaming peripheral equipment) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each of the above means (devices) will be explained below.

First, the main control board M includes a game information control means MJ that controls the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN that determines the content of the game, and a game progress such as a special game or a specific game. the current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability fluctuation game state, time reduction game state), special game state], and states related to the auxiliary game. (easy release state, non-easy release state), stop symbols and fluctuation mode information related to main game symbols and auxiliary game symbols, on/off status of various flags, game status during special games (for example, number of rounds and number of winnings information) ], etc., and various game information on the gaming peripheral device side {for example, stopped symbol information, attribute information of the stopped symbols {for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss}. , information regarding the variation mode (for example, variation time), special game start signal/status information/end signal, hold information, etc.) (and a command transmission buffer for accumulating unsent commands) MT10), and a prize ball payout determining means MH that controls a prize ball payout control board KH to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of game balls in various winning holes.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be obtained, and the ball entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls into each ball entry port (starting port, etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be obtained. A random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing balls entering each starting port during a variable display as held balls within the upper limit number. are doing. In addition, the game proceeding means MP directly controls the display control means MP10 for controlling the variation and stop display of each symbol, and the opening/closing decision of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. A second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling special games that are more advantageous to the player than normal games, and a first main Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, it has a specific game control means MP50 for determining to which game state the current game state should be transferred, and for performing processing for transferring the game state based on the determination. are doing. Each means will be explained in detail below.

First, the ball entry determining means MJ10 includes a first main game starting port entering ball determining means MJ11-A that determines whether a game ball has entered the first main game starting port A10, and a second main game starting port A10. A second main game starting port entry determining means MJ11-B that determines whether a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game starting port that determines whether a game ball has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10. Ball entry determination means MJ11-H, first grand prize opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10, which determines whether a game ball has entered the first grand prize opening C10, and second grand prize opening C20. It has a second grand prize opening ball entry determining means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game starting port A10, and also A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A that obtains random numbers (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation pattern determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and a second main game starting port B10. It is determined whether or not to obtain the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main game side random number, etc.) is determined according to the judgment result. a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B that acquires a random number for game design determination, etc.; and an auxiliary game that determines whether or not a selected random number can be acquired on the auxiliary game side and acquires the random number based on the determination result. It has random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the "random number" in the claims and this specification, including the above, refers to, for example, "0" to "65535" or " This value is randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255." Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudorandom number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method for each value in the random number is one in which the values are expressed one after another along the sequence of random numbers (plus-one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like. By obtaining random numbers in this manner, it is possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are difficult for players to predict. On the contrary, for example, in the case of a method of generating the next random number using the random numbers used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating random numbers, it is preferable to generate new random numbers without using the random numbers used in the previous lottery.

Next, the suspension control means MJ30 connects the suspension expulsion control means MJ31, which controls processing related to suspension expiration and fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number obtained in a situation where the first main game symbol fluctuation permission has not been granted. A first main game symbol retention means MJ32 for determining whether or not to temporarily store the random number, and retaining the random number in the first main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until symbol variation permission is granted based on the determination result. -A and determines whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number obtained in a situation where permission to change the second main game symbol has not been granted, and based on the determination result, permission to change the symbol is granted for the random number. The second main game pattern holding means MJ32-B for holding the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game side random number obtained in the situation where the permission for changing the auxiliary game symbols has not been granted are temporarily stored. auxiliary game symbol retention means MJ32-H for determining whether to store or not and retaining the random number in the auxiliary game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until symbol variation permission is granted based on the determination result; have.

Here, the hold/extinguish control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means MJ31j that determines whether or not the conditions for starting fluctuation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol retention means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol retention means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol retention means MJ32-H combine random numbers, which can be stored up to four, with the retention order. A first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, a second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and an auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H are provided for temporarily storing the information in the form of are doing.

Next, the game content determining means MN includes a winning/failure drawing means MN10 which draws a drawing to determine whether the special game is correct or not and whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d can be opened; special game transition determining means MN20 for determining the transition (for example, turning on the winning flag internally), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number. It has a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on the above. Here, the win/fail lottery means MN10 includes a first main game win/fail lottery means MN11-A which performs a win/fail lottery regarding the first main game symbol, and a second main game win/fail lottery means which performs a win/fail lottery regarding the second main game symbol. It has an MN11-B and an auxiliary game winning/failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a winning/failure lottery regarding auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game win/fail lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win/fail lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game win/fail lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the win/fail lottery regarding the first main game symbols. the first main game lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game lottery table MN11ta-B that is referred to when performing the lottery for the second main game symbols, and the lottery table for the auxiliary game symbols. Each of the games has a winning/failing lottery table MN11ta-H for auxiliary games that is referred to when performing the game. Note that an example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing a win/fail lottery based on the main game random number, the win/fail lottery means MN10 determines whether the main game random number is the same value as any of all the winning random numbers, or If some or all of the random numbers are consecutive numbers, a win/fail judgment is performed by determining whether the main game random number is less than or equal to the upper limit of the winning random number and greater than or equal to the lower limit. . By performing such validity determination, accurate determination processing can be performed. Conversely, when performing a win/fail judgment by comparing only the upper limit of the winning random number range or comparing only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, if the random number range is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) as a random value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, a fraudulent act of flowing current to the main control board M, which tends to cause all bits in the storage area to become 0 or 1). There is a risk of it getting lost. In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery. {If multiple random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery) Because it is necessary to prevent the synchronization of

Next, the symbol content determining means MN40 includes a first main game symbol determining means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number); The second main game symbol determining means MN41-B determines the stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determining random number (second main game random number) obtained, and the auxiliary game symbol is determined based on the obtained auxiliary game symbol winning random number. and auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stopping symbols.

Here, the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determining lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining the stop symbols related to the first main game symbol. The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/failure results and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game for normal game state). Lottery table, probability variable game → first main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). In addition, the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/failure result and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). Note that an example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 is a first main game variation mode determining means that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and a second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (second main game random number); It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbols based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode is equipped with various lottery tables that differ depending on the win/fail result and the gaming state (for example, regarding the gaming state, normal game → first main game normal Lottery table for game state, probability variable game → first main game, lottery table for probability variable game state, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. , the second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B is equipped with various lottery tables that differ depending on the win/fail result and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). Note that an example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for auxiliary game variation mode determination, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode is The deciding lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 displays the images on the first main game symbol display section A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display section B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined period of time. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, which performs control to stop and display the first main game symbol after changing it, and the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 provide assistance for a predetermined period of time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that performs control to stop and display the game symbols after changing them.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C have first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H that can measure time.

Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B determines whether the conditions for opening and closing the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d are satisfied. the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determining means MP21-B and the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t that measures the drive (opening) time of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. -B.

Next, the special game control means MP30 includes a condition determining means MP31 that determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the special game are satisfied, and if the conditions for transitioning to the special game are satisfied, the contents of the special game. (Specifically, a special game content determining means MP32 that determines the big prize opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize. A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (jackpot) in which the opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is opened under predetermined conditions, and time management for various processing related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the opening/closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes first and second big prize opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP33-C that opens and closes the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d. , has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls into the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t that manages round time. Further, the special game content determining means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. (details not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether the end conditions of the probability variable game state are satisfied or not, and the probability variable game end condition determination means MP51 which determines whether the end conditions of the time reduction game state are satisfied or not. It has a time-saving game end condition determining means MP52 for determining. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 includes a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of time saving times. Here, the term "specific game" refers to, for example, a probability variable game where the lottery probability for a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reduced game in which the main game symbol variation time is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbols is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (a probability fluctuation game with no limit on the number of time reductions). except for). That is, the time saving number is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol change (stop). In addition, the above-mentioned probability variable game ending condition determining means MP51 and time-saving game ending condition determining means MP52, for example, determine the transition lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability-changing game or a time-saving game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. (in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a so-called falling lottery function). In addition, the time reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on, or may be that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction gaming state. may indicate that the opening time extension function is activated (including high certainty high base state and low certainty high base state), or may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated in the non-time reduction gaming state. It may also indicate that (a low probability low base state is included). Incidentally, the time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability variable gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability varying gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state. In addition, the high accuracy low base state as another game state is considered to be a time shortening game state when the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than the normal game state. When not playing a time-saving game where the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the normal game state, it is preferable to use a non-time-shortening game state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the fluctuation of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the fluctuation of the second main game symbol to the stop). first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game); and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H, and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game status in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, on/off of various flags related to the special game, etc.) MB20b, and a specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current gaming status of the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time savers, on/off of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stores the stop related to the first or second main game symbol that is currently fluctuating (the first or second main game symbol for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

In addition, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H is a auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the auxiliary game symbol that is currently changing (auxiliary game symbol for which a fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, gaming peripherals will be explained. Note that since the detailed configurations of some of the peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly explained. First, the game peripherals include a first main game peripheral device A, which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side. and a first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, a sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and a sub-sub control unit. SS (and effect display device SG), etc. Here, the performance controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is a decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) that is temporally synchronized with fluctuations in the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern. This relates to displaying only information that does not affect the outcome of the game, including changes in symbols (symbols). Below, these peripheral devices will be explained in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game starting port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can stop and display the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can stop and display the second main game symbol. It has .

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is the first big prize opening C10 which is in a closed state during a normal game and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (jackpot). and a second grand prize opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H operates the auxiliary game starting port H10, which is the trigger for opening the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10, and the stop display and variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that is capable of.

Next, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM includes a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and processing for determining performance contents and display control processing related to performance display. and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission and reception with the sub-sub control section SS side. Each of the above means will be explained in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the performance display control means SM20 is connected to a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the variation mode of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the determination process of the stop symbol, and the display control process; 1 decorative pattern and 2nd decorative pattern), a drawing reservation information display control means SM22 that controls the number of reservations and a reservation display process, a background effect display control means SM23 that controls a background image determination process and a display control process, and a preview effect. It has a preview effect display control means SM24 that controls content determination processing and display control processing, and a ready-to-win effect display control means SM25 that controls ready-to-win effect content determination processing and display control processing.

Here, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays a decorative pattern (in this embodiment, two types of decorative patterns (hereinafter referred to as a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern) based on information from the main control board M side). ), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are each independent, and the game is played by combining three numerical patterns of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. The drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbols and variation modes of } that can notify the results, and various information (variation modes) related to the symbol variations of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). a drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing information, stop pattern information, various flags, etc.); It has a diagrammatic variation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the design display content determining means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the design variation content that is referred to when determining the stop symbols and variation modes of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorations that are referenced when determining (or setting) the production contents, display update timing, and display update contents of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It further includes a symbol production table SM21ta-2. It should be noted that both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are each independently controlled to be displayed on the effect display control means SM20 side based on information from the main control board M side, and these two types By making good use of the decorative patterns, the game is designed to increase the interest of the performance and make it easier to understand the progress of the game, which will be discussed later.

Next, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 has a drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding reservations related to decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols). .

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores information related to the background effect display and a background effect display content determining means SM23n that determines the display contents of the background effect based on information from the main control board M side. background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

Next, the preview effect display control means SM24 includes a preview effect display content determining means SM24n that determines the display contents, display timing, etc. of the preview effect based on information from the main control board M side, and information related to the preview effect display. It has a preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing the information.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 includes a reach effect display content determining means SM25n that determines the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on information from the main control board M side, and information related to the reach effect display. It has a ready-to-reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

In addition, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS includes a sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission and reception with the sub-main control unit SM side, and an image display that displays images in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. It has a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control section SM side and information regarding various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays images related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying images.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative pattern display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative patterns (a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern), and a first hold display area SG12 (and a first hold display area SG12 for displaying main game hold information). 2 pending display area SG13).

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control section) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control device. Means (sub-main control unit) means controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of a general process flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be explained using a flowchart. Flowcharts are mainly composed of processing steps (represented by rectangles), judgments (represented by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals indicating start, end, return, etc. (represented by rounded rectangles). . In addition, when the details of a processing step are illustrated in another flowchart, those that refer to the other flowchart are illustrated as subroutines (illustrated by a rectangle with double lines on the left and right). . At the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( The configuration is such that no subroutines (subroutines that are not normally used) are left behind, and processes related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed are prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the gaming machine is powered on, the process shown in FIG. 2(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M checks the input port of the RAM clear button, and presses the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E. It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally performed by an administrator of the game hall or the like. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, information in the gaming state temporary storage means MB, etc.). Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM (even if it is not transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process to be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power outage and the contents saved in the RAM area). comparison with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether the contents of the RAM are not normal (whether information at the time of power outage is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process moves to step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M saves the data stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in the event of a power outage. Information commands are acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the commands may be set at the relevant timing and the control commands described later) (It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), the process moves to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M receives a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 4.0 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is assumed to be T) {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. . Note that after step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it does not become the value at which the special game is executed. (This is to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed in the event that the process for determining the execution of the special game is executed.)

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 3(b) based on an interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the regular interrupt period T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt approximately every 4.0 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process to be described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process that will be described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process to be described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (particularly the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning hole in which the game ball has won. (processing, etc. for causing the payout control board KH to execute and managing the results, etc.). Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and executes the control command transmission process immediately before executing the main interrupt process. Return to the previous process. Note that in the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is executed normally by receiving one command and then another command). Therefore, the commands are configured to be transmitted in the order in which the main control board M side decides to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands are set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. As mentioned above, the main control board M is configured so that the power-off signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the gaming machine is powered off, the process shown in FIG. be done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, at the NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, checksum) based on information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting opening ball entry determining means MJ11-H determines whether a game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passing through) the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether the number of reserved balls is not at the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires the auxiliary game content determining random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the held ball in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information as to how many pieces are on hold. is incremented by 1, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1200). Note that if the answer is No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and determines that the electric accessory opening flag is off. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag is off. do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. . If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). At the same time, with reference to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, a stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time shortening flag When is on, a winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). A predetermined time related to the variable time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H subtracts 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, and then updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has been reached. do. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and also acquires the acquired auxiliary symbol. The stop symbols of the game symbols are definitively displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a "win". If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B controls the second main game starting port based on the game state of the auxiliary game (flag state of the auxiliary game time saving flag). The starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B is set to a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 0.5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off). seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, and temporarily enters the auxiliary game state. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1300).

Note that if the answer is No in step 1202, the process moves to step 1238; if the answer is No in step 1204, the process moves to step 1224; and if the answer is No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the process proceeds to step 1238. The process moves to (processing in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, the process moves to the next step immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but the process is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process can be performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). is achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting opening ball entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game starting opening ball entering ball information from the first main game starting opening ball entering detection device A11s of the first main game starting opening A10. is received. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 balls). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A obtains the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, the first main game content determining random number includes a win/fail lottery random number for determining win/fail, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern of the main game symbol (special symbol) ( Three random numbers for the variation mode lottery random number are obtained to determine the variation time (variation time). Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are successively acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A temporarily stores (reserves) the obtained first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the suspension control unit MJ30 stores a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (first main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. The command is set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1312. Incidentally, if the result in step 1302 or step 1304 is No, the process also moves to step 1312.

Next, in step 1312, the second main game starting opening ball entering determination means MJ11-B detects the second main game starting opening ball entering ball detecting device B11s of the second main game starting opening B10. Determine whether information has been received. If Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the side) is not at the upper limit (for example, 4 balls). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, three random numbers are acquired, which are a win/fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variable mode lottery random number, similarly to the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game) acquisition range) are set to the same value. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol reservation means MJ32-B temporarily stores (reserves) the obtained second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the suspension control means MJ30 uses a command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (second main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. The control command is set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). Note that even in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400).

In this embodiment, the information to the effect that a random number has been acquired is sent to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, but the information on the random number and the main game symbol The pending number may also be transmitted, and these pieces of information can also be used as information indicating that a random number has been obtained.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the reservation extinguishment control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether or not the second main game symbol is reserved. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

In this way, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of a reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol) (even if the second main game symbol comes first), the second main game symbol is executed with priority, but is not limited to this (such as pending redemption based on the order of winnings, or simultaneous execution of both main game symbols). (It may also be configured to perform a parallel lottery in which the lottery is drawn simultaneously).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. In addition, this process is approximately the same process for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, so the first main game symbol side will be mainly explained, and the process for the second main game symbol side will be explained below. It is written in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the hold/extinguish control means MJ31 determines whether a fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols are not in fluctuation, and the main game symbols are on hold. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed variation time (time during which the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed after the main game symbol is displayed) is provided, during the fixed variation time, the variation start condition for the next variation is set. It may be configured so that it does not satisfy.

If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the reservation extinguishment control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation is read out, and the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game content determination random number) is read out. The symbol retention information is deleted from the temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (retention extinguishing process). Next, in step 1410-1, the win/fail lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and Based on the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (particularly the winning lottery random number), a main game symbol validity lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the variable probability gaming state is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this in any way. Further, in this embodiment, although a hit that cannot change the gaming state (a so-called small win) is not illustrated, it may be configured so that a small win occurs (a small win is won). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, for example, (1) the winning probability of the small winning is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the probability of winning the small winning is different on the first main game side than on the second main game side. (2) If you win a small win, the gaming state after the small win ends is the same as the gaming state before the start of the small win. (If you win a jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends may be different from the gaming state before the jackpot starts.) (3) The jackpot will be played between the first main game side and the second main game side. The probability of winning is the same for both, and the probability of winning increases by entering the probability variable gaming state, whereas the probability of winning for a small win is different between the first main game and the second main game. (4) As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation won in the small hit, a "special symbol" (for example, ★ such as "2★2" and "3★9" (corresponding to "special symbols") can be stopped. A specific number that is a combination of numbers that are not aligned and has a certain regularity (for example, a regular number such as ``234'', a reverse number such as ``432'', or an odd number such as ``357'') (6) From the player's perspective, the jackpot (2R or more, the number of rounds is different) that is the same (or similar) opening mode (visibility) of the jackpot opening as (or similar) to the small jackpot. appears to be the same opening mode from the player's perspective (a small win is only one round, the big winning hole is opened multiple times in that one round, and a jackpot is the same number of openings as the multiple times) (Executed within a round)} (In such a configuration, it is preferable to stop displaying a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between a small hit and a jackpot.) 8) In the second decorative pattern, the "special pattern" dedicated to small wins does not stop (or sometimes does not stop); (9) A combination of decorative patterns that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a jackpot. Even in a configuration where the player is stopped and displayed, the percentage of a small hit or a jackpot will vary depending on the type of combination of decorative symbols that are difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, if three are aligned, the probability of a jackpot after the jackpot is If a decorative symbol that is almost certain (or definite) to transition to a variable gaming state is included in the stop symbol, the probability of a jackpot is higher than if it is not included. Good too.

Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A (second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determining lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determining means MN41-B). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), regarding the main game symbols based on the main game symbol validity lottery results and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the symbol lottery random number). The symbols to be stopped are determined and temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won, one of the main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B") is selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbols is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Furthermore, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are just examples, and are not limited to these {for example, the losing symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, but may be configured to have multiple types of symbols. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the main game symbol changes to a state where the type of variation and/or selection rate is different from before the specific symbol was stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). }.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) selects the first main game variation mode determination lottery corresponding to each gaming state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol winning/failure lottery result and the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (in particular, the fluctuation The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the mode lottery random number), and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process moves to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, on both the first main game side and the second main game side, based on the winning/failure lottery results of the main game symbols, the state of the main game time saving flag, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, It is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols is determined. In other words, when the winning/failure lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction gaming state), the variation mode is relatively long. Therefore, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is short, and when the number of pending items is 2 to 3, the variation time is relatively short compared to the case where the number of pending items is 0 to 1. The mode is configured so that it is easy to determine (only in case of a loss). It should be noted that this example is just an example, and there is no limitation to the type of stopped symbols, selection rate, etc. Further, it may be configured such that the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) is relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side When the system is configured such that it is advantageous for the player to execute, the second main game side is likely to be held by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player). Since the purpose is to create a situation in which the game is played, it is particularly effective in cases where it is not possible to distinguish between the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side. In addition, an example of the performance executed when each variation mode is selected is shown in "Production mode executed on the sub side". In addition, as a performance mode executed on the sub side, a pseudo-continuous variation (a production in which it appears as if symbol fluctuations are occurring multiple times during the display of one fluctuation of the main game symbol), which will be described later, is performed. A "pseudo consecutive failure performance" may be provided, which is a performance that informs the player that the pseudo continuous fluctuation will not be executed after inciting the player whether the In the game state, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of "Pseudo consecutive failure effect → stop of losing rolls" is higher when the number of pendings is 0 to 1 than when the number of pending is 2 to 3. (It may be configured in this way in both the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state).In addition, when the "pseudo continuous success performance" is executed, the pseudo continuous success effect described below It may be configured such that after the player is informed as to whether or not the fluctuation will be executed, the player is notified that the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be executed. In addition, the "pseudo consecutive failure performance" and the "pseudo consecutive success performance" are performances using "special symbols" or specific numbers described later. For example, when the "pseudo consecutive failure performance" is executed, the "pseudo consecutive failure performance" is After asking the player whether or not the "special symbol" will temporarily stop in the middle row, the decorative symbol one frame after the "special symbol" will stop (temporarily stop) in the middle row, and the "pseudo consecutive success effect" will occur. When executed, the player is asked whether or not the "special symbol" should temporarily stop in the middle row, and then the "special symbol" stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row. There is. In addition, in order to cause the second main game to be suspended during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbol related to the loss in the time reduction gaming state is The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured such that short-time variation modes are not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, all variation times are 5 seconds or more). Note that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the number of reservations is the first main game reservation. This is the number of games pending, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, in step 1414, the game content determining means MN issues a symbol fluctuation display start instruction command (stopped symbol information, stopped symbol attribute information, , information related to the determined main game symbols such as fluctuation mode information, commands related to the current gaming state, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C control the first main game symbol display section A21g (of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) On the second main game symbol display section B21g), a variable display of the main game symbols is started according to the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, The process moves to step 1420.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag areas of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and change the Determine whether the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process moves to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time period related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol finalization display instruction command) to the sub-main control section SM to the effect that symbol variation is finished. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C control the first main game symbol display section A21g (of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stopped symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stopped symbols. Control. Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

Next, in step 1430, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1500). Note that even in the case of No in step 1420, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process related to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1470, in step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts (decrements) the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value (remaining time saving number) is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1474, in steps 1476 and 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next The process moves to step 1500 (processing of step 1500). Note that even in the case of No in step 1452, step 1470, or step 1474, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determining means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the conditional device activation flag is on. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 selects the specific game flags (main game probability change flag, main game time shortening flag, auxiliary game time shortening flag, etc.) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. flag). Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transfer permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the conditional device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1600). Note that if the answer is No in step 1502, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transfer permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and also turns off the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets information to start a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process in step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM), and the process moves to step 1612.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process moves to step 1612. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that permission for the special game is not granted, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the round continuation flag is off or not, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine whether it exists or not. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, special game execution means MP33 sets an opening pattern in special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d) of the first big winning hole C10 to win the first big prize. The opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process moves to step 1622 without performing the processes in steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game status command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, the special game execution means MP33 puts a predetermined number of balls (for example, It is determined whether there is a winning ball (ball). If YES in step 1624, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and determines the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to opening the big winning opening. Determine whether the time has elapsed. If YES in step 1626, the process also moves to step 1628. Note that in the case of No in step 1626, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 controls the first big winning hole electric accessory C11d of the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d of the second big winning hole C20). The drive is stopped and the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). It is determined whether the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 sets information to end the special game (special game end display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command sending process in step 1999). Then, at step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997). Note that even in the case of No in step 1634, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether the stopped symbols are probability-variable jackpot symbols (probability-variable game state after the execution of the special game is completed). It is determined whether or not it is a transitional jackpot symbol (in this example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and moves to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stopped symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability variable game state after the execution of the special game, in this example, 4A/4B), step 1656 Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), and proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in step 1658 and step 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (step 1997 processing).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26, the control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly the sub-main control unit SM side) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process shown in FIG. 4A is a process executed by the sub-main control unit SM after a reset such as when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, when the gaming machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, clears RAM clear information). When receiving → Initializes the RAM on the sub side; When receiving various information commands → Resets information related to production at the time of power outage to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of reservations (for example, the drawing reservation counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). Note that the current performance will not be restored, and the "Preparing" screen will be displayed until the next change starts. Thereafter, the process shifts to a loop process in which the sub-main control unit SM repeatedly executes the repeat process routine (b). Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. Execute. Next, in step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes special game-related display control processing to be described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a background effect control process to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes display command transmission control processing (sends the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control section SS side), and End the repeat processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a configuration in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process shown in FIG. 2(c) is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M mentioned above is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM uses the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above. Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored and returns to the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and sends a command related to the occurrence of a new reservation (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not pending information related to game symbols has been received. If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 stores the drawing pending counters (in this example, up to 4 for the first main game) in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. For the second main game, add "1" to the maximum of 4 pieces. Next, in step 2106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 generates reservation information (particularly, random numbers related to the main game symbol lottery and reservation pre-reading group information) based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. ) is temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process moves to step 2118.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2111, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether a symbol fluctuation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing pending counter in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the reservation information related to the symbol variation (in particular, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. , shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Note that even if the answer in step 2111 is No, the process moves to step 2118.

Next, in step 2118, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display the mounting on the effect display device SG (particularly the first pending display area SG12, the second pending display area SG13). The same number of pending images as the drawing pending counter value in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the drawing display content determining means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the ready-to-reach effect display content determining means SM25n) selects the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b ( The first decorative symbol (as described above, is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) with reference to the stop symbols and variation modes related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of variation in the design. The stop symbol is a so-called decorative symbol that is controlled, and its display size and operation details will be described later). For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, If it is a losing symbol, a number zero (win) such as 7, a number 1, 3, 5, etc.} and the variation pattern {for example, the variation pattern related to the main game symbol is short-term. If it is a fluctuation, it is non-reach, and if it is a long-term fluctuation, it is normal reach, super reach, etc.), and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, the reach performance) The related information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in this embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and is an effective line (a line where three numerical symbols are lined up to notify the result of success or failure). ) is one line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the active line, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). In addition, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or only in the middle column), in addition to the number symbols, there are "special symbols" (if displayed on the active line, it does not mean a jackpot, but after that it will be a jackpot. This is a symbol that foretells that this may occur, and the display size and operation contents will be described in detail later) can be stopped (temporarily stopped), and the numerical symbols are also configured so that they can be temporarily stopped during the symbol change. has been done. In addition, temporary stop means to temporarily stop display the decorative symbols in all rows during the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols , refers to the state in which it is possible to start variable display again during the relevant period (hereinafter used with the same meaning). Although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), does not make a definite stop, and is not included in the stop mode that notifies the jackpot. The "special symbol" at the time of executing the look-ahead effect is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), it can be fixedly stopped, and it is not included in the stopping mode that notifies the jackpot. .

Next, in step 2208, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the ready-to-reach effect display content determining means SM25n) selects the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b ( The display is controlled based on the information from the main control board M side, with reference to the stop symbols/variation modes related to the main game symbols) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of variation in the design. (Details on its display size and operation content will be described later) (For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol is a so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later). '', etc., if the symbol is a loss, the number is 1, 3, 5, etc.) and the variation pattern {for example, the variation pattern related to the main game pattern fluctuates in a short period of time. In the case of non-reach, and in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.) is determined and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, the reach performance related information The information is temporarily stored in the information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in this embodiment, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and there is one valid line (a line in which the same number symbols are valid). If the same number symbols are aligned on the active line, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). In addition, only the numerical symbols can stop in the left, middle, and right columns (the "special symbols" do not stop like the first decorative pattern), and are configured so that they do not temporarily stop during symbol fluctuations. . In this way, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to independently determine the display content for notifying the validity of the main game pattern. The basic property of both decorative symbols is that they can independently notify the result of winning or failing regarding the main game symbol.

Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the validity result of the main game symbol and the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the decorative pattern presentation content by referring to the decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (for example, decorative pattern presentation table 1 to decorative pattern presentation table 2) in the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and starts the next process (the process of step 2300). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 2202, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300).

In the above explanation, the main game symbols whose display is controlled on the main control board M side are those on the first main game side (first main game symbols) or those on the second main game side ( Although there is no mention of whether it is a second main game symbol), basically, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol. Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be determined in correspondence with the second main game pattern, that is, the variable display of the first main game pattern and the variable display of the second main game pattern. Regardless of which variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be made executable in conjunction with the variable display. However, this does not apply in the time reduction gaming state (a state accompanied by the so-called electric support state). For example, in the time reduction gaming state, the first main game symbol fluctuates and the second main game symbol fluctuates. For example, regardless of which display is performed, only one of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the display.

Here, FIGS. 21 and 22 (decorative pattern presentation table 1, decorative pattern presentation table 2) are decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 1, especially a part when the result is a loss, This is an example of the decorative pattern production table 2, especially a part when the result is a jackpot. In addition, in the figures, the first decorative pattern may be simply described as the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern may be described as the second decorative pattern (the same applies hereinafter). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the result of winning or failing the main game symbol (shown in the leftmost column; in this example, "loss" or "jackpot") and the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative pattern) (illustrated in the second row on the left; in this example, only in the case of "pseudo consecutive failure (total production time 30 seconds)" and "super reach (total production time 60 seconds)" Based on the obtained random number value (a random number value obtained on the sub-main board SM side, a part of which is shown in the third column on the left), the decorative pattern presentation content (in the fourth column on the left) In this example, it is configured to be able to determine "Main appearance A-1 (Lose) Pseudo series 1", "Main appearance B-1 (Jackpot) No pseudo series", etc. When the decorative pattern performance content is determined, the "display update timing" and "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, if the decorative pattern presentation content = "A-1 (losing) pseudo-run 1", the "display update timing" = "at the start of variation (0 seconds later)" and the "display update content" = "decoration". Figure fluctuation start (all rows of first and second decorative symbols)" is determined, and "display update timing" = "12 seconds after fluctuation start", "display update content" = "1st drawing temporary stop display (left column), 2nd illustration not displayed. Then, as described later, the "display update content" that has reached the "display update timing" is changed to the first decorative pattern according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern). This will be executed sequentially for each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (losing) pseudo-row 1" is determined, after all columns of the first decorative symbol and all columns of the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, "display update timing" = "variation start". 12 seconds later, if the display is controlled so that all rows of the first decorative pattern are hidden (even the state of fluctuating display is not displayed), the second decorative pattern is , the display is controlled so that all columns are displayed in a variable manner (the state of the variable display becomes visible), and when the "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation" is reached, the first decorative pattern is Regarding the second decorative pattern, the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display is controlled so that the entire column is hidden (even the state of fluctuating display is not displayed). . In this way, the basic operation in this example is that when the first decorative pattern is visible (easily visible) to the player, the second decorative pattern is visible to the player. If the first decorative pattern is invisible (hard to see) to the player, and the second decorative pattern is invisible (hard to see) to the player, then the second decorative pattern is invisible (hard to see) to the player. In other words, in order to ensure that the player is informed that the symbols are changing (easily visible), the second decorative symbols are displayed in a complementary manner. In addition, the production pattern (a series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (Loss) Pseudo-Run 1" is different from the production pattern defined by the name of other decorative design production contents (that is, the display contents are different). ) I would like to add that it is a thing. In addition, the range of random numbers is "0 to 1023" for all variation modes, and this figure extracts a part of the random number range for the drawing variation mode (therefore, it corresponds to a certain drawing variation mode). The random number range of the obtained random number value corresponding to the drawing variation mode that is different from the certain drawing variation mode are different, but both range from "0 to 1023". range).

Here, the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute so-called pseudo-continuous variation, and specifically, the decorative pattern presentation contents in this example are "A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1", "A-2 (Loss) Pseudo-Run 2" and "B-2 (Jackpot) Pseudo-Run 2." For example, in the decorative pattern production content "A-2 (losing) pseudo-run 2", "display update timing" = "variation start time (0 seconds later)" and "display update content" = "design variation start (after 0 seconds)". 1 decorative pattern and all rows of the 2nd decorative pattern)" is executed, "Display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation", "13 seconds after the start of variation", "14 seconds after the start of variation" is executed. "Display update content" = "1st design temporary stop display (left column)" (left column of the 1st decorative pattern is a stop display), "1st design temporary stop display (right column)" (1st decorative pattern temporary stop display (right column)) The right column is a stop display), and the "first drawing special symbol temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbols is a stop display at the above-mentioned "special symbol") are sequentially executed. Then, when "display update timing" = "15 seconds after start of variation", "display update content" = "start of 1st design variation (all columns)" (all columns of only the 1st decorative pattern are displayed variable again) After execution, "Display update timing" = "26 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "28 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "Display update content" = "1st drawing temporary stop display ( (left column) (the left column of the 1st decorative pattern is a stop display), ``1st drawing temporary stop display (right column)'' (the right column of the 1st decorative pattern is a stop display), ``1st drawing special design By sequentially executing "temporary stop display" (stop display when the middle row of the first decorative symbol is the above-mentioned "special symbol"), the player can enjoy the For one decorative pattern, it appears as if the pattern changes occur multiple times. ).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is not displayed (a state in which the state of static display or fluctuating display is not displayed), and when the middle row of the first decorative pattern is the above-mentioned "special pattern", When the second decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and in other cases, the second decorative pattern is hidden. That is, if the player can visually recognize the first decorative pattern or can determine which pattern is stopped as the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is hidden (the first decorative pattern is If the player is unable to visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or it is impossible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbols" are stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) are indistinguishable, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, allowing the player to always select one of the numbers. The decorative pattern (either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is configured so that the "special pattern" does not temporarily stop, but this makes it difficult to grasp the progress of the game with respect to the first decorative pattern, while increasing the interest of the performance. Since the main purpose is to increase the game progress, the second decorative pattern, which is provided to ensure that the progress of the game can be easily understood, is a "special symbol" (i.e., if it is displayed on the active line, it will be a jackpot. This is because the system is configured not to display symbols that may make it difficult to understand the progress of the game, such as symbols that foretell that a jackpot may occur in the future, even though they do not mean anything. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), a state in which the display is fluctuated at high speed (a fluctuating state in which an afterimage is visible) may be included, and the above-mentioned In the case of a "display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the display is displayed in a slowly fluctuating manner (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, it is displayed slowly from the top to the bottom). and (temporarily) a fluctuating state toward the scheduled stop position).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is configured not to temporarily stop (and the "special pattern" does not stop) during the movement, but the second decorative pattern is not limited to this. As with the first decorative pattern, it may be configured so that it can be temporarily stopped during the fluctuation (or a pseudo fluctuation may occur). That is, in the case of such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative pattern and all the rows of the second decorative pattern have substantially the same operation contents of the fluctuating display and the stop display (including temporary stop), and are not displayed in a stopped state. This means that the types of symbols used will be different.

Further, regarding the second decorative symbols, it is not necessary to display them all the time during the variable display of the main game symbols, and the display conditions and display mode of the second decorative symbols may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) while a specific effect is occurring (instead of making the first decorative pattern invisible, a movie video is played using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect) (2) At the time of a specific ready-to-reach performance (2) displaying a second decorative pattern in a state in which a movable accessory for a game advances to a state where it covers the display area on the performance display device SG) 1.Instead of making the decorative symbols invisible, it is possible to forcibly pause the display content of the performance that was being performed on the performance display device SG during the execution of a reach effect where the expectation of jackpot increases significantly. The second decorative pattern is displayed only when executing a so-called freeze reach effect), and is hidden during other reach effects (especially when executing a reach effect with low expectation of jackpot). 3) The appearance position of the second decorative pattern on the performance display device SG is varied according to the performance pattern (for example, the above-mentioned movable accessory for the performance advances to a state where it covers the display area on the performance display device SG) (4) The first decorative pattern can be moved, reduced, or enlarged. On the other hand, the second decorative pattern cannot be moved, reduced, or enlarged, or the probability of movement, reduction, or enlargement, movement width, reduction rate, enlargement rate, etc. are different from the first decorative pattern. It may be lower than, etc.

In addition, during a specific reach effect or in a situation where the first decorative symbol forms a reach state (for example, a situation where the left column and right column are temporarily stopped with the same symbol), the second decorative symbol changes. It may be configured as shown.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2302, the process moves to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2310, in step 2312 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2314, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 controls the first decoration based on the first illustration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the symbol fluctuation start timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the first decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ) and moves to step 2330.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the variation mode temporarily stored in the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on this, it is determined whether the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether it is the timing to stop the above-mentioned "special symbol" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only on the middle symbol.) If Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 selects an angel zone flag (for notifying that the jackpot expectation is increased) in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. The flag that triggers the display of the background image is turned on and the process moves to step 2324. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2320, the process moves to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ) and moves to step 2330. In this embodiment, when the angel zone flag is turned on, the "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect, but the timing at which the angel zone flag is turned on is, for example, (1) During symbol fluctuations with relatively high expectations for jackpots (for example, symbol fluctuations that result in reach), (2) When symbol fluctuations related to suspension of expiry schedule are stopped prior to symbol fluctuations with high expectations for jackpots, etc. Also, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to turn on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) mentioned above, or in the case of (2) mentioned above. It may be stopped permanently.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the preview performance display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach performance display control means SM25) stores the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the variation mode temporarily stored in the ready-to-reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has arrived. If Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 2330. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2326, the process moves to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines that the first decorative pattern is normally displayed (as described above, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative pattern). (or if it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is hidden). If YES in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the second pattern display flag (with respect to the second decorative pattern) in the flag area of the installation display related information temporary storage device SM21b to a non-display state. The flag for switching whether the display state is set to OFF or the display state is set to ON is turned off, and the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2330, in step 2334, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 turns on the second pattern display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means Referring to SM11b, it is determined whether information indicating that the main game symbols will be stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (determined display command) for the first decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 ). Next, in step 2340, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2350). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2350).

In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM manages the timing related to the variable display of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. using the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1. However, the management method of the timing related to the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this. The timing, preview image/ready-to-reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and sent to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS processes them according to the received content. The display may be configured to be executed (displayed) at any given timing (the same applies to the second decorative pattern).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the first symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. . If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display execution command for the second decorative pattern (command for variable displaying the second decorative pattern) (sends the display command in step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process moves to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2354, in step 2358, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display deletion command for the second decorative pattern (command for hiding the second decorative pattern) (in step 2999). (It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process moves to step 2360.

Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means Referring to SM11b, it is determined whether information indicating that the main game symbols will be stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (determined display command) for the second decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 ). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and starts the next process (the process of step 2400). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the reservation display (the reservation regarding the first main game symbol and the reservation regarding the second main game symbol may be displayed at the same time) are provided in the effect display device. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in this embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the final display timing (the timing at which the main game symbol is stopped and displayed). Since the first decorative pattern is the main decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern has higher visibility than the second decorative pattern (the displayed area is assumed to be larger). Moreover, in this embodiment, the variation start timing and variation end timing (determined display timing) of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and also turns on the effect display device. A jackpot start display is performed on the SG (an appropriate display is performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process moves to step 2412. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2402, the process moves to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (the number of rounds and the number of prizes won are (It may be executed as necessary based on the type, etc.)

Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the effect related to the special game that is being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot that is currently being executed and the jackpot symbol that is being stopped. In the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the display command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side. A performance that the player cannot recognize is executed). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays a jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs an appropriate display based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2500). . Note that even in the case of No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 18. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the angel zone flag is on. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed when the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped) as the background effect, and in step 2506 to move to. Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the fluctuation (a part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition to the "angel zone" has ended. Determine whether If Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. . If Yes in step 2512, in step 2514, a stage transition lottery is executed to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/20) (the stage transition lottery will be executed at the start of each fluctuation) . Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a transition to a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, to loop each stage in the order of flatland stage → space stage → volcano stage → flatland stage). 25), the background effect is set, and the process moves to step 2520. Note that the process also moves to step 2520 in the case of No in step 2506, step 2512, or step 2516.

Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG) 2999) and moves on to the next process (the process of step 2999).

With the above configuration, in the Pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed (fluctuating display) in a state where the displayed state is not displayed or in a situation where it is difficult to see, the player can always see one of the decorative patterns. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is possible to visually recognize and accurately determine which symbols are stopped and whether or not jackpot symbols are stopped.

(Example 1 of modification from this embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the "special symbol" always stops as the temporary stop symbol in the middle row, and the "special symbol" always stops while the first decorative symbol is fluctuating. Although the second decorative pattern is configured to be hidden, the display control method of the decorative pattern is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 1 from this embodiment, and only the changes from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 27 and 28 (decorative pattern presentation table 3, decorative pattern presentation table 4) are decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 3, especially a part when the result is a loss, and This is an example of the decorative symbol production table 4 (particularly when the winning/failing result is a jackpot). First, changes from this embodiment will be described in detail regarding the first decorative pattern. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be displayed even during fluctuation. Also, for example, when executing a pseudo continuous fluctuation such as "A-6 (loss) pseudo series 2 (specific outcome)", the specific outcome other than the "special symbol" will stop at the temporary stop timing of the middle symbol. It is configured so that it can be done. Here, a specific roll is a roll that differs from a "special pattern" in that all rows (left row, middle row, right row) stop at numbers, but the stopping pattern follows certain rules. (for example, a number such as "345"), and is configured to notify the player that a pseudo continuous variation is being executed when the specific number is stopped. In addition, in modification example 1 from the present embodiment, when executing a pseudo continuous fluctuation, in the case of a loss, the specific number is more likely to stop than the "special symbol" at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific roll, that is, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific roll. The expectation of hitting the jackpot is higher when the game stops. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem in configuring the system so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the specific number stops than when the "special symbols" stop. In addition, when a pseudo fluctuation is executed in a pseudo continuous fluctuation, all the symbols will fluctuate again, that is, after the three symbols have temporarily stopped, the three symbols will fluctuate again, but in such a case, , If a "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row, and then the middle row changes again, the decorative symbol in the middle row at the time of the start of the re-change is no longer a "special symbol" {for example, "6★7" ” (★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of “667” (the middle symbol is preferably a symbol that is “±1” of the right symbol or the left symbol)} Alternatively, when the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row, three "667" symbols are temporarily stopped behind the "special symbol", and then the "special symbol" moves again. When erased, the first decorative pattern in the left column, the first decorative pattern in the middle row, and the first decorative pattern in the right column may be configured to change again. In such a case, by setting the display priority of the image of the "special symbol" in the middle row higher than the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the "special symbol" can be used in the form of the pseudo continuous fluctuation that displays the specific result. Since it is only necessary to display the first decorative pattern, it is possible to prevent the method for determining the first decorative pattern from becoming complicated.

Next, changes from this embodiment will be explained in detail regarding the second decorative pattern. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is always displayed while the main game symbol is changing. In addition, in the case of a reach, the second decorative pattern is also temporarily stopped at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed at the same time as the fixed display timing of the first decorative pattern. (The same pattern will be stopped and displayed as the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern). The variable display mode of the second decorative pattern is not limited to this, for example, the first decorative pattern is visible and the player can easily grasp the game progress by visually recognizing the first decorative pattern. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden, that is, the specific appearance is stopped during the fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern, during the temporary stop of the left and right columns, and at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row. If the middle row is in the middle row, the second decorative pattern is hidden, while if the "special symbol" is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (or temporarily displayed). (stop display). Further, the second decorative pattern may be all stopped and temporarily stopped in accordance with the stopping and temporary stopping of the first decorative pattern. Further, the second decorative pattern may be always displayed in a variable manner regardless of the fluctuation status of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern may also be fixed and stopped only when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment, by configuring the specific outcome to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, pseudo-continuous fluctuation can be achieved. At the time of execution, it is possible to provide multiple types of stopping modes at the time of temporary stopping, and by varying the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the stopping mode, the player can focus on which stopping mode is the one. This increases the interest of the game.

In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of a specific effect such as a reach effect, the first decorative pattern may be displayed in a variable manner. may be configured not to be displayed in a variable manner (hidden), or may be configured such that only a specific column (for example, the middle column) is not displayed.

In addition, in modification example 1 from the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a specific number (or "special symbol") can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, but the specific number (or "special symbol") ) may be displayed in the left column and right column.For example, (1) the left column and right column are the same number, and the middle column is the same number ±1 (for example, "4, 5, 4" or a "special symbol" is placed at the 5 position in the middle row), (2) in the same stopping manner as a losing number that is not a specific number. (3) Temporarily stop all rows at the same time, (4) Temporarily stop when the numbers in the left and/or right column are in the middle row. (5) If the decorative patterns in the left and right columns are numbers that are separated by 2 or more, the decorative patterns in the middle row are numbers that are separated by 2 or more from the left and/or right column. If you temporarily stop due to a loss, etc. may be used. In addition, the conditions for the appearance of a specific number may also be changed. For example, if the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left and right columns are the same, it will likely appear (or it will appear only if they are the same). etc., it may be configured to be different from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, when a “special symbol” (or specific outcome) appears after reach, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a “special symbol” (or specific outcome) appears when it is not reach, or After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {For example, "7★7" has a higher jackpot expectation than "7★8" (★ = special symbol), Alternatively, the configuration may be such that there is a high possibility of temporary stopping again. In addition, when the left column and right column are the same number as shown in (1), and the middle column is a number that is ±1 of the same number, or the middle column and right column are the numbers in the left column. When using numbers such as ±1 or ±2, that is, when using the numbers in the left column as a reference and the numbers in the middle and right columns being predetermined numbers, only the numbers to be displayed in the left column are determined by lottery, etc. The numbers displayed in the middle and right columns should be the same as the numbers determined by lottery to be displayed in the left column, or ±1 or ±2 to the numbers determined by lottery to be displayed in the left column. (In other words, the numbers to be displayed in the middle and right columns are not determined by lottery or the like, but the numbers corresponding to the numbers to be displayed in the left column are determined.). For example, if the left column is N (N is a number from 1 to 8, for example), the middle column is N+1, and the right column is N, the number to be displayed in the left column is determined by lottery from 1 to 8. . If the number in the left column is determined to be "4", the middle column will be 4+1 = "5", the right column will be the same "4" as the left column, and the specific result will be "4, 5, 4". Set. By configuring this way, you can set a specific outcome using a table that only sets the numbers in the left column, without using a table that sets multiple specific outcomes that are a combination of the left column, middle column, and right column. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine a specific number in the decorative pattern display content determination process of step 2200. The numbers in the left column are determined by lottery, and the numbers in the middle and right columns are determined based on the numbers in the left column. In the case of numbers in a column, the numbers in the left and right columns may be determined, and in the case of right columns, the numbers in the left and middle columns may be determined.

(Example 2 of modification from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment and the first modification from the present embodiment, the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative pattern during pseudo-continuous variation has been mentioned, but the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative pattern during pseudo-continuous variation other than the above configuration New gameplay can be created by configuring the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification Example 2 from this embodiment, and only the changes with respect to Modification Example 1 from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative pattern presentation table 5, decorative pattern presentation table 6) are a part of the decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 5, especially when the result is a loss, and , is an example of the decorative pattern production table 6 (particularly when the winning/failing result is a jackpot). First, the changes to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described in detail regarding the first decorative pattern. In modification example 2 from this embodiment, the first decorative pattern is displayed during fluctuation, and the "special symbol" that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in pseudo continuous fluctuation is "special symbol A" and " There are two types: "Special Design B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous variation (even after that timing), while the "special symbol B" is It is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the second temporary stop timing of the middle row in the fluctuation. Further, the specific number is configured such that it can be temporarily stopped from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (even after that timing). That is, at the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the "special symbol A" and two types of specific outcomes can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped. At the temporary stopping timing, the stopping mode is configured so that three types of specific outcomes, ``special symbol A'' and ``special symbol B'', can be temporarily stopped, and the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the second middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo-continuous variation than at the temporary stop timing. In this way, the temporary stop timing in the middle row of pseudo-continuous fluctuations may be configured such that the later the temporary stop timing is, the more types of stopping manners there are. It may be configured such that the number of times is reduced. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stopping modes increases as the temporary stopping timing approaches the latter half, the stopping mode with a high degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a jackpot is selected as the type of selection candidate every time a pseudo fluctuation is executed. It may be configured such that a new change is added, and by such a configuration, the player will pay attention to each pseudo change every time it is executed. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing approaches the latter half, each time a pseudo fluctuation is executed, a stop mode with a low expectation that the fluctuation will be a jackpot is selected as a selection candidate type. It may be configured so that it is deleted, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the pseudo fluctuation will be a jackpot every time the pseudo fluctuation is executed. Note that the second decorative pattern has the same configuration as Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second modification example from the present embodiment, the later the temporary stop timing is in the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the more the temporary stop can be made. By configuring the game so that the number of stopping modes is increased, the player pays attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stopping mode at the time of temporary stopping, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Example 3 of modification from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns are provided as the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed (stop display/fluctuating display is not displayed). Although the second decorative pattern is displayed (fluctuatingly displayed) in a situation where the second decorative pattern is hard to be seen) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative pattern, the configuration using the second decorative pattern is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 3 from this embodiment, and only the changes from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in modification example 3 of the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2232 (variation 3) to step 2236 (variation 3), step 2900 (variation 3), step 2246 (variation 3), and step 2248 (variation 3), that is, step 2204 After turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the current gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state. Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 2232 (Variation 3), in Step 2234 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to a variable probability display mode (during probability variable game state). The display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed is determined, and the process moves to step 2900 (variation 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2232 (Variation 3), in Step 2236 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to an indeterminate variable display mode ( The display mode of decorative symbols to be displayed during the non-probability variable gaming state is determined, and the process moves to step 2900 (variation 3). In this way, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the display manners of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to differ depending on whether or not the probability variation game state is in effect, and the first decorative pattern is When the display mode of the symbols changes (for example, when transitioning from a non-probability variable gaming state to a probability variable gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol also changes in accordance with the change. Note that the display modes of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not limited to a configuration in which they differ only depending on whether or not the probability fluctuation game state is in effect; It may be configured to differ depending on which production (production stage) it is, etc.

Next, in step 2900 (variation 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n executes a drawing stop symbol determining process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2246 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variation 3) in FIG. 31 in modification example 3 of the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the number of rounds to be executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum round number ( In this example, it is determined whether or not 16R). If Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the drawing display content determining means SM21n sets the stop symbols of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to three "white" symbols (for example, "777") and Decide on one of a set of three "black" symbols (for example, "444") (a set of three "white" symbols will be selected) and a set of three "black" symbols. is selected (the total distribution ratio is 1:1), and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to three "black" symbols (for example, "444"). One of these is determined, and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. In this way, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a set of three "white" symbols (for example, "777") is a special game that has the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example). In other words, if a set of three white symbols stops, it is almost certain (or certain) that the special game with the maximum number of rounds (in this example, 16R) will be executed. (It may be relatively more profitable for the player than a set of three "black" symbols).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, in step 2910, the design display content determining means SM1n determines the stop symbols of the first decorative symbols based on the information regarding the stop symbols of the main game symbols. Next, in step 2912, the drawing display content determining means SM21n changes the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern to a predetermined losing pattern (in this example, "345", and the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern is only one pattern). ), and the process moves to the next process {the process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. The number of types of stop symbols of the second decorative pattern may not be limited to one pattern, but it is desirable that the number of types of stop symbols is smaller than that of the first decorative pattern. In addition, the stop symbol when the second decorative pattern is a loss is a predetermined loss symbol (in this example, "345"), whereas the stop symbol when the first decorative symbol is a loss is selected from a plurality of candidates. (for example, randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), the frequency with which the predetermined losing symbol stops at the time of a loss is higher for the second decorative symbol than for the first decorative symbol ( (It may be configured such that a predetermined losing pattern does not stop as the stopping pattern of the first decorative pattern). In addition, for all losing symbols that can stop the second decorative symbol (for example, only one pattern of "375" is acceptable), if three of the same symbols are aligned, it is the highest prize for the player in any gaming state. It may be configured such that one or more profitable symbols (for example, "7" symbol) are always included (for example, "375" and "276" may stop).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram of the display mode of decorative patterns in the third modification from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are The display mode (in this example, display colors, display attributes such as color scheme, shape, size, etc.) can be different. Specifically, in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state, only the "7" symbol is displayed as "white" along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all symbols other than "7" are displayed as " On the other hand, in the probability variable game state, the "3" symbol and "7" are displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white" and all symbols other than the "3" symbol and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode can vary depending on the game state (the display mode may vary in probability). The conditions under which the display formats differ are not limited to whether or not the probability fluctuation game state is in effect, but may also be whether or not the time reduction game state is in effect, and may differ depending on which background performance (direction stage) is being executed. It may be configured so that it can be done. In addition, in modification example 3 from the present embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can change depending on whether or not it is in a probability variable gaming state is the "3" symbol, but the "3" symbol is the same as described above. It is included in the combination of predetermined losing symbols (in this example, "345") that will cause the second decorative symbol to stop in the event of a loss (it becomes the stopping symbol in the left column), and in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state. In the case of a loss, all the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol are displayed in "black", while in the probability fluctuation game state, the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol in the event of a loss are "white" from the left column. , "black", and "black" will be displayed. Note that this diagram shows the configuration after comparing the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability variable gaming state, but this figure shows the configuration after comparing the non-time reducing gaming state and the time reducing gaming state. (In this diagram, the non-probability variable gaming state may be the non-time reducing gaming state, and the probability varying gaming state may be the time reducing gaming state). The configuration may be based on a comparison between the state and the probability-variable gaming state (in this figure, the non-probability-variable gaming state is a non-time reduction gaming state and a non-probability variation gaming state, and the probability-variable gaming state is a time-saving gaming state). (It may also be a state and a probability fluctuating game state). It should be noted that this replacement of comparison fitting is applicable to all configurations such as any embodiment and modification of the present invention.

Next, FIGS. 34 and 35 (decorative pattern presentation table 7, decorative pattern presentation table 8) are the decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern presentation table 7, especially a part when the result is a loss, This is an example of the decorative pattern production table 8, especially a part when the result is a jackpot. The changes from this embodiment are that the decorative pattern type item is changed to display update type, and three items are provided: "first decorative pattern", "second decorative pattern", and "transparent liquid crystal". In modification example 3 from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is configured to be able to perform a transparent effect in which the display area SG10 is transparent, and during the period when the transparent effect is executed, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but the second decorative pattern remains displayed (see "33 seconds" in the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variation 3) and step 2327-2 (variation 3), that is, when the preview image or reach image display timing is reached in step 2326, step 2327- 1 (variation 3), the preview effect display control means SM24 displays a transparent effect (presentation) based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect in which the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. If Yes in Step 2327-1 (Variation 3), in Step 2327-2 (Variation 3), the preview effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process of Step 2999). and is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process moves to step 2328. Note that when the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG becomes transparent, and the state in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is being driven becomes visible, and the first decorative pattern The display will be erased (become non-display), and the second decorative pattern will continue to be displayed by the second decorative pattern display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). Further, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a reserved number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol of the effect display device SG (to the right when viewed from the player). With this configuration, the player can visually check the pending number even while the transparent effect is being executed.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in modification example 3 from this embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2410 (variation 3), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot display in step 2408, or when the special game flag is on, step 2410 ( In Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (step In the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 2412. In this way, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is displayed even during the execution of the special game, and the player can select which decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) It is possible to determine whether such a special game is being executed even while the special game is being executed.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram of the configuration of the effect display device in modification example 3 from this embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative pattern display device is provided on the back side (as seen from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( The light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, by outputting light from the light source, it is possible to display the effect in the display area SG10, but the effect is not displayed in the area adjacent to the second decorative pattern display device in the display area SG10. The display of the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area by the second decorative pattern display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is no longer displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG becomes visible. Note that even while the transparent effect is being executed, the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is being executed, so that it is visible to the player. With this configuration, even in a situation where a transparent effect is being performed, the player can recognize the fluctuation status of decorative symbols and the number of reservations by visually checking the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device. Become. In addition, the display of the pending number may differ depending on the gaming state (for example, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game pending number is displayed, and in the time reduction gaming state, the number of pending main games is displayed). displaying the second main game pending number), the first main game pending number and the second main game pending number may always be displayed, or the total of the first main game pending number and the second main game pending number It may be configured to display the number of pending items. Note that the configuration for displaying the effects in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the display area SG10 can be switched between a transparent state and a non-transparent state, for example, by changing the position of the light source. (for example, outputting light from diagonally behind the display area), or a light guide plate (a transparent plate-like member that scatters light emitted from a light emitting element that enters from the side in the vertical direction). The display area may be a display area that performs display through a light source (so-called edge-light type), a display area that is made of organic EL, or the like. In addition, as an example of a configuration using a light guide plate, when viewed from the player's side, from the front there is a "transparent liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)", a "light guide plate {placed close to the transparent liquid crystal (approximately 5 mm), A light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is arranged near the outer periphery of the light guide plate}", "Light source B that constantly outputs light to the lower left of the display area SG10", "Accessories", "Accessories" When performing a transparent effect (when you want to emphasize a role object and show it to the player), turn off the output of light source A (light source The output of light source A may be lowered than when the transparent effect is not executed), and the output of light source B and light source C is turned ON, and when the transparent effect is not executed (you do not want to show the accessory to the player, and When you want the player to see the effect in the display area SG10), turn on the output of light sources A and B, and turn off the output of light source C (the output of light source C is lower than when executing the transparent effect). may also be configured. In addition, the display of the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area is not limited to the configuration of this example, and for example, the second decorative pattern display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10). , The second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 using a mechanism similar to the mechanism in which effects are displayed by outputting light from a light source toward the display area SG10, that is, Since the second decorative pattern display device takes the place of the light source, the second decorative pattern display device can always output light even if the light source stops outputting light due to the execution of the transparent effect, so that the second decorative pattern The display in the reserved number display area may be configured to be visible at all times (the light guide plate is used to prevent transmission of the liquid crystal).

Next, FIG. 39 is an image diagram of transparent effect execution in modification example 3 from this embodiment. In this example, in the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state), the pseudo continuous variation will be executed twice (the variation of pseudo continuous 2), and one symbol variation will be executed. This example shows the case where First, a certain decorative pattern (a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern) starts to fluctuate, and then a special pattern is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stopping pattern. After that, a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) starts to fluctuate again, and then the special pattern is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stopping pattern. After that, the variation of a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes transparent due to the transparent effect being executed, and the back of the display area SG10 (game It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the accessory is being driven (as seen from the player). After that, the transparent effect ends (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), the accessory at the back of the display area SG10 (as seen from the player) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started again. Becomes visible (displayed). After that, in the case of a loss, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at the loss pattern {the second decorative pattern stops at a predetermined loss pattern ("345"), and the first decorative pattern stops at the loss pattern ("345") This is a combination of stopped symbols that may be different from the losing symbol ("787"). In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at the jackpot pattern {the jackpot pattern of the first decorative pattern and the jackpot pattern of the second decorative pattern are the same combination of stopping patterns. }. Thereafter, the special game is executed, and even during the execution of the special game, the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed as the same jackpot symbol as at the start of the special game. Note that even during the execution of the special game, a transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be set to a transparent state). By configuring the system so that the transparent effect can be executed immediately before execution, the player can increase his or her expectation of transitioning to the probability variable game state after the special game ends by visually recognizing the transparent effect. Furthermore, even if the transparent effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is maintained (visible), so it will not interfere with the progress of the game. It is configured like this. As an example of the display of decorative symbols during a special game, for example, during a special game, in order to inform the player which three decorative symbols have matched to become a jackpot, only one of the decorative symbols has been displayed. (For example, if "777" hits the jackpot, "7" will be displayed). In order to be able to recognize this, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area may be maintained even during the special game.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG becomes a transparent state and the accessory in the effect display device SG becomes transparent. Even if the first decorative pattern is hidden during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is executed, so that the player can display the second decorative pattern. By visually checking the performance display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the fluctuation status of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations, making the gaming machine more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the ball entering the first main game starting port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the ball entering the second main game starting port B10. In addition to making the odds different, the display attributes of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) can be made different depending on whether or not the game is in a probability variable gaming state, so that it is possible to suggest or inform the player that there is a high profit. By varying the number of types of symbols, the game ball is sent to the second main game starting port B10 rather than the non-probability fluctuating game state in which the game progresses by entering the game ball into the first main game starting port A10. The number of types of display attributes of jackpot symbols in which the transition to the probability variable gaming state after the special game is almost certain (or definite) in the probability variable gaming state in which the game progresses by entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suggest or inform the player whether or not the current gaming state is highly profitable for the player.

In addition, in modification example 3 from the present embodiment, regardless of whether the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol changes, the change corresponds to the current game state and performance display mode (background performance, etc.). Decorative symbols with display attributes are displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations in the first main game symbol and the decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuation in the second main game symbol have a common display (and display attribute). (The display attributes and display areas of the decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol.)

(Second embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided so that the result of pattern variation can be accurately recognized. It can also be applied to configurations that enable execution. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is to sub-subscribe variation mode random number delimiter information, which is information to be referred to when determining the content of the look-ahead effect. That is, after storing the first main game content determination random number in step 1308, in step 1322 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sets the flag of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Refer to the area and determine whether the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 determines whether the main game time shortening flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the reservation control means MJ30, based on the reservation information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), determines the stored win/fail result related to the reservation and the stopped symbol. Determine in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the reservation control means MJ30 uses the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting a command related to the newly generated suspension result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control section SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1330 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 pre-determines the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information and fluctuation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (random number for determining fluctuation mode). Regarding the mode random number delimiter information and the variable mode group, see the main game table 3 in FIGS. 41 and 42), and proceed to step 1332 (second). Also, in the case of No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process moves to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to new hold occurrence (a hold generation command for the first main game content determining random number, a command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub The command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to step 1312. In addition, when configured to send symbol information to the sub side as in the second embodiment, an effect suggesting a jackpot may be executed as an effect executed on the sub side. , it is desirable to have a configuration that can notify the player of the stopped symbols of the main game symbols that will result in a jackpot (the stopped symbols will be notified only when the stopped symbols of the main game symbols result in a jackpot).

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the main game content determining random number (the first main game content determining random number or the second main game content determining random number) is acquired (or when a hold occurs), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode It is configured to determine groups.

It should be noted that the main game content determining random number information, win/fail random number delimiter information, variation mode random number delimiter information, and variation mode group information may be configured to be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when a hold occurs. The information to be sent to is not limited to this, but includes information related to the main game symbols to be stopped, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbols that will be a jackpot (number of rounds of special games related to the main game symbols scheduled to be stopped, etc.) ), the number of reservations immediately after winning a reservation (the number of reservations on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side only, or the number of reservations on both the first main game side and the second main game side) [The win/fail random number delimiter information refers to the respective gaming states on the first main game side (second main game side) and random numbers (or random number ranges). It is a piece of random number delimited information that is grouped by linking and winning lottery results. Even if the game is in a non-probability fluctuating gaming state, it is a win, and if it is a probability fluctuating gaming state, it is a win, but if it is a non-probability fluctuating gaming state, it is a loss.

Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and Determine whether the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the reservation control means MJ30, based on the reservation information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), determines the stored win/fail result related to the reservation and the stopped symbol. Determine in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the reservation control means MJ30 uses a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting a command related to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control section SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1342 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 pre-determines the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information and fluctuation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (random number for determining fluctuation mode). Regarding the mode random number delimiter information and the variable mode group, see the main game table 3 in FIGS. 32 and 33), and proceed to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to new hold occurrence (a hold generation command for the second main game content determining random number, a command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub The command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1334 (second), in step 1336 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 determines that the main game time shortening flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1336 (second), the process moves to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1336 (second), the process moves to step 1338 (second).

Note that in steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determining random number and the second main game content determining random number are stored, but the main game content determining random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. When storing the ``main game content determining random number'', secure a dedicated storage area and store only the information related to the ``main game content determining random number'' in the byte that stores the information related to the ``main game content determining random number'' (various timers It is preferable to configure the system so that other information such as values is not stored (when operating other data stored in the same byte, the information related to the main game content determining random number may be rewritten due to noise etc.). (to prevent it from being put away). In addition, regarding the winning lottery random number, changes in the gaming state (changes in the gaming state related to the pending that have already been recorded) between the time the winning lottery random number is acquired and the winning lottery based on the winning lottery random number are executed. In addition to changes, there is a possibility that the gaming state may change due to a new hold, so it is impossible to predict the gaming state at the time of the winning/losing drawing related to the random number. The lottery random number is stored until it is executed. In addition, in the second embodiment, a command to the sub-main control unit SM regarding reservation information can be sent only when a reservation occurs regarding the first main game in the non-time reduction gaming state, while in the time reduction gaming state In the above, the transmission was configured so that it could be sent only when a hold related to the second main game occurred, but regardless of the game state, whether it is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game. First, the command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether or not to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command related to the success/failure result information sent to the sub-main control unit SM is "D000H: Miss, D001H: Miss if low accuracy, win if high accuracy, D002H: Win with both low accuracy and high accuracy." Yes, a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information to be sent to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R probability variation win, D101H: 16R non-probability variation win, D102H: 2R probability variation win", and the command is sent to the sub-main control unit SM. A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information to be transmitted is "D200H: delimiter 1, D201H: delimiter 2, D202H: delimiter 3".

Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. This is an example. The difference from this embodiment is that variation mode groups and variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. That is, in the second embodiment, for a certain random number value (or random number range), variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. It is configured to determine random number delimiter information, and the number of variation mode groups (number of random numbers separated), variation time, and random number range of variation mode groups may differ depending on the gaming state and winning/failure lottery results (e.g. , the range of random numbers can be different even in the same group 1), and by transmitting the variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation mode groups according to these gaming states can be changed to the sub side. It is structured so that it can be derived by In other words, if the gaming state changes between the time the hold occurs and the time the hold expires, the variation mode group scheduled at the time the hold occurs and the variation mode group executed when the hold expires may be different. (For example, when the hold occurred, the variable mode group was scheduled to be Group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state, but when the hold expired, the time-shortened gaming state entered, so the actual variable mode group became Group 2.) However, regarding variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned across all gaming states, at the time the sub-side receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (the subsequent gaming state It becomes possible to normally execute a so-called pending look-ahead effect (without considering transitions). In addition, the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information in FIGS. 32 and 33 includes whether the fluctuation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, whether the lottery result is a win or a loss, and whether the lottery result is a win or a loss. Although it has been configured to form different fluctuation mode random number delimiter information depending on whether the state is a time-reducing gaming state or a non-time-reducing gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether the fluctuation is on the first main game side or not. One variation mode random number delimiter including whether it is a variation on the second main game side, whether the lottery result is a win or a loss, and whether the gaming state is a time-reducing gaming state or a non-time-reducing gaming state. It may be configured to form information. In addition, in order to cause the second main game to be suspended during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbol related to the loss in the time reduction gaming state is The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured such that short-time variation modes are not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, all variation times are 5 seconds or more). Note that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the number of reservations is the first main game reservation. This is the number of games pending, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2003 (second), that is, after executing the initial processing in step 2002, in step 2003 (second), the sub-main control unit SM Based on the information received from the control board M side), the pending number (for example, the drawing pending counter value) is restored. Please note that information related to the current performance and pre-reading performance will not be restored (also, information related to pending content will not be resent from the main side), and the "Preparing" screen will be displayed until the start of the next change. . With this configuration, if a power outage occurs when the background effect is "Angel Zone Background", which will be described later, the information stored on the sub side will be lost, so the power outage will be After the return, there is no information that the trigger is on hold, and the background effect will be changed from the "angel zone background" to another background effect (background effect such as a flat stage, etc., which will be described later). As a result, if a discrepancy occurs between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to a power outage (for example, due to a power outage or noise when the power is restored), Also, it is possible to avoid a situation where the main side is fluctuating with low expectations while the sub side executes a zone performance with high expectations. Note that the processing after the power outage is restored is not limited to this, and even after the power outage is restored, the information that the trigger is on hold that was stored immediately before the power outage is restored, and the " It may also be configured to maintain the "angel zone background". In such a configuration, for example, an evacuation area is provided on the sub side that can maintain information even during a power outage, and when a power outage occurs, information related to the performance is backed up to the evacuation area, and it is possible to recover from a power outage. The configuration can be configured to restore the information backed up at the time of the backup. In addition, it is also possible to configure the system to receive information regarding the contents of the hold from the main side again when the power is restored, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, and when a hold occurs (even regarding holds other than the newly generated hold). Good {Although not particularly shown in this example, the main side is configured so that only information related to the number of pending requests is sent (information related to the content of the pending requests is not sent) upon recovery from a power outage. . Therefore, the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power outage does not exist after the power outage is restored, so it becomes impossible to perform pre-reading effects for the hold (in addition, when the power is restored, the hold information cannot be executed from the main side). (The system may be configured to receive information related to the hold, and may be configured to execute a prefetch effect for the hold.) In addition, if a power outage occurs while the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) are changing, if the main side does not have a function to maintain the information at the time of the power outage, the main side will update the changes. A darkened screen (for example, a screen displaying "Preparing", etc.) will be displayed until the end command is received. Note that in the second embodiment, switching the background effect to display the "angel zone background" as the background effect may be referred to as transitioning to the "angel zone." Note that recovery from a power interruption may be referred to as power recovery, recovery from a power interruption, or the like.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment are step 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second), and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104 After adding 1 to the drawing holding counter, in step 2120 (second), the drawing holding information display control means SM22 displays the new holding validity result and stopped symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side. The command related to this is temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays hold information (particularly, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , etc.) are temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. In addition, if the information regarding the win/fail result, stop symbol, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information is not transmitted from the main side, in step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second), The information will not be temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2124 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether the new reservation is a reservation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and in step 2126 (second). to move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and executes step 2126 (second). Move on to 2).

Next, in step 2126 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new hold has information indicating that it is a trigger hold. (Information indicating that the trigger is pending is added at step 2576 or step 2622). If Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2650 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a prefetch pending content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2118. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2126 (second), the process also moves to step 2118.

On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the drawing reservation counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information related to the symbol change (in particular, the result of winning or not, the stopped symbol information, (variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information) are deleted from the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining pending information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 44. This process will be explained in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former pre-reading lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and inserts the second main game pending (first main game) into the pending lottery. It is determined whether or not there is any hold-up that would be cleared with priority over the gaming side. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a hold in the hold that has information indicating that it is a trigger hold. Determine whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in a winning lottery (first main game winning lottery, second main game winning lottery). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is no reservation that will be a jackpot among the reservations before the new reservation. Determine whether If YES in step 2560, the process moves to step 2562.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2562, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new reservation is a reservation that becomes a jackpot. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a win-win look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3), The process moves to step 2574. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new reservation variation mode group is group 3 or not. Determine whether In this way, in the second embodiment, when it is determined whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed, the fluctuation mode group is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed. In addition, when determining whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed, it may be configured to take into account the variation mode random number delimiter information to determine whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a win-win look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10), The process moves to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process also moves to step 2574.

Next, in step 2574, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the prize-winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k sets a "trigger holding" to the new holding that has won the winning pre-reading lottery, which is stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552 (when the second main game pending exists in the pending), in step 2578, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information that it is a "trigger hold" from the stored information on the hold (if there is no hold that has the information that it is a trigger hold, do not execute this process and proceed to the next step). ), and then the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. Note that also in the case of No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. In addition, in the case where there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence), the processing in step 2578 is performed on the newly generated second This configuration is to avoid a situation in which the pre-read performance over a plurality of variations is not executed normally because the suspension on the main game side is used up first, so the scheduled variation order is not followed. In addition, as a prohibited condition for pre-read lottery, the condition that there is no reservation of a specific fluctuation mode group (or reservation of specific fluctuation mode random number delimiter information) in the reservations before the new reservation is set as a prohibited condition. Good too.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which is related to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. This process will be explained in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former pre-read lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the suspended pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a hold having information indicating that it is a trigger hold within the hold. Determine whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is no reservation that will be a jackpot among the reservations before the new reservation. Determine whether If YES in step 2606, the process moves to step 2608.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2608, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a hold that becomes a jackpot. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not to execute the hold look-ahead performance with a predetermined probability (lower probability than the winning rate of the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning the first main game for the jackpot hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, a pre-read lottery is executed to win a prize (1/5), and the process moves to step 2620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new reservation variation mode group is group C or not. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not to execute the hold look-ahead performance with a predetermined probability (lower probability than the winning rate of the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning the first main game for the losing hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, a pre-read lottery is executed to win a prize (1/15), and the process moves to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process also moves to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k sets a "trigger holding" to the new holding that has won the winning pre-reading lottery, which is stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. Note that even in the case of No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process moves to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}.

In this way, in the second embodiment, in both cases where a new hold is a jackpot or a loss, the pre-read lottery for the hold on the first main game side is more effective than the pre-read lottery for the hold on the second main game side. It is easier to win in the lottery (pre-read lottery winning rate when the 1st main game reservation is a reservation that will result in a jackpot = 1/3 > Pre-read lottery when the 2nd main game reservation is a reservation that will result in a jackpot) Winning rate = 1/5, look-ahead lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a hold that will result in a loss = 1/10 > Look-ahead lottery win rate when the second main game hold is a hold that will result in a jackpot = 1 /15). With this configuration, even in terms of the appearance rate of "special symbols" as a look-ahead effect, "special symbols" related to the first main game side appear more often than "special symbols" related to the second main game side. It's getting easier.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2652, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether the trigger reservation is a reservation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of trigger pending with reference to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of jackpot), and performs the next process (step 2118). processing). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (in case of failure), and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2118).

Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a pending display mode determination table (for jackpot) and a pending display mode determining table (for loss). In the second embodiment, the types of display modes that can be selected when determining the display mode of the trigger hold that can change when executing the hold change effect by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of jackpot) are rainbow colors, There are four display modes: red, green, and blue, and there are three types of display modes that can be selected when referring to the pending display mode determination table (in case of failure): red, green, and blue. A lottery will be drawn using a random number exclusively used when determining the mode. In addition, when referring to the pending display mode determination table (when winning a jackpot), red is the most likely to be selected, while when referring to the pending display mode determining table (when losing), blue is the most likely to be selected, and the pending change effect The expectation of jackpot for each pending display mode (the expectation of hitting a jackpot due to the symbol change related to the pending) is that rainbow colors are selected only when there is a jackpot, and for colors other than rainbow colors, the expectation level is The order is red, green, and blue from highest to lowest. Note that the display modes that can be changed are merely examples, and there is no problem even if the types are increased or decreased or the colors that can be changed are changed. In addition, in this example, the display color of the pending item is configured to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. ), it may be configured to suggest the gaming state after the execution of the special game. In such a configuration, in particular, during a probability-variable gaming state, the display color of the pending state indicates the degree of expectation of transitioning to the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game in the event that a jackpot is achieved during the pending state. (For example, if the pending display color is red, the probability variation expectation is high; if it is blue, the probability variation expectation is small, etc.) By configuring this, it is possible to determine whether the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player will continue or end. It is possible to carry out effective performances that stir up excitement.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the hold change performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level can vary depending on the display mode selected from a plurality of types of hold display modes. Further, it may be configured such that the holding change effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery until the end of the variation of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). With this configuration, for example, in the case where the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, if the display mode of the change in the hold change effect in the first hold change effect is blue, the second hold change effect is The display mode of the hold that changes with the hold change performance is set to green or red, that is, the display mode of the hold that changes with the hold change performance is changed (ranked up) to the one with a high expectation of jackpot every time the hold change performance is executed. It is desirable to configure the system so that the player's expectations are not spoiled. Furthermore, the effect related to the hold display change is not limited to this, and as a result, it may be possible to provide a form of effect that does not involve the hold display change. For example, the hold trembles when the change starts (or when the hold expires). There may be a presentation mode in which the effect occurs and the pending display does not change as it is (so-called false pattern), and a presentation mode in which the pending display change is performed thereafter.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is in step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), the purpose of which is to stop the first decorative pattern (including the temporary stop), especially the above-mentioned " The purpose of this invention is to change the factors for determining a special symbol (that is, a symbol that does not mean a jackpot but foretells that a jackpot may occur in the future). That is, after turning on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2206 (second), the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the ready-to-reach effect display content determining means SM25n) refers to the symbol information (fluctuation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, and determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. {For example, if the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, non-reach, and if it is a long-term variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b and the ready-to-reach performance related information temporary storage means SM25b), and the process moves to step 2208.

Further, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative pattern presentation and setting the display update timing and the display update contents, in step 2250 (second), the drawing display contents determining means SM21n determines the preview presentation and decoration, which will be described later. A figure stop symbol determination process is executed and the process moves to step 2218. That is, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop) will be determined in the advance notice production/drawing stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the notice production/drawing stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. 48. First, in step 2252, the preview effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the preview performance display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2260, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the content of the preview performance from the "special preview performance candidates". Here, the "special preview performance candidate" is a preview performance candidate that is referred to when determining the preview performance when the background performance is the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopping symbol (temporary stopping symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopping symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable to configure so that the above-mentioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. In the case of "background" (i.e., a state where the existence of a hold with a high expectation of a jackpot has already been announced), the above-mentioned "special symbol" (i.e., although it does not mean a jackpot, it indicates that a jackpot may occur after that). This is because if the symbol foretelling the game) is stopped and displayed, similar information will be notified twice, which may result in an incomprehensible performance for the player.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2256, the preview effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether trigger reservation exists in the reservation. In the case of Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the preview performance display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the angel zone entry flag is off. If YES in step 2258, the process moves to step 2264. On the other hand, if No in step 2258, the process moves to step 2260.

Next, in step 2264, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the content of the preview performance from the "normal preview performance candidates". Here, the "normal preview performance candidate" is a preview performance candidate that is referred to when determining the preview performance when the background performance is other than the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2266, the preview performance display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2268, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines the stop pattern in the middle row of the first decorative pattern to be a "special pattern", and based on the information regarding the stop pattern of the main game pattern, The temporarily stopped symbols for the left column and the right column are determined (different symbols from the left column and the right column will be temporarily stopped), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2218).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in step 2270, the preview effect display control means SM24 determines whether the variation mode group of the variation in question is group 3. Changes related to the suspension of Group 3 who were not eligible for the Angel Zone Transition Lottery, which will be described later, and who did not win the Pre-Read Lottery (pre-read lottery at the time of winning) (the trigger was not put on hold), will be included in the Angel Zone Transition Lottery, which will be described later. will be subject to a lottery. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the preview effect display control means SM24 determines that the fluctuation is a pseudo continuous fluctuation (a fluctuation in which the pseudo fluctuation is executed at least once, and in this example, it is exemplified in FIGS. 21 and 22. A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) is a variation to be executed. If Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the preview effect display control means SM24 changes the background effect to the angel zone background during the angel zone transition lottery (changes the background effect to the angel zone background during the change), which is a winning lottery with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10). (Lottery of whether or not) is executed. Next, in step 2276, the preview effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2276, in step 2278, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the preview performance content from "normal preview performance candidates → special preview performance candidates after the special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, in FIG. 21 In the case of A-1 and A-2, the preview performance content is determined from the "normal preview performance candidates" for up to 14 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, and after 14 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing. , the content of the preview performance is determined from the "special preview performance candidates"). Next, in step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 converts the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the main game symbol for the first time (the first time in the pseudo continuous fluctuation) into a "special symbol" (the background effect is changed to an angel zone). Based on the information regarding the stop symbols of the main game symbol, the temporary stop symbols in the left and right rows of the first decorative symbol are set to be the same symbol (same as in the case of reach). (stopping mode)) and moves to the next process (the process of step 2218). It should be noted that the temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo variation in a pseudo continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2270, step 2272, or step 2276, in step 2282, the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the preview performance content from the "normal preview performance candidates". Next, in step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopping symbol (temporary stopping symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopping symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ).

In the second embodiment, in step 2274, an angel zone transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the transition to the fluctuating angel zone is possible (the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle of fluctuation is set as a "special symbol", and the special symbol is Although it is configured to determine whether or not to move to the angel zone using the temporary stop as an opportunity, it is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo consecutive pattern (the first middle row temporary stop pattern) and the preview effect. It may be configured such that a plurality of candidates are provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, a combination of a pseudo continuous symbol and a preview performance is determined from among the combination candidates. Specifically, the combination candidates include "Pseudo consecutive pattern A, Preview effect 1", "Pseudo continuous pattern A, Preview effect 2", "Pseudo continuous pattern A, Preview effect 3", "Pseudo continuous pattern A, Preview effect". Six possible combinations are provided: ``Production 4'', ``Special symbol, Preview effect 1'', and ``Special pattern, Preview effect 2'', and a combination of a pseudo-series pattern and a preview effect is determined by lottery from among the candidates. When a combination of a pseudo-continuous symbol and a preview performance in which the symbol is a "special symbol" is selected, the symbol may be configured to shift to the angel zone during the fluctuation. The method for determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the preview performance is not limited to the pseudo-continuous variation, and may be used for other variation modes as well. Further, the combination is not limited to only the pseudo-sequential symbols and the preview effects, but may also include background effects, sound modes, and the like.

In addition, as a method for determining the preview effects, we first decided on the basic preview effects of the preview effects (e.g., a preview effect that can be executed regardless of the background effect being executed, a effect that is executed in the first half of a change, etc.). After that, based on the determined basic preview performance, a performance that is not a preview performance such as a background performance is determined, the determined performance (preview performance, background performance, etc.) is executed, and then, It may be configured to determine undetermined performances among the preview performances based on the basic preview performances and the determined performances that are not preview performances such as background performances (this determination method is repeated multiple times). , it may be configured to determine all of the preview performances to be executed in accordance with the variation). With this configuration, it is possible to determine the preview effects to be executed in the relevant variation at multiple timings, and the effects that occur when all the preview effects to be executed in the variation in question are determined at one timing. This makes it possible to reduce performance problems and the like. In this example, (1) "Determined stop": Determined stop is executed after a temporary stop, and if the determined and stopped symbol combination is a jackpot (three of the same symbol), the game will move to a special game. , If it is a loss (not a set of three of the same symbol), it will not move to the special game. (2) "Temporary stop": A temporary stop is executed before a confirmed stop (for example, due to swing fluctuation), and one time Pseudo fluctuations can be executed by temporarily stopping in the middle of a symbol fluctuation and then changing again. (3) If a "special symbol" is displayed when performing a look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" will be treated as a fixed stop. It is configured so that it can be displayed not only as a temporary stop before a confirmed stop. In addition, in this example, the fixed stop and final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both fixed stop and temporary stop, but the stop symbol in the variation of the main game symbol is the fixed stop symbol. The stop symbol in the variation of decorative symbols is used for both the temporary stop symbol and the fixed stop symbol (if it is stated that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is "777", etc., the stop symbol is = It is a confirmed stop symbol).

Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image diagram showing an example of a preview effect/drawing stop pattern display. As shown in the upper part of the same image, in this example, when transitioning to the angel zone in this variation, under the situation where a normal background effect (an example of a background effect that is not an angel zone background effect) is being executed as a background effect, The "special symbol" is stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. Further, with the temporary stop of the "special symbol" as a trigger, an angel zone background performance is executed as a background performance, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In addition, in this example, the case of a jackpot is illustrated, but the background effect is configured to switch in the same way in the case of a loss. Decorative patterns may be random (different patterns), but may not be (same pattern) (="special pattern" may temporarily stop after reach)}.

In addition, as shown in the middle part of the same image, in this example, when other pseudo-continuous fluctuations that do not involve transition to the angel zone are performed (if the angel zone transition lottery is not won), the background effect is the normal background effect. is being executed, "pseudo continuous pattern A" is used as the first middle row temporary stop symbol (a temporary stop symbol that notifies the player that a pseudo continuous variation is being executed, which is different from the "special symbol") ) will temporarily stop. Next, even after the "pseudo continuous pattern A" is temporarily stopped, the normal background effect is executed, and then the final stop pattern is stopped.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same image, in this example, in a situation where a normal background effect is being performed as a background effect, if a winning lottery is won while the decorative pattern is changing, it will stop when the change stops. As a pattern, the losing pattern (uneven pattern) stops. After that, the next variation is started, and the "special symbol" stops as the stop symbol of the variation (that is, the variation is a variation before entering the look-ahead angel zone). Next, when the "special symbol" stops, an angel zone background effect is executed as a background effect from the next variation (that is, the next variation is the first variation in the look-ahead zone). In addition, in this example, if a special symbol is displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) in a symbol change related to the pending expiration schedule before the trigger hold, the temporary stop will not be made except for the confirmed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used when changing again after temporarily stopping as a stop symbol of pseudo fluctuation). In other words, in a symbol variation related to a pending expiration schedule before the trigger pending, the symbol variation related to the trigger pending starts from "the timing when the special symbol temporarily stops → the pseudo variation is executed, and the symbol variation becomes a loss". It cannot be performed until the angel zone background is displayed. In this way, in the second embodiment, by configuring the angel zone background effect to be executed when the "special symbol" stops (or temporarily stops), the player can stop the "special symbol". (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize that the transition to the angel zone has occurred. This allows the user to have a sense of anticipation for the stoppage (or temporary stoppage) of the symbol.

In addition, as shown in the diagram, when a "special symbol" stops as a temporary stop symbol during pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the same numbers in the left column and right column stop (temporary stop). On the other hand, when a "special symbol" is stopped as the final stop symbol of the next change after winning the pre-read lottery, different numbers (random numbers) are configured to stop in the left column and right column. There is.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, in step 2504, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect, in step 2506 (second), the background effect display control means The SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and stores the fluctuation (part of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition to the "angel zone" (or the pending fluctuation). Such fluctuations) {The fluctuations that triggered the transition of the "Angel Zone" (or the fluctuations related to the hold) are the fluctuations related to the trigger hold, or the fluctuations that caused the transition to the angel zone} judge. If Yes in step 2506 (second), the process moves to step 2508, and if No, the process moves to step 2520.

By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern as decorative patterns, and is configured to be able to execute a so-called pending look-ahead effect. In addition, when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, a background change effect indicating that the expectation level for transition to the special game is increased is executed. Then, regarding the hold that is extinguished before the hold that triggers the hold look-ahead effect (trigger hold), the "special symbol" is displayed as a fixed stop symbol when the first decorative pattern changes when the hold is extinguished. Therefore, in this case, the meaning of the "special symbol" being stopped and displayed is that "the symbol variation has ended" and "the expectation level for transition to the special game has increased." On the other hand, regarding trigger hold, a "special symbol" can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol when the first decorative symbol changes when the hold is extinguished, so the meaning of the "special symbol" being stopped and displayed in this case is , ``symbol fluctuations will change again'' and ``expectations for transition to special games have increased.'' In this way, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment creates a novel performance method in which the same type of "special symbols" have different meanings depending on the timing (or situation) in which they are stopped and displayed. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the second embodiment, regarding a hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold, there is a case where a "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a fixed stop pattern when the first decorative pattern changes when the hold is extinguished. , Regarding the trigger hold, it is configured so that the same type of ``special pattern'' is displayed when the ``special pattern'' is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop pattern when the first decorative pattern changes when the hold is extinguished. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "special symbol" in the former case may be "special symbol A", and the "special symbol" in the latter case may be "special symbol B". With this configuration, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbols" for both players. Further, the probability that the "special symbol" will be displayed in the former case may be configured to be lower than the probability that the "special symbol" will be displayed in the latter case.

In addition, in this example, the number of symbol rows of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is 3, and the effective line is 1 line, but there is no problem even if these are changed. For example, (1) "Special pattern" When the "special symbol" stops, the symbol row and/or active line increases (for example, the effective line becomes 9 lines). (2) When the "special symbol" stops, the symbol row and/or the active line increases. The line decreases (for example, the symbol row becomes two rows and one of the symbols stops, resulting in a reach state; furthermore, the symbol row becomes one row = it is almost certain (or definite) that it is a hit. It may be configured such that the difference in the profit rate given to the player is notified by the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed.

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the "special symbol" has a different meaning depending on the timing (or situation) when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed. By further increasing the linkage with the above, it is possible to create even more innovative production methods. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 1 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2220 (2nd variation 1) to step 2224 (2nd variation 1), and the purpose thereof is to determine when the hold is extinguished with respect to the hold whose display mode has changed due to the hold look-ahead effect. The content of the presentation is to be configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative pattern presentation and setting the display update timing and display update contents, in step 2220 (second change 1), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays the drawing pending information. Referring to the temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether the pending display mode related to the change is a dedicated effect display mode (a specific pending display mode different from other pending display modes, and in this example, red). do. If Yes in step 2220 (second change 1), in step 2222 (second change 1), the preview performance display control means SM24 determines the preview performance content from the "dedicated preview performance candidates". Here, the "dedicated preview performance candidate" is a performance candidate that is selected only when the special performance display mode (in this example, red) is on hold, which is a specific hold display mode. An example of this is configuring a battle effect with a specific enemy character to be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation related to the "dedicated preview performance candidate" is configured such that the jackpot expectation level is relatively high compared to other preview performance candidates. Next, in step 2223 (second change 1), the preview performance display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entry flag in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopping symbol (temporary stopping symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopping symbol of the main game symbol, and in step 2218 to move to. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2220 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 2250 (second variation). Here, if it is configured so that the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, it is possible to ensure that the pending display mode is the exclusive effect display mode and that the first decorative symbol is It is possible to further improve the linkage with the fact that a "special symbol" is more likely to be selected as a stop symbol (temporary stop symbol).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the special performance display mode (in this example, red), which is a specific pending display mode, is suspended as a preview performance candidate. By configuring so that the "dedicated preview performance candidate", which is a performance candidate that is selected only in the change related to the change, can be selected, when executing a pending change performance (a performance in which the pending display mode changes) based on the winning of the pre-read lottery. , it is possible to set up a preview effect that is executed only when the hold display mode changes to a specific hold display mode, and by increasing the expectation of a jackpot when the hold display mode is executed, the player is able to predict the hold when the hold changes. Attention will be paid to the display color (the manner in which the pending change is executed), which will increase the interest of the game. In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the effect to be executed due to the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is not determined when the trigger hold occurs, but is determined when the trigger hold is extinguished. By configuring it like this, "Trigger hold occurs → Hold display mode is determined and is displayed in that display mode → Trigger hold is cleared → Hold display related to trigger hold It can be configured such that the effect to be executed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is determined based on the mode. Note that there is no problem in applying the configuration related to the retained digestion transmission image to be described later to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment.

In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when a hold change effect is executed as a so-called hold look-ahead effect and the hold display mode becomes a dedicated effect display mode (in this example, red), the preview effect content is configured to be selected from "dedicated preview performance candidates", but the pending change performance is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" stops as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the stoppage of the "special symbol" is further linked to the "special symbol", for example, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are provided as the "special symbol", and when "special symbol A" is stopped. In this case, the hold display mode may be changed to a color other than red as the hold change effect, and when the "special symbol B" stops, the hold display mode may be changed to a red hold display mode as the hold change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the linkage between the so-called pending look-ahead performance and the "special symbol".

(Example 2 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the so-called pending look-ahead performance and the "special symbol" are configured to be more closely linked, but the first main game side and the second main game side are The strength of the characteristics may be different, and an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250(1) (second variation 2), and step 2250(2) (second variation 2), whose purpose is to The purpose is to control the selection rate of the "special symbol" to be changed depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the game side or a second main game side. That is, in step 2216, after determining the content of the decorative pattern presentation and setting the display update timing and display update content, in step 2226 (second change 2), the design display content determining means SM21n temporarily stores the main side information. Referring to the means SM11b, it is determined whether the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second change 2), in step 2250 (1) (second change 2), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the first main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol, which will be described later. The process is executed and the process moves to step 2218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second change 2), in step 2250 (2) (second change 2), the drawing display content determining means SM21n stops the second main game preview performance/drawing, which will be described later. The symbol determination process is executed and the process moves to step 2218.

Next, FIG. 53 shows the first main game preview performance/drawing stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250(1) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second modification from the second embodiment. This is a flowchart. The processing of this subroutine is the same as the advance notice performance/drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), so a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the second embodiment, this process is the same process executed on the first main game side and the second main game side, but in the second modification example from the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side. The purpose is to execute separate processes on the first main game side and the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 54 shows the second main game preview performance/drawing stop pattern determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250(2) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second modification from the second embodiment. This is a flowchart. Since the processing of this subroutine is similar to the advance notice production/drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), only the differences from this processing will be described in detail. The difference from step 2250 (second) notice production/drawing stop pattern determination process is step 2286 (second change 2) and step 2288 (second change 2). If there is no trigger hold, in step 2286 (second variation 2), the preview performance display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to group C. Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 2286 (Second Variation 2), in Step 2272, the preview effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the fluctuation is one in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second variation 2), the preview performance display control means SM24 calculates a predetermined probability (1 which is the angel zone transfer lottery winning rate on the first main game side executed in step 2274). An angel zone transfer lottery is executed in which the probability of winning is lower than /10 (in this example, 1/30), and the process moves to step 2276. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2286 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2282.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery (pseudo By configuring the lottery to determine whether or not the "special symbol" will temporarily stop due to continuous fluctuation and the angel zone background will be displayed as a background effect, the winning probability will be different, so that the winning probability will be different depending on the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side. It becomes possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative symbol depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the first main game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side. It is possible to widen the range of performance and increase the interest of the performance by making the performance tendency accompanying the variation of the symbols on the second main game side different from the performance tendency accompanying the symbol variation on the second main game side.

In addition, in the second modification from the second embodiment, since the second main game hold cannot become trigger hold in the non-time saving gaming state, the second main game hold cannot be held in the non-time saving gaming state. Pending look-ahead effect targeting pending on the gaming side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time saving gaming state, compare the appearance rate of "special symbols" related to the pending look-ahead effect on the first main game side and the appearance rate of "special symbols" related to the hold look-ahead effect on the second main game side. However, the appearance rates will be different (higher on the first main game side). Furthermore, as mentioned above, whether the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the "special symbol" in pseudo continuous variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side. (The "special symbol" is more likely to temporarily stop in response to symbol fluctuations on the first main game side), and the ease with which trigger hold occurs also depends on the hold on the first main game side. , differs depending on whether the hold is on the second main game side (the hold on the first main game side is more likely to become a trigger hold), so a trigger hold occurs → a hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold At the time of extinguishing, the "special symbol" is confirmed and displayed (the so-called pending look-ahead effect is executed) → The "special symbol" is temporarily stopped when the trigger is extinguished (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed). It is also possible to configure the system so that the probability that the series of effects will occur is higher on the first main game side than on the second main game side. In addition, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the appearance rate of symbol fluctuations in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to pseudo-continuous fluctuations in symbol fluctuations related to the first main game symbol, and pseudo-continuity in symbol fluctuations related to the second main game symbol. The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol fluctuation in which the “special symbol” temporarily stops due to the fluctuation, the appearance rate of the “special symbol” as a look-ahead effect in the symbol fluctuation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol When comparing the difference with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as a look-ahead performance in symbol variation, the difference related to pseudo continuous variation (the former difference) is smaller.

In addition, in this example, (1) the selection probability (appearance rate) of the "special symbol" may be the same on the first main game side and the second main game side, and (2) there is no hold that will result in a jackpot. If it exists in the second main game pending, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect will not appear due to the fluctuation of the second main game symbol, (3) If the pending that will result in a jackpot exists in the first main game pending (4) A "special symbol" related to the pseudo-continuous variation may appear in the case of a variation of the second main game symbol that results in a jackpot. It may be configured such that (5) "special symbols" related to pseudo-continuous fluctuations appear or are likely to occur when the first main game symbol is a fluctuation that results in a jackpot. In addition, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured so that it can appear both during the look-ahead presentation and during pseudo-continuous fluctuation, but the "special symbol A" is configured to appear only during the look-ahead presentation. "Special symbol" and "Special symbol B" are treated as "special symbols" that can only appear during pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and the appearance rates of "Special symbol A" and "Special symbol B" are compared to determine the second main game symbol. It may be configured such that "special symbol A" does not appear in the variation, "special symbol B" has a low appearance rate in the variation of the second main game symbol, etc.

(Example 3 of modification from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are configured to be executable as the so-called pending look-ahead effect, but new gameplay is created by changing the execution mode of the hold look-ahead effect. Is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second variation 3) and step 2750 (second variation 3), that is, after executing the decorative pattern display content determination process in step 2200, step 2700 ( In the second change 3), the sub-control board S executes a pending display mode change control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2750 (second change 3), the sub-control board S executes a pending digestion transmission image display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second variation 3), the purpose of which is to notify that a certain hold is being used up (symbols are changing) when a certain hold is extinguished. The purpose is to configure the system so that it can display images of That is, in step 2112, after subtracting 1 from the drawing reservation counter value, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information (in particular, the display mode) related to the symbol change. and fluctuation mode group information), "pending digestion transmission image information" This information is temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b as "information related to the suspended digested transmission image" that is to be continuously displayed even after the preview effect is digested), and the process moves to step 2128 (second). do. In addition, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the pre-read determination process at the time of winning in the second main game is deleted (the pre-read lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second variation 3) in FIG. 56 in the third modification from the second embodiment. Here, this process will be explained by dividing it into two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery, first, in step 2580, the pending pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending is the second main game. It is determined whether or not the game is on hold (a hold that is extinguished with priority over the first main game hold). In the case of Yes in step 2580, in step 2582, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2584, in step 2586, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and creates a hold whose variation mode group of holds before the new hold is group 1. (There is no hold that would result in a jackpot, hold that could have a long fluctuation time, or trigger hold before the new hold). If YES in step 2584, the process moves to step 2586.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2586, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold variation mode group is Determine whether or not it is in group 3 {Fluctuations related to suspensions whose variation mode group is group 3 will be affected even if the number of suspensions at the start of the fluctuation is large (for example, the number of suspensions is 2 or 3) , the fluctuation time is relatively long}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the reservation pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the possibility of executing the reservation with a predetermined probability (for example, if the reservation is a jackpot reservation, the probability is 2/3, and if the reservation is a loss reservation, the probability is 1/8). When winning a prize, a pre-read lottery is executed. Next, in step 2590, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2590, in step 2591, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k adds information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" to the new hold that won the prize-winning look-ahead lottery, and displays the hold. The mode is determined to be ``yellow-shaped hold'' and is stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the pre-read lottery at the time of winning, and is a hold that can be displayed in a different display form from the normal hold. Next, in step 2592, the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not the new suspension (trigger suspension) is appropriate, and the suspension change plan until the trigger suspension is exhausted, based on the current number of suspensions. For example, determine an execution plan for an effect such as holding a green zako at the start of the next fluctuation, changing to a red zako hold when the successive fluctuations start, etc., and storing it in the reservation information temporary storage area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2118).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2580 (when the new reservation is the second main game reservation), in step 2596, the reservation pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing reservation information in the temporary storage means SM22b. In addition to deleting the information that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the first main game hold that is being held (if there is no hold that has information indicating that it is a trigger hold, this process is executed Step 2594 changes the pending display mode to "normal pending" (for example, white pending) and stores it in the pending information temporary storage area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. to move to. Note that if the answer is No in step 2582, step 2584, step 2586, or step 2590, the process also moves to step 2594.

Next, in step 2594, the reservation pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the reservation display mode of the new reservation as "normal reservation" (for example, white reservation), and stores the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. The pending information is stored in the temporary storage area, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2118). Here, in the processing of steps 2596 and 2594, when a hold on the second main game side exists (occurs), in a gaming machine such as this example in which the second main game side is prioritized, the processing of steps 2596 and 2594 Since the hold on the second main game side is used up first, the planned change order is not followed, and a pre-read effect that covers multiple changes (for example, a hold display mode change effect based on a hold change plan) is not executed normally. This is a configuration to avoid this.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2208 (second variation 3), step 2222 (second variation 3) to step 2226 (second variation 3), and step 2228 (second variation 3), that is, After determining the variation mode of the first decorative pattern in step 2206 (second step), in step 2208 (second variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display The content determining means SM25n) refers to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta and determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {for example, if the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, In the case of long-term fluctuations, reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.) is determined and stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (as well as the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b and the reach performance related information temporary storage means SM25b). Memorize temporarily. Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the validity result of the main game symbol and the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the decorative pattern presentation content by referring to the decorative pattern presentation table SM21ta-2 (for example, decorative pattern presentation table 1 to decorative pattern presentation table 2) in the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2222 (second variation 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n randomly determines the content of the preview effect to be executed during the variation. Here, as shown in the preview content image diagram on the right side of the figure, in this example, the content of the preview performance that can be executed differs depending on the image set as the background performance (so-called stay stage). The content lottery of the preview performance to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number obtained by the sub-main control unit SM, the result of the change, the winning symbol, the time of the change, etc. Here, the content of the preview performance marked with an asterisk in the same image is the specific preview performance in this example, and is configured so that different specific preview performances can be executed based on the stay stage (specific preview performance). (This will be explained in the processing below). Furthermore, the content of the preview performance (in this example, a performance that can be executed before a reach performance, etc.) is not limited to this, and for example, a pseudo-continuous performance (a performance in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation is performed) may be executed. (In that case, you may change the display mode of the pending digestion conveyance image and suspension, which will be described later in the pseudo-sequence performance, or change the suspended digestion transmission image, which will be described later, by the preview performance executed during the pseudo-sequence performance. (You may also change the display format of pending status.)

Next, in step 2224 (second variation 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the "suspended digestion transmission image information" temporarily stored in the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines the change. Determine whether the change is related to trigger hold. If Yes in step 2224 (second change 3), in step 2226 (second change 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n selects the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b (or the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), and based on the propriety of the change, the variation mode, or the "holding digestion transmission image information" regarding the preview effect, the holding digestion transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped: yellow zako holding → green zako An execution plan for effects such as pressing a button repeatedly during hold or reach (change from green star hold to red star hold, etc.) is determined, stored in the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2218. Incidentally, even if the answer in step 2224 (second variation 3) is No, the process moves to step 2218.

Next, in step 2218 and step 2228 (second change 3), the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. , turns on the pending display mode change process execution flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the pending display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second variation 3) in FIG. 55 in modification example 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the pending display mode change process execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether trigger hold exists within the hold. If Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 checks the reservation change plan stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2710, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether there is a plan to change the hold display mode during the change based on the hold change plan.

If Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and selects a specific preview performance (see FIG. 49) during the preview performance to be executed during the fluctuation. ). If Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 performs a drawing based on the preview mode temporarily stored in the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. , it is determined whether the execution timing of the specific preview performance has been reached. If Yes in step 2714, the process moves to step 2718 (the display mode of the hold is changed in accordance with the execution of the specific preview effect).

Here, FIG. 60 is an image diagram of a pending change in the specific preview performance. In this example, an example will be described in which the display mode of a hold is changed in accordance with a grassy area notice (in particular, a grassy area notice where a snake appears, which is a specific notice effect) in a flat zone. First, in a state where there is a trigger hold within the holds, fluctuations related to holds before the trigger hold start {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is normal hold (white hold)}.

Next, a grass preview, which is a preview performance of the current change, is executed, and an image of searching for something through the grass is displayed.

Next, an image is displayed in which a snake (the expectation of winning the jackpot during the fluctuation is "low") appears from behind the grass.

Here, if there is no plan to change the pending display during the change, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass and leaving the screen is displayed, and the preview performance ends.

On the other hand, if there is a plan to change the hold display during the change, unlike the case described above, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass and jumping into the hold (trigger hold, which is normally held at this point) will be displayed. Ru. After that, the display mode of the hold in which the snake jumped (trigger hold) changes, and is displayed in a hold display mode different from the normal hold (in this example, the hold is called a snail hold). Note that it may be configured to perform an effect in which the display mode of the pending event does not change even if the specific preview effect is executed (so-called fake effect).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712 (when the specific notice effect is not executed during the variation), in step 2716, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays a general-purpose pending change effect (which can be executed independently of other effects). At the same time, a command is set to display a production that can be executed in any production stage, for example, a production in which a hold is exploded (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ) and moves to step 2718.

Next, in step 2718, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger hold based on the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and changes the display mode of the drawing hold information. It is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2720, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns off the pending display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and executes the next process {step 2750 (Processing of 2nd variation 3)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 2704, step 2706 or step 2710, the process moves to step 2720, and in the case of No in step 2702 or step 2714, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2750 (second variation 3)}. Transition.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending digestion transmission image display process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second variation 3) in FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the preview presentation related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the suspended consumption transmission image displaying flag is off. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending consumption conveyance image based on the suspended consumption conveyance image information temporarily stored in the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. (Initial display mode) is determined. Here, the pending completion transmission image is an image that continues to display the pending related to the relevant change even during the relevant change (after the relevant change has started and the pending related to the relevant change has been completed). . By displaying the hold completion transmission image, even during a change in the hold (for example, Zako hold) where the display mode has changed within the hold, the player can easily recognize that the change is a change related to the Zako hold. During this change, it becomes possible to perform an effect that changes the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image.

Next, in step 2758, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the flag in the flag area of the preview presentation related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process moves to step 2760. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2754, the process moves to step 2760.

Next, in step 2760, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b and confirms the reservation execution transmission image change plan. Next, in step 2762, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the display mode or delete the pending digest transmitting image during the change based on the pending digest transmitting image change plan. do. If Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending digesting transfer image based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the pending digesting transfer image change plan. It is determined whether or not a change timing (for example, at the start of re-variation after displaying a temporary stop of a pseudo-continuous pattern, at the time of execution of a predetermined effect, or a predetermined period during a ready-to-win effect) has been reached. If Yes in step 2764, in step 2766, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines the conditions for changing the display mode of the reservation transmission transmission image (for example, pressing the sub-input button during a predetermined period, the maximum number of reservations, etc.) Determine whether or not the requirements are satisfied. If Yes in step 2766, in steps 2768 and 2770, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, a hold exploding effect) (sends the display command in step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and also change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image (for example, Akaboshi suspension, Midorizako suspension, no display, etc.) based on the suspension digestion transmission image change plan. display mode), and stores it in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and proceeds to step 2780. Incidentally, if the result in step 2762 or step 2766 is No, the process also moves to step 2780.

Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in the retained digestion transmission image. The change in the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image in the third modification from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in the flow shown in the figure. In addition, this example illustrates a pattern in which the battle performance does not end in the first half but shifts (develops) to the battle performance (second half). First, the fluctuation related to the trigger hold (currently, the last hold) starts, and the last hold is displayed as the hold digestion transmission image.

Next, a battle performance (first half) is executed as a performance during the fluctuation. In this example, if the hold digestion transmission image is a hold, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold by pressing the sub-input button a predetermined number of times during the execution of the battle effect (first half) in the change. It is composed of In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub-input button during the execution of the battle effect (first half); however, effects that prompt the player's operation (pressing the sub-input button) are not Since this sub-input button is not particularly executed, the operation of the sub-input button is the input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

If you repeatedly press the button (press the sub-input button a certain number of times) during the battle production (first half), each time you press the sub-input button, an attack will be added to the hold that is displayed as the hold digestion transmission image. The current effect image will be displayed.

Next, when the number of presses of the sub-input button in the battle performance (first half) reaches a predetermined number, an image of Zako Hold exploding, which is a pending digestion transmission image, will be displayed, and based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan, The display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of pending is changed to red star pending or not displayed). Furthermore, even after transitioning to the battle performance (second half), the pending digestion transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display format after the display format change {players who input hidden commands will be unable to display the pending digestion Since there is an intention to predict the expected jackpot of the change according to the display mode of the transmission image, even after transitioning to the battle performance (second half), the pending digestion transmission image continues to be displayed in the display mode after the display mode has been changed. }.

On the other hand, if you do not press the button repeatedly during the battle performance (first half) (or the number of repeated presses is less than the predetermined number of times), the Zako hold, which is a hold-up digestion transmission image, will automatically explode at the timing of transitioning to the battle performance (second half). At the same time as the image is displayed, the display of the pending completion notification image will be erased (taking into account players who enjoy the game by not hitting the button repeatedly and not anticipating the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, we have created a plan to change the pending completion notification image) regardless of the contents). In this example, the jackpot expectation level of Zako reservation is medium, and the jackpot expectation level of Akahoshi reservation is high expectation level. Moreover, when the battle performance (second half) is executed, the expectation level of jackpot increases at once compared to when the battle performance (first half) is executed. Here, in a situation where the jackpot expectation level has increased after moving to the battle performance (second half), if the display of "Zako pending" with a medium jackpot expectation level continues, the battle performance is a performance with a high jackpot expectation level. Although it may spoil the interest of the (second half), when the highly anticipated production (in this example, the battle production (second half)) starts, the production that is not highly anticipated (in this example, the second half of the battle production) is started. By deleting it, you can avoid such situations. Although not particularly shown in this example, even if the number of presses of the sub-input button is less than a predetermined number of times, at the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan. It may be configured to automatically change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is automatically changed only when a change is planned to a display mode that suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the relevant fluctuation. It may be configured as follows. In addition, if you do not press the button repeatedly (or the number of repeated presses is less than a predetermined number of times), the display mode of the pending digestion communication image will be automatically changed at a predetermined timing only if the fluctuation results in a jackpot or a probability-variable jackpot. It may also be configured such that a so-called hit effect can be executed.

Also, if you move to the battle performance (second half) without going through the battle performance (first half) {for example, drawing change start (all rows) → preview effect 1, temporary drawing stop display (left column) → drawing temporary Stop display (right column) → Incite reach development → Battle reach (second half) image display → Temporary drawing stop display (middle row) → Execute the performance depending on the validity → Display confirming drawing (all columns) }, that is, if there is no period during which the button is pressed {in this example, the battle effect (first half)} and the transition to the battle effect (second half) occurs, the timing of transition to the battle effect (second half) Then, the pending digestion transmission image, Zako-Hold, is automatically exploded, and the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is changed and displayed based on the suspended digestion transmission image change plan. Although not particularly shown in this example, the number of presses of the sub-input button required to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is determined by the number of presses of the sub-input button required to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image. The configuration may be such that a larger number of times is more likely to be selected as the number of times is more likely to change to a pending status. Although not particularly shown in this example, when the display mode of the hold-down transmission image changes, in addition to the general-purpose hold change effect, there is also a play that suggests the content of the change (for example, when the hold-down explodes) It may also be configured to be able to execute a death warning (death warning that utters lines). The content that the Deathrattle Announcement suggests is the expected level of jackpot for the change in question and the contents of the planned performance (for example, "Achichii!" = Expected jackpot of 60% or more, "Congratulations!" = However, if the sub-input button is not pressed by the player, the jackpot expectation level related to the change may be It is preferable to assume that the player does not want to make a prediction, and to configure the system so that the death penalty notice related to the jackpot expectation level of the change is not executed (only the death penalty notice related to the content of the performance scheduled to be executed can be executed). . In other words, only when the display mode of the pending consumption transmission image is changed by the player's operation, the system may be configured so that a preview performance related to the jackpot expectation level of the change can be executed based on the result of the validity of the change. Note that the battle performance (first half) performance can be executed in "a4" and "b4", which are variable times of 30 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 2764 (if it is not the timing to change the display mode of the pending digest transmission image), in step 2772, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display format of the suspended digest transmission image. It is determined whether it is time to delete the . If Yes in step 2772, in step 2774, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines the display mode deletion conditions for the pending digestion transmission image (for example, no sub-input button is pressed during a predetermined period, the number of sub-input button presses) less than a predetermined number of times, etc.). If Yes in step 2774, in steps 2776 and 2778, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general hold change effect (for example, a hold exploding effect) (sends the display command in step 2999). (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is changed to "no display" (regardless of the contents of the pending digestion transmission image change plan). ) and is temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process moves to step 2780.

Next, in step 2780, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 sets a command to display the pending digesting transmission image based on the display mode of the pending digesting transmission image temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. (It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 2752, in step 2782, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns off the pending digestion transmission image displaying flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. . Next, in step 2784, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending transmission transmission image to "no display" and temporarily stores it in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays the pending digesting transfer image based on the display mode of the pending digesting transfer image temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b (the processing Then, set a command (to hide the pending digestion transmission image) (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and perform the next process (process of step 2300). to move to.

In addition, although the third modification from the second embodiment is configured to be able to display the pending digest notification image, the pending digest notification image does not need to be displayed all the time. For example, if the pending display mode is normal pending, It may be configured such that a hold completion notification image corresponding to a hold that has been completed as is is not displayed, and a hold completion notification image corresponding to a hold whose hold display mode has changed from the normal hold is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can check the pending consumption notification image at the timing when he wants to know the jackpot expectation level of the symbol change, and if the pending consumption notification image is displayed, the expectation level is relatively high, If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that expectations are relatively low.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 46 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2524 (second variation 3) to step 2534 (second variation 3). That is, if the angel zone flag is off in step 2502, step 2524 (second variation 3) In 2nd change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 controls the variation of the decorative pattern based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine whether the start timing has been reached. If Yes in Step 2524 (Second Variation 3), in Step 2526 (Second Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b, and stores the trigger holding {described above} in the holding state. It is determined whether or not there is a "pending" that was won in the first main game prize winning pre-read lottery. If Yes in Step 2526 (Second Variation 3), in Step 2528 (Second Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone transition lottery with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) of winning. do. Next, in step 2530 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2528 (second variation 3) and determines whether or not the angel zone transfer lottery has been won. . If Yes in step 2530 (second change 3), in step 2532 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 displays the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn on, and proceed to step 2504.

Further, in step 2504, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect, in step 2534 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 stores the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing pending information temporary With reference to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger hold has ended. If Yes in step 2534 (second change 3), the process moves to step 2508, and if No, the process moves to step 2520.

By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification example from the second embodiment, the sub-main control can be performed for holds that are highly expected to result in a jackpot (especially holds on the first main game side). The display mode of pending on the SM side can be changed and displayed, and when a predetermined preview performance (in this example, a specific preview performance, especially a low-expectation preview performance) is executed, the predetermined The system is configured so that the display mode of the hold can be changed and displayed in accordance with the preview effect and the movement of the displayed image. As a result, even if a preview performance has a low jackpot expectation in the fluctuation, the display mode of pending may change, which increases the player's interest in the preview performance and improves the interest of the game. This makes it possible. In addition, if the jackpot expectation level increases after moving to the battle performance (second half), if the display continues to indicate that the jackpot expectation level is medium, the battle performance is a performance with a high jackpot expectation level. (Second half) may lose the interest of the (second half), so even if there is no operation by the player, the production (in this example, the battle production (second half)), which is not highly anticipated, will be performed at the timing when the production with high expectations (in this example, the battle production (second half)) starts. In this example, it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from being lost by hiding the ``Zako hold''. In addition, there is a condition that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub-input button SB a predetermined number of times) during a period when a predetermined effect (for example, Battle Reach (first half)) is being executed during symbol fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending consumption transmission image, so it is possible to create a performance in which players can participate, and a player who does not want to know the expected jackpot of the change due to the performance can perform the specified operation. By not doing so, it is possible to provide a game in which it is possible to select that the display mode of the pending consumption transmission image becomes an effect that does not suggest the degree of jackpot expectation (for example, deletion of the pending consumption transmission image).

In the third modification from the second embodiment, a background change effect and a pending change effect are provided as prefetch effects, and only the pending change effect is executed multiple times during execution of the prefetch effect. is not limited, and the background change effect may also be configured to be executed multiple times during execution of the pre-read effect (for example, even after changing to the "angel zone background", it may change to the "true angel zone background"). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the more times it is executed), the higher the expectation of a jackpot due to fluctuations related to the currently executed look-ahead effect (rank It is desirable to configure the system so that the It is assumed that the background change effect does not change (rank does not increase) during the execution of symbol change related to trigger hold.

(Third embodiment)
Here, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to start and stop changing at almost the same time as the main game pattern, but the manner of variation of the decorative pattern is not limited to this. . Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, a specific area C22 is provided inside the second grand prize opening C20, which is an area where entering the ball triggers a transition to the probability variable gaming state.

First, FIG. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) shows the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B) and the first main game win/fail lottery table MN11ta-B in the third embodiment. This is an example of the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that the jackpot probability in the probability-changing gaming state is lower, and that short-open jackpots and long-open jackpots are provided as jackpots. Here, the short opening jackpot means that the second big winning hole C20 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 This is a jackpot in which only seconds) are opened, and a long open jackpot is a long open jackpot in which the second grand prize opening C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is opened) during the jackpot. (For example, 30 seconds) It is a jackpot that can be released. In addition, in the third embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the above-mentioned distribution game execution round, the game property is such that the state shifts to the probability variable game state after the end of the special game being executed. (so-called Yu-Kan-ki).

Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to in the losing time and time reduction game state, and the number of pending at the start of fluctuation is "0". ” and “1 to 3 items” have different table contents. In addition, in the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol selected in the time reduction gaming state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and the other variation modes are long variations, The method of determining the variation mode of the decorative symbols (especially the first decorative symbol) is configured to be different depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbol is a short variation or a long variation (details will be described later). . In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (because the game is played on the right hand side, only symbol fluctuations on the second main game side are executed, Or, the variation of the second main game symbol is easier to execute than the variation of the first main game symbol).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the time reduction gaming state, the variation time of the second decorative symbol is configured to be the same as the variation time of the second main game symbol, so the variation time of the second decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state is The fluctuation time of the 2 decorative symbols is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of the symbol fluctuation (it may differ depending on the number of reservations).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time reduction gaming state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (because the game is played with right-handed players, the second main game side is not shown). (only symbol fluctuations on the gaming side are executed), the first main game hold basically does not occur, so the contents of the fluctuation mode determination table related to the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state are In the case of a jackpot, a short period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) may contain only one type of variation; in the case of a jackpot, a long period of variation (e.g., 30 seconds) may contain only one type of content. Since the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the shortened game state is an irregular symbol fluctuation, there is no problem even if the contents of the fluctuation mode determination table have a simple structure. In addition, in order to cause the second main game to be suspended during irregular symbol fluctuations, the contents of the fluctuation mode determination table related to the first main game symbol related to the loss in the time-reduced gaming state are changed for a short period of time regardless of the number of reservations. It may be configured such that the variation mode is not selected (for example, all variation times are 5 seconds or more). Note that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the number of reservations is the first main game reservation. This is the number of games pending, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is steps 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), the purpose of which is to end the probability fluctuation gaming state by the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol (into a non-probability fluctuation gaming state). (transition). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variable number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1454 (third), in step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts (decrements) by 1 from the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1458 (third), in step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. Note that if the answer is No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process also moves to step 1470. In addition, in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state ends when the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the probability fluctuating game state may be configured so that it does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations (it may end when the winning of the special game is triggered), and the jackpot related to the first main game Even if the configuration is such that the proportion of jackpots related to the second main game becoming long-open jackpots is higher than the proportion of long-open jackpots resulting in long-open jackpots, and short-open jackpots also exist in the jackpots related to the second main game. good.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1611 (third), step 1700 (third), and step 1650 (third), that is, after setting the special game start display instruction command in step 1608, or If the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the round currently being executed is a distributed game. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (a round in which the second big winning hole C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, 2R and 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a distribution game execution process, which will be described later, and moves to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process moves to step 1612. Further, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1638, in step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later. The process moves to step 1997.

Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) in FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the distribution game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1702, the process moves to step 1716. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbols are changed to long open symbols (7A, 4B, 5B and 7B, and the second main game jackpot symbols are all long open symbols). In the case of Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 selects a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds) as the opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. An opening pattern designed to make it almost certain (or certain) that the ball will enter the specific area C22 is set, and the process moves to step 1710. In the case of No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36 selects a short opening pattern (for example, an opening of 0.1 seconds) as an opening pattern of the second big winning hole C20 having the specific area C22. A release pattern designed to make it almost certain (or certain) that the ball does not enter the specific area C22 is set, and the process moves to step 1710.

Next, in step 1710, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1712, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second grand prize opening C20 according to the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

Next, in step 1716, the distribution game execution control means MP36 checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether a predetermined number of game balls (10) have entered the second big prize opening C20. do. If YES in step 1716, the process moves to step 1720. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1716, in step 1718, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If YES in step 1718, the process moves to step 1720. Next, in step 1720, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1724, in step 1726, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. . Note that if the answer in step 1724 is No, the process also moves to step 1728. Next, in step 1728, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and moves to the next process (the process of step 1634). Note that even in the case of No in step 1718, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) in FIG. 68, in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1662, in step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets the probability variation number counter MP51c to a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example). Next, in step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), and moves to step 1672.

Next, in step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third). That is, after executing the above-described decorative pattern display content determination process in step 2200, step 2010 (third) Then, the sub control board S refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process moves to step 2300, and in the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub-control board S performs a time-saving decorative pattern display control process to be described later. Execute and move to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2230 (third), The drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state or not. In the case of Yes in step 2230 (third), the process moves to step 2206, and in the case of No, in step 2800 (third), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines that the first The figure content determination process is executed and the process moves to step 2208. Note that the process of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (there is no symbol content determination flag). In addition, in the third embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns: the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and the number of valid lines (lines that become valid when the same numerical patterns are lined up) is 1. It is a line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the active line, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). Also, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column), only numerical symbols can stop (temporarily stop) (the above-mentioned "special symbols" do not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely (or the probability of temporary stopping is extremely low) and it is possible to temporarily stop during symbol fluctuation (or the probability of temporary stopping is extremely low). In addition, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns: the left column, the middle column, and the right column. If the number symbols are aligned, it means a jackpot (on the contrary, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the active line, it is a loss). In addition, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column), only the number symbols can stop (temporarily stop) (the above-mentioned "special symbols" do not stop), and in the middle of the symbol change. It is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first drawing content determination process during time saving, which is related to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) in FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2802, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the first decorative pattern is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the second main game pending content (in particular, win/fail result and variation time) related to the symbol variation (main game symbol variation), and Confirm the contents of the second main game hold (especially the variable time) in the order of consumption of the first and second games, that is, the contents of the second main game hold excluding the third hold (especially the win/fail result and the variable time) . Next, in step 2806, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not there is a hold (including the symbol change) whose variation time is longer than a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) related to the confirmed hold, and , based on the extinguishing order of the pending (including the symbol variation) whose variation time is longer than a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example), refer to the table for determining the first design variation mode during time saving, and determine the first decorative symbol. Determine the variation mode.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a table for determining the first drawing variation mode during time saving in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol stops (at the timing of step 2806), the second main game pending number, the second main game symbol fluctuation and the second main The variable time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the variable time related to game suspension. As mentioned above, among the variations of the second main game symbols, "b0 (1 second)" is considered a short variation, and anything other than "b0 (1 second)" is considered a long variation.

Specifically, if there are two or more second main game holds, it is determined whether or not there is a hold that will be a long change between the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold. , if there is no hold that becomes a long variation, the variation time of the 3 variations of the second main game symbol becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 3, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', the fluctuation time will be ``The variation: 1 second, 1st game: 1 second, 2 games. In the case of "1st: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number maintains "1 to 3" is "the said fluctuation" and " The total of "1st" and "2nd" will be 3 seconds, and the first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or almost simultaneously) as the main game symbol related to the second suspension stops changing. . The second decorative symbols are configured to stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the main game symbols stop changing in each variation.

On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game holds, and if there is a hold that becomes a long change between the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold, the first The fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is a long fluctuation in the order of consumption, becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 3, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', the fluctuation time will be ``The variation: 1 second, 1st game: 10 seconds, 2 games. In the case of "1st: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number maintains "1 to 3" is "the said fluctuation" and " The first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the main game symbol related to the first pending symbol, which is a long fluctuation, stops changing.

In addition, if the number of second main game holds is one or less, it is determined whether or not there is a hold that will become a long change up to the hold that becomes the final extinguishment order (including the symbol change concerned), and the long change If there is no pending, the fluctuation time that is the sum of the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol and all the pending becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 1, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', and the fluctuation time is ``the fluctuation: 1 second, the first game: 1 second''. In this case, when the second main game pending number is maintained at "1 to 3", the variation time of the first decorative symbol is 2 seconds, which is the sum of "the variation" and "the first symbol", and 1 The first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the eye retention stops.

On the other hand, if the number of second main game pending is 1 or less, and if there is a long change pending (including the symbol change) before the final redemption order, the first redemption order will be The fluctuation time up to the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes a long fluctuation becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, if the number of second main games pending is 1, and the number of second main games pending is ``1 to 3'', and the fluctuation time is ``the fluctuation: 1 second, the first game: 10 seconds''. In this case, when the second main game pending number is maintained at "1 to 3", the variation time of the first decorative symbol is 11 seconds, which is the sum of "the variation" and "the first symbol", and it is a long variation. The first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the first pending symbol stops.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern is determined at the timing of step 2806, that is, after the hold is extinguished, but the variation time of the first decorative symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured to check the second main game hold information at the timing and determine the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol.

Next, in step 2808, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the reservation information confirmed in step 2804 and determines whether or not there is a reservation that will result in a jackpot among the confirmed second main game reservations. If Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes the jackpot, and 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2808, in step 2812, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be a loss, and proceeds to step 2814. In addition, in the process of step 2812, depending on the variation time of the first decorative symbol, the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol are changed to reach mode (the stop symbols of the left column and the right column are the same, for example, "4, 6, It may also be configured to determine whether to make a winning combination (the stopped symbols in the left and right rows are not the same, for example, "4, 6, 3") or a random number ("4, 6, 3", for example). Next, in step 2814, the drawing display content determining means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag during time saving in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (step 2208). processing). Note that if the answer is No in step 2802, the process also moves to the next process (the process in step 2208).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time reduction game state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (because the game is played with right-handed players, the second (Only the symbol fluctuations on the main game side are executed), so the first main game hold basically does not occur, but if the first main game hold occurs due to the player executing a left-handed hit, etc. In this case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same variation time as the main game symbol until the variation related to the first main game suspension ends.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the time-saving decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) in FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main game symbols has started. If Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol variation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2856, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if No in step 2852, the process also moves to step 2858.

Next, in step 2858, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2858, in step 2860, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer values of the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2862, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the first decorative pattern is stopped. If Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts variable display of the first decorative pattern, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2862, in step 2865, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and proceeds to step 2866.

Next, in step 2866, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 variably displays the second decorative pattern. Next, in step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image displays such as a temporary stop display, a preview image display, and a ready-to-reach image display related to the determined variation of the main game symbol. Note that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the time reduction game state, but are configured not to be temporarily stopped in a stopping mode such as a "special symbol" or a pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, as a specific example of a temporary stop, the first decorative symbol is a reach in a symbol variation that is a long-term reach variation (for example, 30 seconds or more) (the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped). The second decorative pattern may be configured to be temporarily stopped during the period (in which the first decorative pattern is reached), or the first decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped as a pseudo-continuous fluctuation before the first decorative pattern becomes a reach. .

Next, in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbols have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 finalizes and displays the first decorative pattern. Next, in step 2876, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2872, in step 2878, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and proceeds to step 2880.

Next, in step 2880, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 finalizes and displays the second decorative pattern. Next, in step 2882, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). Note that even in the case of No in step 2858 or step 2870, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Here, the upper part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern variation during time saving, and illustrates an example of the effect related to the variation of the decorative pattern in the third embodiment. First, the "main game symbol fluctuation start state" means that the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) begin to fluctuate at the timing when the main game symbol (in particular, the second main game symbol) begins to fluctuate. It is displayed whether or not. Note that the areas displayed with diagonal lines indicate that the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is changing. In addition, at the timing when the main game symbols (particularly the second main game symbols) stop varying, it is displayed whether or not the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) stop varying. Note that the areas displayed with diagonal lines indicate that the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is changing. In this way, the second decorative symbols start and stop fluctuating at the same (or approximately the same) timing as the fluctuations of the main game symbols (in particular, the second main game symbols). On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is configured to start and stop varying every three times the main game symbol (in particular, the second main game symbol) changes. That is, the first decorative pattern is configured such that one pattern variation can be performed over a plurality of variation periods of the main game pattern (and the second decorative pattern).

By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the number of pending items and the fluctuation time of the second main game reservation. By configuring the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol to be the value of the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol multiple times, the game can be played with multiple fluctuations of the main game symbol as if they were one fluctuation. This means that even if the number of variations of the main game symbol, which is the condition for ending the probability variable gaming state, is large (200 in this example) as in the third embodiment, the number of variations (in this example, 200) is small. For example, 100 times), it is possible to show the player that the probability is variable (100 times), and it is possible to reduce the fact that the progress of the game becomes boring due to continuous loss fluctuations during the probability variable game state. This makes it possible to make the user feel that the probability of hitting the jackpot in the state is higher than it actually is.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the second decorative pattern is configured to be able to make a definite stop three times in a period in which the first decorative pattern makes a definite stop once, but the number of definite stops of the second decorative pattern is The maximum number of 3 times is smaller than the 2nd main game hold upper limit number of 4 times (If the 2nd main game hold upper limit number is exceeded, the 1st decorative symbol is (This is because a situation may occur in which the second main game hold is all used up).

Note that the board configuration of the third embodiment may be changed, and for example, the game ball almost certainly passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10 and the second main game starting port B10 when hitting right. (the auxiliary game starting port H10 is placed on the upper side when viewed from the player), and almost all of the game balls that flow down the route and pass through the auxiliary game starting port H10, It may be configured so that the ball can enter the second main game starting port B10. In the case of such a configuration, in the time reduction game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10 until it enters the second main game starting port B10, the “auxiliary game symbol” Since it is desirable that the fluctuation start → the end of the fluctuation of the auxiliary game symbol → the opening of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, "the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is 0.2 seconds, the second main game starting port electric It is preferable that the opening mode of the accessory B11d be configured such that it is opened for 6 seconds and then closed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from entering the second main game starting port B10 when a right-handed hit is executed in the time reduction game state, the second main game It is desirable that the number of prize balls for the starting opening B10 is one ball (the number of prize balls for the first main game starting opening A10 is three balls).

In addition, in the third embodiment, the content of the second main game hold is checked while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. If a hold that results in a long change in the main game symbol exists up to the second digestion order, the first decorative pattern is configured to stop at the same time when the change in the symbol related to the hold that results in a long change stops. Therefore, the variation time of the first decorative pattern may not depend on the number of reservations at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol, and also, due to the reservation that occurs during the variation of the first decorative symbol, the first variation of the next variation The variation times of the decorative patterns are configured to be different.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as described above, if there are two or more second main game holds, and the symbol change, the first hold, or the second hold, a long change is applied. When there is a hold that becomes, the change time until the change of the main game symbol related to the hold that is the longest change in the order of consumption is the change time of the first decorative symbol, and, If there is no hold that becomes a long change between the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold, the change time for 3 changes of the second main game symbol is the change of the first decorative pattern. However, for example, if the number of second main games pending is 3 and the number of second main games pending is maintained at "1 to 3", the variation time will be "The variation: 1 second". , 1st symbol: 1 second, 2nd symbol: 1 second, 3rd symbol: 1 second", the first decorative symbol when the second main game pending number maintains "1 to 3". The fluctuation time is scheduled to be 3 seconds, which is the total of "the said fluctuation", "1st piece", and "2nd piece", but the second main game hold is not maintained at "1 to 3 pieces", For example, if the actual fluctuation time is "the relevant fluctuation: 1 second, the first: 1 second, the second: 5 seconds", the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern is "the relevant fluctuation" and " The total time of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is 7 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol can vary depending on whether or not additional reservation occurs.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the content of the second main game hold is checked while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. While it is stopped, the performance related to the first decorative pattern may be determined. For example, when a "lightning bolt running performance" is executed on the performance display device SG at the start of a certain first decorative pattern fluctuation. Then, while the first decorative symbol variation is stopped, the subsequent variation content of the second decorative symbol (or the variation content of the second main game symbol) is confirmed, and the "Lightning Bolt" is confirmed in the next first decorative symbol variation. It may be determined whether or not to perform the "running performance" again. In addition, the more the "lightning bolt running performance" continues, the higher the expectation that the first decorative symbol variation (or the main game symbol variation included in the first decorative symbol variation) related to the performance will be a jackpot. It is desirable to configure it so that it is high. Note that the timing of checking the fluctuation content of the second decorative symbol (or the fluctuation content of the second main game symbol) may be changed, but if the timing is confirmed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts, While it is possible to check only the fluctuation contents related to the second main game pending, if you check at the timing when the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol stops or at the timing of the final stage of the fluctuation, it is possible to check the fluctuation contents related to the second main game pending. Since it is also possible to check the details of the fluctuation of the second main game hold, it is desirable that the timing of this check be after the final stage of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth embodiment)
Here, in the embodiment described above, a configuration in which two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device was described in detail, but such a configuration is different from the embodiment described above. It is not limited to only the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, in a game situation in which right-handed hitting (a firing mode in which a game ball is fired toward the right side of the board) is to be performed, a right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed indicating that right-handed hitting should be performed. It has a right-handed display control means SM27 that controls the display.

First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when execution of (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM, is started, in step 3400 (fourth), The sub control board S executes a right-hand hitting instruction display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100.

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-handed hitting instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) in FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time reduction gaming state. In this example, it is determined in step 3402 whether or not the time reduction game state is in effect; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a game state in which right-hand hitting should be executed (for example, in a probability fluctuation game). It may be configured to determine whether or not the game is in the state, whether the game is in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time saving game state, etc. Note that in the case of Yes in step 3402, the process moves to step 3406.

In the case of No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the right-handed hitting display control means SM27 sets a command to display a right-handed hitting instruction display on the production display device SG, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2100). Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed hitting instruction display. As shown in the figure, the right-hand hitting instruction display is displayed on the performance display device SG, and is configured to notify the player that he should play the game by playing right. Note that since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit the ball to the right, the right-hand ball instruction display is configured to have a high display priority (details will be described later). In addition, the displays that are basically always displayed on the performance display device SG, such as the second decorative pattern and the pending display (including the first pending display and the second pending display), which will be described later, are not the right-hand hit instruction display. It may be configured to avoid duplication.

In addition, the right-handed display mode in each game state or situation may always be the same display mode even if the game state or situation (such as when a special game is being executed or when a special game is not being executed) is different. It may be configured such that the display mode may be different (for example, the size may be different) depending on the state or situation. In addition, if the display format is configured to be different, for example, during a jackpot, the display format of the right-hand instruction display may be different depending on the opening mode of the big winning opening. The right hit instruction display during a jackpot where all the opening modes are long opening is the relatively large first display pattern, and the right hitting instruction display during a jackpot where all the opening modes of the big winning opening are short opening is relatively small. As the second display pattern, the right hit instruction display during a jackpot where long opening and short opening are mixed as the opening mode of the big winning opening is relatively large in the round where the big winning opening is long opening. Therefore, in a round in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time, the game may be configured to proceed while switching the right hit instruction display so that the second display pattern is relatively small.

In addition, if the configuration is such that a first right-handed instruction display with a relatively small display area and a second right-handed instruction display with a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handed instruction display, the following will be done. may be configured.
(1) In a situation where you should be hitting to the right (for example, a time-reduced game state), the first right-handed hitting instruction display is configured to be displayed, and in the situation where you should be hitting to the right, the game player can indicate that you are hitting from the left. If the machine detects this (for example, in the time-reduced game mode, if three game balls enter the first main game starting port A10, which allows balls to be hit left-handed), a second right-handed hit instruction display will be displayed. is displayed for a predetermined period of time (the first right-hand hit instruction display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-hitting instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, the upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-hitting instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. Furthermore, the display area for the first right-handed hitting instruction display and the display area for the second right-handed hitting instruction display do not overlap. Note that the display area for the first right-handed hitting instruction display and the display area for the second right-handed hitting instruction display may be configured to overlap, and in such a case, display priority is given to the second right-handed hitting instruction display. It may be configured such that the display priority of the first right-hand hitting instruction display is higher than that of the first right-hand hitting instruction display.
(3) The display priority in the performance display device SG is from the highest to lowest: ``1st right-handed instruction display → 2nd right-handed instruction display → Preview presentation → Decorative symbol that is changing'' (``2nd right-handed instruction display → 2nd right-handed instruction display → For example, if the display area of the second right-hitting instruction display and the display area of the fluctuating decorative pattern overlap, , the second right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed in front (visible).
(4) The first right hit instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during variation in the auxiliary game state {during main game symbol variation (during first decorative symbol variation, second decorative symbol variation)} does not overlap with the second decorative pattern (for example, when a "design enlargement effect" occurs in which at least a part of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged). However, the first right hit instruction display does not overlap with either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern while the fluctuation is stopped. In addition, the first right-handed instruction display is the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, for example, FIG. 87). Furthermore, the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with a predetermined preview effect {for example, a group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. Notice to be displayed)} does not overlap.
(5) The second right-hitting instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during the variation in the auxiliary game state {during the main game symbol variation (during the first decorative symbol variation, during the second decorative symbol variation)} (For example, not only when a "design enlargement effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged, but also during scrolling from top to bottom) , does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. In addition, the second right-handed instruction display includes the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, for example, FIG. 87). Furthermore, the second right-handed instruction display is for a predetermined preview performance {for example, a group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific preview performance {for example, a line preview (a notice that displays a character's lines)}. Both can overlap.
(6) When the first decorative pattern is changing the main game pattern (during the first decorative pattern changing, during the second decorative pattern changing), the first decorative pattern is the first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (e.g. , see FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87). Furthermore, when the first decorative symbol is changing the main game symbol (+the first decorative symbol is changing), a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect { For example, it may overlap with the dialogue preview (a preview displaying the character's dialogue).
(7) When the second decorative symbol is changing the main game symbol (during the first decorative symbol fluctuation, while the second decorative symbol is fluctuating), the second decorative symbol is the first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (e.g. , see FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87). Furthermore, when the second decorative symbol is changing the main game symbol (+the second decorative symbol is changing), it may overlap with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}; It does not overlap with a specific preview effect {for example, a line preview (a preview displaying a character's lines)}.
(8) The first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) overlaps with a predetermined preview effect {for example, group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific preview effect {for example, a line preview (a preview displaying a character's lines)}.
(9) The second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, see FIG. 87) overlaps with a predetermined preview effect {for example, group preview (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} However, it does not overlap with a specific preview effect {for example, a line preview (a preview displaying a character's lines)}.

Further, in a case where the display mode of the right-hand hitting instruction display can be different depending on the gaming state or situation, the following arrangement may be adopted.
(1) While a small hit is being executed, the right hit instruction display is relatively small (for example, one arrow, etc.), and the display mode is different from when a small hit is not being executed.
(2) A probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state when a special game is not being executed, a non-probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state when a special game is not being executed, and a case where a special game is being executed. is in a non-time saving gaming state.
(3) The time reduction gaming state includes a non-probability variable gaming state and time reduction gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state.
(4) When a special game is not being executed, the right-handed hitting instruction display is not displayed in the non-probability fluctuating game state and non-time reducing game state and the probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time reducing game state (the display prompting left-handed hitting is not displayed). On the other hand, while the special game is being executed, a right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed (a display prompting left-handed hitting is not displayed).
(5) In the time reduction game state, a right-handed batting instruction display is displayed (a display prompting left-handed batting is not displayed).
(6) If the configuration is such that the above-mentioned first right-hitting instruction display and second right-hitting instruction display can be displayed in both the non-time saving gaming state and the time saving gaming state, the non-time saving gaming state The display mode of the first right-handed instruction display is different between the time reduction game state and the time-reduced game state, but the display mode of the second right-handed instruction display is the same.
(7) The display encouraging left-handed batting will be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, for a predetermined period of time after changing from a situation where you should bat right-handed to a situation where you should bat left-handed, and an auxiliary game start opening that is easy to enter when executing a right-handed ball in a situation where you should bat left-handed. On the other hand, the right-handed batting instruction display is displayed for a predetermined period of time from when a right-handed hit is detected, such as when a game ball enters the ball (it becomes hidden after a prescribed period of time). The period during which the right-hand hit instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

In the case of No in step 3404, in step 3408, the right-handed hitting display control means SM27 sets a command to erase the right-handed hitting instruction display, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2100). Note that, in step 3408, if the right-hand hit instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram of the display mode and display position of decorative patterns in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the display mode and display position of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are illustrated depending on the combination of the game state and the background effect. In addition, all four display examples shown in the figure illustrate a situation in which the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) related to "7A" which is the jackpot symbol on the first main game side are stopped. ing. First, in the upper left part of the figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a non-probability fluctuating game state and the background effect being executed is a "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals arranged horizontally in a straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. Next, in the upper right part of the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a probability variable game state and the background effect being executed is a "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" in Chinese numerals, and the display position is three numbers arranged in a convex shape. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "daytime stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "black" for both "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both cases of "777" and "777".

Next, in the lower left part of the figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a non-probability fluctuating game state and the background effect being executed is a "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up diagonally in a straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. Next, in the lower right part of the figure, a case is illustrated in which the game state is a probability variable game state and the background effect being executed is a "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" in Chinese numerals, and the display position is three numbers arranged in a concave shape. Further, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777", which is an arithmetic numeral, and the display position is three numerals lined up horizontally in a straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "Night Stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "white" for both "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both cases of "777" and "777".

In this way, in the same figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the game state.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative pattern differs when the background effects differ.
(3) The display position of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the game state.
(4) The display position of the first decorative pattern differs when the background effects differ.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the game state differs.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects differ.
(7) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the game state differs.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects differ.
It is structured as follows.

In addition, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different depending on the background effect or the game state, as shown in FIG. In the case where the display mode is configured to be a combination of the above, the display mode of the first decorative pattern may be made different by making the patterns different (for numbers, Chinese numerals and arithmetic numerals may be used). They may be different or may be the same). Further, the display mode may be different depending on whether a pattern is attached or not. In addition, the display color of the numbers on the decorative pattern can indicate the gaming state after the jackpot ends in the event of a jackpot, and the jackpot is started when three numbers whose display color is green line up. In this case, it is not certain whether or not the probability fluctuating gaming state will occur after the end of the jackpot, but if the jackpot starts when three numbers with a display color of red line up, then after the jackpot ends, It may be configured such that it is almost certain (or deterministic) that the probability fluctuating game state will be entered; for example, in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state, "3" is green and "7" is red, In the probability variation game state, "3" and "7" may be red (in the probability variation game state, "3" has the same properties as "7"). In addition, the difference in nature between green and red is that if a jackpot is started when the green decorative pattern stops, a jackpot with 8 rounds (or more than 8 rounds) will start. Therefore, if the jackpot starts when the red decorative pattern stops, it may be configured so that a jackpot with 16 rounds is started, or the green decorative pattern becomes the reach. In this case, the percentage of the symbol change resulting in a jackpot is 10%, while if the red decorative symbol becomes a reach, the percentage of the pattern variation resulting in a jackpot may be configured to be 50%. good. In addition, when it becomes a reach at "1", the probability that the symbol change becomes a jackpot is 10%, while when it becomes a reach at "7", the probability that the symbol variation becomes a jackpot is 10%. It may be configured to be 50%. In addition, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to differ depending on the background effect or the game state, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not letters are attached to the numbers of the first decorative pattern. For example, in the non-probability fluctuating game state, the first decorative symbol "7" does not have the word "SUPER" attached to it, while in the probability fluctuating game state, the first decorative symbol "7" ” may be configured to have the characters “SUPER” attached to it. In addition, in the case of a jackpot with the first main game symbol (especially during a non-time reduction game state), the word "SUPER" is not attached to the 7, and when a jackpot with the second main game symbol (especially during a time reduction game state) ), the word "SUPER" is attached to the number "7", or the word "SUPER" is attached to the number "7" due to a jackpot in the first main game symbol (especially during the non-time saving game state). , the probability that the word "SUPER" will be attached to the number "7" may be increased when the second main game symbol hits the jackpot (particularly during the time reduction game state). Furthermore, if the word "SUPER" is attached, a 16R jackpot is confirmed (a configuration in which a 16R variable win is confirmed), but if the word "SUPER" is not attached, a 16R jackpot is confirmed. may not be determined (a structure in which the 16R probability variable hit is not determined) or the property may be such that the 4R jackpot is determined. Note that the first decorative pattern may be accompanied by the word "SUPER", but the second decorative pattern is not always accompanied by the word "SUPER". Further, the first decorative patterns other than "7" (especially even numbered symbols) are configured such that the letters "SUPER" are not attached thereto even if they are first decorative patterns.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, an example is shown of an area in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed on the performance display device SG. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left of the figure, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner around the center of the display area SG10, and the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner around the upper left of the display area SG10. It is configured so that The range of the display area SG10 in which decorative patterns can be displayed considering the execution of SP reach effect or the execution of a jackpot is such that the second decorative pattern is in the upper right corner of the figure, and the first decorative pattern is The range is as shown in the lower right corner of the drawing. As illustrated, in the fourth embodiment, the area where the first decorative pattern can be displayed is larger than the area where the second decorative pattern can be displayed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the display of the second decorative pattern is configured not to move during the variable display, while the display of the first decorative pattern moves during the variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10 Since the moving range of the first decorative pattern is larger than the moving range of the second decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram related to the variable display period of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the display are illustrated when the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed. First, in the upper left row of the figure, since the main game symbol is changing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. Next, in the upper right corner of the figure, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern become a ready-to-reach display. Next, in the lower left of the figure, a battle performance is executed as an SP reach performance. The display of the first decorative pattern is erased (it becomes hidden). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern continues to be displayed as the reach display, and if the player wants to check the status of the decorative pattern during the battle performance, the player can check the reach by visually checking the display of the second decorative pattern. You can recognize that it is inside. Thereafter, the battle performance is won, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the jackpot pattern. In this way, while the main game symbols are changing, there is a period when the display of the first decorative symbol is erased (while the battle performance is being executed), while the display of the second decorative symbol is always displayed, so the display of the first decorative symbol is The display period of the second decorative pattern is relatively longer than the display period of the pattern. Note that even when the first decorative pattern is a ready-to-reach display, the second decorative pattern may be configured not to be a ready-to-reach display. Further, even when the first decorative pattern executes the above-described pseudo-continuous variation, the second decorative pattern may be configured not to execute the pseudo-continuous variation. Further, the second decorative pattern does not need to be displayed all the time; for example, the second decorative pattern may be hidden during the period when the first decorative pattern is displayed, or it may cover the display area SG10 as a specific effect. When such an effect with a large display area is executed, the second decorative pattern may be hidden (difficult to see).

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram of decorative patterns used in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, the structure concerning the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to 4th Embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being displayed in a changing manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol has ended, and the jackpot symbol "7A" has stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped as the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals, which are common patterns on the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. Further, the second decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals when the first main game pattern changes, and when "7A" stops, "777" stops.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game pattern is changing, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being displayed in a changing manner. After that, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol has ended, and the jackpot symbol "7B" has stopped as the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, so the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped as the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. Note that the first decorative pattern has "777" stopped. On the other hand, the second decorative symbols are configured such that when the second main game symbol changes, the alphabet is used, and when "7B" stops, "AAA" stops. In this way, in the first decorative pattern, the pattern used when the first main game pattern changes and the pattern used when the second main game pattern changes are the same (the display area of the pattern and the design of the pattern are the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between fluctuations in the first main game symbol and fluctuations in the second main game symbol just by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbol fluctuates and the symbols used when the second main game symbol fluctuates are different (the designs of the fluctuating and stationary symbols are different). are doing). Note that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be displayed on the same display device, or may be displayed on different display devices. Further, a first hold display and a second hold display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. In addition, when displaying both decorative patterns and hold displays on different display devices, either display device may be a liquid crystal display device (having multiple liquid crystal display devices), or a liquid crystal display device may be used. It may also be a device and an LED lamp.

Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram of a stop display mode of decorative patterns in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, similarly to FIG. 80, a configuration related to a display mode of decorative patterns applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol has ended, and the jackpot symbol "7A" has stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped as the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals, which are common patterns on the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. Further, the second decorative pattern uses arithmetic numerals, and "777" is stopped.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing at a different timing from the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is finished, and the jackpot symbol "7A" (the same jackpot symbol as the upper part of the figure) has stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and The second decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed at the jackpot pattern. The first decorative pattern has the arithmetic numeral "333" stopped, and the second decorative pattern has the arithmetic numeral "777" stopped. In this way, the first decorative pattern has multiple types of stop display modes (such as "777" and "333") even when the main game pattern has the same stop pattern, while the second decorative pattern , when the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, only one type of stop display mode ("777") exists. In addition, as a specific example of a candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, first, when the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern is a stop display mode that suggests a 16R jackpot. are "333" and "777", and in the case of a stop display mode that suggests a jackpot of 8R (or 8R or more), they are "111" and "555", and 4R (or 4R or more). In the case of a stop display mode suggesting a jackpot, the numbers are "222", "444", "666", and "888". In addition, the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern is only "333" in the case of a stop display mode that suggests a jackpot of 16R, and a stop display mode that suggests a jackpot of 8R (or 8R or more). In the case of the display mode, there is only "111", and in the case of the stop display mode, which suggests a jackpot of 4R (or 4R or more), there is only "222". In addition, as another specific example, the stoppage of the first decorative pattern that suggests a transition to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot (transition to a probability-variable gaming state is almost certain (or definite)) Candidates for the display mode are "111", "333", "555", and "777", and do not suggest that the transition to the probability variable gaming state will occur after the jackpot ends (it is certain that the transition to the probability variable gaming state will occur). Candidates for the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern are "222", "444", "666", and "888". In addition, candidates for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that suggests a transition to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot (transition to the probability variable gaming state is almost certain (or definite)) are: The candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol is "222", which does not suggest a transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the jackpot ends (it is not certain that the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state will occur). Only.

Next, FIG. 82 is an example of display priorities in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, and those with high display priority are shown in the upper row, and those with low display priority are shown in the lower row. In addition, when display content with a high display priority and display content with a low display priority are displayed overlappingly, specifically, for example, when a right-hand hitting instruction display and a first decorative pattern are displayed overlappingly, When displaying the overlapping part, the right-hand hitting instruction display with a high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative pattern with a low display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer). is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (it is hidden behind the right-hand hitting instruction display and cannot be seen). In addition, the display priority in this example is as follows: "Error display → Right hit instruction display → Power saving display (power saving screen) → 2nd decorative pattern → Preview effect → 1st decorative pattern → Pending display" . The display priority may be changed, but display priority is given to "error display,""right hit instruction display," and "power saving display (power saving screen)" as they have a large impact on the player's profits. It is undesirable to change the degree. Furthermore, the order of display priority of the preview effect, the first decorative pattern, and the pending display may be changed, but the display priority of the preview effect, the first decorative pattern, and the pending display is that of the second decorative pattern. It is preferable to configure the priority level to be lower than the priority level. In addition, it is desirable to display the "right-handed hitting instruction display" in a position that is not hidden by other display objects (including accessories such as YK), and new display content that has a higher priority than the "right-handed hitting instruction display" should be added. In the case where the newly provided display content is displayed, it is preferable to configure the area where the newly provided display content is displayed so as not to overlap with the area where the "right-hand hitting instruction display" is displayed. In addition, the "power saving display (power saving screen)" is configured so that it is not displayed while symbol changes are being executed, and is not displayed when the symbol is being changed. By operating the button SB, cross button SB-2, etc., the power saving mode is switched to, and in the non-time reduction gaming state or the time reduction gaming state, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, This is a display indicating that the power of the gaming machine is in a power saving state while the fluctuation is stopped and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped. Note that the power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed when there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped. Although an example is shown in which the waiting movie is displayed together with the waiting movie at the timing when the waiting movie is to be executed, it may be configured as follows.
(1) There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed while the fluctuation is stopped and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is ended. There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and a power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed while the fluctuation is stopped and 262 seconds after the fluctuation stops (after the end of the standby movie). After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) will continue to be displayed.
(2) There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed while the fluctuation is stopped and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is ended. There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and a power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed while the fluctuation is stopped and 262 seconds after the fluctuation stops (after the end of the standby movie). After the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 48 seconds), the second standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, a power saving display (power saving screen) and a standby movie are displayed alternately.
(3) There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed while the fluctuation is stopped and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is ended. When there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and 272 seconds after the fluctuation stops (10 seconds after the end of the standby movie), a power saving display (power saving screen ) is displayed. After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) will continue to be displayed.
(4) There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed while the fluctuation is stopped and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is ended. When there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and 272 seconds after the fluctuation stops (10 seconds after the end of the standby movie), a power saving display (power saving screen ) is displayed. After the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 38 seconds), the second standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, a power saving display (power saving screen) and a standby movie are displayed alternately.

Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram related to priorities in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that this figure illustrates a configuration related to a display mode of decorative patterns applicable to the fourth embodiment, and has a configuration different from that of FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper row of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuating, and a right-handed instruction display is displayed (the game state is This is a time-reduced game state, and in the time-reduced game state, the game is played by hitting right. Thereafter, the area in which the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner overlaps with the area in which the right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed, and since the right-handed hitting instruction display has a higher priority, it is displayed in front. Further, the second decorative pattern and the right-hand hit instruction display are configured so that their display areas do not overlap.

Next, in the lower part of the same figure, a flock of sheep appears as a preview performance under a situation where the second main game symbol is changing and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The display area of this preview effect overlaps with both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and the priority is "second decorative pattern > preview effect > first decorative pattern," so the display of a sheep is When the and the first decorative pattern overlap, the sheep display is displayed on the front, and when the sheep display and the second decorative pattern overlap, the second decorative pattern is displayed on the front. Become. In addition, as in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment described later, when there are multiple hold display areas on the effect display device SG (hold display on the first main game side and hold display on the second main game side), display, a first hold display and a second hold display exist, etc.), a hold display area SG10 is newly provided at the lower left of the display area SG10 in the figure (not shown). Even if the right-hand hitting instruction display and the display area SG10 are configured so that they do not overlap, for example, the hold display at the top right of the display area SG10 is set as the first hold display, and the newly created hold display is set as the second hold display, etc. good.

With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is configured such that two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device SG, To provide a user-friendly game machine in which a player can check the status of decorative patterns even when he or she wants to by configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed even when the first decorative pattern is erased. In addition, when it is desired to show a performance to a player such as an SP ready-to-win performance, by erasing the display of the first decorative pattern, the desired performance can be made more conspicuous. In addition, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative pattern to be higher than that of the first decorative pattern, in a situation where it is desired to check the status of the decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is hidden, the second decorative pattern This means that the structure can be configured so that a situation in which the image cannot be visually recognized is unlikely to occur.

In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative pattern may be displayed as a combination of three patterns, while the second decorative pattern may be displayed as one pattern. In addition, there are four types of stop display modes for one pattern in the first decorative pattern, two types of stop display modes for one pattern in the second decorative pattern, and so on. The number of types of display modes may be greater than the number of types of stop display modes for one second decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the probability that the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol (display mode of a combination of three symbols) remains the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol changes is greater than the probability that the second decorative symbol is It can be configured such that the probability that the stop display mode remains the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol variations is higher. In addition, two display areas, "○" and "x", are provided as the display area for the second decorative pattern, and "○" is lit when the pattern fluctuation is stopped and displayed at a jackpot (or small win) symbol. If the symbol change results in a loss, an "x" may be displayed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the display of the second decorative pattern does not move on the display area SG10, and the "○" or "x" blinks to notify that the pattern is changing. It may be configured as follows. In addition, two display areas are provided as the display area for the second decorative symbol, an area in the shape of "○" and an area in the shape of "☆", and when the first main game symbol changes, the shape is in the shape of "○". A variable display and a stop display are executed in the area, and when the second main game symbol changes, a variable display and a stop display are executed in the "☆" shaped area, and "○" or A flashing "☆" will notify you that the symbol is changing, and if the symbol fluctuation is stopped at a jackpot (or small hit) symbol, a "○" or "☆" will be lit up and the symbol will change. When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a losing pattern, the "○" or "☆" may be displayed off. In such a case, in the first decorative pattern, the first main The symbols used when changing the game symbols and the symbols used when changing the second main game symbol are the same (the display area of the symbols and the design of the symbols are the same, and the player only visually recognizes the first decorative symbol) This is a symbol in which it is difficult to distinguish between fluctuations in the first main game symbol and fluctuations in the second main game symbol, and may be configured as, for example, "777"). In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the pattern used when the first main game pattern changes and the pattern used when the second main game pattern changes are different (the areas for variable display and stop display are different). (The designs of the fluctuating and statically displayed symbols are different.) Furthermore, as described above, in the case where two display areas are provided as display areas for the second decorative symbols, an area in the shape of an "○" and an area in the shape of a "☆", the first main game symbols If the jackpot (or small win) symbol is stopped and displayed, "○" will be lit up, and if the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot (or small win) symbol, "☆" will be displayed. If the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, a "○" is displayed off, and if the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, a "☆" is displayed. The stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is "333" when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a jackpot (or small win) symbol. It can be stopped and displayed in multiple types of stop display modes such as "" and "777", and when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, "326" or " The display may be configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in a plurality of types of stop display modes such as "761". With such a configuration, the number of types of stop display modes of the second decorative symbol is such that the second decorative symbol stops when the main game symbol (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) becomes a jackpot (or a small win). There is only one type of stop display mode that can be obtained, and there is only one type of stop display mode that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a loss. The number of types of stop display modes of the symbols is such that there are multiple types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a jackpot (or small hit), and There are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when a game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a loss.

(Example 1 of change from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the embodiment described above, a configuration in which two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device was described in detail, but such a configuration is different from the embodiment described above. It is not limited to only the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2200, the sub control board S executes the decorative pattern display content determination process, and then steps 3500 (fourth variation 1). In step 1), the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 84 in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2118-1 (fourth change 1) and step 2118-2 (fourth change 1), that is, in step 2106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 After temporarily storing the information in the pending information temporary storage area, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2116, or after the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2111. has not received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main side, in step 2118-1 (fourth change 1), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays the drawing pending counter value as the first pending display. The same number of pending images (lamp-shaped pending display on the production display device SG) are lit and displayed on the production display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (fourth change 1), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the drawing reservation counter value as a numerical value on the effect display device SG as a second reservation display, and The process moves to step 2200. Note that the display mode of the second hold display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking in LED lamps that is different from the display on the effect display device SG. It is sufficient that the hold display and the second hold display are different.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth variation 1) in FIG. 84 in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3508, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3502, the process moves to step 3510.

Next, in step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 3510, in step 3512 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3514, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 adjusts the decorative pattern variation start timing based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine whether it has been reached. If Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern variation display command (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , the process moves to step 3526.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and the process moves to step 3526.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25), the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect display control means SM24) Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has arrived. If Yes in step 3522, in step 3524, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 3526. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3522, the process moves to step 3526.

Next, in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, by referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, (Determine whether information indicating that the symbol will be stopped and displayed has been received.) If Yes in step 3526, in step 3528, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). be done) Next, in step 3530, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2400). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 3510 or step 3526, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram related to a change in the hold display in modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left corner of the figure, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Note that the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Further, decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are stopped and displayed. After that, as the hold on the first main game side is exhausted and the next symbol change starts, the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side change. (The display that the number of pending games on the first main game side is 2 changes to the display that it is 1). After that, due to the same symbol change, a reservation occurs on the first main game side (a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10), and the number of reservations on the first main game side changes, so that the number of reservations on the first main game side changes. The first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the first main game side change (change from the display that the number of pending items on the first main game side is 1 to the display that the number of pending items is 2) to do). In this way, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in the display mode at the hold expiration timing when symbol fluctuation starts and the hold occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start opening. is configured to change.

Next, in the middle left row, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Note that the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Further, decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, during the same change, a pending change effect (a presentation that can change the display mode of pending) is executed as a pending look-ahead effect. In addition, the performance mode of the hold change effect shown in the same figure is a performance that targets the hold on the first main game side, and the display form of the first hold display changes when the first hold display is hit by a flame. It is a performance that provokes the question of whether or not it is true. Thereafter, as a result of the hold change effect, the first hold display on the first main game side changes, while the second hold display on the first main game side does not change. In this way, when the pending pre-read effect is executed, only the first pending display can change, and the second pending display is configured not to change. Furthermore, even when a hold change effect is executed for hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side can change, while the second hold display on the second main game side can change. It is structured so that it does not change. Note that the pending look-ahead effect is executed by the processing exemplified in the second embodiment and the like described above.

As illustrated in the figure, the characteristics of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows:
(1) When the number of reservations is the same, the display manner of the first reservation display may change, while the display manner of the second reservation display does not change.
(2) The display mode of the first hold display can change even without an increase or decrease in the number of holds (exhaustion of hold or occurrence of hold), while the display form of the second hold display does not change unless there is an increase or decrease in the number of holds.
(3) When executing a performance in which an action is executed on a display related to a hold and the display mode of the hold changes as a hold change effect, the hold display that is the target of the effect is the first hold display, The hold change effect is not executed for the second hold display.

Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram related to the hold display for each gaming state in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the presence or absence of display and the display mode of the first suspension display and the second suspension display in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, which are applicable in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, are shown. A configuration example is illustrated. First, in <<Example 1>> shown in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in both the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. The display mode of the first hold display is different between the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state (the first hold display related to the first main game side and the first hold display related to the second main game side are different). Both are different). In <<Example 1>> shown in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display corresponds to the hold on the first main game side, the first hold display corresponds to the hold on the second main game side, and the first hold display corresponds to the hold on the second main game side. A second hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side and a second hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side are respectively displayed, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side, Neither the first hold display (the area where the first hold display is displayed) nor the second hold display (the area where the second hold display is displayed) is shared.

Next, in <<Example 2>> shown in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. A second pending display on the side and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, a first hold display on the second main game side, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is played by executing a right-handed hit in the time-reduced game state, varying the second main game symbol (by letting the game ball enter the second main game starting port B10), and proceeding with the game. In the case of a Pachinko gaming machine (particularly in the case of a gaming machine where the hold on the second main game side takes priority over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is held by the player. Since it is not very important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be configured to be hidden. Furthermore, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the configuration is such that the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side, so the second reservation display on the first main game side is not displayed. It is configured like this.

Next, in <<Example 3>> shown in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the first main game side are displayed. The second hold display on the side is displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, a first hold display on the second main game side, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is played by executing a right-handed hit in the time-reduced game state, varying the second main game symbol (by letting the game ball enter the second main game starting port B10), and proceeding with the game. In the case of a Pachinko gaming machine (particularly in the case of a gaming machine where the hold on the second main game side takes priority over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is held by the player. Since it is not very important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be hidden. In addition, it is possible to create a game in which the game is progressed by executing a left-handed hit in the non-time saving game state and changing the first main game symbol (by letting the game ball enter the first main game starting port A10). In the case of a pachinko game machine (particularly when the second main game starting port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball that is hit left), the holding on the second main game side is not very important for the player. , the first pending display on the second main game side may be configured to be hidden. Even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are configured to be always displayed. In addition, in the figure, an example is illustrated in which the configuration regarding the presence or absence of a hold display is different between the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-probability variation gaming state and the probability variation The configuration regarding the presence or absence of a hold display may be different depending on the gaming state, or the configuration regarding the presence or absence of a hold display may be different depending on the production mode. Note that the configuration shown in <<Example 1>> where the display mode of the first hold display differs due to the difference in the gaming state shown in <<Example 1>> but the display form of the second hold display does not differ is the configuration shown in <<Example 2>> and <<Example 1>>. It is also applicable to the configuration 3≫. As shown above in <<Example 1>><<Example2>><<Example3>>,
(1) If the gaming states differ (for example, between a non-time saving gaming state and a time saving gaming state, or between a non-probability variable gaming state and a probability variable gaming state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the display manner of the first pending display is different, but the display manner of the second pending display is the same.
(2) If the production modes are different (for example, between the daytime stage in Fig. 77 and the night stage in Fig. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that a pending look-ahead production is being executed and a production stage other than the predetermined production stage) (or depending on which one of the plurality of types of production stages that can be manually switched), the display mode of the first pending display is different, but the display mode of the second pending display is the same.
(3) If the gaming states differ (for example, between a non-time saving gaming state and a time saving gaming state, or between a non-probability variable gaming state and a probability variable gaming state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the presence or absence of the first pending display is different, but the second pending display is always displayed regardless of the gaming state (however, the second pending display is always displayed in cases such as special gaming states or error states, which have priority over the pending display). (In a state in which there is information to be displayed, neither the first pending display nor the second pending display may be displayed).
(4) If the production modes are different (for example, between the daytime stage in Fig. 77 and the night stage in Fig. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that a pending look-ahead production is being executed and a production stage other than the predetermined production stage) (or depending on which one of multiple types of production stages that can be manually switched), whether or not the first suspension display is displayed differs, but regardless of which production mode the second suspension display is displayed. is always displayed (However, in display modes that have information that should be displayed with priority over the pending display, such as demo screen display or error display, neither the first pending display nor the second pending display will be displayed. good).
It has the following characteristics. Note that the above features are applicable to both the reservation on the first main game side and the reservation on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram related to erasing the pending display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Further, the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Further, decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-reach display in the same variation, and then a battle production is executed as an SP ready-to-reach production in the same variation. While the battle performance is being executed, the first pending display is erased (hidden) on both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second pending display is displayed on both the first main game side and the second main game side. Both displays on the second main game side are continuously displayed. As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is The first pending display is configured to be erased because the user wants to exclusively execute the battle effect (using most of the display area SG10). Furthermore, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second pending display on the side and the second pending display on the second main game side are configured to be always displayed. In the figure, when SP reach is executed, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display is hidden. Although the configuration is illustrated in which the pending display (the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) remains displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. (or all the time), the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second hold display (the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden. The second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side may be configured to remain displayed. Furthermore, when executing SP reach, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display (first pending display on the second main game side) is hidden. The configuration in which the second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side remain displayed may be applied at all times during the execution period of SP reach, or may be applied during the execution period of SP reach. May be applied to some periods.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment, two pending displays, the first pending display and the second pending display, are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first pending display, the display mode changes to suggest the expectation level of jackpot related to the pending, and when the player wants to draw attention to the SP reach effect, the display is erased, etc. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by adjusting the display mode (display presence or absence) to match the situation and by using it as part of a performance that suggests a jackpot or the like. In addition, by configuring the second pending display to always be displayed and the display format not to change, when a player wants to check the current pending number, the player can recognize the pending number without causing any doubts. It is configured like this.

Note that the first modification from the fourth embodiment may be configured to display a suspended digestion transmission image as exemplified in the third modification from the second embodiment. In the case of such a configuration, it may be configured such that the suspended digestion transmission image corresponding to the first suspension display is displayed, and the suspended digestion transmission image corresponding to the second suspension display is not displayed. In addition, the hold display corresponding to the first hold display is a display mode in which the hold display mode is the same as or similar to the first hold display, for example, the first hold display is a display in the shape of an "○". , and if the display color is "red", "green", "blue", or "white", the pending digestion communication image corresponding to the first pending display will also be "○". An example of such a configuration is that the display is in the shape of ``, and the display color is any one of ``red,'' ``green,'' ``blue,'' and ``white.'' Furthermore, the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the hold on the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is extinguished, and the display mode of the first hold display immediately after the hold on the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is exhausted. The display mode of the pending digestion transmission image may be configured to be the same display.

In addition, when the configuration is such that the pending digestion transmission image can be displayed, the configuration may be as follows. Note that only one of the following configurations may be employed, or a plurality of components may be combined. In addition, a configuration employing only one component or a configuration combining a plurality of components, and one or more of the configurations of <<Example 1>>, <<Example 2>>, or <<Example 3>> in FIG. You may also combine them.
(1) In the non-time saving game state, the suspended consumption transmission image on the first main game side can be displayed, but the suspended consumption transmission image on the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-time saving game state, both the first main game-side pending consumption transmission image and the second main game side pending consumption transmission image can be displayed.
(3) In the time reduction game state, the second main game side's pending consumption transmission image can be displayed, but the first main game side's pending consumption transmission image is not displayed.
(4) In the time reduction game state, it is possible to display both the first main game-side pending completion notification image and the second main game-side pending completion notification image.
(5) In the non-time saving game state, the pending consumption transmission image can be displayed, but in the time saving game state, the pending consumption transmission image is not displayed.
(6) The proportion of displaying the suspended consumption transmission image in the non-time reduction gaming state is higher than the proportion of displaying the suspended consumption transmission image in the non-time reduction gaming state (for example, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game (The side hold digestion transmission image is always displayed)
(7) In the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the hold-up consumption transmission image on the first main game side can be changed during symbol variation.
(8) In the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the second main game-side pending consumption transmission image does not change during symbol variation (if configured so that the second main game side pending consumption transmission image can be displayed).
(9) The display mode of the pending consumption transmission image on the second main game side in the time reduction game state can be changed during symbol variation. However, the held consumption transmission image on the second main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state changes during symbol fluctuations at a higher rate than the rate at which the held digestion transmission image on the first main game side changes during symbol variation in the non-time reduction gaming state. The percentage of people who do so is lower.
(10) In the time reduction game state, the display mode of the first main game-side pending consumption transmission image does not change during symbol variation (if configured so that the second main game side pending consumption transmission image can be displayed).
(11) Unlike the above-mentioned pending display, which has two pending displays, such as a first pending display and a second pending display, the pending digestion transmission image has a first pending display and a second pending display. It does not have two pending digestive transmission images such as images, but only one pending digestive transmission image.
(12) During SP reach, etc., the first pending display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the pending digestion transmission image remains displayed.
It may be configured as described above. In addition, although the above describes the configuration related to the display of the pending consumption transmission image in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, ” may be replaced with “a non-probability variable gaming state and a probability variable gaming state”, or a configuration may be applied in which “performance mode A and production mode B” are replaced.

(Fifth embodiment)
Here, in the embodiment described above, the effect display device SG is configured to display two displays of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern as the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to one main game pattern. , the configuration in which two decorative patterns are displayed simultaneously on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative patterns are displayed simultaneously on the effect display device SG, which is different from the configuration described above, is defined as a fifth embodiment, and only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 90 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that a distribution starting port unit C50 including a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10 is provided. The details of the distribution starting port unit C50 will be described later, but as shown in the figure, the distribution starting port unit C50 is provided with a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to either the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10. In addition, the game balls flowing down the right side of the gaming area are configured to easily flow down to the vicinity of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11hd attached to the distribution starting port unit C50. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since the second main game starting port electric accessory B11hd is configured to be easily opened when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the time saving game state (the auxiliary game time saving flag is On), by executing a right-handed hit, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11hd opens and the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 (second main game starting port B10). The game ball that enters the distribution starting port unit C50 from the vicinity of the starting port electric accessory B11hd is configured so that it is difficult to enter the first main game starting port A10, but it is easy to enter the second main game starting port B10. ing).

In the fifth embodiment, the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG has a second decorative pattern display area SG14 (hereinafter referred to as sub-area SG14), which is an area where the second decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, and a second decorative pattern display area SG14 (hereinafter referred to as sub-region SG14). A first decorative pattern display area SG15 (hereinafter referred to as main area SG15), which is an area where one decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, and a common area that displays both the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. It has a hold display section SG16 and a hold passage route SG17 through which a hold extinguished display, which is a display related to an expired hold, passes. Furthermore, at the top of the performance display device SG, there is provided a movable accessory YK for performance that is driven when a performance that prompts the player to decide whether or not he will hit the jackpot, such as an SP reach performance, is executed. There is.

Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and an operational view of the distribution starting port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution starting port unit C50 has a common ball entry port C51 into which game balls flowing down the gaming area D30 can enter, and a game ball provided below the common ball entry port C51 that allows game balls flowing down from the common ball entry port C51 to enter. A starting port distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts left and right around a spindle) that regularly distributes balls in the left-right direction, and a starting port distribution member C50y provided below the starting port distribution member C50y. The main game starting port A10 includes a first main game starting port A10, and a second main game starting port B10 provided below the starting port distribution member C50y. As shown by the dotted line in the same figure, the distribution starting port unit C50 configured in this way transfers game balls that have flowed into the common ball entry port C51 by tilting the starting port distribution member C50y in the left and right direction. It is configured to guide the player to either the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10. For example, the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the left is the "first position", and the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the right is the "second position". In the case of "position", under the situation where the starting port distribution member C50y is in the "second position", the game ball that has flowed into the common ball entry port C51 is guided to the first main game starting port A10 side, While the starting port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", under the situation where the starting port distribution member C50y is in the "first position", the game balls that have flowed into the common ball entrance C51 are transferred to the second main ball slot. At the same time as being guided to the game starting port B10 side, the starting port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In this example, the tilting operation of the starting port distribution member C50y in the left and right direction is performed by the weight of the game balls, so that mechanically, the game balls flowing into the common ball entry port C51 are , game balls are alternately distributed to either one of the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 (after distributing one game ball toward either one, one toward the other) It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since it is possible to execute a parallel lottery and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are configured to be variable at the same time, by having the distribution starting port unit C50. , the structure is such that the holding on the first main game side and the holding on the second main game side can occur approximately equally, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols can be frequently changed at the same time. has been done.

Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) in FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400(1) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). With this configuration, fluctuations on the second main game side can start even when there are fluctuations on the first main game side, and fluctuations on the first main game side can also start when fluctuations on the second main game side occur. (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, this process is approximately the same process for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, so the first main game symbol side will be mainly explained, and the process for the second main game symbol side will be explained below. It is written in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the game content determining means MN determines whether the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is operating), and the first main game symbol is not fluctuating (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not fluctuating). ), and the main game symbols must be on hold, and the small winning game must not be in progress. In other words, since parallel lottery can be executed, when executing the process related to the first main game symbol, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol is fluctuating, but when the first main game symbol is fluctuating, there is no problem. If so, the fluctuation start condition regarding the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, in step 1407-2, the game content determining means MN reads out the main game side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the game content determining means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the pending information and shifts the remaining pending information (discontinues pending). Next, in step 1407-4, the game content determining means MN executes a main game symbol winning/failure lottery based on the main game side random numbers and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the game content determining means MN determines stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the win/fail lottery results, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the game content determining means MN determines based on the main game symbol winning/failure lottery result and the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (in particular, the fluctuation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the game content determining means MN issues commands regarding information regarding the determined main game symbols and game state information (commands to the sub-control board S side, such as symbol fluctuation display start instruction commands). Set. Next, in step 1407-8, the game content determining means MN uses the first main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C1 (the second main game symbol Set the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the game content determining means MN selects the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On part B21g), variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the game content determining means MN turns on the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-1, in step 1407-11, the game content determining means MN determines whether the first (second) fluctuating flag is on. If Yes in step 1407-11, the process moves to step 1407-12.

Next, in step 1407-12, the game content determining means MN determines whether a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the game content determining means MN selects the first main game symbol display section A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process moves to step 1407-17. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the game content determining means MN issues the first (second) forced stop execution command (a command to the sub side, and the first main game side has won the jackpot). If the second main game symbol is a loss, the second main game symbol is a loss and the information is forcibly stopped. If the second main game symbol is a jackpot, the first main game symbol is a loss and the information is forcibly stopped. (It is sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command sending process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-16, the game content determining means MN selects the first main game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbols on part B21g) is stopped with the stopped symbols as losing symbols, the losing symbols are controlled to be displayed as confirmed stopped symbols, and the process moves to step 1407-17. In this way, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, the fluctuating second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the second main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol. When the game stops at a symbol, the first main game symbol which is changing is forcibly stopped due to a loss. In addition, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, a command to force the sub-control board S to stop is set immediately before the forced stop. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

Next, in step 1407-17, the game content determining means MN sends information (symbol finalization display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol fluctuation is finished. set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command sending process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-18, the game content determining means MN turns off the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-19. Next, in step 1407-19, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If YES in step 1407-19, the game content determining means MN turns on the conditional device activation flag in step 1407-20, and proceeds to step 1450. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-19, the process moves to step 1450 without executing the process in step 1407-20.

Next, in step 1450, the game content determining means MN executes the aforementioned specific game end determination process, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1500). Note that even in the case of No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1500).

Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 show the main game table 3 used when determining the variation mode of the first main game symbol and the variation mode used when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol in the fifth embodiment. This is the main game table 3. The contents of the table are the same as in the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that the performance contents corresponding to the determined variation mode of the main game symbols will be described later.

Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fifth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth), and step 3300 (fifth), that is, the sub When the main control unit SM starts executing the repeat processing routine (b), in step 2050 (fifth), the sub control board S executes a symbol standby display control process, which will be described later, and then proceeds to step 2100. Transition. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the pending information management process in step 2100, in step 2200 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes a decorative pattern display content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300. do. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the first decorative pattern display control process in step 2300, in step 2350 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the second decorative pattern display control process, which will be described later. The process moves to step 2400. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process in step 2400, in step 2500 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the background effect control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3300 (fifth), the sub control board S executes accessory drive control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and displays the standby preparation flag (both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped). flag) is off. If Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines that both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are newly displayed in a stopped state (the first decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state). Under the situation, the second decorative pattern is newly displayed as a stop display, or in a situation where the second decorative pattern is displayed as a stop display, the first decorative pattern is newly displayed as a stop display. judge. If Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 controls the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (which is an increment timer, and displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a stopped state). Start a timer (to measure the elapsed time since the start). Next, in step 2058, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. Incidentally, if the answer in step 2052 is No, the process also moves to step 2060.

Next, in step 2060, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and sets the timer value to the standby execution value (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the main area is placed in a standby state). It is determined whether or not the timer value has exceeded 20 seconds (in this example, 20 seconds). If Yes in step 2060, in step 2062, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the main area in a standby state. Note that the standby state ends when either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern starts variable display. Here, the right part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, a first decorative pattern that is a decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern and a second decorative pattern that is a decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern are displayed. The decorative patterns are configured to be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and one of them is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub area. Note that the main area is configured so that the area that can be displayed is larger than that of the sub-area. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern displayed in the main area is displayed as a pattern and numbers, and the decorative pattern displayed in the sub area is configured to be displayed only in numbers (numbers The first decorative pattern is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative pattern is a Chinese numeral). Further, as illustrated in the same figure, in a situation where the first decorative pattern is displayed as a picture and numbers in the main area, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. After 20 seconds have elapsed, the display of the first decorative pattern in the main area is configured to display only the pattern. This display of only the picture is called a standby state. Note that the main area and the sub area may be provided within the same liquid crystal (for example, within the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), or may be provided in separate devices. As a specific example of providing them in separate devices, for example, an effect display device A and a effect display device B are provided as effect display devices, and the effect display device A has a main area, and the effect display device B has a main area. It may have a sub-area, and in the case of such a configuration, the size of the display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. good. Further, the number of effect display devices and the number of decorative pattern display areas (main area, sub area, etc.) may be set to three or more (a first area, a second area, a third area, etc. are provided).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2064, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 resets and stops the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t. Next, in step 2066, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves on to the next process (the process of step 2100). . Note that even in the case of No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2100).

Next, FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed as pictures and numbers, and the decorative patterns displayed in the sub area are configured as numbers only. The numbers displayed in the design are arithmetic numerals, and the numbers displayed in the second decorative design are Chinese numerals. Moreover, the number of types of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are four types each. Although the details will be described later, when there is a trigger hold that is a hold regarding whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, the display mode of the decorative pattern will be the first sub-area pattern table or the second sub-area pattern table. That is, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern in the sub-area, and the display mode of the first decorative pattern when a trigger hold is present. and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are the same.

Next, FIG. 99 shows pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are steps 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, in step 2128 (second), the drawing pending information display control means After the SM22 deletes the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information, in step 2130 (fifth), the illustrated hold information display control means SM22 determines that the hold to be expired this time is a hold related to the first main game side. Determine whether it exists or not. In the case of Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether the reservation display that is variably displayed in the main area of the main route (reservation passage route) passes. A command is set to execute a pending expiry display (an effect that allows the player to recognize that the pending is extinguished) in which the player passes through the area (details will be described later), and the process moves to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2132 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not in a standby state. do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 controls the sub route (an area in the reservation passage route through which the reservation display fluctuatingly displayed in the sub area passes). A command is set to execute the pending consumption display (details will be described later), and the process moves to step 2138 (fifth). Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2132 (fifth), the process moves to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, if the hold is exhausted on the first main game side, or if the hold is exhausted in the standby state, the hold is exhausted display is executed in the main route, and the hold is exhausted in the standby state. If the hold on the second main game side is exhausted in a situation where the game is not in the current state, the hold extinguishment display is executed in the sub route.

Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether trigger hold exists within the hold. If Yes in step 2138 (fifth), in step 3050 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes a reservation change display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S moves to step 2116 without executing the process of step 3050 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the pending change display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether the suspension is a suspension that passes through the first main route after the trigger suspension occurs. If Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether the trigger hold is a hold that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation change scenario determination table for jackpot, and based on the number of reservations at the time of trigger reservation occurrence, the reservation change scenario (trigger reservation A scenario is determined to determine when and how the pending display mode related to the trigger pending changes until such symbol variation is started.

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for jackpot and a table for loss are illustrated as pending change scenario determination tables. As shown in the figure, the hold change scenario is based on the number of holds at the time the trigger hold occurs (the number of holds that will be cleared before the trigger hold occurs at the time the trigger hold occurs) and the number of holds related to the trigger hold. It will be determined by the result of the symbol change. In addition, the "1 change before" shown in the diagram is the pending display mode immediately before the trigger hold is extinguished, and the jackpot expectation of the "1 change before" pending display mode (if the trigger hold becomes a jackpot) The ratio of winnings to the sum of winnings and losses) goes from rainbow to red to blue. In addition, the pending display mode is configured to be able to change every time the symbol changes, but as the trigger hold period approaches, the pending display mode does not change or changes to a display mode that increases the expectation of a jackpot. It is configured to go. That is, as the trigger hold is about to expire, it is configured so that the hold display mode does not change to a hold display mode with a low expectation of a jackpot, and is configured so as not to spoil the player's expectations for the trigger hold.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 3058, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation passage route display color determination table for jackpot, determines the display color of the reservation passage route, and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 2116). Further, if No in step 3054, in step 3060, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation change scenario determination table for failure and determines the reservation change scenario based on the number of reservations when trigger reservation occurs. do. Next, in step 3062, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the reservation passage route display color determination table for use in case of failure, determines the display color of the reservation passage route, and performs the next process (the process of step 2116). ). Note that even in the case of No in step 3052, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2116).

Here, in the lower part of the same figure, a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss are shown as a reservation passing route display color determination table. As shown in the figure, the display color of the hold passing route is determined by the validity result of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. The jackpot expectation level of the hold passing route display color (the ratio of the jackpot to the total of the cases where the trigger hold is a jackpot and the case where it is a loss) is from the highest to the highest: "Rainbow → Red → Blue → No change" It becomes. Although the hold passage route is configured to be determined only at the first hold extinguishing timing after the trigger hold occurs, it is not limited to this, and is configured so that it can change every time until the trigger hold is extinguished. You can. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the display mode so that it does not change to a display mode with a low jackpot expectation level as the expiry of the trigger hold approaches, similar to the change in the hold display mode described above (hold change effect). . In addition, regarding changes in the display mode of the pending display mode and the display mode of the pending passing route display color, it is not specifically shown at what timing in the symbol variation, but there is a preview effect at the start of the symbol variation, and during the symbol variation. The display mode may be configured to change at various timings according to the execution timing, when the hold is generated, when the hold is extinguished, etc., and by such a configuration, the player can always It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the pending display mode or the pending passing route display color changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the expectation level of the jackpot of the trigger hold is suggested by the display color of the hold pass route SG17, which is the display color of the hold pass route SG17 (the trigger hold is more likely to be a loss when the trigger hold is a jackpot). However, the present invention is not limited to this. and has a display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, and when the display mode is configured to suggest the jackpot expectation of symbol fluctuation related to the pending digestion transmission image, the display color of the pending passage route , it may be configured such that the display manner of the pending consumption transmission image can be different, that is, the jackpot expectation level suggested by the pending consumption transmission image may be different, or the display manner of the pending consumption transmission image may be changed easily. may be configured differently. In addition, the display color of the hold passage route is configured such that the effect of the symbol variation related to the expired hold that has passed through the hold pass route SG17 may be different (the rate at which the effect with high expectation of jackpot is executed may be different). You may.

Next, FIG. 101 is an image diagram of a reservation occurrence display in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery is configured to be able to be executed, a situation in which the first main game side and the second main game side are held simultaneously will frequently occur. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed in a common hold display section SG16 that is common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In addition, in the order of numbers "1 → 2 → 3... → 8" shown in the same figure, regardless of whether the reservation that has occurred is the reservation on the first main game side or the second main game side, First, the common hold display section SG16 is configured to display holds in the order in which they occur (the most recent hold is displayed in the No. 1 area, and the holds that have already been displayed are displayed in the order of ``1 → 2''). ”). In addition, the hold display mode is the same for the first main game side hold display and the second main game side hold display side, and just by visually recognizing the common hold display section SG16, it is difficult to tell whether the first main game side is playing or not. The configuration is such that it is impossible to determine whether the display is on hold for the second main game side or the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 102 is an image diagram of a pending consumption display in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the display on the common reservation display section SG16 when the number of reservations is 4 is illustrated. As shown in the figure, two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side are displayed, and number 1 is "A1" which is the hold on the first main game side, "B1", which is a hold on the second main game side, is displayed at No. 2, "A2", which is a hold on the first main game side, is displayed at No. 4, and "B2", which is a hold on the second main game side, is displayed at No. 4. has been done. Under such circumstances, the hold display when the hold is exhausted will be detailed below.

The middle row of the figure is an example of the order of symbol variations related to the four reservations mentioned above, and the lower row of the figure is an example of how the reservation display is erased in the common reservation display section SG16. With reference to these, the manner in which the symbol variation in the fifth embodiment is executed and the pending display is erased will be described in detail. First, as the symbol variation related to A1, which is pending on the first main game side, starts to be executed, the pending display in the No. 1 area, which is the pending display related to A1, is erased, and the remaining pending items are shifted and displayed. Ru. The display on the common reservation display section SG16 is "No. 1: B1, No. 2: A2, No. 3: B2". Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed at the symbol variation start timing related to A1. After 10 seconds thereafter, the symbol variation related to B1, which is pending on the second main game side, starts to be executed. The display on the common reservation display section SG16 is "No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2". Thereafter, the symbol variation related to B1 ends 20 seconds after the start of the symbol variation related to A1. Note that the symbol variation related to A1 is still changing. As the symbol variation related to B1 is completed, the pending symbol related to B2 is extinguished and the symbol variation starts, but in the display in the common pending display section SG16, the pending display related to "A2" is not displayed. The system is configured so that the pending display in the first area that has been displayed is deleted. That is, visually, from the state in which the No. 1 and No. 2 areas in the common reservation display section SG16 are lit, the display in the No. 1 area goes out, and then the display in the No. 2 area changes to the No. 1 area. It will be displayed in a shifted manner. On the other hand, since the hold that was actually completed is the hold related to "B2", the display in the No. 1 area is the hold related to "A2". In this way, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the hold that is actually consumed is on the first main game side or the second main game side, the hold display displayed in the No. 1 area is It will be erased (turned off).

Next, FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a reservation passage route in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, a reserved passage route SG17 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area SG10. The hold passage route includes a main route, which is an area through which the hold display that is variably displayed in the main area passes, and a subroute, which is an area through which the hold display that is variably displayed in the sub area passes. First, the left part of the figure is an example in which the hold expiry display when the hold is extinguished passes through the main route. In a situation where you are not in a standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the No. 1 area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the No. 2 area). The case where "A1", which is pending on the first main game side, is played out first will be explained. First, when "A1" is consumed, the pending display in the No. 1 area is erased, and the pending display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the first main game side related to the hold of "A1" is executed in the main area, the hold extinguishment display related to "A1" will pass through the main route and go towards the main area. Become. Next, the right part of the figure is an example of a case where the pending expiry display when the pending is expired passes through a subroute. In a situation where you are not in a standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the No. 1 area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the No. 2 area). The case where "B1", which is pending on the second main game side, is played out first will be explained. First, when "B1" is consumed, the pending display in the No. 1 area is erased, and the pending display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the hold of "B1" is executed in the sub area, the hold extinguishment display related to "B1" will pass through the sub route and go towards the sub area. . In this way, in the fifth embodiment, depending on whether the symbol variation is executed in the main area or in the sub-area, the area through which the pending extinguishment display in the pending passage route SG17 passes is a sub-route which is the main route. The configuration is such that it is determined whether the

Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time lookahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 are deleted. That is, in the fifth embodiment, even if there is a hold on the second main game side, the first main game The system is configured such that a prefetch effect related to the reservation on the side can be executed. In addition, in this example, the look-ahead effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time reduction game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect can also be executed in the time reduction game state. It may be configured so that it can be done. In addition, although it has been configured so that the pre-read lottery on the first main game side can be executed only when winning a prize, that is, when a reservation occurs, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main game symbol change start timing and the main game symbol change It may be configured such that the pre-read lottery can be executed even at intermediate timings.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth), and step 2616 (fifth), that is, in step 2602 (fifth), the suspension look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means The SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not it is currently in a time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process moves to step 2604, and if No in step 2602 (fifth), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2118).

In addition, in step 2608, when the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26 determines that the new holding is a holding that will result in a jackpot, in step 2610 (fifth), the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/3) is executed as a pre-read lottery when winning a prize, and the process moves to step 2620. Further, in step 2612, when the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26 determines that the new holding is a group C hold, in step 2616 (fifth), the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k determines the predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/10) A pre-read lottery is executed when winning a prize (1/10 in this example), and the process moves to step 2620. In this manner, the fifth embodiment is configured such that even when there is a hold on the first main game side, a pre-read effect related to the hold on the second main game side can be executed. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect can also be executed in the time save game state. It may be configured so that it can be done. In addition, although it is configured such that the pre-read lottery on the second main game side can be executed only when winning a prize, that is, when a reservation occurs, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main game symbol change start timing and the main game symbol change It may be configured such that the pre-read lottery can be executed even at intermediate timings. Further, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the winning rate is set to be the same as the pre-read lottery winning rate on the first main game side.

Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2249-1, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2249-1, in step 2249-2, the drawing display content determining means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether there is no trigger hold within the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-3, in step 2249-5, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly expired hold is a hold related to the first main game side. If Yes in step 2249-5, in step 2249-6, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the main area. Next, in step 2249-7, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation mode of the first main game symbol, and 1. Determine the stopping pattern and variation mode of the decorative pattern. Next, in step 2249-8, the illustration display content determination means SM21n selects the first symbol content determination flag (in response to symbol fluctuations on the first main game side) in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when the relevant content is determined is turned on, and the process moves to step 3350 (fifth).

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-5, in step 2249-10, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol change related to the newly expired hold is a symbol change from the standby state. judge. If Yes in step 2249-10, in step 2249-11, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the decorative pattern display area to be the main area. Next, in step 2249-12, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation modes of the second main game symbols, and The stop pattern and variation mode of the second decorative pattern are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-15. In this way, when a new decorative pattern starts changing from the standby state, it is displayed in a changing manner in the main area regardless of whether the decorative pattern is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. It is configured like this. In addition, if the decorative pattern that newly starts changing from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern starts changing while the second decorative pattern is changing, the first decorative pattern changes. Previously, the second decorative pattern was displayed in a variable manner in the main area, but when the first decorative pattern started to change, the first decorative pattern was displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and the second decorative pattern was displayed in the sub area. Alternatively, even if the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the second decorative pattern can be continuously displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and the first decorative pattern can be displayed in the sub area. The display may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as mentioned above, since the decorative pattern that newly starts changing from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, when the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the display of the second decorative pattern is , the display of the first decorative pattern and the pattern in the main area are the same, and the display of the numbers is different (the first decorative pattern is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative pattern is a Chinese numeral).

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-10, in step 2249-13, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be a sub area. Next, in step 2249-14, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation mode of the second main game symbol, and 2. Determine the stopping pattern and variation mode of the decorative pattern. Next, in step 3100 (fifth), the drawing display content determining means SM21n executes main area interrupt processing A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, in step 2249-15, the illustration display content determination means SM21n selects a second symbol content determination flag (based on symbol fluctuations on the second main game side) in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when the relevant content is determined is turned on, and the process moves to step 3350 (fifth).

Next, in step 3350 (fifth), the drawing display content determining means SM21n executes a production content determining process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Further, if No in step 2249-3, in step 3150 (fifth), a prefetching display control process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300). Note that even in the case of No in step 2249-1, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol starts to fluctuate in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the main area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in situations other than when an interrupt performance is executed, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is always displayed in the main area in a variable manner (even in the standby state). , the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol may be variably displayed in the sub-area.

Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n executes reading of the winning/failing lottery result regarding the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 3354, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n refers to the first decorative pattern performance content determination table based on the win/fail lottery results and the variation mode of the first decorative pattern, and adjusts the symbol variation accordingly. Decide on the content of the performance. Next, in step 3358, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the first half priority and second half priority of the symbol variation based on the determined performance content related to the symbol variation, and then performs the next process. The process moves to (the process of step 2300). Note that the first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. In addition, in the case of No in step 3354, in other words, if the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the second main game side, in step 3360, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n selects the result of the lottery and the second decorative symbol. Based on the variation mode, the second decorative symbol production content determination table is referred to, and the production content related to the symbol variation is determined. Next, in step 3362, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the priority of the symbol change based on the determined performance content related to the symbol change, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ). Note that the priority will be described later.

Next, FIG. 108 is an example of the first decorative pattern presentation content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the same figure, the production content related to the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined based on the winning/failure result of the first main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode), and depending on the determined production content, an interrupt The first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not to perform the performance, are determined. Note that the priority is relatively higher when the result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Furthermore, when the variation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in symbol fluctuation, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (performance content) in which the SP ready-to-reach performance is not executed, it is configured such that it has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. Note that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 109 is an example of the second decorative pattern presentation content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the same figure, the production content related to the second decorative symbol is determined based on the result of winning or failing the second main game symbol and the variation time (variation mode), and depending on the determined production content, the interruption The system is configured to determine priority, which is an element that determines whether or not to perform the performance. Note that, unlike the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern does not have the two priorities of the first half priority and the second half priority, but has only one priority. Note that the priority is relatively higher when the result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Furthermore, when the variation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. Note that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n selects an interrupt possible flag (design fluctuation of the determined second decorative pattern) in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. Turn on the flag that is turned on when the change is such that an interrupt effect can be executed. Next, in step 3108, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether the movable accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position. If Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n selects an accessory initialization flag (directs the movable accessory YK to the initial position) in the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. 2249-15) is turned on, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). Note that even in the case of No in step 3104 or step 3108, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2249-15). In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, after it is decided to display the second decorative pattern in a variable manner in the sub-area, the pattern variation of the second decorative pattern is interrupted (the variable display is performed in the sub-area). It is configured to determine whether or not the variation is executable (an effect of exchanging the display area of the decorative pattern and the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed in the main area). In addition, if it is determined that the second decorative pattern can be executed by interrupting, the position of the movable accessory YK is confirmed, and if the movable accessory YK is in operation, the movable accessory YK is initialized. and is configured to control the drive to the position. By configuring it in this way, the details will be described later, but at the timing when the interrupt performance is executed (the first timing among multiple ones), the proportion of the movable accessory YK being stopped at the initial position can be increased. can do.

Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the prefetching display control process related to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) in FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3152, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is not a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the first read-ahead area, and proceeds to step 3158. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the start of execution of the first symbol variation after the existence of a trigger hold until the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold), the first decoration The display area of the symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to change, and as shown in the image of the pre-reading effect display device in the lower part of the figure, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the lower left of the display area SG10. A second look-ahead area is provided in which a second decorative pattern is variably displayed at the lower right of the display area SG10, and the first look-ahead area and the second look-ahead area are configured to have approximately the same display area. has been done. Moreover, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to be displayed only with numbers, similar to the case where they are displayed in the sub area. As described above, when two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device with a larger display area) displays two decorative patterns (the first effect display device). The decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) may be displayed variably (or statically).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3158, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be "first read area → enlarged when SP reaches", and in step 3158 to move to. In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, when a pattern variation is executed due to a trigger hold during the execution of a look-ahead effect, the variation of a decorative pattern related to a trigger hold is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area SG10, and SP reach is achieved. The performance is configured to be executed. In addition, the decorative pattern that is not enlarged and displayed (for example, the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed) is displayed in a variable manner at a position that does not overlap with the display area of the enlarged decorative pattern. That's fine. Next, in step 3158, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the first sub-area symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation modes of the first main game symbols, and refers to the stop symbols and variation modes of the first decorative symbols. Determine the variation mode. As mentioned above, since the variation mode of the decorative symbols during the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined by referring to the first sub-area symbol table or the second sub-area symbol table, the display mode of the decorative symbols is determined when displayed in the sub-area. Only numbers are displayed, similar to . Next, in step 3160, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ).

Further, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3162, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is not a trigger hold. If Yes in step 3162, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the pre-read second area, and proceeds to step 3168. In the case of No in step 3162, in step 3166, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be "pre-read second area→expansion at SP reach", and proceeds to step 3168. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger hold is related to the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, it is enlarged and displayed when a pattern variation related to the trigger hold is executed. It is configured like this. Next, in step 3168, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-area symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and variation modes of the second main game symbols, and refers to the stop symbols and variation modes of the second decorative symbols. Determine the variation mode. Next, in step 3170, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ).

Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative pattern in step 2316. , After the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative pattern in step 2324, and after the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, Alternatively, if the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines in step 2326 that the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has not been reached, in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 controls the main control board M It is determined whether the first forced stop execution command has not been received from the side. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2344 (fifth), in step 2346 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the variable display area (if the look-ahead effect is not being executed, the main area or sub area). ), a stop display command (determined display) is set to stop the first decorative pattern at a forced loss pattern, and the process moves to step 2340. The manner in which the forced loss pattern of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is displayed will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114.

Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative pattern display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in step 2368, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2370, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol variation flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2372, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2366, the process moves to step 2374.

Next, in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2374, in step 2376 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2378, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 controls the second decoration based on the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the symbol fluctuation start timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2378, in step 2379, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the second decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ) and moves to step 3200 (fifth).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2378, in step 2380, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the variation mode temporarily stored in the second drawing variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on this, it is determined whether the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2380, in step 2381, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the second decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, (transmitted to the SS side), and the process moves to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2380, in step 2382, the preview performance display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach performance display control means SM25) stores the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the variation mode temporarily stored in the ready-to-reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has arrived. If Yes in step 2382, in step 2383, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process moves to step 3200 (fifth). Note that even in the case of No in step 2382, the process moves to step 3200 (fifth).

Next, in step 3200 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing B, which will be described later. Next, in step 2384, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not it has not received the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2384, in step 2385, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, Referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the second main game symbol will be stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2385, in step 2386, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (determined display command) for the second decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 ). Next, in step 3250 (fifth), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing C, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2390.

Moreover, in the case of No in step 2384, in step 2388, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the second decorative pattern in the variable display area (or the main area or sub area if the look-ahead effect is not being executed). A stop display command (determined display) to stop at a forced loss symbol is set, and the process moves to step 2390. The manner in which the forced loss pattern of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is displayed will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. Next, in step 2390, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2392, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol fluctuation flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (the process of step 2400). to move to. Note that even in the case of No in step 2374 or step 2385, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 114 is an image diagram of the stop symbol display at the time of jackpot in the fifth embodiment. First, a case will be described in which the first decorative pattern displayed in the main area shown in the upper part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. After that, since the first main game symbol stops at the jackpot symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the main area ("777" in the figure). Further, since the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern, the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern. The forced loss symbol of the second decorative symbol is a "giraffe", which is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern, the background effect in the sub-area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss pattern is stopped and displayed).

Next, a case where the second decorative pattern displayed in the sub-area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern will be explained. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main region. After that, since the second main game symbol stops at the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the sub-area ("777" in the figure). Further, since the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern. The forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol is a "zoo", and is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a forced loss pattern, the background effect in the main area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss pattern is stopped and displayed). In this way, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game pattern stops at a jackpot pattern and the second main game pattern is forcibly stopped due to a loss, the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. A forced loss pattern of the first decorative pattern that will be stopped and displayed when the first main game pattern is forced to stop due to a loss due to the second main game pattern stopping at the jackpot pattern. are configured to have different display modes. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area are different display modes. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be "blue", and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be "red". Further, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be the same. The display mode may be partially the same (only the colors are the same but the patterns are different, etc.).

Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) in FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3202, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the second decorative pattern, and the system is configured to determine whether the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. There is. If Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets an interrupt enable flag (in the above-mentioned main area interrupt process A, if the variation of the second decorative symbol itself is interruptible), flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation status of the first decorative symbol being fluctuated is in the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative pattern, the part before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation where SP reach is not executed, only the first half is included. It is assumed that there is no such thing.

If Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines the first half priority of the first decorative pattern that is changing in the main area and the priority of the second decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area. are compared, and the process moves to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3210, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the second half priority of the first decorative pattern that is changing in the main area and the priority of the second decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area. Then, the process moves to step 3212. Next, in step 3212, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than the priority of the first decorative pattern. Note that the priority of the first decorative pattern is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interruption performance to the performance mode when the accessory is not activated (with the movable accessory YK stopped at the initial position). , the presentation mode of the interruption presentation when the execution is started), a command for executing the determined interruption presentation is set, and the process moves to step 3220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interruption performance to the performance mode when the accessory is activated (the movable accessory YK is activated by a trigger other than the interruption performance). In this state, the mode of execution of the interruption effect when the execution is started) is determined, a command for executing the determined interruption effect is set, and the process moves to step 3220. In this way, when the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than the first half priority or second half priority of the first decorative pattern, the interrupt performance can be executed, but if the movable accessory YK is at the initial position. The presentation mode of the interruption effect is configured to be different depending on whether the interruption effect is stopped or not. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since the interrupt effect is a effect that is executed when the expectation of a jackpot due to symbol variation is high (the priority of the second decorative symbol is high), it is noticeable to the player ( It is preferable to perform this in a flashy manner. Therefore, it is better to perform both the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the movable accessory than only the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interruption effect while the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as mentioned above, if the movable accessory YK is activated when the main area interrupt processing A is executed, the movable accessory YK is configured to operate to the initial position, so that when the interruption effect is executed. As the presentation mode, the presentation mode when the movable accessory is not activated can be configured so that the percentage of selection is increased. Note that the interrupt effects in steps 3216 and 3218 (interrupt effects executed at the first interrupt timing) may be referred to as first interrupt effects.

Next, in step 3220, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to step 3222. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 3202, step 3204, or step 3212, the process moves to step 3222. Here, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the main area, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the sub-area, and the second decorative pattern (second main game pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. In the case of a jackpot, if the display area of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is not changed, the second decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the sub-area, which is a smaller area than the main area, is the jackpot symbol. The game stops at , and the player's joy at winning the jackpot is diminished. Therefore, by executing an interrupt effect and making the fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol that becomes a jackpot into the main area, the jackpot symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main area, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. .

Next, in step 3222, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the second decorative pattern is being displayed in the sub-area. In the case of Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern is 5 seconds before the end of the variation of the second decorative pattern. In the case of Yes in step 3224, in step 3226, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being fluctuated is a symbol fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3226, in step 3228 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is in operation as a fluctuating performance of the first decorative pattern. If Yes in step 3230, in step 3232 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3234, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 2384). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228, or step 3230, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2384). In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, even if it is not determined at the first interrupt timing that the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol, the priority is determined at the second interrupt timing. If the following conditions are satisfied, an interrupt effect is executed as a second interrupt effect.
(1) The second decorative pattern is changing in the sub area,
(2) The variation of the second decorative pattern is a variation that results in a jackpot,
(3) The priority of the second decorative pattern that is being changed is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (in this example, 2),
(4) The movable accessory YK is not operating as a variation of the first decorative pattern.
If the above conditions are satisfied, the interruption effect will be executed.

Although not shown, the second interrupt performance is configured to be executed when the movable accessory YK is not operating, so the performance mode should be a performance mode in which the movable accessory YK is activated. is suitable. Further, the performance mode of the second interrupt performance may be such that the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative pattern is a pattern variation that will result in a jackpot at the time when the movable accessory YK is activated. In the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the main area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the sub-area, an interrupt effect is executed and the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the main area. The decorative symbols will be displayed in a variable manner in the sub-area, and the second decorative symbols will be displayed in a variable manner in the main area, but when the interrupt performance ends, that is, the second main game side symbol related to the interrupt performance If the fluctuation is a loss, the timing at which the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol related to the interrupt performance ends, and if the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side related to the interruption performance is a jackpot, the timing at which the jackpot ends. , the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub area. Although the details will be described later in FIG. 117, the third interrupt timing shown in FIG. The timing may be just before the stop or the timing just before the symbol fluctuation is confirmed and stopped. Furthermore, if it is the last timing of a plurality of interrupt timings that exist in one symbol variation period, it may be during symbol variation. In addition, when an interrupt effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are swapped, for example, when the first decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the main area, the interrupt effect occurs. When executed, and the first decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the sub area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative pattern displayed in the main area is The display area of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured not to be swapped until the end of the process (during the movement of the second decorative pattern in which the interrupt effect is executed, the next variation of the first decorative pattern starts). It is preferable to keep the second decorative pattern variably displayed in the main area even when the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area.

Next, FIG. 116 is an image diagram of interrupt effect execution in the fifth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the performance mode when the movable accessory is activated. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. Thereafter, 5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the second decorative pattern, and at the time of the first interrupt timing, the movable accessory YK is activated as a performance corresponding to the variation of the first decorative pattern. In this case, an interrupt performance will be executed, but since movable accessory YK cannot be activated as an interrupt performance, the performance mode is "liquid crystal display only" (performance mode in which movable accessory YK does not operate). ), the interruption effect will be executed. This figure shows how the movable accessory YK, which was operating as a performance related to the first decorative pattern, returns to its initial position.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, an example of a performance mode when the movable accessory is not activated is illustrated. First, in a situation where a decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and a decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the sub area, the second decorative pattern is When 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation and the first interrupt timing has arrived, the movable accessory YK has stopped at the initial position. In this case, since it is possible to operate the movable accessory YK as an interrupt performance, the interruption performance can be performed in the production mode of "LCD display + movable accessory activation" (the production mode in which the movable accessory YK operates). It will be executed. In the figure, a movable accessory YK is shown operating in the center of the performance display device SG as an interrupt performance related to the second decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) in FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being fluctuated is a symbol fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to execute a third interrupt effect as an interrupt effect. Next, in step 3258, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2390). Note that even in the case of No in step 3252 or step 3254, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2390). In this way, even if the interruption performance (second interruption performance) cannot be executed at the second interruption timing, (1) the pattern fluctuation of the executed second decorative pattern is a fluctuation that will result in a jackpot; (2) the execution If both of the following two conditions are satisfied: the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example), a third interruption effect is performed as an interrupt effect at the stop timing of the second decorative pattern. is configured to run. Note that the timing at which the second decorative pattern stops is referred to as the third interrupt timing. In addition, since the execution of the third interrupt performance = the start of the jackpot, the performance mode of the third interruption performance may be a performance mode that congratulates the player who has confirmed the jackpot, or a performance similar to the one at the start of the jackpot. It may be configured to run. Furthermore, it may be a performance mode in which a movable accessory YK operates. Further, the performance mode of the third interrupt performance may be configured to be different between when the movable accessory YK is operating and when it is not operating as the performance content related to the variation of the first decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the prefetching flag (a flag that is turned on when the prefetch effect is being executed) is off. Determine whether it exists or not. In the case of Yes in step 2522, in step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether trigger hold exists within the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2524, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the first timing to start changing the decorative pattern in the main area after the occurrence of trigger hold has been reached. If Yes in step 2626, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and based on the result of whether or not the trigger hold is appropriate, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the calculated time elapses based on the result of whether or not the trigger hold is appropriate. Determine the preview performance scenario during pre-reading. Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of execution of a preview performance during pre-reading. The same figure exemplifies how a pre-read preview performance scenario is determined and a pre-read performance is executed. First, the pattern variation related to the trigger hold ends at the first decorative pattern fluctuation start timing after the trigger hold occurs (the fluctuation start timing of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, whichever starts changing earlier). The time until then is calculated, and a pre-reading preview presentation scenario for the period is determined. Thereafter, when 20 seconds have elapsed from the timing of the first symbol variation start, the message "hot" is displayed as a warning message. Thereafter, when 40 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, a cut-in effect is executed. Thereafter, when 60 seconds have elapsed from the initial symbol variation start timing, an effect in which the movable accessory YK is activated is executed. Thereafter, since 70 seconds have passed since the first symbol variation start timing, the symbol variation related to the trigger hold ends. In the fifth embodiment, since the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, if a preview effect is executed based on the variation time of one pattern change, a preview effect related to either pattern change is executed. In other words, there is a risk that it will be recognized whether the symbol change related to the trigger hold is being executed, and the interest of the symbol change related to hold other than the trigger hold becomes low. Put it away. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the preview performance based on the elapsed time from the start of the first variation of the decorative pattern after the trigger hold occurs, the overall interest of the pre-read performance is increased.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the pre-reading flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "background during pre-reading" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. In this way, the "background during pre-reading" is configured to be set for the first time when the determination in step 2526 is Yes, that is, at the first timing when the variation of the decorative pattern in the main area starts after the trigger hold occurs. In other words, the timing of switching from the "normal background" to the "prefetching background" is the start timing of symbol variation. Further, when the background effect is "background during pre-reading", as described above with reference to FIG. 111, a first pre-reading area in which the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner is provided at the lower left of the display area SG10. , a look-ahead second area in which a second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner is provided at the lower right of the display area SG10, and the look-ahead first area and the look-ahead second area are displayed in a variable manner side by side with the same display area. That will happen. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2522, in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger hold has ended. If Yes in step 2534, in step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the prefetch flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. Incidentally, if the answer is No in step 2524 or step 2526, the process also moves to step 2538. Next, in step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2534, in step 2540, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "background during pre-reading" as the background effect, and moves to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. It should be noted that the "background during pre-reading" and the "normal background" may be displayed in any manner as long as they can be visually recognized and identified by the player.

Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of accessory drive control processing according to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect content related to symbol variation has been newly determined. Incidentally, in step 3302, it is determined whether or not the presentation contents for cases other than when the pre-reading effect is being executed have been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule for the movable accessory YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the variation mode of the decorative pattern and the effect content related to the pattern variation, and proceeds to step 3314. Moreover, in the case of No in step 3302, in step 3308, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether a preview effect scenario during pre-reading has been newly determined. In addition, in step 3308, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect in the case where the pre-read effect is being executed has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3308, in step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule for the movable accessory YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the preview effect scenario during pre-reading, and proceeds to step 3314. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 3304, step 3308, or step 3310, the process moves to step 3314.

Next, in step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the accessory initialization flag (the change in the second decorative pattern is an interruptible change) It is determined whether a flag for operating the movable accessory YK to the initial position, which is turned on if the movable accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is on. If Yes in step 3314, in step 3316 the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK toward the initial position. Next, in step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the accessory initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. Incidentally, if the answer in step 3314 is No, the process also moves to step 3320. In this way, in the fifth embodiment, if the movable accessory YK is operating from the initial position at the time when it is determined that the pattern variation of the second decorative pattern is an interruptible variation, the operation is It is configured to execute control to return the movable accessory YK that has been moved to its initial position. Next, in step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not it is currently the timing to execute the interrupt effect. If Yes in step 3320, in step 3322, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether the interruption effect to be executed is an interruption effect in a effect mode in which the movable accessory YK operates. In addition, as an interruption performance in which the movable accessory YK is activated, for example, a second interruption performance in which an interruption performance (first interruption performance), which is a performance mode when the movable accessory is not activated, is executed at the first interrupt timing. is executed, the third interrupt effect is executed, and so on. If Yes in step 3322, in step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the effect mode of the interruption effect, and moves to the next process (the process in step 2999). Note that even in the case of No in step 3320 or step 3322, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed in parallel on the effect display device. By configuring the lottery to be executable, making the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side the first decorative pattern, and making the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side the second decorative pattern, the first main game side It is possible to configure the system so that the symbol fluctuations of the second main game side and the symbol fluctuations of the second main game side are displayed at the same time. Further, the first decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in a sub-area having a smaller display area than the main area, and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area. When the expectation of a jackpot is high due to symbol fluctuations, the system is configured to execute an interrupt effect and display the second decorative symbol in the main area, thereby displaying the fluctuating decorative symbol that the player wants to see. The main area can be made larger and the game becomes more interesting.

(Example 1 of change from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern is displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern is displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern is displayed in the sub area. When the priority of the decorative pattern is high (for example, the expectation of jackpot is high), the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area. The display mode is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) in FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 2249-16 (fifth change 1) to step 2249-26 (fifth change 1), that is, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determining means SM21n is suspended. If it is determined that there is no trigger pending within the period, in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), the illustration display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol change is a symbol change from the standby state. . If Yes in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-17 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative pattern to be the main area. Next, in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether the newly expired hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n inputs information regarding the stop symbols and variation mode of the first main game symbol. Based on this, the first main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-20 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbols and variation modes of the second main game symbols. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-8.

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines that the newly expired hold is on the first main game side. It is determined whether or not the request is on hold. If Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display area of the decorative pattern to the previous first decorative pattern. Decide on the same display area as the variation. Next, in step 2249-23 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n selects the first main area symbol table or the first sub With reference to the area pattern table, the stop pattern and variation mode of the first decorative pattern are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Further, in the case of No in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n changes the display area of the decorative pattern to the previous second decorative pattern. The display area is determined to be the same as the symbol variation. Next, in step 2249-25 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n selects the second main area symbol table or the second sub With reference to the area pattern table, the stop pattern and variation mode of the second decorative pattern are determined, and the process moves to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Next, in step 2249-26 (fifth change 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether the display area of the decorative pattern related to the pattern variation is a sub-area. If Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3100 (fifth), and if No, the process moves to step 2249-15. In this way, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative pattern starts changing when it is not in the standby state, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern change from the previous pattern. It is configured to be changed in the area (either the main area or the sub area) that was displayed in a changing manner. In addition, when the decorative pattern starts changing while in the standby state, regardless of whether the decorative pattern that newly starts changing is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, the new decorative pattern will be changed from the standby state. The decorative patterns that started changing later are displayed in a changing manner in the main area, and the decorative patterns that started changing later are displayed in a changing manner in the sub area.

Next, FIG. 121 is an example of the second decorative pattern presentation content determination table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, since it is not fixedly determined which of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area, the first decorative pattern also appears in the second decorative pattern. Similar to the decorative pattern, the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not to execute the interrupt performance, are determined based on the determined performance content. Note that the priority is relatively higher when the result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Further, when the variation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in symbol fluctuation, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (performance content) in which the SP ready-to-reach performance is not executed, it is configured such that it has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. Note that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A related to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) in FIG. 120 in modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth change 1), step 3102 (fifth change 1), step 3104 (fifth change 1), step 3114 (fifth change 1), and step 3116 (fifth change 1). 5 Variation 1), that is, in Step 3112 (Fifth Variation 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the sub-area is the second decorative pattern. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3112 (fifth change 1), in step 3102 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol change. Next, in step 3104 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (in this example, 2). judge. If Yes in step 3104 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3106, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). Further, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth change 1), in step 3114 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the first decorative pattern related to the symbol change. . If Yes in step 3114 (fifth change 1), in step 3116 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines that the priority of the first half of the confirmed first decorative pattern is a predetermined value (in this example, , 2) Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3116 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3106, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). In this way, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub-area and the case where the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub-area. Since the present invention is configured to be able to perform an interrupt performance even in the event of an interruption, it is determined whether the variation in the decorative pattern currently displayed in the sub-area is such that the interrupt performance can be executed. In addition, since the timing to execute the process is before the start of SP reach (timing before the start of symbol variation), the first half priority is checked as the priority.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative pattern display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth variation 1), that is, after the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative pattern in step 2316, the decorative pattern is displayed in step 2324. After the pattern display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative pattern, after the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, or after the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2326, When the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines that the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has not been reached, in step 3200 (fifth variation 1), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing, which will be described later. B is executed and the process moves to step 2344 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B related to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth variation 1) in FIG. 123 in modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3236, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative pattern is changing in the sub-region. In addition, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt process B in the same figure is executed in the first decorative pattern display control process, the determination is made for the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is determined. When executed in the decorative pattern display control process, the determination is made for the second decorative pattern. In the case of Yes in step 3236, in step 3237, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative pattern displayed in the sub-area has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner in the sub area at the first interrupt timing can execute the interrupt effect. It is configured to determine whether the If Yes in step 3237, in step 3238 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interrupt enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3238, in step 3239, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the fluctuation status of the decorative pattern being changed in the main area is in the first half. In addition, in this example, in the variation of the decorative pattern, the part before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation where SP reach is not executed, only the first half is included. It is said that

If Yes in step 3239, in step 3240, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area. , proceed to step 3242-1. On the other hand, if No in step 3239, in step 3241, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 compares the second half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is changing in the sub area. Compare and proceed to step 3242-1. Next, in step 3242-1, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the sub-area is greater than the priority of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the main area. Determine whether It should be noted that the priority of the decorative symbols displayed in a variable manner in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241. In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, in step 3242-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. If Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interrupt performance to the performance mode when the accessory is not activated (when the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). 3242-5, a command for executing the determined interruption effect is set, and the process moves to step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the performance mode of the interruption performance to the performance mode when the movable accessory is activated (triggered by a movable accessory YK other than the interruption performance). 3242-5 is set, a command for executing the determined interruption effect is set, and the process moves to step 3242-5. In this way, when the first half priority of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the sub area is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the main area, an interrupt effect is executed. However, the performance mode of the interruption performance is configured to differ depending on whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position.

Next, in step 3242-5, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to step 3242-6. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 3237, step 3238, or step 3242-1, the process moves to step 3242-6.

Next, in step 3242-6, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the variation of the decorative pattern is being displayed in the sub-area. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3242-7, in step 3242-8, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol being fluctuated in the sub-area is a symbol fluctuation that will result in a jackpot. If Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether the second half priority of the decorative pattern being changed in the sub-area is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). (Since the second interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the second half priority is determined.) In the case of Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is in operation as a fluctuating presentation of the decorative pattern that is fluctuating in the main area. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3243-1, in step 3243-2, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3243-3, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a command to exchange the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area, and performs the next process {step 2344 (fifth) process }. Note that if No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9, or step 3243-1, the process moves to the next process {step 2344 (fifth) process}. In addition, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when an interrupt effect is executed and the display of decorative patterns between the main area and the sub area is exchanged, the decorative patterns newly displayed in the main area Regardless of whether or not the symbol fluctuations result in a jackpot, the display area for subsequent decorative symbols is configured to be the display area after execution of the interrupt performance. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area. Therefore, even if the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub area and the result of the pattern change of the second decorative pattern is a loss as a result of execution of the interrupt effect, the second decoration will be displayed in the main area in the next pattern change. The pattern will be displayed, and the first decorative pattern will be displayed in the sub-area. The third interrupt timing illustrated in the same figure (FIG. 124) may be symbol fluctuation end timing = symbol fluctuation stop timing, timing immediately before temporary stop of symbol fluctuation, or timing immediately before final stop of symbol fluctuation. You can also use it as Furthermore, if it is the last timing of a plurality of interrupt timings that exist in one symbol variation period, it may be during symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C related to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) in FIG. 123 in modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3260 (fifth change 1) and step 3262 (fifth change 1), that is, in step 3260 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display control means SM24, It is determined whether the pattern variation of the decorative pattern that is changing in the sub-area is a pattern variation that will result in a jackpot. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth change 1), in step 3262 (fifth change 1), the preview effect display control means SM24 sets the second half priority of the pattern variation of the decorative pattern being changed in the sub area to a predetermined value. (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3) (since the third interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the second half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3262 (fifth change 1), the process moves to step 3256, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2340).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment, two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device. As a configuration, by configuring the parallel lottery to be executable, making the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side the first decorative pattern, and making the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side the second decorative pattern, It can be configured to display symbol variations on the first main game side and symbol variations on the second main game side at the same time. Also, among the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the decorative pattern that first starts variable display in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern that starts variable display after that is displayed in the sub area. By configuring this, it is possible to equalize the value of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. By frequently changing the display cases, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the symbol fluctuations on the first main game side and the symbol fluctuations on the second main game side.

(Sixth embodiment)
Although some of the configurations have been partially explained in the embodiments described above, the sixth embodiment is an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the embodiments described above, and will be described in detail below. For example, the configuration includes the first decorative pattern (first presentation pattern) and the second decorative pattern (second presentation pattern) described in this embodiment, the first decorative pattern (first presentation pattern) of the fourth embodiment, It is possible to appropriately provide one or more of the configurations described in the sixth embodiment in addition to the image display configuration that overlaps with the second decorative pattern (design) and the second decorative design (second presentation design). Further, the configuration of the image display that overlaps with the hold display of the fourth embodiment may be changed to one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment, or one or more configurations may be added as appropriate. As a supplementary note, the combinations are not limited to those exemplified above, and any configurations described in this embodiment to the fifth embodiment may be combined with one or more of the configurations described in the sixth embodiment as appropriate. It may be changed or one or more configurations may be added as appropriate, including combinations with image display configurations that overlap with the preview effect of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

<<Significance of terms>>
The meaning of each term in the sixth embodiment will be explained in detail below. It should be noted that configurations and effects related to the following terms are applicable to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Non-time saving gaming state>
The non-time saving gaming state is a gaming state indicating a low probability low base state (normal gaming state). In addition, a high probability low base state in which a time reduction game is not executed, in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, may be referred to as a non-time reduction game state.
<Effects of non-time saving gaming state>
(1) Mainly, it is possible to play games on the first main game side.

<Time-reduced gaming state>
The time reduction gaming state is a gaming state showing a high probability high base state and a low probability high base state. In addition, the time reduction game state may be a high probability low base state in which a time reduction game is executed in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state.
<Effect of non-time saving gaming state>
(1) Mainly, games can be made possible on the second main game side.

<Decorative designs (designs for production)>
The decorative pattern is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and suggests or informs the result of the lottery on the main game side, and includes a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern. After the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, it temporarily stops, and then it finally stops. In addition, it is configured to be able to suggest or notify the result of the winning/failure lottery on the main game side by the stop display mode (stopped symbol) when the game is confirmed and stopped.
<Effect of decorative patterns>
(1) Decorative symbols can make it easier for the player to recognize that the game is changing, that it is on standby, and the results of the lottery.

<First decorative pattern (first production pattern)>
The first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed to be easily visible to the player, and includes a card-type or character-type image object as the first element, numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, It is a decorative pattern composed of image objects such as characters, symbols, and pictures. In addition, as a third element in the first decorative pattern, a color effect of the character-type image object itself such as a character-type image object (first element), a color effect attached to the outside of the character-type image object, and a number image A color effect of the number image object itself such as an object (second element) or a color effect attached to the outside of the number image object may be provided. Furthermore, the first decorative pattern displays only the first element or the second element depending on the game state (low probability low base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state). It may be an aspect. Further, the aspect of each element may be configured to differ depending on the game state. For example, in the first decorative pattern of "7", in the low probability low base state, the image object of a lion facing the front ( However, in other game states (for example, high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state), it becomes the image object of a lion facing sideways (first element), and in the low-probability low-base state, It is an image object of the number "7" (second element), but in other game states (for example, high-certain high base state or low-certain high base state), it is an image object of the kanji "7" (second element) For example, in the low-accuracy, low-base state, the image object "7" or the effect around the "7" image object is red (third element), but in other game states (for example, in the high-accuracy, high-base state or In the low-accuracy, high-base state), the image object of "7" or the effect around the image object of "7" is gold (third element), and in the low-accuracy, low-base state, the lion image object is yellow (the third element). ), but in other game states (for example, high probability high base state or low probability high base state), the lion image object may be gold (third element). Further, the presence or absence of each element may be configured to differ depending on the game state. For example, in the first decorative pattern of the "7" symbol, in the low probability low base state, the lion image object (the first element ), but in other game states (for example, high probability high base state or low probability high base state), it does not have the lion image object (first element) (that is, only the second and third elements, or , second element only), or has a color effect (third element) attached to the outside of the "7" image object or character-type image object in the low-accuracy, low-base state, but in other game states ( For example, in the high-accuracy-high base state or low-accuracy-high base state), there is no color effect (third element) attached to the outside of the "7" image object or character-type image object (that is, the first element and It may also be configured such that there are only two elements or only the second element. Note that, similar to the game state, the configuration and presence/absence of each element may be configured to differ depending on the stage or mode.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the changing performance.
(2) The first decorative pattern can notify the result of the game by definitely stopping and displaying it.

<Second decorative pattern (second presentation pattern)>
The second decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that indicates that the first decorative pattern is changing at all times, or when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative pattern, or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern A decorative pattern that is composed of image objects such as numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, characters, symbols, and pictures that are the same as or similar to the second element of the first decorative pattern, and that is smaller than the second element of the first decorative pattern. ing. Although the second decorative pattern is composed of only the second element and does not include the first element or the third element, it may be the same as or similar to the first element of the first decorative pattern. However, a first element smaller than the first element of the first decorative pattern may be attached. Further, a third element that is the same as or similar to the third element of the first decorative pattern may be attached.
<Effect of second decorative pattern>
(1) In the case of constant display: The second decorative pattern can notify the result of the game by definitely stopping and displaying it.
(2) When the first decorative pattern is difficult to visually recognize or is not visible 1: When the first decorative pattern is definitely stopped and displayed, the second decorative pattern may also be definitely stopped and displayed, but the second decorative pattern It is preferable to display (temporary stop) only when it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative pattern or the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized without definitively stopping the display. In this case, the game is stopped with this temporary stop display. The results can be announced.
(3) When the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen 2: The second decorative pattern is displayed only in a variable manner without temporary stop display or definitive stop display, and the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or is not visible. Even if this is not possible, it is possible to clearly notify that the change is in progress.

<Design variation of the first decorative pattern>
The first decorative symbol has a shape that is temporally synchronized with the fluctuations of the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol), and is faster than the first and second main game symbols. Changes are made in the display area SG10 in an easily visible manner. Incidentally, fluctuations that occur after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation or re-fluctuation of the first decorative pattern are called accelerated fluctuations, and fluctuations that occur after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation or re-fluctuation of the first decorative design. is called high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation from high-speed fluctuation to temporary stop or fixed stop is called deceleration fluctuation. When the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, the first decorative pattern is in a transparent state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative pattern is set to 50, which is semi-transparent on a scale of 0 to 100, and the first decorative pattern is displayed on the back side of the first decorative pattern. In addition, the background image of the production stage, which has a lower display priority than the first decorative pattern, is visible through the first decorative pattern), and the player is in a state where it is difficult to see or cannot be seen, and the acceleration In the case of fluctuation and deceleration fluctuation, the first decorative pattern is in a non-transparent state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative pattern is set to 0, which is completely opaque from 0 to 100, The background image of the performance stage, which is displayed on the rear surface and has a lower display priority than the first decorative pattern, cannot be visually recognized through the first decorative pattern), so that it is easy for the player to visually recognize the background image. As a modification, the decorative pattern may be hidden during the period during the high-speed fluctuation described above, and in this case, since it does not substantially fluctuate, it may be referred to as a "non-display state."
<Effect of pattern variation of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can make it easier for the player to recognize that the game is changing.

<Design variation of the second decorative pattern>
The second decorative pattern changes in a manner that is temporally synchronized with the fluctuation of the main game pattern (first main game pattern, second main game pattern) and first decorative pattern. The second decorative symbol is displayed fluctuating at a constant speed without acceleration or deceleration, and is displayed in a transparent state so that the player can confirm that it is constantly changing while the main game symbol and the first decorative symbol are fluctuating. However, like the first decorative pattern, acceleration fluctuations, high-speed fluctuations, and deceleration fluctuations may be performed, and it may also be in a transparent state.
<Effect of pattern variation of the second decorative pattern>
(1) Even if the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen, the second decorative pattern can clearly notify the player that it is changing, and the player can recognize that it is changing. It can be made easier.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area (first decorative pattern display area SG15) for displaying the first decorative pattern. The first decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner or in a stationary manner within the main area.
<Effects of main area>
(1) A first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) Variable display with rich performance can be performed.

<Sub area>
The sub area is a display area (second decorative pattern display area SG14) for displaying the second decorative pattern. The second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or in a stationary manner within the sub-region.
<Effect of sub-area>
(1) A second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for change>
Waiting for fluctuation is a state in which the main game symbols and decorative symbols are not fluctuating. While the fluctuation is stopped, it is also referred to as the fluctuation stopped state.
<Effect while waiting for fluctuation>
(1) While waiting for fluctuation, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress.

<Standby movie (standby demo screen)>
The standby movie is a display of a moving image that shows the player that no changes are being made.
<Standby movie effect>
(1) By displaying the waiting movie, it is possible to indicate that the machine is empty and can be played.

<Pending display>
The pending display is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and shows the number of variations that have not been executed on the main game side.
<Effect of pending display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the number that has not changed.

<1st pending display>
The first hold display is a hold display that is displayed to be easily visible to the player.
<Effect of first hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the number that has not changed.
(2) By changing the display mode of the first pending display, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning.

<Second pending display>
The second hold display is a hold display that is displayed so that the player can see it all the time, when the first hold display is difficult for the player to see, or when the player cannot see the first hold display.
<Effect of second hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the number that has not changed.

<First hold display area>
The first hold display area SG12 is an area for displaying a first hold display. In some cases, a display indicating the upper limit number of first pending displays may be performed.
<Effect of the first hold display area>
(1) A first pending display can be displayed.
(2) A display indicating the upper limit number of first hold displays can be made.

<Second hold display area>
The second hold display area SG13 is an area for displaying a second hold display.
<Effect of second hold display area>
(1) A second pending display can be displayed.

<Shift display (shift animation)>
The shift display (shift animation) is the display of a moving image when the first pending display that is being displayed is moved when the number of pending items decreases.
<Effects of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It can be made easier to recognize that the number of reservations has decreased.

<Pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation)>
The hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when displaying a new first hold display when the number of holds increases.
<Effect of occurrence display (pending occurrence animation)>
(1) It is possible to easily recognize that the number of reservations has increased.

<Pending display for production of the relevant fluctuation (pending digestion transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The suspension display for effecting fluctuation is also referred to as a suspension extinguishment conveyance image or a fluctuation corresponding image, and is an image that is displayed when a certain suspension is extinguished.
<Effects of the display of hold display for the production of the relevant fluctuations>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning regarding the current fluctuation.

<Hold display area for production of the change>
The variation effect holding display area is an area for displaying an image that will be displayed when a certain hold is exhausted.
<Effect of the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation>
(1) It is possible to display a hold display for effecting the variation.
(2) It can be suggested that a hold display for effecting the change will be displayed.

<Display priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of images and moving images to be displayed on the effect display device (the order in which they are displayed from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed overlappingly, the configuration can be made so that the images or moving images can be easily viewed by the player.

<Volume adjustment screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that volume adjustment is possible, and displays an image showing the currently set volume, volume adjustment method, and the like.
<Effects of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the volume can be adjusted.
(2) The player can easily adjust the volume.

<Light intensity adjustment screen display>
The light amount adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that the light amount can be adjusted, and displays an image showing the currently set light amount, light amount adjustment method, and the like.
<Effects of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the light amount can be adjusted.
(2) The player can easily adjust the amount of light.

<Stage (direction stage)>
The stage (production stage) is also referred to as a mode (production mode), and is a production mode shown by a background image.
<Effects of stage (production stage)>
(1) It is possible to display a display (first decorative pattern, preview, etc.) that corresponds to the stage.

<Hidden mode (hidden stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is a performance stage (performance mode) in which it is unclear whether it is a probability fluctuation game state or a non-probability fluctuation game state.
<Effects of hidden mode>
(1) It is possible to determine whether or not it is a probability variable gaming state.

<Tenpai>
Tenpai is also called reach or reach state, and among multiple symbol rows, the symbol rows other than the last symbol row scheduled to stop (temporary stop) have the same decorative pattern, and the last symbol row scheduled to stop (temporary stop) is the same. This is a state in which the symbol row is changing.
<Effect of Tenpai>
(1) If the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern stopped in another pattern row stops in one more pattern row, it can indicate a win.

<Reach performance>
The reach performance is a performance that indicates the expected degree of winning of the fluctuation, and is a performance that mainly occurs after tenpai. The reach effects include normal reach (normal reach effect), super reach (super reach effect, SP reach, SP reach effect, first half of super reach, second half of super reach), and the like. Mainly, the period from after a reach is established until before it develops into a super reach is called a normal reach (or if it does not become a super reach, from after a reach is established until all symbol rows stop (temporary stop)), it is called a normal reach, and it develops after a reach is established. This performance is called super reach (also called post-reach development performance).
<Effect of reach performance>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a hit.

<Notice (notice display, performance)>
Preview (pre-announcement display, performance) is mainly to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the fluctuation, but it can also be used to suggest that there is a hit within the hold (e.g. advance notice, pre-read performance, etc.) There is also.
<Effects of notice (notice display, performance)>
(1) It is possible to incite whether the fluctuation is a hit or not.
(2) You can check whether there is a hit in the hold or not.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) is when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, making it appear as if it has stopped for a while, but in reality, the decorative pattern is slightly moving (also called oscillation fluctuation). state).
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It can be made to appear as if the fluctuation is being executed multiple times.
(2) It is possible to determine whether or not there will be a definite stop (in other words, whether the game will fluctuate again without a definite stop, whether it will be a hit without a definite stop, etc.).

<Pseudo-connection>
Pseudo-run, which is sometimes referred to as re-fluctuation in a broad sense, is an effect that makes it appear as if the decorative pattern has fluctuated multiple times in one fluctuation.
<Effect of pseudo-association>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if the decorative pattern is changing multiple times within one change.

<Pseudo-connection suggestive pattern>
The pseudo-coupled pattern is one of special decorative patterns that are displayed to suggest whether or not a pseudo-coupled sequence will occur.
<Effect of pseudo-connection suggestive patterns>
(1) It is possible to incite whether pseudo-association occurs or not.

<Pseudo series (revariation) pattern>
The pseudo-continuation (re-variation) pattern is one of the special decorative patterns that indicate that a pseudo-continuation (re-variation) occurs.
<Effect of pseudo-recurrence (revariation) pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that a pseudo-continuation (re-variation) occurs.

<Development pattern>
The development symbol is one of the special decorative symbols that indicate that a reach effect will occur.
<Effects of developed patterns>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that a reach effect will occur.

<Pre-reading performance>
The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a hit in the hold. The prefetch effect is executed on the condition that the trigger hold occurs (when it is determined to execute the prefetch effect for the generated hold).
<Effect of look-ahead production>
(1) You can check whether there is a hit in the hold or not.

<Trigger hold>
The trigger hold is the hold that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect (it was decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that occurred).
<Effect of trigger hold>
(1) It becomes possible to execute a look-ahead effect.
(2) The possibility of winning can be suggested by fluctuations in trigger hold.

<Right-handed hitting instruction display>
The right-hand hitting instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game starting opening or the big prize opening is provided on the right side of the board, but it is mainly displayed in the time-saving gaming state, indicating that you should execute the right-hand hitting. This is the display.
<Effect of right-handed hitting instruction display>
(1) In the time reduction game state, it is possible to prompt the player to play right-handed.

<Hitting style warning display (left-handed hitting warning display, right-handed hitting warning display)>
The playing style warning display is a display showing the recommended playing style when the playing style is different from the recommended playing style in the current gaming state.
(1) It is possible to prompt the player to play in a manner that corresponds to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode determined in advance as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect that is displayed on the effect display device for the image itself, the movement of a character in a moving image, the movement of a movable accessory, or the like.
<Effects of effect display>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the target image itself, the movement of a character in a moving image, the movement of a movable accessory, etc.

<Full rotation performance>
The full rotation performance is a state in which the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is scrolled at a low speed while remaining aligned.
<Effect of full rotation performance>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that the fluctuation is a hit.

<Promotion performance>
A promotion effect is a production that stimulates whether or not a non-probability variable symbol is changed to a variable probability symbol, or a production that incites whether or not a low round per hit (for example, 4R per hit) is changed to a high round hit (for example, 16R per hit). It's a performance. Promotion effects can occur not only during fluctuations but also during jackpots. A promotion performance that incites whether or not to change from a non-probability variable symbol to a probability variable symbol is sometimes referred to as a probability variable promotion performance, and a promotion performance that incites whether or not to change from a low round hit to a high round hit is sometimes referred to as a round promotion performance.
<Effect of promotion performance>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not to change from a non-probability variable symbol to a probability variable symbol.
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not to change from a low round hit to a high round hit.

<Reach Voice>
The reach voice is a notice that indicates the expectation of winning, etc. by means of a sound that is generated when a reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established.
<Effect of Reach Voice>
(1) When it becomes a reach, it is possible to suggest the expected degree of winning by combining image display, movement of movable accessories, etc.

<Action at the start of variation (action at start)>
The first decorative pattern has special design actions (first element such as a character, second element such as a number, third element such as a color effect, etc.) for any first decorative pattern in the left, middle, or right row. , a combination of these or any one or more elements may be enlarged, reduced, rotated, emit light, or one or more elements may be added to any one or more of the elements compared to immediately before the fluctuation starts (when the fluctuation is stopped). The pattern variation can be started after an operation such as deleting one or more elements from a combination of a plurality of elements). The action at the start of fluctuation is action A at the start of fluctuation, and a flashier symbol action than action A at the start of fluctuation (longer action execution time, larger display area used in the action, higher magnification, higher rotation). There are multiple types, such as action B at the start of the fluctuation, which is fast, has strong light emission, etc., and it is better to have a symbol fluctuation with high expectations such as a pseudo-sequence or reach effect, and a normal pattern with a low expectation that does not result in a pseudo-sequence or reach effect. It is configured so that action B is more likely to occur at the start of variation than symbol variation. In other words, action B at the start of fluctuation is configured as an action with higher expectations than action A at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, it is preferable to start without an action at the start of fluctuation, but it may be accompanied by an action at the start of fluctuation, and if configured in this way, the time reduction gaming state can be smoothly started. It is preferable to configure the game so that there is a lower possibility that an action will be required at the start of the change than in the non-time saving game state in order to advance the game. In addition, when starting the symbol variation that becomes a pseudo-run or reach effect, or when starting the normal symbol variation of a loss before the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect, the first decoration of the left, middle, and right columns will be displayed. The symbol is configured so that it starts to fluctuate with an action at the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of a losing pattern fluctuation in a pseudo-combination or reach effect that does not result in a pseudo-continuous or reach effect, or in a normal symbol variation that does not involve a look-ahead effect. may be configured so that the action at the start of the symbol variation is not required when starting the symbol variation. In addition, although it is suitable not to perform the action at the time of a fluctuation|variation start about a 2nd decorative pattern, you may perform the same action at the time of a fluctuation|variation as for a 1st decorative pattern.
<Effects of action at the start of fluctuation (action at start)>
(1) By starting the fluctuation with an action at the start of the fluctuation, the timing of the start of the fluctuation can be clearly indicated. In addition, it is possible to suggest the degree of winning expectation etc. at the timing of the start of fluctuation.

Further, a specific example of adding one or more elements to any one or more elements as a change start action is as follows.
(1) The first decorative pattern immediately before the fluctuation starts is composed of only the first element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added, and the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element and the second element. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation.
(2) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of variation is composed of only the first element, but when the variation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative pattern is composed of the first and third elements. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation.
(3) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of only the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added, and the first decorative design is composed of the first element and the second element. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation.
(4) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of variation is composed of only the second element, but when the variation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative pattern is composed of the second and third elements. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation.
(5) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added and the first, second, and third elements are added. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern consisting of.
(6) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added and the first, second, and third elements are added. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern consisting of.
(7) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the second element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added and the first, second, and third elements are added. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern consisting of.
The above (1) to (7) may be actions at the start of fluctuation by all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, or any one of the left, middle, and right columns. The action at the start of variation may be in one column, or the action at the start of variation may be in any two columns among the left column, middle column, and right column.

<Fixed position action (Fixed position action)>
For any of the first decorative patterns in the left row, middle row, or right row, when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped after starting the pattern fluctuation (at the timing of the temporary stop, which is immediately after the temporary stop), a special You can execute symbol actions. Fixed position action is fixed position action A, a flashier symbol action than fixed position action A (longer action execution time, larger display area used in action, higher magnification, faster rotation, light emission, etc.) There are multiple types of fixed-position action B, such as fixed-position action B, which has a strong effect, etc., and it is better to have a pattern change with high expectations such as a pseudo-continuation or a reach effect, than a normal symbol change with a low expectation that does not result in a pseudo-continuation or a reach effect. , is configured so that the fixed position action B is likely to occur. In other words, the fixed-position action B is configured as an action with higher expectations than the fixed-position action A. The fixed position action may be executed at a timing different from the action at the start of the fluctuation, and the action may be the same as, similar to, or different from the action at the start of the fluctuation. In the case of an action different from the action at the start of variation, it may be a fixed position action in which the first decorative pattern is enlarged at a position below the first decorative pattern of the action at the start of variation, and then returned to the position above. Regarding the fixed position action, different fixed position actions may be executed depending on the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element) , the type of the first element, and the type of the second element). When performing a fixed position action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, type of first element + second element, type of first element, type of second element), if the first element is a lion, For example, if a lion executes an action of attacking and the first element is a chick, the chick executes an action of waving its arms. Furthermore, a fixed position action dedicated to the chance look-ahead performance may be provided, which is used when determining and stopping the symbol combination of chance in the chance look-ahead performance. An example of the fixed position action dedicated to this opportunity prediction performance is an action in which the first decorative pattern bounces, followed by an action in which it is enlarged. In addition, in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to temporarily stop without a fixed position action, but it may also be accompanied by a fixed position action, and if configured in such a way, the time reduction game state can smoothly proceed. In order to do so, it is preferable to configure the system so that the possibility of a fixed position action being involved is lower than in a non-time saving gaming state. In addition, when the first decorative symbol of the corresponding symbol variation that becomes a pseudo-run or reach effect is temporarily stopped, or when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped due to a losing symbol variation before the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect, the left row, the right In the display area where the first decorative pattern of the row temporarily stops (display area at fixed position), it is configured to temporarily stop with a fixed position action, and it is configured to temporarily stop with a fixed position action, so that it can be used to create a pseudo series or reach effect that does not result in a pseudo continuous or reach effect. In normal symbol variations that do not involve losing symbol variations or look-ahead effects, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns may be configured so as not to involve fixed position actions. In addition, although it is suitable not to perform a fixed position action about a 2nd decorative pattern, you may perform the fixed position action similar to a 1st decorative pattern. When the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops and then fluctuates again in a symbol variation that becomes a pseudo-reunion, the first decorative symbol in the middle row may also perform a fixed position action in the fixed position display area. .
<Effects of fixed position action (fixed position movement)>
(1) By temporarily stopping the first decorative pattern with a fixed position action, the temporary stopping timing can be clearly indicated. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning.

<Shaking action (shaking action)>
The first decorative pattern can perform a shaking action, which is a special pattern action, during the pattern variation or the variation standby state (determined stop state). Note that a state in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped and neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held is called a variable standby state. For example, if the symbols are fluctuating, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns will temporarily stop and then perform the shaking action (also referred to as shaking fluctuation), and if the symbols are in the waiting state, the left column, A shaking action is performed when a predetermined time elapses after the first decorative patterns in the middle row and the right row are fixed and stopped. The shaking action only needs to be executed at a different timing from the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action, and the action may be the same or similar to the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action, or it may be a different action. But that's fine. Regarding the shaking action, it may be a different action depending on the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of first element + second element, the type of first element, the type of first element, The configuration may be such that an action corresponding to the type of two elements is executed. When performing a shaking action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, type of first element + second element, type of first element, type of second element), if the first element is a lion, For example, if a lion performs an action of shaking its head up and down, and the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of shaking its head from side to side. Further, the shaking action during the super reach performance or the battle reach performance may be configured to be different from the shaking action during the normal reach performance. For example, the shaking action during the super reach effect or the battle reach effect has a smaller first decorative pattern, or the shaking action by deleting the first element and using only the second element, compared to the shaking action during the normal reach effect. There are examples in which the swing width is small, and the swing motion is slow (one swing period is longer than the normal reach performance). In addition, although it is suitable not to perform a shaking action about the 2nd decorative pattern, you may perform the same shaking action as the 1st decorative pattern. Further, in the acceleration fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, and deceleration fluctuation that are the states before the temporary stop, this shaking action is not accompanied (the fluctuation display is performed without performing any symbol action). In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, the shaking action is executed during symbol fluctuation, but the shaking action is not executed during the fluctuation standby state (determined stop state). In addition, shaking actions include shaking action A, shaking action B, which is a flashier pattern action than shaking action A (larger display area used in the action, higher magnification, faster rotation, stronger light emission, etc.) Multiple types may be provided. When configured in this way, it is better to have a symbol variation with a high expectation level such as a symbol variation with a large number of pseudo-runs or a super reach effect, than a symbol variation with a low expectation level such as a symbol variation with a small number of pseudo-runs or a normal reach effect. The structure is such that the shaking action B is more likely to occur than the fluctuation. In other words, the shaking action B is configured as an action with higher expectations than the shaking action A.
<Effect of shaking action>
(1) By performing the shaking action, it can be shown that the game is temporarily stopped, in other words, the situation is before a definite stop (a situation where whether it is a win or a loss is not yet determined in terms of presentation). Further, the effect on the first decorative pattern can be performed not only during the fluctuation but also after the fixed stop.

<Tenpai action (special action)>
The first decorative pattern is the first decorative pattern temporarily stopped first (for example, the first decorative pattern in the left column) and the first decorative pattern temporarily stopped next (for example, the first decorative pattern in the right column), or When the first decorative symbols temporarily stopped at the same time (for example, the first decorative symbol in the left row and the first decorative symbol in the right row) are tenpai (forming a reach state) with the same symbol, a special symbol action is taken. You can perform Tenpai actions. The Tenpai action only needs to be executed at a different timing from the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, and the shaking action, and the action may be the same as the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, and the swinging action, or a similar action. or a different action. Regarding the tenpai action, different tenpai actions may be executed depending on the symbol row of the first decorative symbol, or the type of the first decorative symbol (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the second element, The configuration may be such that an action corresponding to the type of one element or the type of a second element is executed. When performing a tenpai action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, type of first element + second element, type of first element, type of second element), if the first element is a lion, For example, if a lion performs an action of roaring and the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of blowing away the upper and lower shells. Further, in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to execute a tenpai action when the player reaches tenpai (a state in which a ready-to-reach state is formed), but it is not necessary to perform a tenpai action. Here, if the configuration is such that a tenpai action is executed when tenpai (a state where a reach state is formed) in a time-reduced gaming state, a tenpai action is executed when a tenpai action is made when a tenpai action is made (a state where a reach state is formed) in a non-time reduction gaming state. It is preferable to configure the system so that the possibility of a tenpai action occurring when making a tenpai (a state in which a ready-to-reach state is formed) is lower than when executing an action. In addition, Tenpai Action has flashier pattern actions than Tenpai Action A and Tenpai Action A (longer action execution time, larger display area used in action, higher magnification, faster rotation, stronger light emission, etc.) ) may be provided in multiple types, such as Tenpai Action B. When configured in this way, it is better to have a symbol variation with a high expectation level such as a symbol variation with a large number of pseudo-runs or a super reach effect, than a symbol variation with a low expectation level such as a symbol variation with a small number of pseudo-runs or a normal reach effect. The structure is such that tenpai action B is more likely to occur than fluctuation. In other words, Tenpai Action B is configured as an action with higher expectations than Tenpai Action A. Regarding the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform a tenpai action during the fluctuation, but a tenpai action similar to that of the first decorative symbol may be performed.
<Effects of Tenpai Action (Special Action)>
(1) The type of the first decorative symbol that is being played can be highlighted to the player.

<Decision action (decision movement)>
The first decorative pattern is a deciding action that is a special pattern action using the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns when displaying a jackpot pattern via a reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) can be executed. The decisive action only needs to be executed at a different timing from the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the shaking action, and the tenpai action, and the action may be the same as the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the shaking action, and the tenpai action. It may be a similar action, or it may be a different action. Further, in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to execute a decisive action, but it is not necessary to execute a decisive action. Here, if the configuration is such that the deciding action is executed when displaying the jackpot symbol via the reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) in the time reduction gaming state, the reach effect ( When displaying a jackpot symbol via a reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) than when executing a decision action when displaying a jackpot symbol via a reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) It is preferable to configure the system so that it is less likely to involve a decisive action. In addition, the decisive action is the decisive action A, a flashier symbol action than the decisive action A (longer action execution time, larger display area used in the action, higher magnification, faster rotation, stronger light emission, etc.) ) may be provided. If configured in this way, the game will stop at a symbol combination such as "777" that transitions to a probability-changing gaming state or a time-reducing gaming state after a jackpot (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively large number of rounds). When displayed, symbol combinations such as "222" that transition to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state or a non-time saving gaming state after a jackpot (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively small number of rounds) The configuration is such that decisive action B occurs more easily than when the display is stopped at . In addition, when displaying a symbol combination that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state or a time-reducing gaming state after a jackpot such as "777" (or a symbol combination that corresponds to a special game with a relatively large number of rounds), A symbol combination that causes a decisive action, but shifts to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state or a non-time saving gaming state after a jackpot such as "222" (or a symbol combination that corresponds to a special game with a relatively small number of rounds) In the case of stop display at , the configuration may be such that no decisive action occurs. Although it is preferable not to perform a determining action for the second decorative pattern, a determining action similar to that for the first decorative pattern may be performed.
<Effect of decisive action>
(1) When displaying the jackpot symbol, it is possible to highlight to the player that it will be a jackpot.

FIG. 126 shows the display screen and display priority displayed on the performance display device SG during the waiting period for fluctuation. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. Currently, the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the standby movie described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , the second decorative symbol is also displayed in a stopped state at "437", the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is "0". A pending display for the production of the fluctuation (This is displayed when the first pending display is erased when the fluctuation starts, and is displayed until the end or the middle of the fluctuation ( Even if the display ends, when the next variation starts, a holding display for the effect of the variation corresponding to the next variation is displayed)), a first holding display on the first main game side, and a second holding display on the second main game side. The first pending display is not displayed. The display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is different from the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side, and the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is as follows. The numbers indicating the number of reservations are hollowed out, and the display mode of the second reservation display on the second main game side is such that the numbers indicating the number of reservations are not hollowed out. The display priority is second decorative pattern>second pending display>first decorative pattern. In addition, the display priority may be 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative pattern > 1st decorative pattern, and since the 2nd decorative pattern and the 2nd pending display do not overlap, the 2nd decorative pattern The pattern may be such that the pattern = second reservation display > first decorative pattern.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. Currently, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has passed since the fluctuation stopped, and the time is not shortened. In the waiting screen display 1 for fluctuations in the gaming state, the displayed first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, second pending display on the first main game side, and second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. . In addition, similar to the variation standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the performance pending display of the variation, the first pending display on the first main game side, and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. Not yet. Here, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation has stopped, a waiting movie is displayed indicating that the fluctuation is on standby (variation has stopped), and the waiting movie uses a part of the reach effect. Information on the rights of the character (first element) used in the first decorative pattern is displayed. There are multiple types of characters displayed during this waiting movie, and the characters are the same as the characters (first element) used in each first decorative pattern, but the characters are the same as the characters (first element) used in each first decorative pattern, and the second element is a specific first decorative pattern. is the first decorative pattern of "7" (for example, the first decorative pattern that indicates that a special game will be executed that will trigger a transition to a high-accuracy, high-base state when the number doubles) , which is the first decorative pattern indicating that a special game with the highest number of rounds will be executed by being the number zero) is the other first decorative pattern and the second The first decorative pattern with two elements being "6" (for example, this "6" is the first decorative pattern that indicates that a special game will be executed that will trigger a transition to a low-probability-high base state by becoming the number zero). Waiting movie than the character (second element) corresponding to the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern indicating that a special game other than the special game with the largest number of rounds will be executed by being a number zero) (Alternatively, the character corresponding to the first decorative pattern whose second element is "6" may be configured not to be displayed at all in the waiting movie).

In addition, in the variation standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state or the variation standby screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the effect holding display area for the variation (the place where the effect holding for the variation is displayed) Although a configuration has been described in which the first hold display area (display to indicate the place where the hold is displayed) and the first hold display area on the first main game side (display to show the place where the hold is displayed) are not displayed, a structure in which these are displayed may also be used. For example, each display area may be divided into a display area as a holding display area for the performance of the variation and a first holding display area on the first main game side. This makes it possible to suggest that a display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display or a pending display for effecting the variation will be displayed even when the variation is on standby (variation is stopped). In addition, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display (the first The main game side, the second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative pattern and the first pending display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanging number in the first pending display, but in addition to the waiting movie, the player can recognize that the number is not changing in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the player can recognize that the number is not changing in the first pending display. The configuration may be such that the unchanged number can be recognized on the display.

Next, the variable standby screen display 1 in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (before the transition to the standby movie) The first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state at "437", the second decorative symbol is similarly displayed in a stopped state at "437", and the second pending display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and the right hit instruction display is "→→right hit →→", and the hold display for the production of the change, the first main game The first pending display on the side and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time saving gaming state, the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is different from the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side. , the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is such that the number indicating the pending number is hollowed out, and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side is such that the number indicating the pending number is hollow. It's not hollow. The display priority is as follows: right hit instruction display > second decorative symbol > second pending display > first decorative symbol. In addition, the display priority may be right-handed instruction display > second pending display > second decorative pattern > first decorative pattern, and the right-handed instruction display is different from the second decorative symbol and second pending display. Since they do not overlap, the following may be true: right hit instruction display>second decorative pattern=second pending display>first decorative pattern.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, the fluctuation is being stopped, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has passed since the fluctuation has been stopped. 2 decorative symbols, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similar to the variation standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the performance pending display of the variation, the first pending display on the first main game side, and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. Not yet. Also, similar to the fluctuation standby screen display 2 in the non-time saving gaming state, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation has stopped, a waiting movie indicating that the fluctuation is on standby (fluctuation stopped) is displayed. The waiting movie is the same as the waiting movie displayed on the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state.

In addition, in the variation standby screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state or the variation standby screen display 2 in the time-reduced gaming state, there is a display area for holding the effect of the variation (to indicate the place where the holding for the effect of the variation is displayed). Although a configuration has been described in which the display) and the first reservation display area on the second main game side (display for indicating the location where reservations are displayed) are not displayed, a configuration in which these are displayed may also be used. For example, display may be performed in which each display area is divided into a holding display area for the performance of the variation and a first holding display area on the second main game side. Thereby, even during a time-reduced game, it is possible to suggest that the variable performance pending display is displayed, and to make it easier to recognize the number of first pending displays on the second main game side. In addition, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the time-reduced gaming state, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display (in the same position) as the variable stand-by screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state, It may be configured such that the first decorative pattern and the first pending display are not displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanged number in the first pending display, but in addition to the waiting movie, the player can recognize that the number is not changing in the second decorative pattern, and the player can recognize the unchanged number in the second pending display. The configuration can be such that numbers can be recognized.

In addition to the screen display configuration described above, various screen display configurations are possible, such as variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state and variable standby screen display in the time reduction gaming state. 1, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed, and in the non-time saving game state, the hold on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. If neither side is on hold and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable standby screen display 1 may transition to the variable standby screen display 2. However, in the time reduction gaming state, the variable standby screen display 1 is displayed. , even if there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side and a predetermined period has elapsed, the screen display 1 is configured not to shift from the variable standby screen display 1 to the variable standby screen display 2. Good too.

Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display will be described using FIG. 127. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. In the non-time reduction gaming state, the volume can be adjusted during standby (variation stop) or variation. Volume adjustment is performed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the volume adjustment screen (display indicating the volume, display of the cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) is displayed. When the sub input button SB is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen is ended. If in the non-time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. The volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these displays, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen may be configured to overlap the first decorative pattern but not the second decorative pattern. As a result, it is possible to configure the volume adjustment screens to overlap, except for displays for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is changing in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for effect of the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen smaller during the change than when the change is on standby (change is stopped). For example, a simple scaled-down version of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing volume, display of cross button SB-2 showing how to adjust volume, sub-input showing ending volume adjustment screen) The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent may be reduced (respectively), or only the volume is displayed, or the volume is displayed and the cross button SB-2 is displayed to show how to adjust the volume. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If only the display shows the volume, or if there is only a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the volume adjustment method, the display format may be the same as that during fluctuation standby (variation stop). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. Thereby, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. Note that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, but may be configured to be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is second decorative pattern > second pending display > volume adjustment screen > first decorative pattern > first pending display (and the pending display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority may be such that the second decorative pattern = the second pending display, the second decorative pattern < the second pending display, and the first decorative pattern < the first pending display (and the pending display for the production of the variation). good. Note that if a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the waiting movie is being displayed, the display of the waiting movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the volume adjustment in the time reduction game state will be explained. In the time reduction game state, the volume can be adjusted during standby for fluctuation (stopping of fluctuation) or during fluctuation. If in the time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, right hit The instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen may be configured to overlap the first decorative pattern but not the second decorative pattern. As a result, it is possible to configure the volume adjustment screens to overlap, except for displays for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is changing in the time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the pending display for the effect of the change. , If there is a hold, the first hold display and right hit instruction display on the second main game side will be displayed, and although not shown, the volume adjustment screen will be displayed smaller during change standby (change stop) than during change standby (change stop). is preferable, and for example, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. For example, a simple scaled-down version of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stopped) (display showing the volume, display of the cross button SB-2 showing the volume adjustment method, sub-input button showing to end the volume adjustment screen) It may be a reduced version of the SB display and the image display that makes the screen translucent), or it may be a display that only shows the volume, or a display that shows the volume and the cross button SB-2 that shows how to adjust the volume. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If only the display shows the volume, or if there is only a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the volume adjustment method, the display format may be the same as that during fluctuation standby (variation stop). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. Thereby, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. Note that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, but may be configured to be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is as follows: right hit instruction display>second decorative pattern>second hold display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first hold display (and hold display for production of the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: Right-handed hitting instruction display > 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative pattern, 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display > Right-handed instruction display, 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative symbol > Right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, the second decorative pattern may be equal to the second reserved display, and the first decorative symbol may be less than the first reserved display (and the reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. In the non-time reduction gaming state, the light amount can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop). The light intensity adjustment is performed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the light intensity adjustment screen (display showing the light intensity, display of the cross button indicating the light intensity adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) is displayed. When the sub input button SB is operated, the display of the light amount adjustment screen is ended. If in the non-time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. The light amount adjustment screen may be displayed to overlap with all of these displays, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. If it is changing in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for effect of the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen smaller during the change than during change standby (change stop). For example, a simple scaled-down version of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing the light intensity, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen) The display of button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent may be reduced (respectively), or only the display showing the amount of light, or the display showing the amount of light and the cross button SB-2 showing how to adjust the amount of light. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If the display only shows the amount of light, or the combination of the display showing the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display format may be the same as that during standby for fluctuation (stopping fluctuation). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, it is possible to have a configuration in which the light amount adjustment screens are overlapped, except for displays where visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If it is changing in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for effect of the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. Note that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during fluctuation, and if the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed during fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated, the light intensity will be adjusted. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is second decorative pattern > second pending display > light amount adjustment screen > first decorative pattern > first pending display (and the pending display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority may be such that the second decorative pattern = the second pending display, the second decorative pattern < the second pending display, and the first decorative pattern < the first pending display (and the pending display for the production of the variation). good. Note that if a button operation related to light amount adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the waiting movie is being displayed, the display of the waiting movie is ended and the light amount adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the light amount adjustment in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. In the time reduction game state, the light amount can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop). If in the time reduction gaming state, if the fluctuation is on standby (variation is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, right hit The instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of them, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen may be configured to overlap with the first decorative pattern but not with the second decorative pattern. For example, a simple scaled-down version of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing the light intensity, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen) It may be a reduced version of each of the SB display and the image display that makes the screen translucent), or it may be a display that only shows the light amount, or a display that shows the light amount and the cross button SB-2 display that shows how to adjust the light amount. It is also possible to use only a combination of the two. If the display only shows the amount of light, or the combination of the display showing the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 showing the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display format may be the same as that during standby for fluctuation (stopping fluctuation). , may be made different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, it is possible to have a configuration in which the light amount adjustment screens are overlapped, except for displays where visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If it is changing in the time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, the hold display for the effect of the change , if there is a hold, the first hold display and right hit instruction display on the second main game side are displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. Note that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during fluctuation, and if the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed during fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated, the light intensity will be adjusted. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: right hit instruction display > second decorative pattern > second pending display > light amount adjustment screen > first decorative pattern > first pending display (and the pending display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: Right hit instruction display > 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative pattern, 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display > Right hit instruction display, 2nd pending display > 2nd decorative symbol > Right hit instruction display , and furthermore, the second decorative pattern may be equal to the second reserved display, and the first decorative symbol may be less than the first reserved display (and the reserved display for producing the variation).

Next, screen display during normal fluctuation will be described using FIG. 128. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. Currently, they are changing, including a variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, a variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, a second pending display "2" on the first main game side, and a variable display of the second decorative symbol on the first main game side. 2 pending display "0", the pending display for the effect of the fluctuation, the 1st pending display (2 pieces) on the 1st main game side, and the 1st pending display on the 2nd main game side is not displayed. do not have. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time saving game state, when a ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed. When the hold display counts up (adds up) and changes related to hold on the second main game side start, the first hold display on the second main game side decreases by one, and the second hold display on the second main game side decreases by one. is configured to count down (subtract). Specifically, currently there are two pending on the first main game side, two first pending displays on the first main game side, "2" on the second pending display on the first main game side, The first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a new ball enters the second main game start port B10. If so, one first pending display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second pending display on the second main game side is updated from "0" to "1". The display priority is sub-area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) > second pending display > main area (fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > pending display for production of the relevant variation > The first pending display on the first main game side>the first pending display on the second main game side. In addition, the display priority may be sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) < second pending display, sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) = second pending display, or the main area The display priority of (fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest among these, and the first pending display on the first main game side <the second main game side The first pending display on the side, and the first pending display on the first main game side may be equal to the first pending display on the second main game side.

Next, the normal fluctuation screen display in the time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, it is changing, with the first decorative symbol fluctuating display in the main area, the second decorative symbol fluctuating displaying in the sub area, the second pending display "0" on the first main game side, and the second decorative symbol on the second main game side. 2 hold display "2", the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation, the 1st hold display (2 pieces) on the 2nd main game side, the right hit instruction display, and the 1st hold display on the 1st main game side The display is not displayed. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the time reduction game state, even if a ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed, but the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. The second pending display is configured to count up. The display priority is as follows: Right hit instruction display > Sub area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern) > Second pending display > Main area (fluctuating display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > The variation in question. Performance hold display>first hold display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-area (variable display of the second decorative pattern) < second pending display, sub-area (variable display of the second decorative pattern) = second pending display, or the main area The display priority of (fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest among these, and the configuration may be such that the first pending display of the first main game side is displayed. , Hold display for effect of the fluctuation>First hold display on the first main game side>First hold display on the second main game side, or Hold display for effect of the fluctuation>First hold on the second main game side Display>First pending display on the first main game side.

Here, we will supplement the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 128.

In the non-time saving game state (state not accompanied by electric support state), the first main game side hold display is displayed in the display mode of "●" as the first hold display. On the other hand, in the time reduction game state (a state accompanied by an electric support state), the second main game side hold display is displayed in a "heart (filled)" display mode as the first hold display. In addition, the second hold display is the same regardless of whether it is a non-time reduction gaming state or a time reduction gaming state, but the second hold display on the first main game side is a "hollowed number". The second pending display on the second main game side is a display mode of "filled numbers." Furthermore, the difference between the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side is indicated not only by hollowing out or filling, but also by different colors of numbers, etc. may be configured.

In addition, when the starting opening is configured such that the ball enters the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 alternately (see the fifth embodiment), the first holding on the first main game side The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first reservation display on the second main game side may be the same, and regardless of whether it is a non-time reduction game state or a time reduction game state, the first reservation display and the first reservation display on the first main game side It may be configured to display the first pending display on the second main game side. This makes it difficult to recognize which of the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 the ball has entered.

In the main area, the first decorative pattern is displayed from top to bottom (or from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) using the entire production display device SG in the left, middle, and right columns. A moving scroll display (specifically, the first decorative pattern displayed in the main area is sequentially switched while scrolling in the order of 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → ... 1 → ...) (temporary stop → final stop in the order of left and right middle), but in the sub area, the second decorative pattern is displayed at the bottom right of the effect display device SG in the left column, middle column, and right column. It is displayed as if it is changing on the spot (in other words, it is displayed using the entire effect display device SG to scroll from top to bottom (or bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) Instead of a floating display that appears to be moving from top to bottom, bottom to top, left to right, or right to left only in some display areas, or horizontal rotation or vertical rotation only in some display areas. (a variable display of a switching display mode in which the display of the second decorative pattern recognized by the player is switched in the partial display area by rotating the button half a turn or one turn). Note that the first decorative pattern may be displayed not only in a scrolling manner, but also in a horizontally or vertically rotating manner so that it changes on the spot. In addition, the first decorative symbol, which has the role of enlivening the production, is configured so that the type of variable display differs depending on the game state and production stage (for example, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a low-accuracy, low-base state or in production mode A). The second decorative pattern is a scrolling display, but it is a rotating display in the high-accuracy, high-base state and production mode B), thereby realizing a variety of productions. For example, the type of variable display is the same regardless of the game state or production stage (for example, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the low-accuracy low base state or production mode A, and in the high-procurity high base state or production mode B). Also, it is preferable that only scrolling display or rotating display be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 128, in the non-time reduction game state, the performance hold display of the change and the first hold display on the first main game side are displayed at the lower left of the performance display device SG, and in the time reduction game state, The effect display device SG is configured to display a holding display for the effect and a first holding display on the second main game side at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and the player can currently play mainly using either starting port. (In the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game starting opening A10 is the main one; in the time saving gaming state, the second main game starting opening B10 is the main one.) ” or “heart (filled)”), or the display position of the first pending display on the first main game side or the first pending display on the second main game side (in the non-time saving gaming state, the display position of the first pending display on the first main game side 1 pending display is displayed at the bottom left of the performance display device SG, and in the time reduction game state, the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed at the bottom left of the performance display device SG). ing. Furthermore, the display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether the game is in a non-time reduction game state or a time reduction game state. It is.

Here, the first suspension display on the first main game side, the first suspension display on the second main game side, and the second suspension display on the first main game side that may be displayed during fluctuations in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. The display patterns of the hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side will be described in detail below, including examples of changes.
(1) First pending display (1-1) In the non-time saving gaming state, only the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed), reducing the time. In the gaming state, only the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time reduction gaming state, the first reservation display on the first main game side and the first reservation display on the second main game side are displayed, and in the time reduction gaming state, the first reservation display on the second main game side is displayed. Only the first pending display is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time reduction gaming state, only the first reservation display on the first main game side is displayed (the first reservation display on the second main game side is not displayed); A first hold display on the gaming side and a first hold display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second hold display In both the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. .

The area in which the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for the effect of the variation are displayed is collectively referred to as the first hold display area, and The area where the second hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as a second hold display area. As a supplementary note, unlike the first suspension display area, in the second suspension display area, a display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the fluctuation, such as a suspension display for effecting the fluctuation, is not performed. In other words, the second pending display to indicate that the number is changing is not additionally displayed, and only the number of pending items (the number of unchanged items) is displayed.

The effect pending display of the fluctuation is in the same display mode whether it is a fluctuation on the first main game side or a fluctuation on the second main game side. Specifically, in a non-time saving gaming state, whether the fluctuation on the first main game side or the fluctuation on the second main game side is larger than the first pending display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and is in the time reduction gaming state, even if it is a change on the first main game side or a change on the second main game side, the first pending display on the second main game side will be changed. Displayed as a large "heart (filled)". In addition, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the display for holding the effect of the variation can be displayed only in the variation on the first main game side (when the variation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied) {that is, It is configured so that it is not displayed when the fluctuation on the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the second main game side is satisfied), and when it is in the time reduction game state, the fluctuation on the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the second main game side is satisfied) is displayed. It is configured so that it can be displayed only when the fluctuation start condition on the game side is satisfied (in other words, it is not displayed when the fluctuation on the first main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied)) Good too. In addition, as a performance depending on the expectation level of the fluctuation, the display mode of the display for the performance of the fluctuation may be changed, for example, the color changes (default color (here, filled black) → red, etc.), or the shape may change (default shape (here, "circle" for the first main game, "heart" for the second main game) → ☆, etc.), and the number of patterns in the display mode may change. In the non-time saving game state, the number of patterns in the variation on the first main game side (for example, a total of 6 color patterns including the default color, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors.The expected degree of winning is The default color < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow color. The expectation level is higher than the default color < red < rainbow color. It has patterns in a total of six colors: green, red, and rainbow colors.The probability of winning is as follows: default color < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow color. For example, the pattern includes a total of three colors: the default color, red, and rainbow color.The probability of winning is higher than that of the default color < red < rainbow color. Incidentally, the same pattern number relationship may be adopted for unused pending items (first pending display).

The display priority of the first pending display and the second pending display is 2nd pending display > 1st pending display, and if both pending displays are displayed even when the status is not normally changing, The display priority of the second hold display is set higher than the display priority of the first hold display. For example, when a preview image (displayed on the entire screen such as the next preview), SP reach, first decorative pattern, etc. is displayed, the second hold display > preview image (or SP reach, first decorative pattern, etc.) >The first pending display will be displayed.

Regarding whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can overlap, and whether or not the first pending display and the second pending display can overlap, including examples of changes, they are as follows (see Fig. 126, Fig. 128, etc. as necessary). ).
(1) Whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern overlap (1-1) During the fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern overlap (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part is The stop display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are determined so that the second decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern (not shown).
(1-2) During fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop), the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern do not overlap, and during fluctuation, the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern overlap (depending on the display priority) The stop display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are determined such that the second decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern.
For example, if it is a non-time saving gaming state, it may be configured as (1-1), if it is a time saving gaming state, it may be configured as (1-2), and if it is a non-time saving gaming state, it may be configured as (1-2). The configuration of 2) may be used, and the configuration of (1-1) may also be used in the time-reduced gaming state.
(2) Whether or not the first hold display and the second hold display can overlap In both cases, during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, The first pending display and the second pending display (first pending display on the main game side) and second pending display (second pending display on the first main game side, second pending display on the second main game side) are The display position with the hold display is determined. Note that this can also be applied during a definite stop.

Whether the first decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap, whether the second decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap, whether the first decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap, whether the second decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap, The possibility of duplication is as follows.
(A) Non-time saving gaming state (1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first pending display can overlap The first decorative symbol and the first pending display both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first pending display are determined so that they overlap (depending on the display priority, the first decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first pending display in the overlapping portion).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap.The second decorative pattern and the second pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the second pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is determined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second pending display can overlap.The first decorative symbol and the second pending display overlap both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part The display positions of the first decorative symbol and the second pending display are determined such that the second pending display is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap The second decorative pattern and the first pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the first pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the first hold display is determined. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol and the first pending display are set to overlap at least during fluctuation, and similarly, in the non-time saving gaming state, the first decorative symbol and the second pending display are They are determined to overlap at least during fluctuation, and may be determined to overlap or not overlap while waiting for fluctuation.
(B) Time reduction game state (1) Whether the first decorative symbol and the first pending display can overlap or not The first decorative symbol and the first pending display overlap both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first pending display are determined so as to prevent the above-mentioned situation from occurring. It should be noted that during fluctuations, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than in the non-time saving gaming state).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap.The second decorative pattern and the second pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the second pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is determined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative pattern and the second pending display can overlap The first decorative pattern and the second pending display are designed to prevent overlap between the first decorative pattern and the second pending display, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is determined. It should be noted that during fluctuations, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than in the non-time saving gaming state).
(4) Whether or not the second decorative pattern and the first pending display can overlap The second decorative pattern and the first pending display should be overlapped so that the second decorative pattern and the first pending display do not overlap, both during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) and during fluctuation. The display position of the first hold display is determined.

Next, screen display during SP reach will be described using FIG. 129. First, the SP reach screen display 1 in the non-time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, SP reach is in progress, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-area, the second pending display is "2" on the first main game side, the second pending display is "0" on the second main game side, The production hold display is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (up to hold 4), and the second main game starting port B10 When a game ball enters the ball, the second hold display on the second main game side is updated (up to hold 4). The first pending display can be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen (flat stage screen, etc.) which is in a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state after the SP reach ends, but at this time, the SP The first pending display will be displayed, including the ball that entered during the reach. Specifically, if the number of pending items increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first pending display will not be displayed during SP reach, but when you return to the normal stage screen, three first pending displays will be displayed. It is. The display priority is sub-area (fluctuating display of second decorative symbol)>second hold display>hold display for effect of the variation>SP ready-to-reach effect.

Next, the SP reach screen display 2 in the non-time reduction gaming state will be explained. Currently, SP reach is in progress, the movable accessory YK has moved to the front of the performance display device SG, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area, and the second pending display on the first main game side is "2". , the second hold display "0" on the second main game side, and the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation are displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are Not displayed. Incidentally, the suspension display for effecting the variation may be configured so as not to be displayed.

In this way, under certain circumstances {during SP reach, while movable accessories are in operation, promotion effects (effects that incite whether or not to be promoted from an even numbered symbol that is a non-probable variable pattern to an odd numbered symbol that is a variable variable pattern), an error screen display Medium}, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the SP reach by configuring a configuration in which the fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side are not displayed. . In addition, even during SP reach, it may be configured to display a variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area or a first pending display on the first main game side. In this case, the first decorative symbol in the main area It is preferable that the fluctuating display of the symbol be displayed in a small size in the upper right corner of the performance display device SG (approximately the same size as the fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol, or slightly larger than the fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol), and in the main area. By displaying a variable display of the first decorative pattern in the , it is possible to show the player the reach mode (for example, "4↓4") and the reach pattern (for example, displaying only one "4"). Become. The display priority is sub-area (fluctuating display of the second decorative pattern)>second hold display>hold display for the effect of said change>liquid crystal display {effect display (in Fig. 129, the star-shaped movable accessory YK is falling) This is a performance on the performance display device SG that makes it appear as if the object is shining brightly upward based on the falling position).

Next, updating of the first hold display and the second hold display will be described using FIG. 130. First, the fluctuation has ended and the fluctuation has stopped in a state where there are two pending games on the first main game side. Next, a new change on the first main game side has just started, and the first pending display on the first main game side has begun to shift its display position (shift animation has started), and the second The pending display is subtracted from "2" to "1" immediately after the fluctuation starts. Next, before the shift of the first hold display on the first main game side is completed, a new game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, and in response to the new ball entering, the first A hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is performed in which the first hold display on the main game side increases by one, and the second hold display on the first main game side changes from "1" to "immediately after a new ball enters." 2".

Here, we will supplement the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 130.

When a new hold occurs (when a game ball newly enters the starting port), the execution time of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display (for example, 1000 ms) {from the bottom of the effect display device SG It is an effect in which the holds gradually appear and are displayed at a fixed position (the place where the Nth hold is displayed), and the time from the start of appearance to the completion of display is 1000 ms} is the update time of the second hold display ( The addition time and subtraction time are configured to be longer than 100 ms, for example. Also, the execution time of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display (for example, 1500 ms) {The hold displayed at the place where the Nth hold is displayed moves, and the It moves to the place where the hold is displayed, and then settles in a fixed position (the place where the N-1th hold is displayed) and displays it, and the time from the start of movement to the completion of display (movement completion) is 1500 ms} is configured to be longer than the update time of the second pending display. Furthermore, the update time of the second pending display is shorter than the fluctuation fixing time (for example, the fluctuation fixing time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms, the fluctuation fixing time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

Regarding the fluctuation fixing time, the fluctuation fixing time of the first main game symbol was set to 500 ms, and the fluctuation fixing time of the second main game symbol was set to 300 ms, but it is not limited to this, and the fluctuation of the first main game symbol The fixed time and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol may be the same time, or each variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms for a non-time reducing game state and 300 ms for a time reducing game state) is predetermined depending on the gaming state. It may be. In addition, the fixed time of the symbol fluctuation may be set to be different depending on the number of reservations, and in this case, when symbol fluctuation is started in a situation where there are 2 to 4 reservations, or when a fixed stop occurs, the first main game side When there is a hold on the second main game side or a hold on the second main game side, the fixed time for fluctuation is 500ms, and when symbol fluctuation is started in a situation where there is one hold or when a fixed stop occurs, the hold on the first main game side also changes to the second main game side. Although it is preferable to set the variable fixed time to 0 ms when there is no hold on the side, the variable fixed time is not limited to this time. Further, it is preferable that the fixed variation time of the first decorative symbol and the fixed variation time of the second decorative symbol are set to match the fixed variation time of the first main game symbol and the fixed variation time of the second main game symbol. However, the variable fixed time may be different from the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol.

Immediately after the start of fluctuation, the first pending display can simultaneously (duplicately) display a shift display (shift animation) and a pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) {that is, the first pending display If the shift display (shift animation) is started while the occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) is being executed, the pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) can be changed without interrupting the pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation). If the shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time, and the execution of the pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) is started while the shift display (shift animation) is being executed, the shift display (shift animation) that is being executed ) The shift display (shift animation) and the pending occurrence display (the pending occurrence animation) can be executed simultaneously. } However, it is impossible for the second hold display to display subtraction and addition at the same time, and after displaying subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation), displaying addition (due to the ball entering the starting hole). It happens. If the number of reservations increases just before the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation starts, the second reservation display will display an addition (due to the start of fluctuation) and then a subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation). In addition, for both subtraction and addition, the time required for this update display (for example, updating from "2" to "1" or from "1" to "2") (for the number display to change) The required time) is 100ms.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the relationship between the look-ahead effect (retention change effect) and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode will be explained. First, the case of "(1) Blue hold change" will be explained. First, there are four pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the number of pending balls is now four due to the new ball entering, and furthermore, the display mode of the first holding display corresponding to the new ball entering is blue pending. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the blue hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is a loss ("861") and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to the blue hold is started, and the blue hold is displayed as the effect hold display (blue) of the change. In addition, when the variation starts when the blue is held, a shorter variation time is likely to be selected than when the variation starts when the red is held (in other words, a variation time with a low probability of winning is more likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach pattern (here, 7 reaches, and 7 reaches has a higher jackpot expectation than other reaches (e.g. 2 reaches)). 2 Decorative symbols do not have a specific reach mode and continue to display fluctuations), but if the variation starts with blue hold, the reach mode will be more specific than when the change starts with red hold, which will be described later. The probability of this happening is low. Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a specific final display mode (in this case, a set of 7) that is a hit, but if the fluctuation starts with blue hold, the fluctuation starts with red hold. The probability of a specific final display mode is lower than when the display starts. Next, the case of "(2) Red reservation change" will be explained. The basic flow is the same as "(1) Blue pending change", but the display mode of the look-ahead effect (pending change effect) is different. First, there are four pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the number of pending balls is now four due to the new ball entering, and furthermore, the display mode of the first holding display corresponding to the new ball entering is red pending. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the red hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is a loss ("861") and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to the red hold is started, and the red hold is displayed as the effect hold display (red) of the change. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with red hold, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with blue hold (in other words, a fluctuation time with a high expectation of winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not have a specific reach mode and continues to display fluctuations), but it is red pending. When the fluctuation starts, the probability of a specific reach pattern is higher than when the fluctuation starts with blue hold. Next, a specific final display mode in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a hit (in this case, a set of 7) is displayed, but if the fluctuation starts with red hold, the fluctuation starts with blue hold. The probability of a specific final display mode is higher than when the display starts. As an example, the probability of becoming a reach with a blue hold is 90% of the variation related to a blue hold, and the probability of becoming a reach with a red hold is 99% of the variation related to a red hold, and the difference is 9% It is. In addition, the probability of a specific reach pattern (for example, 7 reach) with blue hold is 5% of the probability of reaching a reach due to fluctuations related to blue hold, and a specific reach pattern (for example, 7 reach) with red hold. The probability of this is 30% when it becomes a reach due to fluctuations related to red hold. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of a reach in both blue hold and red hold is set high, and the difference between them is set not to be large, and the probability of a specific reach pattern (for example, 7 reach) is set not to be that high. Moreover, it is desirable that the difference be made relatively large. As a result, while the degree of expectation for reach is guaranteed to some extent by changing the hold, by creating a difference in the degree of expectation for subsequent developments (which number will become reach), the first hold display is The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be made more complex. Note that these numerical values (percentages) are just examples and can be changed as appropriate, but it is desirable to have such a magnitude relationship.

Note that when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, using FIG. 132, the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative pattern will be in a predetermined display mode will be explained. First, the case where "(1) number of reservations is 1" will be explained. First, there is one pending state and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuations have begun. Note that when the variation starts when the number of reservations is 1, a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the variation starts when the number of reservations is 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues to be displayed fluctuating), The probability of this mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, a set of 7) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are a hit is displayed, but the probability of achieving the specific final display mode is regardless of the number of reservations. Identical or slightly different. Next, the case of "(2) number of reservations 4" will be explained. The flow at the time of fluctuation is the same as "(1) Number of reservations 1", so it will be omitted, but if the fluctuation starts when the number of reservations is 4, a shorter fluctuation time is selected than when the fluctuation starts when the number of reservations is 1. easy to be In addition, as described in the explanation of "(1) Number of reservations 1", the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reaches) (the second decorative pattern has a specific reach mode and However, the probability of achieving a specific reach mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations, and furthermore, the probability that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol will be a hit is Although the final display mode (here, a set of 7) is displayed, the probability of a specific final display mode is also the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode, the second decorative pattern may also be configured to be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode will be explained using FIG. 133. First, the non-time saving gaming state will be explained. First, there is one pending state and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, variation is started, and the first decorative pattern becomes a reach mode (here, 7 reach mode) (the second decorative pattern does not become a reach mode, but continues to display the variation), and finally, the first decoration The final display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is the final display mode that indicates the winning mode. The configuration is such that a mode transition symbol (for example, a "hidden" symbol) indicating a transition to mode can be displayed. Next, the time reduction game state will be explained. A description of the flow of fluctuations will be omitted since it is the same as in the non-time saving gaming state. In the time reduction game state, the final display mode indicating the winning mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is only the symbol alignment (for example, "777"), and the mode transition symbol indicating the transition to the hidden mode. is configured so that it is not displayed. In other words, the number of candidates for the final display mode is greater for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the non-time reducing game state than in the time reducing game state. By configuring this way, when winning from a non-time saving gaming state, a transition to the latent mode is included, resulting in diverse gameplay, and when winning from a time saving gaming state, the transition to the latent mode is not included. The game state can be recognized by the player, that is, the game can be played in a simple and clear manner during consecutive games. Furthermore, after a specific reach mode (again, a highly expected 7 reach is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-time saving game state, and as an example, 1/3 of each appears. On the other hand, in the time reduction game state, there are "787" and "777", and as an example, it is configured such that each appears by 1/2, and in the time reduction game state, by lowering the probability of losing, it becomes 7 reach. In this case, it is possible to restrict the middle symbol from falling out without reaching 7, and to increase the level of expectation compared to a non-time saving game state.

In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative pattern may display a mode transition pattern indicating transition to the latent mode as the final display mode indicating the winning mode, but the second decorative pattern may display the mode transition pattern indicating the transition to the hidden mode. The mode transition pattern displayed on the pattern may not be displayed, but may be configured to indicate the transition to the latent mode in a different final display mode. For example, the second decorative pattern may be "357" or "246". In addition, it may be configured to display combinations of odd numbered symbols and combinations of even numbered symbols, and furthermore, it may be configured such that the combination of odd numbered symbols has a higher probability of being in the probability fluctuation state in the hidden mode than the combination of even numbered symbols. .

Next, using FIG. 134, the relationship between the game state and the hitting style warning display (left-handed hitting warning display, right-handed hitting warning display) will be explained. First, a warning display on how to play in a non-time saving gaming state will be explained. First, the fluctuation is stopped in a state where there is one pending game on the first main game side. Here, there is no display showing the player how to play. Next, when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, and furthermore, a left-handed hit warning is issued. The display continues until the end conditions are met (for example, 10 seconds, the ball enters the first main game starting port A10, etc.), and an audio warning is also given along with the left-handed hitting warning display (for example, "Left-handed hitting"). please” x 3 times). The left-handed hit warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed in a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it may be displayed overlapping with the second decorative symbol, the first pending display, and the second pending display. It is configured so that it is not displayed. In addition, even if the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time saving game state and the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are updated, the left-handed ball will not be played. No warning display is given. Next, a warning display on how to play in the time reduction game state will be explained. First, there is one hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, a right-hitting instruction display ("→→right-handed hitting→→"), which is a display indicating to the player how to play, is displayed. The right-hand hit instruction display ("→→right-hand hit→→") is displayed in the time reduction gaming state, and does not depend on the update display of the number of reservations (for example, addition of the second reservation display). If it is in a gaming state, it will continue to be displayed. Next, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed), and further , the right-handed hit warning display is continued until the termination condition (for example, the ball enters the second main game starting port B10, etc.), and an audio warning is also given along with the right-handed hit warning display (for example, "right-handed hit"). please"). The right hit warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed in a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it may be displayed overlapping with the second decorative symbol, the first pending display, and the second pending display. It is configured so that it is not displayed. In addition, even if a ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction game state and the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, the right hit warning will not be issued. No display is performed. In addition, an audio warning (``Please hit right'', ``Please hit left'') is output without displaying a hitting warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) on the performance display device SG. The configuration may be such that

Next, using FIG. 135, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability that a pseudo-continuous pattern will be displayed (revariation probability) will be explained. First, the flow of the production will be explained using the case of "blue hold change → re-change (pseudo-reunion)". First, there are three holds on the first main game side, and the first hold is in a state where the first hold is displayed in blue and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, a change due to blue hold is started (blue is displayed as the hold display for the effect of the change), and with "6" displayed in the left column and "7" in the right column, a pseudo linked As a preview, a pseudo-suggestive pattern (here, a semi-transparent "NEXT") in which a pseudo-series pattern (here, a non-transparent "NEXT"), which will be described later, is semi-transparent will be displayed from the top to the bottom of the production display device SG. is displayed scrolling to. Next, the pseudo-coupling suggestive pattern is scrolled to the approximate center of the performance display device SG, and the pseudo-coupling pattern indicating that a pseudo-coupling occurs is displayed at the approximate center of the performance display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbol has stopped, next, a re-fluctuation will be performed in which the symbols will be in a fluctuating state in all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. It should be noted that, as the first decorative pattern, a pseudo-connection suggestive pattern and a pseudo-connection pattern may be displayed, but as the second decorative pattern, the pseudo-connection-suggestive pattern and the pseudo-connection pattern are configured not to be displayed. Next, the display mode of the look-ahead performance (holding change performance) (in this example, the blue holding change and the red holding change) and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed will be explained. As mentioned above, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed, a pseudo-continuous pattern that changes again occurs, but the probability that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed is configured to differ depending on the display mode of the look-ahead performance (holding change performance). For example, in a blue hold with a low expectation of winning, the probability of re-fluctuation (probability of pseudo-relation occurring) is low, and in a red hold with a high expectation of winning, the probability of re-fluctuation is high (i.e. The probability of re-fluctuation may be configured as follows (red hold > blue hold). In addition, above, we have explained the case where the pseudo-connection suggestive pattern and the pseudo-connection pattern are displayed from a display where the left pattern and the right pattern are not the same (not reach), but this is not limited to this, and the left pattern and the right pattern are Not only is the configuration in which a pseudo-connection suggestion pattern and a pseudo-connection pattern are displayed from the same reach display, the first decorative pattern can be changed again (pseudo-connection), but the second decorative pattern can also be changed again (pseudo-connection). ) Possible configuration, the pseudo-connection pattern may be a specific pattern (for example, "7"), and the symbol row in which the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern and the pseudo-connection pattern are displayed may be in the left column or the right column. There may be. Furthermore, the pseudo-link suggestion symbols are displayed at a predetermined position (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.) without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-continuation pattern is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may do so.

Next, using FIG. 136, the probability that a pseudo-connection pattern is displayed during the look-ahead effect display (re-fluctuation probability) and the change in the trigger variation (the variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect), The relationship between the probability of symbol display (revariation probability) will be explained. First, there are two pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the background is displayed in translucent black, which is a highly anticipated display mode of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when a display mode with a high expectation level of look-ahead performance is displayed, the pseudo-association suggesting pattern and the pseudo-association pattern may be configured not to be displayed. may be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, the background continues to be displayed in semi-transparent black and the fluctuation is stopped. Then the trigger variation is started and the background is the normal background (not translucent black). Next, with "6" being displayed in the left column and "7" being displayed in the right column, pseudo-association suggesting symbols are scrolled from top to bottom on the performance display device SG. Next, the pseudo-coupling suggestive pattern is scrolled to approximately the center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-coupling pattern is displayed approximately at the center of the presentation display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbol has stopped, next, a re-fluctuation will be performed in which the symbols will be in a fluctuating state in all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. In this way, for the change related to the hold that is before the change related to the hold that triggered the generation of the look-ahead effect (so-called trigger change), the display mode with a high expectation level (here, a translucent display) is used as the display mode of the look-ahead effect. A black background) may be displayed, but the pseudo-continuation pattern is not displayed, and re-variation (pseudo-continuation) does not occur. The display mode may be configured so that the probability that a pseudo-continuation pattern will be displayed and a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will occur is lower than when the expectation level is low. Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-connection suggestion symbol and the pseudo-connection symbol can be displayed, a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) may occur, or a pseudo-coupling is more likely than the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger variation. It may be configured such that the symbol is displayed to increase the probability that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will occur. Furthermore, the pseudo-link suggestion symbols are displayed at a predetermined position (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.) without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-continuation pattern is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may do so.

Next, using FIG. 137, the decorative pattern after power off and recovery from power off (when RAM is not cleared; in other words, when S1002→S1008→S1010→S1012→S1014→... in FIG. 5) Explain the relationship between First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (fluctuation is stopped), the characters of the first decorative pattern are animals or people, and are displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after the power is restored, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" are displayed as before the power was shut off. There is. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after power-off, etc., and in this case, "861" is displayed. Next, (B) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage B (fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and it is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after the power is restored, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and unlike before the power was turned off, "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. There is. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, (C), which is a modification of (A), will be explained. First, it is staying at stage A (fluctuation is stopped), and the first decorative patterns are displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after the power is restored, Stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and the first decorative pattern is different from before the power is turned off. , 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" are displayed. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Note that here, only the first decorative pattern has been changed, but if a power outage occurs during the stay in stage B and the power is restored, the default stage, stage A, and the first decoration at the time of power outage recovery will be changed. It returns with the default display of the symbols "2 (ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)".

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the relationship between decorative patterns after a power outage and after a power outage recovery (in the case of RAM clearing, in the case of S1002→S1004→S1006→... in FIG. 5) will be explained. First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (fluctuation is stopped), the characters of the first decorative pattern are animals or people, and are displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power outage, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. , 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)". The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after power-off, etc., and in this case, "331" is displayed. Next, (B) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage B (fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and it is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". . The second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power outage, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. ), 3 (penguin), and 1 (chick).” The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as a number "331".

In this way, when the RAM is cleared (RAM cleared and the power is restored), the predetermined display mode (here, stage A , the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern are both "331"), making it easy for players, game store clerks, etc. to understand that the RAM has been cleared.

In addition, the default display of the first decorative pattern when the RAM is cleared, "3 (penguin), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)", may be displayed in a display mode that can only be displayed when the RAM is cleared, or during normal play. However, for example, it may be configured to be displayed as a premiere performance in which a jackpot is almost guaranteed. In addition, the display mode when the RAM is cleared is the same as the default display mode when the power is restored from a power failure (the same display mode as (C) in FIG. 137), and when the RAM is cleared, the first decorative pattern is "2 ( ally), 4 (enemy), and 6 (giraffe)", and the second decorative pattern may be displayed as a number "246".

Next, using Figure 139, reach voice (a sound that is generated when a reach is established that indicates the expectation of winning) and the probability that a pseudo-continuous symbol will be displayed (revariation probability) Explain the relationship between Furthermore, the expected success rate of Reach Voice is as follows: Reach < Opportunity < Development < Super Hot. In addition, it should be noted in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-fluctuation due to the reach voice at the time of the reach formation in the variation that develops into a predetermined SP reach after the reach formation. First, (A) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuation is started, reach is established, and the voice "reach" is generated as a reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and becomes a re-variation (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when reach is established, the re-change probability is set to be high. Next, (B) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and becomes a re-variation (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "chance" occurs when reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to medium. Next, (C) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuation is started, reach is established, and the voice of "development" is generated as a reach voice. Next, the pseudo consecutive symbol "NEXT" is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but the super reach effect is developed, and the super reach effect is displayed. In this way, when the reach voice of "development" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is 0, and the system is configured to directly develop into the super reach performance without re-variation. Next, (D) will be explained. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, fluctuations start, reach is established, and a "super hot" voice is generated as a reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and becomes a re-variation (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when a reach is established and a "super hot" reach voice is generated, the re-change probability is set to be low.

In this way, the system is configured such that the higher the probability of reaching a hit is generated, the lower the re-variation (pseudo-relationship) probability is. In this case (here, the reach voice of "development"), the configuration is such that re-variation (pseudo-relationship) does not occur. In addition, even if some reach voices (for example, "development" reach voice) occur among the reach voices with high expectation of winning, the structure is configured so that re-variation (pseudo-relationship) occurs, and the relevant When some Reach Voices (for example, "Development" Reach Voices) occur, the re-variation probability is set to be high (for example, the re-variation probability is higher than that for "Chance"). You can.

In other words, the expectation of winning due to reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot, and the probability of re-variation (pseudo-run) due to reach voice is:
(1) Development (including non-occurrence) < super hot < chance < reach (2) super hot < chance < development ≦ reach, and it is possible to configure it in a different order from the expected hit level.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the display mode of decorative symbols in full rotation performance will be described. First, there are three pending items and the fluctuation is stopped. Then the fluctuations start and become reach. Next, the words "Full rotation" are displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG, and the symbols are aligned in the left, middle, and right rows of the first decorative symbols (for example, "777" or "888"). ", etc.), and the display is scrolled at a slower speed than normal fluctuations (for example, the state in the second figure). As described above, the first decorative pattern may be scroll-displayed with the patterns aligned, but even when the first decorative pattern is scroll-displayed with the patterns aligned, the second decorative pattern The symbols are not aligned in the left column, middle column, and right column and are displayed individually in a fluctuating manner, and the speed does not slow down (= it maintains a constant speed). Next, at approximately the same time as the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a state where only numbers are aligned. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also be configured to be displayed variably in a state where the patterns are aligned (for example, "777", "888", etc.) so as to be synchronized with the first decorative pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the manner in which the decorative patterns change for each stage will be explained. First, stage A will be explained. In stage A, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a scrolling manner that moves from top to bottom in the display area of the effect display device SG, and the second decorative pattern is displayed at that point (the second A variable display is performed in a scroll display that appears to be moving from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). Next, stage B will be explained. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is rotated horizontally on the spot to change the design, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the spot (second A variable display is performed in a scroll display that appears to be moving from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). In this way, since the first decorative pattern is a pattern that is easy for the player to visually recognize, the variation mode is changed depending on the stage so that the player does not get bored, and the second decorative pattern is a pattern that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Since it is a symbol, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage. Here, stage A is a stage corresponding to a non-time reduction gaming state (or a non-time reduction gaming state and a non-probability variable gaming state), and stage B is a stage corresponding to a time reduction gaming state (or a time reduction gaming state and The stage may be a stage corresponding to a non-time saving gaming state (or a non-time reducing gaming state and a non-probability varying gaming state). It may be configured such that transition from stage A to stage B is possible. Further, the stage may be referred to as a production mode.

In addition, a scroll display that moves the display area of the production display device SG from top to bottom, a scroll display that moves the display area of the production display device SG from right to left, and a variable display that changes the symbol by horizontally rotating on the spot. , etc. are sometimes referred to as variable display formats, that is, variable display formats in which the display area of the effect display device SG is scrolled from top to bottom, and variable display formats in which symbols are changed by horizontal rotation on the spot. The variable display format is different from the variable display format that executes.

Next, using FIG. 142, details of the display contents of the decorative pattern during fluctuation will be explained. First, (A) will be explained. (A) is a diagram regarding the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in a variable pattern that becomes a reach. First, at stage B, the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left, middle, and right rows of the first decorative design, the symbols are rotated horizontally and changed, and the second decorative design is changed. In each symbol column of the left column, middle column, and right column, the symbols change in a vertically scrolling manner on the spot. In each pattern row of the first decorative pattern, the pattern is changed in regular order as "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...", and in the second decorative pattern, Regardless of the variation in the first decorative pattern, a predetermined pattern variation is performed uniformly, such as "275" → "864" → "387" → "641" → "728" → "413". → “156” → “532” → “275” → etc. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in the order of switching. Next, at the timing when the reach is established with "7" in the first decorative symbol, and at the same time, at the timing when the fluctuating "6" is located in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG) , the second decorative pattern that is changing is "275" located within the sub-region, and as described above, the display modes of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern at a predetermined timing when a reach is established are different. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the symbols in the left column and the right column are different, and the reach is not established.

Next, (B) will be explained. (B) is a diagram regarding the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in a variation pattern that does not result in a reach but a loss. First, at stage B, the fluctuation is stopped. Next, variation is started, and in each symbol row of the left row, middle row, and right row of the first decorative pattern, the symbols are rotated horizontally and changed (high-speed variation). 2. In each of the left row, middle row, and right row of decorative symbols, the symbols are varied in a vertically scrolling manner on the spot. Next, the timing is just before the left column stops, the left column of the first decorative pattern is in low-speed fluctuation, and "8" is displayed, and the middle and right columns are in high-speed fluctuation, At this time (albeit momentarily), "868" is displayed (however, the symbol on the right is not a reach because it is changing at high speed). The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed (the second decorative pattern fluctuates almost only at a normal speed. It may be configured to fluctuate at a low speed during a full rotation performance), and at this time (momentarily) ), "864" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing for the left row. The left row of the first decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped), and the middle and right rows of the first decorative pattern are fluctuating at high speed. ), "168" will be displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "387" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the right column stops, and in the left column of the first decorative pattern, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped), and in the right column, "5" is displayed during low speed fluctuation. Yes, the middle row is changing at high speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "165" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the right pattern. In the left column of the first decorative pattern, "1" is stopped (temporary stop), and in the right column, "6" is stopped (temporary stop). The middle row is changing at high speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "166" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (albeit momentarily), "728" is displayed. Next, at the timing just before the end of the variable time, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative pattern, "6" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right column, The middle row is changing at a low speed, and "116" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is changing at a normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, it is the timing when the fluctuation time ends, and a fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the fluctuation time (also for stopping and displaying the fluctuation of the decorative pattern) is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern both stop varying (definitely stop) at "126".

In the first decorative pattern, from just before the left and right rows stop (temporary stop) until the stop (temporary stop), or from just before the variable stop (determined stop) until the variable stop (determined stop), The symbols are changed in the order that they have been arranged consecutively in advance, resulting in a fluctuation stop (determined stop), but in the second decorative pattern, from just before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) until the fluctuation stop (determined stop), the fluctuation stop occurs. The symbol displayed immediately before the stop (determined stop) is instantly changed to the final stop symbol, resulting in a variable stop (determined stop). In this example, in the first decorative pattern, from just before the left column stops (temporary stop) until the left column stops (temporarily stops), the left column changes from "8 to 1", and the right column stops (temporarily stops). The right column changes from "5 to 6" from just before the stop (temporary stop) to the right column's stop (temporary stop), and from just before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) to the time of the fluctuation stop (determined stop). The column has been changed from "1 to 2". The second decorative symbol continues to fluctuate at the normal speed until the fluctuation stops, so the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) changes instantly to the final stop symbol "126". , the left column is changed to "3→1", the middle column is changed to "6→2", and the right column is changed to "2→6". However, while the second decorative pattern is fluctuating, the symbols are displayed randomly, so the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) and the final stop symbol may coincidentally be consecutive.

Further, the pattern arrangement pattern of the second decorative pattern may be regularly continuous, for example, like the first decorative pattern, "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...・" may be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left column, middle column, and right column are displayed differently. Specifically, if the specifications are such that the display is shifted by one, the left column will start from "1" and will be "1→2→3→...", and the middle column will start from "2" and will be "2→3→4". →...'', the right column starts from ``3'' and is changed as ``3→4→5→...'', and is changed to the final stop symbol when the fluctuation stops (determined stop).

In this way, in the first decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the variable time and the pattern displayed at the time of the variable stop (determined stop) (final stop pattern) are continuous or continuous. In many cases, in the second decorative pattern, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol displayed at the time of fluctuation stop (determined stop) (final stop symbol) are not consecutive or are not consecutive. It's happening more often.

Next, the relationship between the pseudo continuous pattern, the developed pattern, and the pseudo continuous pattern and the developed pattern will be explained. In the following explanation, a configuration is shown in which the first decorative symbol, the first pending display, etc. are displayed during super reach, etc., but as mentioned above, the first decorative symbol, the first pending display, etc. are displayed during super reach, etc. A configuration in which the information is not displayed may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern when the re-variation is executed. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". The first decorative pattern is made up of characters and number patterns, and the second decoration pattern is made up of only number patterns. Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern variation. Next, "6" is displayed on both the first and second decorative symbols on the left and right symbols to form a reach, and further, in the main area, re-variation (for example, pseudo-continuous variation) is executed. A translucent ``NEXT'' pattern (``re-variation suggestion pattern'', ``pseudo-association suggestion pattern (pseudo-association suggestion performance)'') that suggests whether or not it is displayed is moving from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen. Next, when re-variation is executed, the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol (also referred to as "re-variation symbol" or "pseudo-continuous symbol") is placed approximately in the center of the LCD screen, instead of the translucent "NEXT" symbol. Is displayed. At this time, no symbol suggesting re-variation is displayed in the sub-area. In the main area, after the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol begin to change the symbol again (the first decorative symbol before the symbol variation starts again). The suspension status is also called "temporary suspension"). At this time, since the number of pending symbols remains 3, it can be seen that one symbol variation is made to appear as if the symbol has varied multiple times. Next, in the symbol variation that was performed again, a reach was formed again with "7" by the left symbol and the right symbol, and after that, a super reach effect was executed, and since the fluctuation was a loss, the first decorative symbol, the second Both decorative symbols are fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol ("717") that is not a double. In addition, during the super reach effect, the battle effect between friendly characters and enemy characters is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, so even if it is the first decorative pattern, only the number pattern is displayed in a small size at the top right of the screen ( (Also referred to as ``retreat display mode''), the player is made to pay attention to the battle performance, and after the battle performance ends, a decorative pattern consisting of characters and numerical patterns is displayed in the same way as at the start of the variation. In addition, the pseudo-connection suggesting symbols are displayed at a predetermined position (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.) without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-continuation pattern is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center part of the middle symbol row (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may do so.

Next, FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed to create a super reach effect. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern variation. Next, "6" is displayed on both the first and second decorative symbols on the left and right symbols to form a reach, and furthermore, in the main area, a specific symbol ( After "Development" or "Development!!!" which is a development pattern) is displayed, a super reach effect is executed. Note that when a specific symbol is displayed in the main area, a symbol indicating that a super reach effect will develop is not displayed in the sub area. Further, although "Development" and "Development!!!" are different symbols, regardless of which one is displayed, a super reach effect with the same development destination can be executed. Furthermore, the expectations for winning are different for "Development" and "Development!!!", and when "Development!!!" is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when "Development" is displayed. The level is getting higher. In addition, there are multiple types of super reach effects, such as super reach effects with different characters and different expectations for winning, and super reach effects with multiple stages such as the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach. As a development pattern for Super Reach production, there is not only a pattern in which the second half of Super Reach is displayed via the first half of Super Reach, but also a pattern in which the second half of Super Reach is displayed without going through the first half of Super Reach. Good too. Therefore, when "Development" or "Development!!!" is displayed, for example, it is only necessary that the super reach effect A (character A) be displayed together with the super reach effect A. It is possible to configure the system so that the jackpot expectation level is different between "development" → super reach performance A and "development!!!" → super reach performance A. In addition, if the first half of Super Reach is composed of the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach, when "Development" is displayed and when "Development!!!" is displayed, the same first half of Super Reach is displayed. However, it is also possible to configure the ratio to be in the second half of super reach to be different. Of course, the possibility of developing into a super reach with a high expectation of a jackpot among multiple types of super reaches may be configured to differ depending on the type of development symbol (such as "development" or "development!!!"). In addition, there are low-expectation super reach where the expectation of jackpot is relatively low (for example, the super reach performance by Kirin, which will be described later), and high expectation super reach where the expectation of jackpot is relatively high (for example, battle performance that is super reach performance). ) may be configured to include a plurality of each.

As a supplement, here, the first decorative pattern is composed of the second element (e.g., number) and the first element (e.g., character, etc.) at the start of fluctuation, at the time of stop of fluctuation, and before the development of super reach. However, under certain situations that occur depending on the production pattern (for example, during super reach, when movable characters are moving, during fixed promotion production, when an error screen is displayed. In this case, super reach), only the second element (number) It is made up of.

Next, FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when development symbols are displayed corresponding to the preview type and a super reach effect is created. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Here, while the symbol is changing, a notice display ("comment notice" which indicates the level of jackpot expectation with text in an oval frame, a "timer" which displays the time until the effect indicating the level of jackpot expectation is displayed) A "next notice" indicating that the change will result in a super reach will be given. First, when a ``chance'' which is a ``comment notice'' is displayed, then a specific symbol ``development'' indicating that the game will develop into a super reach effect is displayed, and the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, if the "timer notice" "00:10:00" (a display indicating that some kind of effect will occur in 10 seconds) is displayed, this is a specific symbol indicating that a super reach effect will develop. After "Development!!!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "next SP reach" which is a "next notice" is displayed, the specific symbol is not displayed and the super reach effect is executed. In this way, "Development" is displayed after "Comment Preview", "Development!!!" is displayed after "Timer Preview", and specific symbols are not displayed after "Next Preview", so they are associated with each other. is being done. In addition, here it is assumed that "Development" is displayed after "Comment Notice" and "Development!!!" is displayed after "Timer Notice", but this is not limited to this. The system is configured so that "Development!!!" can be displayed after "comment notice" and "development" can be displayed after "timer notice", and "development!!!" can be displayed after "comment notice". The percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after "timer notice" may be higher than the percentage of "development" displayed after "timer notice," and the percentage of "comment notice" displayed after "timer notice" may be higher. ``Development'' may be displayed more often after ``Development''. In addition, there is a difference in jackpot expectation between "Development" and "Development!!!" as mentioned above (Jackpot expectation: Development < Development!!!), and there is also a difference between "Comment preview", "Timer notice" and "Next notice". There is also a difference in the expectation of jackpot, and the expectation of jackpot is comment preview < timer notice < next notice.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopts a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combination) for the second decorative design. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In such a case, in all gaming states (including all gaming states), the number of stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the second decorative pattern. ) may be adopted, or in one or more predetermined game states, the number of candidates for the stop symbol ( ) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of candidates for symbol combinations is larger than the number of candidates.

Next, FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect occurs when different display modes are used for the same preview type. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Here, while the symbol is changing, a notice is displayed {a "comment notice" in which the expected level of jackpot is indicated by text within an oval frame (both "chance" and "fierce heat!!" are comment notices)}. be exposed. First, when "chance" is displayed, next, a specific symbol "development" indicating that the game will develop into a super reach performance is displayed, and the super reach performance is executed. On the other hand, when "Very hot!!" is displayed, "Development!!!", which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect will develop, is displayed, and then the super reach effect is executed. In this way, the correspondence is made such that "development" is displayed after "opportunity" and "development!!!" is displayed after "extreme heat!!". In addition, here it is assumed that the correspondence is made so that "development" is displayed after "opportunity" and "development!!!" is displayed after "extreme heat!!". It is not limited to this, but it is configured so that "Development!!!" can be displayed after "chance", "development" can be displayed after "fierce heat!!", and "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance". The percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after "Very hot!!" may be higher than the percentage where "Development" is displayed after "Very hot!!" The percentage of "development" displayed after "opportunity" may be higher than that of "opportunity". As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in the level of jackpot expectation between "Development" and "Development!!!", there is also a difference in the level of jackpot expectation between "Chance" and "Gekatsu!!". !” has a higher expectation of jackpot than “chance.”

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopts a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combination) for the second decorative design. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In such a case, in all gaming states (including all gaming states), the number of stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the second decorative pattern. ) may be adopted, or in one or more predetermined game states, the number of candidates for the stop symbol ( ) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of candidates for symbol combinations is larger than the number of candidates.

Next, FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super reach effect is achieved. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, the first pending display changes to blue and the decorative pattern is stopped at "861". Next, in the pattern variation related to trigger hold (hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect; here, blue hold display), "development" is displayed, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, if a continuous number (here, "123") occurs in which the symbol combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the fluctuation stop is a chance prediction, "Development!!!" is displayed in the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold. , a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In addition, when a chance look-ahead occurs, a special effect will occur around the first decorative symbol that has been fixed and stopped, making it easier to recognize that a chance look-ahead has occurred, and for the second decorative symbol, that special effect will occur. It may be configured so that there is no need to do so. In this way, after a pending change effect is displayed as a look-ahead effect, "Development" is displayed, and after a chance is displayed as a look-ahead effect, "Development!!!" is displayed. There is. In addition, here, it is assumed that the correspondence is made such that "development" is displayed after the pending change effect, and "development!!!" is displayed after the chance reading, but this is not limited to this. "Development!!!" is displayed even after a pending change effect, and the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after a chance reading is higher than the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after a pending change effect. may be higher, and in this case, "Development" may be displayed after the chance reading, and "Development" may be displayed after the chance reading is higher than the rate at which "development" is displayed after the chance reading. ``Development'' may be displayed at a higher rate. As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in jackpot expectation between "Development" and "Development!!!", there is also a difference in jackpot expectation between pending change presentations and chance predictions, and chance predictions are more likely than reservation change presentations. Expectations for winning the jackpot are high. In addition, in this example, we explained using the correspondence relationship between the pending change effect and the development pattern ("Development", ``Development!!!'') in the chance reading, but other effects can also be used as long as it is a look-ahead effect. For example, it can be applied to the background change effects "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone". In addition, in this example, the explanation was made using the difference in the jackpot expectation level in one look-ahead performance (pending change performance or chance look-ahead), but it is also important to note whether multiple types of look-ahead performances were being executed at the same time, or whether they were being executed at the same time. It may be configured such that the correspondence with development symbols (“Development”, “Development!!!”) differs depending on the number of pre-read effects (composite number of pre-read effects). For example, when a hold change effect and a chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effects) are executed than when only a hold change effect is executed (one type of look-ahead effect), the development pattern in the trigger change is better. is more likely to be displayed, or when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the proportion of "Development!!!" It may be configured so that the ratio of "Development!!!" is displayed is higher when "Development!!!" is executed.In this case, there are two types of "DEVELOPMENT!!!" ) is being executed, the percentage of "Development" being displayed is higher than the percentage of "Development" being displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being executed. good. In addition, similar to the development pattern, the pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT") is determined by whether or not multiple types of pre-reading effects are being executed at the same time, or the number of pre-reading effects being executed at the same time (composite number of pre-reading effects). ``NEXT!!!'') may be configured to have a different correspondence relationship. For example, it is better to have a pseudo-coupled relationship in trigger fluctuations when a pending change effect and chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effects) are executed than when only a hold change effect is executed (one type of look-ahead effect). If the symbol is more likely to be displayed or if only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the percentage of "NEXT!!!" It may be configured so that the proportion of "NEXT!!!" displayed is higher when "NEXT!!!" is executed. The percentage of "NEXT" displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) was executed was higher than the proportion of "NEXT" displayed when the previous type) was executed. Good too.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopts a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combination) of the second decorative pattern. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In such a case, in all gaming states (including all gaming states), the number of stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the second decorative pattern. ) may be adopted, or in one or more predetermined game states, the number of candidates for the stop symbol () of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of candidates for symbol combinations is larger than the number of candidates.

Next, FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed to become a super reach effect. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Here, when a new ball enters the first main game starting port A10 while the symbols are changing and the winning lottery is won (this suspension is also referred to as "trigger suspension"), a new suspension display ("trigger suspension") is displayed. (also referred to as "display") is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the pending change performance, which is one of the look-ahead performances). Next, if the trigger hold display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger hold display changes from blue to red, "Development!!!" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, after the blue color is displayed in the pending change performance, "Development" is displayed, and after the red color is displayed in the pending change performance, "Development!!!" is displayed. . In addition, here it is assumed that the correspondence is made so that "Development" is displayed after the blue color and "Development!!!" is displayed after the red color, but this is not limited to this. "Development!!!" is displayed, and the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after the red color may be higher than the percentage of "Development!!!" displayed after the blue color. In this case, , "Development" may be displayed after a red color, and the percentage of "Development" displayed after a blue color may be higher than the percentage of "Development" displayed after a red color. It should be noted that there is also a difference in jackpot expectation between blue and red, which are the display modes of the pending change performance, with red having a higher jackpot expectation than blue. In addition, in this example, the explanation was made using the correspondence between the display mode in the hold change performance and the development symbol ("Development", "Development!!!"), but if it is a look-ahead performance, it does not need to be a hold change performance, For example, it can be applied to background change effects such as "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone."

Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the same super reach effect develops through different displays. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after a specific symbol “Development” or “Development!!!” is displayed that indicates the development into a super reach effect, a low expectation level super reach effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation level (the first half of the super reach effect) is displayed. ), a production in which the giraffe destroys the middle symbol is executed, and a symbol combination (“656”) that loses the reach is displayed in a low-expectation super reach production. It should be noted that during the low expectation level super reach, the first decorative pattern is displayed only as a numeric pattern, but the first decorative pattern may be composed of a numeric pattern and a character pattern. Next, a high-expectation super reach performance (second half of super reach) in which the expectation of jackpot is relatively high is executed. Here, regardless of whether "Development" or "Development!!!" is displayed, it is possible to develop into a super reach effect, but "Development" and "Development!!!" !”, the rate at which the high-expectation level super reach performance develops is different, and when “development” is displayed, the high-expectation level super reach performance will be executed at a rate of 10%, and “development!!!” ” is displayed, the high expectation level super reach performance is executed at a rate of 50%. In addition, 90% of the cases when "Development" is displayed and 50% of the cases when "Development!!!" It will return to the normal screen without developing into a reach effect.

Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the button effect progresses to the super reach effect. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are changing. Next, a button effect is executed in which the decorative symbols form a reach and the player can operate the sub-input button SB. At the time of the button performance, the first decorative pattern becomes only numbers, the left pattern is displayed at the left edge of the LCD screen, the right symbol is displayed at the right edge of the LCD screen, and a plurality of symbols are displayed in the center of the LCD screen, which can be selected by the player's operation of the sub input button SB. The pattern is displayed in a circle. The multiple symbols include "6" which is a winning symbol, "Development" and "Development!!!" which indicate a super reach effect, "5" which is a loss symbol, and "NEXT" which is a pseudo continuous symbol. Displayed. When the multiple symbols rotate in a circle and the sub-input button SB can be operated, a button image with "PUSH" written on it is displayed approximately in the center of the LCD screen, and the sub-input button SB is operated. Taking this as an opportunity, a single symbol will be displayed. Here, a predetermined "development" is displayed, and after that, although not shown, a super reach effect is executed. Note that if the sub-input button SB is not operated, "development" is displayed after the validity period of the sub-input button SB has elapsed, and a super reach effect is executed. It should be noted that the symbol displayed upon operation of the sub-input button SB is determined in advance by a preview lottery of the sub-control board S performed at the start of the variation.

Note that the presentation in this example may be changed as follows.
(1) Before it develops into a super reach effect (= up to the stage where the developed pattern shown in the diagram is displayed), the first decorative pattern is not displayed only as a numerical pattern, but is composed of a numerical pattern and a character pattern. The configuration may be such that the first decorative pattern is displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the proportion of the symbols that stop may be configured to differ; for example, large button images When is displayed, the percentage of symbols other than losing symbols, such as "NEXT", "Development", "Development!!!", and winning symbols, being displayed is higher than when a small button image is displayed. You can.
(3) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the proportion of the displayed developed pattern or pseudo-continuous pattern may be configured to differ. For example, when a large button image is displayed, the proportion of development patterns is higher than when a small button image is displayed, the proportion of "Development!!!" It may be possible to have a high percentage of symbols being displayed, a high percentage of "NEXT!!!" being displayed, etc.
(4) Any image may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. Additionally, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a pattern in which a button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which an effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button). In this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is often configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing, or the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing. "Development", "Development!!!", winning symbols, etc.) may be displayed at a higher rate. Furthermore, even if the ratio of the developed symbols to be displayed is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is You may also increase the rate at which "Development!!!" is displayed.
(5) Pseudo-continuous patterns may include not only "NEXT" but also multiple types such as "NEXT!!!", etc. If multiple types are provided, "NEXT!!" is more important than "NEXT". !” may be configured so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher, “NEXT!!!” may be displayed in an array pattern in which multiple symbols are displayed in a circle, and “NEXT” may be displayed. It may also include an arrangement pattern in which "NEXT!!!" is displayed at the same time.
(6) Multiple types of arrangement patterns in which multiple symbols are displayed in a circular shape may be provided, and if multiple types are provided, variations with high expectation of jackpot (for example, jackpot variation, super reach effect) fluctuations, etc.), the arrangement may be configured so that the percentage of sequence patterns with high jackpot expectations being displayed is higher than when the fluctuations are low jackpot expectations (for example, no-reach fluctuations, etc.). good. For example, arrangement patterns with high expectations for jackpots include arrangement patterns with no losing symbols (for example, arrangement patterns that display "6 (jackpot symbol), development, development, NEXT, development!!!") and "development". ” is displayed instead of “Development!!!” (for example, “6・Development!!!・5・NEXT・Development!!!”, “6・Development!!!・Development!!!・NEXT・Development!!!” is displayed), etc.

As shown in (3), the rate at which the development symbols are displayed may be configured to differ depending on the display mode of the notice of the change (button effect, comment notice, timer notice, etc.), or the display mode of the notice of the change may be changed. By configuring the display ratio of the pseudo-continuous symbols to be different depending on the change, if the display mode of the notice of the change is highly anticipated, the probability that the development symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol will be displayed increases, and the player can be configured so that it is easy to understand the expected level of jackpot.

Next, FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is achieved in a different effect stage (also referred to as a effect mode). First, production stage A will be explained in detail. At presentation stage A, a first decorative pattern consisting of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after a specific symbol "development" indicating that a reach is formed and a super reach effect is displayed, a super reach effect is executed. Next, production stage B will be explained in detail. In production stage B, a first decorative pattern consisting of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after forming a reach, the super reach effect is executed as is (in other words, the specific symbol "development" indicating that it will develop into a super reach effect is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the production stage After displaying "development (a mode in which the inside of the kanji is hollowed out as shown in the figure)" which is different from A, a super reach effect is executed. In other words, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ (is the same), and the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage. Although a developed pattern may be displayed as a symbol, the second decorative pattern is configured such that a developed pattern is not displayed.

Next, FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-variation is executed in a different production stage. First, production stage A will be explained in detail. At presentation stage A, a first decorative pattern consisting of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after a reach is formed and a "NEXT" symbol indicating that re-fluctuation is to be executed is displayed, symbol fluctuation is started again. Next, production stage B will be explained in detail. In production stage B, a first decorative pattern consisting of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, after "678" (order), which is a symbol combination indicating that re-variation is to be executed in the first decorative symbol, is displayed (temporarily stopped), symbol variation is started again or reach When forming, after displaying the "NEXT (a mode in which the inside of the alphabet is hollowed out as shown)" which is different from the production stage A, the symbol variation is started again. In addition, depending on which production stage the re-variation is executed, if the re-variation is executed twice {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation) variation)} and when re-variation is executed 3 times {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation)} The difference from the jackpot expectation level may be different. For example, in production stage A (e.g., daytime stage or non-look-ahead stage other than the angel zone), the average jackpot expectation is 5% when re-variation is executed twice, and when re-variation is executed three times. The average jackpot expectation is 25%, and the difference is 20% (5 times difference), but it changes again in production stage B (for example, night stage or look-ahead stage such as angel zone). The average jackpot expectation when the is executed twice is 40%, and the jackpot expectation when the re-change is executed three times is 50%, and the difference is 10% (1.25 times difference). ). The difference in jackpot expectation level (execution expectation level of a special game) is calculated by subtracting a percentage value, dividing the jackpot expectation level (1/N), or the like. In addition, although the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage (production stage A, production stage B), the display mode of the second decorative pattern is the same, and the "NEXT" symbol is the first decorative symbol. However, the second decorative pattern may be configured so that the "NEXT" pattern is not displayed. In addition, although it has been mainly explained that both production stage A and production stage B are non-look-ahead stages in a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state (the same gaming state as the above-mentioned daytime stage), the present invention is not limited to this. , production stage A is a non-pre-reading stage in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state (for example, the above-mentioned daytime stage), and production stage B is a pre-reading stage in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state (for example, Both production stage A and production stage B are configured as a look-ahead stage in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, and production stage A and production stage B are both in a probability variation gaming state and It is also possible to configure the stage as a non-prefetch stage in a time-reduced game state, and if a plurality of performance stages are provided, the performance form shown in this example can be applied regardless of the game state.

In addition, in FIG. 152, although the structure regarding the "NEXT" symbol which is a pseudo continuous symbol was illustrated, the structure regarding the developed symbol may also be similar to FIG. 152. That is, (1) in production stage A, the developed symbol temporarily stops as the first decorative symbol, while in production stage B, the developed symbol does not temporarily stop as the first decorative symbol; (2) in production stage A, the developed symbol is temporarily stopped in display mode A as the first decorative pattern, while in presentation stage B, the developed pattern is temporarily stopped in display mode B as the first decorative pattern (the display mode is different from presentation stage A). may be configured.

Next, FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo consecutive symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed. First, the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, a semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol, which is a re-variation suggestion symbol, is displayed to form a reach and to suggest that re-variation will be executed. A semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen, and when re-variation is executed, the symbol variation is started again after the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed. The symbol variation is performed again, a reach is formed again, and this time, instead of a pseudo-continuous pattern, "development" is displayed indicating that a super reach effect is executed. Thereafter, a super reach performance is executed, and since the fluctuation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol ("717"). As shown in this figure, while it is possible to display a specific pattern (e.g., "Development") after displaying a pseudo-continuous pattern (e.g., "NEXT"), it is also possible to display a pseudo-continuous pattern after displaying a specific pattern. The configuration may be such that it is impossible to display the information. In addition, the rate at which a specific symbol is displayed depends on whether the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (=whether re-variation is executed or not), the number of times the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (=number of re-variation), etc. may be different. For example, it may be configured such that the greater the number of re-variations, the more likely a specific symbol will be displayed (= the higher the rate of displaying a specific symbol without a losing symbol); Even if a specific symbol is displayed, it may be configured such that "Development!!!", which has a high expectation of a jackpot, is displayed at a high rate.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 154, even when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed, when a developed pattern is displayed), the second decorative pattern is displayed in the left column, middle column, and right column. The variable display is continued in all of them, and furthermore, the second decorative pattern may continue to be displayed in a variable manner in all of the left column, middle column, and right column even during super reach.

Next, FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative patterns are displayed in an overlapping manner. First, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "861", but the left pattern (elephant) and middle pattern (giraffe), and the middle pattern (giraffe) and right pattern (chick) are displayed overlappingly. At this time, the middle symbol (giraffe) is placed behind the LCD screen (with the player side in front) than the left symbol (elephant) and right symbol (chick), and a portion of the middle symbol (giraffe) is placed behind the left symbol (elephant) and right symbol (chick). It's hidden. Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts to vary. Next, a reach is formed, and the middle symbol becomes a slow fluctuating display. At this time, the middle symbol is placed in front of the liquid crystal screen than the left symbol and right symbol that form the reach. In this figure, a chick ("1") is displayed as the middle symbol at a low speed and does not stop, and then a pseudo-continuous symbol ("NEXT" symbol) is displayed at a low speed and fluctuates until it stops at approximately the center of the LCD screen. ing. After that, although not shown, after a re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is executed, a super reach effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, it is fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol ("717"). When displaying the reach-loss symbol, the middle symbol (chick) is placed behind the left symbol (lion) and the right symbol (lion) on the LCD screen, as before the start of fluctuation, and part of the middle symbol (chick) is hidden. In addition, as for the second decorative pattern, the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern are not displayed in duplicate at any timing. Furthermore, even if a developed pattern ("Development" or "Development!!!") is displayed instead of a pseudo continuous pattern, the relationship between the display of the left and right symbols and the middle pattern is such that the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. This can be done in the same way as when Note that the display mode may be a display mode in stage C, or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (a variation with a high probability of winning). In other words, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed at stage A or stage B but can be displayed at stage C, or a display mode that can be displayed at stage C, or a normal variation (comparison where reaching is not performed and the game stops due to a loss). The display mode may be such that the information can be displayed in a specific variation (a variation with high expectations for reach) rather than a short-term variation.

Next, FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the variation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern variation. At this time, the speed of the first decorative pattern gradually increases from low speed to high speed pattern fluctuation (low speed → medium speed → high speed). On the other hand, for the second decorative pattern, the speed of pattern variation is constant, and the pattern variation is always fast. Next, when the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern both become high speed and a reach is formed with the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the medium pattern becomes a slow pattern fluctuation in the first decorative pattern, and In the 2 decorative patterns, the medium pattern is a high-speed pattern variation. After that, during the execution of the super reach effect, the left and right symbols, where both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol form the reach, are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle symbol is at high speed. The pattern is changing. After the super reach effect ends, since the variation was a loss, it is fixed and stopped at the reach loss symbol (“686”). In addition, in this figure, while the super reach effect is being executed, only the middle symbol is changed while forming the reach in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, but this is not limited to the execution of the super reach effect. During the middle or during execution of a specific super reach performance, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be changed in design. In addition, the second decorative pattern may also have a plurality of varying speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative pattern is made less likely to change the varying speed than the first decorative pattern. For example, the second decorative pattern does not use low speed but uses medium speed (the first decorative pattern uses low speed, medium speed, and high speed). In addition, it is possible to configure the second decorative pattern so that it does not temporarily stop on the way. Specifically, it can be configured to always be at high speed or stop (determined stop), or it can be configured to be at high speed, medium speed, and stop (determined stop). This is the configuration etc.

Here, we will supplement about the pseudo-continuous symbols and developed symbols in the time-reduced gaming state. In the time reduction game state, the configuration may be such that pseudo-continuous symbols and developed symbols can be displayed, but it is more suitable to configure such that pseudo-continuous symbols and developed symbols cannot be displayed. This is because in the time-reduced gaming state, the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than in the normal state (non-time-reduced gaming state), and there are fewer performances that suggest a jackpot within one fluctuation. When displaying pseudo-continuous symbols or developed symbols, you are selecting one with a relatively long fluctuation time, so the period between jackpots (the period from the end of one jackpot to the start of the next jackpot) will be longer. As a result, the speed at which the number of balls increases during consecutive games becomes slower. In addition, in this way, in the time reduction game state, it is easy to select a short variation time and the amount of production is small, so the first decorative symbol itself and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol may be simple, and the second It is preferable that it consists only of elements (numbers).

Next, FIG. 157 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power failure occurs during execution of loss variation. First, in (a) a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, in the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "numbers" only. . (b) After that, the hold is expired, the hold extinguishment communication image (sometimes referred to as the hold image, the hold display, the hold, etc.) corresponding to the expired hold is displayed, and symbol fluctuations that result in a loss begin. be done. Note that the pending display (sometimes referred to as a pending image) and the pending transmission transmission image may be collectively referred to as a variable rights image. In addition, the first pending display and the second pending display may be collectively referred to as a pending display, and a plurality or all of the first pending display, second pending display, and pending digest transmission image are referred to as variable rights images. Sometimes.

<If power outage does not occur>
Thereafter, (c) the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "817" of "number + character" which is a losing pattern, and the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "817" of "number" which is a losing pattern. In addition, when the next variation starts, the first decorative pattern is the "817" decorative pattern of "number + character", and the second decorative pattern is the decorative pattern "817" of "number". (start scrolling). Here, as a modification, instead of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern being variably displayed, only the first decorative pattern may be variably displayed and the second decorative pattern may be hidden.

<In case of power supply>
After the above-mentioned (b), a power outage occurs during (d) symbol fluctuation. (e) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbols resumes, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed in a variable manner (become hidden) while the symbol fluctuation is being executed. In addition, if the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is 50 seconds and a power outage occurs 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (this may also be the case when power outage processing is executed), after the power is restored, It is configured to perform the remaining 40 seconds of variation.

(f) After that, the symbol variation that was being executed and which resulted in a loss is completed, and the first decorative symbol stops displaying at "number + character" which becomes "711", which is a stop mode only for when the power is cut off, and "711" ” The second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the “number”. Note that the stop display here may be a fixed display or a temporary stop display (the same applies to other configurations), but it is preferable to apply it only to the first decorative pattern, It is desirable that the second decorative pattern only makes a fixed stop (does not make a temporary stop). (g) After that, the hold is extinguished and the next symbol variation begins. Here, as a modified example, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured not to stop displaying, that is, the fluctuating display (fluctuating display period) of the main game symbol resumed after the power is restored and The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hidden until the stop display after the fluctuating display (the fluctuating fixed time which is the period during which the halt display is maintained) ends, and the fluctuating display of the next main game symbol begins. Taking this opportunity as an opportunity, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be redisplayed.

In this figure, when a power outage occurs, after the power is restored, "711" (number + character) is displayed in the first decorative pattern as a stop symbol exclusively for when the power is restored, and the second decorative pattern is The number ``711'' is displayed as a symbol. That is, except after the power is restored, "711" is not displayed as a stop symbol (not selected as a stop symbol) in either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. As a modification, this losing symbol "711" may be configured to be stopped and displayed even after the power is restored. However, in any case, it is preferable that up to two of the three digits of the losing symbol displayed after the power is restored are the same, or that each of the three digits is a different number, and the winning pattern (for example, It is desirable that the left and right symbols are the same number, such as "727" and "232"), or the winning pattern (for example, three symbols are the same number, such as "777" and "222").

In addition, the timing at which "711" (number + character) is displayed in the first decorative pattern and the timing at which "711" (number) is displayed in the second decorative pattern are determined by the final stop timing of the main game symbol ( (timing when fixed stop starts). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. In addition, as mentioned above, the main game symbol is determined as the timing when "711" (number + character) is displayed in the first decorative symbol and the timing when "711" (number) is displayed in the second decorative symbol. It is also possible to set the timing at which the next pattern variation starts after stopping (the timing at which the first decorative pattern starts to vary). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern have started to fluctuate (without stopping display).

In addition, in the case where the power outage does not occur and the case where the power outage does occur, as detailed in the same figure, the stop modes of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are both scheduled to be "817". However, in the event of a power outage, "711" dedicated to the power outage is displayed. In other words, the scheduled stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol will differ depending on whether a power outage occurs during fluctuation or a power outage does not occur. The display mode (display mode after stopping) can be displayed.

In addition, the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same regardless of whether or not a power outage occurs. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off while the symbols are changing due to a power outage at the gaming parlor, the stopping symbols of the main game symbols will not be changed, so the result of the game will not be affected. On the other hand, by making the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol exclusive to the time of power cutoff, it is possible to appropriately notify the player and the administrator that the power supply cutoff has occurred.

As described in FIG. 157(a), the figure shows an example of a case in which symbol fluctuations start in a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, the configuration illustrated in the figure can be applied to other gaming states as well. Similarly, it should be noted that even when a gaming state is described in a figure other than FIG. 157, it is merely an example and can be applied to other gaming states.

Next, FIG. 158 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power outage occurs during execution of jackpot fluctuation. First, in (a) a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed on the performance display device SG. In addition, in the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern (sometimes referred to as the display format) is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative pattern (sometimes referred to as display format) contains only "numbers". (b) After that, the hold is expired, the hold extinguishment transmission image corresponding to the expired hold is displayed, and symbol fluctuations that result in a jackpot are started.

Here, the display format of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is "number", "number + character", etc., and the display format of "777" for "number" and "666" for "number" is are the same, and the display formats of "777" for "number" and "777" for "number + character" are different.

<If power outage does not occur>
(c) After that, the first decorative pattern stops displaying at "777" of "number + character" which is the jackpot symbol, and the second decorative symbol stops displaying at "777" of "number" which is the jackpot symbol. . (d) After that, the jackpot starts. During a jackpot, the display position of the first decorative symbol is changed to the upper left of the effect display device SG, and the size of the display area is reduced from "numbers + characters" to only "numbers". As a modification, instead of a three-digit number, a one-digit number (for example, if you hit the jackpot with "777", only "7", if you hit the jackpot with "222", only "2", etc.). Further, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (e) After that, when the jackpot ends, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed as "777" with only "numbers" which is the jackpot symbol, and then the hold is cleared and the next symbol change starts. It happens. In addition, when the next variation starts, the decorative pattern "777" (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, or only the first decorative pattern may be used) will start changing. After the jackpot ends, the game state before the start of the jackpot, which is the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time saving gaming state, will transition to the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time saving gaming state, and the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in are both composed of only "numbers" (the display format is only "numbers"). It should be noted that the gaming state that changes after the jackpot is just an example, and the same configuration can be applied as long as it is different from the gaming state before the jackpot starts.

<In case of power outage>
(f) Thereafter, a power outage occurs in the middle of symbol fluctuation. (g) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbols resumes, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed in a variable manner (become hidden) while the symbol fluctuation is being executed.

(h) After that, the symbol variation that is being executed and resulting in a jackpot ends, and the jackpot is executed. When the jackpot starts, the first decorative pattern is displayed at "711" which is a stop mode exclusively used when the power is cut off. During a jackpot, the display position of the first decorative symbol is changed to the upper left of the performance display device SG, the size of the display area is reduced, and the display format changes from "numbers + characters" to only "numbers". As a variant, instead of a three-digit number, it may be a symbol (for example, "?" or "???"), or the first decorative pattern or "?" ("???"), etc. It is also possible to have a specification that does not display at all. Further, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (g) After that, the jackpot ends, the hold is extinguished, and the next symbol change begins. In addition, when the next fluctuation starts, the decorative pattern "711" with only "numbers" will start to fluctuate between the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern (only the first decorative pattern good). After the jackpot ends, the game state before the start of the jackpot, which is the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time saving gaming state, will transition to the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time saving gaming state, and the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in are both composed of "numbers" only. It should be noted that the gaming state that changes after the jackpot is just an example, and the same configuration can be applied as long as it is different from the gaming state before the jackpot starts. In addition, regarding the performance during a jackpot (jackpot performance), if a power outage does not occur, the performance will differ depending on the type of jackpot (16R jackpot or 4R jackpot) (if a power outage does not occur) If there is no power outage, the 16R jackpot will be the jackpot effect A, and the 4R jackpot if there is no power outage will be the jackpot effect B), but if the power outage occurs, the jackpot type (which may also be a jackpot symbol) will be changed. It is preferable that the jackpot performance be the same regardless (the 16R jackpot when a power outage occurs and the 4R jackpot when a power outage occurs become jackpot performance C).

In this figure, when a power outage occurs, "711" is displayed as a stop symbol exclusively for when the power is restored, during the jackpot after the power is restored, and as a decorative symbol after the jackpot ends. Although a configuration in which both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed is illustrated, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed. In this way, even if a power outage occurs during symbol fluctuations that result in a jackpot, just as in the case where a power outage occurs during symbol fluctuations that result in a loss, the dedicated stop symbol "711" will be activated after the power is restored. configured to be displayed.

In addition, in the same figure, the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative pattern is also the second decorative pattern during the jackpot. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may both be displayed. Further, during a jackpot, the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. In addition, even in the configuration where the first decorative pattern is displayed during the jackpot and the second decorative pattern is hidden, as mentioned above, before the jackpot starts, three "7" patterns are displayed, but only one "7" pattern is displayed during the jackpot. It may be configured to display. In addition, in the embodiment in which the first decorative pattern is displayed during a jackpot, as a modification, a third decorative pattern (for example, "numbers" of the first decorative pattern) in a new display mode (display format) instead of the first decorative pattern '' is an Arabic numeral, whereas the ``number'' of the third decorative pattern is a Roman numeral).

In addition, the timing at which "711" is displayed may be the timing at which the jackpot ends (or the timing at which the jackpot ends at the end of the demo, immediately after the end of the jackpot, or immediately after the start of the time-saving gaming state), or the first symbol change after the end of the jackpot. It may be the timing to start (the timing at which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start variable display).

In addition, in the case where a power outage does not occur and the case where a power outage does occur as detailed in the same figure, the stopping modes of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are both scheduled to be "777". However, if a power outage occurs, "711" dedicated to the power outage is displayed during and/or after the jackpot is won. In other words, the scheduled stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol will differ depending on whether a power outage occurs during fluctuation or a power outage does not occur. (display mode after stopping) is displayed.

As detailed in FIGS. 157 and 158, when a power outage occurs during the execution of symbol variations in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state), When the power is cut off during the execution of a symbol variation that results in a jackpot, and when the power is cut off during the execution of a symbol variation that results in a loss, the power will be cut off at the start of the next variation after the power is restored (or the next Immediately before the fluctuation starts and immediately before the pending expiry), the same symbol combination (combination of numbers) is displayed in both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol ("711" in the figure). However, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different. More specifically, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a symbol change that results in a loss, the display format consisting of "numbers + characters" as shown in FIGS. 157(f) and (g) (display format), and if a power outage occurs during the execution of symbol fluctuations that result in a jackpot, the display format consisting only of "numbers" (display format), as shown in FIG. 158 (j). It becomes. Regarding the second decorative pattern, even if a power outage occurs during the execution of a symbol variation that results in a loss, or a power outage occurs during the execution of a symbol variation that results in a jackpot, the power supply The display mode (display format) and the symbol combination (combination of numbers) of the second decorative symbol after recovery (at the start of the next variation after the power is restored, immediately before the start of the next variation, immediately before the pending expiration, etc.) are the same.

In this way, even in symbol fluctuations that start in the same gaming state, depending on whether the symbol fluctuations are loss fluctuations or jackpot fluctuations, the power will be cut off during the symbol fluctuations, and when the power is restored afterwards, the By configuring the display mode (display format) of one decorative symbol to be different, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the game status even after a power outage occurs. Here, the combination of "numbers" of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to be "711" regardless of whether the pattern fluctuation is a loss fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, after the power is restored, players may have questions such as whether the symbol fluctuation that caused the power outage was a jackpot fluctuation or a loss fluctuation, and if it was a jackpot fluctuation, which "numbers" were aligned to make a jackpot. Information that cannot be known can be displayed uniformly and fairly, and furthermore, since it is displayed in a manner that indicates a loss, the player who visually recognized the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may feel that they have lost. It can be configured so that it is difficult to feel.

Note that the same gaming state detailed in FIGS. 157 and 158 refers to any one controlled by the main control board M, such as a time reduction gaming state, a probability varying gaming state, and a limited frequency state (gaming state related to a varying pattern). It may be applied to any state, or may be applied to any state controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the production mode.

Next, FIG. 159 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power outage occurs during jackpot fluctuation execution. First, in (a) a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 3, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed on the effect display device SG. Note that the prefetch performance is not executed, in other words, there is no trigger pending in the pending. (b) Thereafter, a jackpot confirmation performance is executed at a predetermined timing as a preview performance while the symbols are changing. The preview performance in the figure is a performance that is different from the pre-read performance, and is a performance that suggests the result of the symbol change being executed. Moreover, the jackpot confirmation performance is a performance that informs that the jackpot is definitely scheduled, and in the figure, "Rainbow!" is displayed. That is, if a jackpot confirmation performance is executed as a preview performance during symbol variation, it is certain that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol variation. In addition, if the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, it may be determined that the jackpot will be 1000/1000 after that, or if the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, then it will be 999/1000 (as close as possible to 1) It is also possible to make it certain that there will be a jackpot (probability). Further, the preview performance shown in the figure may be referred to as a variable preview performance, a non-prefetched preview performance, or the like.

(c) Thereafter, a power outage occurs during symbol fluctuation when a jackpot confirmation performance is executed as a preview performance during symbol fluctuation. (d) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbols resumes, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol do not fluctuate and display while the symbol fluctuation is being executed (they are hidden, and the characters being returned to the screen are Is displayed). (e) Thereafter, the main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol ("7A" corresponding to the 16R jackpot), and the jackpot starts to be executed. When the jackpot starts (or when the jackpot start demonstration time starts), the effect display device SG erases the characters that are being returned to the screen and switches to the screen display that is showing the jackpot. Furthermore, during a jackpot, "711", which is used only when the power is restored, is displayed as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be hidden during the jackpot, or may be configured such that both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed. may be configured. Further, during a jackpot, the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Furthermore, even in the configuration in which the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the jackpot, as described above, "?" and "???" may be displayed during the jackpot. Alternatively, the first decorative pattern or "?" ("???") may not be displayed at all. In addition, regarding the performance during a jackpot (jackpot performance), if a power outage does not occur, the performance will differ depending on the type of jackpot (16R jackpot or 4R jackpot) (if a power outage does not occur) If there is no power outage, the 16R jackpot will be jackpot effect A, and if there is no power outage, the 4R jackpot will be jackpot effect B), but if a power outage occurs, the effect will be the same regardless of the jackpot type. (The 16R jackpot when a power outage occurs and the 4R jackpot when a power outage occurs become jackpot performance C).

(f) After that, the jackpot ends, the hold is newly extinguished, and the next symbol change starts. At the start of the next symbol change (or after the end of the jackpot and before the start of the symbol change), "711", which is used only when the power is restored, is displayed as a "number" for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The Rukoto. In addition, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is exemplified as a case where the gaming state shifts to a probability fluctuation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state.

Next, FIG. 160 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power outage occurs during execution of a look-ahead effect. First, (a) in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 2, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device SG, A new hold occurs, and the number of holds becomes 3, and a jackpot confirmation effect, which is a hold change effect, is executed as a pre-read effect for the newly generated hold image (displayed by ``☆'' in the figure). (b) After that, a power outage occurs during the same symbol fluctuation. In addition, when a jackpot confirmation effect is executed as a look-ahead effect, it does not notify that the symbol change being executed (or the symbol change that has started to be executed) will be a jackpot, but the symbol change that is the target of the look-ahead effect. In other words, it is notified that the symbol change related to the trigger hold is definitely a jackpot.

(c) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbols resumes, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol do not fluctuate and display while the symbol fluctuation is being executed (they are hidden, and the characters being returned to the screen are Is displayed). (d) After that, symbol fluctuations that result in multiple losses are executed, and symbol fluctuations related to suspension that become a trigger for executing the jackpot confirmation performance executed as a look-ahead performance begin. In addition, when the hold that triggers the execution of the jackpot confirmation effect executed as a look-ahead effect is extinguished, the subsequent display mode of the hold consumption transmission image will be the display mode of the hold image that is the jackpot confirmation effect executed as a look-ahead effect. It is the same as. In this case, it may be configured so that the jackpot confirmation performance (displayed with "☆" in the figure), which is a pending change performance, is not executed as a look-ahead performance during symbol fluctuations that result in multiple losses; It may be configured to restart during any symbol variation during the symbol variation. Further, the display mode of the pending consumption transmission image may also be different from the display mode of the pending image which is a jackpot confirmation effect executed as a look-ahead effect (for example, "●" display).

(e) After that, the symbol variation that was the subject of the jackpot confirmation performance ends, and the jackpot symbol ("7A" corresponding to the 16R jackpot) is stopped and displayed. Since it is a stop display of the jackpot symbol in a non-probability fluctuating game state and a non-time saving game state, the first decorative pattern is "777" in the "number + character" display format (display format), and the second The decorative pattern is a ``number'' display mode (display format) in which ``777'' is displayed in a stopped state. (f) During a jackpot, "777" is displayed as the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be hidden during the jackpot, or may be configured such that both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed. may be configured. Further, during a jackpot, the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. In addition, even in the configuration where the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the jackpot, as mentioned above, before the jackpot starts, three "7" symbols are displayed, but only one "7" pattern is displayed during the jackpot. It may be configured to display.

(g) After that, the jackpot ends. After the end of the jackpot and before the start of symbol variation, the jackpot symbol "777" related to the executed jackpot will be displayed as a "number" for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. ``777'' is displayed as a ``number'' because the game enters the probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state after the jackpot ends.

In this way, if a jackpot confirmation effect is executed as a look-ahead effect, and a power outage occurs during symbol fluctuation when the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the stop symbol after the jackpot that is executed thereafter will be "777". Yes, it is configured so that the symbol combination is not exclusive to when the power is restored.

As detailed in Figures 159 and 160, if the power is cut off after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed due to jackpot fluctuation, the first decorative pattern immediately after the jackpot ends will be a number dedicated to when the power is restored. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs after the jackpot confirmation effect has been executed as a look-ahead effect, the first decorative pattern immediately after the jackpot ends will not be displayed exclusively when the power is restored, but will be displayed before the start of the jackpot. It is constructed so that it can become a jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. By configuring this way, if the fluctuation results in a jackpot, even if a power outage occurs, the jackpot will start immediately. If the first decorative pattern is displayed with a combination of numbers exclusively for power outages, and a jackpot is achieved after a predetermined number of pattern changes, if a power outage occurs, the period from when the power is restored until the end of the jackpot is Since the period is long, by configuring the first decorative pattern to be displayed as the jackpot symbol immediately after the jackpot ends, depending on the game situation, it is possible to preferentially notify that a power outage has occurred and to execute a jackpot. It is possible to selectively use the notification method to notify the user of the notification on a priority basis.

In addition, in FIG. 160, a pending change effect is illustrated as an example of a look-ahead effect, but the look-ahead effect that can be applied to this example is not limited to this, and the look-ahead zone effect that involves a background change (specifically, a look-ahead zone effect that involves a background change) The normal or "mountain" background is displayed as a production, but if a hold occurs that triggers the execution of the look-ahead zone production, the display may switch to a "sky" background or "space" background, etc. The background has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the "mountain" background, and the "space" background has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the "sky" background. , A countdown look-ahead effect in which numbers are subtracted and displayed at the start of the symbol change (specifically, a countdown look-ahead effect so that "0" is displayed when the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead effect is extinguished) It is a production in which a number is subtracted each time a hold that is extinguished before the hold that triggered the execution is completed, and the colors of the numbers are ``white'', ``red'', and ``rainbow''. It can be applied to various look-ahead performances, such as a "rainbow" (a performance in which a jackpot is confirmed in the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead performance). In addition, in the embodiment in which the first decorative pattern is displayed during a jackpot, as a modification example, instead of the first decorative pattern, a third decorative pattern of a new display mode (display format) (for example, "numbers" of the first decorative pattern) '' is an Arabic numeral, whereas the ``number'' of the third decorative pattern is a Roman numeral). Note that the background effect may be referred to as a presentation mode.

Next, FIG. 161 is an image diagram regarding the execution of the accessory effect. First, in (a) a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 3, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device SG, and as a super reach performance. A battle performance is being executed (execution starts 30 seconds after the start of symbol variation). In addition, since the super reach effect is being executed, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device, with the left pattern and the right pattern fluctuating in the tenpai state, and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the tenpai state. All the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. (b) After that, as a super reach effect, the main character's attack hits the enemy character, and a role effect (effect that involves the movement of movable objects) is executed (execution starts 50 seconds after the start of the symbol change) ). In this way, the accessory presentation in the figure plays the role of definitively informing the player that the symbol change being executed will result in a jackpot.

Here, the movable accessory (sometimes referred to as movable accessory YK) during execution of the accessory performance in the figure is "initial position → stopped for 5 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the performance display device SG → initial position" It may be driven as follows, and it may be during the execution of the performance ("initial position → stop for 5 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the performance display device SG → initial position"), or during the entire period of the performance display device SG. (This may be a period of 5 seconds of stopping at a predetermined position in front), the first decorative pattern is not displayed, and the second decorative pattern maintains a variable display. Further, the first pending display is hidden, and the second pending display continues to be displayed. Note that the first pending display is displayed before the execution of the battle performance as a super reach performance is started, but may be configured to be hidden after the start of the battle performance. In addition, during execution of the accessory performance, as shown in (b), the movable accessory after the movement is driven in front of the second decorative pattern, so when the second decorative pattern is viewed from the front, some of the symbols The visibility of the second decorative pattern (second decorative pattern in the left column) decreases, but in order to improve this, as a modification, the display position of the second decorative pattern may be changed even before the movable accessory is being driven. However, it may be configured so that the second decorative pattern is not displayed behind the movable accessory (so that the visibility of the second decorative pattern is not obstructed by the movable accessory).

Here, in the figure, an image in which the number of reservations is 3 is displayed as the second reservation display, that is, the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side (for example, non-time Although we have exemplified a configuration in which only one of the number of reservations on the first main game side is displayed in the shortened gaming state and the number of reservations on the second main game side in the time reduction gaming state is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to display both the number of reservations on the main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side (for example, images of two numbers "3" and "0" are displayed). In such a configuration, both the number of reservations on the first main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed regardless of the production mode or the game state. It may be configured as follows. Additionally, it should be noted that such a configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, but is applicable to all embodiments or configurations according to this example.

(c) After that, an effect is executed in which the enemy character is defeated, and jackpot symbols are displayed for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Although not shown, the first decorative pattern is then displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 160(e) (enlarged and in the "number + character" display format), and the second The display size and display mode (display format) of the decorative pattern do not change, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped.

(d) On the other hand, in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, a power outage occurs in a situation where there is no hold and the symbols are stopped. (e) Thereafter, the power is restored, and an operation check of the movable accessory is performed as an initial operation after the power is restored.

Here, the movable accessory during the operation check in the figure is driven as follows: "initial position → stop for 2 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the effect display device SG → initial position", and while the operation check is being performed. In this case, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not displayed (the effect display device SG indicates that the screen is returning). Further, the time from the start to the end of the operation check is 10 seconds.

(f) After that, a hold occurs during the operation check of the movable accessory (while it is returning to the initial position), the hold is extinguished, symbol variation is started, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are changed. will begin to display fluctuations. Note that the timing for restarting the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern after the power is restored is (1) the timing when the hold occurs, (2) the timing when the hold is extinguished, and (3) a predetermined period of time after the power is restored. It may be a timing that has elapsed, etc.

In this way, when performing the accessory production, the first decorative pattern is hidden and the second decorative pattern is displayed. However, if the pattern fluctuation starts during the operation check after the power is restored, the first decorative pattern is hidden and the second decorative pattern is displayed. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern will be displayed.

In addition, in (d) to (f) in the figure, the case where the power supply is cut off while the symbols are stopped is illustrated, but the configuration may be as follows.
(1) Power outage occurs during symbol fluctuation. (2) Power is restored. (3) Symbol fluctuation resumes based on power restoration, and the movable accessory stops in front of the production display device for 2 seconds. Perform an operation check. However, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the first pending display, and the second pending display are hidden (the screen displays the words "Returning to the screen").
(4) Since the symbol variation ended during the execution of the operation check of the movable accessory and the suspension occurred, a new symbol variation starts. When the new symbol variation starts, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the first pending display, and the second pending display may be configured as described above. In the case of the above configuration, when performing effects such as (a) to (c) in Fig. 161 with the new symbol variation in (4), the operation check is performed after the new symbol variation starts. Since it is completed within 10 seconds (because the power is restored and the operation check is started during the symbol change before a new symbol change), the operation check is not executed in duplicate with the super reach effect (battle effect). Furthermore, the operation check is not performed overlappingly with the performance of the accessory.

In addition, as a role play, it may be performed to definitively notify that the symbol change will be a jackpot by executing it, as shown in the same figure, or it may be performed when the symbol change being executed is a jackpot. It may be configured to be executed in order to notify the player that there is a relatively high possibility that this will occur. The configuration shown in the figure can be applied to any configuration.

In addition, as shown in the figure, when executing a role effect that definitively informs that the symbol change will become a jackpot by executing it, the role play starts from the start of the symbol change that will become a jackpot. The time it takes to start driving the movable accessory (50 seconds in the figure) is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored (10 seconds in the figure). . In addition to the production pattern in which it takes 50 seconds from the start of movement to start the movement of the movable accessories related to the accessory production, as shown in the flow of production in the figure, there are also production patterns that require 50 seconds from the start of the movement of the movable accessories related to the accessory production. A performance pattern that requires 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation until the start of the movement, a performance pattern that requires 30 seconds from the start of the movement of the movable accessory related to the accessory performance, and a performance pattern that requires 30 seconds from the start of the movement of the movable accessory related to the accessory performance. Multiple movable accessory drive performance patterns may be provided, such as a performance pattern that requires 40 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, but in any of these performance patterns, the movement related to the accessory performance from the start of the symbol fluctuation. It is preferable that the time required to start driving the accessory exceeds 10 seconds, which is the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored.

By configuring in this way, for example, when a symbol variation is executed such as "symbol variation resulting in a loss → symbol variation resulting in a jackpot", immediately before the end of the symbol variation resulting in a loss (for example, 0 of the confirmed stop) Even if the power is cut off before .1 second) and then the power is restored, the performance will definitely notify you that the symbol change being executed will be a jackpot after the operation check after the power is restored. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation.

In addition, as shown in the figure, when executing a role effect that definitively informs that the symbol change will become a jackpot by executing it, the role play starts from the start of the symbol change that will become a jackpot. The time it takes for the movable accessory to finish driving and for the first decorative pattern to be displayed again is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored (10 seconds in the figure). It becomes.

Further, in the same figure, although the case of a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state is illustrated, the configuration of the same figure can be applied to any gaming state. Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopts a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combination) for the second decorative design. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In such a case, in all gaming states (including all gaming states), the number of stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the second decorative pattern. ) may be adopted, or in one or more predetermined game states, the number of candidates for the stop symbol ( ) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of candidates for symbol combinations is larger than the number of candidates.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) The first decorative pattern becomes a reach ("7↓7"), and then stops and is displayed when the reach is missed ("787").
(2) After that, if no game is played for a predetermined period of time (for example, no game ball enters the ball entrance and no symbol change is performed), the game enters a standby state and a standby movie is displayed. Ru. While the standby movie is being displayed, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hidden (only the first decorative pattern may be hidden).
(3) If a power failure occurs while the standby movie is being displayed, and then the power is restored, the standby movie will not be displayed and the first decorative pattern will be a stop pattern (for example, "711") that is exclusive to when the power is restored. ) (the second decorative pattern is also displayed as "711").
(4) If the game state during standby movie display is a non-probability fluctuating game state and a non-time saving game state, the first decorative pattern after the power is restored is "711" (number + character). 2 (the decorative pattern is ``711'' with only ``numbers'' displayed), and the game state during the waiting movie display is a game state other than the non-probability fluctuating game state and the non-time saving game state (for example, the probability fluctuating game state and the time saving game state). (Shortened gaming state), the first decorative pattern after the power is restored is "711" with only "numbers" displayed (the second decorative pattern is "711" with only "numbers" displayed) .
It may be configured as described above. In addition, when the power is restored, as described above, it may be configured to check the operation of the movable accessory.

Next, FIG. 162 is an image diagram regarding power cutoff.

<In case of non-time reduction gaming state>
(a) It is a non-time saving game state, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The first decorative pattern is "711" (numbers + characters), which is displayed in a stopped state, and the second decorative pattern is "711" (numbers only), which is shown in a stopped state. (b) After that, a power outage occurs. (c) Thereafter, the power is restored, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern will be displayed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The second decorative pattern has the same pattern combination (same combination of numbers) and display mode (display format) as before the power was cut off. On the other hand, the first decorative pattern is the same pattern combination (same combination of numbers) as before the power was turned off, but the display mode (display format) has been changed to only "numbers". In addition, in the same figure, when a power outage occurs in a situation where decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a non-time saving gaming state, only the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is changed and the symbol combination is changed. Although the configuration in which the (combination of numbers) is the same is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern and the design combination (number combination) are different before the power is cut off and after the power is restored. (combination) may be changed. As an example, if a power outage occurs in a situation where the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as "283" with "numbers + characters" in a non-time saving game state, and then the power is restored, the first The decorative pattern may be configured to be displayed in ``numbers'' as ``711'' exclusively for when the power is restored. In addition, even if the first decorative pattern is configured so that only the display mode (display format) can be changed before the power is turned off and after the power is restored, the display mode (display format) and the symbol combination (number combination) will not be changed. Even in the case where the symbol is configured to be obtained, it may be configured such that only "numbers" are displayed after the power is restored, and then "numbers + characters" are displayed at the timing when symbol fluctuation starts.

<In the case of time reduction gaming state>
(d) It is a time reduction game state, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The first decorative pattern is "711" (numbers + characters), which is displayed in a stopped state, and the second decorative pattern is "711" (numbers only), which is shown in a stopped state. (e) After that, a power outage occurs. (f) Thereafter, the power is restored, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern will be displayed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The second decorative pattern has the same pattern combination (same combination of numbers) and display mode (display format) as before the power was cut off. In addition, the first decorative pattern is also the same pattern combination (same combination of numbers) as before the power was cut off, and the display mode (display format) is also displayed in the same "numbers + characters" as before the power cut. .

In addition, in the same figure, a power outage occurs in a situation where decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a non-time reduction game state, and a case where a power failure occurs in a situation where decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a time reduction game state. Although the comparison is made with the case where a power outage occurs, it is also possible to compare the case where the probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state and the probability fluctuating gaming state and the time reducing gaming state occur. A comparison may be made between a time reduction gaming state and a non-probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. Also, as shown in the same figure, if the power is restored after the power is turned off in a situation where there is no hold and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, or if the power is restored after the power is turned off while the decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In comparison, the configuration may be such that the power recovery screen as shown in FIG. 157(e) is not displayed. Alternatively, as shown in the same figure, if the power is restored after the power is turned off in a situation where no hold has occurred and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, a power restoration screen such as that shown in (e) of Fig. 157 will be displayed. , the display time may be shortened compared to when the power is restored after the power is turned off in a situation where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the non-time saving gaming state, an example has been given of a configuration in which the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is different between before the power is turned off and after the power is restored, but it is configured so that only the symbol combination (combination of numbers) is different. Alternatively, both the symbol combination (combination of numbers) and the display mode (display format) may be configured to be different. In addition, "numbers" and "numbers + characters" have been illustrated as configurations with different display modes (display formats), but the invention is not limited to this, and the design of the characters, the type of characters, the color of the numbers, the arithmetic Differences in display formats, such as whether it is a number or a Chinese numeral, size, etc., may be used as a difference in display mode (the same can be applied to other configurations). Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs in the time reduction gaming state in the same figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is the same before the power outage occurs and after the power is restored, but the symbol combination ( The combination of numbers) may be configured to be different (for example, before the power is turned off: "283", after the power is restored: "711").

In addition, in a non-time reduction game state (and a non-probability variable game state), multiple types of production stages (also referred to as production modes) are prepared, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is different depending on the production stage. It may be configured so that As an example, as shown in FIG. 141, it may have at least a production stage A and a production stage B, and may be configured to be changeable (transitionable) from production stage A to production stage B. In this case, production stage The "numbers" are in a common format, such as "number + character A" in stage A and "number + character B" in production stage B, but even if the type of "character" (display content) is configured to be different. Good ("Character A" means a character that corresponds to a "number" to be displayed among multiple types of characters belonging to the animal type that is character type A. For example, if it is "8", "elephant" is "Character B" means a character that corresponds to the "number" that should be displayed among multiple types of characters belonging to the fruit type that is character type B. For example, "8" means "watermelon". This applies, and the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern is the same in production stage A and production stage B). On the other hand, in the time reduction game state (and the probability varying game state), the performance stage may be of one type, the performance stage C, and the performance stage C may be configured to have a display mode (display format) of only "numbers". Here, if the configuration is configured so that when the power is restored after a power outage in a non-time reduction gaming state (and a non-probability variable gaming state), the presentation stage (after the screen returns) will always be presentation stage A, then presentation stage B will If the power is turned off and then the power is restored in a situation where the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as "711" with "number + character B", the stage becomes production stage A and the first decorative pattern is "number + character B". B", "711" is stopped and displayed, and in the production stage C of the time reduction game state (and probability variation game state), the first decorative symbol is only "numbers" and "711" is stopped and displayed. If the power is turned off and then restored, the production stage C will be maintained and the first decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed as "711" with only "numbers". Similarly, when the power is restored after a power outage in a non-time reduction gaming state (and a non-probability variable gaming state), if the production stage is always set to production stage A, then the first decorative symbol will be changed to " If the power is turned off and then the power is restored in a situation where "283" is stopped and displayed with "number + character B", the stage becomes production stage A and the first decorative pattern is "711" with "number + character B". The display will stop and the power will be cut off and the subsequent When the power is restored, the production stage C is maintained and the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as "711" with only "numbers". It should be noted that the relationship between the game state, the performance stage, and the first decorative pattern (and the second decorative pattern) is applicable to all configurations according to this example. In addition, if the power is restored after a power outage in a non-time reduction gaming state (and a non-probability variable gaming state), and the production stage is configured to always be production stage A, the first decoration will be displayed on production stage B. If the power is turned off and then the power is restored while the symbol is stopped and displayed as "283" with "number + character B", the stage becomes production stage A, and the first decorative symbol is "number + character A" and "283" is stopped and displayed. 711" may be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the figure, the case of the non-time reduction gaming state and the case of the time reduction gaming state are compared, but the case is not limited to this, and the case of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state are compared. It may be applied to the case of comparison, or it may be applied to the case of comparing the case of a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state with the case of a probability varying gaming state and a time saving gaming state. It should be noted that the comparison of applicable gaming states is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, but is applicable to all configurations related to gaming states detailed in this example. Similarly, the configuration that compares the case of a non-probability variable gaming state and the case of a probability variable gaming state can also be applied to the case of comparing the case of a non-time saving gaming state and the case of a time saving gaming state. Alternatively, the present invention may be applied to a case where a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state is compared with a probability fluctuating gaming state and a time saving gaming state. Similarly, the structure comparing the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and non-time reducing gaming state with the probability varying gaming state and time reducing gaming state is also compared to the non-time reducing gaming state and the time reducing gaming state. The present invention may be applied when comparing the cases of non-probability-variable gaming states and the case of probability-variable gaming states.

Next, FIG. 163 is an image diagram regarding the final fluctuation in the time reduction gaming state. In the figure, a case is illustrated in which the game enters a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and the number of time-savings is given 100 times.

(a) The 99th symbol change in the time reduction game state has ended, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The first decorative pattern is a "number" with "613" stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern is "613" (numbers only) stopped and displayed. In addition, there is only one game on hold, and since this is a time-reduced gaming state, a right-handed instruction display (an image that prompts the player to play right) is displayed.

(b) After that, the 100th symbol variation starts as the final variation in the time reduction gaming state. (c) Thereafter, a power outage occurs during the final fluctuation in the time reduction gaming state. (d) After that, the power is restored, and at the first timing after the power is restored, the right-hand hitting instruction display is displayed again, and the display mode is the same as before the power was turned off. Further, the second decorative pattern is also displayed in the same display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. As a modified example, the right hit instruction display may be displayed again, but the second decorative pattern may not be displayed again. (e) Thereafter, at the second timing after the power is restored, the first decorative pattern is displayed again in the same display mode (display format) and pattern combination (combination of numbers) as before the power was turned off. " and the combination of numbers "711" is displayed again. The first decorative symbol that is displayed again has been fixed and stopped, and during the variable fixed time at this fixed stop, the time reduction game state is maintained (when the variable fixed time ends, it will be in the non-time reduction game state) ), the right-handed hit instruction display is still displayed. (f) After that, the variable fixed time ends at the third timing after the power is restored, the state shifts to the non-time saving gaming state, and the first decorative pattern changes to the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time saving gaming state. (“Numbers + Characters” and “711”). In this way, after the power is restored, the first decorative pattern is displayed again after the right-hitting instruction display is displayed again.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the final change in the time-reduced gaming state, the stop display of the first decorative symbol after the power is restored allows the power to be turned off in any gaming state. For example, in gaming machines where the variation time of decorative symbols in the time-reduced game state is short, it is difficult to determine when the time-reduced game state ends. Therefore, it is particularly suitable.

In addition, since it takes time for the main game symbol to start changing after the player fires the game ball by hitting right, if the power is cut off in the time-reduction game state and the power is restored, By configuring the display to display the right shot instruction display before the display of the first decorative symbol, in the event of a power outage, it is possible to teach the player the appropriate firing position rather than redisplaying the decorative symbol. By giving priority, subsequent games can proceed smoothly.

In addition, in FIG. 163, the re-display timing of the second decorative symbol after the power is restored may be earlier than the re-display timing of the right-handed instruction display, or may be approximately the same as the re-display timing of the right-handed instruction display. or may be substantially the same as the re-display timing of the first decorative pattern. Further, as described above, the performance mode in the non-time reduction gaming state and the performance mode in the time reduction gaming state may be made different. With such a configuration, if a power failure does not occur, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the time-reduced gaming state will remain unchanged until the first decorative symbol at the 100th rotation, which is the final change in the time-reduced gaming state, is temporarily stopped. is the display mode (display format), and during the temporary stop (the game state during this temporary stop is still a time-reduction game state), although it is a time-reduction game state, there is a display mode corresponding to a non-time-reduction game state. The display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is changed, and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative pattern, which was fluctuating when the first decorative pattern was temporarily stopped, is also fixed and stopped, Thereafter, the transition to the non-time saving gaming state may be made, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol may also be configured to maintain the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time saving gaming state (in this case, The display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change).

In addition, in FIG. 163, after the first decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is turned off at the timing (e), the display mode (display format) does not change as time passes, and then When a new hold occurs and symbol variation starts, the first decorative symbol may be displayed in a display mode (display format) corresponding to a non-time saving gaming state.

In addition, in FIG. 163, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is cut off at the timing (e) without going through the step (d) after the timing (c). It may be configured as follows. Also, at the timing after (e) (the timing after the variable fixed time has elapsed), based on the fact that the gaming state has switched from the time-reducing gaming state to the non-time-reducing gaming state, a left-handed hitting instruction will be displayed. The left-handed hitting instruction display is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the timing (f), that is, immediately after the first fluctuation starts after transitioning to the non-time reduction gaming state, and then disappears. Good too. The display priority at this time is configured to be in the order of left-handed hitting instruction display > second decorative symbol > second pending display > first decorative symbol. Note that the left-handed hitting instruction display is composed of image objects that are the same as or similar to the left-handed hitting warning display shown in FIG. 134. Note that the above describes the left-handed hitting instruction display when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, but unlike in FIG. Even if the game progresses to the non-time saving gaming state, the change in the non-time saving gaming state which is the 100th change in the time saving gaming state (the first change after transitioning to the non-time saving gaming state) Immediately after the start of the game (fluctuation), the left-handed hit instruction display may be displayed. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off at the 100th rotation in the time-saving game state and the power is restored, the time Even immediately after the start of the 100th variation in the non-time reducing gaming state (the first variation after transitioning to the non-time reducing gaming state), the left-handed hit instruction display will not be displayed. It may be configured.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) No hold has occurred and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.
(2) Power outage occurs.
(3) The power is restored, the effect display device displays that the screen is being restored, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hidden.
(4) In a situation where the effect display device is displaying that the screen is returning, a new hold occurs and the main game symbols start to fluctuate, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol remain hidden. becomes.
(5-1) After a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was restored, the display indicating that the screen is being restored on the effect display device ends, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern resumes.
(5-2) Or, after the power is restored, a predetermined time has elapsed, which is the time when the effect display device can finish displaying that the screen is returning, but the main game symbol is still changing, so it is displayed that the screen is returning. continues to be displayed, and when the fluctuation of the main game symbol ends, the display indicating that the screen is returning on the effect display device ends, and the fluctuating display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol resumes (the suspension occurs further). ) or a stop indication is given (if no hold has occurred, i.e. a new variation cannot be started).
It may be configured as described above.
In other words, it may be configured to work as "(1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5-1)", or it may work as "(1) → (2) → (3)". → (4) → (5-2)".

Next, FIG. 164 shows a configuration regarding the display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG when an error occurs. Note that a high display priority means that it is displayed on the front side (front layer) as seen from the player, and a low display priority means that it is displayed on the back side (rear layer) as seen from the player. This is what is happening.

First, (a) an abnormality in which the saucer (upper tray) is full is detected, and an error message "Please remove the ball" is displayed on the performance display device SG. Further, the display area of the error display overlaps with the first decorative pattern, and the display priority of the error display is higher than that of the first decorative pattern. Specifically, the error message "Please remove the ball" is displayed on a layer in front of the first decorative pattern, which is "711" (numbers + characters). Moreover, the display area of the error display does not overlap with the display area of the second decorative pattern. Specifically, the error display "Please remove the ball" does not overlap the display area of the second decorative symbol "711".

Thereafter, (b) when the cross button SB-2 is operated (the right button or the left button may be operated), the volume adjustment screen is displayed. When operating the cross button SB-2 for displaying this volume adjustment screen, whether the right button operation or the left button operation is performed, the volume is not adjusted (that is, the volume adjustment screen is simply displayed). As a modified example, when you operate the right button, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume increases by one level, and when you operate the left button, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume decreases by one level. It may be configured as follows. In a situation where the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted based on the operation of the cross button SB-2 while the volume adjustment screen is displayed (for example, the operation of the right button of the cross button SB-2 Press to increase the volume by one step, and press the left button of the cross button SB-2 to decrease the volume by one step). In addition, the volume adjustment screen has a display area that overlaps with the first decorative pattern and the error display, and a display area that does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. The display priority is "error display → volume adjustment screen → first decorative pattern" from highest to lowest. That is, by displaying the volume adjustment screen, a part of the display of the first decorative pattern, which is displayed as "711" with "numbers + characters", becomes invisible, while the message "Please remove the ball. ” error displays are all configured to be visible. In addition, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed, when operating the right button of the cross button SB-2 increases the volume by one level, or operating the left button of the cross button SB-2 increases the volume by one level. When the volume level becomes smaller, the speaker may be configured to output a sound that allows the user to recognize the changed volume level (this may be output each time the right or left button of the cross button SB-2 is operated).

In this figure, the cross button SB- By operating 2, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. In other words, the volume can be adjusted even when the tray (upper tray) is full. In addition, in the same figure, a case is illustrated in which a saucer (upper tray) full abnormality occurs, but this is merely an example, and may be applied to situations in which other errors occur. Also, it is not necessary to operate as shown in the figure while all errors occur; depending on the type of error occurring, the effect may differ from that shown in the figure (for example, pressing the cross button SB-2 while an error occurs). It may also be configured such that the volume adjustment screen is not displayed even if the volume is operated, and the volume cannot be adjusted.

With this configuration, information that should be notified to the player, such as error display, can be given priority, and even if the visibility of the first decorative pattern is reduced, the second decorative pattern can be visually recognized so that the game can be played. The player can grasp the situation. In addition, although the volume adjustment screen overlaps with error displays and reduces visibility, the fact that the volume adjustment screen is displayed itself is visible, so the player does not know that the volume can be adjusted. By operating the cross button SB-2, the volume output from the speaker changes, so the player can adjust the volume without any problems. Note that it may be configured such that a confirmation sound is output from the speaker each time the cross button SB-2 is operated to adjust the volume, so that the current volume level can be recognized (the volume of the confirmation sound changes depending on the volume level). do).

Although the display conditions, display priorities, and volume adjustment operations for the volume adjustment screen are described in detail in the same figure, the same applies to the display conditions, display priorities, and light amount adjustment operations for the light amount adjustment screen. However, to display the light intensity adjustment screen, unlike the volume adjustment screen, it is necessary to operate the upper or lower button of the cross button SB-2. Operation of the upper or lower button of button SB-2 (When the upper button is operated, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed and the light intensity increases by one step; when the lower button is operated, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. The difference is that the amount of light decreases by one step as the amount of light increases.

Note that the display areas of the error display and the second decorative pattern may be configured to overlap, or the error display may be configured to have a higher display priority than the second decorative pattern.

In addition, the gaming machine has detected an error in the saucer (upper tray) being full (a saucer (upper tray) full error has occurred), and the gaming machine has detected an error in the saucer (upper tray) being full (the saucer (upper tray) is full). Error state A is the state from when a full tank error occurs until before a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. error occurs) and a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the game machine detected a tray (upper tray) full error (a tray (upper tray) full error occurred). In the case of state B, the configuration may be as follows.

When the first decorative pattern is configured to output a stop sound (sound effect at the time of stop, also referred to as stop SE) when the first decorative pattern is permanently stopped (or temporarily stopped), an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. When the first decorative pattern is displayed and is in error state A, a stop sound (stop SE) is output when the first decorative pattern is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped), and an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the case of error state B, the stop sound (stop SE) may not be output when the first decorative pattern is permanently stopped (or provisionally stopped).

Note that the final stop may be a temporary stop immediately before the final stop, and specifically, the first decorative pattern is fluctuating → the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped → a stop sound is output → The oscillation fluctuation is performed → the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Further, the term "temporary stop" may be applied to the temporary stop of special symbols related to pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

In addition, when a predetermined error is occurring (for example, an abnormality in which the tray (upper tray) is full), it is assumed to be an error state A, and when a specific error is occurring (for example, an abnormality in starting opening), it is assumed to be an error state B, and applied to the above configuration. You may.

In addition, in the same figure, the case where the error display and/or the volume adjustment screen is displayed while the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped is shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the error display and/or volume adjustment screen is displayed while the decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner (the first decorative pattern may be displayed temporarily stopped), the same display priority as in the same figure is applied. configuration may be applied. In other words, the same configuration regarding the display priority as in the figure may be applied to any timing when the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner.

Note that the configuration shown in the figure can be applied to any gaming state. Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopts a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combination) for the second decorative design. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In such a case, in all gaming states (including all gaming states), the number of stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the second decorative pattern. ) may be adopted, or in one or more predetermined game states, the number of candidates for the stop symbol ( ) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of candidates for symbol combinations is larger than the number of candidates.

Next, FIG. 165 shows a configuration regarding display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG when button effects are executed. First, (a) the number of reservations is two, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are changing. Thereafter, (b) a button effect is executed at a predetermined timing of the variation, and an operation suggestion image (a button image with "PUSH" written approximately in the center of the liquid crystal screen) is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display area of the operation suggestion image overlaps with the first decorative pattern, and the display priority of the operation instruction image is higher than that of the first decorative pattern. Furthermore, the display areas of the operation suggestion image and the second decorative pattern do not overlap.

<Pattern 1>
After that, (c) the sub-input button was operated while the operation suggestion image was being displayed (during the valid period of the sub-input button SB while the button effect was being executed), so the post-operation image in the button effect was displayed as “Heat!! !” is displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is deleted). The display area of the post-operation image overlaps with the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the second pending display (sometimes referred to as the second pending image), and the display priority is ranked from high to high, "second decorative""Design → second pending display → post-operation image → first decorative design". Further, the display area of the after-operation image is larger than that of the operation suggestion image, and by configuring it in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB in order to see the more prominent after-operation image. The frequency can be increased. In addition, since the second decorative pattern and the second pending display are configured so as not to be displayed overlappingly, the display priority order of the second decorative pattern and the second pending display may be changed, The display priorities may be the same. Further, in pattern 1 in the figure, the post-operation image is configured to overlap with the second pending display, but it may be configured such that the post-operation image does not overlap with the second pending display.

<Pattern 2>
After the above-mentioned (b), the sub-input button was operated during the display of the operation suggestion image (d) (the valid period of the sub-input button SB while the button effect is being executed), so the image after the operation in the button effect is , "CHANCE!" are displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is deleted). The post-operation image has a display area that overlaps with the first decorative pattern and the first pending display (which may also be configured to overlap with the pending digestion transmission image), and does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. The display priority is "first pending display → post-operation image → first decorative pattern" in descending order of priority. Further, the display area of the after-operation image is larger than that of the operation suggestion image, and by configuring it in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB in order to see the more prominent after-operation image. The frequency can be increased. In addition, in the case of operating as in (d), the display priority of the second decorative pattern may be configured to be higher than that of the first pending display. In addition, in pattern 2 of the same figure, the configuration is such that the after-operation image does not overlap with the second pending display, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the after-operation image may overlap with the first pending display and the second pending display. It may be configured to do so. Further, in such a configuration, the display priority of the after-operation image may be configured to be lower than the display priority of the first pending display and the second pending display.

Note that the configuration may include multiple types of operation suggestion images; for example, the configuration may include operation suggestion images A that are displayed with a relatively high frequency and operation suggestion images B that are displayed with a relatively low frequency. In this case, the configuration may be such that only the operation suggestion image A acts like the above pattern 1 or pattern 2, and the operation suggestion image B does not act like the above pattern 1 or pattern 2. For example, the operation suggestion image A may have a smaller display area than the after-operation image, but the operation suggestion image B may have a larger display area than the after-operation image.

In addition, in the same figure, the button effect is configured to start (displaying the operation suggestion image) in a situation where the reach is not reached in the symbol variation, but this is not limited to this, and the button effect is not limited to this. It may be configured to display a button effect (operation suggestion image). In such a configuration, the operation suggestion image and the post-operation image may be configured to have a higher display priority than the images during the super reach effect (for example, the image of the main character and the image of the enemy character). . The display priority with respect to other elements may be the same as the configuration shown in the figure.

Next, FIG. 166 shows a configuration regarding the display mode (display format) and variation pattern of the first decorative pattern. In the configuration shown in the figure, the aforementioned limited frequency states include a limited frequency state A (a state in which variation pattern table A is referred to) and a limited frequency state B (a state in which variation pattern table B is referenced). A normal state (a state in which a normal variation pattern table is referred to) is a state related to a variation pattern different from a frequency state.

(a) It is a time reduction game state, the state regarding the variable pattern is limited frequency state A, and the first decorative pattern is displayed as a "number" of "617". Furthermore, in the limited frequency state A, the fluctuation pattern is configured as follows. In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, in the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A is configured to determine the variation pattern (using the method). In addition, even in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) is used to determine the variation pattern. Note that the limited frequency state A (fluctuating pattern table A) may include a limited frequency state (fluctuating pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the second main game side. For example, when the number of reservations is "1", Limited frequency state A1 (fluctuating pattern table A1) to be used, limited frequency state A2 (fluctuating pattern table A2) to be used when the number of reservations is "2", limited frequency state A3 to be used when the number of reservations is "3" (variation pattern table A3), limited frequency state A4 (variation pattern table A4) used when the number of reservations is "4", etc., or a limited frequency state (variation pattern table) may be provided individually. Limited frequency state A12 (fluctuating pattern table A12) used when the number is "1" or "2", limited frequency state A34 (fluctuating pattern table A34) used when the pending number is "3" or "4" A limited frequency state (variation pattern table) that is common to some number of reservations may be provided, such as.
<When you lose>
Random number: 0 to 499 → Variation time: 3 seconds Random number: 500 to 799 → Variation time: 5 seconds Random number: 800 to 999 → Variation time: 10 seconds <When winning>
Random number: 0 to 299 → Variation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Variation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 999 → Variation time: 10 seconds

After that, the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, and the gaming state remains in the time reduction gaming state, but the state regarding the variation pattern switches from limited frequency state A to limited frequency state B. . The first decorative pattern continues to display "617" as a "number". Furthermore, in the limited frequency state B, the fluctuation pattern is configured as follows. In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, the limited frequency state B (variation pattern table B) is applied regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. and is configured to determine a variation pattern using the method. In addition, if the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) is not used in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state, the second main game side hold Regardless of the number, the variable pattern is determined using the limited frequency state B (variation pattern table B). Note that the limited frequency state B (variable pattern table B) may be provided with a limited frequency state (variable pattern table) depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. For example, when the number of reservations is "1", Limited frequency state B1 (fluctuating pattern table B1) to be used, limited frequency state B2 (fluctuating pattern table B2) to be used when the number of reservations is "2", limited frequency state B3 to be used when the number of reservations is "3" (variation pattern table B3), limited frequency state B4 (variation pattern table B4) used when the number of reservations is "4", etc. Limited frequency state B12 (fluctuating pattern table B12) used when the number is "1" or "2", limited frequency state B34 (fluctuating pattern table B34) used when the pending number is "3" or "4" A limited frequency state (variation pattern table) that is common to some number of reservations may be provided, such as.
<When you lose>
Random number: 0 to 299 → Variation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Variation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 849 → Variation time: 10 seconds Random number: 850 to 919 → Variation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Variation time: 60 seconds Random number: 980-999 → Variation time: 120 seconds <When winning>
Random number: 0 to 99 → Variation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Variation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Variation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Variation time: 120 seconds

After that, the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot, the time reduction gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a non-time reduction gaming state, and the state regarding the variation pattern changes from the limited frequency state B. The state is switched to a normal state (a normal fluctuation pattern table which is a normal state regarding a fluctuation pattern different from the limited frequency state). As the first decorative pattern, "617" is displayed using "numbers + characters". Further, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern is configured as follows. Note that it is preferable to provide a normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the first main game side. For example, normal state 1 (normal fluctuation pattern table 1) is used when the number of reservations is "1", normal state 2 (normal fluctuation pattern table 2) is used when the number of reservations is "2", and normal state 2 (normal fluctuation pattern table 2) is used when the number of reservations is "2". Normal state 3 (normal fluctuation pattern table 3) is used when the number of reservations is "3", normal state 4 (normal fluctuation pattern table 4) is used when the number of reservations is "4", etc. A normal state 12 (normal fluctuation pattern table 12) is used when the number of reservations is "1" or "2", and a normal fluctuation pattern table 12 is used when the number of reservations is "3" or "4". A normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) common to a part of the number of reservations may be provided, such as a normal state 34 (normal fluctuation pattern table 34).
<When you lose>
Random number: 0 to 199 → Variation time: 5 seconds Random number: 200 to 699 → Variation time: 10 seconds Random number: 700 to 919 → Variation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Variation time: 60 seconds Random number: 980 to 999 → Variation time: 120 seconds <When hit>
Random number: 0 to 99 → Variation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Variation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Variation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Variation time: 120 seconds

In this way, in the configuration shown in the same figure, if the time reduction gaming state is entered after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot is not won after that, "time reduction gaming state and limited frequency state A fluctuates by 50 → time reduction gaming" The state and limited frequency state B are configured to transition from 50 fluctuations to non-time saving gaming state and normal state.

In addition, in the same figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is different depending on whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state. The display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is the same in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, which are in the same gaming state. With this configuration, even if the background effect is designed to switch to various effect modes even in the same game state, the game can be improved by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern. For example, if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the time-saving gaming state (in a situation where the player cannot accurately grasp whether the time-saving gaming state has ended or not), Also, by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern, it is possible to accurately recognize in which gaming state the jackpot has been won.

In the same figure, the time reduction game state is configured to transition between two limited frequency states, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to transition between three or more limited frequency states. In this case, as in the configuration shown in the same figure, as long as the gaming status is the same, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern may be configured to be the same even if the limited frequency status is different. .

In addition, in the same figure, the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern depends on the gaming state (whether or not it is a time-reduction gaming state), the state related to the fluctuation pattern (whether or not it is a limited frequency state), etc. No matter what, it's all numbers. In addition, it has a special effect that can be displayed in limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B, which is a special effect that suggests the number of remaining time reductions. This is a trigger change in which the remaining number of gaming states is a multiple of 10, such as the 10th variation, 20th variation, ..., 80th variation, 90th variation), and/or the remaining number of time reduction gaming states is a predetermined number. At every change when the number of times (for example, 10 times) or less is exceeded, a display such as "XX times remaining for time saving!" is displayed. This "time saving remaining count suggestion performance" is not displayed in a non-time saving game state. In addition, this "remaining time saving number suggesting effect" is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative pattern but not with the second decorative pattern. In addition, it is preferable that the display priority is time saving remaining number of times suggestion presentation>first decorative pattern. However, the display priority may be set as first decorative pattern > time saving remaining number of times suggestion effect in order to give priority to notification of the result of judgment.

In addition, the time reduction gaming state in the figure may be a gaming state related to the variation pattern of the main game symbol, or may be a gaming state related to the fluctuation pattern of the main game symbol, or the auxiliary game symbol (the probability that the auxiliary game symbol stops at a winning symbol, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol, It may be a game state related to the opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory, etc.), or it may serve as both. Furthermore, this definition is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, but is applicable to all configurations according to this example.

In addition, in the same figure, (a) time reduction gaming state and limited frequency state A and (b) time reduction gaming state and limited frequency state B are the same background effect (or effect mode), but (c) In the non-time saving game state and the normal state, the background effect (or effect mode) is different. In this case, until the first decorative symbol of the final variation in limited frequency state B temporarily stops, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to limited frequency state B (time reduction game state) is maintained. During a temporary stop (the gaming state during this temporary stop is still a limited frequency state B and a time-reduced gaming state), although it is in a limited frequency state B (a time-reduced gaming state), it corresponds to a non-time-reduced gaming state. The display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is changed, and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative pattern, which was fluctuating when the first decorative pattern was temporarily stopped, is also fixed and stopped. , After that, it may be configured to shift to the non-time saving gaming state and maintain the display form (display format) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the non-time saving gaming state (in this case , the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change). In addition, as modified examples, (a) time reduction gaming state and limited frequency state A, (b) time reduction gaming state and limited frequency state B, and (c) non-time reduction gaming state and normal state, respectively. The background effects (or effects modes) may be configured to be different. Note that the production mode, which may also be referred to as a production stage, is a production mode indicated by a background image. Examples include the daytime stage and night stage illustrated in FIG. 77 etc., stage A and stage B illustrated in FIG. Stage mode corresponds to production mode. That is, the configuration may be configured by employing both this configuration and the configuration illustrated in FIG. 142 and the like. Further, the configuration is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if a combination of a plurality of configurations related to the production mode (production stage, background production, background image) according to this example is employed.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopts a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) of the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combination) for the second decorative design. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In such a case, in all gaming states (including all gaming states), the number of stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the first decorative pattern is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbols (symbol combinations) for the second decorative pattern. ) may be adopted, or in one or more predetermined game states, the number of candidates for the stop symbol ( ) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of candidates for symbol combinations is larger than the number of candidates.

Next, FIG. 167 shows a configuration regarding the characteristics of the first decorative pattern depending on the game state.

<a: Time reduction game state>
In the time reduction game state, "787" is not stopped and displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as a stop symbol (combination of numbers) that results in a loss ("232" may be stopped and displayed). Note that the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is "number". In addition, the display of the hold display and the hold completion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side. That is, even if a hold on the first main game side occurs, the hold display and hold extinguishment communication image corresponding to the hold on the first main game side will not be displayed. In addition, in the time reduction game state, the special symbol (“continuation” in the same figure) is configured not to be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the time reduction game state, if the reach of 7 symbols occurs ("7 ↓ 7"), it will be a jackpot (it will not be a loss).In other words, "777 ” may be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that this configuration can be applied to any time reduction gaming state, but it is preferable to apply it to a probability variable gaming state and a time reduction gaming state.

<b, c: Non-time saving gaming state>
(b) In the non-time reduction game state, the system is configured so that "787" may be stopped and displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as a stop symbol (combination of numbers) that results in a loss ( "232" may also be stopped and displayed). Note that the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is "numbers + characters". In addition, the display of the hold display and the hold completion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the first main game side. That is, even if a hold on the second main game side occurs, the hold display and hold completion transmission image corresponding to the hold on the second main game side will not be displayed. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, even if a reach of 7 symbols occurs ("7 ↓ 7"), it may result in a loss. In other words, "787" is drawn together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. may be configured so that it can be stopped and displayed. Although this configuration is applicable to any non-time saving gaming state, it is preferably applied to a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the (c) non-time saving game state, the special symbol (“continuation” in the figure) can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. Here, special symbols are symbols that are not displayed as fixed stop symbols, such as "continuation" symbols that temporarily stop when a pseudo continuous variation is executed, and "development" symbols that temporarily stop before a super reach effect is executed. It becomes.

With this configuration, in the time-reduced gaming state, the player pays attention to the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, so the number of types of stop modes of the first decorative symbol may be reduced, or While simplifying the display mode (number of display types) of the first decorative symbol, such as preventing the special symbol from stopping and displaying, in the non-time saving game state, in order to enjoy the process up to the jackpot, By making the display modes (the number of display types) of the first decorative symbols more diverse, such as increasing the number of stop modes of the first decorative symbols or allowing a predetermined special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the game state It is possible to build an appropriate performance environment.

In addition, in the figure, the time reduction gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state are compared, but the comparison may also be made between the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, or the gaming state regarding the fluctuation pattern ( The comparison may be made between the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B), or between the performance modes controlled by the sub-control board S (performance mode A and performance mode B). In addition, when comparing in production mode, the configuration may be combined with the configuration related to production mode (stage A, stage B) described above in FIG. 141. More specifically, the production mode in the non-time reduction gaming state (which may also be a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state) in the same figure is set to stage A in FIG. The performance mode in the variable gaming state and the time-reducing gaming state) may be set as stage B in FIG. 141, and both the configuration shown in the figure and the configuration shown in FIG. 141 may be adopted.

In addition, in the predetermined special symbol, while it can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in a non-time reduction gaming state, it is configured so that it is not displayed as a temporary stop symbol in a time reduction gaming state. It may be configured so that it can be displayed as a temporary stop symbol both in the shortened game state and in the shortened time game state.

Further, the animation of the first decorative symbol may be stopped when the main game symbol is determined and stopped, but the animation of the first pending display may not be stopped. Animation means, in the case of the first decorative pattern, that the pattern is moving such as shaking fluctuations, the patterns in the numbers that make up the pattern are moving, the characters that make up the pattern are moving, etc. In the case of the first pending display, the first pending display is rotating, the pattern in the first pending display is accompanied by movement, etc. In addition, as an example of the period during which the animation of the first decorative pattern is stopped, a variable fixed time etc. can be exemplified. Regarding the second decorative pattern and the second pending display, the animation itself will not be executed whether it is changing or fixed (during stop display, fixed period of movement), and the second decorative pattern will not be displayed. There are only a variable display and a fixed variable (stop display), and the second pending display only displays the number of pending items (including addition and subtraction).

In addition, the first decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped and then displayed again in a variable manner, and the second decorative pattern may be displayed in a different combination of symbols from the temporary stop display. It may be configured to avoid such cases. As a specific example,
(1) The first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate → Develops into a super reach effect → As a result of the super reach effect, "666" is temporarily stopped and displayed → All symbols start to fluctuate again → "777" stops temporarily → Shaking fluctuation → Confirmed stop (2) The first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate → Temporary stop is displayed at the symbol combination "6 in a row 6" where the middle symbol is a special symbol → All symbols start to fluctuate again → Develops into a super reach performance → Super reach performance As a result, "666" may be configured as described above: provisional stop display → shaking fluctuation → confirmed stop. The second decorative pattern in (1) and (2) is continuously displayed in a variable manner until the first decorative pattern is fluctuating (until immediately before the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped), and at the same time as the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Definitely stop.
With this configuration, the first decorative pattern plays the role of enlivening the game by executing various effects, while the second decorative pattern can accurately notify the result of the game.

Further, the first decorative pattern can change its appearance by operating an operation member (for example, a sub-input button, a cross button, etc.) controlled by the sub-control board S, but the second decorative pattern is controlled by the sub-control board S. The mode does not change depending on the operation of the operating member (for example, sub-input button, cross button, etc.). Here, a change in aspect refers to a change in part or all of the design of a pattern, a case in which the temporarily stopped first decorative pattern returns to a temporary stop, or a case in which the first decorative pattern moves forward (slips) to a temporary stop. These include changes in the manner of variation of cases, etc., temporary stop display of special symbols, changes in the speed of variation display of the first decorative symbol, and the like. With this configuration, the first decorative pattern plays the role of enlivening the game by executing various effects, while the second decorative pattern can accurately notify the result of the game.

Next, FIG. 168 shows specific symbol fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state (for example, the reach fluctuation that performs the normal reach effect when A3 hits in FIG. 12, the super reach effect when A6 hits, and the battle reach effect). This shows the execution timing of each action, etc. in the first half and second half of the performance (reach variation). It should be noted that various variations of the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-saving game state, or the first half of the losing normal reach performance, super reach performance, and battle reach performance shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. It may be a reach variation that performs the second half, or a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol that corresponds to a symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol that corresponds to a symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be. In addition, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first half and second half of a losing super reach performance or a battle reach performance, the trigger of the look-ahead performance may be suspended as the variation mode groups of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. That is clear.

In FIG. 168, the execution timing of each action, etc. will be explained in chronological order, and detailed explanation will be omitted here. The detailed aspects of each action, etc. (a) to (n2) shown in FIG. 168 correspond to (a) to (n2) in FIGS. 173 to 176, so the details will be explained in FIGS. 173 to 176. . First, (a) is based on the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol in a situation where there is a hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state. This is the timing when the first decorative symbols in the corresponding left row, middle row, and right row are fixed and stopped as losing symbols, and (b) is the timing when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the first decorative symbol is suspended. is digested and the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol start varying display, and this is the timing to execute action 1 at the start of variation, ( c) is the timing when the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column that started the variation display execute accelerated variation, and (d) is the timing when the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column performed accelerated variation. (e) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the high-speed variation, and (f) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the deceleration variation. The first decorative symbol is the timing to execute the fixed position action 1, (g) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the right column that has executed the high-speed variation is the timing to execute the deceleration variation, and (h) is the timing to execute the deceleration variation in the right column. (i) is the timing when the pseudo continuous pattern executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (j) is the timing when the pseudo continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 1. (k) is the timing when the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes fixed position action 1, (l) is the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes re-variation, (m) is the timing to execute action 2 at the start of variation when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start re-variation (pseudo-association); This is the timing when the first decorative symbols in the row, middle row, and right column perform accelerated fluctuations, and (o) is the timing when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that have performed accelerated fluctuations execute high-speed fluctuations. (p) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the deceleration variation after executing the high-speed variation, and (q) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the fixed position action 2. (r) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the deceleration variation after performing the high-speed variation, and (s) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 2. (t) is the timing after the first decorative pattern in the right column executes fixed position action 2, and (u) is the timing after the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns is tenpai. This is the timing at which action 1 is executed, (v) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns execute shaking action 1, and (w) is the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols execute deceleration fluctuation. , (x) is the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol executes the fixed position action 2, (y) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2, and (z) is the timing when the pseudo-continuation pattern executes the re-variation, and (a2) is the timing to execute the action 3 at the start of variation when starting the re-variation (pseudo-continuation) of the left column, middle column, and right column. Yes, (b2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that started the re-variation perform accelerated variation, and (c2) is the timing when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that started the re-variation execute accelerated variation. , (d2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column performs a high-speed fluctuation, (d2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column, which has performed the high-speed fluctuation, performs a deceleration fluctuation. The first decorative symbol in the left column is the timing at which the fixed position action 3 is executed, (f2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column, which has executed the high-speed variation, executes the deceleration variation, and (g2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the deceleration variation. , (h2) is the timing after the first decorative pattern in the right column executes the fixed position action 3, (i2) is the timing after the first decorative pattern in the right column executes the fixed position action 3. , (j2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns execute the tenpai action 2, (j2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns execute the shaking action 2, and (k2) ) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes fixed position action 3, (l2) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns executes the determined action, (m2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform swing fluctuations, and (n2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns reach a fixed stop. It's time to execute.

The specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state shown in FIG. 168 starts the symbol variation of the first main game symbol at the timing (b). Then, at the timings (f) to (k), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns each temporarily stop, and then at the timing (l), they start the first re-fluctuation (pseudo series). Start. In addition, regarding the first decorative pattern, the second re-variation (pseudo series) will start at the timing (m). This first re-variation (pseudo-run) is called a non-reach pseudo-run (pseudo-run in a situation where the player is not in a tempo state). Then, the reach effect is executed from the timing of tenpai action 1 in (u) to the fixed position action 2 in (y) of the first re-variation (pseudo-association), and at the timing of (q) to (y), the left row, The first decorative symbols in the middle row and the right row each temporarily stop, and then start a second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) at timing (z). In addition, regarding the first decorative pattern, the second re-variation (pseudo series) is started at the timing (a2). This second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) is called a post-reach pseudo-run (pseudo-run after the state of tempo). Then, the reach effect is executed from the timing of the tenpai action 2 at (i2) of the second re-variation (pseudo-connection) to the fixed position action 3 at (k2). In addition, regarding production sound (BGM), stage BGM is output from (a) to (u), reach BGM is output from (u) to (y), and stage BGM is output from (z) to (i2). Then, the reach BGM is output from (i2) to (k2), and the jackpot BGM (for example, the performance sound of a decisive action) is output from (l2) to (n2). Note that the contents of the stage BGM may be switched using re-variation (pseudo-association) as an opportunity; for example, (a) to (k) are stage BGM 1, and (l) to (u) are stage BGM 2 or pseudo-association. Dedicated BGM1, (z) to (i2) may be output as stage BGM3 or pseudo-ren exclusive BGM2, or (a) to (k) may be output as stage BGM1, and (l) to (u) as stage BGM1. BGM2 or BGM exclusively for pseudo-series, stage BGM2 or BGM exclusively for pseudo-series may be output from (z) to (i2). Further, when a pseudo-continuous pattern such as (j) or (x) performs a fixed position action, BGM exclusively for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern may be output.

FIG. 169 shows the execution timing of each action, etc. in the variable standby state. (a3) in FIG. 169 is a different situation from (a) to (n2) in FIG. 168, in which there is a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state. It shows the timing at which the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol in a situation where the game is not performed is fixed and stopped at a losing symbol. Also in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time reduction gaming state. This shows a state in which the first decorative pattern whose pattern has changed in response to the pattern change continues to be fixed and stopped as a losing pattern (variation standby state). In addition, (a3) of FIG. 169 shows the first main game pattern corresponding to the symbol fluctuation in the situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time reduction gaming state. 1 shows the timing when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped at the losing symbol, but (a3) in FIG. 169 shows that in the non-time reduction game state, there is also a suspension on the first main game side and a suspension on the second main game side. The timing may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in a situation where the game is not in progress is determined to be a losing symbol, or the timing may be the timing when the first decorative symbol changes in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol in a situation where the second main game symbol is not changed. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose design has changed in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol in a situation where there is no hold on the second main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fixed and stopped as a losing symbol, In the shortened game state, in a situation where there is no hold on the first main game side or hold on the second main game side, the first decorative pattern whose pattern has changed in response to the pattern change in the first main game pattern is confirmed as a losing pattern. It may be the timing at which it is stopped. Also in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time reduction gaming state. The state in which the first decorative pattern, which has changed in response to the pattern change, is fixed and stopped as a losing pattern (variation standby state) continues, but (b3) to (f3) are non-continuous. In the time reduction gaming state, in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held, the first decorative symbol whose pattern has changed in response to the pattern change of the second main game pattern is a losing pattern. It may be a state in which the fixed stop state (variable standby state) continues, or a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the time reduction gaming state. The first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol may continue to be fixed and stopped as a losing symbol (variation standby state), or the time may be shortened. In the gaming state, in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held, the first decorative pattern whose pattern has changed in response to the pattern change of the first main game pattern is determined to be a losing pattern and is stopped. The current state (fluctuating standby state) may continue. Furthermore, (a3) of FIG. 169 shows the first main game pattern corresponding to the symbol fluctuation in the situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time reduction gaming state. 1 The timing at which the fluctuation of the decorative symbols is confirmed and stopped at the losing symbol is shown, but (a3) in FIG. 169 shows the timing at which the jackpot ends (or the timing at which the jackpot ends demo ends, immediately after the end of the jackpot, or immediately after the start of the time-reduced gaming state). The timing may be when "777" or the like is displayed as a jackpot symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held after the end of the jackpot. In this case, in (a3) and subsequent (b3) to (f3), in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side holds after the end of the jackpot, The state in which "777" or the like is displayed as the jackpot symbol (fluctuating standby state) continues.

In FIG. 169, the execution timing of each action, etc. will be explained in chronological order, and detailed explanation will be omitted here. The detailed aspects of each action (a3) to (f3) shown in FIG. 169 correspond to (a3) to (f3) in FIG. 177, so the details will be explained with reference to FIG. 177. First, (a3) is a pattern change corresponding to a pattern change of the first main game pattern in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time reduction gaming state. (b3) is the timing when the volume adjustment screen and light intensity adjustment screen are displayed in the fluctuation standby state, and (c3) is the timing when the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped as a losing symbol. This is the timing at which the displayed volume adjustment screen and light amount adjustment screen are erased, (d3) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern performs the first shaking action while it is in the fluctuation standby state, and (e3) is the timing at which the first shaking action is executed while the first decorative pattern is in the fluctuation standby state. , is the timing at which the standby movie is executed in the variable standby state, and (f3) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol executes the second shaking action while in the variable standby state. In addition, the timing at which the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen displayed in the fluctuation standby state are erased is set as (d3), and the timing at which the first decorative pattern performs the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is set at (c3). ).

Regarding BGM (performance sound), the stage BGM is output from (a3) to (d3), and the output of the stage BGM is stopped (the output is set to 0) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the shaking action of (d3). After the stage BGM output is stopped, (e3) and (f3) are also in a state where the stage BGM is not output. Here, it is preferable that the timing to stop the output of the stage BGM (set the output to 0) is after (d3) and before (e3); The timing may be the same as the timing.

Next, FIG. 170 shows specific symbol fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state (for example, the reach fluctuation that performs the normal reach effect when A3 hits in FIG. 12, the super reach effect when A6 hits, and the battle reach effect). It is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution time of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, right column, and middle column in the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the production. It should be noted that various variations of the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-saving gaming state, and instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, the second It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the main game symbol. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the normal reach effect for winning A3, the super reach effect for A6 hit, and the reach variation that performs the first half and second half of the battle reach effect, group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45 are used. It is clear that as a variation mode group, the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be suspended.

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol in the left column changes action 1 to H1 at the start of variation. Run seconds. After that, fixed position action 1 is T1 seconds, shaking action is Y1 seconds, fluctuation start action 2 is H4 seconds, fixed position action 2 is T4 seconds, shaking action is Y3 seconds, tenpai action 1 is TP1 seconds, shaking action 1 is Y4 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 for H7 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T7 seconds, swinging action for Y6 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP3 seconds, swinging action 2 for Y7 seconds, decision action for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the left column is oscillated and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped for a fixed period of time. The first decorative pattern in the right column is: action 1 at the start of fluctuation is H2 seconds, fixed position action 1 is T2 seconds, shaking action is Y2 seconds, action 2 at the start of fluctuation is H5 seconds, fixed position action 2 is T5 seconds, tenpai Execute action 1 for TP 2 seconds, shaking action 1 for Y 5 seconds, action 3 at the start of fluctuation for H 8 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T 8 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP 4 seconds, shaking action 2 for Y 8 seconds, and decisive action for K 2 seconds. do. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the right row is oscillated and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped for a fixed period of time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row is H3 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T3 seconds for fixed position action 1, H6 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T6 seconds for fixed position action 2, and H9 for action 3 at the start of fluctuation. Second, execute fixed position action 3 for T9 seconds, and execute decisive action for K3 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is oscillated and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped for a fixed period of time. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the winning super reach performance and the winning battle reach performance, the configuration is such that the middle row fixed position action 3 in the case of a win shown in FIG. 170 is not executed. .

In addition, as a temporary display mode, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) used in the first pseudo-continuous variation is displayed at the timing of fixed position action 1 in the middle row, and the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) used in the subsequent second pseudo-continuous variation. The symbol) is displayed at the timing of fixed position action 2 in the middle row. At that time, the special symbol may be displayed by performing a fixed position action. The group notice shown in FIG. 83 is given at a predetermined timing (for example, in the first half of the middle of Y7 seconds) after the Tenpai Action 2 in the left column and the right column is executed and during the execution of the Shaking Action 2. Although it is executed for a certain period of time, it is configured so that it is not executed while the shaking action 1 is being executed after the execution of the tenpai action 1 in the left column and the right column. In addition, the pending change effect shown in FIG. 87 is performed after the execution of action 1 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, and up to fixed position action 1 of the first decorative symbols in the left column. (change timing 1), after the execution of action 2 at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, and until the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the left column (change timing 2) Execute after the execution of action 3 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns and before the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbols in the left column (change timing 3) It is possible to perform the pending change effect at all of the change timings 1 to 3, or to execute the pending change effect at any one timing or two of the timings 1 to 3. Good too.

The execution time and variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 170 are configured in the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H seconds (one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H seconds (one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Left row fixed position action T seconds (one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Left row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(2-2) Right row fixed position action T seconds (one of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < Right row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(3) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1, TP3 seconds) < left row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Right row tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP2, TP4 seconds) < right row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(4) Decisive action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) Left row deciding action K1 seconds <Left row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Right row deciding action K2 seconds < Right row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of fixed position action in left row (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in left row (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of fixed position action in right row (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in right row (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of tenpai action in left row (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in left row (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(7-2) Total time of right row tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Total time of right row shaking action (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of deciding action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action Y seconds (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Left row decisive action K1 seconds <Total time of left row shaking actions (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Right row deciding action K2 seconds <Total time of right row shaking action (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(9-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) Total time of fixed position action in left row (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left row (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) Total time of fixed position action in right row (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in right row (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) Total time of tenpai action in left row (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left row (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(11-2) Total time of right row tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < right row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(12) Total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(13-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of Tenpai action (Total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) + Deciding action K1 seconds of left column <Total time of shaking action of left column (Total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(13-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + deciding action K2 seconds of right column <total time of shaking action of right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(14-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of Tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) + Deciding action K1 seconds in left column < Y seconds of shaking action in left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(14-2) Total time of movement start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of Tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + Right column decisive action K2 seconds < Right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(15) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < Fluctuation fixing time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) < Fluctuation fixing time (17) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Fluctuation fixed time (18) Deciding action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Fluctuation fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y1 - Any one of Y8 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (20) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Decisive action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (21) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) ) > Fluctuation fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (TP1 to TP4) (total time of seconds) + total time of deciding action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(23) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding (15) to (18) above, the variation fixing time may be configured to be shorter, in other words, "action H seconds at the start of variation (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) >variation""Fixedtime","Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) > variable fixed time", "Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > variable fixed time", ""Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)>Fluctuating fixed time" may be used. Note that "any" here only needs to be satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (3-2), it is sufficient that at least one of the relationships TP2<Y2, TP2<Y5, TP2<Y8, TP4<Y2, TP4<Y5, and TP4<Y8 is satisfied. Note that the variable fixed time is the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol, and since there is no concept of totaling it, it is treated as a single time.

Next, FIG. 171 shows specific symbol fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state (for example, the first half and the second half of the losing normal reach performance, super reach performance, and battle reach performance shown in FIGS. 12 and 13). It is a figure which shows the execution timing and execution time of each action of the 1st decorative pattern of a left column, a right column, and a middle column in (reach variation). It should be noted that various variations in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-saving gaming state, and instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, the second It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the main game symbol. In addition, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first half and second half of a losing super reach performance or a battle reach performance, the trigger of the look-ahead performance may be suspended as the variation mode groups of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. That is clear.

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol in the left column changes action 1 to H1 at the start of variation. Run seconds. After that, fixed position action 1 is T1 seconds, shaking action is Y1 seconds, fluctuation start action 2 is H4 seconds, fixed position action 2 is T4 seconds, shaking action is Y3 seconds, tenpai action 1 is TP1 seconds, shaking action 1 is Y4 seconds, execute the fluctuation start action 3 for H7 seconds, the fixed position action 3 for T7 seconds, the shaking action for Y6 seconds, the tenpai action 2 for TP3 seconds, and the shaking action 2 for Y7 seconds. After shaking action 2, the first decorative symbol in the left row is shaken and fluctuated as a losing symbol, and then the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped for a fixed fluctuation time. The first decorative pattern in the right column is: action 1 at the start of fluctuation is H2 seconds, fixed position action 1 is T2 seconds, shaking action is Y2 seconds, action 2 at the start of fluctuation is H5 seconds, fixed position action 2 is T5 seconds, tenpai Execute action 1 for TP 2 seconds, shaking action 1 for Y 5 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 for H 8 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T 8 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP 4 seconds, and shaking action 2 for Y 8 seconds. After shaking action 2, the first decorative symbol in the right row is shaken and fluctuated as a losing symbol, and then the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped for a fixed fluctuation time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row is H3 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T3 seconds for fixed position action 1, H6 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T6 seconds for fixed position action 2, and H9 for action 3 at the start of fluctuation. Run seconds. Then, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is oscillated as a losing pattern in accordance with the oscillating variation in the left and right columns, and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped for a fixed period of time. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the losing super reach performance and the losing battle reach performance, the middle row fixed position action 3, left column, middle column, right column in the case of a win as shown in Figure 170 The configuration is such that the determining action of the first decorative pattern is not executed.

The execution time and variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 171 are configured in the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H seconds (one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H seconds (one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (any one from T1 to T8 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one from Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Left row fixed position action T seconds (one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Left row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(2-2) Right row fixed position action T seconds (one of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < Right row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(3) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1, TP3 seconds) < left row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Right row tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP2, TP4 seconds) < right row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(4) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) <total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of fixed position action in left row (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in left row (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of fixed position action in right row (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in right row (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of tenpai action in left row (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in left row (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of right row Tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Total time of right row shaking action (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of the action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(7-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Total time of fixed position action in left row (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left row (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Total time of fixed position action in right row (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in right row (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of tenpai action in left row (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left row (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(9-2) Total time of right row tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < right row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time from Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one from Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(11-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(12) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < Fluctuation fixing time (13) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) < Fluctuation fixing time (14) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Fluctuating fixed time (15) Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (16) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (17 ) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > Fluctuation Fixed time (18) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) time) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(19) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding (12) to (14) above, the variation fixing time may be configured to be shorter, in other words, "action H seconds at the start of variation (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) >variation""Fixedtime","Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) > Variable fixed time", "Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > Variable fixed time" good. Note that "any" here only needs to be satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (3-2), it is sufficient that at least one of the relationships TP2<Y2, TP2<Y5, TP2<Y8, TP4<Y2, TP4<Y5, and TP4<Y8 is satisfied.

Next, FIG. 172 shows the first symbols in the left, right, and middle rows in a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state (for example, a normal symbol variation accompanied by a chance look-ahead effect, a reach variation). It is a figure which shows the execution timing and execution time of each action of a decorative pattern. In addition, in FIG. 172, a normal symbol variation accompanied by a chance prediction performance is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in a symbol combination indicating a chance, the next symbol variation is a hit. It is configured to execute a reach variation that produces a reach effect as a trigger variation, and these two symbol variations are symbol variations before and after that are connected in chronological order. It should be noted that it may be a time-saving game state instead of a non-time-saving game state, and it corresponds to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be a pattern variation of the first decorative pattern. Furthermore, when the normal symbol fluctuations and reach fluctuations are targeted, it is clear that the fluctuation modes a1 to a4 shown in FIG. 12 can be the pre-trigger fluctuations of the look-ahead effect.

First, for the first decorative symbol in the left column in normal symbol variation, the action at the start of variation is performed for H1 seconds, the fixed position action is performed for T1 seconds, and the swinging action is performed for Y1 seconds. Thereafter, the first decorative pattern in the left column is fixed and stopped for a variable fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column performs a fluctuation start action for H2 seconds, a fixed position action for T2 seconds, and a swinging action for Y2 seconds. Thereafter, the first decorative pattern in the right column is fixed and stopped for a variable fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row performs a fluctuation start action for H3 seconds, a fixed position action for T3 seconds, and a swinging action for Y3 seconds. Thereafter, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is fixed and stopped for a variable fixed time. Note that the fixed position action in the case where the chance pattern is fixed and stopped may be performed in a manner different from the fixed position action in FIGS. The fixed position action is an action in which the first decorative pattern bounces, and the fixed position action when stopping the chance pattern is an action in which the first decorative pattern expands after performing an action such as bouncing. action). In addition, after the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance prediction performance shown in FIG. 172 is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in the symbol combination indicating the chance, the next symbol variation is performed as shown in FIG. 170. A reach variation that performs a normal reach performance for a hit, a reach variation that performs a super reach performance for a win, and a reach variation that performs the first half and second half of a battle reach performance for a win may be configured to be executed as a trigger variation. In addition, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance prediction performance shown in FIG. 172 is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in the symbol combination indicating the chance, the next symbol variation is performed as shown in FIG. 171. A reach variation that performs a normal reach performance for a loss, a reach variation that performs a super reach performance for a loss, and a reach variation that performs the first half and second half of a battle reach performance for a loss may be configured to be executed as a trigger variation. Furthermore, the reach variation shown in FIG. 172 may be set as a variation mode group of group 2 or group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45, and the trigger of the look-ahead effect may be held. In this case, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance prediction effect shown in FIG. 172 is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in the symbol combination indicating the chance, the next symbol variation It is configured to execute a reach variation that performs a reach effect of 172 as a trigger variation. In other words, not only does the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance foresight effect shown in Fig. 172 lead to the reach variation shown in Fig. 172, but also the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance foresight effect shown in Fig. It may be configured so as to lead to fluctuations or fluctuations in the reach of losing as shown in FIG. 171.

The execution time and fluctuation fixed time of each action in the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 172 are configured in the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(1-1) Action at the start of fluctuation in the left column H1 seconds < Shaking action in the left column Y1 second (1-2) Action at the start of fluctuation in the right column H2 seconds < Shaking action in the right column Y2 seconds (1-3) At the start of row movement action H 3 seconds < Shaking action in the middle row Y 3 seconds (2) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(2-1) Left row fixed position action T1 seconds < Left row swinging action Y1 seconds (2-2) Right row fixed position action T2 seconds < Right row swinging action Y2 seconds (2-3) Middle row Fixed position action T 3 seconds < Middle row shaking action Y 3 seconds (3) Total time of action at start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds) (4) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) <total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(8) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(8-1) Action H1 seconds at the start of fluctuation in the left column + Fixed position action T1 seconds in the left column < Shaking action Y1 seconds in the left column (8-2) Action H2 seconds at the start of fluctuation in the right column + Constant position in the right column Position action T2 seconds < Right row shaking action Y2 seconds (8-3) Middle row action at the start of fluctuation H3 seconds + Middle row fixed position action T3 seconds < Middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (9) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds) < Fluctuation fixed time (10) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds) < Fluctuation fixed time (11) Shaking action Y seconds (Y1 to Any one of Y3 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (12) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (9) above, ( Regarding 10), the structure may be configured such that the fluctuation fixing time is shorter, in other words, "action H seconds at the start of fluctuation (any one of H1 to H3 seconds)>fluctuation fixing time", "fixed position action""T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds)>Fluctuating fixed time" may be used. Note that "any" here only needs to be satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (1), at least one relationship among H1<Y1, H1<Y2, H1<Y3, H2<Y1, H2<Y2, H2<Y3, H3<Y1, H3<Y2, H3<Y3 It is sufficient if it is satisfied.

Next, the first decorative symbol in the left column in the reach variation on the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state is the action at the start of variation H4 seconds, the fixed position action T4 seconds, the shaking action Y4 seconds, and the tenpai action Execute TP for 1 second, shaking action 1 for Y5 seconds, and decision action for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the left column is oscillated and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped for a fixed period of time. For the first decorative pattern in the right column, after the first decorative pattern in the left column starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation is H5 seconds, the fixed position action is T5 seconds, the tenpai action is TP2 seconds, the swinging action is Y6 seconds, and the deciding action is Execute for K2 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the right row is oscillated and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped for a fixed period of time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row performs a fluctuation start action for H6 seconds and a deciding action for K3 seconds after the first decorative symbols in the left and right rows start fluctuating. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is oscillated and then the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped for a fixed period of time. Note that this reach variation may be in a time reduction game state instead of a non-time reduction game state, and may be caused by a second main game symbol instead of a symbol variation in the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation in the first main game symbol. It may be a pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation. In the case of this reach fluctuation, the execution timings of the actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are not the same, but are different (the actions at the start of fluctuation of each first decorative symbol are at different timings). There is. In this way, by making the execution timings of the actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns different, the player can be alerted to the possibility that a specific symbol fluctuation has started at the timing of the start of fluctuation. It is possible to suggest a certain fact and also to inform the player of the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Here, we will explain the mode of the action at the start of fluctuation when the execution timing of the action at the start of fluctuation is different for the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, and the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns. When the execution timing of the action at the start of fluctuation is the same, the action at the start of fluctuation may be performed in a different manner (for example, when the execution timing is different, an action in which the first decorative pattern trembles vertically) may be used. (If the execution timing is the same, the action is such that the first decorative pattern vibrates in the horizontal direction). In addition, in the case of this reach variation, the execution timings of the action at the start of variation in the left, middle, and right columns are not the same but different (the actions at the start of variation of each first decorative symbol are executed at different timings). Although an example has been shown, the execution timing of the action at the start of the fluctuation in the left column, middle column, and right column may be the same, as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation. In addition, here we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row does not perform a fixed position action when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with a normal reach effect, but the normal reach effect does not develop into a super reach effect and the normal reach effect does not occur. When the performance is continued and the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbols in the middle row may perform a fixed position action to stop and display the first decorative symbols in the middle row. In the case where the normal reach performance does not develop into the super reach performance and the normal reach performance is continued and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is the fixed position action mode, as shown in FIG. 170, the fixed position action 3 mode. The same aspect of the positional action may be performed, or a different aspect of the positional action may be performed. In addition, here, we have illustrated the case where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the normal reach effect, but the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the winning super reach effect or the winning battle reach effect may be targeted, and in that case, It is preferable to configure the system so that the fixed position action 3 in the middle row is not executed as in the case of the reach variation shown in FIG. 170.

Further, the execution time of each action and the fluctuation fixed time in the specific symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 172 are configured in the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(1-1) Action at the start of fluctuation in the left column H4 seconds < Shaking action in the left column Y seconds (one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
(1-2) Right column movement start action H5 seconds < right column shaking action Y6 seconds (2) Fixed position action T seconds (one of T4 or T5 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(2-1) Left row fixed position action T4 seconds < Left row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
(2-2) Right row fixed position action T5 seconds < Right row shaking action Y6 seconds (3) Tenpai action TP seconds (either TP1 or TP2 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6 seconds) any one)
(3-1) Tenpai action TP of left row 1 second < Shaking action of left row Y seconds (one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
(3-2) Right row tenpai action TP 2 seconds < right row shaking action Y 6 seconds (4) Decisive action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds) or one)
(4-1) Left row deciding action K1 seconds < Left row shaking action Y seconds (one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
(4-2) Right row decisive action K2 seconds < Right row shaking action Y6 seconds (5) Total time of action at start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (Y4 to Y6 seconds) total time)
(5-1) Action H4 seconds at the start of fluctuation in the left column <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 to T5 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(7) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) <total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(8) Total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds) (9) Total time of action at start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one from Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(11) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(12) Total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP2 seconds) + Total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(13-1) Left row fluctuation start action H 4 seconds + left row fixed position action T 4 seconds + left row tenpai action TP 1 second + left row deciding action K 1 second <Total time of left row shaking action (Y4 , Y5 seconds total time)
(13-2) Right row movement start action H 5 seconds + right row fixed position action T 5 seconds + right row tenpai action TP 2 seconds + left row decisive action K 2 seconds < right row shaking action Y 6 seconds (14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP2 seconds) + decision action Total time (Total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(14-1) Left column fluctuation start action H 4 seconds + left column fixed position action T 4 seconds + left column tenpai action TP 1 second + left column decisive action K 1 seconds < left column shaking action Y seconds (Y4, (any one of Y5 seconds)
(15) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) < Fluctuation fixing time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T4 or T5 seconds) < Fluctuation fixing time (17) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) < Fluctuation fixed time (18) Deciding action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Fluctuation fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y4 - Any one of Y6 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (20) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T4 or T5 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1, TP2 seconds) + Decisive action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time (21) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (H4 to H6 total time of seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) + total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) ) > Fluctuation fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (TP1, TP2) total time of seconds) + total time of decisive action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
Regarding (15) to (18) above, the variation fixing time may be configured to be shorter, in other words, "action at the start of variation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) >variation""Fixedtime","Fixed position action T seconds (one of T4, T5 seconds) > variable fixed time", "Tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1, TP2 seconds) > variable fixed time", ""Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)>Fluctuating fixed time" may be used. Note that "any" here only needs to be satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (1-1), at least one of the relationships H4<Y4 and H4<Y5 needs to be satisfied.

Next, FIG. 173 is an image diagram from (a) confirmation and stop of losing symbols to (l) re-fluctuation of the first pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, FIG. 173 shows specific symbol fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state (for example, the reach fluctuation that performs the normal reach effect when A3 hits in FIG. 12, the super reach effect when A6 hits, and the battle reach effect). This figure shows each action (b) to (l) in the first half and second half of reach variation). It should be noted that various variations of the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-saving game state, or the first half of the losing normal reach performance, super reach performance, and battle reach performance shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. It may be a reach variation that performs the second half, or a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol that corresponds to a symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol that corresponds to a symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be. In addition, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first half and second half of a losing super reach performance or a battle reach performance, the trigger of the look-ahead performance may be suspended as the variation mode groups of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. That is clear.

In (a), in the non-time reduction gaming state, the hold on the first main game side is 4, the hold on the second main game side is 0, and the effect display device SG corresponds to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol. This shows that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped at "711" which is a losing pattern. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "number". Only. Then, four first pending displays on the first main game side are displayed, and no first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "4", and the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0".

In (b), the hold is expired as the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the hold extinguishment transmission image (for example, the white circle image object in the figure) corresponding to the expired hold is This shows an action 1 at the start of variation when the first decorative symbol that is displayed and corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts to display the variation. The pattern of the symbol fluctuation this time is a symbol fluctuation that involves two pseudo-runs, and a variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed after reaching the reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, battle reach effect). When the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the variation start action 1 is executed. This action 1 at the start of variation is performed immediately after the start of the variation display of the first main game symbol (for example, 0.1 seconds later), when the losing symbol shown in (a) is stopped. An example of an action for enlarging the first decorative patterns in the left column, middle column, and right column is illustrated. When the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start to fluctuate, the display area where action 1 is executed (the display area for the start action) is when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. The example shows a display area that is larger than the displayed area (display area for fixed stop), but when executing action 1 at the start of variation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the start action is fixed. The display area is smaller than the stop display area.

(c) shows accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column after the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbol start to be displayed in a variable manner. After executing action 1 at the start of variation when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts to display a variable display, the enlarged first decorative symbol is It is configured to be reduced to the size of one decorative pattern, and then to perform an accelerated variation of scrolling downward. Note that the acceleration variation is configured to be executed until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of variation of the first decorative pattern.

(d) shows high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows after the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbol start accelerating fluctuations. After starting the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) to perform the fast variation.

(e) shows the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left column after performing the high-speed fluctuation. After executing a high-speed variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern, a deceleration variation is executed to display the first decorative pattern in the left column in a visible state. . Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing deceleration fluctuations, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuations.

In (f), the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character in the left column temporarily stops while performing deceleration fluctuation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column temporarily stops. This shows that the fixed position action 1 is executed in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 1 is the first decorative symbol when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped as shown in (a), and the first decorative symbol is higher than the first decorative symbol of action 1 at the start of fluctuation as shown in (b). An example of an action is shown in which the first decorative pattern is enlarged at a lower position than the first decorative pattern of action 1 at the start of variation shown in (b), and then returned to the upper position. In addition, this fixed position action corresponds to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element) as a different form of the fixed position action. may be configured to perform positional actions to: In this case, if the first element shown in the left column is a chick, an example is given in which the chick performs a fixed position action of waving both hands. Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 1, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuations.

In (g), the first decorative symbol in the left column executes a shaking action after performing the fixed position action 1, and the first decorative symbol in the right column executes a deceleration fluctuation after performing a high-speed fluctuation. It shows. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform a fixed position action 1, then reduce the size, and then perform a swinging action. Further, the first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to execute a deceleration variation that is displayed in a visible state after executing a high-speed variation. Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing a swinging action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing deceleration fluctuations, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing high-speed fluctuations.

In (h), the first decorative pattern in the left column is continuously performing the shaking action, and the first decorative pattern of the number "7" + lion character in the right column is performing the deceleration fluctuation. Temporarily stops, and at the timing of the temporary stop, execute position action 1 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column temporarily stops (the display area for the position movement in the right column, which is the display area for the position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 1 may be the same as the fixed position action 1 executed by the first decorative pattern in the left column, or may be different. In addition, when performing a fixed position action different from the left column, the different fixed position action may be executed depending on the symbol row of the first decorative symbol, or the type of the first decorative symbol (for example, the first 1 element + type of second element, type of first element, type of second element) may be executed. When performing an action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, type of first element + second element, type of first element, type of second element), the chick of the first element shown in the left column The first element is a lion, unlike the fixed-position action in which the player waves both hands, so an example of this is a fixed-position action in which the lion attacks. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 1, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation. There is.

(i) indicates that the pseudo-continuous pattern is performing deceleration fluctuation. The first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to perform a fixed position action 1, then reduce the size, and then perform a swinging action. Then, while the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are performing the shaking action, the pseudo continuous pattern (the "NEXT" pattern) covers the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns. It is configured to decelerate and fluctuate as if to hide it. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(j) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed position action 1. The pseudo-continuous pattern, which is displayed at a low speed with deceleration fluctuation, temporarily stops at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern executes fixed position action 1 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row temporarily stops (the display area for the fixed position movement in the middle row, which is the display area for the fixed position). do. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is designed so that when the pseudo continuous pattern performs the fixed position action 1, it does not perform a temporary stop or a fixed position action. It is composed of

(k) shows that the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 1. In the state where the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo continuous pattern "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row temporarily stops (the fixed position of the middle row which is the display area in the fixed position). The position action display area) is configured to execute the fixed position action 1 in the position action display area). In this example, after the pseudo-continuous symbol ("NEXT" symbol) in (j) executes the fixed position action 1, and after the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (k) executes the fixed position action 1, An example was shown in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in (l) is re-varied, but after the pseudo-continuous symbol in (j) (the "NEXT" symbol) executes fixed position action 1, the pseudo-continuous symbol in (1) (k) In a state where the first decorative pattern in the row does not execute fixed position action 1 and the first decorative pattern in the middle row continues to perform variable display (the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped). You may perform the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbols in (l), or (2) one of the temporary stop candidates in the plurality of first decorative symbols that are scrolled and displayed in the middle row of the pseudo-continuous symbols. You may also set it as a temporary stop and perform a fixed position action as the first decorative pattern (for example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → The first decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed in sequence while scrolling in the order of ..., and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, but if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops. , 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → ... The first decorative pattern displayed in the main area is sequentially switched and displayed while scrolling in the order of 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → ..., and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. ). Note that configuring the pseudo-continuous pattern in this way is not limited to the pseudo-continuous pattern in FIG. 173, but also applies to the pseudo-continuous pattern in FIG. It is clear that this can be applied to the pseudo-continuous patterns in each embodiment, including the above.It should be noted that the display area for the fixed position movement is larger than the display area for the start movement and the display area for the fixed stop. As shown in the example, when performing the fixed position action 1 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the fixed position action is smaller than the display area for the start action and the display area for the fixed stop. In addition, the pseudo-continuous pattern corresponds to a "special symbol" used in the pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. 20 as a temporary display mode.

(l) shows the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuation pattern is configured to perform an accelerated variation of scrolling downward when a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) is executed. In addition, after a pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, it can start re-fluctuating (pseudo-continuous) with an action at the start of fluctuation, or a special action (a pseudo-continuous pattern can be executed after the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped). This is an action that suggests that it disappears from the main area, and the pseudo continuous pattern may disappear by performing an erase action (described later), and when configured in this way, the action at the start of the variation of the pseudo continuous pattern is The execution time may be configured to be longer than the erasing action in which the pseudo-continuous symbol turns into mist and disappears without a trace, or the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol, or the display area used in the action may be changed. Execute actions such as increasing the size, increasing the magnification rate, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and intensifying the light emission of color effects, etc. In addition, in this embodiment, after executing the re-fluctuation of the pseudo consecutive symbols in (l) and executing the action 2 at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns in (m), ( An example is shown in which high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (o) are performed via accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns of (n). However, when executing the accelerated variation by re-fluctuating the pseudo-continuous symbol in (l), or when executing the action at the start of variation if the pseudo-continuous symbol executes the action at the start of variation, or When a series of symbols performs a special action, action 2 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol in the left, middle, and right columns of (m), and action 2 of the left, middle, and right columns of (n). It may be configured to perform high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (o) without performing accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols (in this case, (n) It is preferable to suddenly perform high-speed fluctuations without performing accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns.

Next, FIG. 174 is a state following FIG. 173, and is an image diagram from (m) action 2 at the start of variation to (x) fixed position action 2 of the pseudo-continuous symbol. First, (m) shows the action 2 at the start of variation when starting the first re-variation (pseudo series) of the first decorative pattern. When the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate again, a fluctuation start action 2 is executed. This action 2 at the start of fluctuation enlarges the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns shown in (k) immediately after the re-fluctuation starts (for example, 0.1 seconds later). Illustrate the action. When the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start to fluctuate, the display area where action 2 is executed (the display area for the start action) is when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. This example shows a display area that is larger than the displayed area (determined stop display area), but if you execute variation start action 2 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the start action display area is fixed. The display area is smaller than the stop display area. In addition, although we have shown an example in which action 2 at the start of variation is executed when starting the first re-variation (pseudo series) of the first decorative pattern, when starting the second variation (pseudo series) of the first decorative symbol It is not necessary to execute action 2 at the start of fluctuation.

(n) shows the accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the first re-variation (pseudo-run). After executing action 2 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate again, the enlarged first decorative pattern is reduced to the size of the first decorative pattern when it was fixed and stopped, and then , is configured to perform an accelerated variation that performs a downward scroll variation. Note that the accelerated variation is configured to be executed until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative pattern.

(o) shows high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols start their accelerated fluctuations. After starting the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, and for a predetermined period of time ( For example, the high speed variation is configured to be performed after a period of 1 second) has elapsed.

(p) shows the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left column after performing the high-speed fluctuation. After performing a high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative pattern, a deceleration fluctuation is performed to display the first decorative pattern in the left column in a visible state. Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing deceleration fluctuations, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuations.

In (q), the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character in the left column temporarily stops while performing deceleration fluctuation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column temporarily stops. This shows that the fixed position action 2 is executed in the display area (the display area of the fixed position action in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 2 is the first decorative symbol when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped as shown in (a), and the first decorative symbol is higher than the first decorative symbol of action 1 at the start of fluctuation as shown in (b). An example of an action to enlarge the . Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 2, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuations.

(r) means that the first decorative symbol in the left column executes a swinging action after performing the fixed position action 2, and that the first decorative symbol in the right column executes a deceleration fluctuation after performing a high-speed fluctuation. It shows. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform the fixed position action 2, then reduce the size, and then perform the swinging action. Furthermore, the first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to execute a deceleration variation that is displayed in a visible state after executing a high-speed variation. Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing a shaking action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing deceleration fluctuations, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing high-speed fluctuations.

(s) means that the first decorative pattern in the left column is continuously performing the shaking action, and the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character in the right column is performing deceleration fluctuation while Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, execute position action 2 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column temporarily stops (the display area for the position movement in the right column, which is the display area for the position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 2 may be the same as the fixed position action 2 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column, or may be different. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 2, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation. There is.

(t) shows the state after performing the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the right column. After performing the fixed position action 2 for the first decorative pattern in the right column, the first decorative pattern in the right column is displayed in a reduced size. The first decorative patterns in the left and right columns display the same first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character. At this time, the first decorative pattern in the right column may perform a shaking action. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(u) shows tenpai action 1 in a state where the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are the same pattern. In (t), after the first decorative pattern of the same number "1" + chick character is displayed in the left and right columns, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are displayed. It is configured to execute action 1. This tenpai action 1 executes an action that enlarges the image object of the chick character as the first element of the first decorative pattern more than the movement start action and the fixed position action, and also A fixed-position action that executes an action corresponding to the type of decorative pattern (for example, the type of first element + second element, the type of first element, or the type of second element) will be exemplified. In this example, the first element is a chick, so the action is to blow away the shells above and below the chick, but if the first element is a lion, the action is to make the lion roar. It has become. In addition, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns serve as display areas for executing Tenpai Action 1 (display areas for tenpai actions), display areas for fixed stop, and start actions for the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns. The display area of the display area is larger than the display area of the fixed position operation, but when executing Tenpai action 1 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area of the Tenpai action is shown in the left column and the right column. The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop, the display area for the start action, and the display area for the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(v) shows the shaking action 1 executed in the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. This shaking action 1 is performed with the chick character as the first element and the number "1" as the second element of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns after the tenpai action 1 in (u) is executed. The following is an example of an action that reduces the size of the image and then causes it to swing. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation. In addition, after the tenpai action 1 of (u) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach performance is executed, and the shaking action 1 of (v) is executed during this normal reach performance, but the super reach performance It may also be configured to perform a battle reach effect. When configured in this way, the pseudo-reach pattern may be temporarily stopped during the super reach performance or battle reach performance, and the shaking action may be performed during the super reach performance or battle reach performance in the same way as during the normal reach performance. Good too. Here, it is preferable that the shaking action during the super reach performance or the battle reach performance is configured to be different from the shaking action 1 during the normal reach performance. For example, the shaking action during the super reach performance or the battle reach performance has a smaller first decorative pattern compared to the shaking action 1 during the normal reach performance, or the shaking action is performed by erasing the first element and using only the second element. It is preferable that the swing width is small, and the swing motion is slow (one swing period is longer than the normal reach performance).

(w) indicates that the pseudo continuous pattern is performing deceleration fluctuation. With the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column performing the shaking action, the pseudo continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern) covers the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns. It is configured so that the deceleration fluctuates. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(x) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed position action 2. The pseudo-continuous pattern, which is displayed as a decelerated variable at a low speed, temporarily stops at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern executes fixed position action 2 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row temporarily stops (the display area for the fixed position movement in the middle row, which is the display area for the fixed position). do. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is designed so that when the pseudo continuous pattern performs the fixed position action 2, it does not perform a temporary stop or a fixed position action. It is composed of

Next, FIG. 175 is a state following FIGS. 173 and 174, and is an image diagram from (y) fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row to (j2) swinging action 2. First, (y) indicates that the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2. In the state where the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the first decorative pattern of the number "7" + lion character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo continuous pattern "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row temporarily stops (the fixed position of the middle row which is the display area in the fixed position). The position action display area) is configured to execute a fixed position action 2. In this example, after the pseudo-continuous symbol ("NEXT" symbol) in (x) executes the fixed position action 2, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (y) executes the fixed position action 2, We have shown an example in which the pseudo-continuous symbol of (z) is re-varied, but after the pseudo-continuous symbol of (x) (the "NEXT" symbol) executes fixed position action 2, it changes in (1) (y). In a state where the first decorative pattern in the row does not perform fixed position action 2 and the first decorative pattern in the middle row continues to perform variable display (the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped). (z) The pseudo-continuous pattern may be re-varied, or (2) the pseudo-continuous pattern may be changed to one of the temporary stop candidates in the plurality of first decorative symbols that are scrolled and displayed in the middle row of symbols. You may also set it as a temporary stop and perform a fixed position action as the first decorative pattern (for example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → The first decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed in sequence while scrolling in the order of ..., and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, but if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops. , 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → ... The first decorative pattern displayed in the main area is sequentially switched and displayed while scrolling in the order of 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → ..., and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. ). Note that configuring the pseudo-continuous pattern in this way is not limited to the pseudo-continuous pattern in FIG. 173 or the pseudo-continuous pattern in FIG. It is clear that the present invention is applicable to the pseudo-continuous symbols in each embodiment.The display area for the fixed position movement is larger than the display area for the start movement and the display area for the fixed stop. However, when performing the fixed position action 2 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the fixed position action is smaller than the display area for the start action and the display area for the fixed stop. , pseudo-continuous symbols correspond to "special symbols" used in pseudo-continuous variations such as in FIG. 20 as a temporary display mode.

(z) shows the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuation pattern is configured to perform an accelerated variation of scrolling downward when a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) is executed. In addition, after a pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, it can start re-fluctuating (pseudo-continuous) with an action at the start of fluctuation, or a special action (a pseudo-continuous pattern can be executed after the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped). This is an action that suggests that it disappears from the main area, and the pseudo continuous pattern may disappear by performing an erase action (described later), and when configured in this way, the action at the start of the variation of the pseudo continuous pattern is The execution time may be configured to be longer than the erasing action in which the pseudo-continuous symbol turns into mist and disappears without a trace, or the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol, or the display area used in the action may be changed. Execute actions such as increasing the size, increasing the magnification rate, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and intensifying the light emission of color effects, etc. In addition, in this embodiment, after executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol of (z) and executing the action 3 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns of (a2), ( An example is shown in which high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (c2) are performed via accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns of b2). However, when executing the accelerated variation by re-fluctuating the pseudo-continuous pattern of (z), or when executing the action at the start of variation if the pseudo-continuous symbol executes the action at the start of variation, or When the consecutive symbols execute a special action, action 3 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns in (a2), and action 3 in the left, middle, and right columns in (b2). It may be configured to perform high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (c2) without performing accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols (in this case, (n) It is preferable to suddenly perform high-speed fluctuations without performing accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns.

(a2) shows action 3 at the start of variation when the first decorative pattern starts the second variation (pseudo-association). When the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate again, a variation start action 3 is executed. This action 3 at the start of fluctuation enlarges the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns indicated by (y) immediately after the re-fluctuation starts (for example, 0.1 seconds later). Illustrate the action. When the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start to fluctuate, the display area where action 3 is executed (the display area for the start action) is when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. This example shows a display area that is larger than the displayed area (display area for fixed stop), but when executing action 3 at the start of variation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the start action is fixed. The display area is smaller than the stop display area. In addition, although an example was shown in which action 3 at the start of variation is executed when starting the second re-variation (pseudo series) of the first decorative pattern, when starting the second variation (pseudo series) of the first decorative symbol, It is not necessary to execute action 3 at the start of fluctuation.

(b2) shows the accelerated fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column after the first decorative symbols start the first re-variation (pseudo-run). After executing action 3 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate again, the enlarged first decorative pattern is reduced to the size of the first decorative pattern when it was fixed and stopped, and then , is configured to perform an accelerated variation that performs a downward scroll variation. Note that the accelerated variation is configured to be executed until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative pattern.

(c2) shows high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows after the first decorative symbols start their accelerated fluctuations. After starting the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, and for a predetermined period of time ( For example, the fast variation is configured to be performed after a period of 1 second) has elapsed.

(d2) shows the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left column after performing the high-speed fluctuation. After performing a high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative pattern, a deceleration fluctuation is performed to display the first decorative pattern in the left column in a visible state. Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing deceleration fluctuations, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuations.

In (e2), the first decorative pattern of the number "7" + lion character in the left column temporarily stops while performing deceleration fluctuation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column temporarily stops. This shows that the fixed position action 3 is executed in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 3 is the first decorative symbol when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped as shown in (a), and the first decorative symbol is higher than the first decorative symbol of action 1 at the start of fluctuation as shown in (b). An example of an action to enlarge the . Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 3, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuations.

(f2) is to execute a shaking action after the first decorative symbol in the left column has executed fixed position action 3, and to execute a deceleration variation of the first decorative symbol in the right column after executing a high-speed variation. It shows. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform the fixed position action 3, then reduce the size, and then perform the swinging action. Further, the first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to execute a deceleration variation that is displayed in a visible state after executing a high-speed variation. Note that while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing a swinging action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing deceleration fluctuations, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing high-speed fluctuations.

(g2) means that the first decorative pattern in the left column continues to perform the shaking action, and the first decorative pattern of the number "7" + lion character in the right column performs the deceleration fluctuation. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, execute position action 3 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column temporarily stops (the display area for the position movement in the right column, which is the display area for the position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 3 may be the same as the fixed position action 3 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column, or may be different. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 3, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation. There is.

(h2) shows the state after performing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the right column. After performing the fixed position action 3 for the first decorative pattern in the right column, the first decorative pattern in the right column is displayed in a reduced size. The first decorative patterns in the left and right columns display the same first decorative pattern of the number "7" + lion character. At this time, the first decorative pattern in the right column may perform a shaking action. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(i2) shows tenpai action 2 in a state where the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are the same pattern. In (h2), after the first decorative pattern of the same number "7" + lion character is displayed in the left and right columns, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are displayed. It is configured to perform action 2. This Tenpai action 2 exemplifies an action that enlarges the image object of the lion character as the first element of the first decorative pattern more than the movement start action or the fixed position action. In addition, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns serve as the display area for executing Tenpai Action 2 (display area for tenpai action), the display area for the confirmed stop of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, and the start action. The display area is larger than the display area of the fixed position movement, but when executing Tenpai action 2 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area of Tenpai action is shown in the left column and right column. The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop, the display area for the start action, and the display area for the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(j2) shows the shaking action 2 executed in the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. This shaking action 2 is performed with the lion character as the first element and the number "7" as the second element of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns after the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed. The following is an example of an action that reduces the size of the image and then causes it to swing. In addition, after the Tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach performance is executed, and during this normal reach performance, the shaking action 2 of (j2) is executed, and then the normal reach performance It is structured so that it develops into a super reach performance or a battle reach performance. Here, after the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the normal reach performance is executed, and the shaking action 2 of (j2) is executed during this normal reach performance, but the super reach performance and battle It may be configured to perform a reach effect. Further, the normal reach performance may be continued without developing from the normal reach performance to the super reach performance or the battle reach performance. Note that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

Next, FIG. 176 is a state following FIGS. 173, 174, and 175, and is an image diagram from (k2) fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row to (n2) fixed stop. First, (k2) indicates that while the first decorative symbols in the left and right rows are performing swing action 2 in (j2), the first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing fixed position action 3. It shows. When the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are in a state of tension and the shaking action 2 is being executed, the first decorative pattern of the number "7" + lion character in the middle row is decelerating and fluctuating. , and then temporarily stopped. At this timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row temporarily stops (the display area in the fixed position in the middle row) The positional action 3 is configured to be executed in the action display area). Although the display area for the fixed position action is larger than the display area for the start action and the fixed stop display area as an example, when performing the fixed position action 3 to reduce the first decorative pattern, The display area for the fixed position operation is smaller than the display area for the start operation and the display area for the confirmed stop. In addition, here we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes fixed position action 3 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with a super reach effect (or a battle reach effect). If the normal reach effect continues without developing into a super reach effect and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is the first decorative symbol in the middle row without performing fixed position action 3. 7" may be stopped and displayed. With this configuration, when a jackpot occurs in a normal reach performance, the jackpot symbol suddenly stops and is displayed without executing the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the middle row, thereby performing a performance that surprises the player. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, here we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes fixed position action 3 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with a super reach effect (battle reach effect may also be used). The configuration may be such that the fixed position action 3 is not executed. For example, if it is determined whether to perform an action or not depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background), the pattern variation of a super reach effect (battle reach effect may also be used) Because of the reach background, positional actions are not performed. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the background is changed from the super reach background to the normal background, and thereafter, the first decorative symbol is configured to perform a swing variation (swing action). By configuring the game so that the fixed position action is not executed during the super reach performance, the super reach performance can be shown to the player without being disturbed by the fixed position action.

In (l2), the jackpot symbol is displayed after the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops with fixed position action 3 while the first decorative symbol in the left and right rows is performing shaking action 2 along with the reach effect. This indicates that a decision action is to be executed in the first decorative patterns of the left column, middle column, and right column. This decisive action erases the card-shaped image object as the first element of the first decorative pattern and executes an action that enlarges the lion character as the first element. , the first decorative pattern is configured to momentarily emit light. In addition, although we have shown an example in which the decision action is configured differently from the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, and the shaking action, it is the same as the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, and the shaking action. It may be. In addition, each of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is used as a display area for executing a determined action (determined action display area), a display area for a determined stop, a display area for a start action, and a display area for a fixed position action. The display area is larger than the display area of the shaking motion, but when executing a decisive action that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area of the decisive motion is the display area of the fixed stop, and the display area at the start The display area is smaller than the motion display area, the fixed position motion display area, and the shaking motion display area. In addition, although an example was shown in which the deciding action is executed on the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (l2) after the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row is executed in (k2), When displaying the jackpot symbol with a super reach effect (battle reach effect may also be used), after executing fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row (k2), end the super reach effect and leave the left A shaking action may be performed on the first decorative symbols in the row, middle row, and right row, and then a determining action may be performed on the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (l2). In addition, when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with a super reach effect (battle reach effect may also be used), the super reach effect is performed without executing fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row (k2). (switch from the super reach effect display screen to the normal background display screen), execute the shaking action of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns, and then (l2) left column, A deciding action may be performed on the first decorative symbols in the middle row and the right row.

(m2) indicates that a swing fluctuation (swing action) is executed in a state where the jackpot symbol is displayed after the deciding action. The shaking fluctuation (swaying action) is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) until the timing of the confirmed stop. And (n2) shows a state where the jackpot symbol is fixed and stopped. The fixed stop is configured to firmly stop the first decorative pattern for a period of time indicated by the variable fixed time.

Also, as explained in FIG. 173(i) to FIG. 174(m), the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character is temporarily stopped in the left column, and the number "7" is in the right column. After the first decorative pattern of the number + lion character has temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern (the "NEXT" pattern) is displayed in a low-speed fluctuating manner, and then temporarily stops at approximately the center of the LCD screen, and the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. , when the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", when the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" changes again. Although the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are configured to execute the action at the start of variation, they may be configured not to execute the action at the start of variation. In this case, when the pseudo continuous symbol "NEXT" starts to fluctuate again, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are already configured to perform high-speed fluctuation. With this configuration, only the first action at the start of the variation (action 1 at the start of variation in FIG. 173) can be emphasized in the pseudo-continuous pattern variation where the timing of the re-variation is difficult to understand. It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific pattern variation. In addition, we showed an example in which the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", but behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" The first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character in the middle row may be a pseudo series shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 in which the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped.

Also, as explained in FIG. 173(i) to FIG. 174(m), the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character is temporarily stopped in the left column, and the number "7" is in the right column. After the first decorative pattern of the number + lion character has temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern (the "NEXT" pattern) is displayed in a low-speed fluctuating manner, and then temporarily stops at approximately the center of the LCD screen, and the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. In the case where the number "1" + the first decorative pattern of the chick character temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", after the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" changes again. , the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column execute an action at the start of fluctuation. In this case, after the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" starts to fluctuate again, and after the pseudo-continuous pattern changes rapidly and becomes non-transparent, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns executes action 2 at the start of fluctuation. By configuring this way, regarding the pattern fluctuation of the pseudo series, the probability of winning is changed depending on the number of times the action at the start of the variation is executed (the number of executions of the pseudo series is 3 times is better than 2 times). (high expectation of success). In addition, we showed an example in which the first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", but behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" The first decorative pattern of the number "1" + chick character in the middle row may be a pseudo series shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 in which the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped. In this case, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed with the two first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, or the three symbols (2 The action at the start of variation may be executed with two first decorative symbols and one special symbol, or the action at the start of variation may be executed with only the pseudo-continuous symbol.

In addition, in the case of a pseudo-continuous variation using a pseudo-continuous pattern, if the first decorative symbol executes a re-variation (pseudo-continuous after reaching) after a reach state is formed in which the first decorative symbol is in a ten-pai state. Motion pattern related to a predetermined motion {swinging action of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns shown by (w) from (q) Fixed position action 2 through (u) Tenpai action 1 in FIG. 174} 173 (FIG. 173) f) The shaking actions of the first decorative symbols in the left column and the right column shown in (i) from the fixed position action 1 are configured to be different. Here, the motion pattern related to a predetermined motion may be the number of types and/or a combination of predetermined motions. The number of predetermined motion types is three types: fixed position action, tenpai action, and swinging action when performing a pseudo-sequence after reach, and a fixed-position action when performing a non-reach pseudo-sequence. There are two types of shaking actions shown in (i), and the predetermined one is when the first decorative symbol performs re-variation (pseudo-run after reaching) after the reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the tenpai state is formed. Types of actions (3 types) and predetermined actions when the first decorative pattern performs re-variation (non-reach pseudo-run) after a non-reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in a non-tenpai state is formed. It is configured so that the types (two types) are different. In addition, the combination of predetermined actions is a combination of a fixed position action, a tenpai action, and a swinging action when performing a pseudo-sequence after reach, and a combination of a fixed-position action, a tenpai action, and a shaking action when performing a non-reach pseudo-sequence. This is a combination of shaking actions shown in (i), and is a predetermined operation when the first decorative symbol performs re-variation (pseudo-run after reaching) after a reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in a tenpai state is formed. (combination of fixed position action, tenpai action, swinging action), and after a non-reach state where the first decorative symbol is in a non-tenpai state is formed, the first decorative symbol changes again (non-reach pseudo-connection). The combination of predetermined actions (combination of fixed position action and swinging action) when executed is configured to be different. By configuring in this way, when a popular performance in recent years such as a pseudo-continuation performance is performed, the first decoration is By varying the chronological content of the actions of the symbols, the flow of the conventional uniform pseudo-run presentation can be diversified by visually varying the form of the first decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 177 shows (a3) corresponding to symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbols in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time reduction gaming state. The display from the state in which the first decorative symbol that changed the symbol is fixed and stopped as a losing symbol to (f3) the second shaking action, and the display from (a4) jackpot end demonstration to (f4) the second shaking action. It is an image diagram regarding.

In (a3), in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol on the performance display device SG are fixed and stopped at "711" which is a losing symbol. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative pattern is only "numbers". Then, neither the first hold display on the first main game side nor the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed. In addition, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", that is, from (a3) onwards, the first decorative pattern is The game is fixed and stopped, and is in a variable standby state in which neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held on hold. In addition, as (a3), the timing when the first decorative symbol is determined to be a losing symbol and stops (if there is a variable fixed time, the timing after the variable fixed time has elapsed) is shown as an example, but the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end timing) At the end of the demo (immediately after the end of the jackpot, immediately after the start of the time-reduced gaming state), in a situation where there is no hold on the first main game side or on the second main game side after the end of the jackpot, "777" is the jackpot symbol. It may be the timing when etc. are displayed. In addition, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side has been held is present. It may be the timing when a losing symbol is fixed and stopped, or it may be the timing when the second main game symbol changes in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the time reduction game state. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed correspondingly is fixed and stopped as a losing symbol, or there is no hold on the first main game side or hold on the second main game side in the time reduction game state. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the situation is fixed and stopped as a losing symbol.

(b3) is a fluctuation standby state in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the first decorative symbol is a losing symbol and the fixed stop is confirmed (if there is a fluctuation fixed time, after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed). When the time elapses, a volume adjustment screen display and a light amount adjustment screen display are executed. The volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are as explained in FIG. 127, and in FIG. 177, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed simultaneously, and the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are The difference is that the display is erased. In addition, if it is in the fluctuation standby state, the volume adjustment screen display and light intensity adjustment screen display will be executed again on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment settings are completed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display are performed by the player at a timing earlier than the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state in (d3) of FIG. 177 and the waiting movie in (e3) of FIG. 177. Automatically without the need to operate the cross button SB-2 (in the fluctuation standby state, the first decorative symbol is a losing symbol and the fixed stop occurs (if there is a fluctuation fixed time, after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed)) } after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

In (c3), the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display are executed in the fluctuation standby state, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without any operation after the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display were executed. Then, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are configured to disappear. Note that the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display may continue until the standby movie is displayed, and the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display may be erased once the standby movie is displayed. good. In addition, if the change standby state occurs after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without any operation after the volume adjustment screen display or light intensity adjustment screen display was executed, the volume will not change until a new change starts. The adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be continued, and when a new change is started, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be deleted.

(d3) is a fluctuation standby state in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed after the first decorative symbol is a losing symbol and the fixed stop is made (if there is a fluctuation fixed time, after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed). When the elapsed time has elapsed, the first shaking action (second shaking action) during the fluctuation standby state is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). The first shaking action during this fluctuation standby state is an example of an action in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is shaken. In addition, the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is an example in which only the first element of the first decorative pattern is shaken, but if it is an action different from shaking action 1 or shaking action 2, it may be It can also be an action. In addition, in the fluctuation standby state, a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) must elapse after the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is confirmed to stop (if there is a fluctuation fixed time, after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed). The first shaking action was performed during the fluctuation standby state on the condition that a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed after the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment settings were completed in the fluctuation standby state. It may be configured such that the first shaking action is executed during the fluctuation standby state. In addition, when doing this, the first decorative symbol is a losing symbol and is confirmed to stop (if there is a variable fixed time, after the fixed variable time has elapsed), then a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds, or a variable standby state). When 20 seconds (the same time as the first shaking action starts) have elapsed, the number as the second element may be deleted and only the character as the first element may be displayed. By doing so, the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is performed with only the character displayed. Note that the first shaking action during this fluctuation standby state may be performed before displaying the volume adjustment screen and displaying the light amount adjustment screen in (n), but no matter which timing the shaking action is started, this Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment can be set even while the shaking action is being executed, and even if the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is set, the shaking action does not end and continues. Further, the first shaking action in the fluctuation standby state is an action that can be started at a timing earlier than the waiting movie (e3) in FIG. 177.

(e3) is a fluctuation standby state in which a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the first decorative symbol is a losing symbol and the fixed stop is made (if there is a fluctuation fixed time, after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed). When the time elapses, the waiting movie is executed. As shown in FIG. 177, this waiting movie is executed after the first shaking action during the fluctuation waiting state, and includes a part of the reach effect. , the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character (such as "1") information such as the number "7" or alphabets such as "super") is displayed, and the process is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed. If a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (cross button SB-2 operation) is performed while the standby movie is displayed, the display of the standby movie will end and the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen will be displayed. Display. Also, at the timing of executing the standby movie in (e3), a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed, and in this case, an image object that is "saving power" and has a higher display priority than the standby movie is on standby. It is preferable to display it overlapping the middle movie. If a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed while this power saving display is being executed, the power saving display is ended and only the standby movie is displayed. If a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed again (operation of cross button SB-2), the display of the standby movie will end and the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen will be displayed. It is configured. In other words, while the power saving display is running, the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen will not be displayed unless button operations related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (cross button SB-2 operation) are performed twice. . Note that the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie The size relationship is as follows: 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display on the 1st main game side = 2nd pending display on the 2nd main game side > Information display related to the character as the 1st element included in the waiting movie. By configuring it so that it is easier to visually recognize that the second decorative symbol is stopped at a losing symbol and that the number of reservations is 0 than the information display related to the character as the first element, the information related to the game is Symbols related to the game and pending display (numbers) can be displayed more emphatically to the player than information about waiting movies that are not played.

The waiting movie in (e3) of FIG. 177 includes a second decorative symbol, a second holding display on the first main game side, a second holding display on the second main game side, and a first holding movie included in the waiting movie. We have given an example of displaying a character as an element and information related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.), but it is displayed as follows. Good too.
(1) In the waiting movie that moves with the first decorative pattern determined to be a lost pattern and stopped, the second decorative pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and information related to the character ( information such as numbers "1" and "7" and alphabets such as "super") are displayed, and the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie that moves with the first decorative symbol fixed and stopped as a losing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie A character as the first element included and information related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed.
(3) In a standby movie that moves with the first decorative pattern fixed and stopped as a losing pattern, the character as the first element included in the standby movie and information related to that character ("1" or "7") are displayed. '', alphabetical information such as ``super'', etc.) are displayed, and the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed.

(f3) is a fluctuation standby state, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixed (after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed if there is a fluctuation fixed time). When the time has elapsed, the second shaking action (second shaking action) during the fluctuation standby state.The second shaking action during the fluctuation waiting state is the second shaking action that is executed after the display of the waiting movie ends. The shaking motion (also referred to as the third shaking motion) is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). The second shaking action during this fluctuation standby state is an example of an action in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is shaken. Note that the second shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is an example in which only the first element of the first decorative pattern is shaken, similar to the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state. Any action may be used as long as it is different from action 2. Note that the second shaking action during the fluctuation standby state may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment settings are completed. . Note that the second shaking action during this fluctuation standby state may be started immediately after the waiting movie ends. In addition, the second shaking action during this fluctuation standby state is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action continues until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. You can. In this case, (a3) → (b3) → (c3) → (d3) → (e3) first waiting movie → (f3) second shaking action → second waiting movie → third It may be configured such that the shaking action → the waiting movie is looped so that the shaking action... In addition, as mentioned above, after the first decorative symbol is determined to be a losing symbol and stops (if there is a variable fixed time, after the fixed variable time has elapsed), a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds, or while in the variable standby state) (20 seconds, the same time as the first shaking action starts), the number as the second element is deleted and only the character as the first element is displayed. When starting the second shaking action immediately after the end of the movie, the first decorative pattern of only the first element may be displayed immediately after the end of the second waiting movie. Immediately after the end of , the display mode may be returned to the display mode of the first decorative pattern consisting of the first element and the second element. Further, the standby movie and the shaking action in the variable standby state may be executed simultaneously. In this case, by setting the display priority of the waiting movie higher than the shaking action in the floating standby state and configuring the waiting movie to be transparent, the shaking action in the floating waiting state can be seen behind the waiting movie. It is configured so that. Note that if the standby movie is not transparent, only the standby movie can be viewed, but behind the scenes, it is configured to perform a shaking action in a fluctuating standby state.

(a4) is the jackpot end timing (or jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot ends, immediately after the start of the time reduction gaming state), and the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side after the jackpot ends. It shows the timing at which "777" or the like is displayed as a jackpot symbol in a time reduction game state where this does not exist. In addition, in the time reduction game state, both the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are only "numbers". However, "numbers + characters" may be used only for a specific type of first decorative pattern (for example, "numbers + characters" may be used only for 7 and 3 patterns, and only "numbers" for other first decorative patterns) ). Then, neither the first pending display on the first main game side nor the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. In addition, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", that is, from (a4) onwards, the first decorative pattern is The game is fixed and stopped, and is in a variable standby state in which neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held on hold. Note that (a4) is configured such that both the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are only "numbers" in the time reduction game state, but (a4) is The present invention is applicable even when the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are configured to be only "numbers". Further, in this way, a third element may be added to the display mode of the first decorative pattern such as "numbers" only or "numbers + characters". For example, in the case of only "numbers", it may be set as "numbers + effects", and in the case of "numbers + characters", it may be set as "numbers + characters + effects".

Although not shown, (b4) is a variable standby state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot ends, or immediately after the time reduction gaming state starts). After , the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display are executed. Although not shown, "711" in the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern in the losing pattern display in (b3) become "777" in the first and second decorative pattern in the jackpot pattern display. There is a difference.

(c4) is omitted from illustration, but in the fluctuation standby state, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed, and after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed, there is no operation for a predetermined period of time (e.g. , 10 seconds), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are configured to disappear. Although not shown, "711" in the first and second decorative symbols in the losing symbol display in (c3) become "777" in the first and second decorative symbols in the jackpot symbol display. There is a difference.

Although not shown, (d4) is a variable standby state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) from the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the end of the jackpot, or immediately after the start of the time reduction gaming state). When , the first shaking action (second shaking action) during the fluctuation standby state is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). Although not shown in the figure, "711" in the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern in the losing pattern display in (d3) becomes "777" in the first and second decorative pattern in the jackpot pattern display. There is a difference. In addition, the first swinging action during the fluctuation standby state is configured such that the swinging action is executed in the fluctuation standby state in the non-time reduction gaming state, but the swinging action is not executed in the fluctuation waiting state in the time reduction gaming state. You may.

(e4) is after the end of the special game (jackpot game), is in a variable standby state, and the jackpot end timing (or jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the end of the jackpot, immediately after the start of the time reduction game state) has ended. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed, the waiting movie is executed. The waiting movie includes a part of the reach effect, and furthermore, the waiting movie includes a second decorative pattern, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side. Display, display of the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and information related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.), number of executions of special games Display of consecutive games (for example, ``3 consecutive games''), display of the number of profits earned in special games (for example, ``GET 7200''), and display of the number of possible executions of the time-saving game state (for example, ``100 remaining''). is displayed and executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed. If a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (cross button SB-2 operation) is performed while the standby movie is displayed, the display of the standby movie will end and the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen will be displayed. Display. In addition, a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed at the timing when the standby movie is executed. In this case, the "power saving" image object, which has a higher display priority than the standby movie, is added to the standby movie. It is preferable to display them in an overlapping manner. If a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed while this power saving display is being executed, the power saving display is ended and only the standby movie is displayed. If a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed again (operation of cross button SB-2), the display of the standby movie will end and the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen will be displayed. It is configured. In other words, while the power saving display is running, the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen will not be displayed unless button operations related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (cross button SB-2 operation) are performed twice. . In addition, the second decorative pattern, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the information display and connection related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie. The relationship between the number of executions display, the number of profits display, and the number of possible executions display is as follows: Number of executions display > Consecutive winnings display > Number of profits display > 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display on the first main game side = 2nd main game 2nd pending display on the side > Information related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie is displayed, and the 2nd decorative pattern is stopped in a losing pattern and the pending number is 0. By configuring it so that it is easier to see than the information display related to the character as the first element, the symbols and pending display (numbers) related to the game are more visible than the information on the waiting movie that is not related to the game. It can be displayed in an emphasized manner to the users.

The waiting movie in (e4) of FIG. 177 includes a second decorative symbol, a second holding display on the first main game side, a second holding display on the second main game side, and a first holding movie included in the waiting movie. Display of characters as elements and information related to the characters (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.), consecutive game display that is the number of times special games are executed (for example, "3 consecutive games") We have given examples of displaying the number of profits earned in special games (for example, ``GET 7200''), and the number of possible executions of the time-saving game state (for example, ``100 remaining''). It may be displayed as
(1) In the waiting movie that moves with the first decorative pattern determined to be a lost pattern and stopped, the second decorative pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and information related to the character ( numbers such as "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.), consecutive game display that is the number of special games played (for example, "3 consecutive games"), and display of the number of profits earned in special games ( For example, "GET7200)", a display of the possible number of executions of the time reduction gaming state (for example, "100 remaining") are displayed, a second pending display on the first main game side, and a second pending display on the second main game side. is not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie that moves with the first decorative symbol fixed and stopped as a losing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie Characters as the first element included and information related to the characters (numbers "1" and "7", information on alphabets such as "super", etc.), consecutive games display that is the number of times special games have been executed (e.g. , "3 consecutive games"), the number of profits earned in special games (e.g. "GET7200"), the number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (e.g. "100 times remaining") are displayed, and the second decorative pattern is displayed. is not displayed.
(3) In a standby movie that moves with the first decorative pattern fixed and stopped as a losing pattern, the character as the first element included in the standby movie and information related to that character ("1" or "7") are displayed. ”, alphabetical information such as “super”), consecutive game display that is the number of special games played (for example, “3 consecutive games”), and display of the number of profits earned in special games (for example, “GET7200”). , a display of the possible number of executions of the time reduction game state (for example, "100 remaining") is displayed, and a second decorative symbol, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. is not displayed.
(4) In the waiting movie that moves with the first decorative pattern determined to be a lost symbol and stopped, the second decorative pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and information related to the character ( (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the execution of a special game. Display of the number of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of the number of profits earned in special games (for example, "GET 7200)", display of the possible number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 remaining") is not displayed.
(5) In the waiting movie that moves with the first decorative symbol fixed and stopped as a losing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie A character as the first element included and information related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and a second decorative pattern and special game execution are displayed. Display of the number of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of the number of profits earned in special games (for example, "GET 7200)", display of the possible number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 remaining") is not displayed.
(6) In a standby movie that moves with the first decorative pattern fixed and stopped as a losing pattern, a character as the first element included in the standby movie and information related to that character (such as "1" or "7") are displayed. '' numbers, alphabetical information such as ``super'', etc.) are displayed, along with a second decorative pattern, a second hold display on the first main game side, a second hold display on the second main game side, and the number of executions of the special game. Display of consecutive games (for example, ``3 consecutive games''), display of the number of profits earned in special games (for example, ``GET 7200''), and display of the number of possible executions of the time-saving game state (for example, ``100 remaining'') Do not show.
Note that in the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 177 (situations in which the waiting movie is not displayed), a right-hand hitting instruction display is displayed, although not shown, and (e4) In the situation (the situation where a waiting movie is displayed), the right-hand hitting instruction display may be configured not to be displayed (switched to non-display). In this configuration, even if (e4) in FIG. 177 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-hand hitting instruction display is not displayed (switched to non-display). Good too. In addition, in the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 177 (situations in which the waiting movie is not displayed), a right-hand hitting instruction display is displayed, although not shown, and (e4) The right-hand hitting instruction display may be displayed (continuously displayed) even in this situation (a situation where a waiting movie is being displayed). In this configuration, even if (e4) in FIG. 177 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-handed hitting instruction display is displayed (continuously displayed). It's okay.

(f4) in FIG. 177 is a variable standby state, and when a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed from the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot ends, or immediately after the start of the time reduction gaming state). , the second shaking action (second shaking action) during the fluctuation standby state.The second shaking action during the fluctuation waiting state is the second shaking action that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished. However, this may also be referred to as the third shaking motion) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). The second shaking action during this fluctuation standby state is an example of an action in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is shaken. Note that the second shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is an example in which only the first element of the first decorative pattern is shaken, similar to the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state. Any action may be used as long as it is different from action 2. Note that the second shaking action during the fluctuation standby state may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment settings are completed. . In addition, the second shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is configured so that the shaking action is executed in the fluctuation waiting state in the non-time reduction gaming state, but not in the fluctuation waiting state in the time reduction gaming state. You may.

The second shaking action during the fluctuation standby state shown in (f4) of FIG. 177 may start immediately after the waiting movie ends. In addition, the second shaking action during this fluctuation standby state is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action continues until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. You can. In this case, (a4) → (b4) → (c4) → (d4) → (e4) first waiting movie → (f4) second shaking action → second waiting movie → third It may be configured such that the shaking action → the waiting movie is looped so that the shaking action... In addition, when starting the second shaking action immediately after the end of the waiting movie, and the first decorative pattern that executes the shaking action, the number as the second element is deleted and the character as the first element If only the first element is displayed, only the first element may be displayed immediately after the second waiting movie ends. Further, the standby movie and the shaking action in the variable standby state may be executed simultaneously. In this case, by setting the display priority of the waiting movie higher than the shaking action in the floating standby state and configuring the waiting movie to be transparent, the shaking action in the floating waiting state can be seen behind the waiting movie. It is configured so that. In addition, if the standby movie is not transparent, only the standby movie can be seen, but behind the scenes, it is configured to perform a shaking action in a fluctuating standby state.

Next, FIG. 178 shows the overlapping relationship between the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle row in the normal symbol fluctuations and reach fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state. FIG. First, in normal symbol variation, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are connected to the first decorative symbol in the middle row at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of variation, at the time of swing variation) and the first overlapping area. However, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are configured so as not to overlap each other. In addition, in a specific symbol variation (e.g., reach variation), the first decorative symbols in the left and right rows are moved at predetermined timings (e.g., at the start of variation, at the time of variation in the middle row of symbols in the reach, at the time of a decisive action. , at the time of swing fluctuation), the first decorative patterns in the middle row overlap in the second overlapping region, but the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows are configured not to overlap with each other. Here, as shown in the figure, a specific symbol variation (for example, a reach variation) is more effective than a normal symbol variation in the area where the first decorative symbol in the left and right rows overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle row. Overlapping ratio (=overlapping area where the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern in the middle row overlap/the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern in the middle row) The decorative pattern display area) is configured to be large (first overlapping area<second overlapping area). In addition, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), the first decorative symbol in the left and right rows overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle row more often than in a normal symbol variation. Here, as shown in the figure, the second overlapping area in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to differ depending on the type of predetermined timing, such as at the start of variation (at the time of action at the start of variation) The overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger than when the symbol feed in the middle row of the reach changes, and the overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) during decisive action or swing fluctuation is higher than at the start of fluctuation (at the time of action at the start of fluctuation). or overlapping area) is large. In addition, at a predetermined timing, an action (for example, a fluctuation start action, a shaking action, a tenpai action, a deciding action) occurs, and the card type of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is generated. The first elements of the image objects (which may be character-type image objects) overlap each other, but the second elements of the number image objects do not overlap. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this way, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap adjacent characters in order to create a sense of dynamism, while the jackpot mode is determined to determine which number will stop. By configuring the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not the winning result will be a jackpot, the movement of the first decorative pattern itself can be diversified by configuring it so that it does not overlap. It is possible to avoid deviating from the role of informing the user of failures. However, in a situation where the first decorative pattern consisting of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, during a fluctuation start action, during a tenpai action, during a shaking action, etc.), the first decorative pattern is displayed as described above. It is appropriate to configure the elements so that they overlap and the second elements do not overlap, but for example, during a super reach effect or a battle reach effect, the first decorative pattern consisting of the second element without the first element is In the displayed situation, you may set a timing in which the second elements overlap (for example, the timing before returning to the normal background and performing a decisive action, or the timing when "777" is displayed during the super reach effect). display timing, etc.). In addition, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first elements overlap each other and the second elements do not overlap, but this is not limited to this, and the first elements also overlap. However, the second elements may also be configured to overlap, and in such a case, the overlap ratio between the first elements (=the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decoration in the middle row) Overlapping area where the first element of the pattern overlaps/display area of the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row) and the display area between the second elements Overlapping ratio (=overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns overlaps with the second element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row/overlapping area of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns) The display area of the second element and the display area of the second element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row may be made different, and in particular, the overlap ratio between the first elements may be made larger than the overlap ratio between the second elements. suitable. Note that this is not limited to the normal symbol fluctuations and reach fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state, and includes the non-reach effects, normal reach effects, super reach effects, and battle reach effects shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. It may also be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half. In addition, in a time-reduction game state or a specific performance mode, unlike a non-time-reduction game state or a predetermined performance mode other than a specific performance mode, the constituent elements of the first decorative pattern are used during a super reach performance or a battle reach performance. The second element may be used without the first element, and when configured in this way, in a time-reduced game state or a specific performance mode, the predetermined timing (at the time of fluctuation start action, at the time of swing action, at the time of tenpai action) (at the time of a decision action, etc.), the second elements may overlap with each other. In addition, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first half and second half of a losing super reach performance or a battle reach performance, the trigger of the look-ahead performance may be suspended as the variation mode groups of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. That is clear.

In FIG. 178, in a situation where the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are at full strength when feeding the symbols in the middle row during reach variation, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are higher than the first decorative symbols in the middle row. Although the display priority is higher than the decorative symbols, the first decorative symbols in the middle row may have a higher display priority than the first decorative symbols in the right and left columns. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay close attention to whether or not the first decorative symbols in the middle row form a jackpot symbol combination (or not). In addition, FIG. 178 shows that in the reach variation, when the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are in ten-pai state, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns expand, and then the first decorative symbols in the middle row expand in the left and right columns. This is an example in which the scroll changes in a size smaller than the first decorative pattern in the row, but in addition to this example, the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns does not expand or shrinks when tenpai is applied, and then the first decorative pattern in the middle row The first decorative pattern may be enlarged and scroll-displayed in a larger size than the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns while overlapping with the first elements of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. In that case, it is preferable to give the first decorative pattern in the middle row a higher display priority than the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns so that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is watched. The display priority of the first decorative pattern in the row may be higher than that of the first decorative pattern in the middle row. When configured in this way, it is preferable that the first decorative pattern does not scale or is difficult to scale during normal symbol fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations) compared to reach fluctuations. In addition, in normal symbol fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations), the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are connected to the first decorative symbols in the middle row at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of swing fluctuation). The configuration may be such that there is no overlap in the overlapping area.

In addition, in normal symbol fluctuation, the first decorative symbol in the left and right rows overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle row by a predetermined action (for example, action at the start of fluctuation, shaking action, etc.) In a specific symbol variation (e.g., reach variation), the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns perform a predetermined action (e.g., variation start action, shaking action, deciding action) than the first time when they overlap in the area. etc.), the second time that overlaps with the first decorative pattern in the middle row in the second overlapping area is configured to be longer (first time < second time). In this way, in a reach variation where the expectation of a jackpot is high, by making the time during which the first decorative symbols in the left and right rows overlap with the first decorative symbols in the middle row longer than in normal symbol variations, the first decorative symbol It is possible to make the player pay close attention to each action while diversifying the movements of the symbols themselves.

In addition, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), for the first decorative symbol in the left column, a predetermined action (for example, variation start action, tenpai action, swinging action, deciding action, etc.) is performed on the right column. It may overlap with the first decorative pattern. In this case, in normal symbol variation, the first decorative symbol in the left column is linked to the first decorative symbol in the right column by a predetermined action (for example, variation start action, tenpai action, shaking action, deciding action, etc.). , are configured to overlap (overlap) in the third overlapping area, and in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), the first decorative symbol in the left column is configured to overlap (overlap) in the third overlapping area. (Time action, Tenpai action, Shake action, Decisive action, etc.) is configured to overlap with the first decorative pattern in the right row in the fourth overlapping area. A specific symbol variation (for example, a reach variation) is more important than a normal symbol variation due to the overlap ratio (=the ratio of the area where the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the right column). The overlapping area where the first decorative pattern and the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap/the display area of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column) is large (the third overlapping area < the first decorative pattern). 4 overlapping areas). Further, in a specific symbol variation (for example, a reach variation), the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the right column more often than in a normal symbol variation. Here, the fourth overlapping area in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to differ depending on a predetermined action, and the action at the start of variation is better than the one at the time of symbol advance variation in the middle row of reach. The overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger than that during the swinging action, and the overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger during the deciding action, swinging action, etc. than during the fluctuation start action. However, in situations where the first decorative pattern consisting of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, during a fluctuation start action, during a tenpai action, during a shaking action, etc.), the first decorative pattern in the left column The first element of the decorative pattern and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap, and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the right column do not overlap. However, for example, in a situation where a first decorative pattern consisting of a second element without a first element is displayed during a super reach effect or a battle reach effect, the second elements may You may also provide an action that overlaps (for example, a decision action, etc.). In addition, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first elements overlap each other and the second elements do not overlap, but this is not limited to this, and the first elements also overlap. However, the second elements may also be configured to overlap, and in such a case, the overlap ratio between the first elements (=the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column) Overlapping area where one element overlaps / display area of the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column) and the overlap ratio between the second elements (= left column Overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative pattern in the right column overlaps with the second element of the first decorative pattern in the right column/The second element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap It is preferable to make the display areas of the second elements different from each other, and in particular, it is preferable that the overlap ratio between the first elements is larger than the overlap ratio between the second elements. Note that this is not limited to the normal symbol fluctuations and reach fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state, and includes the non-reach effects, normal reach effects, super reach effects, and battle reach effects shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. It may also be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half. In addition, in a time-reduction game state or a specific performance mode, unlike a non-time-reduction game state or a predetermined performance mode other than a specific performance mode, the constituent elements of the first decorative pattern are used during a super reach performance or a battle reach performance. The second element may be used without the first element, and if configured in this way, in a time-reduced game state or in a specific performance mode, a predetermined action (fluctuating start action, shaking action, tenpai action, deciding action) may be used. actions, etc.), the second elements may overlap. In addition, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first half and second half of a losing super reach performance or a battle reach performance, the trigger of the look-ahead performance may be suspended as the variation mode groups of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. That is clear. In addition, a specific symbol variation (for example, a reach variation) is more important than a normal symbol variation, and more than the time when the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column overlap in the third overlapping area. In the fourth overlapping area, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap each other for a longer period of time. Note that the first elements of the card-type image objects (or character-type image objects may also be used) of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap, but the second element of the number image object overlaps. It is preferable that they are configured so that they do not overlap. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this way, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap adjacent characters in order to create a sense of dynamism, while the jackpot mode is determined to determine which number will stop. By configuring the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not the winning result will be a jackpot, the movement of the first decorative pattern itself can be diversified by configuring it so that it does not overlap. It is possible to avoid deviating from the role of informing whether there is a loss or not. In addition, in reach variations where the expectation of a jackpot is high, the time during which the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the right column is made longer than in normal symbol variations, making the player pay close attention to each action. can be done. In addition, in FIG. 178, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns overlap with the first decorative symbols in the middle row at the start of fluctuation, at the time of swing fluctuation, at the time of fluctuation of the middle row symbol feed of reach, and at the time of decisive action. Although the example is shown, at timings other than these (including the timing of confirmed stop), the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns may overlap with the first decorative symbols in the middle row (for example, when the fixed stop occurs). (duplication in stopped state), and does not need to be duplicated.

In addition, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state, a predetermined timing when a reach state is formed (for example, FIG. 168, FIG. 173 to FIG. 176, FIG. 178 As shown in , tenpai action 2 is performed using the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, and then the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are in a state of swinging and fluctuating while being tenpai ( At the timing when the first decorative symbol in the middle row is enlarged and displayed fluctuating downward (at the time when the symbol feed in the middle row of the reach is fluctuating in Fig. 178), the predetermined performance that continues to be fluctuated is The first element of the card-shaped image object (a character-shaped image object may also be used) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern row (for example, the middle row) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action 2 is executed. The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may also be a character-type image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the presentation pattern row other than the predetermined presentation pattern row (for example, left column, right column) They are configured to overlap (overlap) in a second overlapping area. In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation in which a non-reach state is formed on the first main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state, a predetermined timing when a non-reach state is formed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 178) , in the state where the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped and displayed and the shaking action is being performed, then the first decorative symbols in the middle row as shown in FIG. 179(d) At the timing of temporarily stopping and displaying with the execution of fixed position action 3), the first symbol corresponding to a predetermined production symbol row (for example, the middle row) that is temporarily stopped and displayed and performing fixed position action 3 The first element of a card-type image object (a character-type image object may also be used) as a decorative pattern, and other than the predetermined production pattern row that is temporarily stopped and displayed and is performing a shaking action (for example, the left column, The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may also be a character-shaped image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the production pattern row of the right column) overlaps (overlaps) in the first overlapping area. has been done. Then, at a predetermined timing when a reach state is formed in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the middle row that continues to display the variation, and The second overlapping area where the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left column and the right column that are stopped and displayed and are performing shaking action 2 overlaps (overlaps) is more likely to be At a predetermined timing when a ready-to-reach state is formed, the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that temporarily displays a stop and performs a fixed position action 3, and the first element of the first decorative pattern that temporarily displays a stop and performs a shaking action. Constructed larger than the first overlapping area where the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left column and right column being executed overlaps (overlaps) (second overlapping area>first overlapping area) has been done. In other words, a specific symbol variation (for example, a reach variation) has a larger ratio (overlap ratio) of the area where the first elements of the first decorative symbol overlap than a normal symbol variation (second overlap variation). area>first overlapping area). Note that, at a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows and the first decorative patterns in the middle row overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap with each other. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this way, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap adjacent characters in order to create a sense of dynamism, while the jackpot mode is determined to determine which number will stop. By configuring the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not the winning result will be a jackpot, the movement of the first decorative pattern itself can be diversified by configuring it so that it does not overlap. It is possible to avoid deviating from the role of informing the user of failures. Note that this is not limited to the normal symbol fluctuations and reach fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state, and includes the non-reach effects, normal reach effects, super reach effects, and battle reach effects shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. It may also be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half. In addition, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first half and second half of a losing super reach performance or a battle reach performance, the trigger of the look-ahead performance may be suspended as the variation mode groups of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. That is clear.

In addition, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state, a predetermined timing when a reach state is formed (for example, FIG. 168, FIG. 173 to FIG. 176, FIG. 178 As shown in , tenpai action 2 is performed using the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, and then, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are swaying and fluctuating while making tenpai. , the timing when the first decorative pattern in the middle row is enlarged and displayed in a downwardly variable manner), the first decoration corresponding to a predetermined performance pattern row (for example, the middle row) that continues to be displayed in a variable manner Other than the first element of the card-shaped image object (which may also be a character-shaped image object) and the predetermined presentation pattern row that is temporarily stopped and displayed and is performing the shaking action 2 (for example, the left column, The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may also be a character-shaped image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the production pattern row of the right column) overlaps (overlaps) for a fifth time in the second overlapping area. ). In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation in which a non-reach state is formed on the first main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state, a predetermined timing when a non-reach state is formed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 178) , in the state where the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped and displayed and the shaking action is being performed, then the first decorative symbols in the middle row as shown in FIG. 179(d) At the timing of temporarily stopping and displaying with the execution of fixed position action 3), the first symbol corresponding to a predetermined production symbol row (for example, the middle row) that is temporarily stopped and displayed and performing fixed position action 3 The first element of a card-type image object (a character-type image object may also be used) as a decorative pattern, and other than the predetermined production pattern row that is temporarily stopped and displayed and is performing a shaking action (for example, the left column, The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may also be a character-shaped image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the production pattern row of the right column) overlaps (overlaps) for a sixth time in the first overlapping area. ). Then, at a predetermined timing when a reach state is formed in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the middle row that continues to display the variation, and The fifth time when the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left column and the right column that are stopped and displayed and are performing shaking action 2 overlaps (overlaps) is a non-reaching situation in normal symbol fluctuation. At a predetermined timing when the state is formed, the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row is temporarily stopped and displayed and the fixed position action 3 is performed, and the first element of the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed and the shaking action is performed. The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left column and the right column overlaps (overlaps), which is longer than the sixth time (fifth time>sixth time). In other words, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation), the proportion of time (overlap ratio) in which the first elements of the first decorative pattern overlap each other is larger (the proportion of time in which the first elements overlap each other) than in a normal pattern variation. The overlapping time is long) (fifth time>sixth time). Note that, at a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows and the first decorative patterns in the middle row overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap with each other. In this way, in reach variations where the expectation of a jackpot is high, by making the time during which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns overlap with the first decorative symbols in the middle row longer than in normal symbol variations, the first decoration It is possible to make the player pay close attention to each action while diversifying the movements of the symbols themselves. Note that this is not limited to the normal symbol fluctuations and reach fluctuations on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state, and includes the non-reach effects, normal reach effects, super reach effects, and battle reach effects shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. It may also be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half. In addition, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first half and second half of a losing super reach performance or a battle reach performance, the trigger of the look-ahead performance may be suspended as the variation mode groups of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. That is clear.

Next, FIG. 179 shows a fixed position action (a performance mode of a chance look-alike effect) when executing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the first main game symbol in a non-time saving game state. ) is an image diagram showing. The performance mode of the chance prediction performance is a performance mode in which a color effect such as red, green, blue, etc. as a third element is added to the first decorative pattern when a fixed position action is executed. Furthermore, as a fixed-position action when the opportunity prediction effect is executed, an action may be performed to enlarge the first decorative pattern more than the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped, as described above. , In this case, the enlargement action is similar to the case where the chance prediction effect is not executed, such as the first decorative pattern being enlarged more than the fixed position action when the chance prediction effect is not executed, or enlarged while rotating. It is desirable to differentiate it from the fixed position action aspect. First, in (a) of FIG. 179, in the non-time reduction game state, the hold on the first main game side is 2, the hold on the second main game side is 0, and the first decorative pattern is displayed on the effect display device SG. The second decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped at "711", which is a losing pattern. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative pattern is only "numbers". Two first pending displays on the first main game side are displayed, and no first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "2", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0". Trigger hold is displayed in Hold 2. Here, in order to make it easier to understand whether the trigger is on hold or not, for Figure 179 and subsequent figures, mark the first pending display that is not trigger pending with a "●", and mark the first pending display that is trigger pending with a "▲". However, in the actual first hold display, (1) the first hold display may have the same display mode whether it is trigger hold or not, for example, all may be "●"; (2) As shown in the figure, "▲" may be used instead of "●" to clearly indicate to the player that the trigger is on hold (if the trigger is not on hold, "●" is used). When configured in this way, it may be determined by lottery whether the trigger hold is to be displayed as in (1) or as in (2), triggered by the occurrence of the trigger hold. In this case, (b) execute a loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, and add a blue color effect in addition to the fixed position action 1 of the first decorative pattern of "1" in the left column (for example, an enlargement action) Execute the performance mode of the chance-reading performance). Note that it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead performance, as the variations of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (c) execute the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern of "7" in the right column (for example, the production mode of the chance prediction production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action), and then , (d) Execute the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern "1" in the middle row (for example, a production mode of a chance look-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action). In addition, in (d), an example is shown in which the fixed position action 3 of only the first decorative symbol in the middle row is executed (for example, a production mode of a chance prediction production that adds a blue color effect in addition to an enlargement action). However, at the timing of (d), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns may simultaneously perform a blue color effect chance prediction, and in that case, the blue color effect is not accompanied. For normal fixed position actions (actions in which the first decorative pattern expands), the left column is executed at the timing (b), the middle column is executed at the timing (c), and the left column is executed at the timing (d). It may be configured to simultaneously add a blue color effect to the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that are executed at the timing (d) and temporarily stopped at the timing (d). In addition, it may be a time-saving game state instead of a non-time-saving game state, and it corresponds to the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol instead of the symbol fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol. It may be a pattern variation of the first decorative pattern.

Next, (e) in FIG. 179 is a state different from (a) to (d) in FIG. 179, in which the number of reservations on the first main game side is 4 and the second The hold on the main game side is 0, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol on the performance display device SG are fixed and stopped at "711" which is a losing symbol. Then, four first pending displays are displayed on the first main game side, and no first pending display is displayed on the second main game side. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "4", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0". Trigger hold is displayed in Hold 4. In this case, (f) a fixed position action 4 in which a losing variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (for example, the left, middle, and right rows, When the first decorative patterns in the right column temporarily stop at the same time, the first decorative patterns in each column simultaneously perform an enlargement action, and the first decorative pattern in each column is simultaneously added with a blue color effect. performance mode). Note that it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead performance, as the variations of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the timing of occurrence of fixed position actions and the chronological flow differ depending on the variation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol ( The presentation style of the chance prediction effect is different). In addition, even if the same blue color effect of chance-reading performance appears, in a situation where there is a trigger hold on the first main game side, the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold is the hold 4 → If the variation is 3, the variation time will be 5 seconds, reducing the chance of losing, so all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns will temporarily stop at the same time, and the fixed position action 4 will occur in the left, middle row. , the first decorative pattern in the right column performs an enlargement action at the same time and executes a chance-seeing performance mode in which a blue color effect is added, but in a situation where a trigger is pending on the first main game side. If the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold changes from hold 2 to 1, the change time is a normal change of 10 seconds, so the left column, middle column, and right column are ordered, that is, fixed position action 1. , a fixed position action 2, a fixed position action 3 in the order of enlargement actions, and a blue color effect added in that order. , the magnification actions are performed in that order, but the blue color effect may be performed at the same time). In addition, even if a performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance with the same combination of first decorative symbols (for example, "117") appears, the trigger is held in a situation where the trigger is held on the first main game side. If the hold that is extinguished earlier is a change from hold 4 to 3, all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows will temporarily stop at the same time because the change time will be 5 seconds to reduce the loss. As a fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows simultaneously perform an enlargement action and add a blue color effect.The first main game side In a situation where there is a trigger hold, if the hold that is cleared before the trigger hold changes from hold 2 to 1, the change time is a normal change of 10 seconds, so the left column, middle column, right column A chance to perform the expansion action in the order of columns, that is, fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, fixed position action 3, and to add a blue color effect in that order. (Alternatively, as mentioned above, the enlargement actions may be performed in that order, but the blue color effect may be performed at the same time). In other words, they are the same type of chance prediction (the same color effect and the same first decorative pattern combination), but the timing of fixed position actions and the chronological flow are different (the appearance of the chance prediction is different). It is configured as follows. Up to this point, we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed-position action, and perform a chance-reading performance in which a blue color effect is added. A green or red color effect may be added instead of this color effect. The green color effect has a higher expected success rate than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher expected success rate than the blue and green color effects. Then, when performing a chance look-ahead effect, when the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold is changed from hold 4 to 3, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns will simultaneously expand as a fixed position action. A production mode of a chance preview production to perform an action and add a blue color effect is executed. In the next change from Hold 3 to 2, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the foresight production. do. Furthermore, in the next hold 2 → 1 change, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a red color effect is added. Execute. Furthermore, in the next change from Hold 2 to 1, enlarge actions are performed in the order of the left column, middle column, and right column as fixed position actions, that is, fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3. In addition, in that order, the performance mode of the chance pre-reading performance is executed to add the red color effect. In this kind of chance-seeing performance, as the hold is exhausted, the blue color effect (low expectation of winning) changes to the green color effect (medium expectation of winning), and then the green color effect (medium expectation of winning). The game is configured such that as the color effect improves, the expectation of winning increases from red (medium) to red (high expectation of winning).

Next, FIG. 180 shows a fixed position action in response to trigger hold when executing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the first main game symbol (a production mode of a chance look-ahead effect). FIG. The performance mode of the chance prediction performance is a performance mode in which a color effect such as red, green, blue, etc. as a third element is added to the first decorative pattern when a fixed position action is executed. Furthermore, as a fixed-position action when the opportunity prediction effect is executed, an action may be performed to enlarge the first decorative pattern more than the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped, as described above. , In this case, the enlargement action is similar to the case where the chance prediction effect is not executed, such as the first decorative pattern being enlarged more than the fixed position action when the chance prediction effect is not executed, or enlarged while rotating. It is desirable to differentiate it from the fixed position action aspect. First, in (a) of FIG. 180, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the number of reservations in which neither the first main game side nor the second main game side holds is 0, and the effect display device SG shows the The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern indicate that the pattern is changing. Then, (b) if 4 holds on the first main game side occur during the symbol fluctuation, (c) in the next fluctuation after the symbol fluctuation has stopped, a loss fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the left row , a fixed position action 4 in which the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns temporarily stop at the same time (for example, an enlargement action that is executed simultaneously when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns temporarily stop at the same time) Execute the chance to add a blue color effect (direction mode). Note that it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead performance, as the variations of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. This fixed position action 4 may be the same action as shown in FIG. 179(f), or may be a different action. Also, it may be a time-saving game state instead of a non-time-saving game state, and it corresponds to a symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be a pattern variation of the first decorative pattern.

In addition, if (d) two holds on the first main game side occur during symbol fluctuation, (e) a loss fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds will be executed in the next fluctuation after the symbol fluctuation stops, and that fluctuation In the first decorative pattern in the left column, a fixed position action 1 of the symbol "1" (for example, a production mode of a chance preview production in which a blue color effect is added in addition to an enlargement action) is executed. Note that it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead performance, as the variations of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (f) Execute fixed position action 2 of the "7" symbol with the first decorative symbol in the right column (for example, the production mode of chance foresight production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) Then, (g) Fixed position action 3 of the "1" symbol in the first decorative pattern of the middle row (for example, a chance to add a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) aspect). Note that the fixed position actions 1, 2, and 3 may be the same actions as those shown in (b), (c), and (d) of FIG. 179, or may be different actions. Also, at the timing of (g), the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns may simultaneously perform a blue color effect chance prediction, and in that case, the blue color effect is not accompanied. For normal fixed position actions (actions in which the first decorative pattern expands), the left column is executed at timing (e), the right column is executed at timing (f), and the middle column is executed at timing (g). It may be configured to simultaneously add a blue color effect to the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that are executed at the timing (g) and temporarily stopped at the timing (g).

In this way, if a trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting hole during symbol fluctuation in a situation where neither the first main game side hold nor the second main game side hold exists, this symbol Depending on whether or not there is a hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold during fluctuation, and/or depending on how many holds that are extinguished before the trigger hold during this symbol fluctuation. , the fixed-position actions (the production mode of the chance-reading production) are configured to be different. By configuring in this way, when executing the chance prediction effect using the first decorative pattern, the player is allowed to select whether or not to accumulate the hold at the timing when the player recognizes or infers that the trigger hold has occurred. By doing so, it is possible to realize innovative gameplay in which the subsequent effects are different. In addition, even if a production mode of the same blue color effect of chance prediction production appears, the start during symbol fluctuation in a situation where there is no hold on the first main game side or hold on the second main game side. Trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the mouth, and if the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold changes from hold 4 to 3, the change time will be 5 seconds, reducing the loss.Left column, center. All the first decorative symbols in the row and right column temporarily stop at the same time, and as fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform an enlarge action and have a chance to add a blue color effect. The performance mode of the immediate reading performance is executed, but the trigger is held when the ball enters the starting hole during symbol fluctuation in a situation where there is no hold on the first main game side or hold on the second main game side. occurs and the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold changes from hold 2 to 1, and the change time is a normal change of 10 seconds of loss, so the left column, middle column, and right column are executed in that order. In other words, the configuration is such that the enlargement action is performed in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3, and a chance-reading production mode is executed in which the blue color effect is added in that order. (Alternatively, as mentioned above, the magnification actions can be done in that order, but the blue color effect can be done at the same time). In addition, even if a performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance with the same combination of first decorative symbols (for example, "117") appears, there will be a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side. If a trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting hole during symbol fluctuation under a situation where the symbol is not changing, and the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold is a change from hold 4 to 3, the change time is 5 seconds. Due to the shortening variation of the loss, all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time, and the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously enlarged actions as fixed position action 4. , and add a blue color effect to execute the performance mode of the short-sighted performance, but during symbol fluctuation in a situation where there is no hold on the first main game side or hold on the second main game side. Trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting hole, and if the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold changes from hold 2 to 1, the change time is a normal change of 10 seconds, so the left column, A mode of chance-reading production in which enlargement actions are performed in the order of the middle row and right column, that is, fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3, and a blue color effect is added in that order. (Alternatively, as mentioned above, the expansion actions are performed in that order, but the blue color effects can be performed at the same time). Although this is a chance-reading performance (combination of ``opportunity-reading''), it is configured such that the timing and chronological flow of fixed-position actions are different (the production mode of the chance-reading performance is different). In addition, if a trigger hold occurs during a certain symbol change, it is preferable to configure the system so that the chance look-ahead effect can be executed from the next symbol change onwards, without executing the chance look-ahead effect from the particular symbol change. It is. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 180, when there is no hold on the first main game side or on the second main game side, and the hold is 0, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol is 10 seconds. Even if a trigger hold occurs while a variation is being executed and the remaining variation time is 3 seconds or more (a situation where there is still enough variation time to execute the chance prediction effect), the chance prediction effect will not be executed. Although the situation is such that sufficient time for execution is secured, the chance pre-reading effect is not executed in a certain symbol variation, and the chance pre-reading effect can be executed from the next symbol variation onwards. Up to this point, we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed-position action, and perform a chance-reading performance in which a blue color effect is added. A green or red color effect may be added instead of this color effect. The green color effect has a higher expected success rate than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher expected success rate than the blue and green color effects. Then, when performing a chance look-ahead effect, when the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold is changed from hold 4 to 3, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns will simultaneously expand as a fixed position action. A production mode of a chance preview production to perform an action and add a blue color effect is executed. In the next change from Hold 3 to 2, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the foresight production. do. Furthermore, in the next hold 2 → 1 change, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a red color effect is added. Execute. Furthermore, in the next change from Hold 2 to 1, enlarge actions are performed in the order of the left column, middle column, and right column as fixed position actions, that is, fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3. In addition, in that order, the performance mode of the chance pre-reading performance is executed to add the red color effect. In this kind of chance-seeing performance, as the hold is exhausted, the blue color effect (low expectation of winning) changes to the green color effect (medium expectation of winning), and then the green color effect (medium expectation of winning). The game is configured such that as the color effect improves, the expectation of winning increases from red (medium) to red (high expectation of winning).

Next, FIG. 181 is an image diagram showing a fixed position action when executing a chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction game state. Although not shown, FIG. 181 shows a right-handed hitting instruction display. First, in (a) of FIG. 181, in the time reduction game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 2, and the first decorative pattern and the first decorative pattern are displayed on the effect display device SG. The second decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped at "711", which is a losing pattern. In addition, in the time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is only "numbers", and the display mode of the second decorative pattern is also only "numbers". Two first pending displays on the second main game side are displayed, and no first pending display on the first main game side is displayed. In addition, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "2", and the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "2". Trigger hold is displayed in Hold 2. In this case, (b) a loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and a fixed position action 5 is executed in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time. In this fixed position action, the first decorative symbol performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect, as in the non-time saving game state, but this fixed position action is similar to the one in the non-time saving game state. The mode may be different from the position action, and in that case, for example, the first decorative pattern may perform a reduction action and add a blue color effect. Note that it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect, as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. 13. In addition, it may be a non-time saving game state instead of a time saving game state, and it corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. It may be a pattern variation of the first decorative pattern. Up to this point, we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed-position action, and perform a chance-reading performance in which a blue color effect is added. A green or red color effect may be added instead of this color effect. The green color effect has a higher expected success rate than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher expected success rate than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing a chance look-ahead effect using blue, green, and red color effects, the hold that is extinguished before the trigger hold is held as a fixed position action in the left column and middle column in the change from hold 4 to 3. , the first decorative pattern in the right column simultaneously performs an enlargement action and executes a performance mode of a chance foresight performance in which a blue color effect is added. In the next change from Hold 3 to 2, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the foresight production. do. Furthermore, in the next hold 2 → 1 change, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a red color effect is added. Execute. In this kind of chance-seeing performance, as the hold is exhausted, the blue color effect (low expectation of winning) changes to the green color effect (medium expectation of winning), and then the green color effect (medium expectation of winning). The game is configured such that as the color effect improves, the expectation of winning increases from red (medium) to red (high expectation of winning).

Next, in (c) of FIG. 181, in the time reduction game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 4, and the first decorative pattern is displayed on the effect display device SG. The second decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped at "711", which is a losing pattern. Then, four first pending displays on the second main game side are displayed, and no first pending display on the first main game side is displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "4", and the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "4". Trigger hold is displayed in Hold 4. In this case, (d) a loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is executed, and a fixed position action 5 is executed in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time. In this fixed position action, the first decorative symbol performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect, as in the non-time saving game state, but this fixed position action is similar to the one in the non-time saving game state. The mode may be different from the position action, and in that case, for example, the first decorative pattern may perform a reduction action and add a blue color effect. Note that it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead performance as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the time reduction game state, the fixed position action (performance mode of chance prediction performance) is made to be the same according to the variation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. It is composed of In addition, although the performance mode of the chance look-ahead performance is fixed position action 5, it may be configured to display an effect exclusively for look-ahead in the time reduction game state. In that case, the prefetch-only effect is configured to differ depending on the variation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in (a) to (d) in FIG. 179 and (e) to (f) in FIG. 179, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first The fluctuation time on the main game side is different, and the order of temporary stopping (order of fixed position action) of the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column of the chance look-ahead performance is configured to be different. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 181(a) and (b) and FIG. 181(c) and (d), in the time reduction gaming state, the second main game side Although the fluctuation times are different, the order of temporary stopping (order of fixed position actions) of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of the chance look-ahead effect is configured to be the same. By configuring in this way, the variable time differs depending on the number of reservations in any gaming state, but in the non-time reduction gaming state where the emphasis is placed on performance rather than the variable efficiency, and in the time reduction gaming state where the emphasis is on variable efficiency, By differentiating the way the first decorative symbols are displayed, the player can recognize in which state the first decorative symbols are changing, and also the manner in which the first decorative symbols change in accordance with each gaming state. can do. In addition, it is possible to divide the game state into a game state where you can enjoy changes in the form of fixed position actions due to differences in the number of holds, and a game state where the form of fixed position actions is uniform depending on the difference in the number of holds, thereby achieving seamless performance progression. You can enjoy the tendency of the appearance of chance depending on the gaming state. It should be noted that the order of temporary stopping is not limited to the order of temporary stopping at the time of chance prediction performance, but may be the order of temporary stopping during normal symbol fluctuations in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. When applying the above configuration to the order of temporary stops in normal symbol fluctuations in non-time reduction gaming states and time reduction gaming states, for fixed position actions in normal symbol fluctuations in non-time reduction gaming states and time reduction gaming states, There is no need to add a color effect as a third element or a lookahead-only effect.

In addition, regarding the order of start of variation, in both the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle row, and right column start symbol variation at the same time (almost at the same time). It is composed of Furthermore, regarding the action at the start of fluctuation, in the non-time reduction game state, the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is performed regardless of the number of reservations, but in the time reduction game state, the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is not performed. Or, it is configured so that the probability of doing so is low. Specifically, in the non-time saving game state, even if the hold on the first main game side is 1 to 4, the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is executed. However, in the time reduction game state, even if the hold on the second main game side is 1 to 4, the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is not executed. Or, in the time reduction game state, only when the hold on the second main game side is 1 (the hold changes from 2 to 1), when the change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the second main game symbol starts. Configured to perform an action. The chance look-ahead performance is configured to be executable in a symbol variation where the hold goes from 4 to 3, a symbol change where the hold goes from 3 to 2, and a symbol change where the hold goes from 2 to 1. The chance pre-read effect in the case of a pre-read win is configured such that when the power is cut off and restored, the chance pre-read effect corresponding to the trigger hold is no longer executed. In other words, a trigger hold occurs during a certain change in a state where the hold on the first main game side (or the second main game side) is 1 or more, and the chance prediction performance is executed from the next change after the certain change. Even if it was planned, if the power is cut off during a certain fluctuation, even if it is restored, the first main game side ( Trigger hold occurs during a certain change in a state where the hold on the second main game side is 3 or more, and a chance look-ahead performance is executed from the next change of the certain change, and the change of the certain change one after another. However, even if it is planned to perform a chance prediction effect, if the power is cut off during the relevant fluctuations, the chance prediction performance will not be executed in the next fluctuation of the relevant successive fluctuations even if the power is restored. (In this case, the power recovery screen is displayed, so the first decorative pattern is not displayed. In other words, the chance prediction effect is not executed even in the successive fluctuations).

In addition, in normal symbol fluctuations in the non-time reduction gaming state, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols may differ depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, but certain symbol fluctuations (for example, In the (reach variation), depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, the probability that a difference in the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols will not occur or a difference in the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols will occur is low. It is composed of For example, in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side changes from 4 to 3, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbol is the left row, the middle row, the right row. The first decorative symbols in the row are configured to temporarily stop at the same time (almost simultaneously), but the normal state corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 2 to 1. The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during symbol variation is configured such that they are temporarily stopped in the order of the left row, right row, and middle row. On the other hand, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side changes from 4 to 3 is the left row, right row, and middle row. It is configured to temporarily stop in order, and even in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side changes from 2 to 1, the order of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is , the left column, the right column, and the middle column are temporarily stopped in this order.

In addition, a fixed position action (a performance mode of a chance prediction performance) may be executed when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and when configured in this way, normal symbol fluctuations in a non-time saving gaming state may be performed. In this case, depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there may be a difference in the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbols (production mode of chance prediction production), but certain symbol fluctuations (for example, reach variation) may occur. ), depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there is no difference in the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbols (production mode of the chance prediction production), or the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbols ( The system is configured so that the probability of a difference in the order of the performance mode of the chance prediction performance is low. For example, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side changes from 4 to 3 (the production mode of the chance immediate prediction production). The order is such that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row perform fixed position actions at the same time (almost simultaneously), but the first main game side The order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold changes from 2 to 1 (the production mode of the chance prediction production) is the left column, the right column. , is configured to perform a fixed position action (a performance mode of chance-seeing performance) in the order of the middle row. On the other hand, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the performance mode of the chance prediction performance) in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side changes from 4 to 3 is , the first main game symbol is configured to perform a fixed position action (a performance mode of chance prediction performance) in the order of the left row, right row, and middle row, and the hold on the first main game side changes from 2 to 1. Even in the reach variation that corresponds to the symbol variation, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance foresight production) is the left column, the right column, and the middle row in the order of the fixed position action (the chance forethought production). (presentation mode)).

In addition, when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the non-time saving game state or when the game state is switched from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state, the hold on the first main game side is If there is a hold on the second main game side regardless of the presence or absence of, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is performed in the non-time reduction gaming state, but in this case. As the first decorative symbol, use the same symbol as the first decorative symbol that corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state (even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is the second main game symbol) Since a common first decorative symbol is used even for symbol variations, for example, if the order of variation is from the second main game symbol to the first main game symbol, first the symbol variation of the second main game symbol After the corresponding first decorative pattern is changed, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and from the stopped display state, the first decorative pattern starts to change in accordance with the pattern change of the first main game pattern. ). Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Moreover, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order of starting fluctuations and the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, "the fluctuation time trends are the same (substantially the same)" means a limited frequency state when selecting a fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state. As a (gaming state or variable pattern table related to variable patterns), one variable pattern table (for example, instead of changing the variable pattern selection tendency depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, A table in which a variable pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of reservations such as limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B shown in FIG. This indicates that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of start of fluctuation is such that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row start fluctuating at the same time (almost simultaneously), and the order of temporary stop is also the same as the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row. The first decorative patterns in the first row and the right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially the same time). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation on the second main game side after the end of the non-time reduction game state or the time reduction game state is configured to be immediately consumed. Since it is possible to return to the first main game side, which is the main game in the non-time saving game state, which is the gameplay of By performing the minimum number of actions, the player can seamlessly and comfortably transition to the first main game.

Further, a fixed position action (a performance mode of chance prediction performance) may be executed when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped in the non-time reduction game state, and the system is configured in such a manner. In this case, when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the non-time saving gaming state or when the gaming state switches from the time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state, the first main game side is held on hold. If there is a hold on the second main game side regardless of the presence or absence of, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is performed in the non-time reduction gaming state, but in this case. As the first decorative symbol, use the same symbol as the first decorative symbol that corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state (even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is the second main game symbol) Since a common first decorative symbol is used even for symbol variations, for example, if the order of variation is from the second main game symbol to the first main game symbol, first the symbol variation of the second main game symbol After the corresponding first decorative pattern is changed, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and from the stopped display state, the first decorative pattern starts to change in accordance with the pattern change of the first main game pattern. ). Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns begin to fluctuate and the order in which the fixed-position actions (performance mode of chance prediction performance) are the same ( (almost identical). Here, "the fluctuation time trends are the same (substantially the same)" means a limited frequency state when selecting a fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state. As a (gaming state or variable pattern table related to variable patterns), one variable pattern table (for example, instead of changing the variable pattern selection tendency depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, A table in which a variable pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of reservations such as limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B shown in FIG. This indicates that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order in which the fluctuations start is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows start to fluctuate at the same time (almost at the same time), and the fixed position action (prompting of chance reading) The order of the aspect) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are executed simultaneously (substantially simultaneously). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation on the second main game side after the end of the non-time reduction game state or the time reduction game state is configured to be immediately consumed. Since it is possible to return to the first main game side, which is the main game in the non-time saving game state, which is the gameplay of By performing the minimum number of actions, the player can seamlessly and comfortably transition to the first main game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time reduction gaming state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state Use the first decorative pattern. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation for losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach Gase and pseudo consecutive Gase) is held on the first main game side. The structure is such that the fluctuation time trend is changed depending on the number, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column begin to fluctuate are the same (almost the same), but the order in which they temporarily stop is the first. It is configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the main game side. Here, when the fluctuation time trend is changed, the normal state (normal fluctuation This indicates that normal states 1 to 4 (normal variable pattern tables 1 to 4) are used as pattern tables) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side. The order of start of variation is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start variation at the same time (almost simultaneously), and the order of temporary stop is such that the number of pending symbols is large. In the case (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns temporarily stop at the same time (almost simultaneously), and in the case of few (holding 2 → 1, holding 1 → 0), the first decorative symbols in the left row, right row, and middle row are configured in the order in which they are temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, an action at the start of fluctuation may be executed when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and a fixed position action (a performance mode of chance prediction performance) may be executed when the first decorative pattern temporarily stops. In this case, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time saving gaming state, the non-time saving is applied to the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. The first decorative pattern in the game state is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation for losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach Gase and pseudo consecutive Gase) is held on the first main game side. The structure is such that the fluctuation time trend is changed depending on the number, as shown in FIG. In addition, depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is the same (almost the same), but the fixed position action (chance The order of the performance mode of the look-ahead performance is configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side. Here, when the fluctuation time trend is changed, the normal state (normal fluctuation This indicates that normal states 1 to 4 (normal variable pattern tables 1 to 4) are used as pattern tables) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side. The order of actions at the start of fluctuation is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows start fluctuating at the same time (almost at the same time), and the fixed position action (opportunity foresight effect) The order of the production mode) is that when there are a large number of holds (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are executed at the same time (almost simultaneously), When there are few (holding 2 → 1, holding 1 → 0), the first decorative symbols in the left row, right row, and middle row are configured so that they are in the order of fixed position action (direction of chance prediction performance). ing.

In addition, in the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol variation corresponding to the first main game symbol variation in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation for loss, reach failure, etc.) If a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 during a non-reach pattern variation such as a pseudo consecutive game, and the number of holds on the first main game side accumulates to the upper limit (“4”), the corresponding first In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern, the first decorative pattern starts changing at the same time (substantially the same time) in the left, middle, and right rows. , On the other hand, the order in which the first decorative patterns are temporarily stopped is that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in different orders (for example, the first decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). is configured to do so. Then, the next symbol variation (the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 4 to 3 (normal symbol variation of a loss, reach-gase or pseudo-continuation) The order in which the first decorative symbols begin to fluctuate is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are at the same time (substantially the same time), and the first decorative symbols are The temporary stopping order is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are at the same time (substantially the same time). However, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation for losing, reach-for-win, etc.) If a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 during a non-reach pattern variation such as a pseudo consecutive game, and only "1" is accumulated on the first main game side, the corresponding first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order in which the first decorative pattern starts changing is that the first decorative patterns in the left row, middle row, and right row are at the same time (substantially the same time); The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in different orders (for example, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle rows). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach-gasp and pseudo-continuation) The order in which the first decorative symbols begin to fluctuate is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows are at the same time (almost simultaneously); The temporary stop order is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in different orders (for example, the left, right, and middle rows are temporarily stopped in this order). .

Furthermore, an action at the start of fluctuation may be executed when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and a fixed position action (a performance mode of chance prediction performance) may be executed when the first decorative pattern temporarily stops. In the case of a non-time saving game state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss) , when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 during non-reach pattern fluctuations such as reach Gase and pseudo continuous Gase, and the hold on the first main game side has accumulated to the upper limit ("4") , the order of actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously ( On the other hand, the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance prediction production) is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are fixed position actions (almost at the same time). It is configured to execute (for example, execution in the order of the left column, right column, and middle column). Then, the next symbol variation (the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 4 to 3 (normal symbol variation of a loss, reach-gase or pseudo-continuation) The order of actions at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol fluctuation such as Gase, The order of the fixed position actions of the decorative symbols (the performance mode of the chance prediction performance) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are performed at the same time (substantially at the same time). However, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation for losing, reach-for-win, etc.) If a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 during a non-reach pattern variation such as a pseudo consecutive game, and only "1" is accumulated on the first main game side, the corresponding first main game The order of actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the symbol is that the first decorative symbols of the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). On the other hand, the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance-reading production) is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are in different orders. (aspect)) (for example, executed in the order of the left column, right column, and middle column). Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach-gasp and pseudo-continuation) The order of actions at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol fluctuation such as Gase etc. is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneous (almost simultaneous); The order of the fixed position actions of the decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance foresight production) is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the fixed position actions (the production mode of the chance forethought production) in different orders. (for example, executed in the order of left column, right column, and middle column).

In addition, in the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol variation corresponding to the first main game symbol variation in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation for loss, reach failure, etc.) If a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 during a non-reach pattern variation such as a pseudo consecutive game, and the hold on the second main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4"), the corresponding second In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern, the first decorative pattern starts changing at the same time (substantially the same time) in the left, middle, and right rows. , On the other hand, the order in which the first decorative patterns are temporarily stopped is that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in different orders (for example, the first decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). is configured to do so. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the second main game side changes from 4 to 3 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach-gasp and pseudo-continuation) The order in which the first decorative symbols begin to fluctuate is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are at the same time (substantially the same time), and the first decorative symbols are The temporary stopping order is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are at the same time (substantially the same time). In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol variation corresponding to the second main game symbol variation where the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation for losing, reach-to-win, etc.) If a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 and only "1" is accumulated on the second main game side during non-reach symbol fluctuations such as pseudo consecutive games, the first main game concerned In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order in which the first decorative pattern starts changing is that the first decorative patterns in the left row, middle row, and right row are at the same time (substantially the same time); The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in different orders (for example, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle rows). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach-gase and pseudo-continuation) The order in which the first decorative symbols begin to fluctuate is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are at the same time (substantially the same time), and the first decorative symbols are The temporary stopping order is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are at the same time (substantially the same time).

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side in the non-time saving game state starts to fluctuate, an action is taken at the start of the fluctuation, and when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side temporarily stops, a fixed position action (chance If it is configured in such a way, in the non-time saving game state, the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0. A game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 during a pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the variation (normal pattern variation for a loss, non-reach pattern variation such as a reach Gase or a pseudo consecutive Gase), When the hold on the second main game side has accumulated to the upper limit (“4”), the order of actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. , the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (almost simultaneously). On the other hand, the order of fixed position actions (production mode of chance prediction production) of the first decorative symbols are in the left column, The first decorative symbols in the middle row and the right row are configured to execute fixed position actions (production mode of chance prediction production) in different orders (for example, executed in the order of the left column, right column, and middle column). There is. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the second main game side changes from 4 to 3 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach-gasp and pseudo-continuation) The order of actions at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol fluctuation such as Gase, The order of the fixed position actions of the decorative symbols (the performance mode of the chance prediction performance) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are performed at the same time (substantially at the same time). In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the first decorative symbol variation corresponding to the second main game symbol variation where the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation for losing, reach-to-win, etc.) If a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 and only "1" is accumulated on the second main game side during non-reach symbol fluctuations such as pseudo consecutive games, the first main game concerned The order of actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the symbol is that the first decorative symbols of the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). On the other hand, the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance-reading production) is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are in different orders. (aspect)) (for example, executed in the order of the left column, right column, and middle column). Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach-gase and pseudo-continuation) The order of actions at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol fluctuation such as Gase, The order of the fixed position actions of the decorative symbols (the performance mode of the chance prediction performance) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are performed at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 in the time reduction game state or when the game state is switched from the non-time reduction game state to the time reduction game state, the hold on the second main game side is If there is a hold on the first main game side in a state where the first decorative symbol does not exist, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is performed, but the first decorative symbol is in a time reduction game state. The same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation for losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach Gase and pseudo consecutive Gase) is held on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Furthermore, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of starting fluctuation and the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, when the fluctuation time trends are the same (substantially the same), the normal state (usually As the variation pattern table), one variation pattern table (for example, the normal variation pattern table in the normal state shown in FIG. 166) is used regardless of the number of reservations. In addition, the order of start of variation is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start variation at the same time (almost at the same time), regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. Also, the order of temporary stopping is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the first main game side in the time reduction game state starts to fluctuate, there is an action at the start of the fluctuation, and when the first decorative symbol on the first main game side temporarily stops, there is a fixed position action (opportunity action). When configured in this way, when a game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 in the time-saving game state, or when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time-saving game state, When the gaming state is switched to the shortened gaming state, if there is a hold on the first main game side while there is no hold on the second main game side, it corresponds to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol. A pattern variation of the first decorative pattern is performed, and the same pattern as the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game pattern in the time reduction game state is used as the first decorative pattern. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation for losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach Gase and pseudo consecutive Gase) is held on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns and the order of fixed position actions (performance mode of chance prediction performance) are They are configured the same (substantially the same). Here, when the fluctuation time trends are the same (substantially the same), the normal state (usually As the variation pattern table), one variation pattern table (for example, the normal variation pattern table in the normal state shown in FIG. 166) is used regardless of the number of reservations. The order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are executed at the same time (almost simultaneously), regardless of the number of holds on the first main game side. The order of the fixed position action (performance mode of chance prediction performance) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row temporarily stop at the same time (substantially the same time).

Also, a description will be given of Pattern 1, which is one of the patterns of variation of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction game state. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state. Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. Although the variation time trend is configured to be changed according to the number, the order of starting variation and the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are determined by the second main game side. The structure is the same (almost the same) regardless of the number of reservations. Here, changing the fluctuation time trend means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern This shows that limited frequency states A1 to A4 (fluctuating pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (fluctuating pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used as tables). Furthermore, the order in which the fluctuations start is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start to fluctuate at the same time (almost simultaneously), regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Also, the order of temporary stopping is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side in the time reduction game state starts to fluctuate, there is an action at the start of the fluctuation, and when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side temporarily stops, there is a fixed position action (opportunity action). When configured in this way, the variation mode of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction gaming state Pattern 1, which is one of the patterns, will be explained. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state. Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. It is configured so that the fluctuation time trend changes depending on the number of numbers, but the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns and the fixed position action (for the chance look-ahead effect) are changed. The order of performance mode) is configured to be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, changing the fluctuation time trend means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern This shows that limited frequency states A1 to A4 (fluctuating pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (fluctuating pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used as tables). The order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are executed at the same time (almost simultaneously), regardless of the number of holds on the second main game side. The order of the fixed position actions (performance mode of the chance prediction performance) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, a description will be given of Pattern 2 (different pattern from Pattern 1), which is one of the variation patterns of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction game state. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state. Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. The fluctuation time trend is configured to change depending on the number, but the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns begin to fluctuate is determined regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. First, they are configured the same (substantially the same). Note that the order of temporary suspension is configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, changing the fluctuation time trend means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern This shows that limited frequency states A1 to A4 (fluctuating pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (fluctuating pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used as tables). Furthermore, the order in which the fluctuations start is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start to fluctuate at the same time (almost simultaneously), regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of temporary stopping is that when there are many pending numbers (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (almost simultaneously), and when there are fewer The configuration is such that the order is the left column, the right column, and the middle column in the case (pending 2 → 1, pending 1 → 0).

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side in the time reduction game state starts to fluctuate, there is an action at the start of the fluctuation, and when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side temporarily stops, there is a fixed position action (opportunity action). When configured in this way, the variation mode of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction gaming state Pattern 2 (different pattern from pattern 1), which is one of the patterns, will be explained. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state. Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. The structure is such that the fluctuation time trend changes depending on the number, but the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side. They are configured the same (almost the same) regardless of the Note that the order of the fixed position actions (performance mode of the chance preview performance) is configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, changing the fluctuation time trend means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern This shows that limited frequency states A1 to A4 (fluctuating pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (fluctuating pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used as tables). Furthermore, the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are executed at the same time (almost simultaneously), regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. , The order of fixed position actions (production mode of chance prediction production) is that when there are many pending numbers (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneously ( It is configured to execute in the order of the left column, right column, and middle column if there are few (pending 2 → 1, pending 1 → 0).

In addition, a description will be given of pattern 3 (a pattern different from pattern 1 and pattern 2), which is one of the variation patterns of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction gaming state. do. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state. Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. Although the fluctuation time trend is configured to be changed depending on the number of games, the order of temporary suspension is configured to be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Note that the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start changing is configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, changing the fluctuation time trend means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern This shows that limited frequency states A1 to A4 (fluctuating pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (fluctuating pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used as tables). In addition, the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns begin to fluctuate is, for example, when the number of pendings is large (4→3, 3→2), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start changing. The first decorative symbols are configured to start changing at the same time (substantially the same time), and when there are few (pending 2→1, pending 1→0), they are arranged in the order of the left column, middle column, and right column. However, this explanation is just an example, and it is sufficient that the order of start of variation is configured to be different depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of temporary stopping is such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Any one of these patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 3) is adopted as the variation pattern of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction gaming state.

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side in the time reduction game state starts to fluctuate, there is an action at the start of the fluctuation, and when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side temporarily stops, there is a fixed position action (opportunity action). When configured in this way, the variation mode of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction gaming state Pattern 3 (a pattern different from pattern 1 and pattern 2), which is one of the patterns, will be explained. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time reduction gaming state. Then, the symbol fluctuations of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol (normal symbol fluctuations for losing, non-reach symbol fluctuations such as reach-gase and pseudo-continuous gase) are held on the second main game side. Although the variable time trend is configured to change depending on the number, the order of fixed position actions (production mode of chance prediction production) is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side (for the most part) the same). Note that the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, changing the fluctuation time trend means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern This shows that limited frequency states A1 to A4 (fluctuating pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (fluctuating pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used as tables). In addition, the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is, for example, when there are many pending numbers (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the left column, middle row, right column It is configured so that the first decorative symbols in a column are executed at the same time (almost simultaneously), and when there are few (pending 2 → 1, pending 1 → 1), the order is the left column, middle column, and right column. However, this explanation is just an example, and the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation may be configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of the fixed position action (performance mode of chance prediction performance) is that regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are played at the same time (almost at the same time). configured to run. Any one of these patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 3) is adopted as the variation pattern of the first decorative pattern when a game ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in the time reduction gaming state.

Moreover, the first decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) It is preferable that the first decorative pattern is in a non-transparent state and does not perform any action during the variable fixed time. The display mode of the first decorative symbol during the variable fixed time is a mode in which the first element and the second element are displayed (however, in the time reduction game state, only the second element may be displayed). Further, a third element may be added to the first decorative pattern. Furthermore, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is only the first element or the second element depending on the game state (low-accuracy low base state, high-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state). may be displayed. Further, the aspect of each element may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the first decorative pattern of "7", in the low probability low base state, the image of a lion facing the front (the first 1 element), but in other game states, it is an image of a lion facing sideways (first element), and in a low-certain, low-base state, it is an image of the number "7" (second element), but in other game states In the game state, the image of the kanji "7" (second element) is displayed, and in the low-certain, low-base state, the image of "7" is red (third element), but in other game states, the image of the kanji "7" is red (third element). The image may be gold (third element), or the lion image may be yellow (third element) in the low-certain, low-base condition, but the lion image may be gold (third element) in other game conditions. Good too. Note that, similar to the game state, the aspect of each element may be configured to differ depending on the stage or mode.
(2) It is preferable that the first decorative pattern is in a non-transparent state and does not perform any action during deceleration fluctuations. The display mode of the first decorative pattern during the deceleration fluctuation is preferably the same as the display mode of the first decorative pattern during the fixed fluctuation time.

Moreover, the second decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) Regarding the second decorative pattern, it is preferable that no action be taken at the start of variation.
(2) Regarding the second decorative pattern, it is preferable not to perform a tenpai action while the main game pattern and the first decorative pattern are changing.
(3) Since the second decorative pattern can be displayed at all times, it is preferable that it not be transmitted through while the main game pattern and the first decorative pattern are changing.
(4) As for the second decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 178, the second decorative pattern in the left and right rows is configured so that the second decorative pattern in the middle row does not overlap, and It is preferable that the second decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the right row are configured so as not to overlap.
(5) Regarding the second decorative symbols, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side (or regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side), the order of starting fluctuation and the order of stopping are the same (almost the same) It is preferable that the configuration is as follows.
(6) Regarding the second decorative symbols, it is preferable that the order of start and stop of variation be configured to be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the game state (non-time reduction game state, time reduction game state). .
(7) Regarding the second decorative symbol, whether it is a symbol variation on the first main game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side, regardless of the number of reservations, regardless of the presence or absence of the time reduction game state. , it is preferable that the order of start of variation and the order of stop of variation are the same (substantially the same).
(8) Regarding the second decorative pattern, it is preferable that no shaking action be performed while the main game pattern and the first decorative pattern are changing.
(9) Regarding the second decorative pattern, it is preferable that no shaking action is performed during the fluctuation standby state.
(10) Regarding the second decorative symbol, the decoration is always displayed even when the main game symbol and the first decorative symbol are fluctuating, and even when the fluctuating standby state is in progress (including while the standby movie is running). It is a design.
(11) Regarding the second decorative pattern, only the second element is displayed regardless of the game state (low-accuracy low base state, high-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state). It is preferable that the shape (for example, the outline, color, and type (Roman numeral or Chinese numeral) of each number) of the number is the same regardless of the game state. As with the game state, only the second element is displayed regardless of the stage or mode, and its shape (for example, the outline, color, and type of each number (Roman numeral or Chinese numeral)) also depends on the stage and mode. It may be configured to be the same regardless of the

Moreover, the shaking action is configured as follows.
(1) The swinging action (first swinging motion) of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including during temporary stop) is a state in which both the first element and the second element are swinging, but the state is in a fixed stop state. The shaking action of the first decorative pattern in the fluctuation standby state (the first second swinging action during the fluctuation standby state, the second second swinging action during the fluctuation standby state.The second swinging action during the fluctuation standby state. The second shaking motion is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished, but it is also called the third shaking motion.) In this case, only the first element is shaking; The two elements are configured so that they do not oscillate. That is, the manner of the shaking action during symbol fluctuation is different from the manner of the shaking action during the fluctuation standby state. However, regarding the shaking action of the first element, the shaking action of the first element of the first decorative pattern during symbol fluctuation (including during temporary stop), and the shaking action of the first element of the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation standby state. It is preferable that the actions are the same. By applying the shaking action of the first decorative symbol while the symbol is fluctuating (including when it is temporarily stopped) also during the fluctuating standby state when the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, it becomes boring even in the fluctuating standby state. It is possible to avoid making the screen (a screen where the first decorative pattern is only stationary) and give movement to the LCD screen, and only the second element (numbers) can be fixed without any shaking action. By displaying the symbols in a similar manner, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause the player to misunderstand that the symbols are changing.
(2) The image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-saving gaming state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element), and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state (the image object of the first element) Since the image object and the image object of the second element are different, the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the time-saving game state is different from the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-saving game state. It is configured as follows.
(3) Regarding the execution time of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation, not only the execution time of the reach effect, but also the It also includes the time of the shaking action from when each decorative pattern temporarily stops to when it finally stops.
(4) The shaking action is performed multiple times in a predetermined period of time (for example, a 0.5 second action of moving the first decorative pattern upward and then downward). It is configured to display (continuous display, loop display). On the other hand, regarding the fluctuation start action, fixed position action, tenpai action, and decision action, the action of performing one action in a predetermined time (for example, a 1.0 second action to gradually enlarge the first decorative pattern) is one action. Just execute it once and display it (single display, non-loop display). Note that the predetermined time of the shaking action, the predetermined time of the fluctuation start action, the predetermined time of the fixed position action, the predetermined time of the tenpai action, and the predetermined time of the decisive action may be the same time or different times. It's okay.
(5) Regarding the shaking action during the fluctuation standby state, the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is determined to be a losing symbol and stops (if there is a fluctuation fixed time, after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed), then the predetermined When a time period (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed, the first shaking action (second shaking action) during the fluctuation standby state is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds); When a predetermined period of time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses after the main game symbol or the second main game symbol is determined to be a losing symbol (if there is a variable fixed time, after the fixed variable time has elapsed), the 2 in the variable standby state The second shaking action (second shaking action).The second shaking action during this fluctuation standby state is the second shaking action that is executed after the standby demo screen has finished displaying, but the third shaking action is ) is configured to be executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). In this way, the shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is configured to be able to be executed at a plurality of timings, similar to the shaking action during the fluctuation. In addition, at the start of the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state, the stage BGM is output (continued output after the fixed stop), but after the standby movie is executed and during the fluctuation standby state. The stage BGM is configured not to be output at the start of the second shaking action and during the shaking action.
(6) Shaking action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation in the non-time reduction gaming state (including during temporary stop) and swing action of the first decorative symbol during symbol variation in the time reduction gaming state (including during temporary stop) The aspect is different from the shaking action. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time saving game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element), and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time saving gaming state (the image object of the first element) object and the image object of the second element) are different, the first decorative symbol swing action during symbol fluctuation in the non-time reduction gaming state (including during temporary stop) and the mode of the swinging action of the first decorative symbol during symbol variation in the time reduction gaming state. The mode of the shaking action of the first decorative pattern (including during temporary stop) is configured to be different from that of the first decorative pattern.
(7) The swinging action of the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation standby state of the non-time reduction gaming state is different from the swinging action of the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation standby state of the time reduction gaming state. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time saving game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element), and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time saving gaming state (the image object of the first element) Since the object and the image object of the second element are different, the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation standby state of the non-time saving gaming state and the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation waiting state of the time saving gaming state are different. The structure is such that the mode of the swinging action is different from that of the above.
(8) When the first decorative symbol in the time reduction game state is composed of only the second element (number), it is preferable that no shaking action is performed in the fluctuation standby state of the time reduction game state. In other words, if the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state is composed of only the second element (number), the shaking action (first shaking motion) of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including during temporary stop) is However, the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the fluctuation standby state, which is a fixed stop state (the first second swinging action during the fluctuation standby state, the second second swinging action during the second fluctuation standby state). Note that the second shaking motion during the fluctuation standby state is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished, but may also be called the third shaking motion). is preferred.

Furthermore, the fixed position action is configured as follows.
(1) When temporarily stopping the losing first decorative pattern in the third row as the final row (for example, the middle row) in a losing Super Reach performance, take the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the third row. It is preferable not to do so. With this configuration, if it is a normal symbol variation for a loss or a normal reach variation for a loss, the first decorative symbol in the middle row will also indicate a temporary stop by performing a fixed position action, while the super reach effect for a loss. Regarding this, it is redundant to return to the normal screen and perform a fixed position action after a super reach performance in the event of a loss, so by omitting this action, the movement of the first decorative pattern can be seamlessly performed according to the intermediate performance in the event of a loss. realizable. On the other hand, when temporarily stopping the losing first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row in normal reach, it is preferable to perform a fixed position action for the first decorative symbol in the third row. , the third column's position action may not be performed. By configuring this way, as with the super reach performance, for the normal reach performance when you lose, returning from the reach performance to the normal screen and performing a fixed position action is redundant, so by omitting this action, Seamless movement of the first decorative pattern can be realized according to the transit direction. Here, in the case of a loss where the reach is not established (for example, when stopping at a loose number such as "247" or "183"), it is preferable to perform a fixed position action in the third row. In addition, Tenpai with the first decorative symbol "7" has a higher probability of hitting than the first decorative symbol with other numbers, and is configured so that there is no loss in normal reach, or it is always super successful without becoming normal reach. Because it is configured to develop into a reach effect (or more likely to develop into a super reach effect than when the first decorative pattern of other numbers reaches tenpai), if the first decorative pattern becomes tenpai with "7" , do not perform the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row as the final row (for example, middle row), or do not perform the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row as the final row, or It is preferable to lower the probability of performing a fixed position action for the first decorative symbol in a row (for example, the middle row), and for tenpai with the first decorative symbol of other numbers, the fixed position action for the first decorative symbol in the third row is lowered. Or, it is preferable to make the probability of performing the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row as the final row (for example, the middle row) higher than when "7" reaches tenpai. .

Additionally, Tenpai Action is configured as follows.
(1) Regarding the tenpai action of the first decorative pattern, it is performed in the first decorative pattern of the first row (e.g. left row) and second row (e.g. right row), but in the third row as the final row (e.g. , middle row) is not used for the first decorative pattern. With this configuration, by preparing actions that may be performed only with the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, which are the first decorative symbols other than the last column that attracts the most attention, it is possible to In the process until the first decorative pattern in the row stops, it is possible to visually notify the tenpai to be noticed. On the other hand, actions other than the Tenpai action in the first decorative pattern are performed in the first decorative pattern in the first column (for example, left column) and the second column (for example, right column), and then in the third column as the final column. It is also possible to use the first decorative pattern in a row (for example, the middle row).
(2) It is configured to perform the same tenpai action whether it is a pseudo-connection from a non-tenpai (non-reach pseudo-connection) or a pseudo-connection from a tenpai (pseudo-connection after reach). Specifically, in FIG. 168, there are two cases in which tenpai action 2 of (i2) is performed without performing a pseudo-reach after reaching after performing a non-reach pseudo-connection, and when performing a pseudo-reach after reaching without performing a non-reach pseudo-connection. This means that the Tenpai Action 2 is the same (common) in the case where the Tenpai Action 2 of (i2) is performed after the Tenpai Action 2 is performed. In addition, in Fig. 168, there are two cases in which tenpai action 2 (i2) is performed without performing a pseudo-reach after reaching after performing a non-reach pseudo-association, and when performing a pseudo-association after reach without performing a non-reach pseudo-association. In the case of performing tenpai action 1 in (u), the aspects of tenpai action 2 and tenpai action 1 may be the same. In addition, even if a specific preview effect that is certain to become a reach (for example, a preview effect with red lines in a line preview) occurs in a pseudo change in the pattern variation of a pseudo series, the pseudo change in which the specific preview effect occurs At the time of fluctuation, it may become non-tenpai, or it may become tenpai, and if it becomes non-tenpai, it is configured so that it becomes tenpai in the subsequent pseudo fluctuation.

Furthermore, the decision action is configured as follows.
(1) In a specific symbol variation that is a one-time symbol variation and results in a jackpot (for example, a super reach variation), the first decorative symbol in the first column (for example, "7" in the left column) and the second decorative symbol in the second column (for example, , the first decorative symbol of "7" in the right column becomes the same symbol, and after performing a tenpai action and performing a reach effect, it is configured to execute a super reach effect, which is a post-reach effect. There is. Then, in the super reach effect, the first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, "7" in the middle row) temporarily stops at the jackpot symbol, and a success pattern in which "777", which is the jackpot symbol combination, is displayed, and The first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, "8" in the middle row) temporarily stops at the losing symbol, displays "787", which is a losing symbol combination, and then executes the re-variation, resulting in a jackpot symbol combination. A revival pattern that displays "777" is included, and whether or not to execute the decisive action is determined depending on whether the jackpot is achieved via the success pattern or the jackpot via the revival pattern. It looks like this. Also, depending on whether you hit the jackpot via the success pattern or the jackpot via the resurrection pattern, you can choose the type of decisive action (for example, select and execute either decisive action A or decisive action B). ) may be configured differently. Further, if a jackpot is achieved via the resurrection pattern, the deciding action may not be executed, or a revival-specific deciding action may be executed in a manner different from the normal deciding action.

It is configured to perform a fluctuation start action, a fixed position action, and a swinging action in the normal symbol fluctuation of a loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol in a non-time reduction gaming state, In this non-time-saving gaming state, when the fluctuation starts due to the normal symbol fluctuation of losing, which depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side) Preferably, the device is configured to perform an action, a fixed position action, and a swinging action. In addition, in the normal symbol variation of a loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, at least one of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol and the fixed position action is not performed, while the shaking action of the first decorative symbol is performed, and in this time reduction game state, it depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side (the number of reservations on the second main game side It is preferable to perform a shaking action while not performing at least one of the action at the start of the fluctuation and the fixed position action in the normal symbol fluctuation of a loss (the fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the change) It is. For example, if the first main game symbol in a non-time saving gaming state is to perform a normal symbol variation (especially pending 1 → 0) in which the first main game symbol loses, an action at the start of variation and a fixed position action are performed, but the time is reduced. If the second main game symbol in the gaming state is a normal symbol variation (especially pending 1→0) in which the second main game symbol is a loss, at least one of the variation start action and the fixed position action may not be performed.

It is configured to perform a fluctuation start action, a fixed position action, and a swinging action in the normal symbol fluctuation of a loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol in a non-time reduction gaming state, In this non-time-saving gaming state, when the fluctuation starts due to the normal symbol fluctuation of losing, which depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side) Preferably, the device is configured to perform an action, a fixed position action, and a swinging action. In addition, in the normal symbol variation of the loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state While configuring the execution probability of at least one of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the fixed position action to be low compared to the normal pattern fluctuation of the loss of the first decorative pattern, the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. In this time-reduced gaming state, the normal symbol fluctuation for losing depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side (the fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side). In this case, it is preferable to configure the execution probability of at least one of the fluctuation start action and the fixed position action to be low, while the shaking action is performed. For example, if the first main game symbol in a non-time saving gaming state is to perform a normal symbol variation (especially pending 1 → 0) in which the first main game symbol loses, an action at the start of variation and a fixed position action are performed, but the time is reduced. If the second main game symbol in the gaming state is a normal symbol fluctuation (especially pending 1 → 0) that results in a loss, the execution probability of at least one of the fluctuation start action and fixed position action is configured to be low (for example, the pattern 1: action at the start of variation = 50%, action at fixed position = 100%, pattern 2: action at the start of variation = 100%, action at fixed position = 80%).

In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, at least one of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, and the deciding action. is not performed, while the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. Furthermore, in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state, the symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state. Compared to the fluctuation, the execution probability of at least one of the fluctuation start action, fixed position action, tenpai action, and deciding action of the first decorative pattern is configured to be low, while the swinging action of the first decorative pattern is configured to be performed. has been done.

Furthermore, the variable fixed time and the execution time of each action are configured as follows.
(1) The predetermined time until the shaking action is executed during the fluctuation standby state is longer than the fluctuation fixing time (for example, 500ms) of the first decorative symbol {the first decorative symbol is determined to stop when it is a losing symbol (the fluctuation fixing time is In some cases, the predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) after the elapse of the variable fixed time is set longer. By setting in this way, the time required to display a definitive stop display of the first decorative pattern is secured as the fluctuation fixed time, and the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during the pattern fluctuation (including during temporary stop) is secured. By applying this also during the variable standby state when the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, a boring screen (only the first decorative symbol is stopped) can be created even in the game standby state after the fixed variable time has elapsed. If the configuration is configured to avoid this (gives movement to the LCD screen), by configuring the shaking action to start after at least the fluctuation fixed time, the next fluctuation will start. This can prevent the user from being mistakenly identified as having done so.
(2) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation of a loss of 1 → 0 on hold, etc.), the execution time of 1 action other than the shaking action to be executed is: It is preferable that the duration is shorter than the execution time of the shaking action.
(3) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation of a loss of 1 → 0 on hold, etc.), the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action is It is preferable that the time is shorter than the total execution time of the action.
(4) In a specific symbol fluctuation that is a single symbol fluctuation (for example, reach fluctuation, normal symbol fluctuation of a loss of 1 → 0 on hold, etc.), the execution time of 1 action other than the shaking action is the fluctuation fixed time Although it is preferable that the period is shorter than the fixed period, it may be longer than the fixed period.
(5) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation of a hold 1 → 0 loss, etc.), the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action will vary. It is preferable that the time is longer than the fixed time.

Regarding the BGM (performance sound), as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the stage BGM is output during symbol fluctuation and during the fluctuation standby state, and when the symbol is fluctuating and the reach performance is in progress, It is configured to output reach BGM. At the start of the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state, the stage BGM is output (continued to be output after the fixed stop), but when the shaking action during the fluctuation standby state after the waiting movie is executed, the stage BGM is output. The stage BGM is configured not to be output at the start and during the shaking action. For example, at the timing when the first decorative symbol in (a3) of FIG. 169 and FIG. 177 is a losing symbol and is determined to stop (if there is a variable fixed time, after the fixed variable time has elapsed), the stage BGM is output. , the first decorative pattern in (d3) is a losing pattern and is fixed and stopped (if there is a fixed variable time, after the fixed variable time has elapsed), and then a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed and it is in a variable standby state. The stage BGM continues to be output even at the start of the first shaking action, but the timing after the shaking action of (d3) is executed {the first decorative pattern is a loss pattern and the fixed stop (variation is fixed) When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the elapse of the variable fixed time (if there is a time), the stage BGM is not output. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was confirmed and stopped (if there is a fluctuation fixed time, after the fluctuation fixed time has elapsed), the second (f3) shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is performed. This is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), but the stage BGM is not output at that time. In addition, the timing after the shaking action of (d3) is executed {the first decorative symbol is a losing symbol and the fixed stop (if there is a variable fixed time, after the elapse of the variable fixed time) and then a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapsed}, the stage BGM was configured not to be output, but if the stage BGM was configured not to be output when the waiting movie in (e3) is executed. good. Also, at the timing of executing the standby movie in (e3), a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed. In this case, an image object that is "power saving" and has a higher display priority than the standby movie is placed on standby. It is configured so that it is displayed over the middle movie and the stage BGM is not output. Furthermore, if an error is detected during the fluctuation standby state, the error will be detected even if it is at the start of the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state or at the start of the second shaking action during the fluctuation standby state. The error sound based on the detection of is configured to be output. By applying the shaking action of the first decorative symbol while the symbol is fluctuating (including when it is temporarily stopped) also during the fluctuating standby state when the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, it becomes boring even in the fluctuating standby state. It is possible to avoid making the screen (a screen where the first decorative pattern is only stationary), give movement to the LCD screen, and when the shaking action is started for the first time in the fluctuation standby state, the game Appropriate production output according to the fluctuating standby state, such as continuing to output the stage BGM to appeal to the machine, but stopping (muting) the output of the stage BGM to save power when the standby movie is displayed. It can be a mode.

Additionally, Reach Voice is configured as follows.
(1) Reach voice occurs when Tenpai action occurs.
(2) Even if the tenpai action when pseudo-linking after reach and the subsequent tenpai action are the same action, the reach voice may be different. For example, a tenpai action when performing a pseudo-connection after reaching will output "chance", and a subsequent tenpai action will output "gekiatsu".
(3) Even if there are multiple types of tenpai actions, and the tenpai action when pseudo-connecting after reaching is different from the subsequent tenpai action, the reach voice may be the same. For example, there are tenpai action A and tenpai action B, and the reach voice corresponding to tenpai action A and tenpai action B is only "chance".

Regarding the waiting movie, as explained in FIG. The state is such that the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the first decorative pattern is a losing pattern and the fixed stop (if there is a fixed variable time, after the fixed variable time has elapsed) is the same. It is composed of

The volume adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) The volume adjustment screen is displayed on the player's It can be displayed when the cross button SB-2 is operated. In this case, each action and the volume adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, even when each action is being executed, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed). Note that during the variable fixed time period, the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross button SB-2 is operated.
(2) Operate the cross button SB-2 during any of the following actions of the first decorative pattern: start action, fixed position action, tenpai action, shaking action (during fluctuation, waiting for fluctuation), and final action. The volume adjustment screen is configured to be displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed volume adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern are displayed overlappingly, and the display priority of the volume adjustment screen is set higher than that of the first decorative pattern. However, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured not to be displayed overlappingly.
(3) If the action of the first decorative symbol is an action while fluctuating, the second decorative symbol is fluctuating but no action is taken, and the action of the first decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (fluctuation standby state). When the action is a swinging action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (fluctuating standby state) and is configured not to perform an action. However, the overlapping relationship between the volume adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern is configured such that the volume adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern do not overlap with at least one first decorative pattern (for example, the first decorative pattern in the left column). Also, during fluctuation, the display time of the volume adjustment screen (the time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) is the time of the shaking action (the execution time of the shaking action of 1, the shaking This is the total time of the action, and is shorter than, for example, the execution time of the shaking action that is executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the left column until the final stop. action execution time, total action time). However, the display time of the volume adjustment screen can be extended (the display time timer is restarted or reset) by operating the cross button SB-2 again while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. Therefore, by operating the cross button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing the shaking action during the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the shaking action can be performed. The volume adjustment screen is configured to be displayed simultaneously during the entire time (period) during the game, or from the shaking action to the other actions or super reach.

Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) During any of the following actions, including the first decorative pattern fluctuation start action, fixed position action, tenpai action, shaking action (during fluctuation, fluctuation standby state), and final action, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed by the player. It can be displayed when the cross button SB-2 is operated. In this case, each action and the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, even when each action is being executed, the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed). Note that during the variable fixed time period, the light amount adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross button SB-2 is operated.
(2) Operate the cross button SB-2 during any of the following actions of the first decorative pattern: start action, fixed position action, tenpai action, shaking action (during fluctuation, waiting for fluctuation), and final action. The configuration is such that the light amount adjustment screen is displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed light amount adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern are displayed overlappingly, and the display priority of the light amount adjustment screen is set higher than that of the first decorative pattern. However, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured not to be displayed overlappingly.
(3) If the action of the first decorative symbol is an action while fluctuating, the second decorative symbol is fluctuating but no action is taken, and the action of the first decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (fluctuation standby state). When the action is a swinging action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (fluctuating standby state) and is configured not to perform an action. However, the overlapping relationship between the light amount adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern is such that it does not overlap with at least one first decorative pattern (for example, the first decorative pattern in the left column). Also, during fluctuation, the display time of the light intensity adjustment screen (the time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) is the time of the shaking action (the execution time of the shaking action of 1, the shaking This is the total time of the action, and is shorter than, for example, the execution time of the shaking action that is executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the left column until the final stop. (action execution time, total action time). However, the display time of the light amount adjustment screen can be extended (the display time timer is restarted or reset) by operating the cross button SB-2 again while the screen is displayed. Therefore, by operating the cross button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing the shaking action during the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the shaking action can be performed. The light amount adjustment screen is configured to be displayed simultaneously during the entire time (period) or from the shaking action to other actions or super reach. In addition, while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing a shaking action during the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed by one operation of the cross button SB-2. is displayed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed by one operation of the cross button SB-2 while the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, and the light intensity can be adjusted by one operation of the cross button SB-2 while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. By alternately repeating the display operation of the light amount adjustment screen and the display operation of the volume adjustment screen during the execution of the shaking action so as to display the adjustment screen, the shaking will be displayed for the entire time (period) during the shaking action. The light intensity adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen are configured to be displayed at the same time until the transition from action to other action or super reach. (In this case, the display of the light amount adjustment screen and the display of the volume adjustment screen are repeatedly switched over the entire time (period) during the shaking action or until the transition from the shaking action to other actions or super reach).

Additionally, the preview performance is structured as follows.
(1) The rate at which the preview performance occurs when the first decorative pattern changes at high speed is configured to be higher than the rate at which the preview performance occurs when the first decorative pattern decelerates and fluctuates or immediately before a temporary stop. In addition, the number of preview performances that can be executed when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed in the first symbol variation is configured to be larger than the number of preview performances that can be executed when the first decorative symbol changes at a slow speed or just before a temporary stop. . In addition, the number of candidates for advance notice performances that can be generated when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed in the first symbol variation is greater than the number of candidates for advance notice performances that can occur when the first decorative symbol is decelerated or immediately before a temporary stop. It is configured. When the first decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed, it is in a transparent state and no action is being executed, so if a preview effect is executed during high-speed fluctuation, the player can easily perform the preview effect. While it is visible, no action is taken when the first decorative pattern decelerates, but since the first decorative pattern is non-transparent, even if you perform a preview effect in this state. , making it difficult for players to visually recognize them. Immediately before the temporary stop, a fixed position action is executed, so even if a preview effect is executed in this state, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

Further, the sub-control unit uses the image data of the image object generated when displaying the second element of the first decorative pattern as data when displaying the second element of the second decorative pattern. For example, the sub-control unit (particularly the sub-sub control unit SS) controls a frame buffer in which image data of an image object to be displayed in the decorative pattern display area SG11 is stored, and an image control unit that controls display of the image data stored in the frame buffer. means (VDP), and an enlarging/reducing means for enlarging or reducing the image data stored in the frame buffer, and the enlarging/reducing means enlarges or reduces the image data of the stored image object when displaying the second element of the first decorative pattern. The image control means is configured to perform the reduction processing and display the image data processed by the enlargement/reduction means as the second element of the second decorative pattern. By using image data in this way, image objects can be efficiently generated.

As a supplementary note, in the sixth embodiment, an example was shown in which the second decorative pattern is always displayed during the fluctuating display and is always fixed, but as described above, the second decorative pattern is visible when the first decorative pattern is visible. It may be configured to be displayed when it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize, and in this case, the second decorative pattern does not always come to a fixed stop.

For each action (variation start action, fixed position action, swing action, tenpai action, decisive action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is a time reduction game state or a non-time reduction game state. Furthermore, whether or not to perform an action may be determined depending on whether the game is in a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state. Further, for each action (fluctuation start action, fixed position action, swing action, tenpai action, decisive action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is production stage A or production stage B. Further, whether or not to perform an action may be determined depending on whether the stage is production stage A or production stage B. Also, for each action (fluctuating start action, fixed position action, shaking action, tenpai action, decisive action), even if the action mode differs depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background). good. Further, whether or not to perform an action may be determined depending on whether the background is a normal background or a reachable background (super reachable background).

Regarding tenpai, we have explained that the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped and tenpai is started, but the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are may be temporarily stopped and tensed up at the same time. In this case, in the first (for example, the first) pseudo fluctuation, the first decorative pattern in the left row, the first decorative pattern in the right row are temporarily stopped and tensed up, and then the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle row. Then, the next (for example, second) pseudo fluctuation is started. Then, in the next pseudo fluctuation, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column temporarily stop and tense up at the same time, and then execute a reach effect or temporarily stop the pseudo continuous pattern. It is configured. In addition, when the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped and tensed at the same time, the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the right column are Position actions are initiated at the same time.

If a specific preview performance (for example, next preview performance) occurs during symbol variation, the fixed position action and tenpai action may not be performed. For example, if the next preview effect occurs during symbol variation, the super reach effect is executed without reaching tenpai and without becoming a normal reach effect. In this case, we want to ensure that the player can see the super reach effect, so the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are arranged so that it is difficult for the player to understand during the super reach effect. It is preferable not to perform a fixed position action or a tenpai action. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player that the player is at full strength at a timing that catches the player's surprise.

The mode of the action at the start of the fluctuation (whether the action at the start of the fluctuation is easy to execute or the action at the start of the fluctuation with high expectations The configuration may be such that the tendency (whether or not B is easy to execute) is different. For example, in the case of a red pending display for the effect of the relevant variation or the first pending display immediately before expiration, the action at the start of the variation is always executed, but a white (normal) pending display for the effect of the relevant variation or the first pending display immediately before expiration. In the case of a pending display, it is configured so that the action at the start of the variation is not always executed, or in the case of a red pending display for the production of the relevant fluctuation or the first pending display immediately before expiration, the relevant fluctuation is displayed in white (normal). It is possible to configure the system so that the rate at which the action is executed at the start of the variation is higher than in the case of the performance hold display of the change or the first hold display immediately before expiration, or the red hold display for the effect of the relevant change or the first hold display immediately before In the case of the 1 hold display, the rate at which action B is executed at the start of the change is configured to be higher than in the case of the white (normal) hold display for the production of the relevant change or the 1st hold display immediately before expiration. , in the case of the white (normal) performance hold display for the relevant fluctuation or the first hold display immediately before expiration, the time at the start of the fluctuation is higher than the red hold display for the performance of the relevant change or the first hold display immediately before expiration. The configuration is such that the rate at which action A is executed is high.

When enlarging by an action (variation start action, fixed position action, tenpai action), the first element and the second element may have different enlargement rates. For example, the first element may have a magnification factor of 1.4 times, but the second element may have a magnification factor of 1.1 times, or only the first element may be enlarged and the second element may not be enlarged. Further, regarding the shaking action, the amount of shaking movement may be made different between the first element and the second element. For example, when the display area of the first element is set to 1, the movement amount of the first element swings left and right by 0.1, but the movement amount of the second element is set to 1 when the display area of the second element is 1. In this case, it may be possible to swing left and right by 0.2 (or 0.05). However, it is desirable that the time required for one swing (period of one swing) be the same for both the first element and the second element.

In the explanations so far, we have explained how the first decorative symbols are displayed in each action, game state, and stage, such as "numbers" only or "numbers + characters." A third element may be added to the "numbers + characters" display mode. For example, in the case of only "numbers", it may be set as "numbers + effects", and in the case of "numbers + characters", it may be set as "numbers + characters + effects".

In FIGS. 12 and 13, the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the first main game symbol depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (first main game side The fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side), and the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the second main game symbol depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side, whether in the time reduction game state or the non-time reduction game state. (The fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side.) However, the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the first main game symbol is It does not depend on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the fluctuating selection tendency is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side), but in the non-time reduction gaming state it depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the tendency of fluctuation selection is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side). The fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations), and the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the second main game symbol depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side in the time reduction gaming state (the tendency of fluctuation selection differs depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side). However, in the non-time reduction gaming state, it does not depend on the number of reservations on the second main game side (the fluctuation selection tendency is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side). You may.

Determination of the fluctuation mode in the description of pending 4 → 3, pending 3 → 2, pending 2 → 1, pending 1 → 0, pending 4 → 3, pending 3 → 2, pending 2 → 1, pending 1 → 0 The determination of the variation mode and the symbol variation on the lottery table correspond as follows. When the hold is 4 → 3 and the hold is 4 → 3, the change mode is determined by referring to the number of holds = 3 in determining the change mode in the lottery table for determining the change mode, and the symbol change is performed using this determined change mode. is designed to be executed. When the hold is 3 → 2 and the hold is 3 → 2, the change mode is determined by referring to the number of holds = 2 in determining the change mode in the lottery table for determining the change mode, and the symbol change is performed using this determined change mode. is designed to be executed. When pending is 2 → 1 and pending 2 → 1, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of pending = 1 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the symbol variation is determined using this determined variation mode. is designed to be executed. When pending is 1 → 0 and pending 1 → 0, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of pending = 0 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the symbol variation is determined using this determined variation mode. is designed to be executed.

In FIG. 127, the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are respectively displayed separately. However, as shown in FIG. Good too.

In FIGS. 143 to 167, the explanation was given using an example in which the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the first main game side were displayed, but the first pending display on the second main game side It may also be configured to display a second hold display on the second main game side.

In addition, in FIGS. 143 to 167, the explanation has been given using an example in which the second decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode, but it may also be configured such that the second decorative symbol does not become the ready-to-reach mode (it is always fluctuating until it stops fixed). .

<<Configuration related to display device>>
Here, in the embodiment described above, as a display device on the main control board side, the first main game symbol display device A20 (first main game symbol display section A21g) is a display device that mainly displays the first main game symbol. and a first main game symbol holding display section A21h), and a second main game symbol display device B20 (second main game symbol display section) which is a display device that mainly displays the second main game symbols. B21g and a second main game symbol holding display section B21h), and an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 (auxiliary game symbol display section H21g and an auxiliary game symbol display device H20, which is a display device that mainly displays auxiliary game symbols). Although the configuration includes three display devices (a symbol display device including a symbol holding display section H21h), the structure (position, size, shape, etc.) are not limited to these. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which a display device on the main control board side that displays a first main game symbol, a second main game symbol, an auxiliary game symbol, etc. different from the configuration described above is one display device will be described in detail below. . Further, although details will be described later, the configuration below also includes a display device on the sub-control board side. As a supplementary note, one or more configurations detailed below may be applied to all configurations in this specification without any problem.

First, FIG. 182 is a front view of the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example. The difference from this embodiment is that a main display device MH20 controlled by a main control board M and a sub display device SH20 controlled by a sub control board S are provided. The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 provided in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment are the main display device in this example. The main display device MH20 is a part of the device MH20, and details of the main display device MH20 will be described later.

In addition, when a jackpot starts, there is a round indicator light R10 that indicates the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot in two 7 segments, and a sticker that displays the correspondence between the round indicator light R10 and the number of rounds of the jackpot. It has a round display section R20.

<Display device on main control board side>
Next, FIG. 183 shows the detailed configuration of the display device. The main display device MH20 in (a) includes a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g, a first main game symbol reserve display section A21h, and a second main game symbol reserve display section B21h. , an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g, and an auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h are integrated into a display device.

The first main game symbol display section A21g is composed of eight lamps. Here, the lamp in this example is a display window that allows the player to see the lighting from outside the gaming machine when the LED inside the display section is lit, and the area of this display window (where the LED is lit) The larger the area (visibly visible to the player so that the player can recognize flashing and turning off), the larger the area through which the LED light passes.In other words, the larger the lamp, the larger the area through which the LED light passes. Note that there are as many display windows as there are corresponding to each LED inside the display unit (for example, if there are 8 LEDs, a display window is provided for each of the 8 LEDs, and the total number of display windows is There will be 8 of them). Further, the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the lamp indicates that the player appears to be lighting, blinking, and extinguishing the lamp through the display window. Here, "on" means that the LED is emitting light (e.g., emitting light for 10ms or more), and "off" means that the LED is not emitting light (e.g., not emitting light for more than 10ms). This means that the LED repeatedly emits and does not emit light at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 20 ms). In addition, in blinking, the time of light emission and non-light emission may be different (for example, the time of light emission may be 20 ms and the time of extinguishment may be 40 ms). In addition, it should be noted that "lighting up" described below may also include "lighting up" in "blinking" (it may also include "lighting up" in repeating "lighting on" and "turning off"). . For example, if it is stated that lamp A and lamp B are lit in the same color during a certain period, if lamp A continues to be lit during a certain period and lamp B continues to be lit during a certain period, the lighting It may be applied to the color of lamp A that blinks during a certain period (for example, 20 ms on → 20 ms off → 20 ms on...) and lamp B blinks during a certain period (for example, 20 ms on → 20 ms off → 20 ms). It may be applied to the color of lighting (the color of lighting for 20 ms) in the case of lighting (lighting...). Note that the lamp or the display window may be referred to as an area where lighting of the lamp can be visually recognized.

Note that a combination of "on/flashing/lights out" or a combination of "lights on/off" may be referred to as a lighting pattern, and specifically, the following may be referred to as a lighting pattern.
(1) Combination of lighting, flashing, and turning off of multiple lamps at a certain timing (2) Pattern of lighting, flashing, and turning off of one lamp that changes over time (3) Time series of multiple lamps Note that the above (1) to (3) do not need to include blinking.

Further, as described above, the size of the lamp also indicates the size of the display window (the area through which the light of the LED is transmitted). Furthermore, as described above, blinking means that the LED repeats emitting and non-emitting light at predetermined time intervals, that is, repeating lighting and extinguishing at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined period of time for blinking is a certain period or more (for example, a period of 20 ms or more), but when lighting an LED in dynamic lighting, in other words, an extremely short interval (for example, an interval of 4 ms, which is an interval of less than 20 ms). ), when the light is repeatedly turned on and off to give the appearance of being lit rather than blinking, it is referred to as lighting for convenience. For example, when dynamic lighting is used to blink an LED at 20ms intervals, the lighting pattern will be "20ms on → 20ms off → 20ms on...", and even in this "20ms on", it is actually extremely short. Lighting and extinguishing are repeated at time intervals (eg, intervals of 4 ms, which are less than 20 ms), but for convenience, they are referred to as lighting.

The first main game symbol display section A21g is composed of eight lamps. The first main game symbol display section A21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol. The first main game symbol display section A21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the stopped symbol in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped, and in a situation where the first main game symbol is changing (for example, In a situation where steps 1417 in FIG. 10 to step 1423 in FIG. 10 related to the 1 main game symbol display process are changing), the lights are lit in a lighting pattern indicating that the symbols are changing. In addition, in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped, eight lamps are lit in one combination of turning on and turning off (a combination of turning on and off of multiple lamps is sometimes referred to as a lighting pattern). On the other hand, in a situation where the first main game symbol is changing, the eight lamps are configured to light up while changing the combination of lighting and extinguishing at predetermined time intervals. For example, in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the 8 lamps are "○○○●●●○○" (the upper left lamp of the 8 lamps in Figure 183 is the left end). , clockwise, ○ indicates off, ● indicates on), and in a situation where the first main game symbol is a losing symbol and has stopped, the eight lamps will indicate "○●●○○ ○○○", and in a situation where the first main game symbol is changing, the 8 lamps are "●○○○○○○○→○●○○○○○○→○○●○○○○ ○→○○○●○○○○...'', one lamp is lit and the lamps that are lit clockwise may be changed. In addition, another aspect of the situation where the first main game symbol is changing is "●●●●●●●●→○○○○○○○○→●●●●●●●●→○○ It may be configured so that eight lamps blink at the same time, such as "○○○○○○...".

The second main game symbol display section B21g is composed of eight lamps. The second main game symbol display section B21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol display section B21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the stopped symbol in a situation where the second main game symbol is stopped, and in a situation where the second main game symbol is fluctuating (for example, In a situation where steps 1417 in FIG. 10 to step 1423 in FIG. 10 related to the 2nd main game symbol display process are fluctuating), the lights are lit in a lighting pattern indicating that they are fluctuating. In addition, in a situation where the second main game symbol is stopped, eight lamps are lit in one combination of turning on and turning off (a combination of turning on and turning off multiple lamps is sometimes referred to as a lighting pattern). On the other hand, in a situation where the second main game symbol is changing, the eight lamps are configured to light up while changing the combination of lighting and extinguishing at predetermined time intervals. For example, in a situation where the second main game symbol is stopped at a jackpot symbol, the eight lamps are "○○○●●●○○" (the upper left lamp of the eight lamps in Figure 183 is the leftmost lamp). , are written clockwise, ○ indicates off and ● indicates on), and in a situation where the second main game symbol is a losing symbol and has stopped, the eight lamps will indicate "○●●○○ ○○○'', and in a situation where the second main game symbol is changing, the 8 lamps will change to ``●○○○○○○○→○●○○○○○○→○○●○○○○ ○→○○○●○○○○...'', one lamp is lit and the lamps that are lit clockwise may be changed. In addition, another aspect of the situation where the second main game symbol is changing is "●●●●●●●●→○○○○○○○○→●●●●●●●●→○○ It may be configured such that eight lamps blink at the same time, such as "○○○○○○...".

The first main game symbol reservation display section A21h is composed of two lamps. The first main game side is configured to be able to store up to four pending items, and is configured to indicate the status of 0 to 4 pending items using two lamps. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184, the lighting pattern is as follows.
If there are 0 pending items: 2 lamps are off. If 1 item is pending: 1 lamp (upper A21h) is on, 1 lamp (lower A21h) is off. If 2 items are pending: 2 lamps. If 3 lamps are pending: 1 lamp (upper A21h) is blinking, 1 lamp (lower A21h) is pending: 2 lamps are blinking. By configuring the system so that when one lamp is lit, it indicates that there is one item on hold, and when one lamp is blinking, it indicates that there are two items on hold, one lamp will notify that there are two items on hold. With two lamps, it is possible to notify the number of reservations from 0 to 4 (the number of reservations that is greater than the number of lamps). The number of lamps in the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h is just an example, and the number of reservations is notified only by turning on and off the four lamps.If one lamp is lit, the number of reservations is 2. If one lamp is flashing, it indicates one pending item.There is no problem if you change it. In addition, when there is one item on hold, one lamp (lower A21h) is lit and one lamp (upper side A21h) is turned off, and when there are three items on hold, one lamp (lower side A21h) is turned off. A21h) may blink and one lamp (upper A21h) may be lit.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 183, the second main game symbol reservation display section B21h is composed of two lamps. The second main game side is configured to be able to store up to four pending items, and is configured to indicate the status of 0 to 4 pending items using two lamps. The lighting pattern is the same as that of the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h. The number of lamps on the second main game symbol reservation display section B21h is just an example, and the number of reservations is notified only by turning on and off the four lamps.If one lamp is lit, the number of reservations is 2. If one lamp is blinking, it indicates one pending item.There is no problem if you change it. In addition, when there is one item on hold, one lamp (lower B21h) is lit and one lamp (upper side B21h) is turned off, and when there are three items on hold, one lamp (lower side B21h) is turned off. B21h) may blink and one lamp (upper B21h) may be lit.

The auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h is composed of two lamps. The system is configured such that up to four reservations on the auxiliary game side can be stored, and two lamps indicate the status of reservations 0 to 4. The lighting pattern is the same as that of the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h. The number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h is just an example, and the number of reservations is notified only by turning on and off the four lamps.If one lamp is lit, two reservations are announced. There is no problem if you change it so that if one lamp is blinking, it indicates one pending item. Further, there is no problem in changing the upper limit of the number of reservations that can be stored on the auxiliary game side, and in that case, the number of lamps and the lighting pattern may be adjusted to match the upper limit of the number of reservations that can be stored.

The auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is composed of four lamps. The auxiliary game symbol display section H21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the auxiliary game symbol. In a situation where the auxiliary game symbol is stopped, it is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the stopped symbol, and in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol is changing (for example, from step 1222 in FIG. 7 to step 1226 in FIG. 7 is changing). (in a situation where the light is changing), the light will be lit in a lighting pattern that indicates that the light is changing. In addition, in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol is stopped, the four lamps are configured to light up in a combination of 1 on and off, while in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol is fluctuating, the 4 lamps are turned on. The lamps are configured to turn on while changing the combination of turning on and off at predetermined time intervals. As an example, in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol hits and stops at symbol A, the four lamps are "●●●●" (the upper left lamp of the four lamps in Figure 183 is the left end, and the characters are written clockwise. (○ indicates off, ● indicates lighting), and in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol hits and stops at symbol B, the four lamps will become "●●○○" and the auxiliary game symbol will be turned on. In a situation where the winning symbol is stopped at C, the 4 lamps will become "○○●●", and in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol is stopped at a losing symbol, the 4 lamps will be "○○○○". , in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the four lamps will be 1 like "●○○○→○●○○→○○●○→○○○●→●○○○..." It may be configured such that the lamps are turned on and the lamps that are turned on are changed in a clockwise direction. In addition, another example of a situation where the auxiliary game symbols are changing is that four lamps are It may be configured to blink at the same time. In this case, when the winning symbol A of the auxiliary game symbol stops in the time reduction game state, the opening pattern of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d becomes "open for 5 seconds → closed". , When the winning symbol B of the auxiliary game symbol stops in the time reduction game state, the opening pattern of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is "2 seconds open → 1 second closed → 2 seconds open → closed" Therefore, when the winning symbol C of the auxiliary game symbol stops in the time reduction game state, the opening pattern of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is "1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 Closed for 1 second → Opened for 1 second → Closed", and in the non-time reduction game state, even if any of the auxiliary game symbols A to C stop, the opening pattern of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is "0. It may also be configured such that the opening changes for 1 second and then closes.

The main display device MH20 shown in FIG. 183(a) includes a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g, a first main game symbol reservation display section A21h, and a second main game symbol display section A21g. In the main game symbol retention display section B21h, the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g, and the auxiliary game symbol retention display section H21h, all the lamps are the same size (the area of the display window is the same). They are configured to light up or blink in the same color (for example, red). Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sizes, lighting colors, and blinking colors of some of the lamps may be different (for example, the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g in the main display device MH20 and the lamps of the second main game symbol The lamp of the symbol display section B21g is made larger than the lamps of other display sections in the main display device MH20, and the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g and the lamp of the second main game symbol display section B21g of the main display device MH20. may be red, and the lamps of other display sections in the main display device MH20 may be blue).

<Display device on the sub-control board side>
Next, (b) of FIG. 183 illustrates the sub display device SH20, which includes a first sub symbol display section AS21g, a second sub symbol display section BS21g, and a first sub pending display section. This is a display device in which the section AS21h and the second sub-hold display section BS21h are integrated.

The first sub-symbol display section AS21g is composed of one lamp. The first sub symbol display section AS21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol. In a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a jackpot symbol, it continues to be lit, and in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a loss symbol, it continues to be turned off, and the first main game symbol changes. In a situation where the symbols are displayed (for example, a situation where steps 1417 in FIG. 10 to step 1423 in FIG. 10 related to the first main game symbol display process are fluctuating), the symbols will continue to blink. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the first sub-symbol display section AS21g may be composed of a plurality of lamps. Furthermore, the fact that the first sub-symbol display section AS21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the situation where the first main game symbol is stopped is sometimes referred to as a stop display. The fact that the sub symbol display section AS21g continues to be lit or continues to be turned off is sometimes referred to as a stop display.

Further, when the first main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The first main game symbol stops at the jackpot symbol, and the lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g lights up.
(2) A jackpot is executed, and the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains lit even during the jackpot. If a power outage occurs during the jackpot, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g will go out, and if the power is restored afterwards, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g will remain off even during the jackpot. .
(3-1) If no reservation has occurred on either the first main game side or the second main game side when the jackpot ends, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains lit even after the jackpot ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (the game enters a standby state). If the power is cut off while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains lit, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g will turn off, and if the power is restored afterwards, the first sub-symbol display will be displayed. The lamp of section AS21g remains off.
(3-2) If the first main game side is on hold at the end of the jackpot, but the second main game side is not on hold, after the jackpot ends, the first main game symbol will be triggered by the start of fluctuation. Then, the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g changes from lighting to blinking. When the power is cut off in this state, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g goes out, and when the power is restored thereafter, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains off.
(3-3) When the first main game side has not been suspended at the end of the jackpot, but the second main game side has been held, the first sub-symbol display section AS21g will be displayed even after the jackpot has ended. The lamp remains lit, and the lighting pattern of the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g, which will be described later, changes from lighting to blinking. When the power is cut off in this state, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g go out, and when the power is restored afterwards, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section AS21g turn off. The lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off.
It may be configured as described above.

Further, when the first main game symbol is stopped as a losing symbol, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The first main game symbol stops at a losing symbol, and the lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g goes out.
(2-1) After the first main game symbol has stopped as a losing symbol, if no hold has occurred on either the first or second main game side, the lamp on the first sub symbol display section AS21g is turned off. It will remain as it is. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (the game enters a standby state).
(2-2) If the first main game symbol is suspended after the first main game symbol stops with a losing symbol, the first sub symbol display section will be The lighting pattern of the AS21g lamp changes from off to blinking.
(3) If the power is cut off while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains off, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g will remain off, and if the power is restored afterwards, , the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains off.
It may be configured as described above.

Further, during symbol variation (during jackpot variation) in which the first main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) During the jackpot fluctuation of the first main game symbol, the lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g blinks.
(2-1) If the power is cut off while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains blinking, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g will turn off, and if the power is restored afterwards, The lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains off, and then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first main game symbol ends and the jackpot symbol stops, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g lights up. It remains lit even during the execution of a jackpot.
(2-2) If the power is cut off while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains blinking, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g will turn off, and if the power is restored afterwards, The lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains off, and even after the jackpot fluctuation of the first main game symbol ends and the jackpot symbol stops, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g remains off. , the light remains off even while the jackpot is being executed.
It may be configured as described above. Note that the above-described configurations may be combined, for example, a configuration related to jackpot fluctuations and a configuration related to jackpot execution may be combined.

Furthermore, the lighting pattern of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a jackpot symbol, the lighting pattern of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g continues to be lit in red, and the first In a situation where the 1st main game symbol is stopped at a losing symbol, it continues to be lit in green.In other words, depending on the lighting color of the lamp, the 1st main game symbol is stopped at a jackpot symbol or stopped at a losing symbol. It may also be configured to notify whether there is a person present. In the case of this configuration, when the first main game symbol is changing, it is desirable that the lighting pattern of the first sub symbol display section AS21g is blinking in green.

The second sub-symbol display section BS21g is composed of one lamp. The second sub symbol display section BS21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the second main game symbol. In a situation where the second main game symbol is stopped at a jackpot symbol, it continues to be lit, and in a situation where the second main game symbol is stopped at a loss symbol, it continues to be turned off and the second main game symbol changes. In a situation where the symbols are displayed (for example, a situation where steps 1417 in FIG. 10 to step 1423 in FIG. 10 related to the second main game symbol display process are fluctuating), the symbols will continue to blink. In this way, since the second sub-symbol display section BS21g is one lamp, it is possible to notify whether it is changing or stopped, but the lighting pattern continues to turn off when it is stopped. It is configured such that it is not possible to notify the stopped symbol by the lighting pattern. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the second sub-symbol display section BS21g may be composed of a plurality of lamps. Furthermore, the fact that the second sub-symbol display section BS21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the situation where the second main game symbol is stopped is sometimes referred to as a stop display. The fact that the sub-symbol display section BS21g continues to be lit or continues to be turned off is sometimes referred to as a stop display.

Further, when the second main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The second main game symbol stops at the jackpot symbol, and the lamp of the second sub symbol display section BS21g lights up.
(2) A jackpot is executed, and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains lit even during the jackpot. If a power outage occurs during the jackpot, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g will go out, and if the power is restored afterwards, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g will remain off even during the jackpot. .
(3-1) If no reservation occurs on either the first main game side or the second main game side when the jackpot ends, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains lit even after the jackpot ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (the game enters a standby state). If the power is cut off while the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains lit, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g will turn off, and if the power is restored afterwards, the second sub-symbol display will be displayed. The lamp of section BS21g remains off.
(3-2) When the first main game side is on hold at the end of the jackpot, and the second main game side is not on hold, the lamp on the second sub-symbol display section BS21g will be displayed even after the jackpot ends. remains lit, and the lighting pattern of the lamp in the first sub-symbol display section AS21g changes from lighting to blinking. When the power is cut off in this state, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g go out, and when the power is restored afterwards, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section AS21g turn off. The lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off.
(3-3) If there is a hold on the second main game side at the end of the jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the lamp on the second sub-symbol display section BS21g lights up when the second main game symbol starts to fluctuate. The lighting pattern changes from flashing to blinking. When the power is cut off in this state, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g goes out, and when the power is restored thereafter, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off.
It may be configured as described above.

Further, when the second main game symbol stops at a losing symbol, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The second main game symbol stops at the losing symbol, and the lamp of the second sub symbol display section BS21g goes out.
(2-1) After the second main game symbol has stopped as a losing symbol, if no hold has occurred on either the first or second main game side, the lamp on the second sub symbol display section BS21g is turned off. It will remain as it is. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (the game enters a standby state).
(2-2) After the second main game symbol stops with a losing symbol, if a hold on the second main game side occurs, the second sub symbol display section is triggered by the start of fluctuation of the second main game symbol. The lighting pattern of the BS21g lamp changes from off to blinking.
(3) If the power is cut off while the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off, and when the power is restored afterwards, , the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off.
It may be configured as described above.

Further, during symbol variation (during jackpot variation) in which the second main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, the following structure may be adopted.
(1) During the jackpot fluctuation of the second main game symbol, the lamp of the second sub symbol display section BS21g blinks.
(2-1) If the power is cut off while the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains blinking, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g will turn off, and if the power is restored afterwards, The lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off, and then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second main game symbol ends and the jackpot symbol stops, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g lights up. It remains lit even during the execution of a jackpot.
(2-2) If the power is cut off while the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains blinking, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g will turn off, and if the power is restored afterwards, The lamp on the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off, and even after the jackpot fluctuation of the second main game symbol ends and the jackpot symbol stops, the lamp on the second sub-symbol display section BS21g remains off. , the light remains off even while the jackpot is being executed.
It may be configured as described above. Note that the above-described configurations may be combined, for example, a configuration related to jackpot fluctuations and a configuration related to jackpot execution may be combined.

In addition, the lighting pattern of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, in a situation where the second main game symbol is stopped at a jackpot symbol, the lighting pattern of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g continues to be lit in red, and In a situation where the 2nd main game symbol is stopped at a losing symbol, it continues to be lit in green.In other words, depending on the lighting color of the lamp, the 2nd main game symbol is stopped at a jackpot symbol or stopped at a losing symbol. It may also be configured to notify whether there is a person present. In the case of this configuration, when the second main game symbol is changing, it is desirable that the lighting pattern of the second sub symbol display section BS21g is blinking in green.

Although the first sub-symbol display section AS21g is configured to blink while the first main game symbol is changing, the first decorative symbol temporarily stops at the pseudo-continuous pattern while the first main game symbol is changing. The first sub-symbol display section AS21g may be configured to blink even during this period. When configured in this way, the blinking interval of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g is shorter than the period during which the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, the second sub-symbol display section BS21g is configured to blink while the second main game symbol is fluctuating, but the first decorative symbol temporarily stops at the pseudo-continuous symbol while the second main game symbol is fluctuating. The second sub-symbol display section BS21g may be configured to blink even during this period. When configured in this way, the blinking interval of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g is shorter than the period during which the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous pattern.

The first sub-hold display section AS21h is composed of two lamps. The first main game side is configured to be able to store up to four pending items, and is configured to indicate the status of 0 to 4 pending items using two lamps. More specifically, the lighting pattern is as follows (same as in FIG. 184).
If there are 0 pending items: 2 lamps are off. If 1 item is pending: 1 lamp (AS21h on the left) is on, 1 lamp (AS21h on the right side) is off. If 2 items are pending: 2 lamps. When 3 lamps are pending: 1 lamp (AS21h on the left) is blinking; when 4 lamps are pending (AS21h on the right): 2 lamps are blinking. In this way, 1 lamp is blinking. By configuring the system so that when the lamp is lit, it indicates 1 pending item, and when one lamp is flashing, it indicates 2 pending items, the number of pending items can be changed from 0 to 4 depending on the 2 lamps. can be notified. Note that the number of lamps on the first sub-hold display section AS21h is just an example; the number of holds is notified only by turning on and off the four lamps, and if one lamp is lit, two are on hold. There is no problem if you change it so that if one lamp is blinking, it indicates one pending item. Also, if there is one item on hold, one lamp (AS21h on the right side) is lit and one lamp (AS21h on the left side) is off, and if there are three items on hold, one lamp (AS21h on the right side) is turned off. The configuration may be such that the icon blinks and one lamp (AS21h on the left side) lights up.

In addition, in a predetermined display area of the performance display device SG, a display section corresponding to the reservation on the first main game side (as described above in FIG. 126, A second hold display) may also be provided. Further, it may be configured to have a first sub-hold display section AS21h and a second hold display (displayed in a predetermined display area of the effect display device SG), or it may be configured to have only one of them. In this example, a configuration having only the first sub-hold display section AS21h will be described in detail, but in all configurations in this specification, the first sub-hold display section AS21h is replaced with the second sub-hold display section AS21h. Please note that there is no problem with configuring this.

The second sub-hold display section BS21h is composed of two lamps. The second main game side is configured to be able to store up to four pending items, and is configured to indicate the status of 0 to 4 pending items using two lamps. The lighting pattern of the second sub-suspension display section BS21h is the same as that of the first sub-suspension display section AS21h. Note that the number of lamps on the second sub-hold display section BS21h is just an example; the number of holds is notified only by turning on and off the four lamps, and if one lamp is lit, it indicates that two lamps are on hold. There is no problem if you change it so that if one lamp is blinking, it indicates one pending item. Also, if there is one item on hold, one lamp (BS21h on the right side) is lit and one lamp (BS21h on the left side) is turned off, and if there are three items on hold, one lamp (BS21h on the right side) is turned on. The configuration may be such that the BS21h on the left side blinks and one lamp (BS21h on the left side) lights up.

In addition, in a predetermined display area of the performance display device SG, a display section corresponding to the reservation on the second main game side (as described above in FIG. 126, A second hold display) may also be provided. Further, it may be configured to have a second sub-hold display section BS21h and a second hold display (displayed in a predetermined display area of the effect display device SG), or it may be configured to have only one of them. In addition, in this example, a configuration having only the second sub-hold display part BS21h will be described in detail, but for all the configurations in this specification, the second sub-hold display part BS21h is replaced with the second hold display. I would like to add that there is no problem with this configuration.

The first sub-symbol display section AS21g, the second sub-symbol display section BS21g, the first sub-scheduled display section AS21h, and the second sub-scheduled display section that constitute the sub-display device SH20 shown in FIG. 183(b) BS21h is configured such that all the lamps are the same size (the area of the display window is the same), and all the lamps light up and blink in the same color. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sizes, lighting colors, and blinking colors of some of the lamps in the sub display device SH20 may be different (for example, the lamps in the first sub symbol display section AS21g in the sub display device SH20 and The lamp of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g is made larger than the lamps of other display sections in the sub-display device SH20, and the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the second sub-symbol display section BS21g of the sub-display device SH20 are made larger. The lamp may be red, and the lamps of other display sections in the sub-display device SH20 may be blue). However, it is preferable that the size of each lamp in the sub display device SH20 is larger than the size of each lamp in the main display device MH20.

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, all eight lamps of the main display device MH20 are the same size, all eight lamps of the sub display device SH20 are all the same size, and the main display device MH20 is of the same size. Each of the lamps constituting the sub-display device SH20 is configured to be smaller than each lamp constituting the sub-display device SH20. Note that if the lamps in one display device are configured so that they are not all the same in size, the smallest lamp in the sub display device SH20 is configured to be larger than the largest lamp in the main display device MH20. Alternatively, the average size of the lamps of the sub display device SH20 may be larger than the average size of the lamps of the main display device MH20. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the lamps on the main control board side (the lamps on the main display device MH20) and the lamps on the sub-control board side (the lamps on the sub-display device SH20), and which one is the main one. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which lamp on the control board side is the lamp on the sub-control board side. In addition, by increasing the size of the lamp on the sub-control board side and configuring it with a single lamp, sufficient visibility can be ensured in the limited board area, while on the other hand, on the main control board side, By reducing the size of the lamp and configuring it with a plurality of lamps, it is possible to realize a variety of combinations when indicating stop symbols. Furthermore, by making the lamps on the sub-control board side more conspicuous (different sizes) than the lamps on the main control board side, the lamps on the main control board side (main display device MH20) can be watched more easily. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the result of a game is easily recognized. Note that when the term "same" is used in this specification, such as when the sizes of the lamps are the same, the term "same" is not limited to completely the same, and may also include the case where the lamps are substantially the same.

In addition, the lamp of the main display device MH20 and the lamp of the sub display device SH20 may be different from each other, such that the lamp of the main display device MH20 lights up and blinks in red, while the lamp of the sub display device SH20 lights up and blinks in green. The lighting color and the lighting color may be made different. With this configuration, it is possible to easily distinguish between the lamps on the main control board side and the lamps on the sub control board side. Note that the configuration may be applied to all lamps or only to some lamps. As an example of applying only to some lamps, the first main game symbol pending display section A21h and the second main game symbol pending display section B21h light up and flash in red, while the first sub pending display The section AS21h and the second sub-hold display section BS21h may be configured to light up or blink in green (in this case, all other lamps on the main control board side and lamps on the sub-control board side are red). It is preferable that the color be green, but it can also be green or any other color). As another preferred example, among the lamps of the main display device MH20 and the lamps of the sub display device SH20, only the lamps of the first sub symbol display section AS21g and the lamps of the second sub symbol display section BS21g are lit in green. The other lamps are configured to light up and flash only in red, and the lamps in the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the lamps on the second sub-symbol display section BS21g are configured to stop at the winning symbol. It is configured so that it lights up in red, lights up in green when it stops due to a losing symbol, and blinks in green when it is changing. In this way, when the symbol is fluctuating, by flashing it in a color different from the lighting color when stopping at a winning symbol, it can be made clear that the symbol is fluctuating and that it is not yet determined whether it is a win or a loss.

Furthermore, the number of lighting and blinking colors of the lamps may be different between the lamps on the main control board and the lamps on the sub-control board. For example, the lamp on the main display device MH20 may be lit and blinking only in red, while the lamp on the sub display device SH20 may be lit and blinking in either green or blue (or alternatively, it may be lit in green and red). (It may be made to light up or blink in either of the following directions). Note that the configuration may be applied to all lamps or only to some lamps. As an example of applying only to some lamps, the first main game symbol pending display section A21h and the second main game symbol pending display section B21h light up and flash in red, while the first sub pending display The section AS21h and the second sub-hold display section BS21h may be configured to light up or blink in green and blue (or green and red). In addition, the number of lighting and flashing colors of the lamps may be two types for the main control board side and three types for the sub control board side, or one type of lamp for the main control board side and one type for the sub control board side. There may be two types of lamps on the board side, three types of lamps on the main control board side, and two types of lamps on the sub control board side. Note that the number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors of a lamp refers to the number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors that can be produced by one type of lamp (for example, the number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors that can be obtained with one type of lamp (for example, the number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors of the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h of the main display device MH20). The number of types of lighting and blinking colors that can be adopted by a lamp) or the number of types of lighting and blinking colors that can be adopted by multiple types of lamps (for example, the number of types of lighting and blinking colors that can be adopted by multiple types of lamps) (number of possible lighting and flashing colors).

In this way, by setting the lamps on the main control board side to one color (or reducing the number of colors relatively), it becomes difficult to distinguish the lamps corresponding to each display section, making it difficult to recognize the results of the game. At the same time, by using a plurality of colors of lamps on the sub-control board side (or using a relatively large number of colors), the lamps corresponding to each display section can be easily distinguished, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 183, the number of lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g is 8, the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is 4, and the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is 8. The number of lamps on the first main game symbol display section A21g is greater than the number of lamps. In addition, the number of lamps on the second main game symbol display section B21g is eight, and the number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is four, which is a second number than the number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. The number of lamps on the main game symbol display section B21g is greater. With this configuration, when a player who is more interested in symbol variations in the main game symbols than in symbol variations in the auxiliary game symbols visually recognizes the main display device MH20, the main game symbol display section (first The main game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g may be collectively referred to as the main game symbol display section). As shown in FIG. 183, the number of lamps in the main game symbol display section (first main game symbol display section A21g and second main game symbol display section B21g) is greater than the number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. The number of lamps related to the main game symbols may be greater than the number of lamps related to the auxiliary game symbols.

In addition, the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is 4, and the number of lamps in the first sub symbol display section AS21g is 1. The number of lamps in the symbol display section H21g is greater. In addition, the number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is four, and the number of lamps on the second sub symbol display section BS21g is one, and the number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is greater than the number of lamps on the second sub symbol display section BS21g. The number of lamps in the symbol display section H21g is greater. With this configuration, the lamp of the sub-symbol display section (the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the second sub-symbol display section BS21g may be collectively referred to as the sub-symbol display section) on the sub-control board side. By making the number of lamps smaller than not only the number of lamps on the main game symbol display section on the main control board side but also the number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g on the main control board side, the number of lamps on the main control board side can be reduced. The game symbol display section can be made more conspicuous. As shown in FIG. 183, the number of lamps in the sub-symbol display section (the total number of lamps on the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and second sub-symbol display section BS21g) is greater than the number of lamps on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. It may be configured such that the number of lamps is increased.

<Lighting pattern of main game symbol display section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an example of the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g will be described in detail. First, in (1) in the figure, the first main game symbol has stopped losing symbols, and four lamps are lit. After that, when the first main game symbol starts to fluctuate, it changes in the order of "(2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (2) → (3)..." every predetermined time. The first main game symbol display section A21g is lit in a lighting pattern that switches the lamps lit every 50 ms (for example, 50 ms). Here, no matter how the stop symbols (including not only losing symbols but also winning symbols) of the first main game symbol are stopped (whatever the combination pattern of lighting and extinguishing is), the first main game symbol When the symbol starts to fluctuate, the change immediately after the symbol starts to fluctuate will always be (2) in FIG. 185. This also applies to the second main game symbols. In this example, at least one of the lamps that is lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. In addition, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. It is configured to turn off.

Furthermore, when the first main game symbol is stopped, the first decorative symbol is stopped, the second decorative symbol is stopped, and the first sub symbol display section AS21g is also lit or extinguished in response to the stop display. There is. Furthermore, while the first main game symbol is changing, the first decorative symbol is fluctuating, the second decorative symbol is fluctuating, and the first sub symbol display section AS21g also blinks correspondingly during the fluctuation. There is.

Furthermore, when the second main game symbol is stopped, the first decorative symbol is stopped, the second decorative symbol is stopped, and the second sub symbol display section BS21g is also turned on or off in response to the stop display. There is. Furthermore, while the second main game symbol is changing, the first decorative symbol is fluctuating, the second decorative symbol is fluctuating, and the second sub symbol display section BS21g also blinks correspondingly during the fluctuation. There is.

From this, this example may be configured as follows.
(1) At least one of the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g that is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to a loss on the first main game side on the performance display device SG. The symbol is configured to light up at least once when the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the first main game side.
(2) The first main game symbol display section A21g is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the first main game side on the performance display device SG. At least one of the lamps is configured to light up once when the first decorative pattern is changing corresponding to the first main game side.
(3) When the first decorative symbol is stopped on the performance display device SG in a display mode corresponding to a loss on the first main game side, the lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g is configured to be off. ing.
(4) When the first decorative symbol is stopped on the performance display device SG in a display mode corresponding to a jackpot on the first main game side, the lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g is configured to be lit. ing.
(5) At least one of the lamps in the second main game pattern display section B21g that is lit when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to a loss on the second main game side on the performance display device SG. The symbol is configured to light up at least once when the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the second main game side.
(6) The second main game symbol display section B21g is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the second main game side on the performance display device SG. At least one of the lamps is configured to light up once when the first decorative pattern is changing corresponding to the second main game side.
(7) When the first decorative symbol is stopped on the effect display device SG in a display mode corresponding to a loss on the second main game side, the lamp of the second sub symbol display section BS21g is configured to be off. ing.
(8) When the first decorative symbol is stopped on the effect display device SG in a display mode corresponding to a jackpot on the second main game side, the lamp of the second sub symbol display section BS21g is configured to be lit. ing.

In addition, the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG may be a specific mode (for example, a mode other than the double number such as "253" or "121"). The display mode corresponding to the loss on the second main game side of the first decorative symbol displayed on the production display device SG is changed to a specific mode (for example, a display mode other than a double number such as "253" or "121") (aspect).

In addition, when switching the lit lamps as shown in (2) to (3) in Fig. 185, the lit lamps may be directly switched as shown in "(2) → (3)". However, it is also possible to configure the process to go through a state in which all the lamps are turned off, such as "(2)→All lights off→(3)".

In this way, by using the same lamp on the main control board side both when indicating a loss (indicating the stoppage of a losing symbol) and when the losing symbol is fluctuating, it is possible to change the losing symbol from a fluctuating state to a losing symbol. Due to the flow of stopping, it is possible to avoid a situation where all the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are turned off, and it is possible to configure the system so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to ensure the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and avoids board limitations. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Furthermore, regarding the lamp on the main control board side, a common lamp (first main game symbol display section A21g or second main game symbol By using the display section B21g), it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g and other lamps as the lamp of the main display device MH20. In addition, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. By configuring it to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side will be lit to indicate the game result, and it may be mistaken that two game results are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, when the jackpot symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, and the lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side also lights up. By configuring it to do so, it is possible to clearly indicate that it is a jackpot on both the main control board side and the sub-control board side, and to notify the player that they should shoot the game ball into the jackpot. Not only can the information be reliably notified, but also it is possible to prevent the player from leaving his/her seat without noticing that a jackpot has been won.

In addition, in the same figure, all (2) to (6) are configured so that two lamps are lit, but this is just an example, and at least one lamp in the first main game symbol display section A21g is turned on. There is no problem in changing it as long as it lights up. In addition, in this example, there is only one lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g during the variation of the first main game symbol, and if the variation time is the same, there is a symbol variation that results in a jackpot and a loss. It is configured so that the same lighting pattern can be achieved with different symbol variations. In addition, depending on the fluctuation time, the time from the start of fluctuation (from the time of fluctuation) to the flow of stopping at a losing symbol or a winning symbol differs, so the number of cycles of the lighting pattern may differ, and the number of cycles of the lighting pattern may differ. The lighting mode immediately before stopping (for example, whether it is (2) or (4) in FIG. 185) may be different.

Further, in this example, although the case is illustrated in which there is only one losing symbol, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a plurality of types of losing symbols. Even in this case, for all losing symbols, at least one of the lamps that is lit when the losing symbol stops is configured to be lit once during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. You may. In addition, the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g during the variation of the first main game symbol is configured to repeat "(2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6)". However, in this case, if the time from when it becomes (2) again until it becomes (2) again is the time of one cycle (in Figure 185, 50 x 5 = 250 ms), then the time of that one cycle is In the symbol variation having a longer variation time than the first main game symbol, at least one of the lamps that is lit when the losing symbol stops may be configured to be lit once during the variation of the first main game symbol. For example, if the fluctuation time is shorter than the time of one cycle, the symbol fluctuation may end before it becomes (2) again after it becomes (2) again. However, even in such a case, in a symbol variation whose variation time is longer than the time of one cycle, at least one of the lamps lit when the losing symbol stops is the first main game symbol. What is necessary is just to configure it so that it lights up once during the fluctuation. The same applies to the second main game symbol display section B21g and the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. Note that the time of one cycle is sometimes referred to as one cycle or one cycle's worth of time.

Although the figure shows the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g and the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g also have lamps that are lit when a losing symbol is stopped. At least one of the lamps on the main control board side may be configured to light up once during fluctuation, and when the losing symbol is stopped, at least one lamp on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp on the sub control board side lights up once. may be configured to turn off.

<Configuration where the lamp on the auxiliary game side turns off when stopped>
In addition, as a modification of the above-described configuration, when the first main game symbol stops at a losing symbol, at least one of the lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g lights up, and the second main game symbol stops at a losing symbol. When the symbol stops at a symbol, at least one of the lamps in the second main game symbol display section B21g is configured to light up, while when the auxiliary game symbol stops at a losing symbol, the auxiliary game symbol is displayed. All the lamps in section H21g may be turned off. In addition, when the first main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, at least one of the lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g lights up, and when the second main game symbol stops at a jackpot symbol, At least one of the lamps in the second main game symbol display section B21g is lit, and when the auxiliary game symbol stops at a winning symbol, at least one of the lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is configured to be lit. Good too. As mentioned above, the winning symbols of the auxiliary game symbols include the winning symbol A, the winning symbol B, and the winning symbol C, but in all the winning symbols, the lamp of the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g is At least one may be configured to light up.

With this configuration, a player who is interested in the result of a game can visually check the corresponding display device (first main game symbol display section A21g or second main game symbol display section B21g) when the main game symbol is stopped. In this case, all the lamps of the display device (auxiliary game pattern display section H21g) corresponding to the auxiliary game symbols are off, so only the lamps corresponding to the main game symbols are visible, making it easier to recognize the stop symbols. can do.

<Display device position>
Further, as shown in FIG. 182, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided at separate positions, the main display device MH20 is provided on the left side of the center of the board, and the sub display device SH20 is provided at a distance from the main display device MH20. It is located to the right of the center of the board. In other words, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided on opposite sides with the first main game start opening A10 interposed therebetween. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side.

<Display device blinking interval>
Even if the blinking interval of the lamp in the main display device MH20 and the blinking interval of the lamp in the sub-display device SH20 (the time required from one lighting to the next lighting in the repetition of "turning on→turning off→turning on...") are different. good. Note that the blinking intervals of all the blinking lamps on the main display device MH20 and all the blinking lamps on the sub display device SH20 may be made different, or the blinking intervals of some lamps on the main display device MH20 and some lamps on the sub display device SH20 may be different. The blinking intervals of the lamps may be made different. As an example, the lamp of the first main game symbol pending display section A21h in the main display device MH20 blinks at 50 ms intervals, while the lamp of the first sub pending display section AS21h blinks at 100 ms intervals. 50 ms for one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g (for example, the upper leftmost lamp among the eight lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g shown in FIG. 183). In contrast, the lamps in the first sub-symbol display section AS21g may be configured to blink at intervals of 100ms, or the eight lamps on the first main game symbol display section A21g may be turned on and off. The combination switches (blinks) at intervals of 50 ms, whereas the lamp of the first sub-symbol display section AS21g may be configured to blink at intervals of 100 ms. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side. In addition, the blinking of the lamp is not "on → off → on...", but instead "off → on → off..." (For the blinking interval, the blinking starts from the time when the light is on, as described above. ).

Incidentally, the blinking intervals in the first main game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g may be defined as follows.
(1) Shortest time from one lighting to the next lighting in a predetermined lamp (2) Turning on and off of multiple lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g (or second main game symbol display section B21g) Interval between switching combinations (for example, interval from (2) to (3) in Figure 185)

<Right-handed lamp>
As a different configuration from that shown in FIG. 183 of main display device MH20, it may be configured to have a right-handed lamp. The right-handed lamp has the same shape (size, etc.) as the other lamps of the main display device MH20, such as the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g, and has the same lighting color. In addition, the right-handed lamp lights up in a gaming state where right-handed hitting is required (for example, a time-saving gaming state or during a jackpot), and in a gaming state where left-handed hitting is required (for example, a non-time-saving gaming state). is configured so that the right-handed lamp is turned off.

As a different configuration from that shown in FIG. 183 of the sub display device SH20, it may be configured to have a sub right-handed lamp. The sub right-handed lamp has a different shape (size, etc.) from other lamps of the sub display device SH20, such as the lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g. Note that the shape of the sub-right-handed lamp only needs to be different from the shapes of other lamps in the sub-display device SH20. Further, the lighting color of the sub-right-handed lamp may be the same as or different from that of the other lamps in the sub-display device SH20.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to confuse the sub-right-handed lamp with the lamps in other sub-display devices SH20, and it becomes easy to distinguish that it is a sub-right-handed lamp even if the lighting color is the same. By making the right-handed lamp the same shape as the other lamps, it is possible to make it difficult for the game result to be recognized. As a modification, the lighting color of the sub-right-handed lamp may be different from that of the other lamps in the sub-display device SH20, but the shape may be the same as that of the other lamps in the sub-display device SH20.

<If a power outage occurs during fluctuations>
A power outage occurs while the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is changing (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off is called a power outage occurrence), and then , when the power is restored, the lamps of the main display device MH20 (first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g, first main game symbol reservation display section A21h, second main game symbol reservation) The display section B21h, the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g, and the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h) are returned immediately (this is the timing immediately after power-on is detected, and may be referred to as the first timing after power-on). is configured to do so. For example, if a power outage occurs while the first main game symbol is changing, when the power is restored, the first main game symbol display section A21g will continue from the lighting pattern at the time of the power outage from the first timing. It is configured to resume lighting and flashing. As a specific example, if a power failure occurs during the lighting display shown in (4) in FIG. 185, and the power is restored afterwards, the lighting display may be restarted from (4) in FIG. If a power failure occurs during the lighting display in (4) and then the power is restored, the lighting display may be restarted from (5) in FIG. 185. In this way, after the power is restored, if the remaining variation time is not 0, it can be recognized by the lamp of the main display device MH20 that the symbol is being varied, regardless of the length of the remaining variation time. As a modified example, after the power is restored, if the remaining fluctuation time is not 0, the lighting/blinking may always be resumed from (2) in FIG. 185, regardless of the lighting pattern at the time of power outage. .

Three configurations can be exemplified as configurations of the display device on the sub-control board side in the case where a power outage occurs during symbol variation of the main game symbols (first main game symbols or second main game symbols). The three configurations will be described in detail below as configurations 1 to 3. In any of Configurations 1 to 3, it is assumed that on the main control board side, the lamp of the main display device MH20 returns at the first timing.

In addition, regarding the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h, if a power outage occurs in a situation where the number of reservations on the first main game side is 0, the light continues to be turned off at the first timing after the power is restored. I will do it. Regarding the second main game symbol reservation display section B21h, if a power outage occurs in a situation where the number of reservations on the second main game side is 0, the light continues to be turned off even at the first timing after the power is restored. becomes. Regarding the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h, if a power outage occurs in a situation where the number of reservations on the auxiliary game side is 0, the light will continue to be turned off even at the first timing after the power is restored.

<Configuration 1>
If a power outage occurs while the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is fluctuating, and then the power is restored, the sub-hold display area (the first sub-hold display area AS21h and the second sub-hold display area AS21h) The lamp of the display section BS21h (sometimes collectively referred to as the sub-retention display section) returns at the first timing, and the lamp of the sub-symbol display section (the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the second sub-symbol display section BS21g ) remains off until the fluctuation of the main game symbol that resumed fluctuation is completed. Note that here, restarting lighting/blinking from the continuation of the lighting pattern at the time of power outage is referred to as recovery.For example, if the lighting pattern at power outage is set to one lamp (left If the lighting pattern is a combination of blinking AS21h) and lighting/blinking of one lamp (AS21h on the right), the lighting/flashing will be resumed with this lighting pattern, but regarding the restart of blinking. The lighting pattern at the time of power outage is whether it is blinking (the timing when the light is on as it turns on → off → on...) or it is off (the timing when the light goes off as the time goes from turning on → off → turning on...). It is also configured to restart from lighting. However, regardless of whether the lighting pattern when the power is turned off is blinking or turned off, it may be configured to resume from turning off.As a further modification, (1) the lighting pattern when the power is turned off (2) If the lighting pattern at power-off was blinking and off, it restarts from off; If so, the light may be restarted from being turned off, and if the lighting pattern at the time of power-off was blinking and then turned off, it may be configured to restart from being turned on. When the fluctuation of the main game symbol is finished, the lamp in the sub symbol display section will light up in the lighting pattern corresponding to when the main game symbol is stopped, but in this example, the main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol. In this case, the lighting pattern of the lamp in the sub-symbol display section is off, so even after the main game symbol has finished changing, the sub-symbol display section will not be lit until the next main game symbol starts changing. The lamp remains off. In addition, if a power outage occurs while the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is changing, and then the power is restored, the display of decorative symbols will also change depending on the resumed main game symbol. It is hidden until the fluctuation ends, and by configuring it in this way, the lamp in the sub-design display section is fluctuating even though the decorative symbol is hidden. By lighting and blinking in a specific lighting pattern, it is possible to prevent players from becoming confused. In addition, in this example, after the symbol is stopped, there is a variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms, which can be changed depending on the gaming state or the stopped symbol), and the timing of power off (timing of power return) Regardless of the situation, it is possible to guarantee a predetermined amount of time until the hold expires, so the lamp on the sub-hold display can be turned on or flashing immediately after the power is restored without confusing the player, and the game status can be immediately checked. can be grasped.

Note that the timing for returning the lamp of the sub-hold display after the power is restored is not the first timing, but may be before the first timing or after the first timing. You can.

Further, regarding the first sub-hold display section AS21h, if a power outage occurs in a situation where the number of holds on the first main game side is 0, the light continues to be turned off at the first timing after the power is restored. becomes. Regarding the second sub-hold display unit BS21h, if a power outage occurs when the number of holds on the second main game side is 0, the light will continue to be turned off even at the first timing after the power is restored. .

<Configuration 2>
If a power outage occurs while the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is fluctuating, and then the power is restored, the sub-hold display area (the first sub-hold display area AS21h and the second sub-hold display area The lamp of the display section BS21h (sometimes collectively referred to as the sub-retention display section) returns at the first timing, and the lamp of the sub-symbol display section (the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the second sub-symbol display section BS21g ) also returns at the first timing (the first timing of the configuration 1, and the same applies below). With this configuration, even if the decorative symbols are hidden after the power is restored, the lamp in the sub-symbol display section will return, allowing the player to check whether the symbol variation is being executed or not. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the information becomes unrecognizable. In addition, regarding the return of the lamps of the sub-symbol display sections (first sub-symbol display section AS21g and second sub-symbol display section BS21g), whether the lighting pattern at the time of power outage is blinking or off, the lamps will not turn on. Although the configuration is such that the restart starts from the point where the light is turned off, it may be configured to restart from the time when the light is turned off. As a modified example, regarding the return of the lamps of the sub-symbol display sections (first sub-symbol display section AS21g and second sub-symbol display section BS21g), (1) If the lighting pattern at the time of power outage was blinking lighting. (2) If the lighting pattern at the time of the power outage was blinking and off, then restarting from off; or (2) If the lighting pattern at the time of power outage was blinking and off, restart from off. If the lighting pattern when the power is turned off is blinking and turning off, it may be configured to restart from lighting.

Note that the timing for returning the lamp of the sub-hold display after the power is restored is not the first timing, but may be before the first timing or after the first timing. The timing for returning the lamp of the sub-symbol display section after the power is restored may be not the first timing, but may be before the first timing, or may be after the first timing. It may be.

Further, regarding the first sub-hold display section AS21h, if the power is cut off when the number of holds on the first main game side is 0, the light continues to be turned off at the first timing after the power is restored. becomes. Regarding the second sub-pending display section BS21h, if a power outage occurs in a situation where the number of pendings on the second main game side is 0, the light will continue to be turned off even at the first timing after the power is restored. .

Further, as described above, the lamp of the sub-symbol display section is configured to blink while the main game symbols are changing, and the lamp of the sub-pending display section is configured to blink depending on the number of pending symbols. . The blinking interval of the lamp on the sub-symbol display section and the blinking interval of the lamp on the sub-holding display section may be set to be the same (may be substantially the same) time.

In this case, the timing at which the lamp in the sub-symbol display section starts blinking (the first lighting timing in the repetition of "on → off → on...") depends on the timing at which the fluctuation of the main game symbol starts; The timing at which the lamps in the hold display section start blinking depends on the hold occurrence timing, making it difficult to synchronize the blinking. If the blinking of the lamps is not synchronized, visibility will deteriorate, so after the power is restored after a power outage, the blinking of the lamps on the sub symbol display section and the blinking of the lamps on the sub hold display section should be synchronized. (blinking start timings may be substantially simultaneous).

<Configuration 3>
If a power outage occurs while the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is fluctuating, and then the power is restored, the sub-hold display area (the first sub-hold display area AS21h and the second sub-hold display area The lamp of the display section BS21h (sometimes collectively referred to as the sub-suspension display section) remains off until the fluctuation of the main game symbol that has resumed fluctuation is completed, and the lamp of the sub-symbol display section (the first sub-symbol display section AS21g The lamps of the second sub-symbol display section BS21g) remain off until the fluctuation of the main game symbol whose fluctuation has resumed is completed. In addition, if a power outage occurs while the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is changing, and the power is restored afterwards, all the displays on the performance display device SG will be changed to the main game symbol that has resumed. Until the variation of the game symbols is completed, they are not displayed, that is, the display of decorative symbols and the pending display are not displayed. Therefore, by configuring as described above, the display on the performance display device SG and the return timing of the display (lighting pattern) on the lamps of the sub-hold display section and the lamps of the sub-symbol display section are made to match, so that the player can Therefore, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause any doubts.

In addition, if a right-handed hitting lamp is provided, the right-handed hitting lamp will be activated immediately (the above-mentioned first However, when the power is restored, if the game state is such that a left-handed hit should be executed (for example, a non-time saving game state), the light remains off.

In addition, if a sub-right-handed hitting lamp is provided, the sub-right-handed hitting lamp will be activated immediately (the above-mentioned However, in the case of a game state in which left-handed play should be executed when the power is restored (for example, a non-time saving game state), the light remains off. .

<Comparison of display device and game ball size>
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the sizes of the main display device MH20, sub display device SH20, and game balls will be compared.

FIG. 186(a) is a comparison of the sizes of the main display device MH20 and the game balls. As shown in the figure, two lamps of the main display device MH20 are completely hidden by one game ball (when viewed from the front). More specifically, the diameter of one lamp of the main display device MH20 is A, the shortest distance between the lamps of the main display device MH20 is B, the diameter of the game ball is X, and the lamp 2 is caused by one game ball. Since the individual is completely hidden, the following relationship is satisfied.
Formula 1: 2A+B<X

Next, FIG. 186(b) is a comparison of the sizes of the sub display device SH20 and the game ball. As shown in the figure, one lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is completely hidden by one game ball, while two lamps are not completely hidden. More specifically, the shortest distance between the lamps of the sub-display device SH20 is C, the diameter of one lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is D, and the diameter of the game ball is X. One lamp is completely hidden, while two lamps are not completely hidden, so the following relationship is satisfied.
Formula 2: 2D+C>X
Formula 3: D<X

Even in the case of the above configuration, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g, and the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g in the main display device MH20 are arranged so that the symbols (main game symbols (or auxiliary game symbols) is configured so that more than two lamps (four lamps in this example) are turned on when the auxiliary game symbol is stopped (see (1) in Figure 185; the same applies to other display parts. (Multiple lamps light up when the main game symbol or auxiliary game symbol stops.) Therefore, even when one game ball is placed on the main display device MH20 (in the front direction as seen from the player), the lamp lights up. It is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to check that the is lit or flashing, and whether the first main game symbol, second main game symbol, and auxiliary game symbol are changing, or whether they have stopped. For example, it is possible to check the stopping mode (the combination of lighting and turning off). However, since the first main game symbol reservation display section A21h and the second main game symbol reservation display section B21h in the main display device MH20 are composed of two lamps, one game ball is displayed on the main display device. When placed on the MH20 (in the front direction as seen from the player), both of the two lamps may not be visible. However, regarding the first sub-hold display section AS21h and the second sub-hold display section BS21h in the sub-display device SH20, one game ball is placed on the sub-display device SH20 (in the front direction as seen from the player). Even in such a case, since both of the two lamps are never invisible, the opportunity for the player to check the number of reservations is not obstructed.

In this example, the size (diameter) of the lamps of the main display device MH20 is all the same, and the size (diameter) of the lamps of the sub display device SH20 are all the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the lamps may be configured to have different sizes. If configured like this,
(1) The minimum A and B in the main display device MH20 satisfy the above formula 1, and the minimum C and D in the sub display device SH20 satisfy the above formulas 2 and 3.
(2) The maximum A and B in the main display device MH20 satisfy the above formula 1, and the maximum C and D in the sub display device SH20 satisfy the above formulas 2 and 3.
It may be configured as described above.

<Distance between display device and transparent plate D16>
The distance between the display device and the transparent plate D16, which is applicable to the gaming machine in this specification, will be described in detail below. Note that the distance between the display device and the transparent plate D16 is the distance in the vertical direction with respect to the transparent plate D16, in other words, the distance in the front and back direction when viewed from the player (the distance between the transparent plate D16 and the display device is is located at the front). Note that the main display device MH20 may be replaced with any lamp of the main display device MH20, and the sub display device SH20 may be replaced with any lamp of the sub display device SH20.

<Configuration 1>
The sub display device SH20 is configured to be closer (shorter) to the transparent plate D16 than the main display device MH20, in other words, the sub display device SH20 is located closer to the front than the main display device MH20. You may. The distance between the main display device MH20 and the transparent plate D16 may be less than or equal to the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the sub display device SH20 and the transparent plate D16 may be less than or equal to the diameter of the game ball.

With this configuration, even when the main display device MH20 or the sub display device SH20 is provided in an area where game balls can fall, the game ball can be displayed between the main display device MH20 or the sub display device SH20 and the transparent plate D16. Balls do not flow in, the lamps of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 can be prevented from being damaged, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved. In addition, by configuring the sub display device SH20 to be closer to the main display device MH20, the main display device MH20 can be made less noticeable, and the result of the game can be easily seen by the player, which increases the interest. It is possible to prevent a decline in sexual performance.

<Configuration 2>
The main display device MH20 is configured to be closer (shorter) to the transparent plate D16 than the sub display device SH20, in other words, the main display device MH20 is located closer to the front than the sub display device SH20. You may. In this case, the sub-display device SH20 may be installed on a member such as an accessory or a decoration provided near the gaming area.

By configuring the main display device MH20 to be in front of the sub display device SH20, the main display device MH20 can be made more conspicuous, making the gaming machine desirable for players who are concerned about the results of games. be able to.

Further, when configured as in the configuration 1 or configuration 2, the sub display device SH20 may be configured to be closer to the effect display device SG than the main display device MH20. With this configuration, the sub display device SH20 can be easily recognized by the player who is paying attention to the effect display device SG. In addition, since the effect display device SG is larger than the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 (the area in the vertical and horizontal directions is larger when viewed from the player), the effect display device SG is configured to stand out. The lamp of the sub display device SH20 is larger than the lamp of the main display device MH20. In other words, the lamp of the sub display device SH20 is more noticeable than the lamp of the main display device MH20, so the sub display device SH20 is used as an effect display device. Even if installed near the SG, visibility can be ensured. In addition, being close to the effect display device SG may be compared by the closest distance between the display device and the effect display device SG (any part thereof), or the distance from the center of the effect display device SG to the display device. You can also compare.

<Lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section and display mode of the second decorative symbol>
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g and the display mode of the second decorative symbol will be described in detail. In addition, in the figure, although only the first main game symbol is illustrated, the same configuration can be applied to the second main game symbol.

First, (A1) in FIG. 187 is a lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g in a situation where the first main game symbol has stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol. As shown in the figure, in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol, the first main game symbol display section A21g has a lighting pattern in which four lamps are lit.

Next, (A2) in FIG. 187 is a lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g in a situation where the first main game symbol is changing. As shown in the figure, the first main game symbol display section A21g has five types of lighting patterns in which two lamps are lit. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, the five types of lighting patterns are repeated while the first main game symbol is changing. In this way, the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol (lighting and extinguishing to indicate a jackpot in the first main game symbol display section A21g) combination pattern) is configured not to be executed as a lighting pattern during fluctuation of the first main game symbol. The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g shown in the figure is just an example, and the lighting pattern when the jackpot symbol is stopped is configured so that it is not executed as the lighting pattern during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. It would be fine if it had been done.

Next, (B1) in FIG. 187 is a part of the display on the performance display device SG in a situation where the first main game symbol has stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol. In the figure, only a part of the display on the performance display device SG is shown, and the hold display and the like are omitted. Note that the second decorative pattern is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 126.

As shown in the figure, in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777". In addition, the second decorative symbol is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in multiple types of display modes such as "333" in addition to "777" in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol. All of them are structured so that the symbols such as three numbers are the same (double number).

Next, (B2) in FIG. 187 is a part of the display on the performance display device SG in a situation where the first main game symbol is changing. In the figure, the second decorative pattern continues to switch among a plurality of display modes (combinations of numbers) at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 ms). What is shown is an example of a plurality of display modes of the second decorative symbol while the first main game symbol is changing. (In this example, the display is repeated as "726" → "314" → "228" → "726", etc.). Including the display mode not shown, the second decorative pattern is configured so that three numbers are not the same (zero) while the first main game pattern is changing. This configuration is a common configuration regardless of the variation mode or the determined symbol. That is, the second decorative symbols are configured so that, while the first main game symbols are changing, they do not display in the display mode that can be adopted when the jackpot symbols stop.

As mentioned above, in this example, the first main game symbol (or While the 2nd main game symbol) is changing, the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken when the 1st main game symbol (or 2nd main game symbol) is stopped at the jackpot symbol is avoided. It is configured.

By configuring in this way, the jackpot mode can be achieved both when the player visually recognizes the main display device MH20 and when the player visually recognizes the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG while the main game symbols are changing. Since there is no case where the indicator is displayed (lit), it is possible to prevent the game result from being misunderstood.

In addition, the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol repeats the five patterns (the lighting pattern is sometimes simply referred to as a pattern) illustrated in A2. 185 (2) to (6) are repeated), and the pattern is switched every predetermined time A (for example, the above-mentioned predetermined time, which is 50 ms). Therefore, the time for one cycle of the lamp lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g ((2) to (6) in FIG. 185 is one cycle) during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is as follows.
5×50ms=250ms
It becomes.

On the other hand, the display mode of the second decorative symbol while the first main game symbol is changing is such that the three patterns shown in B2 are repeated, and the display mode is such that the three patterns shown in B2 are repeated for a predetermined time B (for example, the above-mentioned predetermined time, which is 100 ms). ) The display mode is changed for each time. Therefore, the time for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbol while the first main game symbol is changing (one cycle is "726" → "314" → "228") is:
3×100ms=300ms
It becomes.

As mentioned above, in this example, the time period corresponding to one cycle of the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g during the variation of the first main game symbol is The display mode of the second decorative pattern is configured so that the time required for one cycle is longer. Although the case of the first main game symbol is illustrated as an example, the lighting pattern 1 of the lamp of the second main game symbol display part B21g during the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is similarly applied to the second main game symbol. It is configured such that the time for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbol during the variation of the second main game symbol is longer than the time for the cycle. Regarding the following, it should be noted that the first main game symbol display section A21g may be replaced with the second main game symbol display section B21g.

If the time required for one cycle of the first main game symbol display section A21g related to the main control board side and the second decorative symbol of the effect display device SG related to the sub control board side is the same, the player can decide which one is the result of the game. There is a risk that it may become unclear whether information is being reported accurately. Therefore, as mentioned above, the second decorative symbol during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is longer than the time corresponding to one cycle of the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. By configuring the display mode so that the time for one cycle is longer, it becomes easier to distinguish between the first main game symbol display section A21g and the second decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the number of combinations of display modes of the second decorative symbols that can be displayed during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is a combination in which symbols 1 to 9 are displayed other than the zero number.
9×9×9-9=720 ways.

The number of combinations of lamp lighting patterns in the first main game symbol display section A21g that can be displayed while the first main game symbol is changing is 2 of 8 lamps (2 is just an example, 3 or more lights are lit) There is no problem even if it is turned on), so it is a combination that lights up.
₈ C ₂ =8×7÷2=28 ways.

Comparing the above numbers of combinations, it is found that the number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols is greater than the number of combinations of the lighting patterns of the lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g. Even if the display mode of the second decorative pattern is configured so that the time for one cycle is longer, it is configured so that when the player visually recognizes it, it does not appear that only the same combinations are being displayed. be able to. In addition, the number of combinations of display modes of the second decorative symbols that can be displayed while the first main game symbols are changing and the lighting of the lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g that can be displayed while the first main game symbols are changing. The number of combinations of patterns is the maximum number that can be designed in this example, so there is no need to configure so that 720 display modes may be displayed during the variable display of the second decorative pattern, and the number of combinations of patterns is the maximum number that can be designed in this example. It should be noted that it is not necessary to configure the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g to be displayed in 28 different lighting patterns while the main game symbols are changing.

Further, the number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols and the number of combinations of the lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g may be configured as follows.
(1) The number of combinations (for example, 3 in FIG. 187) of the display modes of the second decorative symbols that are displayed while the predetermined first main game symbol is changing, and the number of combinations of the display modes of the first main game symbol display section A21g. Among the number of combinations of lighting patterns (for example, five in FIG. 187), the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g is greater.
(2) The number of combinations of display modes of the second decorative symbols displayed during the fluctuation of a predetermined first main game symbol and the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are different from each other. 2. The number of combinations of display modes of decorative patterns is greater.
(3) The number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols that can be displayed during the fluctuation of all the first main game symbols and the number of combinations of the lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are different from each other. 1. The number of combinations of lamp lighting patterns in the main game symbol display section A21g is greater.
(4) The number of combinations of display modes of the second decorative symbols that can be displayed during the fluctuation of all the first main game symbols and the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are different from each other. 2. The number of combinations of display modes of decorative patterns is greater.
It may be configured as described above. Note that (3) and (4) above are the combination of the display mode of the second decorative symbol displayed while the first main game symbol is changing and the combination of the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g. It may be applied when there are multiple types (for example, different depending on the variation mode, different depending on the stopped symbols, different depending on the gaming state, etc.). Further, although the first main game symbol has been illustrated, it can be similarly applied to the second main game symbol.

Furthermore, all the lamps in the first main game symbol display section A21g have the same shape and the same lighting color.On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, each column has a symbol with a number from 1 to 9. Each number is displayed in a different color (3 and 7 are red, 1, 5 and 9 are green, and 2, 4, 6 and 8 are blue). That is, in the first main game symbol display section A21g, if it is recognized that the lighting pattern is being switched, it is difficult to recognize which lighting pattern it is, but in the second decorative symbol, the number design and color are different. If they are clearly visible, it becomes easy to recognize which display mode is being displayed, and there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that the recognized combination of symbols has a meaning. Therefore, contrary to the above configuration, the time required for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbol during the variation of the first main game symbol is shorter (for example, the time required for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbol during the variation of the first main game symbol is shorter). By configuring the display mode of the second decorative pattern so that the time for one cycle is 20 ms x 3 = 60 ms, it is made difficult for the player to recognize the combination of numbers of the second decorative pattern, thereby preventing the player from misrecognizing it. It may be possible to do so.

As described above with reference to FIG. 187, in this example, both the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) and the second decorative symbol (or the second main game symbol) is changing, the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) is stopped at the jackpot symbol It is configured so that it does not.

In addition to the above configuration, we will also discuss the modes (display modes or lighting patterns) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is stopped at a losing symbol and/or a small winning symbol. Similarly to the structure of the jackpot symbol, it may be configured so that the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is not possible. That is, in both the first main game symbol display section A21g (or second main game symbol display section B21g) and the second decorative symbol, the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is changing. In this case, the configuration may be such that the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be adopted in a situation where the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) is stopped does not take place.

The first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) repeats the above-mentioned cycle while the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is changing. , in the case where the winning result is a win, no matter at what timing the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stops after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) immediately before the second main game symbol (second main game symbol) stops and the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) in the situation where the symbol has stopped is not the same (not continuous), in other words, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is Even so, when the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stops, the first main game symbol display section A21g will switch to a predetermined lighting pattern. In addition, even if the winning/failure determination result is non-winning, even if the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stops after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the first main game symbol The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) immediately before the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) stops, and the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) in a situation where the game symbols (game symbols) have stopped is not the same (not continuous), in other words, the fluctuation of symbol fluctuations. Regardless of the time, when the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stops, the first main game symbol display section A21g will switch to a predetermined lighting pattern.

Similarly, in the case of the second decorative symbol, when the result of the judgment is a win, at what timing does the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stop after the fluctuation time has elapsed? Also, the display mode of the second decorative symbol immediately before the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stops (may be at a predetermined timing before stopping) and the display mode of the second decorative symbol immediately before the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stops. The display mode of the second decorative symbol in the situation where the second main game symbol) is stopped is not the same (not continuous), in other words, regardless of the variation time of the symbol variation, the first main game symbol ( Alternatively, when the stop timing of the second main game symbol is reached, the second decorative symbol will be switched to a predetermined display mode. However, if the winning/failure judgment result is non-winning, the timing of stopping after the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) has elapsed is different from the case where the winning/failure judgment result is a win. Depending on the case, the display mode of the second decorative symbol immediately before the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) stops (or may be set at a predetermined timing before the stop) and the first main game symbol (or, The display mode of the second decorative symbol in a situation where the second main game symbol) is stopped may be the same (continuous) (for example, when the final display mode of the second decorative symbol is "228" , depending on the variation time, if the display mode of the second decorative pattern that is changing immediately before the final display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed is "228" in one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative pattern, which will be described later. ).

With this configuration, both the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) and the second decorative symbol can change from just before the main game symbol stops to when it stops. Connections can be made smoother. Furthermore, there is no need to more complicatedly adjust the fluctuation time of the main game symbols because of the fear that the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) will be the same just before the main game symbols stop and when they stop.

Furthermore, when the first main game symbol is stopped, the first decorative symbol is stopped, the second decorative symbol is stopped, and the first sub symbol display section AS21g is also lit or extinguished in response to the stop display. There is. Furthermore, while the first main game symbol is changing, the first decorative symbol is fluctuating, the second decorative symbol is fluctuating, and the first sub symbol display section AS21g also blinks correspondingly during the fluctuation. There is.

Furthermore, when the second main game symbol is stopped, the first decorative symbol is stopped, the second decorative symbol is stopped, and the second sub symbol display section BS21g is also turned on or off in response to the stop display. There is. Furthermore, while the second main game symbol is changing, the first decorative symbol is fluctuating, the second decorative symbol is fluctuating, and the second sub symbol display section BS21g also blinks correspondingly during the fluctuation. There is.

From this, this example may be configured as follows.
(1) The lighting pattern of the lamp in the first main game symbol display section A21g that is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side on the performance display device SG. This is not the same as the lighting pattern of the lamps in the first main game pattern display section A21g when the first decorative pattern is in the process of changing corresponding to the first main game side and immediately before it stops.
(2) Lighting pattern of the lamp in the first main game pattern display section A21g that is lit when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the first main game side on the effect display device SG This is not the same as the lighting pattern of the lamps in the first main game pattern display section A21g when the first decorative pattern is in the process of changing corresponding to the first main game side and immediately before it stops.
(3) Lighting pattern of the lamp in the second main game symbol display section B21g that is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to a loss on the second main game side on the performance display device SG This is not the same as the lighting pattern of the lamps on the second main game symbol display section B21g when the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the second main game side and immediately before stopping.
(4) Lighting pattern of the lamp in the second main game pattern display section B21g that is lit when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the second main game side on the effect display device SG This is not the same as the lighting pattern of the lamps on the second main game symbol display section B21g when the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the second main game side and immediately before stopping.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side on the effect display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side. The display mode of the second decorative symbol during fluctuation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping is not the same.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the first main game side on the effect display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the first main game side. The display mode of the second decorative symbol during fluctuation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping is not the same.
(7) The display mode of the second decorative symbol when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the second main game side on the production display device SG, and The display mode of the second decorative symbol during fluctuation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping is not the same.
(8) The display mode of the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the second main game side on the effect display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the jackpot on the second main game side, and The display mode of the second decorative symbol during fluctuation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping is not the same.

<Light intensity of sub display device SH20>
As described above with reference to FIG. 127 and the like, the gaming machine in this specification can be configured to be able to adjust the amount of light. In such a configuration, the light amount (also referred to as brightness) of the lamp of the sub-display device SH may not be changed even if the light amount level (sometimes referred to as a light amount level) is changed.

As a specific example, when the light amount level is level 1 and when the light amount level is level 3, which is two steps higher than level 1, the light amount (brightness) of the lamp of sub display device SH20 is the same, but the game effect The light amount (brightness) of the lamp D26 may be configured to be higher at level 3 than at level 1.

Note that the arrangement of the game effect lamp D26 in FIG. 182 is just an example, and the game effect lamp D26 whose light amount (brightness) differs depending on the light amount level may be provided near the sub display device SH20, or It may be provided on the right or left side (as seen from the person).

Furthermore, the emitted color of the game effect lamp D26 (which may also be referred to as a lighting color/blinking color) is the same color as the lighting color/blinking color of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 (recognized as the same from the player's perspective). It may be configured so that it does not emit light depending on the color. In this case, the period during which the emitted light color of the game effect lamp D26 is not the same as the lighting color or blinking color of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 may be configured as follows.
(1) The emitted light color is not the same all the time. (2) The emitted light color is not the same except when a predetermined error is occurring. (3) The emitted light color is not the same while a predetermined error is occurring. (4) The main game symbol The emitted light color will not be the same during fluctuation (5) The emitted light color will not be the same during super reach (6) The emitted light color will not be the same during reach (all reaches including during super reach and normal reach)

Note that the period in which the emitted light color of the game effect lamp D26 is not the same as the lighting color/blinking color of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 may be a period other than the above (2) to (6). That is, the gaming machine according to this example can be configured such that the emitted light color of the game effect lamp D26 is not the same as the lighting color or blinking color of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 during a predetermined period. In addition, as a more preferable example, in order to enhance the presentation effect (to make light emission of various colors look dramatic) as the emission color (also referred to as lighting color or blinking color) of the game effect lamp D26, Although it may emit light in the same color as the lighting/blinking color of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 (a color that is recognized as the same from the player's perspective), within one change, the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 The purpose is to cause the game effect lamp D26 to emit light in the same color as the lamp of the sub display device SH20 for a shorter time than the time during which the lamp is lit and blinking. For example, while a production that notifies you of a jackpot during Super Reach (for example, a video of an ally character defeating an enemy character) is being performed, the game effect lamp D26 may be set to the same color as the lamp on the sub display device SH20 ( By alternately flashing different emitting colors (red) and different emitting colors (blue and green), the visibility of the lamp on the sub-display device SH20 is extremely reduced, although the gaming machine as a whole emits light with a sense of unity. Things will go away.

Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided near the sub display device SH20 (for example, the game effect lamp D26 is closer to the sub display device SH20 than the distance between the sub display device SH20 and the effect display device SG). The configurations (1) to (6) above may be applied only to objects.

In this way, by configuring it away from the vicinity of the sub display device SH20, compared to the case where the game effect lamp D26 is provided near the sub display device SH20, the light emission of the game effect lamp D26 allows the sub display device SH20 to be illuminated. It is possible to make it difficult to reduce the visibility, and it is possible to easily recognize the result of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 182, no game effect lamp D26 is provided near the main display device MH20. In other words, in this example, the distance between the sub display device SH20 and the game effect lamp D26 is longer (farther) than the distance between the main display device MH20 and the game effect lamp D26. Furthermore, although not shown, the vicinity of the lamp of the main display device MH20 (for example, a plate member installed in front of the LED inside the display unit and forming a cavity that serves as a display window of the lamp, that is, the lamp of the main display device MH20) (other than the display window) is black, which is a different color from the lighting and blinking color (for example, red) of the lamp of the main display device MH20. In addition, near the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 (for example, a plate member installed in front of the LED inside the display unit and forming a cavity that serves as a display window of the lamp, that is, a portion other than the display window of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20) etc.) is a color different from black (for example, a color other than red, such as white or blue).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lamp of the main display device MH20 from being reduced due to the light emission of the members near the main display device MH20 or the game effect lamp D26.

<Relationship between pending display and lamp>
As mentioned above, according to this example, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol ((2) to (6) in FIG. 185 is one cycle) ) minutes is 250 ms.

Further, the time required for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbol (one cycle is "726" → "314" → "228") during the variation of the first main game symbol is 300 ms.

Here, also in the hold display (sometimes referred to as a hold image, hold icon, etc.) displayed on the effect display device SG, a pattern of moving images whose display mode changes in chronological order is repeated (for one pattern). The display time of a moving image is referred to as one cycle time. Specifically, for example, the display time of a moving image in which the pending display rotates once clockwise from the reference position is referred to as one cycle time. , the time of one cycle of the hold display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined effect stage in a non-time reduction gaming state) may be set to 1000 ms. That is, one cycle of the hold display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined production stage in a non-time reduction gaming state) is determined by the lighting of the lamp of the first main game symbol display part A21g while the first main game symbol is changing. It may be longer than the time for one cycle of the pattern, or it may be longer than the time for one cycle of the lamp lighting pattern of the second main game symbol display section B21g during the fluctuation of the second main game symbol. , it may be longer than the time for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbol during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol, or the time for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbol during the fluctuation of the second main game symbol. It may be longer than the time. In this way, by making the time for one cycle of the hold display longer than one cycle of the lighting pattern of each lamp or one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative pattern, the player can By making it easier to recognize the movement of the user and paying attention to the easy-to-recognize hold display, it is possible to make the lighting pattern of each lamp and the variable display of the second decorative pattern more inconspicuous.

In addition, as described above, the first main game symbol pending display section A21h, the second main game symbol pending display section B21h, the first sub pending display section AS21h, and the second sub pending display section BS21h are blinking displays. However, the duration of one cycle of the hold display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined performance stage in a non-time reduction gaming state) is set to be longer than the blinking interval of the first main game symbol hold display section A21h. It may be a long time, or the time of one cycle of the hold display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined production stage in a non-time reduction gaming state) may be set to be longer than the blinking interval of the second main game symbol hold display section B21h. Alternatively, the duration of one cycle of the hold display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined production stage in a non-time reduction gaming state) may be made longer than the blinking interval of the first sub-hold display section AS21h. The duration of one cycle of the hold display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined performance stage in a non-time reduction gaming state) may be set to be longer than the blinking interval of the second sub-hold display section BS21h.

<Positions of round indicator light R10 and round indicator R20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the round indicator light R10 according to this example will be described in detail. As mentioned above, the round indicator light R10 is composed of two 7 segments, and when a jackpot starts, it notifies the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot. Regarding the notification timing, it is sufficient that the light is turned on before the jackpot starts, and it may be at the start of the jackpot, or it may be the timing at which the jackpot symbol is confirmed and stopped. Further, the round indicator light R10 may be composed of a plurality of lamps like the main display device MH20. As an example, the round indicator light R10 is composed of four lamps, and when a 10R jackpot is executed, the four lamps will be "●●●○" (○ indicates off, ● indicates on). ), and when a 4R jackpot is executed, the four lamps may be configured to become "○●○●". In addition, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds is provided, such as separately providing a lamp corresponding to 4R and a lamp corresponding to 10R, and when a jackpot starts, the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot is lit. You may. In addition, when the round indicator light R10 is configured with a plurality of lamps, the lamps may be configured to notify the number of rounds by lighting up instead of blinking.

Next, the round display section R20 is a sticker attached to the front of the game board to display the correspondence between the round indicator light R10 and the number of rounds of the jackpot. This shows the display mode. In addition, in the figure, the round indicator light R10 indicates the 16th round.

Further, as shown in FIG. 182, the round indicator light R10 and the round display part R20 are located on the right side of the board (right side of the first main game starting port A10), and on the other hand, the main display device MH20 is located on the right side of the board It is located on the left side (left side of the first main game starting port A10). In other words, the round indicator light R10 is configured to be shorter (closer) to the round indicator R20 than the main display device MH20.

Note that the positions of the round indicator light R10, the round display part R20, and the main display device MH20 are just an example. For example, the positions of the round indicator light R10, the round display part R20, and the main display device MH20 are It may be configured to be located on the left side of the game starting port A10. Even in that case, it is preferable that the round indicator light R10 is configured to be shorter (closer) to the round indicator R20 than the main display device MH20.

With this configuration, the player can check the round indicator light R10 while viewing the round display section R20 at the time of starting a jackpot, and also prevents the player from becoming confused by viewing the main display device MH20. can do.

In addition, in this example, the round indicator light R10 and the round display part R20 are configured to notify (display) only the 4th round and the 16th round, but this is just an example, and the round indicator light R10 and the round display part R20 are configured to notify (display) only the 4th round and the 16th round. It may be configured to notify (display). In addition, when configured to have a small hit, the round indicator light R10 may be configured to notify that it is one round even when the small hit is executed. In that case, the round display section R20 may be configured to show a display mode corresponding to one round, or may be configured not to show a display mode corresponding to one round.

<Movable accessories and display devices>
Here, the gaming machine in this example may be configured to include the above-mentioned movable accessory. When configured in this way, the movable accessory can perform the above-mentioned accessory performance, and in the event of a power outage, the movable accessory is configured to perform an operation check after the power is restored. The characteristic configuration when such a movable accessory is included will be described in detail below.

FIG. 189 is an image diagram regarding checking the operation of the movable accessory after the power is turned off. (A1) to (A3) illustrate the case where a power outage occurs while the movable accessory is in the initial position.

First, in (A1), the movable accessory is located at the initial position (a position that does not impair the visibility of the second decorative pattern etc. displayed on the performance display device SG), and the accessory performance is not executed. . If a power outage occurs in the situation (A1) and then the power is restored, the movable accessory is driven as an operation check after the power is restored (this operation check may be referred to as an initial operation). When the movable accessory performs the initial motion, the movable accessory passes in front of the display area of the second decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG, as shown in (A2). Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the movable accessory completes its initial motion and stops at the initial position.

In this way, the movable accessory is configured to pass in front of the display area of the second decorative pattern and obstruct the visibility of the second decorative pattern when performing the initial movement. In addition, as shown in FIG. 182, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are long (far) from the performance display device SG, so the movable accessory performs the initial movement and the performance. However, the visibility of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is not hindered.

With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs during the operation of the amusement park, it is possible to confirm that the movable accessories will operate without problems by performing the initial operation, and furthermore, in that case, Even when the visibility of the second decorative pattern is obstructed, the visibility of the sub-display device SH20 is ensured, so the player can recognize the game situation.

Although the figure shows an example where the main game symbol is stopped, even if a power outage occurs while the main game symbol is changing, the movable accessory will not be able to maintain the visibility of the second decorative symbol. This will hinder the In addition, regarding the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, in the same figure, the power is restored when the power is cut off while the pattern is stopped or when the power is cut off while the pattern is changing. Although the configuration is illustrated in which the power is restored at a later predetermined timing (for example, approximately at the same time as the main display device MH20 is restored), the present invention is not limited to this, and if a power outage occurs during symbol fluctuation, the power is restored after the power is restored. It may be configured to return after the end of the symbol variation, or if a power outage occurs while the symbol is stopped or during symbol variation, it may be configured to return at the start of the next symbol variation after the power is restored. good. When configured in this way, a darkened image (an image in which the entire display area is black) is displayed on the effect display device SG from the time the power is restored until the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are restored. Alternatively, it may be configured to display "Returning power".

Next, (B1) to (B3) illustrate the case where a power failure occurs during execution of the accessory performance.

First, in (B1), the movable accessory is located in front of the second decorative pattern during execution of the accessory effect. If the power is cut off in the situation (B1) and then the power is restored, the movable accessory is driven toward the initial position as shown in (B2). In other words, it is driven toward a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the second decorative pattern. Thereafter, after moving to the initial position, the movable accessory performs the initial motion as shown in (B3).

In addition, (B1) to (B3) in the same figure illustrate the case where a power outage occurs while the accessory performance is being executed and the main game symbol is changing, but this is not limited to this, and the main Even if the power is cut off while the game symbols are stopped, the power is cut off again during the initial movement of the movable accessory after the power is restored, and the power is then restored, (B1 in the same figure) Similarly to (B3), the movable accessory may be configured to perform the initial operation after being driven toward the initial position after the power is restored.

In this way, even if the power is cut off while the movable accessory is in a position different from the initial position, the movable accessory is configured to drive toward the initial position after the power is restored and then execute the initial operation. By doing so, the situation in which the visibility of the second decorative pattern is obstructed does not continue.

Note that this is not limited to this, but if a power outage occurs while the movable accessory is in a position different from its initial position, the configuration must be such that the initial operation is executed after returning to the initial position. Good too. For example, if a power outage occurs while the movable accessory is in a position different from its initial position, the movable accessory will not be driven toward the initial position, but will start its initial movement from the middle. may be configured. Even with this configuration, the situation in which the visibility of the second decorative pattern is obstructed does not continue.

In addition, in FIG. 189, a configuration in which the movable accessory obstructs the visibility of the second decorative pattern is illustrated, but the timing at which the movable accessory makes (the display area of) the second decorative pattern completely invisible when viewed from the front is shown. Alternatively, although the visibility of (the display area of) the second decorative pattern is obstructed by the movable accessory, it may be configured so that it does not become completely invisible when viewed from the front. Note that the shape of the movable accessory in FIG. 189 is just an example, and the display area of the second decorative pattern in the effect display device SG may be shaped to be completely invisible when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, as described above, in the case where the sub display device SH20 is configured to be closer to the effect display device SG than the main display device MH20, when the movable accessory is performing the accessory performance and/or when performing the initial operation. Although the visibility of the lamps of the sub-display device SH20 is sometimes obstructed, the configuration may be such that the visibility of the main display device MH20 is not obstructed. Even in the case of this configuration, the visibility of the main display device MH20 is ensured, so that the player can grasp the game situation regardless of the position of the movable accessory. In this case, it may be configured such that there is a timing when the movable accessory makes the sub display device SH20 completely invisible when viewed from the front, or the visibility of the sub display device SH20 is obstructed by the movable accessory. However, it may be configured so that it is not completely invisible when viewed from the front.

In this way, the visibility of the lamp on the main display device MH20 is not obstructed (or is relatively less likely to be obstructed) by the movable accessory, but the visibility of the lamp on the sub display device SH20 is obstructed (or is relatively less obstructed). It may also be configured such that it is easily obstructed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a case in which a power outage occurs while the main game symbols are changing will be described in detail. In the figure, the accessory effect is not being executed and the movable accessory is located at the initial position. Further, "lighting up" in the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 indicates that a lighting pattern is being executed, and "lighting up" includes turning off the lights during execution of the lighting pattern. On the other hand, "not lit" indicates a situation where the lighting pattern is not being executed and all lamps are off, such as when power is not being supplied to the gaming machine after a power outage occurs. . In addition, "initial action" for a movable accessory means from the start of the initial action to the end, and "initial action" includes the state where the movable accessory is stopped while the initial action is being performed. It is called. On the other hand, "stopped" indicates a state in which the movable accessory is stopped at the initial position without performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 189, the movable accessory is provided with an accessory lamp that lights up (emits light) when performing an accessory effect and an initial action. In this example, the accessory lamps are configured to light up in a predetermined lighting pattern during the execution of the accessory effect of the movable accessory and during the execution of the initial action.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 190, first, a power outage occurs at timing (1) in the diagram. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the power is turned on (power supply to the gaming machine is resumed). Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the fluctuation of the main game symbols is restarted, the lighting of the main display device MH20 is restarted, and the lighting of the sub display device SH20 is restarted.

Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, lighting of the accessory lamp related to the initial operation of the movable accessory is started (in appearance, the lighting of the accessory lamp is started). Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the initial motion of the movable accessory is started (the driving of the initial motion is apparently started). Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the initial operation of the movable accessory ends, and the lighting of the accessory lamp also ends.

In this way, if a power outage occurs while the main game symbols are fluctuating, after the power is restored, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 will be turned off again, and then the initial movement of the movable accessory will be changed. The object lamp starts to light up, and then the movable accessory starts its initial operation.

With this configuration, after returning from a power-off, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are restored before the movable accessory and the accessory lamp, so that the player can enjoy the game. The situation can be quickly recognized, and the initial movement of the movable accessory can be executed after the player has grasped the overall situation of the restarted game. In addition, if the movable accessory starts driving for the initial operation when the accessory lamp is not lit, the movable accessory starts driving without knowing whether the accessory lamp is normal or not. Therefore, by starting the drive related to the initial operation of the drive accessory after the accessory lamp starts lighting, it is possible to clearly understand that the movable accessory and the accessory lamp are normal.

In addition, in FIG. 190, as shown in (3) in the figure, the lighting return timing of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is set at the same time, but the lighting return timings do not have to be completely simultaneous. Almost simultaneously (includes both completely simultaneous and almost simultaneous but not completely simultaneous; in this specification, the term "simultaneously" should be read as "substantially simultaneously") (There is no problem even if the difference is 100 ms or so).

Further, in FIG. 190, as shown in (1) in the figure, the lamps of the main display device MH20 and the lamps of the sub display device SH20 are all restored when the power is turned off. However, as mentioned above, some of the lamps may be configured to return to lighting when the main game symbol fluctuation stops or when the next fluctuation starts.

Moreover, the drive start timing related to the initial motion of the movable accessory and the lighting start timing of the accessory lamp related to the initial motion of the movable accessory may be set to be the same (or substantially the same).

In addition, at the timing (6) in FIG. 190, the drive end timing for the initial movement of the movable accessory and the lighting end timing of the accessory lamp related to the initial action of the movable accessory are at the same time, but almost simultaneously. (may be shifted by about 100 ms).

<Initial operation of sub input button>
Although the initial operation of the movable accessory has been described in detail in FIG. 189 and the like, the sub-input button SB is also configured to perform the initial operation upon recovery from power-off. Therefore, the initial operation of the sub-input button SB will be described in detail below.

Further, although not shown, a button lamp is provided inside the sub-input button SB, and when the button lamp lights up (emits light), the player can visually recognize the lighting from the outside. In this example, the button lamp is configured to be lit in a predetermined lighting manner, for example, in white, when executing the button effect, which is the effect that prompts the player to operate the sub-input button SB.

Note that even in a situation where the button effect is not executed, the button lamp may be configured to be lit or may be configured not to be lit. If the button lamp is configured to light up even in a situation where the button effect is not being executed, in a situation where the button effect is not being executed, the lighting mode will be different from the predetermined lighting mode when the button effect is executed. It is preferable that the light be turned on. Furthermore, the button lamp is configured so that it can be lit (in a specific lighting mode, for example, in red) even when the button performance is not executed, for example, when notifying that a jackpot will be executed.

Further, in this example, the sub-input button SB is configured to be able to perform a button vibe effect in which it vibrates finely. A specific example of when a button vibe effect is executed is as follows:
(1) It is executed as part of the execution of the button effect, and has the role of prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB. The system is configured such that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively higher when a button performance accompanied by a button vibe performance is executed than when a button performance is not accompanied by a button vibration performance.
(2) A button vibe effect may be executed when a button effect is executed during the symbol variation, and thereafter, it is notified whether or not the result of the symbol variation being executed is a jackpot. In that case, the player operates the sub-input button SB, and when notifying a loss, the button vibe performance is not executed, but when notifying a jackpot, the button vibe performance is executed.
It may be configured as described above.

In addition to the above, the sub-input button SB may be configured to expand and contract, or may be configured to be able to be driven in various ways, such as being configured to be deformable into the form of a button and the form of a lever. You can.

During the initial operation of the sub-input button SB, it is preferable to check whether the sub-input button SB is functioning properly. This is called a button vibe, and the game is configured so that all operations that can be executed during the game are also executed in the initial operation, such as the execution of the button vibration effect (which vibrates in the same way as the button vibe effect).

Here, the execution of the initial operation of the sub-input button SB will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 190. First, at the timing (1) in the figure, the power is cut off. Thereafter, at timing (2) in the figure, the power is turned on (power supply to the gaming machine is resumed). Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the fluctuation of the main game symbols is restarted, the lighting of the main display device MH20 is restarted, and the lighting of the sub display device SH20 is restarted.

After that, although not shown, the lighting of the button lamp related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB starts (in appearance, the lighting of the button lamp starts), and the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB is executed. is started.

With this configuration, after the power is restored from a power outage, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 will be restored before the button lamp and button vibrator, allowing the player to check the gaming situation. This can be recognized quickly, and the initial operation of the sub-input button SB can be executed after the player has grasped the overall situation of the game that has been resumed.

In this example, the lighting of the button lamp related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB and the start of the button vibration were performed at the same time, but the invention is not limited to this. ).

In addition, if a button vibe effect related to the fluctuation of the main game symbol is selected as the effect to be executed, and the button vibe effect related to the initial operation of the sub input button SB is being executed, it is time to execute the button vibe effect. (For example, if the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub input button SB is still in progress when the next fluctuation starts after the main game symbol returns from a power cut during fluctuation, or if the main game symbol stops A new ball enters the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10 after returning from a power outage in a situation where there is no hold on the first main game side or second main game side. (e.g., when the main game symbol starts to fluctuate and the button vibe related to the initial operation of the sub input button SB is still being executed), the button vibe related to the initial operation may be configured to have priority. . If configured in this way, it may be configured such that only the button vibe related to the initial action is performed and the button vibe effect is not executed, or the button vibe effect may be executed after the button vibe related to the initial action is completed. If the period remains, the button vibe effect may be configured to be executed from the middle, but since the button vibe related to the initial operation appears to have been extended, the button vibe effect may be executed from the middle. However, it is preferable not to do so.

If the button effect is executed while the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB is being executed (when the operation validity period of the sub-input button SB has reached), the operation of the sub-input button SB is It may be configured to be effective. For example, if a button image labeled "PUSH" is displayed approximately in the center of the LCD screen (effect display device SG) while the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub input button SB is being executed, the sub input It may be configured such that the dialogue preview is executed when the button SB is operated. In other words, even while the initial operation is being performed, it may be possible to perform a performance triggered by the operation of the sub-input button SB.

The main display device MH20 in this specification may be referred to as a main game display section. In addition, the first main game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g in this specification may be referred to as an identification information display section (only one may be used, or the two may be collectively referred to). good). In addition, the first main game symbol pending display section A21h and the second main game symbol pending display section B21h in this specification may be referred to as the main game pending display section (only one may be used, or the two may be collectively referred to as ). Further, the sub display device SH20 in this specification may be referred to as a sub game display section. In addition, the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the second sub-symbol display section BS21g in this specification may be referred to as a performance information display section (only one may be used, or the two may be collectively referred to). . In addition, the first sub-holding display section AS21h and the second sub-holding display section BS21h in this specification may be referred to as a sub-game holding display section (only one may be used, or the two may be collectively referred to. ).

<<Specific example of configuration>>
The configurations related to the display device described above can be combined in any way without any problem, and an example of the above-described configuration or a combination of a plurality of configurations and its effects will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
A first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g, a first main game symbol reserve display section A21h, a second main game symbol reserve display section B21h, an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g, In the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h, all the lamps are the same size (the area of the display window is the same).
(Some or all) of the lamps of sub display device SH20 are larger than (some or all) of the lamps of main display device MH20.

<Effect>
By increasing the size of the lamp on the sub-control board side and configuring it with a single lamp, sufficient visibility can be ensured in the limited board area.On the other hand, the lamp on the main control board side By reducing the size of the lamp and configuring it with a plurality of lamps, it is possible to realize a variety of combinations when indicating the stop symbols. Furthermore, by making the lamps on the sub-control board side more conspicuous than the lamps on the main control board side, it becomes easier to recognize the game results by focusing on the lamps on the main control board side (main display device MH20). It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

<Configuration 2>
At least one of the lamps that is lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. It is configured to turn off.

<Effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when the symbol is fluctuating, the flow from fluctuating to stopping at a losing symbol can be changed. , it is possible to avoid a situation where all the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are turned off, and it is possible to configure the system so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to ensure the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and avoids board limitations. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Furthermore, regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when changing, the lamp can be used as the lamp on the main display device MH20. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the 1 main game symbol display section A21g and other lamps. In addition, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. By configuring it to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side will be lit to indicate the game result, and it may be mistaken that two game results are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. You can prevent this from happening.

<Configuration 3>
At least one of the lamps that is lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. In addition, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. It is configured to turn off.
The main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided on opposite sides of the first main game starting opening A10.
The blinking interval of a predetermined lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g or the second main game symbol display section B21g and the blinking interval of a specific lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g or the second sub symbol display section BS21g are different.

<Effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when the symbol is fluctuating, the flow from fluctuating to stopping at a losing symbol can be changed. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which all the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are turned off, and it is possible to configure the system so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to ensure the display of the lamps on the main control board side, by setting the lighting pattern to the minimum required (only on and off), versatility is increased and there are no restrictions on the board surface. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Furthermore, regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when changing, the lamp can be used as the lamp on the main display device MH20. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g and other lamps. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. By configuring it to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side will be turned on to indicate the game result, and it may be mistaken that two game results are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. It is possible to prevent this from happening.
It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side.
By arranging the lamps on the main control board side and the lamps on the sub-control board side diagonally across the first main game start port A10, and by making the lighting intervals different, the lamps on the main control board side and the sub-control board side lamps are It is possible to prevent the situation where the lamp on the control board side is viewed at the same time, and to pay attention to the performance on the performance display device SG.

<Configuration 4>
If a power outage occurs while the main game symbols (first main game symbols or second main game symbols) are fluctuating, and then the power is restored, the lamp on the main display device MH20 will immediately turn on (the first after the power is turned on). The lamp on the sub-suspension display section returns at the first timing, and the lamp on the sub-symbol display section remains off until the end of the variation of the main game symbol that resumed variation. Become.

<Effect>
Fixed a situation where players were confused due to the lamps in the sub-design display area changing even though the decorative symbols were hidden (lighting up in the corresponding lighting pattern while changing). It can be prevented.
After the power is restored, the lamp on the main display device MH20 makes it possible to recognize that the symbol is being varied, regardless of the remaining variation time.
After a symbol stops, there is a fixed variable time (for example, 500ms, which can be changed depending on the gaming state or the stopped symbol), and regardless of the timing of power cut (timing of power return), until the hold expires. Since the predetermined time can be secured, the lamp of the sub-hold display section will not be confused even if the lamp of the sub-hold display section is turned on immediately after the power is restored, and the game situation can be grasped immediately.

<Configuration 5>
A first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g, a first main game symbol reserve display section A21h, a second main game symbol reserve display section B21h, an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g, In the auxiliary game symbol reservation display section H21h, all the lamps are the same size (the area of the display window is the same).
(Some or all) of the lamps of sub display device SH20 are larger than (some or all) of the lamps of main display device MH20.
In both the first main game symbol display section A21g (or second main game symbol display section B21g) and the second decorative symbol, while the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is changing, , the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) is stopped does not occur.

<Effect>
By increasing the size of the lamp on the sub-control board side and configuring it with a single lamp, sufficient visibility can be ensured in the limited board area.On the other hand, the lamp on the main control board side By reducing the size of the lamp and configuring it with a plurality of lamps, it is possible to realize a variety of combinations when indicating a stop symbol. Furthermore, by making the lamps on the sub-control board side more conspicuous than the lamps on the main control board side, it becomes easier to recognize the results of the game by staring at the lamps on the main control board side (main display device MH20). It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.
In both the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) and the second decorative symbol, the connection from just before the main game symbol stops to when it stops can be made smooth. . Furthermore, there is no need to more complicatedly adjust the fluctuation time of the main game symbols because of the fear that the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) will be the same just before the main game symbols stop and when they stop.

<Configuration 6>
At least one of the lamps that is lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. It is configured to turn off.
If a power outage occurs while the main game symbols are changing, after the power is restored, the lighting of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is restored, and then the accessory lamps related to the initial movement of the movable accessory are turned on. starts, and then the initial motion of the movable accessory starts.

<Effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when the symbol is fluctuating, the flow from fluctuating to stopping at a losing symbol can be changed. , it is possible to avoid a situation where all the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are turned off, and it is possible to configure the system so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to ensure the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and avoids board limitations. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Furthermore, regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when changing, the lamp can be used as the lamp on the main display device MH20. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g and other lamps. In addition, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. By configuring it to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side will be lit to indicate the game result, and it may be mistaken that two game results are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. It is possible to prevent this from happening.
After the power is restored from a power outage, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are restored before the movable accessory and the accessory lamp, so that the player can quickly recognize the game situation. At the same time, the initial movement of the movable accessory can be executed after the player grasps the overall situation of the restarted game. In addition, if the movable accessory starts driving for the initial operation when the accessory lamp is not lit, the movable accessory starts driving without knowing whether the accessory lamp is normal or not. Therefore, by starting the drive related to the initial operation of the drive accessory after the accessory lamp starts lighting, it is possible to clearly understand that the movable accessory and the accessory lamp are normal.

<Configuration 7>
At least one of the lamps that is lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. It is configured to turn off.
The main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided on opposite sides with the first main game starting opening A10 interposed therebetween.
The blinking interval of a predetermined lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g or the second main game symbol display section B21g and the blinking interval of a specific lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g or the second sub symbol display section BS21g are different.
If a power outage occurs while the main game symbols are changing, after the power is restored, the lighting of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is restored, and then the accessory lamps related to the initial movement of the movable accessory are turned on. starts, and then the initial motion of the movable accessory starts.

<Effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when the symbol is fluctuating, the flow from fluctuating to stopping at a losing symbol can be changed. , it is possible to avoid a situation where all the lamps of the first main game symbol display section A21g are turned off, and it is possible to configure the system so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to ensure the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and avoids board limitations. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Furthermore, regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (indicating the stop of a losing symbol) and when changing, the lamp can be used as the lamp on the main display device MH20. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the 1 main game symbol display section A21g and other lamps. In addition, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display section A21g on the main control board side lights up, while a lamp of the first sub symbol display section AS21g of the sub control board side lights up. By configuring it to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side will be lit to indicate the game result, and it may be mistaken that two game results are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. You can prevent this from happening.
It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side.
By arranging the lamps on the main control board side and the lamps on the sub-control board side diagonally across the first main game start port A10, and by making the lighting intervals different, the lamps on the main control board side and the lamps on the sub-control board side It is possible to prevent the situation where the lamp on the control board side is viewed at the same time, and to pay attention to the performance on the performance display device SG.
After the power is restored from a power outage, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are restored before the movable accessory and the accessory lamp, so that the player can quickly recognize the game situation. At the same time, the initial movement of the movable accessory can be executed after the player grasps the overall situation of the restarted game. In addition, if the movable accessory starts driving for the initial operation when the accessory lamp is not lit, the movable accessory starts driving without knowing whether the accessory lamp is normal or not. Therefore, by starting the drive related to the initial operation of the drive accessory after the accessory lamp starts lighting, it is possible to clearly understand that the movable accessory and the accessory lamp are normal.

<Configuration 8>
If a power outage occurs while the main game symbols (first main game symbols or second main game symbols) are fluctuating, and then the power is restored, the lamp on the main display device MH20 will immediately turn on (the first after the power is turned on). The lamp on the sub-suspension display section returns at the first timing, and the lamp on the sub-symbol display section remains off until the end of the variation of the main game symbol that resumed variation. Become.
In both the first main game symbol display section A21g (or second main game symbol display section B21g) and the second decorative symbol, while the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is changing, , the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) is stopped does not occur.

<Effect>
Fixed a situation where players would be confused due to the lamps in the sub-design display area fluctuating even though the decorative symbols were hidden (lighting up in the corresponding lighting pattern during the fluctuations). It can be prevented.
After the power is restored, the lamp on the main display device MH20 makes it possible to recognize that the symbol is being varied, regardless of the remaining variation time.
After a symbol stops, it has a variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms, which can be changed depending on the gaming state or the stopped symbol), and regardless of the timing of power cut (timing of power return), until the hold expires. Since the predetermined time can be ensured, the lamp of the sub-hold display section will not be confused even if the lamp of the sub-hold display section is turned on immediately after the power is restored, and the game situation can be grasped immediately.
In both the first main game symbol display section A21g (or the second main game symbol display section B21g) and the second decorative symbol, the connection from just before the main game symbol stops to when it stops can be made smooth. . Furthermore, there is no need to more complicatedly adjust the fluctuation time of the main game symbols because of the fear that the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) will be the same just before the main game symbols stop and when the main game symbols stop.

(Seventh embodiment)
Although some of the configurations have been partially described in the embodiments described above, a seventh embodiment is an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the embodiments described above, and will be described in detail below. For example, the configuration includes the first decorative pattern (first presentation pattern) and the second decorative pattern (second presentation pattern) described in this embodiment, the first decorative pattern (first presentation pattern) of the fourth embodiment, It is possible to appropriately combine all the configurations described in this specification with the configuration of the seventh embodiment, such as the configuration of an image display that overlaps with the second decorative pattern (design) and the second decorative pattern (second presentation design).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 199, the control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 191 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly the sub-main control unit SM side) in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. Here, the process shown in FIG. 3(d) is a process executed by the sub-main control unit SM after a reset such as when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, when the gaming machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, clears RAM clear information). When receiving → Initializes the RAM on the sub side; When receiving various information commands → Resets information related to production at the time of power outage to the RAM on the sub side). Thereafter, the process shifts to a loop process in which the sub-main control unit SM repeatedly executes the repeat process routine (f). Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. Execute. Next, in step 2700, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2800, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2900, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes special game-related display control processing to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes display command transmission control processing (sends the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control section SS side), and End the repeat processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a configuration in which the sub-main side routine (S2500 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Furthermore, the process shown in FIG. , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM uses the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above. Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored and returns to the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process.

Next, FIG. 192 is a flowchart of pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 191. First, in step 2502, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and sends a command related to the occurrence of a new reservation (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not pending information related to game symbols has been received. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the drawing holding information display control means SM22 stores drawing holding counters (in this example, up to four for the first main game) in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. For the second main game, add "1" to the maximum of 4 pieces. Next, in step 2506, the drawing/holding information display control means SM22 temporarily stores commands related to the new holding validity result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side in the drawing/holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Remember. Next, in step 2508, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays hold information (particularly, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , is temporarily stored in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. If the main side does not send information regarding the win/fail results, stopped symbols, variation mode groups, variation mode random number delimiter information, the information is stored in the pending information temporary storage area in step 2506 or step 2508. will not be temporarily stored. Next, in step 2509, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether the new reservation is a reservation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2509, in step 2550, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2520. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2509, in step 2650, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning pre-read determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2520.

On the other hand, if No in step 2502, in step 2511, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether a symbol fluctuation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2511, in step 2512, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing pending counter in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2514, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the win/fail result, the stopped symbol information, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information) as the drawing reservation information. It is deleted from the temporary storage means SM22b, and the remaining pending information is shifted. Next, in step 2516, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2520. Note that even if the answer in step 2511 is No, the process moves to step 2520.

Next, in step 2520, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first reservation display section SG12, the second reservation display section SG13). The number of pending display lamps equal to the value of the drawing pending counter is displayed in white (if the pending display mode does not change, the pending display mode is white), and the process proceeds to the next process (processing in step 2700). Transition.

Next, FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the first main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which is related to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. 192. This process will be explained by dividing it into two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former pre-reading lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and places the second main game pending (first main game) in the pending state. It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is used up with priority over the gaming side. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is not a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the suspension pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a suspension with information indicating that it is a trigger suspension among the suspensions. Determine whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the pre-read lottery when winning a prize (first main game pre-read lottery when winning a prize, pre-read lottery when second main game wins). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the reservation pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is no reservation that will be a jackpot among the reservations before the new reservation. Determine whether If YES in step 2560, the process moves to step 2562.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2562, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a hold that becomes a jackpot. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the hold look-ahead performance execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a win-win look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3), The process moves to step 2574. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new reservation variation mode group is group 3 or not. Determine whether In addition, when determining whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed, it may be configured to take into consideration the variation mode random number delimiter information to determine whether or not the pre-read lottery can be executed. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a win-win look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10), The process moves to step 2574. Note that even if the answer in step 2568 is No, the process moves to step 2574.

Next, in step 2574, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k sets a "trigger holding" to the new holding that has won the winning pre-reading lottery, which is stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2512).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552 (when the second main game pending exists in the pending), in step 2578, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information that the hold is a "trigger hold" from the stored information on the hold (if there is no hold that has the information that the hold is a trigger hold, do not execute this process and proceed to the next step). Step 2520) and the next step (step 2520). Note that even in the case of No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2520). In addition, in the case where there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence), the processing in step 2578 is performed on the newly generated second Since the hold on the main game side is used up first, the planned variation order is not followed, and this is a configuration to avoid a situation where a pre-read performance covering a plurality of variations is not executed normally. In addition, as a prohibited condition for pre-read lottery, the condition that there is no reservation of a specific fluctuation mode group (or reservation of specific fluctuation mode random number delimiter information) in the reservations before the new reservation is set as a prohibited condition. Good too.

Next, FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the second main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which is related to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 192. This process will be explained in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former pre-read lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the suspended pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether the current gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a hold having information indicating that it is a trigger hold within the hold. Determine whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is no reservation that will be a jackpot among the reservations before the new reservation. Determine whether If YES in step 2606, the process moves to step 2608.

Next, in the process related to the latter pre-read lottery, first, in step 2608, the hold pre-read effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a hold that becomes a jackpot. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the holding look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a winning-time look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3), The process moves to step 2620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the reservation pre-read effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new reservation variation mode group is group C or not. Determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determining means SM26k executes a win-win look-ahead lottery for the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/5), The process moves to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process moves to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the pending pre-read performance execution possibility determining means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the holding pre-reading effect execution possibility determining means SM26k sets a "trigger holding" to the new holding that has won the winning pre-reading lottery, which is stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2520). Note that even in the case of No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2520).

Next, FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the decorative pattern display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 191. First, in step 2702, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing display content determining means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2706, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n, the ready-to-reach effect display content determining means SM25n) selects the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b ( With reference to the stop symbols and variation modes related to the main game symbols) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols (for example, if the stop symbols related to the main game symbols are jackpot symbols) determines the number of doubles such as ``7, 7, 7'', and if the symbol is a losing pattern, the number of flops such as ``1, 3, 5'' and the fluctuation mode, and stores the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b ( and is temporarily stored in the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b and the ready-to-reach performance related information temporary storage means SM25b).

Next, in step 2712, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and starts the next process (the process of step 2800). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 2702, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2800).

Next, FIG. 196 is a flowchart of decorative pattern display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. 191. First, in step 2802, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2806, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2809, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2810. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2802, the process moves to step 2810.

Next, in step 2810, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2810, in step 2811 the decorative pattern display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2812, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 adjusts the decorative pattern variation start timing based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine whether it has been reached. If Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern variation display command (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , the process moves to step 2824.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2812, in step 2816, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 displays the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ), and the process moves to step 2824.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2816, in step 2820, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-reach effect display control means SM25) controls the design variation time management timer SM21t and the preview effect-related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the ready-to-reach effect display control means SM24). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-reach image has arrived. If Yes in step 2820, in step 2822, the preview effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the preview image or ready-to-reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process moves to step 2824. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2820, the process moves to step 2824.

Next, in step 2824, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state. If YES in step 2824, in step 2826, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the symbol variation currently being executed is the button repeated effect execution variation (non-time saving game and first It is determined whether the variation time of the symbol variation related to the main game symbol is a part of the variation in which the variation time is 60 seconds. It should be noted that the button repeated performance is configured so that it is not executed in duplicate with the single button performance described later (the symbol variation associated with the button repeated performance is different from the symbol variation associated with the single button performance). In the case of Yes in step 2826, in step 2850, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes a button continuous press effect execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2830. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2826, in step 2828, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and changes the symbol variation currently being executed to button single performance execution variation (non-time saving game and It is determined whether the variation time of the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol is a part of the variation in which the variation time is 60 seconds. In the case of Yes in step 2828, in step 2950, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 executes a button single effect execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2830. Incidentally, if the answer is No in step 2824 or step 2828, the process also moves to step 2830. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the button performance (the performance in which the performance display mode changes or the performance result is displayed by the player operating the sub-input button) includes the button continuous press performance and the button It has two button effects: a single effect and a single effect. Note that the execution conditions for the button performance may be changed, and the button performance may be configured so that it can be executed in a time-reduced gaming state, or it may be configured so that it can be executed with symbol variations whose variation time is less than 60 seconds. However, it may be configured so that it can be executed even when the second main game symbol changes. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the holds that are subject to execution of the pre-read lottery on the first main game side are holds that will result in a jackpot, holds that will result in a loss, and holds that have a variable time of 60 seconds, and the hold that will result in a jackpot, hold that will result in a loss, and hold that has a variable time of 60 seconds. Since the fluctuations (variations in the execution of repeated button press effects, variations in the execution of single button effects) are symbol variations that result in a 60-second variation time of the first main game symbol, the button effects are executed as a look-ahead effect on the first main game side. It may be configured to be able to perform a pre-read effect that suggests this (for example, the pending display mode of the trigger pending is displayed similar to the shape of the sub-input button, etc.). In the seventh embodiment, the variation time of the button production execution variation is set to 60 seconds, but the 60 seconds is an example of a long variation time, and the symbol variation with a variation time longer than 60 seconds is A symbol variation with a variation time longer than 60 seconds can also be a button performance execution variation (for example, by providing a symbol variation with a variation time of 60 seconds or more, 60 seconds, 80 seconds, or 120 seconds, It may be configured such that the symbol fluctuations for 60 seconds, 80 seconds, and 120 seconds can be the button performance execution fluctuations.

Next, in step 2830, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, by referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, (Determine whether information indicating that the symbol will be stopped and displayed has been received.) If Yes in step 2830, in step 2831, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (determined display command) (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). be done) Next, in step 2832, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2834, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the illustration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2900). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 2810 or step 2830, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2490).

Next, FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the button continuous press effect execution process related to the subroutine of step 2850 in FIG. 196. First, in step 2851, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines the current button continuous press valid period (the period during which the continuous press effect is displayed by pressing the sub-input button ASB). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2851, in step 2852, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n executes a treasure chest opening performance (a performance to be executed during the valid period of button presses, the details of which will be described later). Next, in step 2853, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the sub input button ASB is newly input (the sub input button ASB is turned off). → It is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time if it remains on for 0.5 seconds after being turned on). If Yes in step 2853, in step 2854, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n selects the auto continuous hit enable flag (the flag is turned on, and If it is within the valid period for repeated button presses, the automatic repeated press effect will be executed) is turned on, and the process moves to step 2856. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2853, the process moves to step 2856.

Next, in step 2856, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n refers to the flag area of the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether the auto continuous hit enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n executes an automatic continuous hit performance, and proceeds to step 2864. Furthermore, the automatic continuous hit effect is an effect-like effect that overlaps with the treasure chest opening effect when the player presses and holds the sub-input button ASB. If this continues, one continuous hit effect will be executed continuously every 0.2 seconds (an effect will occur). Note that the performance mode of the automatic continuous hit performance and the performance mode of the single-shot continuous hit performance described later are the same performance mode, and may be collectively referred to as the continuous hit performance. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2856, in step 2860, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not there has been a single press operation on the sub input button ASB ( If the sub-input button ASB changes from off to on and then turns off again without continuing for 0.5 seconds, it is determined that a single push operation has been performed). In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n executes a single-shot continuous hit performance, and proceeds to step 2864. Furthermore, the single-shot continuous hit effect is an effect that occurs when the player presses the sub-input button ASB single-shot, which overlaps with the treasure chest opening effect. Each time the press is executed, one consecutive hit effect is executed (an effect is generated). Next, in step 2864, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the continuous press effect has been executed a predetermined number of times within the valid period of one button press. do. It should be noted that the predetermined number of consecutive hits may mean that the total number of consecutive hits performed in the automatic consecutive hits performance and the number of consecutive hits performed in the single-shot multiple hits performance is the predetermined number of times, and in this example. That's 10 times. If YES in step 2864, the process moves to step 2868. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2864, in step 2866, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines the end timing of the button press valid period (in this example, the button press valid period 4 seconds after the start timing). If Yes in step 2866, the process moves to step 2868, and if No, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2830). Next, in step 2868, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n determines that the result of the treasure box opening effect (for example, the appearance of a "star" or the appearance of a "ska") is expected to result in a jackpot of the symbol change being executed. 2830) is displayed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2830). In addition, the jackpot expectation level is the ratio of jackpot fluctuations occurring to the total of loss fluctuations and jackpot fluctuations that would cause the same performance to occur (for example, the first time as a result of a treasure chest opening performance is a "star", If the appearance rate of a symbol change in which the second time is a "star" and the third time is a "scar" is "loss fluctuation: jackpot fluctuation = 3:7", the expected jackpot will be 70%).

In addition, in the case of No in step 2851, in step 2870, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether the current automatic continuous hit reception period (by long-pressing the sub-input button ASB) It is determined whether or not it is a period in which the continuous hit effect is displayed continuously. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n selects a treasure chest discovery effect (an effect to be executed during the automatic continuous press valid period and not the button continuous press valid period, details of which will be described later). ). Next, in step 2874, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the sub input button ASB has been newly pressed and held. If Yes in step 2874, in step 2876, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n turns on the auto continuous hit enable flag in the flag area of the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and performs the next process (the process in step 2830). ). Note that even in the case of No in step 2874, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2830).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2870, in step 2878, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the flag area of the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the auto continuous hit enable flag is on. do. If Yes in step 2878, in step 2880, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether the sub input button ASB is off (has not been pressed for a long time). ). If Yes in step 2880, in step 2882, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n turns off the auto continuous hit enable flag in the flag area of the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and performs the next process (the process in step 2830). ). Note that even in the case of No in step 2878 or step 2880, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2830).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the button performance execution period. In the same figure, a symbol variation is illustrated in which a button continuous press effect is executed with a variation time of 60 seconds. First, the sub-input button ASB is disabled for 3 seconds after the start of symbol variation, and the decorative symbol is varying. Thereafter, an automatic consecutive hit acceptance period starts from a timing 3 seconds after the start of symbol variation. Note that, at this timing, the button press validity period has not yet started. Thereafter, the first button press valid period will start 2 seconds later (the button press valid period is provided three times for one symbol change). In this manner, in the seventh embodiment, the automatic repeated press acceptance period is provided before the start timing of the first button press valid period, and for example, 1 second before the start timing of the first button press valid period. Even if the long press of the sub-input button ASB has been started previously, the automatic repeated press effect will be started from the start timing of the first repeated button press valid period. Thereafter, the first button press valid period ends 4 seconds after the start timing of the first button press valid period, but the auto repeated press acceptance period continues. After that, the button press validity period will no longer be valid for 2 seconds from the end of the first button press validity period, and then the second button press validity period will start for 4 seconds, and then the button press validity period will start for 2 seconds from the end of the second button press validity period. It is configured such that the valid period is no longer valid, and after that, the valid period for the third button press for 4 seconds starts. Furthermore, the automatic repeated press acceptance period will continue until the end of the valid period for the third button press. In this way, in the seventh embodiment, three button press valid periods are provided for one symbol change, and the auto repeated press acceptance period is 2 seconds before the start timing of the first button press valid period. from the timing to the end of the third button press validity period, that is, one button press validity period and the next button press validity period (for example, the first button press validity period and the second button press validity period). The period between the valid button press period and the button press valid period is also the automatic button press acceptance period.

Next, FIG. 198 is a flowchart of the button single effect execution process related to the subroutine of step 2950 in FIG. 196. First, in step 2952, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines the current single button valid period (the operation of the sub input button in the symbol variation in which the button single performance is executed is valid). For example, it is determined whether the timing is 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). In the case of Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the preview performance display content determining means SM24n displays a single button image (for example, a button image displaying "PUSH") on the performance display device SG. Next, in step 2956, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and selects one of the sub-input buttons (sub-input button ASB, sub-input button BSB-2, or sub-input button CSB-3) is operated. In the case of Yes in step 2956, in step 2958, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n erases the displayed single button image and executes the cut-in effect (which will be displayed by operating the sub-input button). The process then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2830).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2956, in step 2960, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether the single button valid period has ended (for example, from the single button valid period start timing). (ends after 3 seconds). If Yes in step 2960, in step 2962, the preview effect display content determining means SM24n erases the displayed single button image (cut-in effect is not executed because the sub-input button was not operated), and performs the next process. The process moves to step 2830 (processing of step 2830). Note that even in the case of No in step 2952 or step 2960, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2830). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the sub input button ASB is the only sub-input button whose operation is valid when performing a button-hitting performance, whereas the operation is valid when performing a single-button performance. The sub-input buttons are all sub-input buttons (sub-input button ASB, sub-input button BSB-2, and sub-input button CSB-3). The sub input button CSB-3 is turned on by pulling it toward you, so it is difficult to press it repeatedly, and the stroke required for one operation (the distance from the off state to the sensor turning on) is short. It is longer than the sub input button ASB and sub input button BSB-2. In addition, the sub-input button BSB-2 is in the shape of a cross and is made up of four buttons (including four sensors): "Up", "Down", "Left", and "Right". The shape is not very suitable for repeated tapping operations, such as when attempting to perform a repeated tapping operation, the operation may become invalid if multiple of the four buttons are pressed at the same time. With this configuration, only the sub-input button ASB button, which is formed from one button and has a relatively short stroke required for one operation, can be used to perform continuous press effects. The system is structured so that the operation is effective when the machine is pressed, making it a user-friendly game machine with good operability.It is also structured so that repeated hits can be performed using only one sub-input button, allowing for consistent consecutive hits judgment. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is executable and that places less burden on the capacity of the sub-control board S. In addition, in a single-button performance, there is no problem as long as the sub-input button can be operated once, so all sub-input buttons are configured to be valid.

Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. 191. First, in step 2902, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2904, in step 2910, the background effect display control means SM23 adds (increments) 1 to the value of the consecutive games counter SM23c2. Next, in steps 2912 and 2914, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and also displays the jackpot on the effect display device SG. A start display is performed (an appropriate display is performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process moves to step 2916. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2902, the process moves to step 2916.

Next, in step 2916, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (the number of rounds and the number of prizes won are (It may be executed as necessary based on the type, etc.) Next, in step 2918, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the number of consecutive games counter SM23c2 and determines whether the counter value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 10). In the case of Yes in step 2918, in step 2922, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the display of an ending effect (a effect that can be executed in a special game where the number of consecutive games counter value reaches a predetermined value). , the process moves to step 2926. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2918, in step 2924, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the jackpot progress display, and proceeds to step 2926. Note that the conditions for executing the ending effect are not limited to these, and may include, for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls earned during consecutive games, the occurrence of all multiple types of specific effects, etc. Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed when a plurality of combinations of conditions are met.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the execution of a jackpot a special effect based on the number of successive hits (it is considered as a consecutive success unless the consecutive success counter SM23c2 is cleared). It is configured like this.

Next, in step 2926, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the background effect display control means SM23 displays a jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (displays as appropriate based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2930, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). . Note that even in the case of No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2999).

Next, FIG. 200 is an image diagram of executing a continuous hit effect according to the seventh embodiment. In the same figure, a case is illustrated in which an automatic repeated press effect is executed in one variation of a decorative pattern that causes a repeated button press effect to be executed. First, the variation of the decorative symbol related to the variation in the execution of the repeated button press effect (the variation in the symbol that causes the repeated button press effect to be executed) is executed. Thereafter, the automatic repeated hit reception period starts, and the first treasure chest discovery performance is executed. The treasure box discovery effect is configured to be executed during the automatic repeated press acceptance period and not during the button press valid period. Thereafter, the first button press validity period starts, and the first treasure box opening effect is executed. Further, an automatic continuous hit performance is executed due to the player pressing and holding the sub-input button. Note that the treasure box opening performance is configured to be executed during the valid period of button presses. Thereafter, the validity period of the first button press ends, and a "star" comes out of the treasure box as a result of the first treasure chest opening performance. In addition, there are "stars" and "ska" as the performance results of the treasure chest opening performance, and the higher the total number of "stars" as the result of the treasure chest opening performance that is executed three times with one symbol change, It is structured so that the expectation of jackpot for the symbol change is high.

After that, a second treasure chest discovery performance is performed. Thereafter, the second button press validity period starts, and the second treasure box opening effect is executed. Further, an automatic continuous hit performance is executed due to the player pressing and holding the sub-input button. In addition, this example shows an example in which the player newly presses and holds the sub-input button during the valid period of the second button press, but the player has continued to press and hold the sub-input button since the first treasure chest opening effect. Even so, the automatic continuous hit performance will be executed in the second treasure chest opening performance. After that, the validity period of the second button press ends, and "Ska" comes out of the treasure box as a result of the second treasure chest opening performance that is executed.

After that, the third treasure chest discovery performance is performed. Thereafter, the third button press validity period starts, and the third treasure chest opening effect is executed. Further, an automatic continuous hit performance is executed due to the player pressing and holding the sub-input button. Note that this example shows an example in which the player newly presses and holds the sub-input button during the third button press validity period, but the timing is during the automatic repeated press acceptance period before the third button press validity period. Even if the sub-input button is kept pressed for a long time, the automatic continuous hit performance will be executed at the third treasure chest opening performance. Thereafter, the valid period of the third button press and the automatic press acceptance period end, and a "star" comes out of the treasure box as a result of the third treasure chest opening effect. After that, the total number of "stars" (expectation of jackpot) discovered in the three treasure box presentations is displayed. Thereafter, the ready-to-reach performance will be executed due to the completion of all button press performances.

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, three button repetition valid periods are provided in the symbol variation in which the button repetition effect is executed, and the first button effect period starts. By starting the automatic repeated press acceptance period before the timing, even if you press and hold the sub input button (sub input button ASB) just before the start timing of the first button press valid period, the first button press will not be activated. The automatic repeated press effect will be executed from the start timing of the valid repeated press period, and the period between a certain button press valid period and the next button press valid period, which is not the valid button press valid period, will also be an automatic repeated press acceptance period. As a result, by continuing to press and hold the sub-input button (sub-input button ASB), the player can execute the automatic repeated-pressing effect during all three button-pressing valid periods, making it more user-friendly. It can be used as a gaming machine. Additionally, the sub-input button CSB-3, which is difficult to press repeatedly because it is turned on by pulling it toward you, is not effective in the button-mashing effect, but the sub-input button ASB, which is easy to repeatedly press, is effective in the button-mashing effect. By configuring it so as to obtain the same results, the gaming machine becomes more user-friendly, and by configuring it so that multiple hits can be performed using only one sub-input button, it is possible to execute consistent consecutive hits determination, and the capacity of the sub-control board S is reduced. This makes it possible to create a gaming machine with less burden.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, by configuring the automatic button press acceptance period to start before the start timing of the first button press valid period, the first button press Even if the player starts pressing and holding the sub-input button ASB during the execution of the treasure chest discovery effect before the start of the valid period for repeated presses, by continuing to press the sub-input button ASB for a long time, the valid period for consecutive button presses will continue, i.e., the first time. A continuous hit performance will be performed during the treasure chest opening performance.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment, a period that is not a button repetition validity period between button repetition validity periods (for example, a period between a first button repetition validity period and a second button repetition validity period) period) is also set as the automatic repeated press acceptance period, so even if the player stops pressing and holding the sub-input button ASB after the first button press valid period ends, the second button press will not be accepted during the period outside of the valid button press period or the second time. If you press and hold the sub-input button ASB again during the valid button press period, the repeated press effect will be executed during the second button press valid period. Stressful events such as performance not being performed are less likely to occur, and the game machine can be made more user-friendly.

In addition, in a configuration such as the Pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment, in which the automatic repeated hit effect is executed during the valid period of all button presses by continuously pressing the sub input button ASB, multiple button presses are performed at short time intervals. (For example, "1st button press valid period = 4 seconds" → "Non-button press valid period = 2 seconds" → "2nd button press valid period = 4 seconds" ” → “Period not valid for button presses = 2 seconds” → “Valid period for 3rd button press = 4 seconds”) (This is because no additional processing capacity is used.)

(Example 1 of modification from the seventh embodiment)
Here, in the seventh embodiment, as a presentation mode of the button repeated press effect, the treasure box opening effect is executed multiple times and the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation level of the symbol change being executed is configured to be executable. The presentation mode is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as modification example 1 from the seventh embodiment, and only the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 201 is a flowchart of the button press effect execution process related to the subroutine of step 2850 in FIG. 196 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are steps 2884 (Variation 1) to Step 2888 (Variation 1), that is, after the treasure chest opening effect is executed in Step 2852, a preview effect is displayed in Step 2884 (Variation 1). The content determining means SM24n displays the automatic continuous hit effect effect on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to step 2853. Here, the automatic repeated hit effect effect is an effect that notifies the player that the automatic repeated hit effect will be executed by pressing and holding the current sub-input button ASB. Further, after displaying the result of the treasure box opening effect in step 2868, in step 2885 (variation 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the preview effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the special symbol is scheduled to stop. Determine whether or not. Here, the special symbol is a temporary stop symbol of a decorative symbol, and is a symbol that gives the player a pseudo-continuous variation (a symbol that makes it appear as if multiple symbol variations are being executed in one decorative symbol variation). This is a stop symbol that suggests that a fluctuation) will be executed. In addition, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, three types of button presses are valid as the button press effect execution mode: one button press valid period, two button press valid periods, and three button press valid periods. There are multiple button press effects for the number of times during the period (even among button press effects where the number of valid button presses is the same, there are multiple performance modes with different performance results), and the button press effects are selected by lottery. The execution or non-execution of the button-hitting performance is determined (this may be determined based on the variation mode of the main game symbol or the variation mode of the decorative symbol). In addition, when configured in this way, when a button-mashing effect with a large number of button-mashing valid periods is executed, the jackpot expectation level is higher than when a button-mashing effect with a small number of button-mashing valid periods is executed. It may be configured so that the winning amount is higher, or it may be configured such that a button press performance in which the number of button press valid periods is one is certain to be a jackpot. If Yes in step 2885 (variation 1), in step 2886 (variation 1), the preview performance display content determining means SM24n stops displaying the special symbol and moves to the next process (processing in step 2830). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2885 (variation 1), the process moves to the next process (processing in step 2830).

Further, after executing the treasure chest discovery series in step 2872, in step 2888 (variation 1), the preview effect display content determining means SM24n displays a countdown effect on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to step 2874. Here, the effective automatic continuous play performance is a performance that notifies the player of the current automatic continuous play acceptance period and how many seconds later the automatic continuous play acceptance period will end.

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the button performance execution period. The change from the seventh embodiment is that there are three types of button press valid periods: 1, 2, and 3, and as shown in the figure, the button press valid period has three types. If they are different, the execution period of the repeated button press effect and the automatic repeated press acceptance period are configured to be different. In addition, the special symbol will stop during a period that is not a valid button press period between a certain button press valid period and the next button press valid period.

Next, FIG. 202 is a modified example of the image diagram for executing the continuous hit effect according to Modified Example 1 from the seventh embodiment. In the same figure, similar to the image diagram for executing the repeated-hitting effect shown in the seventh embodiment, the automatic repeated-hitting effect is executed in one variation of the decorative pattern for which the repeated-button-hitting effect is executed; An example is shown in which the number of valid periods is three. The changes from the seventh embodiment are that a countdown effect is executed when the treasure chest discovery effect is executed, an automatic continuous hit effect effect is executed when the treasure chest opening effect is executed, and the effect of the treasure chest opening effect. When "Zoku" appears, the "Zoku" symbol, which is a special symbol, stops. In addition, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, if "Continue" appears as a result of the treasure box opening performance, the special symbol will stop, and then the next treasure box discovery performance will be executed, If "reach" appears as a result of the treasure chest opening performance, the reach performance will be executed thereafter. In addition, since the structure is configured so that the more the special symbols stop and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is executed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the player has high expectations for the "continue" to appear as a result of the treasure chest opening performance. In other words, the later the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect is, the higher the expectation that the symbol change will be a jackpot. In this example, the automatic repeated press effect is executed (displayed) only during the execution of the treasure chest opening effect, in other words, during the valid button press period, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed (displayed) at times, or in other words, it may be configured to be executed (displayed) at all times during the automatic repeated hit acceptance period. Furthermore, the countdown effect is configured to display the time until the end timing of the treasure box effect, that is, the start timing of the valid button press period (the displayed time value decreases as the timing approaches), When the timing is reached, the display becomes "0 seconds left until opening starts" and the display is erased.

In addition, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the special symbol is configured to stop when the effect becomes "Continue" as a result of the treasure box opening effect, but the effect mode of the button continuous press effect is different from this. For example, the result of the treasure box opening performance is similar to the seventh embodiment, in which "stars" or "ska" appear to stimulate the expectation of a jackpot of the fluctuation, and apart from the result of the treasure chest opening performance, It may be configured to execute an effect that incites whether or not the special symbol stops (whether or not a pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed).

In addition, in this example, when the repeated button press effect is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example) during the button press validity period, that is, when the sub input button SB is detected to be pressed a predetermined number of times, the treasure chest is Although the configuration is configured to display the result effect of the opening effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and points are earned each time the sub-input button SB is pressed once during the button press validity period in the symbol variation in which the button press effect is executed. If the sub-input button SB is detected to have been pressed a predetermined number of times (the obtained points are displayed), the total number of obtained points for the predetermined number of times may be displayed. By configuring the game in this manner, the player can expect that the symbol change will result in a jackpot every time the acquired points are displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the special symbols can be stopped and displayed when performing the button-hitting performance, and the timing at which the execution of the ready-to-reach performance is delayed By configuring the system so that the expectation of a jackpot due to symbol fluctuations during execution is high, the player has a sense of expectation that the special symbol will stop displaying and longs for the execution timing of the ready-to-reach effect to be executed to be delayed. This makes it possible to create innovative gameplay.

In addition, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, the variation time of the symbol variation is configured to be 60 seconds regardless of the number of times the pseudo continuous variation is executed, but the variation time is not limited to this, and for example, In the symbol variation where the button press effect is executed, the variation time of the symbol variation in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed once is 60 seconds, the variation time of the symbol variation in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice is 80 seconds, the pseudo continuous variation is The variation time of the symbol variation performed three times may be set to 120 seconds, and it may be configured such that the more times the pseudo continuous variation is performed, the longer the variation time becomes. With such a configuration, even when the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is large, it is possible to ensure the performance execution time such as the super reach performance.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this example, the interval of the continuous hit effect of the automatic continuous hit effect executed by long pressing the sub input button ASB (in this example, the continuous hit effect is performed at an interval of once every 0.2 seconds) The configuration may be such that the player can change the execution of the game. As a specific example of a changing method, when the main game symbol is not changing and the special game is not in progress (or the small hit is not in progress), by pressing the sub input button ASB, the automatic continuous hit interval adjustment mode can be changed. (The effect display device SG will display a message indicating that the interval of the automatic continuous hit performance can be changed), and by operating the sub input button BSB-2 in the automatic continuous hit interval adjustment mode, the automatic continuous hit performance will be executed. It may be configured such that by changing the interval of the repeated hit effect and pressing the sub input button ASB again, the interval of the changed automatic continuous hit effect is determined, or the variation of the main game symbol is executed. and if you are not playing a special game (or winning a small prize), press and hold the sub-input button ASB to move to the automatic repeated-hit interval adjustment mode, and press the sub-input button ASB in the automatic repeated-hit interval adjustment mode. The player makes repeated hits, and the interval between consecutive hits measured for a predetermined period of time is determined as the interval for the repeated hits of the automatic repeated hits effect (for example, by measuring the total number of times the sub input button ASB is pressed by the player in 3 seconds) , the average interval between successive hits per hit may be calculated.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute an automatic repeated hit effect by long pressing the sub input button ASB, that is, the sub input button ASB changes from off to on, and the on state remains for a predetermined period of time (main In the example, the configuration is such that auto repeated hits can be started if the auto repeated hits continue for 0.5 seconds, but the invention is not limited to this. You can. Specifically, when the auto-repeat-hit dedicated button is pressed during the button-mash validity period, the auto-repeat-hit effect will start when the auto-repeated-hit button turns from off to on.

(Eighth embodiment)
The gaming machine according to this example can also be configured to be able to set one setting value from a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, an example of a configuration having a plurality of setting values will be described in detail below as an eighth embodiment.

First, FIG. 203 is an example of the first main game winning/failure lottery table (second main game winning/failure lottery table) in the case of changing the winning probability of the main game symbol according to the setting value in the eighth embodiment. . In this example, the profit rate given to the player is configured to increase in the order of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3. More specifically, the probability of winning (jackpot) in setting 1 during a non-probability variable game is set to approximately 1/320, and the probability of winning (jackpot) winning in setting 2 during a non-probability variable game is set to approximately 1/320. The probability of winning (jackpot) in setting 3 during a non-probability variable game is set to about 1/317. In addition, the probability of winning (jackpot) in setting 1 during probability variable games is set to approximately 1/160, and the probability of winning (jackpot) winning in setting 2 during probability variable games is set to approximately 1/159. The probability of winning (jackpot) in setting 3 during the probability variable game is set to approximately 1/158. Therefore, the probability of winning (jackpot) when playing a variable probability game is approximately twice the probability of winning (jackpot) during a non-probability variable game, and the configuration is such that this ratio is the same for all settings. . This point is the same for the first main game side and the second main game side.

In addition, as shown in the same figure, the random number range that is determined to be a hit (jackpot) in setting 1 when playing a non-probability fluctuating game is also determined to be a hit (jackpot) in setting 2 when playing a non-probability fluctuating game. Both the random number range and the random number range determined to be a hit (jackpot) in setting 3 during the non-probability fluctuating game include "0 to 204" as a common range. Therefore, for example, if a hold with a random number between 0 and 204 occurs during a non-probability fluctuating game, the hold will become a hit ( If we notify you in advance that there will be a jackpot (and if the random number is determined to be a jackpot outside the range of 0 to 204, we will not notify you in advance), The higher the frequency that the suspension is exhausted and the lottery is held without prior notification (pre-reading performance) being executed (as a result, a jackpot occurs), the higher the possibility of setting 3 (the setting value (This is because in the order of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, the random number that is judged to be a hit (jackpot) outside the range of "0 to 204" increases. be). It should be noted that this point is similarly applicable to the probability variation game, and is similarly applicable to both the first main game side and the second main game side. Also, the random number range that is determined to be a hit (small hit) at a certain setting value does not overlap with the random number range that is determined to be a hit (big hit) at another setting value, so it is difficult to determine which setting value is. Regardless of the above, if a hold occurs with a random number that falls within the random value range that is determined to be a hit (small win), the hold will be determined to be a hit (small win) before the hold is extinguished and the lottery is held. If advance notification is given that the game is scheduled to result in a hit (win), the advance notification of a win (small win) can be made regardless of the set value (pre-judgment processing related to the look-ahead presentation can be made common).

On the other hand, it is also possible to configure the setting value not to be suggested by the look-ahead effect, and an example of this is shown below. The pre-read determination table shown below is a table for preliminary determination that the main control board M has. When a hold occurs, the main control board M refers to the read-ahead determination table based on the random value related to the hold, derives a read-ahead code, and transmits it to the sub-control board S. Based on the information related to the setting value transmitted from the main control board M in advance, the sub control board S determines whether the preread code is A, B, or C if the main control board M side is set to 3. If the main control board M side is set to 2, the main control board M side will give advance notification that it is a hit (jackpot) only in the case of either pre-read code A or B. If the board M side is set to 1, advance notification of a hit (jackpot) is made only in the case of pre-read code A. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to infer the settings on the main control board M side from the execution tendency of the look-ahead effect.

Note that although FIG. 203 illustrates a configuration having three levels of setting values, setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, as setting values that can be set, the configuration is not limited to this, and the types of setting values that can be set are The number and contents of the set values may be changed. As a specific example, it may be configured to have six setting values: "setting 1, setting 2, setting 3, setting 4, setting 5, setting 6", or "setting 1, setting 3, setting 5". It may be configured to have three levels of setting values, or it may be configured to have three levels of setting values, ``Setting 1, Setting 4, and Setting S'', or it may have one level of ``Setting value 1.'' It may also be configured to have only one set value. Note that even in the case where the setting value is configured to have only one level, it is preferable to configure it so that it can shift to a setting confirmation mode or a setting change mode. With this configuration, in the setting change mode, the setting value display (setting value data) will not change even if the RAM clear button is pressed, and the setting value will be confirmed by turning off the setting key switch. It may be configured to do so.

(How to change settings)
Next, FIGS. 204 and 205 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method using a setting key switch and a RAM clear button. The setting change method is performed by the following steps.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game store clerk or the like opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the game machine is off, the setting key switch is off, and the RAM clear button is off, proceed to the next step. Incidentally, if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting key switch is on, turn it off and proceed to the next step.
(3) A game store clerk or the like turns on the setting key switch to the right and turns on the RAM clear button.
(4) When a gaming clerk or the like turns on the power switch Ea, the gaming machine shifts to a setting change mode, and the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to display a default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or may be configured to display the currently set setting value. Good too. Further, in order to make it possible to understand that the device is in the settings change mode, it may be configured so that a voice saying "Settings are being changed" is output. Note that the set value display device is controlled by the main control board M.
(5) Turn off the RAM clear button once. (6) Every time the gaming store clerk presses the RAM clear button (every time it turns from off to on), the setting value (sometimes referred to as setting value data or setting value candidate) ) is changed to the next set value (set value data), and the set value (set value data) is displayed on the set value display device. In the figure, setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and changed to setting value 2, but the settings are in consecutive numbers (for example, setting 1 → setting 3 → setting 5, setting 2 → setting 4 → setting 6, etc.). Even if it is configured, it is preferable to configure it so that the next setting value (for example, setting value 1 is changed to setting value 3). Further, the configuration may be such that when a game clerk or the like presses the setting change button once, the setting is decreased by 1. In this case, the setting 6 is preferably the setting with the lowest jackpot probability, and it is desirable to set the default setting value to 6. Further, as the setting, characters or symbols that can be displayed on the setting value display device of the 7-segment display may be used, such as L (LOW) or H (HIGH). Note that here, the display of setting values and selection candidates for setting values can be changed, and the configuration is configured such that the setting is finalized when a confirmation condition is satisfied. In other words, the display on the setting value display device will display "1" when the setting change mode is entered, and each time the setting change button is operated, the display will change in the order of "1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → 2". The setting value is set (fixed) to 2 when the confirmation condition is satisfied when the display on the set value display device is "2".
(7) The settings were confirmed by the gaming clerk, etc. turning the setting key switch to the left to turn it off (the setting change mode ended when the confirmation conditions were met), and the settings were displayed on the setting value display device of the gaming machine. The setting value display is cleared. Note that the setting value may be configured to be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the setting is confirmed.
(8) Close the front frame D14. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the game can be executed when the settings are finalized, or the game can be executed when the front frame D14 is closed. Note that the gaming machine according to this example has a sensor that can detect whether the front frame D14 is closed or opened.

(How to check settings)
Next, FIG. 206 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using a setting key switch and a RAM clear button. The setting confirmation method is performed by the following steps.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) The power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off, the setting key switch is off, and the RAM clear button is off.
(3) (4) When a gaming clerk turns the setting key switch clockwise to turn on the power switch Ea, the gaming machine shifts to setting confirmation mode (sometimes referred to as setting display mode). , the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, in order to be able to understand that it is in the settings confirmation mode, it may be configured so that a sound saying "Settings confirmation is in progress" is output.Although the game is in progress, the game sound (BGM, SE, etc.) It may be configured so that the game sound is not output (the game sound output stops) and only the voice ``Checking the settings'' is output, or the game sound and ``Checking the settings'' are output at the same time. A configuration may also be used.
(5) When a gaming store clerk or the like turns off the setting key switch, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. At this time, the configuration may be such that a voice saying "Setting confirmation ends" is output.
(6) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. In the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game (changes in special symbols, etc.) continues without pausing, so even if the front frame is closed while the special symbols are changing, the effect display device SG will not The variations and effects of decorative patterns continue to be displayed. In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped. In this case, when the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is entered and the progress of the game is paused, and the setting key switch is turned on. When turned off, the setting confirmation mode ends, the pause is canceled, and the game continues to proceed. Here, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, unlike when transitioning to the setting change mode, the probability state is maintained at the state immediately before transitioning to the setting confirmation mode.

<<Configuration related to sub input button SB>>
Next, as a configuration regarding the sub-input button SB applicable to the pachinko gaming machine in this specification, a configuration is possible to execute a sub-input button drive performance (sometimes referred to as an operation member drive performance) driven by the sub-input button SB. You may. The sub-input button drive effect includes a button vibration effect in which the entire sub-input button SB vibrates (sometimes referred to as an operation member vibration effect), and a structure in the sub-input button SB (or the sub-input button SB itself) that rotates. button rotation effect (sometimes referred to as operation member rotation effect), a button expansion/contraction effect in which the sub-input button SB moves up and down (sometimes referred to as operation member expansion/contraction effect), and a change in the shape of the sub-input button SB. It is possible to configure a button transformation effect (sometimes referred to as an operation member transformation effect) to be executable. In the following, a Pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to perform a button vibe effect as a sub-input button drive effect will be described in detail. Note that the button vibe effect in this specification is just an example of a sub-input button drive effect, so there is no problem in replacing the button vibe effect with a button rotation effect, a button expansion/contraction effect, or a button deformation effect. Let me add this. Further, an operation member controlled by the sub-control board S may be provided in addition to the sub-input button SB (it may be provided separately from the sub-input button SB, or the operation member may be operated in place of not having the sub-input button SB). For example, an operating member that is shaped like a telephone and detects the player's operation when the handset is picked up, or a pistol-shaped operating member that detects the player's operation when the trigger is pulled. It may be configured to include an operating member, an operating member that is in the shape of a sword or a lever, and which detects the player's operation by being pulled toward the user. All the configurations of the operation member drive performance of the input button SB are applicable. For example, if the operating member in the shape of a telephone set is configured to be able to perform a vibrating effect, the operating member in the shape of a telephone receiver is configured to vibrate. As a supplementary note, one or more configurations detailed below may be applied to all configurations in this specification without any problem.

<A: Button vibe production>
First, FIG. 207 is an image diagram regarding the button vibe effect that can be executed by the sub input button SB and the button vibe related to the initial operation. First, the button vibe effect shown in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail.

Although not shown, in this example, the sub-input button SB has a button lamp that can be lit in a plurality of lighting modes, and no effects related to the sub-input button SB are executed. The lighting mode in this situation is called the normal mode. In addition, in a situation where the effect related to the sub-input button SB is not executed, the button lamp may be turned off (note that the lighting in the normal mode may be replaced with "lights off" in the following). put).

First, in Figure (a), symbol variation is being executed in a predetermined game state, and in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a reach with 7 symbols, and the second decorative symbol is a reach. All of them are changing, and the button lamp of the sub input button SB is lit in a normal mode (for example, gray).

In addition, reach means, for example, in a decorative pattern that has three columns: the left column, the middle column, and the right column, the left column and right column temporarily stop at the same symbol, and the middle column is in the process of changing. This is a situation where the remaining one symbol is changing and the other symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol.

It should be noted that the configuration of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern when detailing the configuration related to the sub-input button SB is only an example, and it should be noted that all configurations according to this specification are applicable. I'll keep it. As an example of a modification, when the first decorative pattern becomes a reach, the second decorative pattern is also configured to become a reach, so that there is no problem in changing the configuration shown in the figure.

Next, in (b) of the same figure, a button effect is executed, and the effect display device SG displays a button image (an image imitating a sub-input button) and "Press!!" (the corresponding display that can be displayed at the same time as the button image). An instruction display (sometimes referred to as an instruction display, the details of which will be described later) is displayed. In addition, in the same figure, the button lamp is configured to be in the normal mode even while the button effect is being executed, but the lighting mode is not limited to this, and while the button effect is being executed, the lighting mode corresponding to the button effect is (For example, the button lamp may be configured to turn on in blue or green, which has higher illuminance than gray. ). With this configuration, the player can recognize that it is a situation where the sub-input button SB should be operated by visually recognizing the button lamp. It should be noted that the lighting mode of the sub-input button SB may be configured to suggest or notify the degree of expectation for execution of the special game, and in such a configuration, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is relatively high. Or, when informing, it lights up in red instead of white, and when indicating or informing that the expectation level for execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is certain), it lights up in rainbow color instead of white or red. may be lit. In addition, in the figure, in order to clarify the situation in which the button vibe effect is being executed and the situation in which the button vibe effect is not in progress, the button lamp is turned on in a normal manner when the button vibe effect is not in progress. However, there is no problem in changing the button lamp, and there is no problem in configuring the button lamp to be lit in a lighting mode other than the normal mode in various situations when the button vibe effect is not in progress. Note that the button image may be referred to as a specific image or a first image.

Next, in FIG. 3C, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during the execution of the button effect, the execution of the button vibe effect is started. When the button vibe effect is executed, the sub input button SB vibrates, and the button lamp lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the button vibe effect (e.g., blue, indicating or informing that the expectation level for executing the special game is relatively high). It is configured to light up in green when the special game is to be executed, and in rainbow color to suggest or notify that the execution expectation of the special game is the highest (the execution of the special game is certain). At this time, the lighting mode of the button lamp is different before and after the operation of the sub input button SB (or before and after the start of the button effect execution) (for example, before the operation of the sub input button SB may be configured such that it is white and turns green or rainbow-colored after the operation, green before the operation of the sub-input button SB and rainbow-colored after the operation, etc. In addition, the lighting mode of the button lamp is the same before and after the operation of the sub input button SB (or before and after the start of the button effect execution) (for example, the lighting mode of the button lamp is the same before and after the operation of the sub input button SB. Before operating the sub-input button SB, it is white and remains white after operating it; before operating the sub-input button SB it is green and remains green after operating it; before operating the sub-input button SB it is rainbow-colored and remains rainbow-colored after operating it; etc.). With this configuration, if two button effects and an accompanying button vibe effect are executed within one change, the first button effect and the second button effect will cause the sub-input button SB to The switching pattern of the lighting mode of the button lamp is different before and after the operation (or before the start of the button effect execution and after the start of the button effect execution) (for example, it is white before the first operation of the sub input button SB) It turns green after the second sub-input button SB operation, and becomes rainbow-colored after the second sub-input button SB operation.It is white before the first sub-input button SB operation, and it remains white after the second sub-input button SB is operated. It may be configured such that the button SB is white before the button SB is operated and rainbow-colored after the button SB is operated, etc.). In this way, the button vibe performance is a performance that suggests or informs that there is a high expectation of executing a jackpot (special game). In other words, it is configured to be able to perform a button vibe effect when suggesting or notifying that the expectation level of executing a jackpot is high. Note that a button effect has a valid period (sometimes referred to as an operation valid period), and if a button effect accompanied by a button vibe effect is executed and the valid period has elapsed, the sub input button SB will not be activated. It is configured so that the button vibe effect starts even if it is not operated. Note that the configuration related to the button lamp in this specification is an example of a decorative LED that a pachinko gaming machine has, and the configuration of the button lamp in this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, which is a decorative LED. However, it may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. Further, the button lamp may be referred to as a decorative lamp, and the game effect lamp D26 may be referred to as a decorative lamp. Here, when the configuration of the button lamp according to the present specification is applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26, when the button effect (or button vibe effect) is executed, the type of lighting mode of the button lamp is The number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) is greater than the number of types (for example, three types of white, red, and rainbow colors). With this configuration, the game effect lamp D26, which is easily visible to the player, can have a variety of lighting patterns, and the button lamp, which is difficult to see the player, can be used by an experienced player (the button lamp can also be used to perform special games). This makes it easier for a player (who knows that the level of expectation will be suggested or reported) to understand which lamp pattern it is. In addition, the number of lighting modes of the button lamp when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is also one (for example, only red) or two. (For example, two types, white and red), the number of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibe effect) is executed. This is suitable, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time for the power to be restored, and also to indicate that the execution of the special game is the highest (the execution of the special game is certain). There will be no misidentification.

In the gaming machine according to the present specification, the operation modes of the sub input button SB include single press (sometimes referred to as single press operation), long press (sometimes referred to as long press operation), and repeated presses (repeated presses). (sometimes referred to as operations).
(1) A single press is an operation mode in which the sub input button SB changes from off to on and then turns off again without continuing for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds).
(2) Long press is an operation mode in which the sub input button SB changes from off to on and then remains on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more.
(3) Repeated presses are an operation mode in which a single press is executed multiple times during the valid period of the sub input button SB (valid period of repeated presses).
Note that when it is referred to as operating the sub-input button SB or pressing the sub-input button SB without specifically mentioning the operation mode, there is no problem in replacing it with a single press of the sub-input button SB.

Returning to the explanation of the image diagram, in the same figure (d), the button vibe performance ends because the execution time of the button vibe performance has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds have passed since the button vibe performance started execution). , After that, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped at the jackpot pattern. In this way, in this example, the button vibe performance is configured to be completed by the time the symbol variation in which the button vibe performance was started ends (the main game symbol is stopped). Additionally, even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB while the button effect is being executed and the button vibe effect is executed after the validity period has passed, the symbol variation that started the button vibe effect will end. The button vibe effect is configured so that the execution is completed by the time the button vibe effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button vibe effect may end (for example, end during the fixed variation time) by the time the next symbol change of the symbol change for which the button vibe effect has started is started. may be configured.

In this way, this example is configured to be able to execute a button vibe effect as a button effect, and there are cases where the button vibe effect is executed at various timings. If the sub-input button SB is operated at the timing to notify the result of a reach performance (especially a super reach performance such as a battle reach performance described later) (in other words, whether to proceed to a special game), a button vibe performance is generated. (in case of a jackpot). Such a button performance at the timing of notifying the result of the reach performance may be referred to as a win/loss branch performance, a button performance related to a win/loss branch, or a win/loss branch operation performance. If you want to suggest or notify that there is a jackpot in the winning/losing branch performance, you can do so by operating the sub input button SB (or when the operation validity period has passed) during the battle performance (during the performance where the main character and enemy are fighting). The movable accessory moves and emits rainbow-colored light, and then the word "victory" is displayed in gold, and then the first decorative pattern is displayed as a double, such as "777", indicating that there is no jackpot in the winning/losing performance. When suggesting or notifying, by operating the sub-input button SB (or due to the expiry of the operation validity period), the movable accessory will not operate and the words "defeat" will be displayed in white, and then the first decorative symbol will be displayed. is displayed in an out-of-reach format such as "787". In addition, if the button effect is executed at the timing to notify the result of the reach effect and the symbol change being executed is a loss, the button vibe effect will not be activated even if the player operates the sub input button SB. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not executed, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are then stopped as losing patterns. Note that the button effect may be referred to as an operation effect, and the button vibe effect (vibration of the sub-input button SB when performing the button vibe effect) may be referred to as an effect operation or a predetermined operation.

Further, as described above, the following configuration can be applied as a configuration of a button vibe effect that can be applied to the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification.
(1) A button effect is executed in the middle of symbol variation, and a button vibe effect is executed when the player operates the sub-input button SB or when the valid period has elapsed.
(2) It is executed as part of the execution of the button effect, and has the role of prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB. In other words, even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the button vibe effect is executed when the execution timing of the button effect comes, and the valid period of the sub-input button SB is started (at a subsequent predetermined timing). This button vibe effect may be referred to as a button vibe effect that does not require operation of the sub-input button SB and has a valid period.
(3) This is a performance executed as a type of preview performance, and even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the button vibe performance is executed at the execution timing, and the valid period of the sub-input button SB does not start. Also, the button image is not displayed. This button vibe effect may be referred to as a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB and does not have a valid period, and may also be referred to as a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB.

In this specification, a button effect is an effect that has a period during which the operation of the sub-input button SB is valid (has a valid period), and after the valid period starts, after the operation of the sub-input button SB (or The execution period of the button effect is the period until the end of the effect (including the button vibe effect) that is executed after the sub-input button SB is operated (or after the activation period has passed). The period from the start of the performance (including the button vibe performance) to the end of the performance (after the period has elapsed) may be referred to as the button performance, and the operation of the sub-input button SB described above is unnecessary and effective. A presentation that involves an operation of the sub-input button SB, such as a button vibe presentation that does not have a period, may be referred to as a button presentation.

<B: Button vibration related to initial operation>
Furthermore, as described above, in this example, the sub input button SB is configured to execute an initial operation when the power is restored from a power-off (when the power is turned on), and the button that is executed in the initial operation is The vibrator is sometimes referred to as a button vibrator for initial operation. The configuration is such that the operation of the sub-input button SB can be confirmed by executing a button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. An example of a case where the button vibration related to the initial operation is executed will be described in detail below.

First, in the same figure (e), symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a reach with 7 symbols, and the second decorative symbol is a reach. All of them are changing, and the button lamp of the sub input button SB is lit in a normal manner.

Next, in FIG. 4(f), a power outage occurs (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off). Next, in (g) of the same figure, a predetermined timing after the power is restored (the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed) (for example, 0.5 seconds after the power supply is resumed) , the effect display device SG displays "Power is being restored" indicating that the display on the effect display device SG is being restored (processing to restore the display is being executed), and the sub input button SB is pressed. The button vibration related to the initial operation is being executed.

Next, in (h) of the same figure, the same symbol variation as in (e) of the same figure continues to be executed, and the display on the effect display device SG is restored and the background image etc. is displayed. However, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hidden. In the figure, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed when the current pattern variation ends (or when the next pattern variation starts). Note that this is not limited to this, and if the display on the effect display device SG is restored after the power is restored (when the display of "power is being restored" is finished), the first decorative symbol is displayed even if the symbol variation has not ended. It may be configured such that the display and/or the display of the second decorative pattern are also restored. In addition, as for other ways of power recovery, after a power outage occurs (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off) and the power is restored (the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed), At a predetermined timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the power supply is resumed), the effect display device SG returns the message "Power is being restored" (the display does not change). The system will continue to display the message "Returning power" until the symbol fluctuation is completed, and once the symbol fluctuation has finished, the "Returning power" message will be displayed. When the process is finished, the background image is displayed, and the first decorative pattern "711" and the second decorative pattern "711" are displayed as stop symbols exclusive for when the power is restored. That is, except after the power is restored, "711" may be configured not to be stopped and displayed as a losing symbol (not selected as a stopped symbol) in either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. In this configuration, if the remaining time of the fluctuating display when a power outage occurs is long (for example, 60 seconds), the execution timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub input button SB is set to "Power If the remaining time of the fluctuating display when a power outage occurs is short (for example, 3 seconds), the background image, 1 decorative pattern, 2nd decorative pattern, etc. are being displayed). Although the details will be described later, depending on the timing of the power outage, the initial state may be displayed before and after the "Power is being restored" display ends (before and after the display of the background image, first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, etc. is resumed). There may be a button vibration associated with the action. As an example, it is assumed that the button vibration associated with the initial operation of the sub-input button SB starts 10 seconds after the timing when the "power restoration in progress" display starts and continues for 5 seconds. In addition, it is appropriate that the initial action of the movable accessory and the button vibration associated with the initial action do not overlap in execution timing (or execution start timing) (for example, the initial action of the movable accessory is displayed as "Returning to power"). (The initial operation is performed for 10 seconds, starting 20 seconds after the start of the initial operation). However, in the case where there are two or more movable accessories, the initial motion of any movable accessory and the button vibe related to the initial motion may be configured so that the execution timing does not overlap, but the initial motion may be In order to complete the process quickly, the initial movement of one movable accessory and the button vibration related to the initial movement may be configured to have overlapping execution timings (at least some periods overlap).

In addition, in the same figure (h), the button vibe related to the initial action continues, and although details will be described later, the button vibe related to the initial action is configured so that it can be executed over the next symbol change. .

Note that the vibration of the sub-input button SB as a button vibe effect and the vibration of the sub-input button SB as a button vibe related to the initial operation may be collectively referred to as operation member operation and execution of operation member operation. .

<Effects related to power outage 1>
Next, FIG. 208 is an action diagram regarding the power-off and button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB. First, action 1 related to power cutoff illustrated in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail.

In a situation where the main game symbols are fluctuating, a power outage occurs (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off) at the timing (1) in the diagram, and the fluctuations of the main game symbols become non-fluctuations (the symbols (The fluctuation is not executed because the power supply to the gaming machine has been cut off, not because the fluctuation has ended.)

Thereafter, at timing (2) in the figure, the power is restored (power supply to the gaming machine is restarted) and the fluctuation of the main game symbols resumes. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the button vibration associated with the initial operation of the sub-input button SB starts to be executed based on the power being restored. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the symbol variation that was being executed ends, but the button vibe related to the initial operation continues to be executed. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the next pattern variation starts to be executed, and the button vibe related to the initial operation continues to be executed.

In this way, in this example, the button vibe related to the initial action is configured so that the button vibe related to the initial action can continue to be executed even after the symbol variation in which the button vibration related to the initial action was executed has ended and the next symbol variation has started. ing. In other words, the button vibe related to the initial operation is configured to be executed across a plurality of symbol variations. Further, the button vibration related to the initial operation may be executed during the variable fixed time. Note that the button vibration related to the initial operation may be simply referred to as the initial operation.

On the other hand, as described above, the button vibe performance is configured so that the execution of the button vibe performance is completed by the time the symbol variation in which the button vibe performance is started ends (the main game symbol stops). In other words, the button vibe effect is configured so as not to be executed across a plurality of symbol variations. Further, the button vibe effect is configured not to be executed during the variable fixed time.

Further, as a pre-read effect, a button vibe pre-read effect may be configured to be executable. Note that the button vibe look-ahead effect is not a button effect (it is a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB, and the button image corresponding to this button vibe effect is not displayed, and the above-mentioned sub-input This is a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the button SB and does not have a valid period). As an example, a button vibe look-ahead effect is executed immediately after the start of each symbol variation (the button vibe continues for 1 second 0.5 seconds after the symbol variation starts) over 3 symbol variations (3 variations). (1) the button vibe effect is executed (3 times in total) at the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd fluctuations (2) at the 1st and 2nd fluctuations. In other words, the button vibe performance may be configured to be executed with a symbol variation other than the trigger variation (sometimes referred to as a pre-trigger variation). In this way, even when the button vibe effect is executed over a plurality of symbol changes as a pre-read effect, the button vibe effect may be configured not to be executed across a plurality of symbol changes.

With this configuration, when the game is progressing normally, the button vibe effect can be executed over multiple symbol changes, which improves the interest of the game and improves the game. By configuring the button vibe performance so that it is not executed over multiple symbol changes, the boundaries of the button vibe performance are made clear, and confusion for the player can be prevented. On the other hand, when the power is restored after a power outage, by configuring the button vibration related to the initial operation to be executed over multiple symbol changes, it is possible to check whether the vibration of the sub input button SB is performed normally or not. Priority can be given to confirmation of

Further, in the above-described configuration, the button vibe effect is configured so as not to be executed across multiple symbol variations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows.
(1) A predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time reducing gaming state, a probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reducing gaming state, a probability fluctuating gaming state and a time saving gaming state) In the shortened game state), the button vibe effect is not executed across a plurality of symbol variations.
(2) In a predetermined production mode (sometimes referred to as a production stage, stay stage, or background production), the button vibe production is not performed across multiple symbol variations.
(3) While the button vibe look-ahead effect is being executed, the button vibe effect is not executed across a plurality of symbol variations.
(4) During the execution of the button vibe look-ahead effect, the button vibe effect can be executed over a plurality of symbol variations.
(5) If a certain symbol variation and the next symbol variation are in the same gaming state, there is a case where a button vibe effect is executed across the certain symbol variation and the next symbol variation, but a certain symbol variation If the game state and the next symbol variation are in different gaming states, the button vibe effect is not executed across a certain symbol variation and the next symbol variation.
It may be configured to have one or more of the above configurations.

<Effects related to power outage 2>
Next, action 2 related to power cutoff illustrated in the lower part of the figure will be described in detail.

Under the situation where the main game symbols are changing and the setting key switch is off, a power outage occurs (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off) at the timing (1) in the diagram, and the main game symbols change. The fluctuation becomes non-fluctuation (the fluctuation is not executed because the symbol fluctuation has ended, but because the power supply to the gaming machine has been cut off).

After that, at timing (2) in the diagram, the power is restored (the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted), and the fluctuation of the main game symbols resumes (at this point, the fluctuation of the main game symbols has resumed). (It may be restarted after the setting key switch described later is turned from on to off). Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the setting key switch is turned on from off. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation starts to be executed, similar to the above-mentioned "effect 1 related to power-off", but based on the setting key switch being on, At the timing (4) in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed.

In this way, in "Effects related to power outage 2", if a power outage occurs while the setting key switch is off, and then the power is restored with the setting key switch still off, the initial operation will be affected. If the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON before the start timing of the button vibration (and/or after the start timing of "Returning power"), the initial operation will be performed with the setting key switch turned on. Even when the button vibration related to the button vibration is to be executed, the button vibration related to the initial operation is configured not to be executed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when you want to check the game operation after the power is restored, when you want to check the operation other than the button vibration such as the operation of movable accessories, when you do not want to cause vibration errors, etc. If the administrator of the game center does not want the button vibration related to the initial operation to be executed, the button vibration related to the initial operation can be prevented by performing a special operation of turning on the setting key switch after the power is restored. This improves the convenience of inspecting gaming machines.

In addition, in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation is configured not to be executed by turning the setting key switch from OFF to ON after the power is restored and before the execution timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation. The setting key switch is not limited to this, but the setting key switch can be turned on by turning the setting key switch from OFF to ON after the power is restored and before the "power returning" display on the effect display device SG described above in FIG. 207 is finished. It may be configured such that when the button vibrator is turned on and it is time to execute the button vibrator associated with the initial operation, the button vibrator associated with the initial operation is not executed. In addition, if the power is turned off while the setting key switch is off, and the power is restored with the setting key switch still in the off state, before the start timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation, and/or Alternatively, the setting key switch is turned from off to on after the display start timing of "Returning power", and then at a specific timing before the execution start timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation (for example, the button vibration related to the initial operation is turned on). If the setting key switch is turned off from on (1 second before the execution start timing), the button vibration related to the initial operation may be configured to be executed when the button vibration related to the initial operation is executed. .

In addition, similar to "effect 2 related to power-off", when the setting key switch is on, the timing (4) in the figure occurs, and the timing to start executing the button vibration related to the initial operation is reached, but the button vibration related to the initial operation is not activated. In the case where the vibration is not performed, the subsequent effect may be configured as follows.
(1) If the setting key switch is turned from on to off during the execution period of the button vibration related to the initial operation starting from (4) in the diagram, the button vibration related to the initial operation will be changed from the middle to the remaining button vibration. Execute only for a period of time.
(2) If the setting key switch is turned from on to off during the execution period of the button vibration related to the initial operation starting from (4) in the diagram, the button vibration related to the initial operation will be restarted from the beginning. Execute.
(3) Even if the setting key switch is turned off from on during the execution period of the button vibration related to the initial operation starting from (4) in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed.

<A: Button production image 1>
Next, FIG. 209 shows button effect image 1 and button effect image 2. First, button effect image 1 will be explained in detail.

First, in FIG. 3(a), symbol variation is being executed in a predetermined game state, and in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are all being varied.

Next, in FIG. 4B, a button effect is executed, and a button image and an instruction display of "Press!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, in FIG. 3C, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, a cut-in effect in the display mode of a fox is displayed on the effect display device SG. In this way, a button effect in which a button image is displayed on the effect display device SG may be referred to as a front button effect. In addition, although the details will be described later, the cut-in performance is a performance that suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot (the level of expectation for execution of a special game), and is accompanied by a button vibe performance when the sub input button SB is operated (sub There are two cases: (accompanied by vibration of input button SB) and a case (accompanied by vibration of sub-input button SB) in which the button vibration effect is not accompanied even if the sub-input button SB is operated. In addition, the display mode of the fox shown in the figure is just an example, and there are multiple display modes for the cut-in effect, and depending on which display mode is displayed as the cut-in effect, the symbol fluctuations or It is configured such that the jackpot expectation level of symbol changes to be executed in the future is different. In addition, as a display mode of the cut-in effect, when displayed, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed or the symbol change to be executed in the future will be a jackpot (for example, the space It may also be configured to have a human display mode). Even in front button performances other than cut-in performances, when displayed, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed or the symbol change to be executed in the future will be a jackpot (for example, It may also be configured to have an alien display mode). In addition, the button vibe effect is only performed when the display mode is such that it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed or the symbol change to be executed in the future will be a jackpot (for example, the display mode of an alien). For example, although it is not certain that the jackpot will be a jackpot, the jackpot expectation is relatively high (e.g., the jackpot expectation is 55%). It is also possible to include a button vibe effect in the case where the jackpot expectation level is relatively low (for example, the jackpot expectation level is 10%) (for example, the mongoose display mode). In some cases, the button vibe effect is not accompanied, or it is difficult to execute the button vibe effect).

It should be noted that the symbol variation for which the front button effect has been executed may result in a jackpot. In addition, the cut-in performance is executed at a different timing from the win/loss branch performance that announces the result of the reach performance mentioned above (it is a performance that is executed before the win/loss branch performance), and is executed before the reach occurs (reach It is configured so that it can be executed both before the reach occurs (before the reach occurs) and after the reach occurs (after the reach occurs).

Although the figure shows an example in which a button image is displayed as a front button effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient to display an image that prompts the player to operate the sub-input button SB.

<B: Button production image 2>
Next, button effect image 2 in FIG. 209 will be described in detail.

First, in FIG. 3(d), symbol variation is being executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are all in the process of variation. In addition, three pending images are displayed, and the corresponding fluctuation image (pending digestion transmission image, pending image, pending icon, variable icon, ) is displayed (the same display mode as the above-mentioned ``Zako hold'').

Thereafter, in FIG. 4(e), the sub-input button SB is repeatedly pressed, and an effect is generated on the variable image. Note that the configuration is such that an effect is generated each time the sub-input button SB is operated. Thereafter, in FIG. 4(f), the sub-input button SB is repeatedly pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), and the display mode of the variable image changes from the display mode similar to that of the "hold" to "chance" characters.

As shown in (e) and (f) in the figure, the button image is not displayed in this example, but by operating the sub-input button SB (repeatedly pressing in the figure), an effect can be generated. The display mode of the variable image is configured to change, and such an effect is sometimes referred to as a back button effect. That is, the execution period of the back button effect is the valid period for operating the sub-input button SB, but images such as button images that prompt the player to operate the sub-input button SB are not displayed. Note that when the back button effect is executed (when the sub input button SB related to the back button effect is operated), the button vibe effect is not executed. Incidentally, "Zako Hold" is the relevant fluctuating image with a jackpot expectation of 5%, and "chance" characters are the relevant fluctuating image with a jackpot expectation of 20%. In addition to this, there are also changes to the text "Very hot" (the fluctuating image with a 70% chance of hitting the jackpot), and alien hold (the fluctuating image that is almost certain (or certain) to be a jackpot). However, regardless of the display mode, the button vibe effect is not executed.

Next, in the same figure (g), the first decorative pattern becomes a reach with 7 patterns. Thereafter, in FIG. 12(h), a front button effect (the above-mentioned win/loss branch effect) is executed, and a button image and an instruction display of "Press!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG. After that, although not shown, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during the valid period of the button effect, the button vibe effect (and the movement and light emission of the movable accessory, the display of the word "Win", etc.) is activated. After that, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped at the jackpot pattern in FIG. 3(i). In this way, whether the front button effect is executed or the back button effect is executed, there is a case where the symbol change becomes a jackpot. In addition, as in "Button Effect Image 2", it is configured so that the front button effect and the back button effect can be executed with the first symbol variation, and in such a case, the front button effect is executed after the back button effect is executed. It is configured to execute button effects. Note that this is not limited to this, and steps (a) to (i) in the same figure may be executed in chronological order. In that case, when the symbol change results in a jackpot, the first front button effect, the back button The effect will be executed in this order, followed by the second front button effect. In that case, the time from the start of execution of the first front button effect to the start of execution of the back button effect is, for example, 120 seconds, and the time from the start of execution of the back button effect to the start of execution of the second front button effect is 60 seconds. In order to avoid a delay between the performance result of the back button performance and the performance result of the second front button performance (so as not to interrupt the sense of anticipation), the second front button from the start of execution of the back button performance It is desirable that the time until the start of execution of the performance is shorter. However, the time from the start of execution of the first front button effect to the start of execution of the back button effect is, for example, 60 seconds, and the time from the start of execution of the back button effect to the start of execution of the second front button effect is 120 seconds. In order to extend the time from the performance result of the back button performance to the performance result of the second front button performance (in order to maintain the sense of anticipation), the execution of the second front button performance from the start of execution of the back button performance is done. The time until the start may be longer. Further, it is preferable that the button vibe effect is more easily executed by operating the sub-input button SB in the second front button effect than in the first front button effect.

In addition, the display mode of "chance" shown in the same figure is just an example, and there are multiple types of display modes (production modes) for back button effects, and depending on which display mode is displayed as the back button effect, The system is configured such that the jackpot expectation level of the symbol variation being executed or the symbol variation to be executed in the future is different. In addition, the display mode of the back button effect is such that when displayed, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed or the symbol change to be executed in the future will be a jackpot (for example, the above-mentioned It may also be configured to have a display format such as "confirmed?!", "congratulations", etc.).

As described above, in this example, the button effects include a front button effect and a back button effect, and both the front button effect and the back button effect are effects that suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Further, when performing a front button performance, a button vibe performance can be performed as a front button performance, while when performing a back button performance, a button vibe performance is not performed as a back button performance.

With this configuration, in the secret back button performance, it is possible to prevent those around you from recognizing that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to make the player feel a sense of satisfaction that only the player can recognize. In the non-secrecy front button presentation, the player can feel a sense of superiority by making others aware that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

In addition, examples of front button effects include the winning/losing branch effect described above in FIG. 207 and the cut-in effect (different from the winning/losing branch effect) illustrated in FIG. 209; During the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation in the case of recovery (for example, when the power is cut off in the game standby state or fluctuation standby state as described above, and a new fluctuation display starts when the power is restored) During the execution of the button vibe related to the initial action that is being executed during the new variable display), it is possible to perform a front button effect that is different from the winning/losing branching effect such as a cut-in effect, but the winning/losing branching effect cannot be executed. It may be configured so that it does not occur. In addition, in this falling branch effect, the button vibe effect is executed (when the sub input button SB is operated or the validity period has elapsed), and the button lamp is lit in a lighting mode (for example, rainbow color) that corresponds to the button vibe effect. It may also be used as a win-lose branch effect that lights up to notify you of a jackpot. In addition, the configurations in which the winning/losing branch performance is not executed during the execution of the button vibe related to the initial operation are a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and a probability fluctuation gaming state. In addition, it may be applied only to one or more gaming states, such as a non-time saving gaming state, a probability varying gaming state, and a time saving gaming state. Note that the configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. When applied to both, as described above, when executing the button effect, the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 is greater than the number of lighting modes of the button lamp (for example, three types of white, red, and rainbow color). (For example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) are configured so that a variety of lighting patterns can be realized for the game effect lamp D26 that is easily visible to the player. For button lamps that are difficult to see in the player's field of view, an experienced player (a player who knows that button lamps also indicate or notify the expectation level of execution of a special game) can figure out which lamp pattern they are. It can be made easier. In addition, the number of lighting modes of the button lamp when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is also one (for example, only red) or two. (For example, two types, white and red), the number of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibe effect) is executed. This is suitable, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time for the power to be restored, and also to indicate that the execution of the special game is the highest (the execution of the special game is certain). There will be no misidentification.

By configuring this way, even if a power outage occurs and a symbol change is executed during the execution of the button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored, the winning/losing branch effect that notifies the jackpot will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player mistakenly believes that a jackpot has been determined due to the vibration of the sub-input button SB.

<Lighting mode of button lamp>
Next, FIG. 210 is a list of lighting modes of the button lamps of the sub-input buttons SB.

<Button vibration related to initial operation>
In the button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored, the button lamp has the following lighting mode.
Lighting mode: Pattern 1 Base color: Red Execution trigger: When the power is turned on Note that the button lamp is composed of multiple LEDs, and the base color may be the color that stands out the most to the player, or the color that stands out the most to the player. It may be a color in which many LEDs are lit. Furthermore, even if the base color is red, there may be LEDs that are lit in a color other than red, and even if the base color is the same in the lighting mode, the combination of lighting colors of multiple LEDs of the button lamp may be different. If they are different, the lighting mode is different. In addition, the button lamp lights up by repeating multiple combinations of lighting colors at a predetermined period of time, so there is a lighting mode that repeats "combination 1 → combination 2 → combination 3" and a lighting mode that repeats "combination 2 → combination 1 → combination 3". The repeated lighting modes are the same types of possible combinations, but may be different lighting modes.

As mentioned above, in the button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored, the button lamp has only one type of lighting mode, and regardless of the situation where the power is cut off, it will be lit in one lighting mode. is configured to do so.

<Button vibe effect>
In the button vibe effect, the button lamp has the following lighting modes.
Lighting mode: Pattern 2 Base color: Blue Execution trigger: Lighting mode when executing cut-in effect: Pattern 3 Base color: Green Execution trigger: Lighting mode when executing cut-in effect: Pattern 4 Base color: Rainbow color Execution trigger: Cut-in effect Lighting mode at the time of execution: Pattern 5 Base color: Rainbow color Execution trigger: When executing the winning/losing branch success effect Note that the lighting mode where the base color is rainbow color will appear rainbow colored when the player visually recognizes the combination of multiple LEDs. It is a lighting mode. In addition, the above-mentioned winning/losing branch presentation that notifies the jackpot is referred to as a winning/losing branching success presentation. Note that the winning/losing branch performance that notifies you of a loss may be referred to as the winning/losing branch failure performance.

As mentioned above, in the button vibe effect, the button lamp has four types of lighting modes (three types of basic colors), and the lighting mode may differ depending on the type of button effect that is the trigger for execution. Even in the same type of button effect (for example, cut-in effect), the lighting mode is configured to be different depending on the effect mode. In addition, when executing the successful winning/losing branch effect, the system is configured such that only pattern 5 whose base color is rainbow colored can be executed, and by visually recognizing the pattern 5, the player can realize that the symbol fluctuation being executed is a jackpot. It is possible to clearly recognize that (when the winning/losing branch/failure effect is executed, the color becomes white (or turns off) in the normal mode, that is, the state returns to the state before the button effect).

In addition, in the same figure, in the button effect which has a case with a button vibe effect and a case without accompanying a button vibe effect, only a case with a button vibe effect is illustrated.

In addition, when executing button effects other than winning/losing effects (cut-in effects, etc.), even if the presentation mode of the button effects is the same, there will be differences between cases with button vibe effects and cases without button vibe effects. The lighting mode of the button lamp or the selection tendency of the lighting mode may be different.

In this way, in this example, there are more types of lighting modes for the button lamp when executing a button vibe effect than there are types of lighting modes for the button lamp when executing a button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored. ing. Note that there may be two or more types of button lamp lighting modes when executing button vibrations related to the initial operation after the power is restored, but even in this configuration, the button vibrations related to the initial operations after the power is restored. It is preferable that there are more types of lighting modes of the button lamps during execution of the button vibe effect than there are more types of lighting modes of the button lamps during execution.

With this configuration, only the minimum necessity of confirming the operation of the button vibrator related to the initial operation after the power is restored is required, so the capacity can be reduced by not having variations in the lighting mode. It becomes possible. On the other hand, since the button vibe effect is an effect that suggests a jackpot, the entertainment level is improved by having a wide variety of lighting modes depending on the execution timing of the button vibe effect and the presentation mode of the accompanying button effect. can be done.

Note that the configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As an example, the number of types and details of the lighting modes of the button lamp when executing the button vibe related to the initial operation in the figure, and the number of types and details of the lighting mode of the button lamp when executing the button vibe effect, can also be used to determine the game effect. It is possible to replace it with the lighting mode of the lamp D26. However, as mentioned above, when executing the button effect, the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors), the game effect lamp D26 that is easily visible to the player can realize a variety of lighting patterns, and the player's For button lamps that are difficult to see, make it easier for experienced players (players who know that button lamps also indicate or notify the expectation of execution of a special game) to understand which lamp pattern they are. I can do it. In addition, the number of lighting modes of the button lamp when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is also one (for example, only red) or two. (For example, two types, white and red), the number of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibe effect) is executed. This is suitable, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time for the power to be restored, and also to indicate that the execution of the special game is the highest (the execution of the special game is certain). There will be no misidentification.

<Features of button production>
In this example, a cut-in effect is illustrated as an example of a button effect other than a win/lose branch effect, but the configuration is configured to include a button effect other than the cut-in effect in addition to the cut-in effect as a button effect other than a win/lose branch effect. Alternatively, it may be configured to have a button effect other than the cut-in effect without having the cut-in effect. Here, an example of a configuration including button performances other than the cut-in performance and other preview performances as button performances other than the winning/losing branch performance will be described in detail below.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to have a cut-in effect and a singing effect in which the character sings, as described above in FIG. 209, as button effects. are detailed below. Note that the singing performance does not need to be a button performance (it may be a performance that does not require operation of the sub-input button SB and does not display a button image).

<Cut-in production>
The cut-in effect is configured to be executed at various timings of symbol variation, and includes cases in which button vibe effects are involved and cases in which button vibe effects are not involved. Further, the cut-in effect is configured to be executed even during pre-trigger fluctuations during execution of the look-ahead effect. Note that the cut-in effect may be configured to be executed even when a trigger fluctuates during execution of a look-ahead effect, or may be configured such that it is not executed when a trigger fluctuates during execution of a look-ahead effect. Further, the cut-in effect may be configured to be executed even when the prefetch effect is not executed. In addition, it is desirable that the cut-in effect is always executed as a button effect (it is necessary to operate the sub-input button SB, and it is preferable that the button image is displayed.However, if the operation validity period has passed) The cut-in effect will be executed without any operation).

Further, as described above, the cut-in performance has a plurality of performance modes, and also has a display mode in which it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed will be a jackpot. The cut-in effect in a display mode in which it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol variation being executed will be a jackpot is not executed in the pre-trigger variation, but is configured so that it can be executed in the trigger variation.

<Singing performance>
The singing performance is configured so that it can be performed at various timings during symbol fluctuation, and when it is performed, it is configured to be accompanied by a button vibe performance. The singing performance is a performance with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, 60% jackpot expectation). Further, the singing performance is configured so that it is not executed during pre-trigger fluctuations during the execution of the pre-reading performance, but can be performed during the trigger fluctuation during the execution of the pre-reading performance. Further, the singing performance may be configured to be executed even when the pre-reading performance is not executed. Note that the singing performance does not need to be a button performance as described above (it may be a performance that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB and does not display a button image).

In addition, the singing performance has only one type of performance mode, and does not have a display mode in which it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed will be a jackpot. Note that there may be two or more types of performance modes for the singing performance, but even when configured in this way, the number of types of performance modes for the cut-in performance is greater than the number of types of performance modes for the singing performance. It is preferable that the configuration is as follows.

<Line production>
This is a production that is different from a cut-in production or a singing production, in which lines are displayed after a predetermined character is displayed. However, unlike the cut-in production and singing production, there is no button vibe production. There are seven types of dialogue productions, including white, blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors for the characters in the dialogue, and the expectation of a jackpot increases in this order (for example, if the color of the characters is white) If the text color is blue, the jackpot expectation is 2%; if the text is yellow, the jackpot expectation is 5%; if the text is green, the jackpot expectation is 10%; If the text is red, the jackpot expectation is 20%, if the text is gold, the jackpot is expected to be 50%, and if the text is rainbow-colored, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed will be a jackpot. be).

Note that the dialogue performance may be configured to be executed even when the trigger fluctuates while the pre-reading performance is being executed, or may be configured so that it is not executed when the trigger fluctuates during the execution of the pre-reading performance. Furthermore, the dialogue performance may be configured to be executed even when the pre-reading performance is not being performed. However, the dialogue production in a display mode in which it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol variation being executed will become a jackpot is not executed in the pre-trigger variation, but is configured so that it can be executed in the trigger variation.

Here, the cut-in performance and the singing performance do not overlap in execution timing with the above-mentioned button vibe pre-reading performance, but the dialogue performance is configured so that the execution timing can overlap with the above-described button vibe pre-reading performance. Specifically, the button vibe pre-reading effect, which is not a button effect (it is a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB, and the button image corresponding to this button vibe effect is not displayed), was performed three times. Immediately after the start of each symbol variation (the button vibe continues for 1 second 0.5 seconds after the symbol variation starts), a button vibe pre-reading effect is executed (the third variation becomes the trigger variation). ), if the button vibe effect is executed for the 1st variation, 2nd variation, and 3rd variation (3 times in total), 0.5 seconds from the start of the 3rd variation symbol variation, which is a trigger variation. Later, a one-second button vibe look-ahead performance is executed, but it is also possible to execute a dialogue performance at the same time as this button vibration look-ahead performance (in other words, a situation where the button vibe is being performed while a dialogue performance is being performed). may occur). On the other hand, at the execution timing of this button vibe pre-reading effect, the cut-in effect and the singing effect are not necessarily executed (they are executed at a later timing than the execution timing of the button vibe pre-reading effect). Note that it is also possible to perform dialogue production (letter color is white or blue only) during pre-trigger fluctuations (1st fluctuation, 2nd fluctuation), and even in that case, the execution timing of the button vibe pre-reading performance and the execution of the dialogue performance can be changed. Timing overlaps. Here, the execution time of the button vibe effect of the button vibe look-ahead effect executed with the trigger variation is longer than the execution time of the button vibe effect of the button vibe look-ahead effect executed with the pre-trigger variation. (For example, 1 second for pre-trigger fluctuation, 2 seconds for trigger fluctuation, etc.).

Furthermore, although the dialogue production can be executed simultaneously with other productions (for example, a step-up production in which characters that indicate the level of expectation for a jackpot are gradually switched), the singing production is configured so that it is not executed simultaneously with other productions. There is. As a modified example, the number of types of other performances (e.g., step-up performances) that can be performed simultaneously with the singing performance is greater than the number of types of other performances (e.g., step-up performances) that can be performed simultaneously with the dialogue production. It may be configured so that the number of times decreases. Furthermore, the dialogue production may be executed before becoming a reach, but the singing performance may be configured so that it is not executed before becoming a reach, or the dialogue production may be executed before becoming a reach. The singing performance may be configured so that it is easier to execute after reaching a reach than before reaching a reach.

Further, the button presentation may be configured as follows.
(1) A cut-in performance can be executed at the same time as other performances (for example, a step-up performance in which characters that indicate the level of expectation for a jackpot are gradually switched), but a singing performance cannot be performed at the same time as other performances (2) ) The number of types of other performances (e.g., step-up performances) that can be performed simultaneously with the singing performance is smaller than the number of types of other performances (e.g., step-up performances) that can be performed simultaneously with the cut-in performance ( 3) A cut-in performance can be performed before reaching a reach, but a singing performance cannot be performed before reaching a reach. (4) A cut-in performance can be performed before reaching a reach than after reaching a reach. (5) Singing effects are more likely to be executed after a reach occurs than before reaching (6) Singing effects are more likely to be performed than before a reach occurs (6) Singing effects are more likely to be performed than before a reach occurs (7) The execution time of a button vibe production related to a singing production is relatively shorter than the execution time of a button vibe production related to a cut-in production (7) 8) The execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect is relatively shorter than the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect. (9) The execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect is relatively shorter. Also, the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the pre-trigger variation is relatively shorter, and the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the trigger variation is relatively shorter than the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect. The execution time of the vibe effect is relatively longer (10) The difference between the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect and the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the pre-trigger fluctuation is longer than that of the cut-in effect. The difference between the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the effect and the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in trigger variation is relatively longer (11) The execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect and the trigger Rather than the difference in the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the pre-variation, the difference in the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect and the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the trigger change. is relatively shorter

Furthermore, during symbol fluctuations, it may be configured such that when a singing performance is performed than when a cut-in performance is performed, the jackpot expectation level of the symbol fluctuations is relatively higher. In other words, depending on the display mode of the cut-in effect, the expectation level of the jackpot is higher than when the singing effect is executed, but the average value of the expectation level of the jackpot when the cut-in effect is executed (the selection rate of each display mode and the jackpot When comparing the weighted average value that takes into account the expectation level) and the average value of the jackpot expectation level when the singing performance is executed, the latter may be configured so that the jackpot expectation level is higher. With this configuration, even if the singing performance in which the button vibe performance is performed is not performed, the button vibe performance may be performed in the cut-in performance, thereby maintaining the player's sense of expectation. can be done. Furthermore, the frequency with which button vibe effects can be performed can be increased.

Note that cut-in performances and singing performances are shown as examples of button performances, but these are just examples, and there will be no problem even if the features of the above-mentioned cut-in performances and singing performances are applied to other button performances. do not have.

<Button production image 3>
Next, FIG. 211 shows button effect image 3.

First, in Figure (a), symbol variation is being executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are all in the process of variation, The sub-input button SB is lit in a normal manner.

Next, in FIG. 4B, a button effect is executed, and a button image and an instruction display of "Press!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, in FIG. 3C, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, a cut-in effect in the display mode of a fox is displayed on the effect display device SG. Since the cut-in effect is a cut-in effect accompanied by a button vibe effect, execution of the button vibe effect is started. Note that even when the valid period of the sub-input button SB has passed, execution of the button vibe effect is started.

Next, in the same figure (d), the first decorative pattern becomes a reach with 7 patterns. In addition, in the same figure, the button vibe effect accompanying the cut-in effect is configured to end at the timing of reach as shown in FIG. The button vibe effect may be configured to be executed over the timing when the button becomes reachable.

Next, in FIG. 4(e), a button effect is executed as a win/loss branch effect. Next, in FIG. 3(f), the player operates the sub-input button SB while the button effect is being executed, so that the button vibe effect is started. When the button vibe effect is executed, the sub input button SB vibrates, and the button lamp is configured to light up in a lighting mode (for example, pattern 5 described above) corresponding to the button vibe effect (win/lose effect). There is. Since the executed winning/losing branch performance is a successful winning/losing branching performance that notifies a jackpot, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped at the jackpot pattern. Note that the configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As mentioned above, when executing the button effect, the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors), the game effect lamp D26 that is easily visible to the player can realize a variety of lighting patterns, and the player's For button lamps that are difficult to see, make it easier for experienced players (players who know that button lamps also indicate or notify the expectation of execution of a special game) to understand which lamp pattern they are. I can do it. In addition, the number of lighting modes of the button lamp when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is also one (for example, only red) or two. (For example, two types, white and red), the number of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibe effect) is executed. This is suitable, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time for the power to be restored, and also to indicate that the execution of the special game is the highest (the execution of the special game is certain). There will be no misidentification.

In this way, in this example, the button effect can be executed multiple times in symbol variations that result in jackpots (sometimes referred to as jackpot variations). In addition, in a symbol variation that results in a jackpot (sometimes referred to as a jackpot variation), a button vibe effect (a button effect accompanied by a button vibe effect) can be executed multiple times.

In addition, if the button vibe effect is executed twice in one jackpot variation, the execution time of the second button vibe effect is longer than that of the first button vibe effect (sub input button SB vibrates). (the amount of time spent there) is long. In addition, if the button vibe effect is executed twice in one jackpot variation, the execution time of the second button vibe effect is relatively longer than the execution time of the first button vibe effect. It may be configured so that

Here, as described above, as a button effect, the button vibration effect plays the role of prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB. In other words, the button vibration effect (valid The button vibe effect may be configured to be executed without the player's operation when the execution timing of the button vibe effect is reached, even though the period has not elapsed. For example, as shown in FIG. The first button vibe effect shown in (b) to (c) may be a button vibe effect that can be executed without the player operating the sub input button SB. Note that a button vibe effect that can be executed without the player's operation of the sub input button SB may be a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub input button SB and has a valid period, or may be a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub input button SB and has a valid period, or It is also possible to use a button vibe effect that does not require any operation and does not have a valid period.

In this case, the button vibe performance is configured so that it can be executed twice in the jackpot fluctuation, and the first button vibe performance is executed when the execution timing comes even if the player does not operate the sub input button SB. The second button vibe effect is a button vibe effect that is executed when the sub input button SB is operated by the player, and the second button vibe effect is better than the first button vibe effect. The execution time (time during which the sub-input button SB is vibrating) is longer.

With this configuration, by executing the button vibe effect twice or more with one symbol change, you can feel the expectation of hitting the jackpot multiple times with one symbol change, and the button vibe By dividing the effects into those that require the player to operate the sub-input button SB and those that do not require the player to operate the sub-input button SB, we create diversity and surprises in the timing of button vibe effects. can do.

<Effects when executing special games>
Next, FIG. 212 is an operational diagram regarding a case where a button vibe effect is executed due to jackpot variation, and then a special game (jackpot) is executed.

In a situation where a jackpot variation is being executed as a pattern variation of the main game symbol, a button vibe effect is not being executed, and a special game is not being executed, the button vibe effect is executed at the timing (1) in the diagram. Begins. Regarding the button vibe effect (1) in the figure, any of the configurations described above can be applied, but as an example, when the player operates the sub-input button SB, a button vibe effect that is a winning/losing effect may be applied. The performance begins.

Thereafter, the button vibe performance ends at timing (2) in the figure under the condition that the main game symbol variation time has not ended. In addition, at the timing (2) in the figure, the fluctuation time of the main game symbol does not have to end, and the first decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped at the jackpot symbol.

Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the variation of the main game symbols ends (the jackpot symbols are fixed and stopped). Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the special game start demonstration time ends, and the first round of the special game starts.

Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the first round of the special game is being executed, and the button vibe effect during the special game starts to be executed. In this way, this example is configured so that the button vibe effect can be executed even during the execution of the special game, and the button vibe effect that can be executed can be any of the buttons described in detail in this specification. A vibe effect may also be applied. In other words, the above-described button vibe effect that requires the player to operate the sub-input button SB and/or the button vibe effect that does not require the player to operate the sub-input button SB may be configured to be executable. For example, when a button image is displayed and the player operates the sub-input button SB, a button vibe effect starts to be executed, and an effect that increases the number of rounds of a special game that is being notified, or after the special game ends. It may be configured to execute an effect that notifies that the gaming state of will be a probability variable gaming state.

Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the first round of the special game ends, and the execution of the button vibe effect continues. Thereafter, at the timing (7) in the figure, the second round of the special game is started, and the execution of the button vibe effect is continued.

Thereafter, at timing (8) in the figure, the second round of the special game is being executed, and the button vibe effect ends.

In this way, the configuration illustrated in the figure is configured so that the button vibe effect can be executed while the main game symbols are changing, and is configured so that the button vibe effect can be executed even while the special game is being executed. ing. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the button vibe performance while the main game symbols are changing and the button vibe performance while the special game is being executed are different performance modes.

In addition, the button vibe performance while the main game symbol is changing will end during the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation that is being executed when the button vibe performance is started (it will be executed during the execution of the special game). It is configured in such a way that it never happens. In addition, the button vibe effect during the execution of the special game will be executed over the next round of the round that is being executed when the button vibe effect starts (and will continue even at the start of the next round). It is configured to obtain. As a modified example, if the type of special game being announced is a special game that triggers a transition to a probability variable game state, or if the number of rounds to be executed is relatively large (for example, 10 rounds), At the same time as the performance to notify the player, a button vibe performance (a performance that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB and in which no button image is displayed) may be performed over the jackpot start demo time and the first round. .

<Type of instruction display>
As described above, the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured to display a button image and an instruction display when executing a button effect. Although the display mode of "Press!!" has been described above as an instruction display, the display mode of the instruction display is not limited to this. The display mode of the instruction display and the display mode of the button image applicable to the Pachinko gaming machine in this specification will be described in detail below. Note that the instruction display may be referred to as a second image or a predetermined image.

First, the types of instruction displays will be explained in detail. The single instruction display is a display mode of "Press!!" described above, and is an instruction display that prompts a single press of the sub input button SB.

Next, the repeated hit instruction display is a display mode of "Make repeated hits!!", and is an instruction display that urges the user to repeatedly hit the sub input button SB.

Next, the long press instruction display is a display format of "Long press!!", and is an instruction display that urges the sub input button SB to be pressed for a long time.

In this example, when the button effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed when the sub-input button SB is operated is configured to differ depending on the display mode of the instruction display. The degree of expectation for the execution of the button vibe effect, from lowest to lowest, is ``single press instruction display <multiple press instruction display <long press instruction display.'' Note that the expectation level is the expectation level that the button vibe effect will be executed when the elements other than the instruction display such as the button image are the same (or similar). The configuration may be applied to all gaming states, or may be applied to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state, a non-probability fluctuating gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, a probability fluctuation gaming state, and It may also be applied to non-time reduction gaming states, probability variable gaming states, and time reduction gaming states). Note that when the button effect is executed, the probability that the movable accessory is driven when the sub-input button SB is operated may be configured to vary depending on the display mode of the instruction display. In addition, there is a button effect A in which the instruction display is a single-shot instruction display, a button effect B in which the instruction display is a single-press instruction display (or a repeated press instruction display), and a button effect C in which the instruction display is a long-press instruction display. In this case, the expectation level for the button vibe effect to be executed is from the lowest to the lowest, ``Button Effect A < Button Effect B < Button Effect C'', but the expectation level for the jackpot when the button vibe effect is executed is from the lowest to the lowest. It may be configured so that "button effect C<button effect B<button effect A", and in such a case, button effect A is a button vibe effect by operating the sub input button SB once. may be executed once, and the execution time will be relatively long (for example, 10 seconds), and button effect B is a button vibe effect by operating the sub input button SB multiple times. It may be executed multiple times (for example, 3 times), each execution time is relatively short (for example, 4 seconds, but the third and final time is 10 seconds), and button effect C is a sub-input button. By pressing the SB for a long time, the button vibe effect may be executed multiple times (for example, 5 times), and each execution time is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds, but the last The fifth time may be for 10 seconds). In this case, furthermore, when the button vibe effect is executed in button effect A, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed will be a jackpot, and button effect B is the third and final button vibe effect. When executed, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed will become a jackpot (the first time the jackpot expectation is 10%, the second time the jackpot expectation is 30%), and button production B is When the fifth and final button vibe effect is executed, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol change being executed will be a jackpot (the first time is a jackpot expectation of 5%, the second is a jackpot expectation The expected jackpot probability may be 10%, the third time the expected jackpot is 20%, and the fourth time the expected jackpot is 30%).

<Display mode of button image>
In the Pachinko game machine according to this example, the button image displayed when executing the button effect also has a plurality of types of display modes.

The normal mode is a button image when the above-described button effect is being executed (for example, the button image in FIG. 207(b)).

The confirmed mode is a button image with a color different from that of the normal mode. If a confirmed mode is displayed as a button image when the button performance is executed, it is almost certain (or definite) that the symbol variation being executed will be a jackpot. As an example, if a button effect is executed as a winning/losing branch effect and the button image is displayed in a confirmed manner, it is almost certain that a winning/losing branch success effect to notify a jackpot will be executed (being executed). Become a target (or definite).

The giant aspect is a button image that is larger than the normal aspect. In the figure, the colors are different and the instruction display is larger than the normal mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and the color may be the same as the normal mode, or only the size of the button image may be different.

In this example, when the button effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed when the sub-input button SB is operated is configured to differ depending on the display mode of the button image. The degree of expectation for the execution of the button vibe effect is ``Normal mode < Huge mode < Determined mode'' from lowest to lowest. Note that the expectation level is the expectation level that the button vibe effect will be executed when the elements other than the button image, such as the instruction display, are the same (or similar). Furthermore, when the button image in the confirmed mode is displayed when the button effect is executed, the probability that the button vibe effect will be executed due to the operation of the sub-input button SB may be set to 100%. In addition, when a button effect is executed, it may be configured such that the probability that the movable accessory is driven when the sub-input button SB is operated may vary depending on the display mode of the button image.

With this configuration, the button vibration effect is executed when the sub-input button SB is operated, depending on the display mode of the display prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB, such as an instruction display or a button image. This results in a difference in the level of expectation for the button performance, and the player can have a sense of expectation as to what kind of performance mode the button performance will be executed before the button performance occurs. In addition, there are cases in which the player can experience the button vibe effect as a tactile sensation by directly operating the sub-input button SB, and in cases where the player can experience the button-vibration effect as a tactile sensation without touching the sub-input button SB, depending on the display on the effect display device SG and the lighting mode of the button lamp. It is possible to configure the system so that the execution of the performance can be recognized, thereby improving the interest of the game and the participation of the players.

Further, as described above, as operating members other than the sub-input button SB, there may be an operating member in the shape of a telephone, an operating member in the shape of a pistol, an operating member in the shape of a sword, and an operating member in the shape of a lever. In this case, a button image similar to that of the operating member may be displayed when the button effect is executed. In this case, when a button image similar to the operation member is displayed other than the sub input button SB, it is better to display a button image similar to the operation member than the sub input button SB in the normal mode in FIG. 213. The button vibe effect may be configured to be relatively easy to execute.

<Display mode of held images>
The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a plurality of types of display modes for displaying the pending image.

As described above, the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification is configured to be able to change the display mode of the reserved image as a pre-read effect. The white display mode is a display mode in which the display mode has not changed as a look-ahead effect, and the red and rainbow display modes are display modes after the display mode has changed as a look-ahead effect. Note that when a hold corresponding to a held image whose display mode has changed as a look-ahead effect is exhausted, the variable image will be shifted and displayed in the same display mode. Note that the display mode may change again when the shift image is displayed, or the display mode of the variable image may be changed while the variable image is being displayed (while the trigger variation is being displayed). Good too.

In the case of this configuration, when the button effect is executed in the pre-trigger variation during the execution of the look-ahead effect, the button when the sub-input button SB is operated depends on the display mode of the pending image related to the trigger hold. Vibe effects (button vibe effects during execution of cut-in effects, singing effects, line effects, winning/losing effects, etc.) and button vibe effects that do not require operation of the sub-input button SB (the above-mentioned button vibe look-ahead effects and singing) It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for execution of a button vibe performance (when performing a performance, dialogue performance, etc.) is different. The level of expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed is ``white < red < rainbow color'' from lowest to lowest. Note that when the pending image related to the trigger pending is displayed in rainbow color, the probability that the button vibe effect will be executed due to the operation of the sub input button SB may be set to 100%.

In addition, when a button effect is executed due to trigger fluctuation during execution of a look-ahead effect, depending on the display mode of the variation image related to trigger hold, the button vibe effect (the above-mentioned cut-in effect) when the sub-input button SB is operated Button vibe effects when performing productions, singing performances, line productions, winning/losing performances, etc.) and button vibe productions that do not require operation of the sub-input button SB (execution of the aforementioned button vibe look-ahead production, singing productions, dialogue productions, etc.) It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the execution of button vibe effects at different times is different. For example, the level of expectation for button vibe effects to be executed is ``white < red < rainbow color'' from lowest to lowest. Note that when the fluctuation image related to the trigger hold is displayed in a rainbow color, the probability that the button vibe effect will be executed due to the operation of the sub input button SB may be set to 100%.

Further, as the pre-read effect, a pre-read effect in which the background effect changes may be configured to be executable, and a blue background, a gold background, or a rainbow background may be displayed as the background effect. In this case, when a button effect is executed due to a trigger change during execution of a look-ahead effect, the button vibration when operating the sub-input button SB depends on the display mode of the displayed background effect. Production (button vibe production during execution of cut-in production, singing production, dialogue production, winning/losing production, etc.) and button vibe production that does not require operation of the sub input button SB (the above-mentioned button vibe pre-reading production and singing production) , a button vibe effect at the time of executing a line effect, etc.) may be configured to have different expectations for execution. The level of expectation for button vibe production to be executed is, from lowest to lowest, ``blue background < golden background < rainbow colored background.'' Note that when the background effect is displayed with a rainbow-colored background, the probability that the button vibe effect will be executed due to the operation of the sub-input button SB may be set to 100%.

In this way, when a button effect is executed while a lookahead effect is being executed (trigger variation or pre-trigger variation), the sub input button may be Button vibe effects when operating the SB (button vibe effects when performing cut-in effects, singing effects, dialogue effects, winning/losing effects, etc.) and button vibe effects that do not require the operation of the sub-input button SB (as mentioned above) It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the execution of button vibe pre-reading effects, singing effects, dialogue effects, etc.) may be different, or the trigger changes such as the display mode of the pending image may be performed. Depending on the content of the performance (which may be the content of a preview performance or a ready-to-reach performance), the degree of expectation that the button vibe performance will be executed when the sub-input button SB is operated may be configured to be different.

In addition, as an example of the configuration when configured in this way, when a button effect is executed due to a trigger change during execution of a look-ahead effect, a long press instruction display is displayed as an instruction display, and a button effect related to the look-ahead effect is displayed. When the background effect is a blue background, when a single instruction display is displayed as an instruction display and the background effect related to the look-ahead effect is a golden background, the button vibe effect is more effective when operating the sub-input button SB. The configuration may be configured so that the degree of expectation for execution is high.

That is, when the button effect is executed due to a trigger change during the execution of the look-ahead effect, the instruction display B with a relatively high expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed is displayed, and the button vibe effect is executed. An instruction display A with a relatively low expectation that a button vibe performance will be executed is displayed and a button The button vibe effect will be executed when the sub-input button SB is operated when the look-ahead effect B or the effect content B during execution of trigger fluctuation is executed, which has a relatively high expectation that the vibration effect will be executed. It may be configured so that the expectation level for

<Normal jackpot and revival jackpot>
Next, the reach effect applicable to the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 214.

<A: Normal jackpot>
First, the case of the normal jackpot shown in the upper row of the figure will be described in detail. In the same figure (a), symbol fluctuation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a reach with 7 symbols, and all the second decorative symbols are variable. The button lamp of the sub input button SB is lit in the normal mode. In addition, a battle reach effect is displayed as a reach effect on the effect display device SG. More specifically, a production in which the main character and enemy characters are fighting is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 4B, a button effect is executed, and a win/loss branch effect is executed in which a button image and an instruction display of "Press!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, in (c) of the same figure, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during the execution of the button effect, the execution of the button vibe effect is started, and as a result of the battle reach effect, the main character An effect of winning over the enemy character (an effect that notifies you of a jackpot) is displayed (a success effect of winning/losing branch is executed). Note that even when the valid period of the sub-input button SB has passed, execution of the button vibe effect is started.

Next, in (d) of the same figure, the button vibe effect ends because the execution time of the button vibe effect has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds have passed since the button vibe effect started execution), and then the button vibe effect ends. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped at the jackpot pattern.

In this way, a case where a jackpot is displayed as a result of the reach effect (in the figure, an effect in which the main character wins over the enemy character) is called a normal jackpot (or a normal jackpot effect).

<B: Revival jackpot>
Next, the case of the resurrection jackpot shown in the lower part of the figure will be described in detail. In the same figure (e), symbol fluctuations are being executed in a predetermined game state, and in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a reach with 7 symbols, and all the second decorative symbols are fluctuating. The button lamp of the sub input button SB is lit in the normal mode. In addition, a battle reach effect is displayed as a reach effect on the effect display device SG. More specifically, a production in which the main character and enemy characters are fighting is displayed.

Thereafter, although not shown, a button effect is executed in the same way as in FIG. However, in (f) of the same figure, the player operates the sub input button SB while the button effect is being executed, and as a result of the battle reach effect, the main character A production in which the character is defeated by the enemy character (basically, this is a production to notify that there will be no jackpot, but as will be explained later, a revival production may be executed, so it can also be executed when the jackpot fluctuates). (The winning/losing branch failure effect is executed). Note that the period shown in (f) in the figure after the battle reach effect is started is approximately the same as the period shown in (c) in the figure after the battle reach effect is started. As a modified example, the button image may not be displayed (the button effect may not be executed) in the case of a winning/losing branch failure effect.

In (f) of the same figure, after the main character is defeated by the enemy character, the sub-input button SB is not operated (because the sub-input button SB is not valid, there is no effect even if the sub-input button SB is operated). When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds), in (g) of the same figure, as a revival effect related to the battle reach effect, an effect in which the main character stands up is displayed, and a button vibe effect (button No image is displayed, and the button vibe effect (which is executed without the sub-input button SB being operated) is executed.

Next, in (h) of the same figure, the button vibe effect ends because the execution time of the button vibe effect has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds have passed since the button vibe effect started execution), and then the button vibe effect ends. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped at the jackpot pattern.

In this way, the message that a jackpot will result as a result of the reach effect is not displayed (in the figure, the effect of the protagonist being defeated by the enemy character is displayed), and by subsequently performing the resurrection effect, the symbol being executed The case where a notification is given that the fluctuation will be a jackpot is called a revival jackpot (or revival jackpot performance).

In this way, in this example, when the same reach performance called a battle reach performance (which may also be a super reach performance or an SP reach performance) is executed in the jackpot variation, the performance pattern is a pattern that would normally be a jackpot. It has a pattern that results in a revival jackpot.

In both the pattern that results in a normal jackpot and the pattern that results in a revival jackpot, the button vibe effect is configured so that it can be executed after reaching reach, and in the pattern that normally results in a jackpot, the player is asked to press the sub input button The button vibe effect that is executed when is operated is executed, and in a pattern that results in a revival jackpot, the button vibe effect that is executed when the execution timing comes even if the player does not operate the sub input button SB is executed. .

In addition, the start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern that usually results in a jackpot is shown in (c) in the same figure, and the start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern that results in a revival jackpot is shown in (g) in the same figure. The start timing of the button vibe effect is earlier than the start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern that results in a revival jackpot. Further, the start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern that usually results in a jackpot is a relatively early timing when the button vibe effect is executed. Furthermore, the start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern that results in a revival jackpot is a relatively late timing when the button vibe effect is executed. Note that the start timing of the button vibe effect may be the timing when the sub-input button SB starts vibrating, or the timing when the sub-input button SB starts vibrating and the timing when the button effect starts execution, whichever is earlier. It can also be timing. Also, to determine whether the timing is early or late, you can compare the elapsed time from the start of symbol fluctuation, or compare the elapsed time from the timing when it became a reach. good.

With this configuration, as a button vibe effect when winning a jackpot, there is a effect pattern in which the player is involved and a effect pattern in which the player is not involved, thereby increasing the variation of effects, and at the same time, the player is not involved. In the button vibe performance of the performance pattern, by relatively delaying the execution timing, it is possible to increase the surprise, and it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even in the latter half of the symbol fluctuation.

<Configuration related to button image display>
Next, FIG. 215 shows a configuration related to displaying button images that can be applied to the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification.

<A: Single button press production image>
First, the case where the single button press effect shown in the upper row of the figure is executed will be described in detail. In the same figure (a), symbol fluctuations are being executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a reach with 7 symbols, and all the second decorative symbols are fluctuating. The button lamp of the sub input button SB is lit in the normal mode.

Next, in FIG. 4B, a single button press effect is executed, and a button image and a single instruction display of "Press!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, in this example, an indicator image indicating the validity period of the sub-input button SB is displayed when the button effect is executed. When the indicator image is displayed, the meter of the indicator image decreases over time, and when the meter reaches 0 (when it disappears), the valid period of the sub input button SB has passed (the remaining 0 remains). It is composed of It should be noted that when the valid period of the sub-input button SB elapses when the button effect is executed, the effect is the same as when the player operates the sub-input button SB. Note that the valid period of the sub input button SB related to the single button press effect is 3 seconds.

Next, in (c) of the same figure, when the player presses the sub-input button SB single-shot while the button effect is being executed (during the validity period of the sub-input button SB), the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are is hidden, execution of the button vibe effect is started, the button lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the button vibe effect, and the first decorative pattern temporarily stops when the jackpot pattern is "777". The button vibe effect associated with a single press operation is configured to continue for 10 seconds from the start of execution. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 3(c), the second decorative pattern is in the process of changing. In this manner, in the single button press effect, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden when the sub-input button SB is operated. Furthermore, in the single button press effect, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are configured to be hidden due to the execution of the button vibe effect. The above shows the case of a jackpot, but if it is not a jackpot, even if the player presses the sub-input button SB single-shot during the execution of a single-button press effect, the button vibe effect will not be executed, and "787" etc. is displayed. Note that the configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As mentioned above, when executing the button effect, the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors), the game effect lamp D26 that is easily visible to the player can realize a variety of lighting patterns, and the player's For button lamps that are difficult to see, make it easier for experienced players (players who know that button lamps also indicate or notify the expectation of execution of a special game) to understand which lamp pattern they are. I can do it. In addition, the number of lighting modes of the button lamp when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is also one (for example, only red) or two. (For example, two types, white and red), the number of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibe effect) is executed. This is suitable, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time for the power to be restored, and also to indicate that the execution of the special game is the highest (the execution of the special game is certain). There will be no misidentification.

<B: Image of button press execution>
Next, a case in which the repeated button press effect shown in the lower part of the figure is executed will be described in detail. In the same figure (d), symbol fluctuation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a reach with 7 symbols, and the second decorative symbol is all variable. The button lamp of the sub input button SB is lit in the normal mode.

Next, in FIG. 4(e), a button-hitting effect is executed, and a button image, a repeated-hitting instruction display of "Keep hitting!!", and an indicator image are displayed on the effect display device SG. Note that the valid period of the sub-input button SB related to the button press effect is 5 seconds.

Next, in (f) of the same figure, when the player repeatedly presses the sub input button SB while the button effect is being executed, the execution of the button vibe effect is started, and the button lamp lights up in accordance with the button vibe effect. Lights up in a specific manner. More specifically, execution of the button vibe effect is started when the number of consecutive hits reaches a predetermined number, and is not started when the number of consecutive hits is less than the predetermined number. This predetermined number of times is determined between 1 and 20 times. The button vibe effect associated with the repeated press operation is configured to continue for a maximum of 15 seconds from the start of execution. More specifically, in addition to the time (maximum 5 seconds) from the start of execution of the button vibe effect until the expiration of the valid period of the sub input button SB, the button vibe effect will be executed for 10 seconds thereafter. . Further, each time the sub-input button SB is operated as a continuous press operation within the validity period of the sub-input button SB, an effect is displayed near the button image. Note that during execution of the repeated button press effect, even after the sub-input button SB is operated, the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are continuously displayed during the valid period of the button repeated press effect. The above shows the case of a jackpot, but if it is not a jackpot, even if the player repeatedly presses the sub input button SB while the button press effect is being executed, the button vibe effect will not be executed and a message such as "787" will be displayed. be done. Note that the configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As mentioned above, when executing the button effect, the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors), the game effect lamp D26 that is easily visible to the player can realize a variety of lighting patterns, and the player's For button lamps that are difficult to see, make it easier for experienced players (players who know that button lamps also indicate or notify the expectation of execution of a special game) to understand which lamp pattern they are. I can do it. In addition, the number of lighting modes of the button lamp when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is also one (for example, only red) or two. (For example, two types, white and red), the number of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibe effect) is executed. This is suitable, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time for the power to be restored, and also to indicate that the execution of the special game is the highest (the execution of the special game is certain). There will be no misidentification.

Next, in (g) of the same figure, the validity period of the sub-input button SB related to the button press effect has passed, the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are hidden, and the button vibe effect continues to be executed. The first decorative pattern temporarily stops at the jackpot pattern. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 6(g), the second decorative pattern is in the process of changing. In this way, in the button press effect, even if the sub input button SB is operated (even if the sub input button SB is pressed once or more, that is, repeatedly pressed), the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are not hidden. It is configured. Furthermore, in the button repeated press effect, even if the sub input button SB is operated during the valid period and the button vibe effect is executed, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are configured not to be hidden. As a modified example, in the button press effect, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are configured to be hidden when the sub input button SB is operated during the valid period and the button vibe effect is executed. You may. In addition, the timing at which the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are hidden in the button repeated performance is the timing when the validity period has passed (they will not be hidden until the validity period has passed), the timing when the prescribed performance (jackpot confirmation performance) etc.) is started (the display will not be hidden until the predetermined effect starts to be executed).

In this way, in this example, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden when the button vibe effect is executed, and the button image and the instruction display are hidden when the button vibe effect is executed. The display and the indicator image have a button press effect in which the display and the indicator image are not hidden. Furthermore, in both the single button press effect and the button continuous press effect, the execution time of the button vibe effect is longer than the valid period of the sub-input button SB related to the button effect.

With this configuration, the period for congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot can be made longer than the period during which the player's operations are required, allowing the player to feel superior and increase his or her desire to play. be able to. In addition, since the execution time of the button vibe effect differs depending on the operation mode instructed to the gaming machine, by anticipating in advance which operation mode will be instructed, a sense of anticipation can be created before the button effect occurs. I can hold it.

Note that when executing the button repeated press effect, even before the valid period of the sub input button SB has elapsed, the first timing when a predetermined number of repeated press operations is detected during the valid period or the expiration of the valid period. It may be configured such that at the second timing, execution of an effect to notify that a jackpot has been reached is started, and the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are hidden. In the case of such a configuration, the button vibe effect may be configured to start execution from the first timing or the second timing and end at a predetermined timing. In other words, the predetermined timing at which the button vibe effect ends does not differ depending on the operation status (repeated press status) of the sub-input button SB, but the first timing at which the button vibe effect starts execution depends on the operation status (repeat-hit status) of the sub-input button SB. In other words, the execution time of the button vibe effect may vary depending on the operation status (repeated press situation) of the sub input button SB. Note that if the sub-input button SB is not operated during the execution of the button press effect and the button vibe effect is executed after the validity period has passed, the first timing will be the latest timing, so the button vibe effect will not be activated. has the shortest execution time. In this case, when executing a single button press effect, the execution time of the button vibe effect does not differ depending on the operation status of the sub input button SB, while when executing a button multiple press effect, the execution time of the button vibe effect does not differ depending on the operation status of the sub input button SB. The execution time of the button vibe effect may vary depending on the operation status of the button SB.

Note that in the long button press effect, as in the button continuous press effect, even if the sub input button SB is operated (pressed), the button image, instruction display, and indicator image may not be hidden. Alternatively, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image may be configured so that they are not hidden even when the button vibe effect is executed. Further, the characteristic structure of the above-described button continuous press effect may be applied to a button long press effect.

It should be noted that a production in which the movable accessory moves may be executed after the button vibration production has started, and if configured in this way, the button vibration production will continue even when the movable accessory is in operation and will receive sub-input. The button SB may be configured to vibrate.

<Other applicable configurations>
The configuration regarding the button vibe applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below. Note that the configurations described in detail below may be applied to all configurations in this specification, and there is no problem even if a plurality of configurations are applied in combination.

<Configuration related to volume adjustment>
In the pachinko game machine according to the present specification, one or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration related to volume adjustment.
(1) The volume can be adjusted by operating the cross button SB-2 while the button vibe effect is being executed. (2) The volume adjustment screen is displayed and the button vibe effect is being executed. (3) The volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority (referred to as display priority or visibility) than the button image related to the button vibe effect (which prompts the operation of the sub-input button SB that triggers the execution of the button vibe effect). (4) The volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority (display priority , visibility (sometimes referred to as visibility) is low (5) Button related to initial operation after power is restored Volume can be adjusted by operating the cross button SB-2 during button vibration (6) Initial after power is restored If the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, but the volume level may be changed by operating the cross button SB-2 during the operation-related button vibration (7) If the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the initial operation is (8) The light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross button SB-2 while the button vibe effect is being executed; and (9) the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. , has a situation in which a button vibe effect is being executed. (11) Light intensity adjustment screen with higher priority (sometimes referred to as display priority or visibility) than the button image related to the button vibe effect (prompts operation of the sub-input button SB that triggers the execution of the button vibe effect) (12) The light intensity can be adjusted by operating the cross button SB-2 during the button vibration associated with the initial operation after power is restored. Possible (13) By operating the cross button SB-2 during button vibration related to the initial operation after power is restored, the light intensity adjustment screen will not be displayed, but the light intensity level may be changed (14) Light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, and the button vibration related to the initial operation is being performed.The volume adjustment screen above is replaced with a display of the current volume level that is displayed when the volume level is changed. Good too. Further, the light amount adjustment screen may be replaced with a display of the current light amount level that is displayed when the light amount level is changed. Further, the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen may be replaced with a volume and light amount adjustment screen in which both are integrated.

<Configuration related to errors>
In the pachinko game machine according to this example, a predetermined error (for example, an abnormality in which the tray (upper tray) is full due to the fact that no more game balls can be stored in the tray (upper tray), If an error occurs in the starting opening due to illegal or excessive ball entry into the mouth, a door opening error due to the outer frame D12 or front frame D14 being open, etc., the button vibe effect will continue. Although this is executed, the lighting mode of the button lamp and/or the game effect lamp D26 may be configured to be changed to a lighting mode corresponding to a predetermined error.

<Possible errors>
Here, errors that may occur in the gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below.

As an error related to game ball ejection; the payout control board; refers to its own counter; when the counter reaches a predetermined number (the cumulative number of excessive payouts exceeds the allowable number); the payout operation is stopped. , and displays the error number (1) on the error display (7-segment display). Further, upon recovery from the power off, the payout operation is canceled and the error number is hidden. It should be noted that if the error overlaps with another error related to putting out game balls, the putting out operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Further, the error notification may be performed by displaying an error on the performance display device SG, blinking the frame decoration LED, and reproducing the error notification sound.

Next, as an error related to game ball payout, the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; detects an abnormal signal from the sensor; stops the payout operation; The error number (3) is displayed on the error display (7-segment display). Further, upon recovery from the power off, the dispensing operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. It should be noted that if the error overlaps with another error related to putting out game balls, the putting out operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Further, the error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to game ball payout, when the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; detects a ball entering signal from the sensor when the payout control is not executed; ; Stops the payout operation and displays the error number (5) on the error display (7-segment display). Further, by operating the error release switch; the payout operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. It should be noted that if the error overlaps with another game ball put-out error, the put-out operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to prioritize and display the one with a higher priority. Further, the error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to game ball payout, the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; If a ball entering signal exceeding the above is detected; the payout operation is stopped and an error number (5) is displayed on the error display (7 segment display). Further, by operating the error release switch; the payout operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. It should be noted that if the error overlaps with another error related to putting out game balls, the putting out operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Further, the error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to game ball payout, the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the payout motor sensor; when the drive of the payout motor for one game ball is completed, the sprocket is at a predetermined angle. If the rotational displacement is not equal to the amount of rotational displacement, the dispensing operation is stopped (or the retry operation is executed), and the error number (7) is displayed on the error display (7-segment display). Further, by operating the error release switch or by elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) from the occurrence of the error; the dispensing operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. It should be noted that if the error overlaps with another error related to putting out game balls, the putting out operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Further, the error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to game ball payout, the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; If a ball entering signal is detected from the sensor for less than the predetermined number of minutes at the time of ) is displayed. Further, by operating the error release switch or by elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) from the occurrence of the error; the dispensing operation is restarted and the error display is hidden. It should be noted that if the error overlaps with another error related to putting out game balls, the putting out operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Further, the error number displayed on the error display (7-segment display) is just an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to abnormal winnings; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); If a game ball entering the first (second) grand prize opening is detected outside the first (second) grand prize opening valid period (*However, if a special During the execution of the game, the entering ball may be detected a predetermined number of times during the execution of one special game); the frame decoration LED may be lit, an error display may be displayed on the performance display device SG, and an error notification sound may be played. Execute. Further, the error notification is terminated by turning on the power again with the RAM clear button pressed, or by elapse of a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) from the occurrence of the error.

Next, as an error related to door opening; the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the door open sensor; when the door open sensor changes from off to on; stopping the payout operation; Prohibition of lending balls, blinking of the frame decoration LED, error display on the performance display device SG, error notification sound playback, and when a ball is detected entering the first (second) main game starting port or auxiliary game starting port. plays a special ball entry sound effect. In addition, when the door open sensor changes from on to off, the payout operation is resumed, ball lending is permitted, and the error display, error notification sound playback, and ball entry sound effect playback are terminated (even after the error is cleared, (The frame decoration LED continues to blink until a predetermined period of time has elapsed.) In addition, if the error overlaps with an error related to other big winning hole abnormality detection, the suspension of the payout operation and the prohibition of ball lending are maintained, and the notification control is configured to give priority to the big winning hole abnormality detection. . Further, the detection entity may be the main control board, and when a high priority error (for example, detection of a large prize opening abnormality) occurs, a treatment related to the high priority error may be executed with priority. In addition, the time from the error release to the end of the error notification sound reproduction can be within the shortest fluctuation time of the main game symbol, while the time from the error release to the end of the blinking of the frame decoration LED is the shortest fluctuation time of the main game symbol. I would like to add that the system is configured to exceed .

Next, as an error related to the frame; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the frame open sensor; when the frame open sensor changes from off to on; the payout operation stops, the ball The lending is prohibited, the frame decoration LED blinks, an error is displayed on the performance display device SG, and an error notification sound is played. Furthermore, when the open detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off, the error display and reproduction of the error notification sound are terminated (even after the error is canceled, the frame decoration LED continues to blink until a predetermined period of time has elapsed). Note that the detection main body may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to big winning hole abnormality detection; the main control board (for example, main control board M); the first (second) big winning hole sensor (for example, the first big winning hole C10 ball entering detection device or When detecting the entry of a game ball into the first (second) big winning hole outside the first (second) big winning hole valid period; Invalidating the ball entered due to the occurrence of the error, lighting up the frame decoration LED, board decoration LED, and monitor LED, displaying the error on the performance display device SG, and playing the error notification sound. Furthermore, the error notification is terminated when the power is turned on again or when the open detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off. Note that the frame decoration LED (and board decoration LED) is not blinking but is lit. Furthermore, although the error release conditions are the same as those for opening the frame, the conditions for extinguishing the frame decoration LED are different.

Next, as an error related to abnormality detection of the winning hole, the main control board (for example, the main control board M) refers to the radio wave sensor, the ball entering sensor of all ball entering holes, and the first (second) big winning hole sensor. ; When detecting abnormal radio waves, detecting that the winning sensor or out switch continues to be ON for a certain period of time, or detecting that more than a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening during a special game; The entry of the ball is invalidated, the frame decoration LED, the board decoration LED, and the monitor LED are turned on, an error is displayed on the performance display device SG, and an error notification sound is played. Furthermore, the error notification is terminated when the power is turned on again or when the open detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off.

Next, as an error related to the normal electric accessory winning abnormality, the main control board (for example, the main control board M) detects the second main game starting opening sensor (for example, the second main game starting opening ball entry detection device B11s). Refer to: If a predetermined number A (15 balls) or more of game balls enter the second main game starting port during the flag off → on → off period during the valid period of the second main game starting port, or the second main game starting port If a predetermined number B (10 balls) or more of game balls enter the second main game starting port with the flag off during the valid period, or when an abnormality in winning a normal electric accessory is occurring (for example, while the error is occurring). When a predetermined number C (1 ball) or more of game balls enter the second main game starting port; the sub-input button (for example, sub-input button SB), button lamp, and other various LEDs flash or light, and the effect is displayed. Error display on the device SG {*If the error is not cleared, it will end after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)} and error notification sound playback {*If the error is not cleared, it will end after a predetermined time B (90 seconds)} Execute. Further, the error notification is terminated by turning on the power again {for example, starting the execution of main processing on the main control board side (a) in FIG. 8}. Incidentally, the occurrence of errors is such that the predetermined number A>predetermined number B>predetermined number C does not affect the progress of the game. Further, while the display mode of the sub-input button system LED does not depend on the performance, the display mode of the performance display device SG is configured so that error display is also performed while depending on the performance.

Next, as an error related to the big winning hole winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); the first (second) big winning hole sensor (for example, the first big winning hole C10 ball entering detection device or Referring to the second big winning opening C20 ball entering detection device); during the small winning execution, the period from the small winning execution flag on to the small winning ball waiting flag on → off {For example, during the small winning game, the first (second ball entering detection device) ) If a predetermined number A (11 balls) of game balls enter the grand prize opening during the period when the flag is on during the valid period of the special game, the main game that is stopped in the big prize opening during the execution of the special game When a predetermined number N of game balls based on the symbol enters the ball, when a predetermined number B (3 balls) of game balls enter the grand prize opening when the small hit execution flag is off and the conditional device activation flag is off, the grand prize opening is won. When a predetermined number C (1 ball) of game balls enters the grand prize opening during an abnormality (for example, while the error is occurring); sub-input button sensor (for example, sub-input button SB), sub-input button decoration LED (not shown), various other LEDs blink or light up, error display on the effect display device SG {*If the error is not cleared, it will end after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, error notification sound played {*error canceled If not, execute } after a predetermined time B (90 seconds). Moreover, by turning on the power again; the error notification is terminated. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, the predetermined number N is determined by the main game symbols being stopped, and the predetermined number N may be different even if the special game is composed of the same number of rounds. Further, the configuration is such that predetermined number A>predetermined number B>predetermined number C. Additionally, it should be noted that when opening the same big prize opening, the minimum value of the predetermined number N is the same as the value of the predetermined number A.

Next, as an error related to the starting hole winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M) refers to the first main game starting port sensor and the first main game starting port confirmation sensor; the first main game starting When the input ball count counter value is more than a predetermined number (100 balls) than the first main game start opening confirmation counter value; jog sensor (for example, sub input button SB), jog decoration LED (not shown), and other various The LED flashes or lights up, an error is displayed on the production display device SG {*If the error is not canceled, it will end after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, an error notification sound is played {*If the error is not canceled, a predetermined time B (end after 90 seconds)}. Further, the error notification is terminated by turning on the power again {for example, starting the execution of the main processing on the main control board side (a) in FIG. 8}. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, it is preferable that the first main game starting port sensor is a non-contact sensor and the first main game starting port confirmation sensor is a contact sensor. Further, the first main game starting port sensor may be a contact sensor, and the first main game starting port confirmation sensor may be a non-contact sensor.

Next, as an error related to the tray (upper tray) being full, the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) refers to the tray (upper tray) full sensor (not shown); the prize ball payout device When the saucer full error flag changes from OFF to ON due to the operation of KE or the game ball lending device R; the payout operation is stopped, and the performance display device SG displays an error and plays an error notification sound. Further, when the tray full error flag changes from on to off; the dispensing operation is restarted and the error notification is ended. In addition, the error notification sound is activated when a predetermined main game symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and when the condition device activation flag is turned on (especially when it is a special game consisting of the same number of rounds, it is easy to obtain prize balls. It is configured to be played only during a special game related to a long open jackpot). Further, the detection main body may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to the door open error; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the door open sensor and the frame open sensor; when the frame open sensor changes from OFF to ON; Stopping the dispensing operation, moving sub-control production accessories (accessories that do not obstruct the visibility of other error notifications) to the initial position, lighting up the frame decoration LED, and displaying an error on the production display device SG. Executes error notification sound playback {*Playback ends after a predetermined time (300 seconds) after error occurrence}. In addition, if the door open sensor changes from on to off, or if the frame open sensor changes from on to off; restart the dispensing operation and turn on the frame decoration LED after a predetermined time A (30 seconds) after the error is cleared. The light goes out, the error display ends, and the reproduction of the error notification sound ends after a predetermined time B (5 seconds) after the error is cleared. In addition, if the sub-control performance accessory is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the error display, it may be configured to move to the initial position when an error occurs to make other error displays easier to see. It's okay. Further, the detection main body may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to abnormal winning, the main control board (for example, main control board M) is; the second main game starting port sensor (second main game starting port entrance ball detection device B11s) and the first (second Refer to the big winning hole sensor (for example, the first big winning hole C10 ball entering detection device or the second big winning hole C20 ball entering detection device); When the flag is off during the second main game starting port valid period, the second main game starting port If a predetermined number A (10 balls) or more of game balls enter the first (second) grand prize opening, or when the flag is turned off during the first (second) grand prize opening validity period, a predetermined number A (10 balls) of game balls enter the first (second) grand prize opening. If the ball enters the frame (ball) or more; the frame decoration LED is turned on {*turns off after a predetermined time A (1 second) after the error occurs}. ;Also, if a predetermined number B (30 balls) or more of game balls enter the second main game starting port when the flag is off during the second main game starting port validity period, or during the first (second) grand prize opening valid period. If a predetermined number B (30 balls) or more of game balls enter the first (second) grand prize opening when the flag is off; turn on the frame decoration LED {*turn off after a predetermined time B (30 seconds) after the error occurs} do. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, the two error notification modes are characterized in that the error occurrence conditions are different and there are two or more error notification termination triggers.

Next, as an error related to the ejection error, the main control board (for example, the main control board M) is; Starting hole entry ball detection device B11s, 1st big winning hole C10 ball entering detection device, 2nd big winning hole C20 ball entering detection device, general winning hole entering ball detection device) and a switch for confirming ball entry (not particularly shown) However, it refers to one or more switches through which the game ball that enters each ball entry port passes, which is different from the switch for detecting the ball entering each ball entry port; If the difference between the number counter value (for example, the number of game balls detected by the ball entering sensor at all ball entrances) and the number of game balls detected by the ball entering confirmation switch exceeds a predetermined number (100); Error display on display device SG {*Error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from error occurrence}, error notification sound playback {*Error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from error occurrence}, frame decoration LED (e.g. , frame decoration lamp D18-L) is turned on {*Error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from error occurrence}. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Furthermore, there are more error notification modes and fewer error notification termination conditions than for abnormal winning errors.

<Configuration related to power-on>
As a configuration regarding power-on, one or more of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) If a power failure occurs and the power does not enter setting change mode or setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on afterwards, a button vibration related to the initial operation will be executed. (2) If a power failure occurs, If the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on after that, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed during the setting change mode. In this case, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed during the setting confirmation mode.

<Vibration time of sub input button SB>
One or more of the following configurations may be applied as the configuration regarding the vibration time of the sub-input button SB.
(1) The vibration time of the sub-input button SB during the button-vibration performance is relatively longer than the vibration time of the sub-input button SB during the button-vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored ( 2) The longest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe production is longer than the longest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe related to the initial operation after power is restored. (3) The shortest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe production is longer than the shortest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration related to the initial operation after power is restored. (4) The vibration time of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is not a winning or losing performance is longer than the vibration time of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is a winning or losing performance. (5) The vibration of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is not a winning/losing performance is longer than the longest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is a winning/losing performance. (6) The longest time is shorter than the shortest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe effect, which is a win/lose branch effect. The shortest vibration time of the sub-input button SB is shorter (7) The vibration time of the sub-input button SB is shorter than the vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe production that starts before reaching. The vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button-vibe performance that starts execution after reaching is relatively shorter (8) The sub-input button in the button-vibe performance that starts execution before reaching reach. The longest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe production that starts after reaching reach is shorter than the longest vibration time of SB (9) Reach and The shortest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in a button-vibration performance that starts after the reach is longer than the shortest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button-vibration performance that starts before reaching. (10) One cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe effect is shorter than the one-cycle vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored. The vibration time of (11) is relatively longer than the longest vibration time of one cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. (12) The longest vibration time of one cycle of the sub input button SB is longer than the one cycle of vibration time of the sub input button SB in (12) The vibration time of one cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration related to the initial operation after power restoration (13) The shortest time of one cycle of vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe production is longer than the shortest time in the button vibe production. The vibration time of one cycle of the sub-input button SB is relatively shorter than the vibration time of one cycle of the button SB in a button vibe performance that is not a win/loss branch performance (14) This is a win/loss branch performance. The longest vibration time for one cycle of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is not a winning/losing performance is shorter than the longest vibration time for one cycle of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance. (15) One cycle of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is not a win-lose branch performance is shorter than the shortest vibration time of one cycle of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is a win-lose branch performance. (16) The shortest vibration time is shorter than the one-cycle vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe production that starts before reaching reach. The vibration time of one cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe production that starts later is relatively shorter (17) The sub-input button SB in the button vibe production that starts execution before reaching reaches. The longest time of the vibration time of one cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibe production that starts execution after reaching reach is shorter than the longest time of the vibration time of one cycle of the input button SB. (18) The shortest vibration time of one cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe performance that starts before reaching reach is longer than the shortest time for the button vibe performance that starts execution after reaching reach. The shortest vibration time for one cycle of the sub-input button SB is shorter (19) The vibration time of the sub-input button SB in a button vibe performance that is not a winning/losing branch performance is the initial period after the power is restored. The vibration time of one cycle may be shorter than the vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibrator related to the operation.The vibration time of one cycle is the time during which vibration is performed continuously. When the sub input button SB vibrates like this: 3 seconds of vibration → 0.2 seconds of no vibration → 0.3 seconds of vibration → 0.2 seconds of no vibration →...'', the vibration time period is 0. .2+0.3=0.5 seconds". In addition, if the vibration pattern repeats "0.3 seconds of vibration → 0.2 seconds of no vibration → 0.5 seconds of vibration → 0.2 seconds of no vibration", the repeated time value is considered as one cycle. In this case, the period of vibration time is "0.3+0.2+0.5+0.2=1.2 seconds". Note that when there is only one type of vibration time, the one type of vibration time is the longest time, and the one type of vibration time is the shortest time. That is, even if the number of types of vibration time is not two or more, it has the longest time and the shortest time.

In addition, in this specification, the "average value" in "the average value of time of A is shorter than the average value of time of B" refers to the time value that can be selected for A and the frequency at which it is selected. This is a comparison of the average value of time calculated based on the selected time value of B and the average value of time calculated based on the frequency of selection. Similar interpretations can be applied to long periods of time, and also to large, small, long, short, etc.

In addition, in this specification, A is relatively shorter than B means that the average value of the possible time for A (same as the average value described above) is compared with the average value for the possible time for B. A may be selected for a shorter time than B, or A may be selected for a shorter time than B by comparing the time value at which A is selected most frequently and the time value at which B is selected most frequently. Alternatively, A may select a shorter time value more frequently than B. Similar interpretations can be applied to long periods of time, as well as large, small, long, short, etc.

<About duplication of button vibes>
In the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification, a button vibe effect may be determined by the sub control board S as an effect executed by symbol variation while the sub input button SB is vibrating with the button vibe at the time of power recovery, or , the button vibe effect is configured so that during the execution of the symbol variation determined by the sub control board S, the sub input button SB can be vibrated with a button vibe related to power recovery. Good too. When configured in this way, one or more of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) If it is time to execute a button vibe effect while the sub-input button is vibrating with the button vibe related to the initial action when the power is restored, the button vibe related to the initial action when the power is restored is given priority. In other words, the button vibe related to the initial operation when the power is restored continues to be executed, and the button vibe effect is not executed during the vibration time of the button vibe related to the initial operation when the power is restored. (2) As in (1) above. In the case of configuration, if the vibration time of the button vibe related to the initial operation when the power is restored has elapsed, the button vibe effect will not be executed even if the vibration time of the button vibe effect from the execution timing of the button vibe effect remains ( 3) When configured as in (1) above, when the vibration time of the button vibe related to the initial operation when the power is restored has elapsed, the vibration time of the button vibe effect from the execution timing of the button vibe effect remains. In this case, the button vibration effect will be executed from the middle until the vibration time has elapsed.

<Pre-reading performance>
Further, in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification, one or more of the following configurations may be applied as a configuration regarding the pre-read performance.
(1) When executing the look-ahead effect, it is possible to execute the button vibe effect (button vibe look-ahead effect) with the pre-trigger fluctuation in a situation where the pending image related to the trigger hold is a held image with a relatively high expectation of jackpot. (2) When executing a look-ahead effect, if a power outage occurs in a predetermined situation where a button vibe effect (button vibe look-ahead effect) is being executed due to pre-trigger fluctuations, and then the power is restored, before the power is turned off. The button vibe effect that was being executed will not be executed, but the button vibe related to the initial operation when the power is restored will be executed.
(3) When configured as in (2) above, the sub-input button SB may vibrate before the trigger variation is executed, but the sub-input button SB does not vibrate anew during the trigger variation (4) Pre-reading effect When executing , if a power outage occurs in a situation where the held image related to the trigger hold is a held image with a relatively high jackpot expectation, and then the power is restored, the jackpot expectation that was displayed before the power outage Pending images with a relatively high degree of success are not displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation of jackpot until the trigger fluctuation ends. ) is being executed, and if the power is restored afterwards, the vibration of the sub-input button SB may be executed before the trigger fluctuation ends. If a power outage occurs in a situation where the pending image is a pending image with a relatively high jackpot expectation, and the power is subsequently restored, the pending image with a relatively high jackpot expectation that was displayed before the power outage A situation in which the image is not displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot until the trigger fluctuation starts, while a button vibe effect (button vibe look-ahead effect) is being executed with the pre-trigger change when the look-ahead effect is executed. If the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the vibration of the sub-input button SB can be executed before the trigger fluctuation starts. If a power outage occurs in a situation where a high background effect is being displayed, and then the power is restored, the background effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation that was displayed before the power outage will not be displayed until the trigger fluctuation ends. On the other hand, when executing a look-ahead effect, if the power is cut off while the button vibe effect (button vibe look-ahead effect) is being executed with pre-trigger fluctuation, and then the power is restored, the vibration of the sub input button SB will be triggered. (7) When executing the look-ahead effect, a power outage occurs in a situation where a background effect with a relatively high expectation of jackpot is displayed as a background effect, and then When the power is restored, the background effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation that was displayed before the power was cut off will not be displayed until the trigger change starts, while the button vibe effect (button If the power is cut off while the vibrator pre-reading effect) is being executed and then the power is restored, the vibration of the sub-input button SB may be executed (execution starts) before the trigger fluctuation starts.

<Power cut off while button vibe effect is in progress>
In the case where the power is cut off during execution of the button vibe effect, the following effect may be configured. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: "Button vibe effect starts running → Power is cut off while button vibe effect is running → Power is restored (does not move to setting confirmation mode or setting change mode) → Button vibe effect does not restart (remaining execution time) minute is not executed) → Button vibration related to initial operation starts execution.''
Configuration 2: "Button vibe effect starts running → Power is cut off while button vibe effect is running → Setting key switch turns from off to on → Power returns → Shifts to setting confirmation mode → Button vibe effect is not restarted ( (The remaining execution time will not be executed), and the button vibration related to the initial action will not be executed → Setting confirmation mode ends → Button vibe production will not be restarted (The remaining execution time will not be executed) → The button vibration related to the initial action will not be executed. "Start execution"
Configuration 3: "Button vibe effect starts running → Power is cut off while button vibe effect is running → Setting key switch turns from OFF to ON → Power returns with RAM clear button on → Shifts to setting change mode → The button vibe effect will not be restarted (the remaining execution time will not be executed), and the button vibe related to the initial operation will not be executed → settings change mode will end → the button vibe effect will not be restarted (the remaining execution time will not be executed) →The button vibration related to the initial operation starts running.”
In addition, the button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored is configured to start executing after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is restored, so that the player does not misunderstand that the button vibe effect has been executed from the continuation. It's okay. Further, the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode and the transition conditions for the setting change mode are just examples, and there is no problem in changing them.

<Power cutoff during button vibe production and character production>
In the case where a power outage occurs during execution of the button vibe effect and the accessory effect, the following effect may be configured. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: "Button vibe production is being executed and role object production is being executed → Power is cut off while button vibe production is being executed → Power is restored (does not move to setting confirmation mode or setting change mode) → Button vibe production is It is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), and the accessory production is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed) → Button vibe related to the initial action starts execution → The initial action of the movable accessory is executed start"
Configuration 2: "Button vibe production is in progress and the role part production is in progress → Power is cut off while the button vibe production is in progress → Setting key switch is turned on from off → Power is restored → Shifts to setting confirmation mode → Button The vibe production is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), the button vibe related to the initial action is not executed, the character production is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), and the movable role is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed). Initial motion of objects is not executed → Setting confirmation mode ends → Button vibe production is not restarted (remaining execution time is not executed), role object production is not restarted (remaining execution time is not executed) → Initial The button vibration related to the movement starts executing → The initial movement of the movable accessory starts executing.''
Configuration 3: "Button vibe production is in progress and the role part production is in progress → Power is cut off while the button vibe production is in progress → Setting key switch turns from off to on → Power returns with RAM clear button on. → Shift to setting change mode → The button vibe effect will not be restarted (the remaining execution time will not be executed), the button vibe related to the initial action will not be executed, and the role play effect will not be restarted (the remaining execution time will not be executed). is not executed), and the initial movement of the movable accessory is not executed → Setting change mode ends → Button vibe production is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), and the accessory production is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed). (time is not executed) → Button vibe related to initial action starts running → Initial action of movable accessory starts running."
In addition, the button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored is configured to start executing after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is restored, so that the player does not misunderstand that the button vibe effect has been executed from the continuation. It's okay. The initial motion of the movable accessory after the power is restored may also be configured to start executing after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, so that the player does not misunderstand that the accessory performance has continued from where it left off. good. Further, the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode and the transition conditions for the setting change mode are just examples, and there is no problem in changing them. Furthermore, the execution timing of the movable accessory's initial action may be earlier than the execution start timing of the button vibe related to the initial action, or the execution period of the button vibe related to the initial action and the movable accessory's initial action. The configuration may be such that the execution period of the execution period does not overlap. In addition, the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored starts execution after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the power is restored, and the initial operation of the movable accessory after the power is restored is performed for a predetermined period of time after the power is restored. It may be configured to start execution after a lapse of (for example, 1 second). In addition, when two or more movable accessories are mounted and have at least movable accessory A and movable accessory B, for configurations 1 to 3, either movable accessory A or movable accessory B It may be applied only to the movable accessory A and the movable accessory B, or it may be applied to both the movable accessory A and the movable accessory B.

<Relationship between drawing action and button vibe>
The relationship between the drawing action and the button vibe may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: While the fixed position action related to the above-described decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is being executed, the button vibe effect is not performed.
Configuration 2: While the tenpai action related to the above-described decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is being performed, the button vibe effect is not performed.
Configuration 3: During the execution of the shaking action related to the above-mentioned decorative pattern (first decorative pattern), a button vibe effect may be executed (for example, a cut-in effect is executed as a button effect during the execution of the shaking action, and then button vibe effect is executed).
Configuration 4: During the execution of the fluctuation start action related to the above-mentioned decorative pattern (first decorative design), a button vibe effect may be executed (for example, a button vibe look-ahead effect may be performed during the execution of the variation start action). ).
Configuration 5: During the execution of the deciding action related to the above-mentioned decorative pattern (first decorative symbol), a button vibe effect can be executed (for example, during the execution of the deciding action, there is no need to operate the sub-input button SB and the valid period is (button vibe effect is executed).
Note that the button vibe performance may be configured not to be performed during the execution of the shaking action in a situation where the number of pending symbols is 0 and the first decorative pattern is stopped (fluctuation standby state).

<Button vibe production according to gaming status>
The button vibe effect depending on the gaming state may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: While the first main game symbol is changing in the non-time saving game state (low base state), button vibe look-ahead performance, button vibe performance related to cut-in performance, button vibe performance related to singing performance, winning/losing branch performance However, during the fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state, the button vibe look-ahead performance and the button vibe performance related to the cut-in performance are not executed (the button vibe performance related to the singing performance). Button vibe effects, button vibe effects related to winning/losing effects, etc. may be executed).
Configuration 2: While the second main game symbol is changing in the time reduction game state (high base state), there are button vibe look-ahead effects, button vibe effects related to cut-in effects, button vibe effects related to singing effects, and winning/losing branch effects. Such button vibe performances etc. may be executed, but while the first main game symbol is changing in the time reduction gaming state, the button vibe pre-reading effects and the button vibe effects related to the singing effect are not executed (the button vibe effects related to the cut-in effect) Button vibe effects related to performance, winning/losing performance, etc. may be executed).

<Button vibration before the validity period starts>
The present invention may be configured to perform a button vibe effect (sometimes referred to as a first button vibe effect) in which a button vibe is executed before or from the start of the validity period of the sub-input button SB; In some cases, the configuration may be as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: When the first button vibe effect is executed as a single button press effect, the button vibe continues during the valid period, and the button vibe may continue even after the sub input button SB is single pressed during the valid period. .
Configuration 2: When the first button vibe effect is executed as a button press effect, the button vibration continues during the valid period, and the button vibration may continue even when the sub input button SB is repeatedly pressed during the valid period. (It may be configured such that when a long press operation is performed during the validity period, an automatic repeated hit effect is executed.)
Configuration 3: When the first button vibe effect is executed as a long button press effect, the button vibe continues during the valid period, and the button vibe continues even when the sub input button SB is pressed and held during the valid period. It is possible.

<Configuration related to button operations>
The configuration regarding button operations may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: A button vibe effect may be executed during the execution of a repeated button press operation during the execution period of the button press effect.
Configuration 2: A button vibe effect may be executed while an automatic continuous press effect is being executed (during a long press operation).

<Configuration related to errors>
The configuration related to errors may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: When a first error occurs during execution of the button vibe effect, the execution of the button vibe effect is interrupted.
Configuration 2: Even if a second error occurs during execution of the button vibe effect, the execution of the button vibe effect is not interrupted.
Configuration 3: Even if the first error occurs during the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation, the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation is not interrupted.
Configuration 4: Even if a second error occurs during the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation, the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation is not interrupted.
The first error corresponds to an abnormal prize winning error, and the second error corresponds to an abnormality when the tray (upper tray) is full, an error related to game ball payout, and the like.

<Button lamp during button vibration>
The configuration regarding the button lamp during the button vibrator may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: The light intensity can be adjusted even while the button vibe effect is being performed (for example, by operating the cross key), and even if the light intensity level is changed by adjusting the light intensity, the light intensity will be adjusted during the button vibe effect. The light intensity of the button lamp does not change.
Configuration 2: The light intensity can be adjusted even while the button vibe effect is being executed (for example, by operating the cross key), and when the light intensity level is changed by adjusting the light intensity, the light level during the button vibe effect will be adjusted. The light intensity of the button lamp is also changed.
Configuration 3: The light intensity can be adjusted even while the button vibration related to the initial operation is being executed (for example, it can be executed by operating the cross key), and even if the light intensity level is changed by the light intensity adjustment, the initial operation The light intensity of the button lamp is not changed while the button vibration is being executed.

<Time series of button vibe production>
The configuration regarding the time series of button vibe effects may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: A button vibe effect may be executed more than once with one symbol change (for example, a button vibe effect related to a cut-in effect → a button vibe effect related to a win/loss branch effect).
Configuration 2: In the case where the button vibe effect is executed twice due to one symbol change, when the button vibe effect that is executed later is executed, the accessory effect is executed (the movable accessory moves) ). In addition, if two or more movable accessories are installed and have at least movable accessory A and movable accessory B, if the button vibe effect is executed twice with one symbol change, it will be executed first. When the button vibe effect to be performed is executed, neither the effect effect related to movable accessory A nor the effect effect related to movable accessory B is executed, and when the button vibe effect to be executed later is executed. At least one of the accessory presentation related to the movable accessory A or the accessory presentation related to the movable accessory B is executed (the movable accessory moves).
Configuration 3: When the button vibe effect is executed twice with one symbol variation, the first decorative pattern is displayed on the effect display device SG during the execution of the button vibe effect that is executed first (fluctuating display). The first decorative pattern is not displayed on the performance display device SG (or has a period in which it is not displayed) during execution of the button vibe performance to be executed later.

<Relationship between button vibe production and decorative patterns>
The configuration regarding the relationship between the button vibe effect and the decorative pattern may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: While the second decorative pattern is stopped (determined stopped), the button vibe effect is not executed.
Configuration 2: A predetermined super reach (for example, battle reach) is executed in a certain symbol variation that results in a jackpot, and the temporary stop symbol (for example, "787") of the first decorative symbol after the execution of the predetermined super reach is It may be different from the fixed stop symbol (for example, "777") of the second decorative symbol in the certain symbol variation.
Configuration 3: In the certain symbol variation, the fixed stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (or the temporary stop symbol before the fixed stop) is the same as the fixed stop symbol of the second decorative symbol (for example, "777"). , when the temporary stop pattern of the first decorative pattern (e.g., "787") that is different from the confirmed stop pattern of the second decorative pattern is stopped or a predetermined time before it is stopped (e.g., 2 seconds before), the button vibration is activated. Although the production is configured so that the execution does not start, the fixed stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (or the temporary stop symbol before the fixed stop, for example, "777") is stopped or the predetermined time during which it is stopped. Before (for example, 2 seconds before), the button vibe effect can be started.

<Relationship between winning/losing effect and button image>
The configuration regarding the relationship between the winning/losing effect and the button image may be configured as follows. Note that a plurality of the following configurations may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: While the winning/losing branching effect is being executed, a button effect that makes the jackpot almost certain (or certain) is executed (a button lamp that displays a button image that makes the jackpot almost certain (or definite)) is lit in a lighting manner in which the jackpot is almost certain (or definite)), the revival effect (button vibe related to the revival effect) is not performed as the effect for the symbol change.
Configuration 2: Before the execution of the winning/losing branching effect, a preview effect (performance other than the button effect) in which the jackpot is almost certain (or definite) is executed, and during the execution of the winning/losing branching effect, the jackpot is almost certain (or definite). When a button performance other than the button performance that becomes the target) is executed, a revival performance (button vibe related to the resurrection performance) may be performed as a performance in the symbol change.

<<Specific example of configuration>>
The configurations related to the sub-input buttons SB described above may be combined in any way without any problem, and an example of the above-described one configuration or a combination of a plurality of configurations and its effects will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The button vibe related to the initial operation can be executed across a plurality of symbol variations.
The button vibe effect is not executed across multiple symbol changes.

<Effect>
In a situation where the game is progressing normally, it is possible to configure the button vibe effect to be executed over multiple symbol changes, which improves the interest of the game and also allows the button vibe effect to be executed over multiple symbol changes. By configuring the game so that the button vibe effect is not executed, the boundaries between the button vibe effects become clear, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. On the other hand, when the power is restored after a power outage, by configuring the button vibration related to the initial operation to be executed over multiple symbol changes, it is possible to check whether the vibration of the sub input button SB is performed normally or not. Priority can be given to confirmation of

<Configuration 2>
If the power is turned off while the setting key switch is off, and the power is restored while the setting key switch remains off, the settings will be made before the start timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation. When the key switch is turned on from off, even if the timing to execute the button vibration related to the initial operation is reached while the setting key switch is still on, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed.

<Effect>
The administrator of the game center can use the button related to the initial operation to check the game operation after the power is restored, to check the operation other than the button vibration such as the operation of movable accessories, or to prevent vibration errors. By turning on the setting key switch when you do not want the vibration to be activated, the button vibration associated with the initial operation can be prevented from being generated, improving the convenience of inspecting the gaming machine.

<Configuration 3>
When the power is restored after a power outage, it is possible to perform a front button effect that is different from a winning/losing branching effect such as a cut-in effect during the execution of the button vibe related to the initial operation, but the winning/losing branching effect is executed. Not done.

<Effect>
Even if a power outage occurs and a symbol change is executed during the execution of the button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored, the win/loss branch effect that notifies the jackpot will not be executed, and the sub input button SB will not be executed. By vibrating, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player mistakenly believes that a jackpot has been determined.

<Configuration 4>
The button effects include a front button effect and a back button effect.
Both the front button effect and the back button effect are effects that suggest a jackpot.
When performing a front button performance, a button vibe performance may be performed, while when performing a back button performance, a button vibe performance is not performed.

<Effect>
In a secret back button presentation, it is possible to prevent those around you from recognizing that the expectation of a jackpot is high, making it possible to make the player feel a sense of satisfaction that only the player can recognize, and in a non-secret front button presentation This allows the player to feel a sense of superiority by making others aware that the player has a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

<Configuration 5>
There are more types of lighting modes of the button lamp when performing a button vibe effect than there are types of lighting modes of the button lamp when executing a button vibe related to the initial operation after the power is restored.

<Effect>
In the button vibrator related to the initial operation after the power is restored, it is only necessary to satisfy the minimum requirement of operation confirmation, so it is possible to reduce the capacity by not having variations in the lighting mode. On the other hand, since the button vibe effect is an effect that suggests a jackpot, the entertainment level is improved by having a wide variety of lighting modes depending on the execution timing of the button vibe effect and the presentation mode of the accompanying button effect. can be done.

<Configuration 6>
When a singing performance is performed, a button vibe performance is accompanied.
When the dialogue performance is executed, there are cases in which the button vibe effect is accompanied and cases in which the button vibe effect is not accompanied.

<Effect>
Even if the singing performance in which the button vibe performance is executed is not performed, the button vibe performance may be performed in another performance, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained. Furthermore, the frequency with which button vibe effects can be performed can be increased.

<Configuration 7>
The button performance is configured to be able to be performed multiple times during symbol variations that result in jackpots (sometimes referred to as jackpot variations).
The button vibe performance (button performance accompanied by a button vibe performance) can be performed multiple times in a symbol variation that results in a jackpot (sometimes referred to as a jackpot variation).
If the button vibe effect is executed twice in one jackpot change, the execution time of the second button vibe effect is longer than that of the first button vibe effect (the time during which the sub input button SB is vibrating). ) is taking a long time.
In the jackpot variation, the button vibe effect is configured so that it can be executed twice, and the first button vibe effect is a button vibe effect that is executed when the execution timing comes even if the player does not operate the sub input button SB. The first button vibe effect is a button vibe effect that is executed when the sub input button SB is operated by the player, and the second button vibe effect has a longer execution time (sub input The amount of time the button SB is vibrating becomes long.

<Effect>
By performing the button vibe effect twice or more with one symbol change, players can feel the expectation of hitting the jackpot multiple times with a single symbol change, and the button vibe effect can be performed using the player's sub-input button. By dividing the performance into a performance that requires the operation of SB and a performance that does not require the player to operate the sub-input button SB, it is possible to create diversity and surprise in the timing of occurrence of the button vibe performance.

<Configuration 8>
When the button effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed when the sub input button SB is operated differs depending on the display mode of the instruction display.

<Effect>
The player can have a sense of anticipation as to what kind of presentation mode the button presentation will be executed before the button presentation occurs. In addition, there are cases in which the player can experience the button vibe effect as a tactile sensation by directly operating the sub-input button SB, and in cases where the player can experience the button vibe effect as a tactile sensation without touching the sub-input button SB, depending on the display on the effect display device SG and the lighting mode of the button lamp. The game can be configured to recognize the execution of the performance, and can improve the interest of the game and the participation of the players.

<Configuration 9>
When the same reach effect called battle reach effect (also known as super reach effect or SP reach effect) is executed in jackpot fluctuations, there are two types of effect patterns: a normal jackpot pattern and a resurrection jackpot pattern. are doing.
In both the pattern that results in a normal jackpot and the pattern that results in a revival jackpot, the button vibe effect is configured so that it can be executed after reaching reach, and in the pattern that normally results in a jackpot, the player is asked to press the sub input button The button vibe effect that is executed when is operated is executed, and in the pattern that results in a revival jackpot, the button vibe effect that is executed when the execution timing comes even if the player does not operate the sub input button SB is executed. .
The start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern that normally results in a jackpot is earlier than the start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern that results in a revival jackpot.

<Effect>
As a button vibe effect when hitting a jackpot, the variety of effects is increased by having a effect pattern in which the player is involved and a effect pattern in which the player is not involved. By relatively delaying the execution timing, it is possible to increase surprise, and it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation even in the latter half of the symbol fluctuation.

<Configuration 10>
A single button press effect in which the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are hidden when the button vibe effect is executed, and a button image, instruction display, and indicator image are hidden when the button vibe effect is executed. It has an unprecedented button press effect.
In both the single-button-pressing effect and the repeated-button-pressing effect, the execution time of the button vibe effect is longer than the valid period of the sub-input button SB related to the button effect.

<Effect>
The period in which a jackpot is celebrated can be made longer than the period in which the player's operations are required, and the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority and improve his desire to play. In addition, since the execution time of the button vibe effect differs depending on the operation mode instructed to the gaming machine, by anticipating which operation mode will be instructed in advance, you can create a sense of anticipation before the button effect occurs. I can hold it.

Based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (high-level conceptualization), and concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments can be added to these concepts. You can.

<<Configuration regarding pending change performance>>
Next, a reservation change effect applicable to the Pachinko gaming machine in this specification will be explained. Although some of the hold change effects have been partially explained in the second embodiment described above, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to this embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the pending change effects described below can be combined as appropriate in the configurations of this embodiment and the third to eighth embodiments.

<<Significance of terms>>
The meaning of each term in the hold change performance will be explained in detail below. Note that configurations related to terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Non-time saving gaming state>
The non-time saving gaming state is a gaming state indicating a low base state, and is also referred to as a non-time saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. In this example, the non-time reduction game state is a low probability low base state, but the high probability low base state in which the time reduction game is not executed is set as the non-time reduction game state where the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in the normal game state. It may also be a time-saving game state.

<Time-reduced gaming state>
The time reduction gaming state is a gaming state indicating a high base state. In this example, the time reduction gaming states are a high probability high base state and a low probability high base state.

<Pending display>
The pending display is a display indicating the number of symbol variations that have not been executed yet. The hold display notifies the player of the hold count, which is the number that has not changed between the first hold display and the second hold display.

<1st pending display>
The first hold display is a hold display using a hold image (sometimes referred to as an icon). The pending image includes a pending icon and the fluctuation icon. In this example, the types of display modes of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are a rainbow icon, a red icon, a green icon, a blue icon, and a default icon, which is a white icon. It uses two icons. Note that, as display modes other than the five types, for example, a display mode that imitates a character, a display mode that imitates letters, etc. may be provided. As an example of a display mode imitating a character, a "Zoko hold" as shown in FIG. 60 is exemplified. The pending icon and the variable icon have different sizes. The pending icon and the variable icon may be different only in shape, may be different in both size and shape, or may be the same in both size and shape. All five types of hold icons have the same size and shape. Note that some or all of the five types of pending icons may have different sizes or shapes. The expected success rate indicated by the pending images is "Rainbow → Red → Green → Blue → White" from highest to lowest. In addition, white icons (white circle icons, white triangle icons, white inverted triangle icons, white square icons, etc.) are normally reserved images ( Normal icon), blue icon is the first special pending image (first icon), green icon is the first special pending image (first icon), red red icon is the second special pending image (second icon) ), the rainbow-colored rainbow icon is also referred to as a third special pending image (third icon), the blue icon is a first special pending image A (first icon A), and the green icon is a pending image different from the first special pending image A. The image may be referred to as a first special reserved image B (first icon B).

Here, regarding the normal pending images, the first normal pending image is a white icon with a white circle lighting up, and the white icon is a white icon with a blinking white circle (or an aspect larger in size than the first normal pending image). The second normal pending image has a higher probability of winning than the first normal pending image, and/or the second normal pending image has a higher probability of winning than the first normal pending image. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation of change to the special reserved image is high. Similarly, a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern and a blinking white triangle/inverted triangle pattern (or an aspect larger than the white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern) A white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern is larger than a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern (or a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern) A white icon with a blinking white triangle/inverted triangle pattern (or a white triangle with a large blinking pattern) has a higher probability of winning than a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern. / A white icon with a larger size than a white icon with an inverted triangle lighting pattern) may be configured so that the expectation of change to another special pending image is higher. As mentioned above, the first pending display is a collective term for the pending icon and the relevant variable icon (the pending display for producing the relevant fluctuation described later), but the first pending display is also referred to as the variable right display (fluctuating right image). may be called. In other words, a pending image having a pending icon and the variable icon may be referred to as a variable rights display (variable rights image). In that case, the normally reserved image may be referred to as the first variable rights display or the normal variable rights display, and the special reserved image may be referred to as the second variable rights display or special variable rights display, and the blue icon is the second variable rights display. A (first icon), the green icon is the second variation right display A (first icon), the red icon is the second variation right display B (second icon), the rainbow icon is the second variation right display Also referred to as a right display C (third icon), the blue icon is a second variable right display A-1 (first icon A), and the green icon is a second variable right display that is a reserved image different from the second variable right display A-1. It may also be called a rights display A-2 (first icon B). In addition, the pending icon is referred to as a variable rights display corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information. It may also be referred to as a variable rights image corresponding to a variable display of information.

<Special pending image (special icon)>
The first special pending image, the second special pending image, and the third special pending image are special pending images different from the normal pending image. Note that special pending images (special icons) including the first special pending image, the second special pending image, and the third special pending image are referred to as icons related to special pending music. An icon with a white triangular display mode, an icon with a white inverted triangle display mode, and an icon with a white square display mode may be used as special reserved images (special icons). Holding sounds including special holding sounds will be described later, but holding sounds may also be referred to as variable right sounds, just like holding images.In other words, for normal holding sounds, which will be described later, they may be referred to as first variable right sounds or normal variable rights. The special holding tone may also be referred to as a second variable right tone or a special variable right tone. Note that the special hold tone will be described later.

<Second pending display>
The second hold display is a hold display that is displayed so that the player can see it all the time, when the first hold display is difficult for the player to see, or when the player cannot see the first hold display. The second hold display is displayed as a number image indicating a number. The second reservation display may be referred to as a reservation number display or a variable rights number display in order to clearly distinguish it from a fluctuating rights display (in particular, a second fluctuating rights display).

<First hold display area>
The first hold display area SG12 is an area for displaying a first hold display. In some cases, a display indicating the upper limit number of first pending displays may be performed. A hold icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12. The first reservation display area SG12 may be an area that includes a reservation display area for the effect of the fluctuation, and in that case, it is referred to as an icon display area or a fluctuation rights display area (a fluctuation rights image area).

<Second hold display area>
The second hold display area SG13 is an area for displaying a second hold display. In the second reservation display area SG13, a numeric image showing the number of reservations on the first main game side and a numeric image showing the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed. The second reservation display area SG13 may also be referred to as a reservation number display area or a variable rights number display area.

<Pending display for production of the relevant fluctuation (pending digestion transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The suspension display for effecting the fluctuation is also referred to as the fluctuation icon (retention extinguishment conveyance image, fluctuation corresponding image), and is an image that is displayed when a certain suspension is extinguished. In addition, as described above, the variation effect holding display is one of the first holding displays (holding display using a holding image), and is also referred to as a swing rights display (fluctuating rights image).

<Hold display area for production of the change>
The holding display area for effecting the fluctuation is an area for displaying a holding image of the fluctuation icon that is displayed when a certain hold is exhausted. Although each display area is displayed as a partitioned display area in the variable effect holding display area and the first holding display area SG12, they may be a unified display area. When a unified display area is used, it is referred to as an icon display area or a variable rights display area (a variable rights image area).

<Pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation)>
The holding occurrence display (holding occurrence animation) is when the number of holdings increases based on the game ball entering the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10 (or the first main game side and when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10 in a situation where the number of pending on the second main game side is 0), the effect display device displays a new first pending display. This is a display of a moving image when displayed on the SG. Regarding this pending occurrence display, there are a pending occurrence display of a pending icon and a pending occurrence display of the relevant variable icon. If the number of reservations has reached the upper limit, the number of reservations will not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10, so the reservation occurrence display of the reservation icon is executed. Not done. However, if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10 in a situation where the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is 0, the corresponding fluctuation icon will be suspended. Occurrence indication may be performed. In the non-time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and has not reached the upper limit, the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10. Also, the hold occurrence display is not executed, but it is a non-time reduction gaming state and there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are stopped fluctuating. In this case, when the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the suspension occurrence display of the fluctuation icon is configured to be executed. Furthermore, in the non-time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and has not reached the upper limit, the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10. Then, a hold occurrence display is executed, and it is a non-time reduction gaming state, and there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are in a state where fluctuations are stopped. In this case, when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the suspension occurrence display of the variable icon is configured to be executed. In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and has not reached the upper limit, the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10. However, in the time-reduced gaming state, both the first main game side and the second main game side are not held, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are stopped fluctuating. In this case, when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the suspension occurrence display of the variable icon is configured to be executed. Furthermore, in the time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and has not reached the upper limit, when the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10. When the hold occurrence display is executed and the time reduction gaming state is in place, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are in a stopped state of fluctuation. If the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the suspension occurrence display of the variable icon is configured to be executed. Note that the reservation occurrence display may collectively refer to the reservation occurrence display of the reservation icon and the reservation occurrence display of the variable icon, and may be referred to as a variable right occurrence display. Further, the reservation occurrence display may be configured to have only the reservation occurrence display of the reservation icon and not the reservation occurrence display of the relevant variable icon, or the display mode of the reservation occurrence display of the reservation icon (for example, (It is displayed gradually from the top, initially small and then enlarged, but when it is fully displayed, it is displayed smaller than the relevant fluctuation icon), and the display mode of the pending occurrence display of the relevant fluctuation icon (for example, The icon may be displayed gradually from the bottom, initially small, then enlarged and displayed larger than the hold icon when it is fully displayed, etc.). In addition, as a modified example, in a non-time reduction gaming state, when there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are in a state where fluctuations are stopped. If the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the hold occurrence display of the variable icon is not executed, and the time reduction game state is in effect, and the first main game side hold and the second main game ball are held. If there is no hold on the game side and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are in a stopped state of fluctuation, and the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the relevant fluctuation icon will be put on hold. The configuration may be such that the occurrence display is not executed.

<Shift display (shift animation)>
Shift display (shift animation) is a display when the previously existing pending hold, which is the first spent hold, is reduced by satisfying the variable display start condition of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol. This is a display of a moving image when moving the pending icon. Note that the destination of the hold icon is not limited to the first hold display area SG12, but also includes the change effect hold display area (that is, in the non-time saving game state, the movement destination of the hold icon is not limited to the first hold display area SG12). The corresponding hold icon moves into the effect hold display area of the variation, or the hold icon corresponding to hold 1 on the second main game side moves into the effect hold display area of the change in the time reduction gaming state. ). In the non-time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the second main game side is 0 and the number of reservations on the first main game side is 1 or more, and the condition for starting the variable display of the first main game symbol is satisfied, When the number of holds on the first main game side decreases, when moving the displayed hold icon on the first main game side, the hold icon on the first main game side (holds 2 to 4 on the first main game side) The system is configured so that shift display of the corresponding variable icon on the first main game side (targeting the pending icon of Pending 1 on the first main game side) is executed. In a non-time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the second main game side is 1 or more, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second main game symbol is satisfied and the number of reservations on the second main game side decreases. , the shift display of the relevant variable icon on the second main game side (targeting Pending 1 on the second main game side) is executed (the pending icon on the second main game side (targeting Pending 1 on the second main game side) The shift display (targeting the hold icons for holds 2 to 4 on the side) is not executed). In the time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the second main game side is 1 or more, and the condition for starting the variable display of the second main game symbol is satisfied and the number of reservations on the second main game side decreases. , when moving the displayed hold icon on the second main game side, the hold icon on the second main game side (targets the hold icons 2 to 4 on the second main game side) and the second main game side. Shift display of the relevant variable icon (targeting the pending icon of pending 1 on the second main game side) is executed. In the time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the second main game side is 0 and the number of reservations on the first main game side is 1 or more, the condition for starting the variable display of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the first When the number of reservations on the main game side decreases, the shift display of the relevant fluctuation icon on the first main game side (targeting the reservation 1 on the first main game side) is executed (first main game side). Shift display of the pending icons on the gaming side (targeting the pending icons 2 to 4 on the first main gaming side) is not performed. Note that the shift display may also be referred to as a movement display or a variable rights movement display. Further, the shift display may be configured to have only the shift display of the hold icon and not the shift display of the relevant variable icon, or the display mode of the shift display of the hold icon (for example, if the hold icon moves at low speed) , moving without enlarging, etc.) and the shift display mode of the variable icon (for example, moving at high speed, moving while enlarging, etc.) may be different display modes. In addition, as a modified example, in a non-time reduction gaming state and when the number of reservations on the second main game side is 1 or more, the condition for starting the variable display of the second main game symbol is satisfied and the second main game side Even if the number of reservations decreases, the shift display of the relevant variable icon on the second main game side (targeting the reservation 1 on the second main game side) is configured so that it is not executed, and even if the number of reservations is reduced, the second main game is in the time reduction gaming state. When the number of reservations on the gaming side is 0 and the number of reservations on the first main game side is 1 or more, and the condition for starting the variable display of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the number of reservations on the first main game side decreases. However, it may be configured such that the shift display of the variable icon on the first main game side (targeting Pending 1 on the first main game side) is not executed.

<Hold music>
The hold sound is output from the speaker D24 along with execution of the hold occurrence display when the number of holds increases based on the game ball entering the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10. It's a sound effect. If the number of pending games has reached the upper limit, the number of pending games will not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting port B10, so no holding tone will be output, but the number of pending games will not be output. A sound different from the sound may be output. In the non-time saving game state, when the number of holds on the second main game side has not reached the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the second main game starting port B10, the hold sound (normal hold sound and special hold sound) Sound) is configured not to be output, but the same sound as the normal holding tone and special holding tone on the first main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state may be output. In the time reduction game state, when the number of holds on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, the hold sound (normal hold sound and special hold sound) ) is configured not to be output, but the same sound as the normal holding tone and special holding tone on the second main game side in the time reduction gaming state may be output. Note that the normal holding sound on the first main game side in the non-time saving gaming state and the normal holding sound on the second main game side in the time saving gaming state may be different holding sounds, and the normal holding sound on the first main game side in the non-time saving gaming state may be different. The special holding tone on the 1st main game side and the special holding tone on the 2nd main game side in the time-reduced gaming state may be different holding sounds, but among the multiple special holding sounds, a specific holding tone may be different. It may be common to the first main game side in the non-time saving gaming state and the second main gaming side in the time saving gaming state.

<Normal hold music>
A normal hold sound is a hold sound when a circle, triangle, or inverted triangle white icon appears when the number of holds increases based on the game ball entering the first main game starting port A10 in a non-time saving game state. This is the sound that is output when the display is executed. Typically, the hold tone is, for example, the scale of "Do" in Do Re Mi Fa Sorashi, but other scales or sounds may be used. In the non-time reduction gaming state, when there is no hold on the first main game side and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are stopped fluctuating, the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10. When this happens, the white variable icon (hold occurrence display) is displayed and the normal hold tone is output. In the non-time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing, the game ball is 1 When the ball enters the main game starting port A10, a white hold icon (hold occurrence display) is displayed and a normal hold sound is output. If the number of holds on the first main game side has reached the upper limit, the number of holds will not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, so the normal hold sound will not be output, but normally the hold number will not increase. A sound different from the sound may be output. As a modified example, the normal hold sound may not be output when the first normal hold image is displayed, and the normal hold sound may be output when the second normal hold image is displayed. As another modification, when the first normal hold image is displayed, the normal hold sound A (for example, "do") is output, and when the second normal hold image is displayed, the normal hold sound B (for example, , "dodo") may be output. Similarly, when a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern is displayed, for example, "do" is output, and a white triangle/inverted triangle blinking pattern (or a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern) is output. For example, "dodo" may also be output when a white icon (in which the size is larger than a white icon) is displayed. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when a square white icon is newly displayed, the normal hold tone is output as in the non-time-saving game state. Note that, although the hold tone is normally output when the hold occurrence display is triggered, the hold tone is not normally output when the shift display is triggered. The normal hold tone may also be referred to as the first variable right tone. Further, the special holding tone to be described later may be referred to as a second variable right tone (second variable right tone A to C).

<1st hold tone>
The first holding sound is a blue icon when the number of holdings increases based on the game ball entering the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time reduction gaming state and when the pre-read lottery is won. Alternatively, it is a sound that is output when the green icon's pending occurrence display is executed. The first hold music is a different sound from the normal hold music, for example, the scale of "re" in Do Re Mi Fa Sorashi, but it has other scales or sounds (for example, Dore), and the volume is usually higher than the volume of the hold music. You can also use it at a low volume. In the non-time reduction gaming state, when there is no hold on the first main game side and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are stopped fluctuating, the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10. Taking this as an opportunity, the first holding tone is output along with the display of the blue icon or the green icon (hold occurrence display). In the non-time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing, the game ball is When the ball enters the first main game starting port A10, a blue icon or a green icon (hold occurrence display) is displayed and the first hold sound is output. If the number of reservations on the first main game side has reached the upper limit in the non-time reduction gaming state, the number of reservations does not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, so the number of reservations on the first main game side does not increase. Although the hold tone is not output, a sound different from the first hold tone may be output. In addition, if you win the pre-read lottery and the displayed white icon changes to a blue icon or green icon, the timing of the change in hold (for example, when the hold icon is displayed in shift, when the relevant variable icon is displayed in shift, before the trigger The first hold tone is configured to be output even at a predetermined timing during fluctuations, a predetermined timing during trigger fluctuations, etc.). Note that the sound output in the case of a blue icon may be the first hold tone A, and the sound output in the case of the green icon may be the first hold tone B, which is a different sound from the first hold tone A. In addition, in the time reduction game state, when the blue icon or the green icon is displayed as a hold occurrence display or shift display, the first hold sound is output as in the non-time reduction game state. Further, the sound output when the icon is white may be set as the first holding tone. The first holding tone may be referred to as a second variable right tone A. The first holding tone A may be referred to as a second variable right tone A1, and the first holding tone B may be referred to as a second variable right tone A2.

<Second hold tone>
The second holding sound is a red icon when the number of holdings increases based on the game ball entering the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time saving game state and when the pre-read lottery is won. This is the sound that is output when the pending occurrence display is executed. The second on-hold tone is a normal on-hold tone and a sound different from the first on-hold tone, for example, the scale of "Mi" in Do Re Mi Fa Sorashi, but it may also include other scales or sounds (e.g., Do Re Mi), normal on hold tone, etc. The volume may be higher or lower than the volume of the first held tone. In the non-time reduction gaming state, when there is no hold on the first main game side and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are stopped fluctuating, the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10. In response to this, the red variable icon (hold occurrence display) is displayed and the second hold tone is output. In the non-time reduction gaming state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing, the game ball is 1 When the ball enters the main game starting port A10, a red hold icon (hold occurrence display) is displayed and a second hold sound is output. If it is a non-time reduction gaming state and the number of reservations on the first main game side has reached the upper limit, the number of reservations will not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, so the number of reservations on the second main game side will not increase. Although the hold tone is not output, a sound different from the second hold tone may be output. In addition, if you win the pre-read lottery and the displayed white icon, blue icon, or green icon changes to a red icon, the timing of the change in hold (for example, when the hold icon is displayed in shift, when the relevant variable icon is displayed in shift) , a predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, a predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc.). In addition, in the time reduction game state, when the red icon is displayed as a hold occurrence display or shift display, the second hold sound is output as in the non-time reduction game state. The second holding tone may be referred to as a second variable right tone B.

<3rd hold tone>
The third holding sound is a rainbow icon when the number of holdings increases based on the game ball entering the first main game starting port A10 in the non-time saving game state and when the pre-read lottery is won. This is the sound that is output when the pending occurrence display is executed. The third on-hold tone is a different sound from the normal on-hold tone, the first on-hold tone, and the second on-hold tone; for example, it is the "fa" scale of Do Re Mi Fa Sorashi, but it is also a different tone from other scales or sounds (for example, Do Re Mi Fa Sorashi). , the volume may be higher or lower than the volume of the normal hold tone, the first hold tone, or the second hold tone. In the non-time reduction gaming state, when there is no hold on the first main game side and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are stopped fluctuating, the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10. Taking this as an opportunity, the rainbow icon is displayed and the third holding tone is output. In a non-time saving gaming state, in a non-time saving gaming state, the number of reservations on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces), and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing. In this case, when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, a rainbow icon holding icon (hold occurrence display) is displayed and a third holding sound is output. If the number of reservations on the first main game side has reached the upper limit, the number of reservations will not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10, so the third reservation tone will not be output, but the number of reservations on the first main game side will not be output. 3. A sound different from the hold tone may be output. In addition, if you win the pre-read lottery and the displayed white icon, blue icon, green icon, or red icon changes to a rainbow icon, the third hold tone is also output at the timing of the hold change. There is. In addition, in the time reduction game state, when the rainbow icon is displayed as a hold occurrence display or a shift display, the third hold sound is output as in the non-time reduction game state. The third holding tone may be referred to as the second variable right tone C.

<Special hold music>
The first held tone, the second held tone, and the third held tone are special held notes that are different from the normal held tone.

<Stage>
The stage is also referred to as a production stage, mode, production mode, etc., and is a production mode indicated by a background image. There are four types of stages in this example: stage A, stage B, stage C, and stage D. Stage A, stage B, and stage C are stages in a non-time saving game state. In addition, a stage in a non-time saving game state may be provided in addition to this. Stage D is a stage in a time reduction game state. In addition, a stage for a time-saving game state may be provided in addition to this. In addition, special stages in this example include a battle stage where a battle performance (a type of super reach performance) is performed while stage A is displayed, and a super reach performance other than the battle performance (for example, the super reach performance by the giraffe with low expectations mentioned above). There is a SP reach stage where you can perform a reach effect, a super reach effect with a story that becomes a jackpot when a puzzle is completed, the above-mentioned full rotation effect, etc., a jackpot game stage during a jackpot game, etc. Note that stage A corresponds to the aforementioned production stage A (production stage A or stage A in the sixth embodiment), and stage B corresponds to the production stage B described above (production stage B or stage B in the sixth embodiment). However, stage D corresponds to the above-mentioned production stage C (production stage C or stage C in the sixth embodiment).

<Notice (notice display, performance)>
Preview (pre-announcement display, performance) is mainly used to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the change in question, but it can also be used to suggest that there is a hit within the hold (e.g. advance notice, pre-read performance, etc.) There is also.

<Trigger hold>
A trigger hold is a hold for which a pre-read lottery is executed for an already existing hold or a newly generated hold, and it is determined that if the lottery is won, a pre-read effect (for example, a hold change effect) will be executed. . There are two types of trigger hold: trigger hold that indicates a win (big hit, small hit) as a result of the lottery, and trigger hold that indicates a loss.

<Pending change performance>
The hold change effect is a hold change look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a trigger hold within the hold by the display mode of the variable icon or hold icon. The holding change performance is a performance that can suggest whether or not there is a winning trigger hold within the icon in the icon display area. The pending change performance may be simply referred to as a change performance, or may also be referred to as a fluctuating right display change performance or a fluctuating right change performance.

<Panel lamp (Panel light source)>
The board lamp is a lamp that lights up (lights up) along with the output of the hold sound when the number of holds increases based on the game ball entering the first main game starting port A10. The board lamp is composed of one LED, and although not shown, is provided inside the first main game starting port A10. Since the first main game starting port A10 of the board lamp is made of a substantially transparent member, the player can confirm the light emission and color of the light emitted from the board lamp. The board lamp may be provided at any position on the game board. The board lamp may be emitted when the number of reservations increases based on the game ball entering the second main game starting port B10. The board lamp is not limited to one LED, but may be composed of a plurality of LEDs. For example, it may be configured with five LEDs, with one LED corresponding to the variable icon and the other LEDs corresponding to the hold icon of the first hold display. The board lamp is not limited to LED. Although the board lamp is controlled by the sub-control board S, it may be controlled by the main control board M. The board lamp (board light source) may also be referred to as a first light emitting section.

Here, lighting refers to the LED emitting light (for example, emitting light for 10 ms or more). Turning off means that the LED is not emitting light (for example, it has not emitted light for more than 10ms), and blinking means that the LED is repeatedly emitting and not emitting light (turning off) at predetermined time intervals (for example, at 20ms intervals). is pointing to. In blinking, the time for light emission and non-light emission may be different (for example, the time for light emission may be 20 ms and the time for extinguishment may be 40 ms). Regarding "lighting up", "lighting up" in "blinking" may also be included (it may also include "lighting up" in repetition of "lighting up" and "lighting out"). For example, if it is stated that the board lamp and frame lamp are lit in the same color red during a certain period, if the board lamp continues to be lit during a certain period and the frame lamp continues to be lit during a certain period. It may be applied to the color to be lit, or the panel lamp may blink during a certain period (for example, 20ms on → 20ms off → 20ms on...), and the frame lamp may blink during a certain period (for example, 20ms on → 20ms It may also be applied to the color of lighting (the color of lighting for 20ms) in the case of turning off the light → lighting for 20ms...). Note that lighting and blinking may be collectively referred to as light emission.

<Frame lamp (frame light source)>
The frame lamp is the game effect lamp D26. The game effect lamp D26 is configured to perform lighting (light emission) corresponding to the performance displayed on the performance display device SG, lighting (light emission) corresponding to the type of error, lighting (light emission) when the power is restored, etc. There is. Although the frame lamp is controlled by the sub-control board S, it may also be controlled by the main control board M. The frame lamp (frame light source) may also be referred to as a second light emitting section.

<Special light emission>
The special light emission is the lighting mode (light emission mode) of the board lamp when the pending change effect is executed. The special light emission corresponding to the blue icon displayed in the hold occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including pre-trigger fluctuations, predetermined timings during trigger fluctuations, etc.) is called the first special flash A, and the blue board lamp emits light. The special light emission that corresponds to the green icon displayed in the hold occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including the predetermined timing during the pre-trigger fluctuation, the predetermined timing during the trigger fluctuation, etc.) is called the first special flash B, and the green light indicates the board lamp. emits light. The first special light emission A and the first special light emission B are collectively referred to as the first special light emission. The special light emission that corresponds to the red icon displayed in the hold occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including pre-trigger fluctuations, pre-determined timings during trigger fluctuations, etc.) is called the second special flash, and the board lamp is red. Emits light. The special light emission that corresponds to the rainbow icon displayed in the hold occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including pre-trigger fluctuations, predetermined timings during trigger fluctuations, etc.) is called the 3rd special flash, and the board lamp is displayed in a rainbow. Emits light. The first special light emission A, the first special light emission B, the second special light emission, and the third special light emission are collectively referred to as special light emission. Note that if the pending change is not executed, normal light emission is performed in which the board lamp emits white light. Note that when the first normal hold image is displayed, the normal light emission is in a lighting mode, and when the second normal hold image is displayed, the normal light emission may be in a blinking mode, and the second normal hold image is displayed in a blinking mode. The images may be displayed starting from the first normal pending image not only when the hold occurs (when the hold occurs and is displayed) but also at the time of shift display, at a predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, at a predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc. Similarly, when a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern is displayed, it is normally emitted, but it is a lighting pattern, and a white triangle/inverted triangle blinking pattern (or a white triangle/inverted triangle) is displayed. When a white icon with a larger size than the white icon that is the lighting mode is displayed, it also emits light normally, but it may also be in a blinking mode, and the blinking mode of a white triangle/inverted triangle (or a white triangle) is displayed. / A white icon that is larger in size than the white icon that is an inverted triangle lighting pattern) is used not only when a hold occurs (when a hold occurs is displayed), but also when a shift is displayed, at a predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, and during trigger fluctuation. A white icon, which is a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting pattern, may be displayed at a predetermined timing.

<Specific production>
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed on the performance display device SG when a new suspension occurs and the number of suspensions exceeds a predetermined number. Specifically, it is a button vibration effect in which the sub-input button SB vibrates when the number of pending items is three or more. When a new hold occurs and the number of holds becomes a predetermined number or more, the specific performance and hold sound based on the occurrence of the new hold can be executed substantially simultaneously. Further, when the number of pending items is three or more, the speaker D24 may output a notification sound of three or more pending items as a specific effect. In this case, the 3rd or higher notification sound that is output when the number of pending items is 3 and the 3rd or higher notification sound that is output when the number of items on hold is 4 are composed of the same sound, but even if they are made to be different. good. When a new hold occurs and the number of holds is greater than a predetermined number, a notification sound of 3 or higher is output instead of a hold sound (for example, a normal hold sound) that can be executed almost simultaneously with the button vibe performance as a specific performance. It may be configured to do so. The 3 or higher notification sound is a different sound from the normal holding sound, the first holding sound, the second holding sound, and the third holding sound. In addition, in the time reduction game state, the number of pending games on the second main game side is likely to be three or more, so it is preferable not to execute the specific performance even if the number of pending games on the second main game side becomes a predetermined number or more. It is. In the time reduction gaming state, since the main game is the second main game symbol, it is preferable not to execute the specific performance even if the number of reservations on the first main game side exceeds a predetermined number. In addition, in the non-time reduction gaming state, since the main game is the first main game symbol, it is preferable not to execute the specific performance even if the number of reservations on the second main game side becomes a predetermined number or more. .

<First selection operation>
The first selection operation is a function that allows the setting of the gaming machine to be changed to the first setting or the second setting by operating the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. Regarding the first selection operation, it is possible to set it to either the first setting or the second setting whether in the fluctuation standby state or during fluctuation, but it is configured so that it cannot be set during a jackpot game. There is. However, even if the change is on standby, it can be set in stages A, B, and C, but it cannot be set in stage D, and even while the change is in progress, it can be set in stages A, B, and C. However, the configuration is such that it cannot be set at stage D. Furthermore, even in stages A, B, and C, there are situations where a specific production is not executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is not executed, a situation where a decisive action is not executed) and a situation where a specific production is not executed. A situation in which a predetermined effect is being executed (for example, a situation in which a normal reach is being executed, a situation in which a fixed position action is being executed that is not a production mode of a chance prediction effect, a situation in which a predetermined effect is being executed in a situation where a predetermined effect is being performed) It can be set in situations where a fixed position action is being executed, a situation where a fluctuation start action is being executed, a situation where a tenpai action is being executed), but it can be set in a situation where a specific effect is being executed (e.g. , a situation where a super reach is being executed, a situation where a decisive action is being executed), the configuration is such that it cannot be set.

<First setting>
The first setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the specific effect is 0%. When the first setting is set by the first selection operation, the specific performance is not executed even if the number of pending items is three or more. Note that the first setting is not limited to the execution probability of the specific performance being 0%, and is a setting that may be used as long as the execution probability is lower than the second setting. In other words, the first setting is a setting in which the frequency of execution of the specific effect is lower than the second setting.

<Second setting>
The second setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the specific effect is 100%. When the second setting is set by the first selection operation, the specific effect is always executed when the number of pending items is three or more. Note that the second setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the specific effect is not limited to 100%, as long as the execution probability is higher than the first setting. In other words, the second setting is a setting where the frequency of execution of the specific effect is higher than the first setting.

<Second selection operation>
The second selection operation is a function that allows the setting of the gaming machine to be changed to the third setting or fourth setting by operating the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. The range of execution probabilities of the production (holding change production, special holding sound) executed in the third setting and fourth setting based on the second selection operation is It is configured so that the performance is within the range of the execution probability of the performance (button vibration performance, notification sound for hold 3 or more). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine with good performance balance. Regarding the second selection operation, it is possible to set it to either the third setting or the fourth setting whether in the fluctuation standby state or during fluctuation, but it is configured so that it cannot be set during a jackpot game. There is. However, even if the change is on standby, it can be set in stages A, B, and C, but it cannot be set in stage D, and even while the change is in progress, it can be set in stages A, B, and C. However, the configuration is such that it cannot be set at stage D. Furthermore, even in stages A, B, and C, there are situations where a specific production is not executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is not executed, a situation where a decisive action is not executed) and a situation where a specific production is not executed. A situation in which a predetermined effect is being executed (for example, a situation in which a normal reach is being executed, a situation in which a fixed position action is being executed that is not a production mode of a chance prediction production, a situation in which a predetermined production is being executed in a situation where a chance prediction production is performed) It can be set in situations where a fixed position action is being executed, a situation where a fluctuation start action is being executed, a situation where a tenpai action is being executed), but it can be set in a situation where a specific effect is being executed (e.g. , a situation where a super reach is being executed, a situation where a decisive action is being executed), the configuration is such that it cannot be set.

<Third setting>
The third setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the hold change effect and special hold sound is 5%. When the third setting is set by the second selection operation, the probability of winning the pre-read lottery is set to 5%. Specifically, since the winning probability of the holding change performance is set to 5%, the execution probability of the special holding sound is 5%. Note that the execution probability of prefetch effects other than special holding music may also be set to 5%. The third setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the special holding tone is not limited to 5%, but may be set as long as the execution probability is higher than the fourth setting. In other words, the third setting is a setting in which the frequency of execution of the hold change effect and the frequency of output of the special hold sound are higher than the fourth setting. Regarding this execution probability (5%), for example, assuming a winning probability of 1/200, the execution probability when a loss is pending (approximately 4.7%) and the execution probability when a winning is pending (approximately 60%). It is a total.

<4th setting>
The fourth setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the hold change effect and special hold sound is 1%. When the fourth setting is set by the second selection operation, the probability of winning the pre-read lottery is set to 1%. Specifically, since the winning probability of the holding change effect is set to 1%, the execution probability of the special holding sound is 1%. Note that the execution probability of prefetch effects other than special holding music may also be set to 1%. The fourth setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the special holding tone is not limited to 1%, but may be set as long as the execution probability is lower than the third setting. In other words, the fourth setting is a setting in which the frequency of execution of the hold change effect and the frequency of output of the special hold sound are lower than the third setting. Regarding this execution probability (1%), for example, assuming a winning probability of 1/200, the execution probability when the loss is pending (approximately 0.55%) and the execution probability when the winning is pending (approximately 90%). It is a total. When changing the execution probability (frequency) of the special holding tone based on the second selection operation, the probability (frequency) of the special holding tone (first holding tone) being output after the normal holding tone is output is higher than the fourth setting. Setting 3 is higher, but the probability (frequency) that another special holding tone (second holding tone) will be output after this special holding tone (first holding tone) is output is higher with the fourth setting than with the third setting. The setting is higher. In addition, when changing the execution probability (frequency) of special holding music based on the second selection operation, the probability (frequency) of changing from a white icon to a blue icon is higher with the third setting than with the fourth setting; The probability (frequency) of changing from a blue icon to a red icon is higher in the fourth setting than in the third setting. In other words, with the fourth setting, it is difficult to output the first stage special hold sound (difficult to change to the first stage special hold image) after outputting the normal hold sound (normal hold image), but the first stage special hold sound is difficult to output (difficult to change to the first stage special hold image). When it becomes a holding sound (special holding image), it is configured so that it is easy to output the special holding sound of the second stage or higher (easily changing to the special holding image of the second stage or higher). By configuring this way, even if the performance has a low expectation of winning, it is possible to create a gameplay where you can expect a further change in the expectation of winning if it occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

The pending change performance in stage A will be explained using FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is an image diagram regarding the pending change effect that can be executed at stage A.

(a) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, symbol fluctuations in the first main game symbol occur in a situation where there are three pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side. The first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row corresponding to are fixed and stopped as losing symbols. There are three holds on the first main game side, three white hold icons are displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and there are holds on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the number area (left area), 3 is displayed as a number image indicating 3 pending items. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a numerical image showing that there is no hold on the second hold display area SG13 in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side. 0 is displayed as . In addition, although the relevant fluctuation icon as a white icon is displayed in the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation, it may be deleted at the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped, or it may be deleted before the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped. It may be deleted at the timing of (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b) As the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the first variation of the first main game symbol starts. In addition, in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. In (b), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, the hold on the first main game side is now 2, and there is no hold on the second main game side. The design is changing.

(c1) Under the situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game pattern There are now three pending images on the gaming side, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. At the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a "do" which is the hold sound (normal hold sound) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. At the same time, the panel lamp is controlled to emit white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. The frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrence. Note that the display timing of the white icon, the output timing of the hold music, the light emission timing of the board lamp, and the light emission timing of the frame lamp may be the same (substantially the same) timing or may be different timings. In particular, the frame lamp may start emitting white light before the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (for example, the frame lamp may start emitting white light during the game standby state/variation standby state. (You may continue to emit white light even after the fluctuation starts), the board lamp also starts emitting white light before the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the production display device SG. (For example, the white light may be emitted during the game standby state/variation standby state, and the white light may continue to be emitted after the fluctuation starts.) In addition, the frame lamp is displayed when there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fluctuating, or when the first main game symbol is In a state where there is no hold on the game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol have stopped fluctuating (including the fluctuation standby state), the light emission is controlled in white. Although it is preferable that the light be emitted in other colors, it is also possible to emit light in other colors.

(d1) As the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol of the first fluctuation stops and the fluctuation start condition of the next first main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is expired and the first main game symbol The second symbol variation starts. In a situation where the number of pending symbols on the first main game side is 2 and the first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, the pending image of the second pending symbol is It is displayed from a white icon to a blue icon by a pending change effect. The sub-control board S controls the output of "Re", which is the first hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the blue icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the white icon to the blue icon, and also turns on the panel lamp. Special light emission is controlled in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit white light. The frame lamp is emitting white light before the blue icon is displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in other colors (for example, blue). It is sufficient if the light is emitted in another color at the timing of the hold change to .

(c2) Under the situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game pattern There are three pending images on the gaming side, and a blue icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. At the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24. In addition to controlling the output of "Re", the panel lamp is controlled to emit special light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. At the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display), the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon output from the speaker D24 is "RE". , At the timing of the change from the white icon displayed on the first hold to the blue icon explained in (d1), the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon output from the speaker D24 is ". "Re" has the same hold tone. To provide a user-friendly pachinko game machine by configuring in this way, since even if the player misses the performance on the performance display device SG, the player can know the execution of the pending change performance from the hold sound. Can be done. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, at the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). Preferably, the frame lamp emits white light before the timing when the blue icon based on the occurrence of reservation is displayed on the effect display device SG.

(d2) As the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol of the first fluctuation stops and the fluctuation start condition of the next first main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the first main game symbol The second symbol variation starts. In a situation where the number of pending symbols on the first main game side is 2 and the first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, the pending image of the second pending symbol is It is displayed from a blue icon to a green icon by a pending change effect. The sub-control board S controls the output of "Re", which is the first hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the green icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the green icon, and also turns on the panel lamp. Special light emission is controlled in green, which is the color corresponding to the green icon. In this way, by making the hold music (first hold music) corresponding to the blue icon and the hold music (first hold music) corresponding to the green icon common (same), it is possible to reduce the ROM capacity. At the same time, by making the special light emission corresponding to the blue icon and the special light emission corresponding to the green icon non-common (non-identical), the pachinko machine can attract the attention of players to the game machine (especially the game board). We can provide gaming machines. Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit white light. The frame lamp has been emitting white light since before the green icon was displayed on the production display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in other colors (for example, green, etc.). It is sufficient if the light is emitted in another color at the timing of the hold change to .

(c3) Under the situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern of the first variation are being displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game pattern is There are now three pending images on the gaming side, and a blue icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. At the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24. In addition to controlling the output of "Re", the panel lamp is controlled to emit special light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, at the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). Preferably, the frame lamp emits white light before the timing when the blue icon based on the occurrence of reservation is displayed on the effect display device SG.

(d3) As the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol of the first fluctuation stops and the fluctuation start condition of the next first main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the first main game symbol The second symbol variation starts. In a situation where the number of pending symbols on the first main game side is 2 and the first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, the pending image of the second pending symbol is It is displayed from a blue icon to a red icon by a pending change effect. The sub control board S controls the output of "mi", which is the second hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the red icon, and also turns on the panel lamp. Special light emission is controlled in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. In this way, by making the hold music with a high expectation of winning corresponding to the red icon a special hold music that is different from the hold music with a low expectation of winning (first hold music) corresponding to the blue icon or green icon, It is possible to arouse the expectation of winning in the player, and even if the player misses the performance on the performance display device SG, the special holding sound can be used to execute the pending change performance and increase the expectation of winning. Since it is possible to know that a high performance has been executed, a user-friendly pachinko game machine can be provided. Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit white light. The frame lamp has been emitting white light since before the red icon was displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in other colors (for example, red, etc.), in which case the red icon changes from the blue icon. It is sufficient if the light is emitted in another color at the timing of the hold change to .

Next, the pending change performance in stage B will be explained using FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is an image diagram regarding the pending change effect that can be executed in stage B. The difference from the hold change effect of stage A in FIG. 216 is that the display manner of the white icon of the first hold display of stage A is different from the display form of the white icon of the first hold display of stage B. Specifically, while the white icon of stage A has a circular shape, the white icon of stage B has a triangular shape, so that the white icons are displayed differently between stages. Further, although not shown, the outline of the white icon of stage C is an inverted triangle. Note that the display mode of the white icons differs between stages, but there is a normal holding tone corresponding to the white icon, a first holding tone corresponding to the blue icon and the green icon, a second holding tone corresponding to the red icon, The third holding tone corresponding to the rainbow icon is configured such that a common holding tone is output at stage A, stage B, and stage C. Therefore, even in a non-time-reduced gaming state with multiple stages, it is possible to share notifications (advance notices) of the expectation of winning to the players, so that the pachinko game allows the players to play the game with peace of mind. machine can be provided.

In addition, special reserved images such as blue icons, green icons, red icons, and rainbow icons are configured to have a common display mode in stages A, B, and C, so they are displayed less frequently. By using a special pending image with a high probability of winning as a common image for stages, it is possible to standardize notifications (notices) of the probability of winning to players even in a non-time-saving gaming state with multiple stages. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that allows players to play games with peace of mind.

Note that the display manners of the blue icon and green icon, which have a low probability of winning, may also be configured to be different between stage A, stage B, and stage C. Specifically, the outline of the stage A blue icon is a circle, the outline of the stage B blue icon is a triangle, the outline of the stage C blue icon is an inverted triangle, and the outline of the stage A green icon is round. On the other hand, the outline of the green icon of stage B is a triangle, and the outline of the green icon of stage C is an inverted triangle.

Next, specific performances and gaming machine settings (gaming machine customization) in the non-time saving gaming state will be explained using FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is an image diagram regarding specific effects and gaming machine settings that can be executed in a non-time saving gaming state. In addition, although an example of the specific performance and gaming machine settings in stage A of the non-time saving gaming state will be shown below, stage B or stage C may be used.

(a) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, symbol fluctuations in the first main game symbol occur in a situation where there are three pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side. The first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row corresponding to are fixed and stopped as losing symbols. Although the gaming machine setting screen is displayed based on a fixed stop with a losing symbol, the gaming machine setting screen may be displayed based on the operation of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. Further, the gaming machine setting screen may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the game is fixed and stopped due to a losing symbol. In addition, the gaming machine setting screen is configured to switch from a non-display state to a display state based on the operation of the cross button SB-2 in any of the game standby state/fluctuating standby state, during fluctuation, and fixed stop state, or The game machine setting screen is configured to switch from a non-display state to a display state based on the operation of the cross button SB-2 in either the game standby state/fluctuating standby state or the fluctuation state, but in the fixed stop state, the cross button It is more preferable to configure the game machine setting screen so that it does not switch from the non-display state to the display state even if SB-2 is operated. In addition, although the details will be described later, there is a situation in which the gaming machine setting screen is not displayed even if the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. exist. The situation will be described later, but in addition to the situations described below, there are also situations where the first selection operation or the second selection operation described above is impossible (a situation where a specific effect is being executed, for example, a super reach is being executed). The game machine setting screen will not be displayed if the game machine is in a situation where the game is running, or a decisive action is being executed. As a modified example, the gaming machine setting screen may be always displayed if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is possible, and even if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is not possible. It may be configured so that it is not displayed. In addition, as a first modification of the display of the game machine setting screen and the display of customization screens A to C, which will be described later, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed using the left and right buttons instead of the up and down buttons on the cross button SB-2 (operate either of the left and right buttons). ) and volume adjustment (when the volume adjustment screen is displayed, pressing the left button once will decrease the volume by 1 level, and pressing the right button once will decrease the volume by 1 level) Adjustment to increase the size), display the gaming machine setting screen using the up and down buttons on the cross button SB-2 (change from hidden state to displayed state by operating either of the up and down buttons), and display the customization screen A. (change from hidden state to displayed state by operating either the up or down button while the gaming machine setting screen is displayed), select customization screen B or customization screen C (change from the hidden state to the display state by operating the up or down button while displaying customization screen A) , then switch between the 1st and 2nd settings by pressing the up and down buttons on customization screen B, and switch between the 3rd and 4th settings by pressing the up and down buttons on customization screen C. (If the situation is such that the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible, the gaming machine setting screen will not be displayed even if the up and down buttons are operated). In addition, as a second modification of the display of the gaming machine setting screen and the display of customization screens A to C, which will be described later, if the gaming machine setting screen of the first modification described above is in a situation where the first selection operation or the second selection operation is possible. If the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible, it may be configured such that it is always displayed. Furthermore, the game setting screen and the customization screens A to C can be displayed simultaneously with the volume adjustment screen, and adjustments and settings can be made simultaneously while maintaining both displays (limited to situations where both screens can be displayed). Note that the display of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment can be performed even while the high expectation performance, the first predetermined performance, and the second predetermined performance, which will be described later, are being executed. In addition, there are situations where a specific effect is not being executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is not being executed, a situation where a decisive action is not being executed), or a situation where a specific effect is not being executed and a predetermined effect is being executed. Situation (for example, a situation in which a normal reach is being executed, a situation in which a fixed position action is being executed that is not a production mode of a chance prediction performance, a situation in which a fixed position action that is a production mode of a chance prediction production is being executed, fluctuations) Even in situations where a specific effect is being executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is being executed, a situation where a decisive action is being executed) Display of the volume adjustment screen and adjustment of the volume can be performed even in situations where the In addition, in situations where the first selection operation or the second selection operation is possible (situations where normal reach is being performed, situations where a fixed position action is being performed that is not the production mode of the chance look-ahead production, and situation where the production mode of the chance look-ahead production) (a situation where a certain fixed position action is being executed, a situation where a fluctuation start action is being executed, a situation where a tenpai action is being executed), and a situation where the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible (described later) The button performance is configured to be executable during the execution of the first predetermined performance, during the execution of the second predetermined performance, or in a situation where a specific performance such as super reach or decisive action is being performed. If the selection operation is possible, execution of button effects (displaying button images), execution of volume adjustment (displaying volume adjustment screen), and execution of first selection operation or second selection operation (game setting screen and customization) Displays on screens A to C) can be executed at the same time, but if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is not possible, it is possible to execute button effects (display of button images) and volume adjustment ( The display of the volume adjustment screen) can be executed at the same time, but the first selection operation or the second selection operation (display of the game setting screen and customization screens A to C) cannot be executed at the same time. . When executing the button effect (displaying the button image) and adjusting the volume (displaying the volume adjustment screen) at the same time, the volume will be adjusted even if the sub input button is operated and the image after the operation in the button effect is displayed. The display of the screen is maintained, and the display of the game setting screen and customization screens A to C is also maintained, and even if the operation for adjusting the volume is performed, the button presentation and the display of the game setting screen and customization screens A to C are also maintained, It is preferable that the display of the button effect and the volume adjustment screen be maintained even when the first selection operation or the second selection operation is performed. The volume adjustment screen will disappear after 3 seconds from the start of display if there is no new volume adjustment operation, but the volume will be hidden if a volume adjustment operation is performed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. The display time of the adjustment screen is reset to 3 seconds, but even if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is performed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the display time of the volume adjustment screen is not reset to 3 seconds ( Therefore, if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is executed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen may become hidden while the game setting screen and customization screens A to C are displayed. Also good. In addition, the game setting screen and customization screens A to C will be hidden after 3 seconds from the start of display unless there is a new first selection operation or second selection operation, while the game setting screen and customization screens A to C will be hidden. When the first selection operation or the second selection operation is executed during the game, the display time of the game setting screen and customization screens A to C is reset to 3 seconds, but the game setting screen and customization screens A to C Even if an operation to adjust the volume is performed while the game setting screen and customization screens A to C are displayed, the display time of 3 seconds will not be reset. When an operation for adjusting the volume is performed, the game setting screen and the customization screens A to C may be hidden while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed. Note that the button image or post-operation image in the button performance can be displayed in a superimposed manner with the volume adjustment screen, game setting screen, and customization screens A to C, while the volume adjustment screen, game setting screen, and customization screens A to C can be displayed in a superimposed manner. It is preferable not to do so. Furthermore, the button image, volume adjustment screen, game setting screen, and customization screens A to C in the button performance can be displayed in a superimposed manner with the first decorative pattern, but are not displayed in a superimposed manner with the second decorative pattern, and can be displayed after the button performance is performed. Preferably, the image can be displayed in a superimposed manner with the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. In addition, if the button effect is a repeated press effect, it is assumed that the sub input button is pressed and held multiple times (repeat press operation), but for volume adjustment, the left and right buttons are held pressed (long press of the left button). (or long press of the right button) is not treated as multiple operations and the volume is adjusted only one step, and the first selection operation or the second selection operation is also treated as a long press of the up or down button (long press of the upper button or It may also be configured such that even if the user presses the button for a long time, the screen and settings are switched only once instead of being treated as a multiple operation.

(b) Customization screen A is displayed while the losing symbols are being stopped. The customization screen A is displayed based on a predetermined operation of the sub input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. in a state where the gaming machine setting screen is displayed. The customization screen A is a screen on which the customization screen B or the customization screen C can be selected based on a predetermined operation A using the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, or the like. The customization screen B is a screen where the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on predetermined operations B such as the sub input button SB and the cross button SB-2. This is a screen (see c) on which the first setting or the second setting in which the execution probability of the specific effect is 100% can be selected. The customization screen C is a screen where the third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on a predetermined operation C of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc., and in detail, the execution probability of special holding music is 5%. This screen (see f) allows you to select the third setting or the fourth setting in which the execution probability of the special holding tone is 1%. In this customization screen A, the customization screen B (first and second setting screens) is selected based on the operation of the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc.

(c) If the customization screen B is selected while the losing symbol is being determined and stopped, the customization screen B is displayed. In this customization screen B, it is possible to select the first setting or the second setting based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc., and in (c), the first setting is selected. do. In the first selection operation during variation, when the first setting or the second setting is selected (with the selected variation), the setting is switched to the selected setting. The same applies to the first selection operation during the game standby state/variation standby state (switches to the selected setting at the time of selection).

(d) As the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the suspension is extinguished and the first variation of the first main game symbol starts. In (d), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there are two hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. The game symbols are changing.

(e) Under the situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, by a predetermined operation B1 of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. , customization screen B is displayed. In this customization screen B, it is possible to select the first setting or the second setting based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc., and in (e), the second setting is selected. do.

(f) In a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, by a predetermined operation C1 of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. , customization screen C is displayed. In this customization screen C, it is possible to select the third setting or the fourth setting based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc., and in (f), the fourth setting is selected. do. In the second selection operation during variation, when the third setting or the fourth setting is selected (with the selected variation), the setting is switched to the selected setting. The same applies to the second selection operation during the game standby state/variation standby state (switches to the selected setting at the time of selection). As a modified example, in the second selection operation during variation, the configuration may be such that the setting is not switched to the selected setting when the third setting or the fourth setting is selected, but is switched to the selected setting at the next variation of the selected variation. Even in such a configuration, in the second selection operation during the game standby state/variation standby state, the setting is switched at the time of selection (switched to the selected setting at the time of selection).

(g) In a situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern of the first variation are being displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game pattern There are now three pending images on the gaming side, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, in (g), the sub control board S displays the timing at which the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of displaying the pending occurrence). At the timing), the button vibe effect is executed, and the speaker D24 outputs "dododo" which is a warning sound of 3 or higher. Further, the sub control board S controls the panel lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the hold occurrence, and controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Although the frame lamp starts emitting light in white before the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG, it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the timing (g) is a ready state, control may be performed by emitting blue light, and if there is an error, control may be performed by emitting red light.

(h) A performance in which a high expectation character is displayed as a high expectation performance under a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner. Under the situation where is being executed, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes four, and a red icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, in (h), the sub control board S displays the timing at which the red icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of displaying the red icon based on the pending occurrence). At the timing), a button vibe effect is executed and a "dododo" sound which is a warning sound of 3 or higher is outputted from the speaker D24. It should be noted that a sound different from "dododo" as the warning sound for 3rd grade or above may be output, and "mimimi", which is a sound for 3rd grade or higher corresponding to the red icon. In addition, at the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a second hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24. It is controlled so that a certain "mi" is not output (output is limited). In this way, the player's interest in the game can be improved by executing the specific performance desired and selected by the player with priority over other performances. Note that the sub control board S controls the special holding tone to be outputted from the speaker D24 with priority given to the notification tone of 3 or higher than the special holding tone, but the special holding tone is output with priority over the notification tone of 3 or higher. It may be controlled as follows. Further, the sub control board S controls the panel lamp to emit light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, and controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the hold occurrence. Although the frame lamp starts emitting white light before the timing when the red icon based on the occurrence of reservation is displayed on the performance display device SG, it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the lamp effect corresponding to the high expectation level effect in (h) is a blue type lamp effect, the light emission will be controlled in blue, and if the lamp effect corresponding to the high expectation level effect is a red type lamp effect or an error occurs, then the light emission will be controlled in blue. Light emission may be controlled using red. Note that the high expectation level performance is not limited to the example in which the high expectation level character is displayed, and may be a preview performance such as a zone performance or a pseudo continuous performance, but it is a performance that is executed before reaching the reach. It is preferable that As a modified example, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs while a high expectation performance is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon will not be displayed as the newly generated hold image. Or, in a situation where a high expectation level performance is not being executed (for example, a situation where a low expectation level character is displayed or a situation where no preview performance such as a character is displayed), the first main game side is newly put on hold. The configuration may be configured such that the probability that a special pending image such as a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image is lower than that when a special pending image occurs (for example, the probability may be 0). However, in a situation where a high expectation level performance is being executed, a situation where a high expectation level performance is not being executed (for example, a situation where a low expectation level character is displayed, or a situation where no preview performance such as a character is displayed) The configuration may be such that the probability that the variable icon is displayed as a special pending image is higher than that of the current situation.

Further, as shown in (h), even during high expectation performance, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation. If the first setting is set based on the first selection operation before the new hold occurs, the button vibe effect and the notification sound of 3 or above based on the new hold occurrence in (h) are not executed, and the speaker D24 , the second holding tone (special holding tone) corresponding to the red icon, ``mi'', is output. On the other hand, if the second setting is set based on the second selection operation before a new hold occurs, as described above, in (h), the button vibe effect is executed and the warning sound for 3 or more is output.

Although not shown, the third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation even during the high expectation performance. If the first setting is set based on the first selection operation, and the third setting is set based on the second selection operation before a new hold occurs, and there is no trigger hold among the holds, In the look-ahead lottery based on the occurrence of a new hold in (h), a look-ahead lottery with a winning probability of 5% is performed, and if the look-ahead lottery is won, a hold change effect is executed and a special hold sound is output for the trigger hold. . In addition, if the second setting is set, a hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold, and a notification sound of 3 or higher is output without outputting the special hold sound (limiting the output). .

On the other hand, if the first setting is set based on the first selection operation, and the fourth setting is set based on the second selection operation before a new hold occurs, and there is no trigger hold among the holds. In the pre-read lottery based on the occurrence of a new hold in (h), perform a pre-read lottery with a 1% winning probability, and if the pre-read lottery is won, perform a hold change effect and play a special hold sound for the trigger hold. Output. When the second setting is set, a hold change performance is executed for the trigger hold, and a notification sound of 3 or higher is output without outputting the special hold sound (with the output limited). As mentioned above, in the second selection operation during fluctuation, the configuration is such that the setting is not switched to the selected setting when the third setting or the fourth setting is selected, but is switched to the selected setting at the next fluctuation after the selected fluctuation. If configured in this way, even if the 3rd setting switches to the 4th setting during the fluctuation, the lottery will have a 5% chance of winning instead of a 1% chance of winning. It is preferable to perform a pre-read lottery with a probability (it is preferable to perform a pre-read lottery with a probability of winning of 1% for a new reservation that has occurred from the next change).

In addition, regardless of the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the effect display device SG, if the third setting or the fourth setting is selected based on the second selection operation in a state where there is already a trigger hold in the hold, the pre-reading The system is configured to limit the lottery without executing it, and to release the restriction on the pre-read lottery on the condition that the trigger hold existing in the hold is extinguished. Therefore, if there is no trigger hold in the hold and the third or fourth setting is selected based on the second selection operation, new settings will be applied to the already existing hold and newly generated hold. The system is configured so that a look-ahead lottery can be executed with a given execution probability. For example, even if a look-ahead lottery is executed with setting 4 set in (f), and as a result, all reservations are not won in the look-ahead lottery, the setting 3 is set in (g). In this case, the configuration is such that the pre-read lottery can be executed with the execution probability of setting 3 even for the hold for which the pre-read lottery was executed in (f) and for the newly generated hold.

Next, execution of the specific performance during execution of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance will be described using FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is an image diagram regarding the specific performance during execution of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance. In the following description, a battle performance, which is a type of super reach performance, will be exemplified as the first predetermined performance, and a resurrection performance will be exemplified as the second predetermined performance, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, an example of the specific performance during execution of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance in stage A of the non-time saving game state will be shown below, but stage B or stage C may be used.

(a) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, there are two pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side, and the symbol variation of the first main game symbol The first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row corresponding to are fixed and stopped as losing symbols. There are two holds on the first main game side, two white hold icons are displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and there are two hold on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the area showing the number (left area), 2 is displayed as a number image showing two pending items. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a numerical image showing that there is no hold on the second hold display area SG13 in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side. 0 is displayed as . In addition, although the relevant fluctuation icon as a white icon is displayed in the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation, it may be deleted at the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped, or it may be deleted before the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped. It may be deleted at the timing of (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b) As the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the first variation of the first main game symbol starts. In addition, in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. In (b), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there is one hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. The game symbols are changing.

(c) Under a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a high expectation character is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variation. Under a situation where a high expectation level performance in which is displayed is being executed, a customization screen B is displayed by a predetermined operation B2 using the sub input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. In this customization screen B, it is possible to select the first setting or the second setting based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc., and in (c), the second setting is selected. do. In addition, during the high expectation performance, the third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation on the customization screen C, and the fourth setting is set in (c).

(d1) After the execution of the first variation high expectation performance is completed, a reach is established and the first predetermined performance is executed. As the first predetermined performance, a battle performance in a game state other than stage A (for example, a battle stage) after the high expectation performance is executed will be exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The sub control board S selects the second setting when a new hold on the first main game side occurs and the number of hold on the first main game side becomes three as shown in (d1) during the battle production. However, the sub-control board S controls the execution of the button vibe effect and the output of the notification sound for 3 or more times. In other words, the sub-control board S controls the specific performance to be limited without being executed during the battle performance, regardless of the gaming machine settings and the number of reservations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent player confusion caused by the specific performance set in stage A (stages B and C may also be used) being executed in other game states (battle stages, etc.). At the same time, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate performance according to the state of the game so that the main performance is not disturbed by the specific performance.

Further, the sub-control board S also prevents execution of the holding change performance and output of the special holding sound during the battle performance (restricts the execution). In other words, the sub control board S controls so that even if a newly generated hold is a hold that can become a trigger hold, the pre-read lottery on the first main game side is not executed and restricted during the battle performance. In addition, during the battle performance in (d1), a pending image is displayed to explain the number of pending events, but since the battle performance is mainly performed, the pending image (the relevant variable icon and the pending icon) It is preferable that the holding display area for effecting the change and the first holding display area SG12 not be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent confusion among players due to execution of effects related to suspension in a game state where a suspended image is not displayed (battle stage, etc.), and also to prevent player confusion due to execution of effects related to suspension in a game state where a suspended image is not displayed. It is possible to clearly provide a performance to a player. In addition, as a modified example, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the first predetermined effect is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon is not displayed as the newly generated hold image. Or, in a situation where the first predetermined effect has not been executed (for example, a situation where a low-expectation character is displayed before a reach is established, or a situation where no preview effect such as a character is displayed), the first predetermined effect is newly executed. It may be configured such that the probability that a special pending image such as a red icon will be displayed as the newly generated pending image is lower (for example, the probability may be 0) than when the main game side holds. During the battle performance (d1), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second hold display area SG13. Furthermore, during the battle performance (d1), the hold icon and the first hold display area SG12 may be hidden, and the variable icon and the hold display area for the effect of the change may be displayed. If configured, the change icon and the hold display area for the effect of the change may be configured to be hidden during a part of the battle effect (for example, a period in which an ally character is performing a victory effect). Often, the variable icon that is displayed in a situation where the first predetermined effect is being executed is different from a situation in which the first predetermined effect is not being executed (for example, a situation where the reach is not established and a low expectation character is displayed). It may be configured such that the probability of changing to a special pending image with a high expectation level is higher than that of the variable icon displayed in a situation where no preview effects such as or characters are displayed. Note that the first predetermined performance may be a performance during a jackpot game when the first symbol change becomes a jackpot, and the pending image is not displayed in the game state during the jackpot game (jackpot game stage). It is in a game state.

Further, during the first predetermined presentation, neither the customization screen B nor the customization screen C can be displayed. In other words, on the customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting cannot be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc., and on the customization screen C, the sub The third setting or the fourth setting cannot be selected based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc.

(d2) After the execution of the first variation high expectation level effect is completed, a second predetermined effect is executed. As the second predetermined performance, a revival performance after the high expectation performance is executed will be exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The revival performance temporarily stops the combination of decorative symbols that indicate a loss during the Super Reach performance, and changes again at Stage A, which transitions after the Super Reach performance ends, and then changes to the decorative symbol that indicates a win. It is a performance that stops temporarily and then stops definitively. The second predetermined performance is a performance performed at a different timing from the first predetermined performance, but may be performed at the same timing. Further, the second predetermined effect may be executed after the first predetermined effect is executed. During the second predetermined performance, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs as shown in (d2) and the number of hold on the first main game side becomes two, the newly generated hold image will be displayed in red. An icon will be displayed. At the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S causes the speaker D24 to output a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon. In addition to controlling the output of "Mi", it also controls the board lamp to emit red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. With this configuration, even if the player misses the performance on the performance display device SG, he or she can know the execution of the pending change performance from the hold sound, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly Pachinko gaming machine. can. In addition, as a modified example, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the second predetermined effect is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon is not displayed as the newly generated hold image. Or, in a situation where the second predetermined effect has not been executed (for example, a situation where a character with low expectations is displayed before a reach is established, or a situation where no preview effect such as a character is displayed), the first predetermined effect is newly executed. It may be configured such that the probability that a special pending image such as a red icon will be displayed as the newly generated pending image is lower (for example, the probability may be 0) than when the main game side holds. In addition, during the revival performance in (d2), a suspended image is displayed to explain the number of suspensions, but in order to perform the revival performance as the main performance, the suspended image (the relevant fluctuating icon and the suspended icon) It is preferable that the holding display area for effecting the change and the first holding display area SG12 not be displayed. Furthermore, during the revival performance (d2), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second hold display area SG13.

Further, the sub control board S controls the panel lamp to emit light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, and controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the hold occurrence. Although the frame lamp starts emitting light in white before the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG, it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect in (d2) is a blue lamp effect, blue light is emitted, and if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect is a red lamp effect or an error, red light is emitted. It may be controlled by light emission.

Further, during the second predetermined performance, the customization screen B and the customization screen C can be displayed. That is, on the customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc., and on the customization screen C, the sub The third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc.

(d3) After the execution of the first variation high expectation level effect is completed, a second predetermined effect is executed. As the second predetermined performance, a resurrection performance will be exemplified as in (d2), but the present invention is not limited to this. The second predetermined performance is a performance performed at a different timing from the first predetermined performance, but may be performed at the same timing. Further, the second predetermined effect may be executed after the first predetermined effect is executed. During the second predetermined effect, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs and the number of hold on the first main game side becomes three as shown in (d3), the newly generated hold image will be displayed in white. An icon will be displayed. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation in (c), the sub control board S displays a white icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG in (d3). At the timing (the timing of the hold occurrence display), a specific effect (execution of a button vibe effect, output of a warning sound "dododo" for 3 or more) is executed. Further, the sub control board S controls the board lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the hold occurrence, and controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Although the frame lamp starts emitting light in white before the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG, it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect in (d3) is a blue lamp effect, the light emission is controlled in blue, and if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect is a red lamp effect or an error occurs, the light emission is controlled by red. The light emission may also be controlled by. In this way, the player's interest in the game can be improved by executing the specific performance desired and selected by the player with priority over other performances. In addition, as a modified example, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the second predetermined effect is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon is not displayed as the newly generated hold image. Or, in a situation where the second predetermined effect has not been executed (for example, a situation where a character with low expectations is displayed before a reach is established, or a situation where no preview effect such as a character is displayed), the first predetermined effect is newly executed. It may be configured such that the probability that a special pending image such as a red icon will be displayed as the newly generated pending image is lower (for example, the probability may be 0) than when the main game side holds. In addition, during the revival performance in (d3), a suspended image is displayed to explain the number of suspensions, but in order to perform the revival performance as the main performance, the suspended image (the relevant fluctuating icon and the suspended icon) It is preferable that the holding display area for effecting the change and the first holding display area SG12 not be displayed. Furthermore, during the revival performance (d3), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second hold display area SG13.

Further, during the second predetermined effect (d3), the configuration is such that both the customization screen B and the customization screen C can be displayed. That is, on the customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc., and on the customization screen C, the sub The third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc.

The second predetermined performance may be a performance in the second variation when the first variation is a loss, and in that case, (d2) and (d3) are the high performance in the second variation. It can also be used as a display of expectations. In that case, control as shown in FIG. 218(h) and FIG. 219(c) is possible.

As shown in (d1) of FIG. 219, the configuration is such that neither the first selection operation nor the second selection operation can be executed during the first predetermined performance. On the other hand, as shown in (d2) and (d3) of FIG. 219, the configuration is such that both the first selection operation and the second selection operation can be executed during the second predetermined performance. By configuring in this way, players may be confused due to execution of performances related to suspension (special holding sound and notification sound for 3rd grade or above) in a game state in which no suspended image is displayed (state in which the first predetermined performance is in progress). In addition, by executing the effect related to the hold (special hold sound and notification sound for 3 or above) in the state of the game where the hold image is displayed (the state in which the second predetermined effect is being performed), the effect related to the hold is executed. It is possible to optimize the period of sound frequency adjustment.

Next, specific effects during execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect will be supplementarily explained using FIG. 219.

(a) to (c) In stage A in the non-time saving gaming state, the sub control board S controls the BGM for stage A to be output from the speaker D24.

(d1) The sub-control board S controls the speaker D24 to output BGM for the battle stage during the battle performance. The sub-control board S restricts execution of a specific performance regardless of the gaming machine settings and the number of reservations while the battle performance is in progress and the BGM for the battle stage is being output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent player confusion caused by the specific performance set in stage A (stages B and C may also be used) being executed in other game states (battle stages, etc.). At the same time, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate performance according to the state of the game so that the main performance is not disturbed by the specific performance.

The sub-control board S also limits the execution of the hold change effect and the output of the special hold sound while the battle effect is in progress and the BGM for the battle stage is being output. In other words, even if a newly generated hold is a hold that can become a trigger hold, the sub-control board S controls the pre-read lottery on the first main game side while the battle performance is in progress and the BGM for the battle stage is being output. Control to restrict (not execute). Furthermore, during the battle production (d1) and while the BGM for the battle stage is being output, the pending image (the relevant variation icon and the pending icon), the pending display area for the production of the variation, and the first pending display area SG12 are not displayed. It is preferable not to do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent confusion among players due to execution of effects related to suspension in a game state where a suspended image is not displayed (battle stage, etc.), and also to prevent player confusion due to execution of effects related to suspension in a game state where a suspended image is not displayed. It is possible to clearly provide a performance to a player. In addition, the first predetermined performance may be a performance during a jackpot game when the first symbol change becomes a jackpot, and in that case, the game state during the jackpot game (jackpot game stage) is a pending image. This is a game state in which the game is not displayed, and BGM for the jackpot game is output. As a modified example, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the BGM for the battle stage is being output, a special hold image such as a red icon may be used as the newly generated hold image. is not displayed, or the first predetermined effect has not been executed (for example, a situation where a character with low expectations is displayed before reaching is established, or a situation where no preview effects such as characters are displayed). Even if the configuration is such that the probability that a special pending image such as a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image is lower (for example, the probability may be 0) than when a pending occurs on the first main game side. good. In the situation where the BGM for the battle stage (d1) is being output, it is preferable to maintain the display in the second pending display area SG13. Furthermore, in a situation where the BGM for the battle stage (d1) is being output, the hold icon and the first hold display area SG12 are hidden, and the change icon and the hold display area for the effect of the change are displayed. If configured in this way, during a partial period of the situation in which BGM for the battle stage is being output (for example, a period in which an ally character is performing a victory effect), the corresponding The fluctuation icon and the holding display area for the production of the fluctuation may be configured to be hidden, and the fluctuation icon displayed in the situation where the BGM for the battle stage is being output is the BGM for the battle stage. Situations where the output is not being executed (for example, situations where the reach has not yet been established and a character with low expectations is displayed, or situations where no preview effects such as characters are displayed and the BGM for Stage A is output) ) may be configured such that the probability of changing to a special pending image with a high expectation level is higher than that of the variable icon displayed in the icon.

(d2) During the revival production and while the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival production) is being output, a new hold on the first main game side occurs as shown in (d2), and the first main game When there are two pending images on that side, a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. At the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S displays the red icon from the speaker D24 together with the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance). The corresponding second holding tone (special holding tone) "Mi" is output controlled. Further, the sub-control board S controls the panel lamp to emit light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. With this configuration, even if the player misses the performance on the performance display device SG, he or she can know the execution of the pending change performance from the hold sound, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly Pachinko gaming machine. In addition, by outputting a special holding tone corresponding to the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance), it is possible to create a performance that does not feel out of place with the stage being displayed. In addition, as a modified example, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the BGM for Stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is being output during the revival performance, the relevant A situation in which a special pending image such as a red icon is not displayed as a newly generated pending image, or the BGM for Stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is not output during the revival performance (for example, In a situation where a character with low expectations is displayed before the reach is established, or a situation where no preview effects such as characters are displayed and BGM for stage A is output), the first main game side is newly put on hold. The configuration may be configured such that the probability that a special pending image such as a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image is lower than that when a special pending image occurs (for example, the probability may be 0). In addition, in a situation where the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is being output during the revival performance in (d2), a suspended image is displayed to explain the number of suspensions. However, in order to execute the revival performance as the main performance, it is preferable that the pending images (the relevant fluctuation icon and the pending icon), the temporary hold display area for the change effect, and the first hold display area SG12 are not displayed. Furthermore, in a situation where the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is being output during the revival performance (d2), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second hold display area SG13. It is.

(d3) While the revival performance is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is being output, a new hold on the first main game side occurs as shown in (d3), and the first main game is When there are three pending images on the side, a white icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation in (c), the sub control board S displays a white icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG in (d3). At the timing (timing of pending occurrence display), output (continue output) BGM for stage A (or BGM dedicated to revival performance), and perform specific performance (execution of button vibe performance, ``dododo'' notification sound for 3 or higher). output). In this way, the player's interest in the game can be improved by executing the specific performance desired and selected by the player with priority over other performances. In addition, as a modified example, if a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the BGM for Stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is being output during the revival performance, the relevant A situation in which a special pending image such as a red icon is not displayed as a newly generated pending image, or the BGM for Stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is not output during the revival performance (for example, In a situation where a character with low expectations is displayed before the reach is established, or a situation where no preview effects such as characters are displayed and BGM for stage A is output), the first main game side is newly put on hold. The configuration may be configured such that the probability that a special pending image such as a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image is lower than that when a special pending image occurs (for example, the probability may be 0). In addition, in a situation where the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is being output during the revival performance in (d3), a suspended image is displayed to explain the number of suspensions. However, in order to execute the revival performance as the main performance, it is preferable that the pending images (the relevant fluctuation icon and the pending icon), the temporary hold display area for the change effect, and the first hold display area SG12 are not displayed. Furthermore, in a situation where the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the revival performance) is being output during the revival performance in (d3), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second hold display area SG13. It is.

The second predetermined performance may be a performance with the second symbol variation when the first symbol variation is a loss, in which case (d2) and (d3) are the BGM for stage A. It is preferable that the second variation of stage A is outputted.

Next, the pending change performance in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state will be explained using FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is an image diagram regarding the pending change effect that can be executed in the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state.

(a) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, the left column and center correspond to symbol fluctuations in the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is pending. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the right column are fixed and stopped as losing patterns. Since there is no hold on the first main game side, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and an area (left) indicating the number of holds on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13. 0 is displayed as a numerical image indicating that there is no reservation. Similarly, there is no hold on the second main game side, so no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and an area indicating the number of holds on the second main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the (right area), 0 is displayed as a number image indicating that there is no reservation.

(b) Due to a new hold on the second main game side and the second main game symbol variation start condition being satisfied, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol occurs as the first variation in the non-time reduction gaming state. starts. In the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state. In (b), the sub control board S displays the fluctuation icon of the white circle icon in the performance reservation display area of the fluctuation, triggered by the occurrence of the reservation on the second main game side. The circle white icon that is the variable icon corresponding to the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state is displayed differently from the square white icon that is the variable icon corresponding to the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state. The same holds true for the hold icon. In addition, the sub control board S transmits a hold corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the white icon based on the occurrence of the hold on the second main game side is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display timing). It controls the output of the sound "do" (usually a hold tone), and normally lights up the board lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. At this timing, the frame lamp emits white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not need to emit light based on the pending occurrence. In this way, in the non-time saving game state, even if an icon different from the icon in the time saving game state is displayed as the icon on the second main game side, the special holding tone and special light emission are not executed. are doing. Specifically, in the non-time saving game state, even if an icon with a circle display style that is different from an icon with a square display style is displayed as an icon on the second main game side, special holding music and special It is configured so that it does not emit light. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, even if a hold that can become a trigger hold occurs as a hold on the second main game side, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed. Here, a hold that can be a trigger hold is a hold that occurs when a pre-read lottery is actually held and the result is a failure, or a hold that does not take place but there is a possibility of winning if a pre-read lottery is carried out. . For example, in the latter case, if a hold on the second main game side occurs as a new hold in a non-time reduction gaming state, a pre-read lottery is not performed, but a hold on the second main game side as a new hold in a time reduction gaming state is not performed. If this occurs, a pre-read lottery may be executed and a winner may be awarded.

In addition, in the non-time reduction game state, if the icon on the first main game side is white, it means that there is a non-reach or higher (non-reach, normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, super by battle performance with high expectations). At least one of the jackpot guaranteed performances such as reach performance, full rotation performance, etc.) is executed, and if the icon is blue, it is normal reach or higher (normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, super reach performance by battle performance with high expectations). , at least one of the jackpot confirmed performances such as full rotation performance) is executed, and if the icon is green, it is a super reach performance with low expectations (super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations) or higher (super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations). If the icon is red, a super reach performance with a high expectation level (super reach performance with a highly anticipated battle performance, or a guaranteed jackpot performance such as a full rotation performance) is executed, and the icon is red. Reach performance) The above (at least one of the super reach performance with a highly anticipated battle performance, a jackpot confirmation performance such as a full rotation performance) is executed, and in the case of a rainbow icon, a jackpot confirmation performance such as a full rotation performance is executed. The gaming machine may be set as follows. In other words, the types of icons that can be displayed may be associated with the effects that are performed. In a gaming machine set in this way, even if the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state is a symbol variation that is greater than the normal reach, the icon on the second main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state (Holding icon or relevant fluctuation icon) does not display a blue icon, and even if the symbol fluctuation is higher than Super Reach with low expectations, the second main game side icon (Holding icon or relevant fluctuation icon) in the non-time reduction gaming state The icon on the second main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state (the pending icon or the relevant fluctuation icon) does not display the green icon, and even if the symbol fluctuation is higher than the highly expected super reach, the icon on the second main game side in the non-time reduction gaming state does not display a red icon, and even if the symbol variation is a guaranteed jackpot performance such as a full rotation performance, the icon on the second main game side in a non-time reduction gaming state (the pending icon or the relevant fluctuation icon) is a rainbow icon. It is preferable not to display the icon. Therefore, the icon on the second main game side in the non-time saving game state is configured so that no special holding tone or special light emission is performed.

(c) In a situation where the number of pending items on the first main game side is 0 and the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern are being displayed in a variable manner, the first main game is newly played. A hold on the side occurs, the number of hold on the first main game side becomes one, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a "do" which is the hold sound (normal hold sound) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. In addition to controlling the output, the panel lamp normally emits white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not need to emit light based on the pending occurrence.

(d) The symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol of the first fluctuation in the non-time reduction gaming state has stopped fluctuating, and the suspension is extinguished as the fluctuation start condition of the next first main game symbol is satisfied. , the second variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state starts. Under a situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern are being displayed in a variable manner, a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image on the first main game side. At the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S causes the speaker D24 to output a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon. In addition to controlling the output of "Mi", it also controls the board lamp to emit red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not need to emit light based on the pending occurrence. In addition, in a situation where the second main game symbol is changing in the non-time reduction gaming state or there is a hold on the second main game side (for example, the second main game symbol is changed immediately after the high base state ends and shifts to the low base state) If there is a new hold on the first main game side (such as a situation where there are multiple holds on the game side and the symbol variation of the second main game symbol related to the hold has started), the new hold on the first main game side will occur. Do not display the pending image related to the pending on the main game side as a special pending image (for example, the pending occurrence display/shift display of the pending icon related to the new pending on the first main game side, Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the relevant variable icon related to hold is executed, the hold icon/the relevant variable icon on the first main game side may not be displayed as a special hold image, and furthermore, the new Even if a hold on the first main game side occurs, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed (for example, the hold occurrence display/shift display of the hold icon related to the new hold on the first main game side, the new hold on the first main game side, Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the relevant variable icon related to the hold on the first main game side is executed, the special hold sound and special light emission related to the hold icon/the relevant variable icon on the first main game side are not executed. You may do so.

(e) In stage D in the time reduction gaming state, the left column and middle column correspond to symbol fluctuations of the second main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is pending. , the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the right row are fixed and stopped as losing patterns. The first decorative pattern of the second main game pattern in the time reduction game state is a pattern to which no character is added, unlike the first decorative pattern of the first main game pattern in the non-time reduction game state. Since there is no hold on the first main game side, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area (left) indicating the number of holds on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13 area), 0 is displayed as a numerical image indicating that there is no reservation. Similarly, there is no hold on the second main game side, so no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and an area indicating the number of holds on the second main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the (right area), 0 is displayed as a number image indicating that there is no reservation. Furthermore, in the time reduction game state, an image of a right-hand hitting instruction display is displayed, which is an indication that a right-hand hitting should be performed.

(f) Due to a new hold on the first main game side and the first main game symbol variation start condition being satisfied, the first main game symbol symbol variation is performed as the first variation in the time reduction gaming state. Start. In the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start changing display corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state. In (f), the sub-control board S displays the fluctuation icon, which is a square white icon, in the performance reservation display area of the fluctuation, triggered by the occurrence of reservation on the first main game side. The square white icon that is the variable icon corresponding to the first main game symbol in the time-saving gaming state is displayed differently from the round white icon that is the variable icon corresponding to the first main game symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. The same holds true for the hold icon. In addition, the sub control board S responds to the white icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when a square white icon based on the occurrence of a hold on the first main game side is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display timing). In addition to controlling the output of the held tone (usually held tone), the board lamp normally emits white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. At this timing, the frame lamp emits white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not need to emit light based on the pending occurrence. In this way, in the time-reduction game state, even if an icon different from the icon in the non-time-reduction game state is displayed as the icon on the first main game side, the special holding tone and special light emission are not executed. are doing. Specifically, in the time reduction game state, even if an icon with a square display style that is different from an icon with a circle display style is displayed as the icon on the first main game side, the special holding tone and special light emission are is configured not to run. In addition, in the time reduction game state, even if a hold that can become a trigger hold occurs as a hold on the first main game side, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed. Here, a hold that can be a trigger hold is a hold that occurs when a pre-read lottery is actually held and the result is a failure, or a hold that does not take place but there is a possibility of winning if a pre-read lottery is carried out. . For example, in the latter case, if a hold on the first main game side occurs as a new hold in the time reduction gaming state, a pre-read lottery is not performed, but in a non-time reduction gaming state, the hold on the first main game side as a new hold. If this occurs, a pre-read lottery may be executed and a winner may be awarded. Note that the normal holding tone in the time reduction gaming state may be a different sound from the normal holding tone in the non-time reduction gaming state, for example, it may be a "do" raised by a semitone.

In addition, in the time-reduced game state, if the icon on the second main game side is a white icon, non-reach or higher (non-reach, normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, super reach due to battle performance with high expectations) At least one of the jackpot confirmed performances such as production, full rotation production, etc.) is executed, and if the icon is blue, it is normal reach or higher (normal reach, super reach production by Kirin with low expectations, super reach production by battle production with high expectations, If at least one of the jackpot confirmed performances such as full rotation performance is executed, and the icon is green, it is a super reach performance with a low expectation level (super reach performance by a giraffe with a low expectation level) or higher (a super reach performance by a giraffe with a low expectation level). , a super reach performance with a highly anticipated battle performance, or a guaranteed jackpot performance such as a full rotation performance) is executed, and if the icon is red, a highly anticipated super reach performance (a super reach performance with a highly anticipated battle performance) is executed. Production) The above (at least one of the jackpot guaranteed productions such as a super reach production with a highly anticipated battle production and a full rotation production) will be executed, and in the case of a rainbow icon, a guaranteed jackpot production such as a full rotation production will be executed. You may set the gaming machine to . In other words, the types of icons that can be displayed may be associated with the effects that are performed. In a gaming machine set in this way, even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state is a symbol variation that is greater than the normal reach, the icon (on hold) on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state icon or the relevant fluctuation icon) does not display the blue icon, and even if the symbol fluctuation is higher than the super reach with low expectations, the icon on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state (the hold icon or the relevant fluctuation icon) does not display the blue icon. ) does not display a green icon, and even if the symbol variation is a super reach or higher with high expectations, the icon on the first main game side in the time reduction gaming state (the pending icon or the relevant variation icon) is a red icon. is not displayed, and even if the symbol variation is a guaranteed jackpot performance such as a full rotation performance, the icons on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state (the hold icon or the relevant fluctuation icon) will not display the rainbow icon. It is preferable to Therefore, the icon on the first main game side in the time reduction game state is configured so that no special holding tone or special light emission is performed.

(g) In a situation where the number of pending items on the first main game side is 0 and the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern are being displayed in a variable manner, a new second main game is played. A hold on the second main game side occurs, and the hold on the second main game side becomes one, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a "do" which is the hold sound (normal hold sound) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. In addition to controlling the output, the panel lamp normally emits white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not need to emit light based on the pending occurrence. In the time-saving gaming state, if an icon (square white icon) different from the icon in the non-time-saving gaming state is displayed as the icon on the first main game side, and then a new icon on the second main game side is displayed. If a hold occurs, the display mode of the square white icon on the first main game side is maintained. On the other hand, in the non-time reduction gaming state as shown in (d), if a changed icon (red icon) on the first main game side is displayed, and then a new hold on the second main game side is displayed. When this occurs, the changed icon (red icon) on the first main game side is configured to change to another icon (for example, a white icon with a circle). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent player confusion by returning the changed icon to its proper form in the non-time saving gaming state.

(h) As the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol of the first fluctuation in the time reduction gaming state stops fluctuating and the fluctuation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is extinguished, The symbol variation of the second main game symbol of the second variation in the time reduction gaming state starts. Under the situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game pattern are being displayed in a variable manner, a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. Although the red icon in the time-saving gaming state has a square outline, it may have the same outline (display mode) as the red icon in the non-time-saving gaming state. At the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S causes the speaker D24 to output a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon. In addition to controlling the output of "Mi", it also controls the board lamp to emit red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not need to emit light based on the pending occurrence. In addition, in a situation where the first main game symbol is changing in the time reduction game state or there is a hold on the first main game side (for example, the situation where the first main game symbol is on hold in the time reduction game state (for example, the first main game symbol is changed immediately after transitioning from the low base state to the high base state via the jackpot game) If a new hold occurs on the second main game side (such as a situation where there are multiple holds on the first main game side and symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbol related to the hold have started), then the new hold on the second main game side occurs. The pending image related to the pending on the second main game side is not displayed as a special pending image (for example, the pending occurrence display/shift display of the pending icon related to the new pending on the second main game side, Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the relevant variable icon related to the hold on the second main game side is executed, the hold icon/the relevant variable icon on the second main game side may not be displayed as a special hold image. Even if a new hold on the second main game side occurs, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed (for example, the hold occurrence display/shift display of the hold icon related to the new hold on the second main game side, the new Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the relevant variable icon related to the hold on the second main game side is executed, the special hold sound and special light emission related to the hold icon/the relevant variable icon on the second main game side are not executed) It may be configured as follows. In addition, on the contrary, a situation where the first main game symbol is changing in the time reduction gaming state or there is a hold on the first main game side (for example, from a low base state to a high base state via a jackpot game) Immediately after the transition, there are multiple holds on the first main game side and a new hold on the second main game side occurs (such as a situation where the first main game symbol related to the hold has started to change) Even if there is a hold image related to the new hold on the second main game side, the hold image related to the hold on the new second main game side is displayed as a special hold image (for example, hold occurrence display/shift display of the hold icon related to the new hold on the second main game side, When the hold occurrence display/shift display of the variable icon related to the new hold on the second main game side is executed, the hold icon/the variable icon on the second main game side may be displayed as a special hold image). Furthermore, even if a new hold on the second main game side occurs, a special hold sound and special light emission are executed (for example, when a hold icon related to the new hold on the second main game side is put on hold) Occurrence display/shift display, hold of the relevant variable icon related to the new hold on the second main game side When the occurrence display/shift display is executed, the hold icon on the second main game side/special hold related to the relevant variable icon It may be configured such that sound and special light emission can be performed.

As shown in FIG. 220(d), in stage A (stages B and C) in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game side holds the occurrence (hold occurs when displayed in a special icon display mode) or the icon It is possible to output a special hold tone in response to a change, but as shown in FIG. 220(f), in stage D in the time reduction game state, the hold occurrence on the first main game side (the hold occurrence indicated by the square white icon) is output. The configuration is such that a special hold tone is not output as a trigger. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform appropriate output control of the holding tone according to the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 220(d), in stage A (stages B and C) in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first main game side holds the occurrence (hold occurs when displayed in a special icon display mode) or the icon It is possible to execute a special light emission with the board lamp using the change as an opportunity, but as shown in FIG. ) is configured so that the board lamp does not emit special light. With this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate light emission control of the board lamps according to the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 220(h), in stage D in the time reduction game state, it is possible to output a special holding sound triggered by the occurrence of a hold on the second main game side or a change in the icon, but as shown in FIG. 220(b), In addition, in stage A (stages B and C) in the non-time saving gaming state, the special holding tone is not output when the second main game side holds (occurrence of holding with a white circle icon). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform appropriate output control of the holding tone according to the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 220(h), in stage D in the time reduction game state, it is possible to execute a special light emission with the board lamp triggered by the occurrence of a hold on the second main game side or a change of the icon, but in FIG. 220(b) As shown, in Stage A (Stage B, C) in the non-time saving game state, special light emission is not executed with the board lamp when the second main game side's hold occurs (the hold occurs with the white circle icon). It consists of With this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate hold tone output control according to the gaming state.

Next, the output timing of the hold music and the light emission timing of the board lamp will be explained using FIG. 221. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the holding tone and the light emission timing of the board lamp in the non-time reduction gaming state.

(a) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, the left column and center correspond to symbol fluctuations in the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is pending. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the right column are fixed and stopped as losing patterns. Since there is no hold on the first main game side, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area (left) indicating the number of holds on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13 area), 0 is displayed as a numerical image indicating that there is no reservation. Similarly, there is no hold on the second main game side, so no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and an area indicating the number of holds on the second main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the (right area), 0 is displayed as a number image indicating that there is no reservation. In this state, as shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S controls the speaker D24 to be turned off so as not to output the hold tone. Further, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S controls the board lamp to be turned off so as not to emit light. Further, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S has a period when the power is turned on (to be more precise, after the power is turned on, a period during which light emission in a prescribed manner is performed for initialization notification as an initialization operation). Since the frame lamp is controlled to emit white light (ON) from the variable standby state (after completion of the process) or from the variable standby state, the frame lamp is controlled to continue emitting white light.

(b) Due to a new hold on the first main game side and the first main game symbol variation start condition being satisfied, the first main game symbol variation is the first variation in the non-time saving gaming state. starts. In the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction gaming state. As shown in the timing chart, at the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs the hold sound (normal hold sound) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. The sound "Do" is output (ON) for the first hold tone output time, and then is controlled to be OFF. In addition, as shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S changes the board lamp to a color corresponding to the white icon at the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). Normal light emission (ON) control with white. Furthermore, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit white light ( ON), control is performed to continue emitting white light at the timing of the hold occurrence display. Note that the panel lamp also turns white when the power is turned on (more precisely, after the period in which light is emitted in the specified manner for initialization notification as an initialization operation after the power is turned on) or in the fluctuation standby state. The light emission (ON) may be controlled to continue emitting white light. That is, the panel lamp may also be controlled to emit white light (ON) from a timing before the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG, and may be controlled to continue emitting white light.

(c) At a predetermined timing C under a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, the variable icon changes from a white icon to a blue icon. Displayed by changing effects. As shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S outputs "Re", which is the first hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the blue icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the white icon to the blue icon. 2. Output (ON) for a holding tone output time and then turn OFF. Further, as shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S controls special light emission by changing the board lamp to blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon, at the timing of the pending change from the white icon to the blue icon. . At this time, control may be performed so that the normal white light emission (ON) is once turned OFF (for example, OFF for 0.5 seconds) and then the blue special light emission (ON) is performed. Alternatively, turn off the white normal light emission (ON), then turn on the purple light emission for 0.5 seconds, turn off the purple light emission (ON), and then control the blue light emission (ON) to turn on the special light emission. Also good. Furthermore, as shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S continues to control the frame lamp to emit white light even at the timing of the pending change from the white icon to the blue icon. At the timing of the hold change, the blue special light emission is not controlled, but the white light emission is controlled to continue.

(d) At a predetermined timing D in a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, the variation icon changes from a blue icon to a red icon. Displayed by changing effects. As shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S outputs "mi", which is the second hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the red icon. 3. Output (ON) over the hold tone output time and then control to turn OFF. In addition, as shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S controls special light emission by changing the board lamp to red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the red icon. . At this time, the blue special light emission (ON) may be temporarily turned OFF (for example, OFF for 0.5 seconds), and then the red special light emission (ON) may be controlled. Alternatively, turn off the blue special light emission (ON), turn on the purple light emission for 0.5 seconds, turn off the purple light emission (ON), and then control the blue special light emission (ON). Also good. Furthermore, as shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S continues to control the frame lamp to emit white light even at the timing of the pending change from the blue icon to the red icon. At the timing of the hold change, the red special light emission is not controlled, but the white light emission is controlled to continue. Note that the first held tone output time, the second held tone output time, and the third held tone output time may be the same time (for example, 2 seconds), or may be different times (for example, the first held tone output time). may be 1 second, the second held tone output time may be 2 seconds, and the third held tone output time may be 3 seconds). In addition, the first time is the time from when the white icon starts to be displayed as a variable icon until the blue icon starts to be displayed, and the first time is the time from when the blue icon starts to be displayed as a variable icon until the red icon starts to be displayed. The second time may be the same time, but is preferably a different time. For example, the time from when the white icon starts to be displayed as a variable icon until the blue icon starts to be displayed, and the time from when the blue icon starts to be displayed as a variable icon until the red icon starts to be displayed, must be 5. It is configured to be longer than seconds, and the fluctuation icon can be configured such that the white icon starts to be displayed, the blue icon starts to be displayed, and then the blue icon starts to be displayed, and then the red icon starts to be displayed as the fluctuation icon. When the fluctuation time related to display (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, excluding fluctuation times of less than 30 seconds) is relatively long (for example, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Compared to the case where the fluctuation time is relatively short (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, etc.), the period from when the white icon starts to be displayed until the blue icon starts to be displayed as the fluctuation icon is longer. The number of candidates for the time from when the blue icon starts to be displayed until when the red icon starts to be displayed as a time and fluctuation icon increases (for example, if the fluctuation time is relatively long, the first time is 10 seconds). , 20 seconds, and 30 seconds are candidates, and 25 seconds, 35 seconds, and 45 seconds are candidates for the second time, and if the fluctuation time is relatively long, 10 seconds is a candidate for the first time. 15 seconds is a candidate for the second time period), and furthermore, the time from when the white icon starts to be displayed as the fluctuating icon until the blue icon starts to be displayed and the blue icon is displayed as the fluctuating icon. The difference between the time from the start until the red icon starts displaying tends to be large (for example, if the fluctuation time is relatively long, the difference between the first time and the second time is the average 15 seconds, but if the variable time is relatively long, the difference between the first time and the second time may be 5 seconds on average). Although FIG. 221 describes the change in the hold status of the variable icon, the change in hold status of the hold icon may be configured in the same manner as the change in hold status of the variable icon. However, the hold icon changes only once in one fluctuation display (it changes only once at the shift display or the pre-trigger fluctuation predetermined timing), so for example, the pre-trigger fluctuation A (3 fluctuations before the trigger fluctuation) ) → Pre-trigger variation B (2 variations before trigger variation) → Pre-trigger variation C (1 variation before trigger variation) If the game progresses in the order, hold 4 → Pre-trigger variation A executed in 3 is held. A white icon is already displayed in 3 (it has been a white icon and white normal light emission has been executed before the shift display), and the shift display is triggered by the shift display in hold 2 in the pre-trigger variation B executed in hold 3 → 2. The blue icon is displayed from the white icon and a special light is emitted in blue, and the shift display is triggered by the pre-trigger variation C executed from hold 2 to 1, and the red icon is displayed from the blue icon on hold 1, and the special light is emitted in red. In this case, it is preferable that all of the pre-trigger fluctuations A to C be 4 seconds or longer. However, in any of the pre-trigger fluctuations A to C, the blue icon may be displayed after the white icon starts to be displayed as the fluctuation icon, and the red icon may be displayed after the blue icon starts to be displayed as the fluctuation icon. It is desirable to configure it so that it is relatively shorter (for example, either 5 seconds or 7 seconds) than the fluctuation time related to possible fluctuation display (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds). .

In addition, the configuration is such that the second holding tone (special holding tone) "Mi" is not output for at least a predetermined period (T2) after the first holding tone (special holding tone) "Re" is output. be done. On the other hand, the panel lamp is configured to be able to emit light in the red mode B within a predetermined period (T2) from the state in which the panel lamp is emitting light in the blue mode. For details, as shown in FIG. 221, during the predetermined period T2, starting from the timing T1 before the output of the first holding tone (special holding tone) "Re" is turned off, 2. The system is configured so that "Mi", which is a special hold tone, is not output. On the other hand, during a predetermined period T2 from the timing when the board lamp changes from emitting light in blue mode to red mode, the board lamp is in red mode B for a predetermined period T2. Constructed to be able to emit light. Preferably, the predetermined period T2 is longer than T1 and shorter than the second hold tone output time.

As shown in FIG. 221(b), when the icon (for example, the variable icon) is displayed as a white icon, both the board lamp and the frame lamp are configured to emit white light. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 221(c) and (d), when an icon (for example, the relevant variable icon) is displayed as a blue, green, red, or rainbow icon, only the board lamp corresponds to the icon. It emits special light in blue, green, red, and rainbow modes, and the frame lamp is configured to emit white light. Note that the frame lamp is configured to be able to emit light even during symbol fluctuation in a fluctuation standby state or in a state where there is no hold as shown in FIG. 221(b). Even if the board lamp and frame lamp emit light in a manner that does not correspond to their color, the expectation of winning can be increased by checking the board lamp located in a position that is easier for the player to see than the frame lamp. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can be confirmed.

As shown in (c) to (d) of Fig. 221, the special holding tone (the first holding tone "re" and the second holding tone "mi") and the special light emission (the first special light emission blue) While the light emission and the second special light emission (red light emission) are executed almost simultaneously, the special hold tone is configured to end first. In addition, the special holding tone and special light emission are executed multiple times in response to the first holding information, and while the previous special holding tone (the first holding tone "Re") is being executed, the later special holding tone (the second holding tone) is executed. The hold tone "Mi") is not executed, but the later special flash (second special flash, red flash) is executed while the previous special flash (first special flash, blue flash) is being executed. It is structured in such a way that it is possible that In this way, by providing a period in which no special on-hold music is output between the first special on-hold music and the next special on-hold music, the sounds do not mix together and become a clear sound, making it possible to create different types of icons. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can surely convey to a player whether the icon has changed to a type of icon). Note that the normal light emission (white light emission) in the board lamp is referred to as the first mode of light emission, and the special light emission (other than white light emission, blue, green, red, and rainbow-colored light emission) in the board lamp is referred to as the second mode of light emission. It may also be called light emission. Note that blue light emission and green light emission are based on the second mode A (blue light emission is the second mode A1, green light emission is the second mode A2), red light emission is the second mode B, and rainbow light emission is the second mode A2. This may also be referred to as aspect C. Moreover, the white light emission in the frame lamp may be referred to as the third mode of light emission or the normal light emission in the frame lamp. Furthermore, the frame lamp does not emit white light; for example, during the fox background effect, which will be described later, it may emit yellow light instead of white light, or during a battle effect, it may emit orange light instead of white light, or during a decisive action, it may emit rainbow-colored light. In the case of light emission, these light emission modes may be referred to as the fourth mode of light emission or special light emission in the frame lamp. Note that the second aspect has a role of suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher (than the first aspect), and the fourth aspect also has a role of suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher (than the third aspect). In other words, the second mode is a light emission mode at the time of performance where the expectation of a jackpot is higher (than the first mode), and the fourth mode is also a light emission mode when the expectation of a jackpot is higher (than the third mode).

Next, the pending change performance during special performance, special performance, and super reach (SP reach) performance will be explained using FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is an image diagram regarding pending change performances that can be executed during special performances, special performances, and super reach performances in a non-time reduction gaming state.

(e) In a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, the variable icon is displayed as a red icon. Note that (e) is a diagram at the next timing of (d) in FIG. 221. The sub-control board S controls the panel lamp to emit special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a white manner.

(f) Under a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, and the variation icon is displayed as a red icon. A special effect is executed at timing F, which is before a predetermined timing in . Although a blackout effect is exemplified as a special effect, a stage change effect or the like may also be used. The sub control board S hides (restricts) the display of the red icon displayed in the performance hold display area of the fluctuation during the period when the special performance is being executed. Specifically, since the special effect image is configured to have a higher display priority than the red icon image, the red icon image is no longer displayed. In addition, the second hold display, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the icon display area, the stage background, etc. are hidden by special effects. Furthermore, even if the red icon is not displayed on the performance display section, the board lamp will emit special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, and the frame lamp will emit light in white. .

(g) Under a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, and the said variation icon is displayed as a red icon. A special performance is executed at timing G before a predetermined timing in . As a special production, we will exemplify a fox background production that displays the background of a fox character. It may be the case that an alien is displayed as the jackpot-confirmed character, or that the pseudo-continuous performance is executed four times exceeding the predetermined number of times of three. The sub-control board S continues to display the red icon of the variation icon that was displayed in the performance hold display area of the variation during the period when the special performance is being executed. Further, the sub-control board S restricts the light emission of the board lamp that has been emitting special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, and temporarily suspends the special light emission during the period when the special effect is being executed. Specifically, the sub-control board S controls the board lamp to emit light in a color (for example, yellow) corresponding to the special effect, but may also execute a light-off control to turn off the light emission of the board lamp. On the other hand, the frame lamp is controlled to emit light in white mode or in a color (for example, yellow) that corresponds to the special effect (if the premium effect, which is an alien who is a confirmed jackpot character, is displayed, it is controlled to emit light in a rainbow color, and a pseudo If the continuous display exceeds the predetermined number of three times and is executed four times, the light is emitted in rainbow colors). In FIG. 222, the special effect is executed after the special effect is executed, but the special effect may be executed without executing the special effect, or the special effect may be executed before the special effect is executed. good. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the special effect is executed but not executed. In either case, it is sufficient that the special performance and special performance are configured so that they are not executed at the same time (execution timings do not overlap). By preventing them from being executed simultaneously in this way, it is possible to execute at least one of the special effects or the special effects before a predetermined timing. By configuring the special performance and special performance in this way, even in the situation where each performance (special performance or special performance) is executed, the expectation of winning can be indicated by either the display of the icon or the illumination of the board lamp. Since the performance is guaranteed, the player can always grasp the current expectation of winning.

The special performance may be configured such that its execution probability can be changed to a fifth setting (execution probability 3%) or a sixth setting (execution probability 1%) based on a third selection operation in the gaming machine settings. Specifically, new items such as "5th and 6th settings" are added to the customization screen A that is displayed after displaying the above-mentioned gaming machine settings screen (including modified examples), and the new items are selected. Accordingly, the customization screen D is configured so that the items of "fifth setting" and "sixth setting" are displayed. For example, if the gaming machine setting screen is in a situation where the first selection operation, the second selection operation, or the third selection operation is possible, it may be always displayed, and the first selection operation, the second selection operation, or the third selection operation can be performed. If the situation is impossible, the configuration may be such that it is not displayed. Note that you can use the left and right buttons instead of the up and down buttons on the cross button SB-2 to display the volume adjustment screen (change from hidden to displayed by operating either left or right button) and adjust the volume (the volume adjustment screen is displayed) When the left button is pressed once, the volume decreases by one level, and when the right button is pressed once, the volume increases by one level. display (change from hidden state to displayed state by operating either the up or down button) and display of customization screen A (change from hidden state by operating either of the up or down buttons while the gaming machine setting screen is displayed) display state), select customization screen B, customization screen C, or customization screen D (select one by operating the up and down buttons while customization screen A is displayed, and then select the first setting by operating the up and down buttons on customization screen B. Switch to the second setting / Switch to the third or fourth setting by operating the up and down buttons on the customization screen C / Switch to the fifth or sixth setting by operating the up or down buttons on the customization screen D) (If the situation is such that the first selection operation, the second selection operation, or the third selection operation is impossible, the gaming machine setting screen will not be displayed even if the up and down buttons are operated). Alternatively, if the gaming machine setting screen is in a situation where the first selection operation, second selection operation, or third selection operation is possible, it will always be displayed, and if the situation is such that the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible, it will be displayed. It may be configured so that it does not occur. Furthermore, the game setting screen and customization screens A to D can be displayed simultaneously with the volume adjustment screen, and adjustments and settings can be made simultaneously while maintaining both displays (limited to situations where both screens can be displayed). Note that the display of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment can be performed even while the high expectation performance, the first predetermined performance, and the second predetermined performance, which will be described later, are being executed. In addition, there are situations where a specific effect is not being executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is not being executed, a situation where a decisive action is not being executed), or a situation where a specific effect is not being executed and a predetermined effect is being executed. Situation (for example, a situation in which a normal reach is being executed, a situation in which a fixed position action is being executed that is not a production mode of a chance prediction performance, a situation in which a fixed position action that is a production mode of a chance prediction production is being executed, fluctuations) Even in situations where a specific effect is being executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is being executed, a situation where a decisive action is being executed) Display of the volume adjustment screen and adjustment of the volume can be performed even in situations where the In addition, in the third selection operation during fluctuation, it may be configured such that the setting is not switched to the selected setting at the time when the fifth setting or the sixth setting is selected, but is switched to the selected setting at the next fluctuation of the selected fluctuation, In such a configuration, even if the setting is switched from the fifth setting to the sixth setting during the fluctuation, it is preferable that the effect lottery in the sixth setting is applied from the next fluctuation. Regarding the execution probability of the fifth setting (3%), for example, assuming a winning probability of 1/200, the execution probability when a loss is pending (approximately 2.75%) and the execution probability when a winning is pending (approximately 50%). ), and for the sixth setting execution probability (1%), for example, assuming a winning probability of 1/200, the execution probability when the loss is pending (approximately 0.55%) and the execution probability when the winning is pending This is the sum of the probability (approximately 90%). In this way, it is possible to adjust the execution probability of the special effect and increase the share of the special effect in the variation of winning symbols, allowing the gaming machine to be customized to match the player's preferences and increasing the interest of the game. can be improved. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the special effects so that the probability of execution cannot be adjusted.

(h) Under a situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern of the first variation are being displayed in a variable manner, and after the execution of the special performance or the special performance, the relevant The fluctuation icon is displayed as a red icon. After the execution of the special performance or the special performance, the sub control board S continues to display the red variation icon in the performance hold display area of the variation. In addition, after the execution of the special performance or the special performance, the sub-control board S causes the board lamp whose special light emission has been temporarily suspended to emit special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, and changes the frame lamp to white. emit light in a specific manner.

(i) Timing under a situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are being displayed in a variable manner, and the special performance or the special performance has been executed. In I, a reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect) is executed. The sub control board S displays the fluctuation icon as a red icon in the performance holding display area of the fluctuation during the period when the ready-to-win performance is being executed. Further, the sub control board S causes the board lamp to emit special light in a red manner, which is a color corresponding to the red icon, and causes the frame lamp to emit light in a white manner during a period in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed.

(j) At a predetermined timing under a situation where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern of the first variation are being displayed in a variable manner and the reach effect is being executed, The normal reach performance develops into the super reach performance and the reach performance is executed. Here, the predetermined timing is the timing at which the normal reach performance develops into the super reach performance. The sub-control board S limits the display of the red icon displayed in the performance hold display area of the fluctuation during the execution period of the super reach performance after a predetermined timing. Specifically, the image of the red icon is hidden (erased) at a predetermined timing. Moreover, at a predetermined timing, if a pending icon exists, the pending icon is also hidden (erased), and the display area for effect of the variation and the first pending display area SG12 are also hidden (erased). Further, at a predetermined timing, the background image indicating stage A is also hidden (erased), and the background image of the super reach effect is displayed (in the figure, the stage is changed to the SP reach stage). During a period during which a super reach performance is being executed after a predetermined timing, the light emission of a board lamp that has been emitting special light in a red manner, which is a color corresponding to a red icon, is restricted and the special light emission is interrupted. In addition, (g) shows an example in which the special light emission is temporarily interrupted, but regarding the special light emission, if the special effect is not executed, the predetermined symbol variation (super reach variation shown in this first variation) It can be executed continuously until the timing. The sub-control board S turns off the light emission of the board lamp and controls it to go out, but it may also control the board lamp to emit light in a color (for example, red) that corresponds to the expected degree of winning in the super reach performance. When the board lamp emits red light as a color corresponding to the expectation of winning in the super reach performance, it is preferable to use a light emission mode different from the second special light emission (special light emission). Specifically, the second special light is emitted in a red lighting manner, but it is preferable to emit light in a red flashing manner corresponding to the expected degree of winning in the super reach performance. On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white manner or in a color (for example, red) corresponding to the expectation of winning in the super reach effect.

(k) The first decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game pattern of the first variation has temporarily stopped in a losing state, and the second decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the timing is when the super reach performance has ended. At a specific timing, the stage is changed to stage A and displayed. The sub-control board S displays the red icon of the variation in the performance hold display area of the variation during the period from after the specific timing to the timing of finalization and stop of the first variation in (l). In addition, the sub-control board S limits the special light emission of the board lamp in the red mode, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, during the period from after the specific timing until the timing of the first fluctuation confirmed stop in (l), Continues the interruption of special light emission. Specifically, the sub-control board S controls the light emission of the board lamp to be OFF, but causes the board lamp to emit light with normal light emission (white light emission). As a modification, the board lamp may emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period (for example, yellow, which is a different color from the special light emission). Note that no special light emission is performed during the period from (j) to (l). On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white manner or in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period.

Here, in (k), although not shown, a case where a rainbow icon is displayed will be described. In this case, the rainbow icon is not only displayed at timing (k), but also may be displayed before (i). At a specific timing that is the timing at which the super reach performance ends, the stage is changed to stage A, and a win of 777 is displayed using the first decorative symbol. The sub-control board S displays the rainbow icon of the variation icon in the performance hold display area of the variation during the period from the specific timing until the timing of the finalization and stop of the first variation in (l). During the period from after the specific timing to the fixed stop timing of the first variation in (l), the panel lamp is caused to emit special light in a rainbow mode having a color corresponding to the rainbow icon. Further, the frame lamp also emits light in a rainbow pattern with colors corresponding to the state of the game during this period. If you win in this way, you can make the board lamp emit light in a rainbow pattern even after a certain timing, and you can confirm that you have won by playing the game using all lamps including the board lamp and frame lamp. Since the game can be visually recognized by the player, it can give the player a feeling of elation.

(l) At the timing when the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the fluctuation icon of the red icon in the performance reservation display area of the fluctuation is will be deleted. The sub-control board S continues to turn off the light emission of the board lamp, and continues to emit light from the board lamp in normal light emission (white light emission). As a modification, the board lamp may emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period (for example, yellow, which is a different color from the special light emission). On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white manner or in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period.

Next, the pending change effect during the initialization operation based on power-on will be explained using FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG. 223 is an image diagram regarding a pending change effect that can be executed during an initialization operation based on power-on. FIG. 224 is an image diagram regarding the initialization operation during symbol variation and the pending change effect after the initialization operation.

The initialization operation includes processing for clearing the RAM of the main control board M (step S1004 in FIG. 5) based on the operation of the RAM clear button (step S1002 in FIG. 5) after powering on the pachinko gaming machine, and sub-main control. Initial processing of the part SM (for example, when receiving the RAM clear information shown in Figs. 18 to 26 → initializes the RAM on the sub side, when receiving various information commands → transfers performance-related information at the time of power outage to the RAM on the sub side) These are the operations of the effect display device SG, speaker D24, lamps (including board lamps and frame lamps), and movable accessories YK, which are executed when resetting (resetting). Note that the initialization operation may be an operation when the power is turned on that does not involve clearing the RAM.

The initialization operation of the effect display device SG is an operation of displaying the initialization screen shown in (a1), and continues until the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed. The conversion screen will be displayed. When the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the stage A screen shown in (b1) is displayed (the stage A screen is displayed regardless of the stage before the power was cut off). Note that when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the screen of the stage before the power was turned off is displayed. As a modified example, if the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, if the stage before the power was cut off is stages A to C, the screen of stage A is displayed, and if the stage is stage D, the screen of stage D is displayed. It may be configured to display the information.

The initialization operation of the speaker D24 is an operation that outputs an initialization sound (for example, a sound such as "initializing" or "power on"), and continues until the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is completed. The initialization sound will be output. When the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is completed, it becomes possible to output sounds corresponding to the game, and as shown in (c1), special holding sounds, effect sounds during symbol variations, etc. can be output. This initialization sound may also be referred to as a specified sound.

The lamp initialization operation is an operation that emits light in an initialization lamp pattern (for example, a lamp pattern that emits light in the order of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow), and continues until the lamp initialization operation is completed. It emits light in the initialization lamp pattern. When the lamp initialization operation is completed, the lamps can emit light in a manner corresponding to the game, and as shown in (d1), the board lamp can emit white light and the frame lamp etc. can emit white light. Light emission using this initialization lamp pattern may also be referred to as regular light emission.

The initialization operation of the movable accessory YK is an operation from the first position, which is the upper position shown in (a1), to the second position, which is the lower position shown in (b1), for a predetermined second, and then returns to the first position. Yes, the movable accessory continues to repeat this operation until the initialization operation is completed. When the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK is completed, the operation of the movable accessory YK corresponding to the game becomes executable.

(a1) of FIG. 223 shows a non-time saving game state in which the first main game side is newly put on hold under a situation where all the initialization operations based on power-on are being executed. Note that the RAM clearing process of the main control board M has been completed, and the sub control board S has not completed various initialization operations, but is ready to receive commands from the main control board M. The newly generated hold is a hold that may be displayed with a white icon. The sub control board S should display a white icon in the effect holding display area of the variation at the timing of the hold occurrence, but since the effect display device SG is being initialized, the display of the change icon is not possible. and continue displaying the initialization screen. In addition, the sub control board S should output “do”, which is the hold tone (normal hold tone) corresponding to the white icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold occurrence, but the sub control board S does not perform the initialization operation of the speaker D24. Therefore, the output of the hold music is limited and the initialization sound is continuously output. Furthermore, at the timing of the hold occurrence, the sub-control board S restricts the board lamp from emitting light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, and also limits the frame lamp from emitting light in the color corresponding to the effect of the symbol change. and emit light using the initialized lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK executes the initialization operation at the timing of the reservation occurrence.

(b1) Indicates a state in which the initialization operation of the production display device SG is completed in a situation where the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed based on power-on. . The sub control board S displays the fluctuation icon as a white icon in the performance holding display area of the fluctuation at the timing when the initialization operation of the performance display device SG is completed. Furthermore, the sub-control board S should output a sound effect corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, but the sub-control board S is performing the initialization operation of the speaker D24. Therefore, the output of the sound effect corresponding to the representation of the symbol variation is limited, and the initialization sound is continuously output. Furthermore, at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the sub-control board S continues to restrict the light emission in the color corresponding to the white icon of the panel lamp, and also controls the effect of the corresponding symbol change of the frame lamp. The lamp continues to emit light in the color corresponding to the specified color, and emits light in the initialized lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues to perform the initialization operation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed.

(c1) Indicates a state in which the initialization operation of the production display device SG is completed in a situation where the initialization operation of the lamp based on power-on, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed. . In this state, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes one, and a red icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. At the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the production display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24. Limits the output of "Mi" and continues outputting the initialization sound. In addition, at the timing of the hold occurrence display, the sub-control board S continuously restricts the special light emission in the color corresponding to the red icon on the board lamp, and also controls the special light emission in the color corresponding to the effect of the symbol change on the frame lamp. Continues to limit light emission and emits light in the initialized lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues to perform the initialization operation at the timing of the pending occurrence display.

In addition, in the state where the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is completed in (c1), the sub control board S displays the red icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG (the timing of displaying the pending occurrence). , the speaker D24 is controlled to output "Mi" which is the second holding tone (special holding tone) corresponding to the red icon.

(d1) Under the circumstances after all initialization operations based on power-on are completed, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, and the new hold occurs. A white icon is displayed as a pending image. At the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a "do" which is the hold sound (normal hold sound) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. At the same time, the panel lamp emits white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. In addition, since there is a red icon before the white icon based on the pending occurrence, at the timing of displaying the pending occurrence, the board lamp will emit red, which corresponds to the red icon in front, instead of white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. It's okay. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also control the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. In addition, when a red icon is displayed as a newly generated hold image (when there is no trigger hold in front), at the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of hold occurrence display) , the speaker D24 outputs "mi", which is a special holding tone corresponding to the red icon, and causes the panel lamp to emit special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon.

(a2) Indicates a non-time reduction gaming state in which a hold on the first main game side has newly occurred under a situation where all initialization operations based on power-on are being executed. Note that the RAM clearing process of the main control board M has been completed, and the sub control board S has not completed various initialization operations, but is ready to receive commands from the main control board M. The newly generated hold is a hold that may be displayed with a blue icon. The sub-control board S should display a blue icon in the effect holding display area of the variation at the timing of the hold occurrence, but since the effect display device SG is initializing, the change icon cannot be displayed. to continue displaying the initialization screen. In addition, the sub control board S should output “Re”, which is the first hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the blue icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold occurrence, but the sub control board S should not initialize the speaker D24. Since the unit is in operation, the output of special hold music is restricted and the initialization sound continues to be output. Furthermore, the sub-control board S limits the special light emission in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon on the board lamp, at the timing of the hold occurrence, and also controls the light emission in the color corresponding to the effect of the symbol change on the frame lamp. and emit light using the initialized lamp pattern.

(b2) Indicates a state in which the initialization operation of the production display device SG is completed in a situation where the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed based on power-on. . The sub-control board S should display a blue icon in the performance holding display area of the variation at the timing when the initialization operation of the production display device SG is completed, but displays the variation icon as a white icon. In addition, at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the blue icon of the variation may be displayed in the effect pending display area of the variation. Furthermore, the sub-control board S should output a sound effect corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, but the sub-control board S is performing the initialization operation of the speaker D24. Therefore, the output of the sound effect corresponding to the presentation of the symbol variation is limited, and the initialization sound is continuously output. Furthermore, at the timing when the initialization operation of the production display device SG is completed, the sub-control board S continues to restrict the special light emission in the color corresponding to the blue icon of the board lamp, and also controls the fluctuation of the symbol of the frame lamp. Light emission in a color corresponding to the performance is continuously restricted, and light is emitted in an initialized lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues to perform the initialization operation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed.

(c2) Indicates a state in which the initialization operation of the production display device SG is completed in a situation where the initialization operation of the lamp based on power-on, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed. . In this state, the white icon (or blue icon if a blue icon is displayed) in the performance hold display area of the change is changed to a green icon. The sub-control board S limits the output of "Re", which is the first hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the green icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing when the green icon based on the hold change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. and continues to output the initialization sound. In addition, at the timing when the green icon based on the pending change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG, the sub control board S continues to restrict the special light emission in the color corresponding to the green icon of the board lamp, and also controls the frame lamp. Light emission in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation is continuously restricted, and light is emitted in an initialized lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues to perform the initialization operation at the timing when the green icon based on the pending change performance is displayed on the performance display device SG.

(d2) Under the circumstances after all the initialization operations based on power-on are completed, the green icon in the performance hold display area of the change is changed to a red icon. At the timing when the red icon based on the hold change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG, the sub control board S outputs "mi", which is a special hold tone corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24, and changes the panel lamp to the red icon. It emits a special light of red, which is the color corresponding to the . Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation (for example, controls the light emission in white), but may also control the frame lamp to emit light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. good.

In the initialization operation based on power-on, the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is configured to end (complete) earlier than the initialization operation of the lamp. Note that it is sufficient that the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is configured to end (complete) earlier than the initialization operation of the lamp in a normal case where there is no retry or the like. Therefore, in (d2), the initialization operation of the speaker D24, the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK, and the initialization operation of the effect display device SG are completed under the situation where the initialization operation of the lamp based on power-on is being executed. When indicating a state in which a red icon is displayed on the effect display device SG based on the hold change effect, the sub control board S outputs "mi", which is a special hold tone corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing when the red icon based on the hold change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. At the same time, it is controlled to limit special light emission in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon on the panel lamp. In addition, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation (for example, controls the light emission in white), but also controls the frame lamp to emit light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. good.

Note that the initialization operation of the speaker D24 may be configured to end (complete) later than the initialization operation of the effect display device SG, the initialization operation of the lamp, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK. In the case of such a configuration, in (d2), under the situation where the initialization operation of the speaker D24 based on power-on is being executed, the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK, and the initialization operation of the effect display device SG are performed. When indicating that the initialization operation has been completed, the sub-control board S displays a special red icon, which is the color corresponding to the red icon on the board lamp, at the timing when the red icon based on the pending change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. While it is controlled to emit light, it is also controlled to restrict the output of "mi", which is a special holding tone corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24. Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation (for example, controls the light emission in white), but may also control the frame lamp to emit light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. good. Note that the speaker is configured to be able to output a specified sound during a specific period after recovery from power-off. Further, the board lamp and the frame lamp are configured to be able to emit light in a prescribed manner during a specific period after recovery from a power-off. During this specific period, all initialization operations from power-on to initialization of the effect display device SG, initialization of the speaker D24, initialization of the lamp, and initialization of the movable accessory YK are completed. It is fine as long as it lasts until For example, from power-on to the timing when the last initialization operation among the initialization operations of the production display device SG, the initialization operations of the speaker D24, the initialization operations of the lamps, and the initialization operations of the movable accessory YK is completed. The period can be a specific period.

The probability that the special holding tone and special light emission will be executed differs depending on whether the accessory position YK is the first position (initial position) or the second position (post-movement position). For example, if the accessory position YK is set to be located at the second position during the jackpot game state or super reach effect, the special holding sound and special light emission will not be executed during the jackpot game state or super reach effect. Therefore, when the accessory position YK is at the second position (post-movement position), the probability that the special holding tone and special light emission will be executed is set to zero. On the other hand, during symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol such as stage A in the non-time saving game state, the role object position YK is mainly set to be located at the first position, so the blue icon or red icon is displayed. The special hold tone and special light emission accompanying this are executed. Therefore, when the accessory position YK is the first position, the probability that the special holding tone and special light emission are executed is higher than when it is the second position. However, at least when the speaker D24 is being initialized, the lamp is being initialized, and the movable accessory YK is being initialized, the special Since the hold sound is not output and the special light emission is not executed, the probability that the special hold sound and special light emission will be executed is different depending on whether the accessory position YK is the first position or the second position. It is 0.

When the accessory position YK is in the second position as described above, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the hold icon, so it is preferable to reduce the frequency of execution of the hold change effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that maintains the game balance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 224, a description will be given of the pending change effect processing during the initialization operation based on power-on during symbol variation, and the pending change effect after all initialization operations based on power-on are completed. (e) shows the symbol variation during the second variation at the timing after (d1) in FIG. 223.

(f) indicates that the power is turned off in the state of (e), and all initialization operations (initialization of the effect display device SG, initialization of the speaker D24) when the power is turned on without RAM clearing based on the subsequent power-on. This shows a situation in which the initialization operation, lamp initialization operation, and movable accessory YK initialization operation) are being executed. The sub control board S hides the display of the variable icon (red icon) that had been displayed as a special icon (trigger hold) and the hold icon (the white icon of hold 1). (limitations) and display the initialization screen. Further, the sub-control board S outputs an initialization sound from the speaker and causes the board lamp to emit light in an initialization lamp pattern. In addition, even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or special icon occurs in this state, the output of the hold sound and special hold sound will be limited (not output), and the normal light emission and special light emission will be limited. . Further, the sub-control board S limits the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, and causes the frame lamp to emit light in an initialized lamp pattern. Furthermore, the sub-control board S limits the pre-read lottery for existing reservations in this state, and also limits the pre-read lottery when a new reservation occurs. "Can be displayed as a normal icon or a special icon" means that existing holds and new holds are non-reach or higher (non-reach, normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, high expectations) If there is a hold-up related to fluctuations in which a jackpot confirmation performance such as a super reach performance such as a super reach performance due to a battle performance or a full rotation performance) is executed, it may be displayed as a normal icon (white icon), and a normal reach or higher (normal reach, If a special icon (blue icon), super reach performance with low expectations (super reach performance by giraffe with low expectations) and above (super reach performance with giraffes with low expectations, super reach performance with battle performance with high expectations, full rotation) A special icon (green icon) may be displayed if a special icon (green icon) is pending when a jackpot confirmed performance (at least one of the jackpot confirmed performances such as performances) is pending. Reach effect) If the above (super reach effect due to highly anticipated battle effect, jackpot confirmed effect such as full rotation effect) is pending due to fluctuations that will be executed, it will be displayed with a special icon (red icon). This means that a special icon (rainbow icon) may be displayed if a jackpot confirmed performance such as a full rotation performance is pending due to fluctuations in the performance.

(g) A state in which all initialization operations based on power-on have been completed, and the second symbol variation is in progress. In this state, the sub-control board S does not display the special icon (red icon) of the variable icon displayed in (e) and displays the pending icon as a white icon, and restricts it to the white icon. indicate. In addition, the sub-control board S limits the output of the special holding sound, outputs a sound effect corresponding to the effect of the symbol change from the speaker D24, and sets the panel lamp to a special state where it is turned off or normally emitted (white light emission control). Limit light emission. In addition, if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or special icon occurs in this state, the normal hold tone and special hold tone will be output, and the board lamp will also be controlled with normal light emission and special light emission. good. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also control the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Furthermore, in this state, the sub-control board S is currently executing the symbol variation corresponding to the red icon whose trigger is pending that was displayed in (e) (the symbol variation of the variation icon that won the pre-read lottery). , restrict the look-ahead lottery. The restrictions on pre-read lottery apply to existing reservations and newly generated reservations. "Can be displayed as a normal icon or a special icon" means that existing holds and new holds are non-reach or higher (non-reach, normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, high expectations) If there is a hold-up related to fluctuations in which a jackpot confirmation performance such as a super reach performance such as a super reach performance due to a battle performance or a full rotation performance) is executed, it may be displayed as a normal icon (white icon), and a normal reach or higher (normal reach, If a special icon (blue icon), super reach performance with low expectations (super reach performance by giraffe with low expectations) and above (super reach performance with giraffes with low expectations, super reach performance with battle performance with high expectations, full rotation) A special icon (green icon) may be displayed if a special icon (green icon) is pending when a jackpot confirmed performance (at least one of the jackpot confirmed performances such as performances) is pending. Reach effect) If the above (super reach effect due to highly anticipated battle effect, jackpot confirmed effect such as full rotation effect) is pending due to fluctuations that will be executed, it will be displayed with a special icon (red icon). This means that a special icon (rainbow icon) may be displayed if a jackpot confirmation performance such as a full rotation performance is pending due to fluctuations in the performance. In addition, as a modification, until the second symbol variation ends, the special icon (red icon) of the variation icon that was displayed as a special icon (red icon indicating trigger pending) as in (f) Hide (restrict) the display of the hold icon and the display of the hold icon with the white icon of hold 1, display the initialization screen, output the initialization sound from the speaker, make the board lamp emit light in the initialization lamp pattern, Even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or special icon occurs, the output of the hold tone and special hold tone is limited (not output), the normal light emission and special light emission are limited, and the sub control board S restricts the frame lamp from emitting light in the color corresponding to the effect of the symbol change, causes the lamp to emit light in the initialized lamp pattern, restricts the pre-read lottery for the existing hold in this state, and also prevents the occurrence of a new hold. In this case, the pre-read lottery may be restricted.

(h) In the second variation, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a "do" which is the hold sound (normal hold sound) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. A sound effect corresponding to the production of the symbol variation is outputted, and the board lamp is made to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also control the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Furthermore, in this state, the sub-control board S is currently executing the symbol variation corresponding to the red icon whose trigger is pending that was displayed in (e) (the symbol variation of the variation icon that won the pre-read lottery). , restrict the look-ahead lottery. The restrictions on pre-read lottery apply to existing suspensions and newly generated suspensions. In addition, even if a hold that allows a new special icon to be displayed in this state (a hold that may become a trigger hold if a pre-read lottery is made) occurs, since the pre-read lottery is restricted, the display of the special icon, The output of the special holding sound and the output of the special light emission are limited, but if the restriction on the pre-read lottery is canceled and a special icon is to be displayed on the effect display device SG based on the occurrence of a hold, at the timing of the display of the hold occurrence. , a special hold tone and a board lamp corresponding to the special icon may be output from the speaker D24 in the form of special light emission. "Special icons can be displayed" means that existing holds and new holds are normal reach or higher (normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, super reach due to battle performance with high expectations). A special icon (blue icon) may be displayed if a special icon (blue icon) is pending when a jackpot confirmed performance such as a performance or full rotation performance is executed. Super reach performance by Kirin) and above (super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, super reach performance by battle performance with high expectations, and at least one of the jackpot confirmed performances such as full rotation performance) will be suspended. If it is, it can be displayed with a special icon (green icon), and a high-expectation super reach (super reach performance with a high expectation battle performance) or higher (a super reach performance with a high expectation battle performance, a full rotation performance) A special icon (red icon) may be displayed if the hold is related to a variation in which a jackpot confirmation effect (such as at least one of the jackpot confirmation effects such as , it means that it can be displayed with a special icon (rainbow icon).

(i) In the third variation, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a "do" which is the hold sound (normal hold sound) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. A sound effect corresponding to the production of the symbol variation is outputted, and the board lamp is made to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also control the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Furthermore, in this state, the hold that existed when the power was cut off between (e) and (f) is resolved and remains as the variable icon, so the sub control board S limits the pre-read lottery. The restrictions on pre-read lottery apply to existing suspensions and newly generated suspensions. In addition, even if a hold that allows a new special icon to be displayed in this state (a hold that may become a trigger hold if a pre-read lottery is made) occurs, since the pre-read lottery is restricted, the display of the special icon, The output of the special holding sound and the output of the special light emission are limited, but if the restriction on the pre-read lottery is canceled and a special icon is to be displayed on the effect display device SG based on the occurrence of a hold, at the timing of the display of the hold occurrence. , a special hold tone and a board lamp corresponding to the special icon may be output from the speaker D24 in the form of special light emission. In addition, in (i), since the hold that was triggered in (e) has been exhausted and no longer remains, the restriction on the pre-read lottery may be canceled from this timing. In this case, the targets of the pre-read lottery are the existing reservations and the newly generated reservations, but it is also possible to target only the newly generated reservations. "Special icons can be displayed" means that existing holds and new holds are normal reach or higher (normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, super reach due to battle performance with high expectations). A special icon (blue icon) may be displayed if a special icon (blue icon) is pending when a jackpot confirmed performance such as a performance or full rotation performance is executed. Super reach performance by Kirin) and above (super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, super reach performance by battle performance with high expectations, and at least one of the jackpot confirmed performances such as full rotation performance) will be suspended. If it is, it can be displayed with a special icon (green icon), and a high-expectation super reach (super reach performance with a high expectation battle performance) or higher (a super reach performance with a high expectation battle performance, a full rotation performance) A special icon (red icon) may be displayed if the hold is related to a variation in which a jackpot confirmation effect (such as at least one of the jackpot confirmation effects such as , it means that it can be displayed with a special icon (rainbow icon).

(j) In the fourth variation, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, and a blue icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. At the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the production display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the sub control board S outputs a special hold sound "Re" corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 and the symbol change. A sound effect corresponding to the production is output, and the board lamp emits a special light of blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also control the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, in this state, since all the reservations that existed when the power was cut off between (e) and (f) have been resolved, the sub-control board S cancels the restriction on the pre-read lottery and cancels the pre-read lottery. is running. The targets of the pre-read lottery are existing reservations and newly generated reservations. Although not shown in (j), the customization screen B is displayed and the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc.

(k) shows a situation in which the power is turned off in the state of (j), and all initialization operations upon power-on without RAM clearing upon subsequent power-on are executed. The sub control board S restricts the display of the white icon of the variable icon, the display of the special icon (blue icon) and the pending icon with the white icon, and displays the initialization screen. Further, the sub-control board S outputs an initialization sound from the speaker and causes the board lamp to emit light in an initialization lamp pattern. In addition, even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or special icon occurs in this state, the output of the normal hold sound and special hold sound will be limited (not output), and the normal light emission and special light emission will be limited. do. Further, the sub-control board S limits the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, and causes the frame lamp to emit light in an initialized lamp pattern. Furthermore, the sub-control board S limits the pre-read lottery for existing reservations in this state, and also limits the pre-read lottery when a new reservation occurs. "Can be displayed as a normal icon or a special icon" means that existing holds and new holds are non-reach or higher (non-reach, normal reach, super reach performance by Kirin with low expectations, high expectations) If there is a hold-up related to fluctuations in which a jackpot confirmation performance such as a super reach performance such as a super reach performance due to a battle performance or a full rotation performance) is executed, it may be displayed as a normal icon (white icon), and a normal reach or higher (normal reach, If a special icon (blue icon), super reach performance with low expectations (super reach performance by giraffe with low expectations) and above (super reach performance with giraffes with low expectations, super reach performance with battle performance with high expectations, full rotation) A special icon (green icon) may be displayed if a special icon (green icon) is pending if at least one of the jackpot confirmed performances (such as performances) is pending due to fluctuations in execution. Reach effect) If the above (super reach effect due to highly anticipated battle effect, jackpot confirmed effect such as full rotation effect) is pending due to fluctuations that will be executed, it will be displayed with a special icon (red icon). This means that a special icon (rainbow icon) may be displayed if a jackpot confirmed performance such as a full rotation performance is pending due to fluctuations in the performance.

(l) A state in which all initialization operations based on power-on have been completed, and the fourth symbol variation is in progress. In this state, the sub control board S restricts the display of the variable icon of the white icon displayed in (e), the special icon (blue icon), and the pending icon with the white icon, and displays all white icons. . In addition, the sub-control board S limits the output of the special holding sound, outputs a sound effect corresponding to the effect of the symbol change from the speaker D24, and sets the panel lamp to a special state where it is turned off or normally emitted (white light emission control). Limit light emission. Furthermore, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation. Furthermore, the sub-control board S restricts the pre-read lottery because there is a pending trigger pending in (k) in this state. The restrictions on the pre-read lottery apply to existing reservations and newly occurring reservations. In addition, as a modification, until the fourth symbol variation ends, the special icon (red icon) of the variation icon that was displayed as a special icon (red icon indicating trigger pending) as in (f) Hides (restricts) the display of and the display of the hold icon with the white icon of hold 1, displays the initialization screen, outputs the initialization sound from the speaker D24, and lights the board lamp in the initialization lamp pattern. Even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or special icon occurs, the output of hold music and special hold music is limited (not output), normal light emission and special light emission are limited, and sub-control The board S limits the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol change, causes the frame lamp to emit light in the initialization lamp pattern, restricts the pre-read lottery for the existing hold in this state, and also restricts the pre-read lottery for the hold that exists in this state. Pre-read lottery may also be restricted when this occurs.

At this timing, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the number of holds on the first main game side becomes three, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated hold image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, in (l), the sub control board S displays the timing at which the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of displaying the pending occurrence display). At the timing), the button vibe effect is executed, and the speaker D24 outputs "dododo" which is a warning sound of 3 or higher. Further, the sub control board S controls the panel lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the hold occurrence, and controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Although the frame lamp starts emitting light in white before the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the performance display device SG, it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation.

In this way, the special icons and special light emission that were displayed before the initialization operation (before the power was cut off) are restricted after all initialization operations are completed after the power is turned on, but the second setting based on the first selection operation is configured to maintain its settings. Therefore, the player can play the game with the desired performance settings without having to set the second setting based on the first selection operation again after all the initialization operations after the power is turned on are completed. As a modified example, if the power is turned off and then turned on without clearing the RAM, regardless of whether the setting based on the first selection operation before the power was turned off is the first setting or the second setting, after the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, The configuration may be such that the first setting is always set, and in that case, the situation shown in (l) (a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the hold on the first main game side is 3 Even if the white icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image), at the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display), the button vibration is activated. The effect is not executed, and the loudspeaker D24 does not output "dododo" which is the warning sound of 3 or higher.

Next, a pending change effect accompanied by a specific preview effect that suggests an icon change will be described using FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is an image diagram of a pending change performance accompanied by a specific preview performance that suggests an icon change.

The specific preview performance is a pattern variation of the main game pattern, and during the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the main game pattern, a snake as a specific character appears and jumps towards the icon. This is a pending change suggestion performance that suggests a change in the display mode of an icon by executing a yes or no action, and hereinafter also referred to as an action performance. The pending change performance includes at least a first change pattern in which the icon is changed without executing a specific preview performance that suggests an icon change, and a second change pattern in which the icon is changed after executing the specific preview performance. . Note that the specific preview performance is composed of specific preview performance A (first half) and specific preview performance B (second half), both of which correspond to action performance. When specific preview performance A is executed and specific preview performance B is further executed, the display mode of the icon changes, and if specific preview performance B is not executed even though specific preview performance A has been executed, the icon display mode does not change.

First, the first change pattern will be explained using (a1) to (d1) in FIG. 225.

(a1) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol in a situation where there are two pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side The first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row corresponding to the rows are fixed and stopped as losing symbols. There are two holds on the first main game side, two white hold icons are displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and there are two holds on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the area showing the number (left area), 2 is displayed as a number image showing two pending items. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a numerical image showing that there is no hold on the second hold display area SG13 in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side. 0 is displayed as . In addition, although the relevant fluctuation icon as a white icon is displayed in the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation, it may be deleted at the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped, or it may be deleted before the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped. It may be deleted at the timing of (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b1) As the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the first variation of the first main game symbol starts. In addition, in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. In (b1), the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted but a new hold has occurred, so there are two holds on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. This is a symbol variation of the first main game symbol in a situation where the game is not in progress. Note that the timing of the occurrence of the new suspension is the same timing as the timing (b2) described later, and is the timing when the remaining fluctuation time is 20 seconds. Since the newly generated hold image is a hold corresponding to the blue icon, the blue icon is displayed in the first change pattern at the timing of the hold occurrence (triggered by the hold occurrence display). The sub-control board S controls the output of "Re", which is a special holding sound corresponding to the blue icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing when the blue icon based on the holding occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the holding occurrence display). At the same time, the panel lamp emits a special light of blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the performance.

(c1) Indicates that the first main game symbol is changing during the first change. (c1) is after the first predetermined period of (b1) has elapsed, and is the same timing as (c2), which will be described later, and is a timing when the remaining fluctuation time is 15 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of a sound effect corresponding to the symbol change from the speaker D24, and continues to emit special light from the board lamp in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the performance.

(d1) Indicates that the first main game symbol is changing during the first change. (d1) is after the second predetermined period of (c1) has elapsed, and is the same timing as (d2), which will be described later, and is a timing when the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of a sound effect corresponding to the symbol change from the speaker D24, and continues to emit special light from the board lamp in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the performance.

Next, the second change pattern will be explained using (a2) to (d2) of FIG. 225. (a2) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, there are two pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side, and the symbol variation of the first main game symbol The first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row corresponding to are fixed and stopped as losing symbols. There are two holds on the first main game side, two white hold icons are displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and there are two holds on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the area showing the number (left area), 2 is displayed as a number image showing two pending items. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a numerical image showing that there is no hold on the second hold display area SG13 in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side. 0 is displayed as . In addition, although the relevant fluctuation icon as a white icon is displayed in the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation, it may be deleted at the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped, or it may be deleted before the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped. It may be deleted at the timing of (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b2) As the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the first variation of the first main game symbol starts. In addition, in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. In (b2), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there is one hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side. The game symbols are changing. Further, (b2) is the timing when the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts and the remaining variation time is 20 seconds, which is the same timing as the timing of (b1). At the timing of (b2), a snake, which is a specific character, appears. At the timing when the specific character snake is displayed on the production display device SG, the sub control board S generates an action sound A (3 called "Nyoronyoronyoro") as a sound effect corresponding to the specific preview production A in which the specific character snake appears. The output of the second sound effect is controlled, and the panel lamp is made to emit white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon (it continues to emit white light). Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the specific notice effect A (for example, purple).

(c2) Indicates that the first main game symbol is changing during the first change. (c2) is the timing when the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts and the remaining variation time is 15 seconds, which is the same timing as the timing of (c1). At the timing of (c2), an action performance is performed to determine whether or not the snake, which is a specific character, will jump into the first pending white icon. (c2) shows a specific preview effect B in which a snake, which is a specific character, jumps toward the first pending white icon. The sub-control board S generates an action sound B ("Shah!") as a sound effect corresponding to the specific preview performance B at the timing when the snake, which is a specific character, jumps into the first white icon on hold. 2 seconds of sound effect), and causes the panel lamp to emit white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon (it continues to emit white light). Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the specific notice effect B (for example, orange). In this way, the second change pattern is established by outputting action sound A for 3 seconds and action sound B for 2 seconds, and as shown in (d2), the snake, which is a specific character, is output as the first pending character. As a result of jumping into a white icon, a blue icon will be displayed. In addition, if the snake, which is a specific character, runs away without jumping into the first white icon on hold (when specific preview effect B is not executed), an action sound that is a sound effect corresponding to specific preview effect B will be used. B is not output, but the panel lamp emits white light, which is the color corresponding to the white icon (it continues to emit white light). Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit white light. Note that action sound A and action sound B may be the same action sound, and as an example, action sound C may be configured to be output for 5 seconds as a sound effect corresponding to specific preview effects A and B.

(d2) Indicates that the first main game symbol is changing during the first change. (d2) is the timing when the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts and the remaining variation time is 10 seconds (5 seconds after the snake, which is a specific character, jumps into the first pending white icon) (after), which is the same timing as (d1). At timing (d2), the snake, which is a specific character, jumps into the first pending white icon, and as a result, a blue icon is displayed. At the timing when the blue icon is displayed (the timing when the snake, which is a specific character, jumps into the first white icon on hold), the sub-control board S plays a special hold tone corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24. In addition to controlling the output of "Re", the panel lamp emits a special light of blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the specific notice presentation B (for example, orange).

In this way, whether it is the first change pattern or the second change pattern, the same special holding tone (in this example, the special holding tone corresponding to the blue icon) can be executed, and the same special holding tone can be executed. (in this example, blue special light emission).

In addition, regarding the second change pattern, compared to the first change pattern, action sound A and action sound B (generally referred to as (simply referred to as action sound) can be output. By outputting the action sound in this manner, it is possible to make the player expect that the hold change will be made, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in (a1) to (d1) in FIG. 225, if a trigger hold occurs during a certain symbol change and the remaining time of the certain symbol change is within a predetermined period (for example, the remaining time is 20 seconds). Even if the second variation pattern is executable (period in which the second variation pattern is executable), the second variation pattern is not executed in the certain symbol variation, but the first variation pattern is configured to be executable.

However, in the symbol variation following the certain symbol variation (for example, the second variation), both the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are configured to be executable. Specifically, if neither the first change pattern nor the second change pattern is executed in the certain symbol change, at least either the first change pattern or the second change pattern will be executed in the next symbol change after the certain symbol change. If it is possible to execute one of the following, and the symbol variation following the certain symbol variation is a pre-trigger variation, one of the change patterns is executed, and the symbol variation next to the certain symbol variation is a trigger variation. In this case, either one of the change patterns is executed once or multiple times, or both change patterns are executed one time or multiple times, respectively. In addition, even if the first change pattern is executed in a certain symbol variation, at least one of the first change pattern and the second change pattern can be executed in the next symbol variation after the certain symbol variation, and If the symbol variation following a certain symbol variation is a pre-trigger variation, any one of the change patterns will be executed, and if the symbol variation following the certain symbol variation is a trigger variation, any one of them will be executed once. or is executed multiple times, or both variation patterns are each executed once or multiple times. In addition, if at least one of the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern is executed in the trigger variation, and the total number of executions of the first variation pattern and the number of executions of the second variation pattern is multiple times, the trigger In the variation, multiple pending change performances will be executed, for example, from the white icon to the blue icon (changed in the first change pattern or the second change pattern), from the blue icon to the red icon (changed in the first change pattern) or change in the second variation pattern), and from a red icon to a rainbow icon (change in the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern). By configuring in this way, even if there is a margin in the remaining variation time of the symbol variation, it is possible to prevent a complicated pending variation performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, a pending change effect accompanied by a specific notice effect in the next symbol change after a certain symbol change will be explained. FIG. 226 is an image diagram regarding a pending change effect accompanied by a specific notice effect in the next symbol change after a certain symbol change.

First, using (e1) to (h1) in FIG. 226, the first change pattern in symbol fluctuations in which the second fluctuation is not trigger hold will be explained. (e1) is a continuation of (d1) in FIG. 225. (e1) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, there are two pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side, and the symbol variation of the first main game symbol The first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row corresponding to are fixed and stopped as losing symbols. There are two holds on the first main game side, and a total of two hold icons, one white icon and one blue icon, are displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the second hold display area SG13 In the area (left area) indicating the number of reservations on the first main game side, 2 is displayed as a number image indicating two reservations. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a numerical image showing that there is no hold on the second hold display area SG13 in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side. 0 is displayed as . In addition, although the relevant fluctuation icon as a white icon is displayed in the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation, it may be deleted at the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped, or it may be deleted before the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped. It may be deleted at the timing of (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(f1) As the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the second variation of the first main game symbol starts. In addition, in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. In (f1), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there is one hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. The game symbols are changing. This timing is the start timing of the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (symbol variation with a variation time of 120 seconds) (timing with a remaining variation time of 120 seconds). At this timing (triggered by the shift display), the blue icon changes to a red icon and is displayed in accordance with the first change pattern. At the timing when the red icon is displayed on the performance display device SG, the sub control board S controls the output of "mi", which is a special holding tone corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24, and changes the panel lamp to a color corresponding to the red icon. A special red light is emitted. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the performance.

(g1) Indicates the second variation of the first main game symbol. (g1) is a timing after 5 seconds have passed since (f1), and the remaining fluctuation time is 115 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of a sound effect corresponding to the symbol variation from the speaker D24, and continues to emit special light from the board lamp in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the effect.

(h1) Indicates the second variation of the first main game symbol. (h1) is a timing after 5 seconds have passed since (g1), and the remaining fluctuation time is 110 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of a sound effect corresponding to the symbol variation from the speaker D24, and continues to emit special light from the board lamp in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the effect.

In addition, in (e1) to (h1), a pending change effect that executes the first change pattern was explained, but in (e1) to (h1), as a pending change effect that executes the second change pattern that will be explained below. Also good. In this configuration, a specific character snake appears without a pending change in (f1), and a pending change occurs in (g1).

Next, using (e2) to (h2) in FIG. 225, a second change pattern in a symbol change in which the second change is a trigger hold will be explained. (e2) is a continuation of (d2) in FIG. 225. (e2) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, there is one pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side, and the symbol variation of the first main game symbol The first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row corresponding to are fixed and stopped as losing symbols. There is one hold on the first main game side, one blue hold icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and there is one hold on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the area indicating the number (left area), 1 is displayed as a number image indicating one pending item. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a numerical image showing that there is no hold on the second hold display area SG13 in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side. 0 is displayed as . In addition, although the relevant fluctuation icon as a white icon is displayed in the holding display area for the production of the relevant fluctuation, it may be deleted at the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped, or it may be deleted before the timing when the losing symbol is confirmed and stopped. It may be deleted at the timing of (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(f2) As the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the hold is extinguished and the second variation of the first main game symbol starts. In addition, in the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to be displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. In (f2), since the hold on the first main game side has been used up, the hold on the first main game side is 0, and the hold on the second main game side is nonexistent. The design is changing. The timing (f2) is a timing when the remaining variation time of the first main game symbol is 120 seconds, and at this timing, a snake as a specific character appears. At the timing when the specific character snake is displayed on the production display device SG, the sub control board S generates an action sound A (3 called "Nyoronyoronyoro") as a sound effect corresponding to the specific preview production A in which the specific character snake appears. The second sound effect) is output controlled, and the board lamp is made to emit a special light of blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon (it continues to emit blue light). Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the specific notice effect A (for example, purple).

(g2) Indicates the second variation of the first main game symbol. At the timing (g2), an action performance is performed to determine whether or not to jump into the blue icon. The timing (g2) is the timing when the remaining variation time of the first main game symbol variation is 115 seconds, and indicates a specific preview performance B in which a snake, which is a specific character, jumps into a blue icon. The sub-control board S generates an action sound B (a 2-second sound effect called "Shar!") as a sound effect corresponding to the specific preview effect B at the timing when an action effect in which a snake, which is a specific character, jumps toward a blue icon is executed. ) and also causes the board lamp to emit special light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the specific notice effect B (for example, orange). In this way, the second change pattern is established by outputting action sound A for 3 seconds and action sound B for 2 seconds, and as shown in (h2), the specific character snake is the variable icon. As a result of jumping into a blue icon, a red icon will be displayed. In addition, if the snake, which is a specific character, runs away from the blue icon that is the variable icon without jumping into it (when specific preview performance B is not executed), an action sound that is a sound effect corresponding to specific preview performance B will be used. B is not output, but the board lamp emits blue light, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon (it continues to emit blue light). Further, the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit white light.

(h2) Indicates the second variation of the first main game symbol. The timing (h2) is the timing when the remaining variation time of the first main game symbol is 110 seconds, and as a result of the specific character snake jumping into the blue icon, the red icon is displayed. At the timing when the red icon is displayed, the sub control board S controls the output of "mi", which is a special hold tone corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24, and also turns the panel lamp in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Emit special light. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the specific preview effect B.

In addition, in (e2) to (h2), a pending change effect in which the second change pattern is executed has been described, but in (e2) to (h2), a pending change effect in which the first change pattern is executed may be used. In the case of this configuration, the change is suspended in (f2), and the red icon is maintained and continuously displayed in (g2).

In this way, whether it is the first change pattern or the second change pattern, the same special holding tone (in this example, the special holding tone corresponding to the red icon) can be executed, and the same special holding tone can be executed. (in this example, red special light emission). Note that the first fluctuation pattern is not only executed when a hold occurrence display or a shift display is triggered, but also when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display (for example, if a fluctuation display of 120 seconds is displayed, 5 seconds have elapsed, 30 seconds have elapsed, 65 seconds have elapsed, etc.) The second fluctuation pattern may also be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display (for example, in the case of a 120-second fluctuation display, 15 seconds have elapsed, 40 seconds have elapsed, or 90 seconds have elapsed). It may be executed at any timing during the course of the process.

Further, in the second change pattern, compared to the first change pattern, the action sound can be executed over the predetermined period (f2) to (g2) before the special holding tone is executed. By executing the action sound in this manner, it is possible to make the player expect that the change to be held will be made, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

After the trigger hold occurs in this way, both the first change pattern and the second change pattern can be executed in the symbol change following a certain symbol change (for example, the second change). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain a state of expectation for the pending change performance regardless of any fluctuations after the trigger pending occurs, thereby reducing the player's interest in playing the game. You can play the game without any problems.

Further, the probability (frequency) of selecting the second change pattern is configured to vary depending on the type of symbol variation following a certain symbol variation. For example, when the next symbol variation is a symbol variation in response to a trigger hold (the second change pattern in Figure 226) than in a case where the next symbol change is not a symbol change in response to a trigger hold (a symbol change in which the first change pattern in Figure 226 is executed). It is configured such that the execution probability of the specific preview performance (the frequency with which the specific preview performance is selected) is higher for the executed symbol variation). In other words, the execution probability of a specific notice effect with a symbol variation with a trigger held (the frequency at which a specific notice effect is selected) is the same as the execution probability of a specific notice effect with a symbol change without a trigger hold (the frequency with which a specific notice effect is selected). configured higher than. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate hold change effect according to the number of holds consumed until the symbol change of trigger hold, the expected degree of winning of trigger hold, and the like.

Also, for example, the next symbol change is a symbol change before the trigger hold, and is a symbol change before the trigger hold than a pattern change in a state where there are many holds (for example, 4 pieces). However, it may be configured such that the execution probability of the specific notice performance (the frequency with which the specific notice performance is selected) is higher when the symbol changes in a state where there are few reservations (for example, one state). .

Next, a pending change effect when an alternative display is executed will be explained using FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is an image diagram regarding the pending change effect when the alternative display is executed.

An alternative display is a display that imitates an icon related to special holding music or a display reminiscent of an icon related to special holding music. An example of large icon display in icon presentation is illustrated. Further, the alternative display may be referred to as an icon related to special holding music. Further, since the alternative display is also a display imitating the special holding image (second variable right display) which is an icon related to the special holding sound, the alternative display may be referred to as a second pseudo variable right display.

(a) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, there are two pending on the first main game side and no pending on the second main game side, and the symbol variation of the first main game symbol This indicates that the first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to the above are changing. At this timing, a game explanation performance (alternative display) that displays "Red is extremely hot!" is executed. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of the sound effect of the game explanation performance (for example, a 2.5-second sound effect of "Jajan!"), and also changes the board lamp to white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. (continues to emit white light). Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the game explanation performance.

(b) Shows that the first main game symbol is changing during the first change. (b) shows after the predetermined time in (a) has passed, but even at the timing of (b), the game explanation effect (alternative display) that displays "Red is super hot!" continues to be executed. ing. Then, at the timing (b), the white icon changes to a red icon and is displayed in the first change pattern of the pending change effect. At the timing when the red icon is displayed on the performance display device SG (the timing of the hold change), the sub-control board S controls the output of "mi", which is a special hold tone corresponding to the red icon, from the speaker D24, and also turns on the board lamp. Emit special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the effect.

(c) This is the first variation of the first main game symbol and indicates that a ready-to-win effect is in progress. (c) shows after the predetermined time period of (b) has passed, and is a normal reach effect with the 7 symbol. At this timing, alternative displays such as game explanation effects and large icon effects can be executed, but (c) shows an example in which they are not executed. Also, at this timing, a red icon is displayed as the variable icon, and the board lamp is specially emitted in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, although the frame lamp emits white light, it may be emitted in a color corresponding to the normal reach effect.

(d) This is the first variation of the first main game symbol and indicates that a super reach effect is in progress. (d) shows a predetermined timing under the situation during a ready-to-reach performance, and shows a ready-to-reach performance that has evolved from a normal reach performance to a super reach performance. Note that the predetermined timing is the timing at which the normal reach performance has evolved into the super reach performance. During the period during which the super reach performance is being executed after a predetermined timing, the display of the red icon displayed in the performance hold display area of the fluctuation is restricted. Specifically, the image of the red icon is erased at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the two white pending icons displayed in the first pending display area SG12 are also erased, and the display area for effecting the variation and the first pending display area SG12 are also erased. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the background image indicating stage A is also deleted, and the background image of the super reach effect is displayed (in the figure, the stage is changed to the SP reach stage). In addition, during the period during which the super reach performance is being executed after a predetermined timing, the light emission of the board lamp that has been emitting special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, is restricted, and the special light emission is interrupted. Specifically, the light emission of the board lamp is restricted by turning off, but the board lamp may be made to emit light in a color (for example, red) corresponding to the expected degree of winning in the super reach performance. When the board lamp emits red light as a color corresponding to the expectation of winning in the super reach performance, it is preferable to use a different light emission mode from the second special light emission (special light emission). Specifically, the second special light emission is caused to emit light in a red lighting mode, but it is caused to emit light in a red blinking mode corresponding to the expected degree of winning in the super reach performance. On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white manner or in a color (for example, red) corresponding to the expectation of winning in the super reach effect.

(e) In stage A in the non-time reduction gaming state, after the first variation is completed, there is one pending game on the first main game side, and there is one pending game on the second main game side. This indicates that the second variation of the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows is in progress, which corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in a situation where there is no situation. At this timing, a game explanation performance (alternative display) that displays "Red is extremely hot!" is executed. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of the sound effect of the game explanation performance (for example, a 2.5-second sound effect of "Jajan!"), and also changes the board lamp to white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. (continues to emit white light). Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the game explanation effect.

(f) Shows the second variation of the first main game symbol. (f) shows after the predetermined time in (e) has passed, and at this timing, the game explanation effect (alternative display) that displays "Red is extremely hot!" is being continuously executed, and the Because a new hold on the first main game side has occurred, there are two hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. It has become. Since the newly generated pending image is a pending image corresponding to the blue icon, the blue icon is displayed in the first change pattern at the timing of the pending occurrence. The sub-control board S controls the output of "Re", which is a special holding sound corresponding to the blue icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing when the blue icon based on the holding occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the holding occurrence display). At the same time, the panel lamp emits a special light of blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, although the sub-control board S controls the frame lamp to emit light in white, it may also control the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the performance.

(g) This is the second variation of the first main game symbol and indicates that a ready-to-win effect is in progress. (g) shows after the predetermined time period of (f) has passed, and is a normal reach effect with the 7 symbol. At this timing, alternative displays such as a game explanation presentation and a large icon presentation can be executed, and an example of executing the large icon presentation will be shown. The large icon performance is a performance that suggests a change in the display mode of the icon, which moves from the top of the performance display device SG to the bottom (executes the specific preview performance A) and collides with the icon in the icon display area. This is an action production in which a large icon collides with an icon in the icon display area, resulting in a successful pattern in which the display mode of the icon changes (a pattern in which specific preview production B is executed), and a success pattern in which the large icon collides with an icon in the icon display area. The icon has a failure pattern in which the icon collides with and is bounced back, and the display mode of the icon does not change (a pattern in which the specific preview effect B is not executed). Although the results are not displayed here, an example is shown in which the failure pattern is executed and the icon does not change. At this timing, a blue icon is displayed as the variable icon, and the panel lamp emits a special light of blue, which is a color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, although the frame lamp emits white light, it may be emitted in a color corresponding to the normal reach effect. When the large icon moves from the top to the bottom of the production display device SG, the action sound A "dada dan dada dan" sound effect is output for 3 seconds, and the large icon collides with the icon in the icon display area. If the ball is not bounced back, the sound effect of "boom", which is action effect B, is output for 2 seconds.

(h) This is the second variation of the first main game symbol and indicates that a super reach effect is in progress. (h) shows a predetermined timing under the situation during a reach performance, and shows a reach performance that has evolved from a normal reach performance to a super reach performance. During the period during which the super reach performance is being executed after a predetermined timing, the display of the white icon displayed in the performance holding display area of the fluctuation is restricted. Specifically, the white icon image is erased at a predetermined timing. Moreover, at a predetermined timing, the white icon and blue icon pending icons that were displayed in the first pending display area SG12 are also erased, and the display area for effect of the variation and the first pending display area SG12 are also erased. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the background image indicating stage A is also deleted, and the background image of the super reach effect is displayed (in the figure, the stage is changed to the SP reach stage). In addition, during the period during which the super reach performance is being executed after a predetermined timing, the light emission of the board lamp that has been emitting special light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon, is restricted, and the special light emission is interrupted. Specifically, the light emission of the board lamp is restricted by turning it off, but the board lamp may be made to emit light in a color (for example, blue or red) that corresponds to the expected degree of winning in the super reach performance. When the board lamp emits blue light as a color corresponding to the expectation of winning in the super reach performance, it is preferable that the light emission mode is different from the first special light emission (special light emission). Specifically, the first special light emission is made to emit light in a blue lighting manner, but it is made to emit light in a blue blinking manner corresponding to the expectation level of winning in the super reach effect. On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white manner or in a color (for example, blue) corresponding to the expected degree of winning in the super reach performance.

As shown in (a), (b), (e) to (g) of FIG. 227, in situations where an alternative display (for example, a game explanation display or a large icon display) is displayed outside the icon display area, special Icons related to special music on hold (for example, special icons such as blue icons and red icons) are displayed in the icon display area than when icons related to music on hold (for example, special icons such as blue icons and red icons) are displayed in the icon display area. is configured such that there are more cases where the icon is not displayed in the icon display area. With this configuration, it is possible to spread awareness of icons with high expectation of winning (for example, red icons) to the extent that players do not misunderstand them.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 227(a) and (e), icons related to special holding music (for example, red icons for game explanation effects and red icons for large icon effects) are displayed in areas other than the icon display area. In such a case, the special hold tone and special light emission may not be executed. Since the icon related to the special holding music is not an icon that informs the actual expectation of winning, by configuring the special holding music and special light emission corresponding to the icon to not be executed, the player may misunderstand the expectation of winning. We can provide a Pachinko game machine that has never been seen before. It is preferable that all icons displayed in the icon display area are normal icons, but the icons displayed in the icon display area may include special icons.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 227(f), there is a case where an icon (for example, a red icon used in a game explanation effect) related to one special holding tone is displayed outside the icon display area, and The configuration is such that an icon (for example, a blue icon) related to a special holding tone other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

In addition, if a new hold occurs in a situation where an icon related to a special hold sound (for example, a red icon game explanation effect) is displayed outside the icon display area, as shown in (f) of FIG. When a hold occurs, an icon related to special hold music (for example, a blue icon is displayed in (f), but this applies when a red icon is displayed) may be displayed in the icon display area. It is composed of With this configuration, it is possible to spread awareness of icons with high expectations for winning (for example, red icons), and provide players with a sense of expectation that the icons will actually change to icons with high expectations for winning. be able to.

Note that the only situation in which icons related to special hold music (for example, red icons for game explanation effects or red icons for large icon effects) are displayed outside the icon display area is in non-time saving game states (for example, low base states). , and is configured so that it is not displayed in a time-reduced gaming state (for example, a high base state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, the situation in which the icon related to the special holding sound (for example, the red icon of the game explanation effect or the red icon of the large icon effect) is displayed outside the icon display area is before a predetermined timing, It is configured so that it will not be displayed after a predetermined timing.

Even if the execution probability of the special hold music is changed to the third or fourth setting based on the second selection operation, the icon color of the same color as the icon color (for example, red icon) corresponding to the special hold music It is possible to execute a preview effect (for example, a line effect in which the letters of the line are red when the expected success rate is 20%), and the fourth setting (execution probability 1%) is better than the third setting (execution probability 5%). The system is configured such that when a special holding tone is generated, there is a higher probability that the special holding tone is a special holding tone related to the same color of the preview performance. For example, if a red line preview is executed in the third setting, a blue icon is more likely to occur than a red icon (including changing to a red icon after the blue icon occurs), so special On-hold music is less likely to occur than the special on-hold music that accompanies the blue icon. On the other hand, in the fourth setting, when a red line preview is executed, a red icon (including changing to a red icon after a blue icon occurs) is more likely to occur than a blue icon (or a blue icon occurs) (The red icon is more likely to change to a red icon than in the third setting), so the special holding tone associated with the red icon is more likely to occur than in the third setting. In other words, if the red preview effect is executed in a variation that generates a special holding tone (or a variation that is executed when a hold that generates a special holding tone is extinguished), the fourth setting is set higher than the third setting. The more likely it is that the special hold associated with the red icon will be executed as the special hold tone. Furthermore, in the fourth setting, the special holding tone accompanying the red icon is more likely to occur than the special holding tone accompanying the blue icon. Note that the execution probability of the preview performance in the third setting (for example, a dialogue performance in which the characters of the dialogue with a hit expectation of 20% are red) is higher than the execution probability of the preview performance in the fourth setting (for example, a dialogue with a hit expectation of 20%). The probability is the same as the execution probability of the line production with red letters. In this way, by creating a design that enhances the relationship between the hold change effect (including special hold sounds) and the same system (same color system) of the preview effect, the occurrence of the red-type preview effect of the preview effect will cause the subsequent It is possible to provide a Pachinko game machine capable of creating a game feature that makes the user expect to see a red-colored holding change effect and the generation of a red-colored special holding tone.

Based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (high-level conceptualization), and concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments can be added to these concepts. It's okay.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (1) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and the first performance symbol can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. If it is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the first production symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the first production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first production symbol is confirmed. The special stop display mode that is not displayed when the stop display is temporarily displayed is configured to be temporarily stop display,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period are configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily displayed in a stopped state within the certain performance period. be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (1-2) is
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a fluctuating display format of the first identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a fluctuating display format of the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-gaming section when displaying an effect executed by the sub-gaming section, and while the first identification information is being variably displayed, the second identification information is variably displayed. is configured such that the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the first performance symbol to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the second performance symbol to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
Both the first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured to
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display both fluctuations of
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display both fluctuations of
When the first identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop-display mode, the stop-display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop-display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop-display mode It is configured to be able to perform both stop and display operations.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the first performance symbol corresponding to the stop display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the stop display mode are stopped. It is configured to be able to perform both stop and display operations.
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and When the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo fluctuation in which the first performance symbol is temporarily displayed in a fixed state within a certain performance period. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is definitively stopped and displayed is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped and displayed,
A pachinko game characterized in that the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period are configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (2) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After a plurality of types of first performance symbols are variably displayed on a performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG), a first performance symbol of one type or a combination of multiple types is displayed on a performance display unit (for example, A first effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) that controls the effect display device SG to stop display;
After a plurality of types of second effect symbols are variably displayed on the effect display section (for example, the effect display device SG), a second effect symbol of one type or a combination of multiple types is displayed on the effect display section (for example, A second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) that controls the effect display device SG to stop displaying,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, it is definitely stopped and displayed, and within the same performance period. It is configured to display the second performance symbol in a variable manner and then definitively stop and display it.
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and the first performance symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. When the first performance symbol is displayed, it is configured to be displayed again in a variable manner within a certain performance period, and when the first performance symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display, A special stop display mode indicating that the special game will not be executed, but indicating that there is a possibility that the special game will be executed after that, can be stopped and displayed as a first performance symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types. It is configured,
The second performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period cannot be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, or Even if it is temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the period, the special stop display mode may be used as a second presentation symbol that is a combination of one or more types. Even when the second performance symbol cannot be stopped and displayed and the second performance symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, the special stop display mode is configured so that it is not stopped and displayed as the second performance symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
The first performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and the first performance symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain performance period. If it is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the first production symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the first production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first production symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the stop display is temporarily displayed is configured to be temporarily stop display,
The second performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period is configured such that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain performance period,
The display states of the first performance symbols within a certain performance period include a first display state in which the first performance symbols that are being variably displayed are visible to the player, and a first display state where the first performance symbols that are being variably displayed are visible to the player. The player is configured to adopt either a second display state in which the first performance symbol is hidden or a second display state in which the first performance symbol is more difficult for the player to see than the first display state, and the second display state within a certain performance period. The symbol for use is configured to be displayed at least in the second display state,
When the special stop display mode is temporarily stop-displayed as the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, the special stop display mode may not be included when the first performance symbol is definitively stopped and displayed. It is configured to be a first special stop display mode that includes a first production symbol of the type, or a second special stop display mode that does not include the first production symbol of the specific type,
When the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed within a certain performance period, the second special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed more than when the first special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the degree of expectation for execution of a special game after the end of a particular performance period is higher when the game is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (4) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the condition for starting the variable display of identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, symbol holding means MJ32) that temporarily stores the obtained random number until the point in time and controls the holding so that holding occurs;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are met, a validity determination is performed based on the random number regarding the particular hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the validity determination. a game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
A performance pattern that controls the performance pattern to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) after the performance design is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and the design is configured to be able to display the design in a variable manner within one performance period,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may be temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain performance period, and when the performance symbol is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a fixed or provisional manner. The special stop display mode indicates that the special game will not be executed at the time it is displayed, but that the special game may be executed after the definite or provisional stop display. It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in
If a predetermined condition is met after a certain hold occurs and before the conditions for starting to display changes in the identification information regarding the hold are met, the hold will be designated as a specific hold, and at the time the specific hold occurs. , if there is one or more preemptive holds that satisfy the identification information change display start condition before the specific hold, then the identification information change display start condition regarding the preemptive hold is set. Within one production period corresponding to the case where the performance is satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitely stopped and displayed as a production symbol only when the production symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, while the identification regarding the specific hold is Within one production period corresponding to the case where the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as a production symbol only when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to play.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (5) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the condition for starting the variable display of identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the obtained random number until the time of suspension, and controls the suspension to occur;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are met, a validity determination is performed based on the random number regarding the particular hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the validity determination. a game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
A performance pattern that controls the performance pattern to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) after the performance design is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and the design is configured to be able to display the design in a variable manner within one performance period,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may be temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain performance period, and when the performance symbol is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a fixed or provisional manner. The special stop display mode indicates that the special game will not be executed at the time it is displayed, but that the special game may be executed after the definite or provisional stop display. It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in
If the special stop display mode is stopped and displayed as a performance pattern when a performance pattern is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed within a certain performance period, at least one special performance pattern and the special It is configured so that it can be combined with multiple normal performance symbols that are of a different type from the production symbols,
If a predetermined condition is met after a certain hold occurs and before the conditions for starting to display changes in the identification information regarding the hold are met, the hold will be designated as a specific hold, and at the time the specific hold occurs. , if there is one or more preemptive holds that satisfy the identification information change display start condition before the specific hold, then the identification information change display start condition regarding the preemptive hold is set. When the special stop display mode is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed within one performance period corresponding to the case where the plurality of normal performance symbols cannot be of the same type, the identification regarding the specific suspension When the special stop display mode is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed within one performance period corresponding to the case where the information fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, the plurality of normal performance symbols may be of the same type. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (6) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is displaced to the open state. A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state, and when the game ball enters the closed state, the game ball enters the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be unable to enter the ball or to be difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state;
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
A first game content determining means (e.g., game content determination means MN);
After the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying one identification information;
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
A second game content determining means (e.g., game content determination means MN);
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), a second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed;
After the decision result based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the decision result based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
A performance pattern that controls the performance pattern to be displayed in a static manner on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) after the performance design is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The period from the start of fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and the design is configured to be able to fluctuate display within a certain performance period. has been
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period may be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may be temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain performance period, and when the performance symbol is permanently or provisionally stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo-variation in which the performance symbol is displayed in a fixed or provisional manner. The special stop display mode indicates that the special game will not be executed at the time it is displayed, but that the special game may be executed after the definite or provisional stop display. It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed in
Within one performance period corresponding to the period from the start of fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display, and within one performance period corresponding to the period from the start of fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display, the special stop This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured such that the rate at which the display mode is definitively or temporarily stopped and displayed is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the condition for starting the variable display of identification information is satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the obtained random number until the time of suspension, and controls the suspension to occur;
When the conditions for starting the fluctuating display of identification information regarding a certain hold are met, a validity determination is performed based on the random number regarding the particular hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display of the identification information are performed based on the result of the validity determination. a game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
If a predetermined number of symbols are on hold at any timing within a certain presentation period, the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within the certain presentation period will be displayed within the certain presentation period. This is performed when the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information related to any of the predetermined number of pending items are met after the display is not definitively stopped and displayed continuously even after the end of the certain performance period. Within one performance period, the first performance symbol that is continuously displayed in a variable manner is definitely stopped and displayed,
Even if a predetermined number of symbols are on hold at any timing within a certain performance period, the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within that one performance period will not be displayed within the same performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the pachinko game machine is configured so that the pachinko game machine is configured to definitely stop and display the game at .

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the ball entering the starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a validity determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display manner of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop displaying the identification information after
After the result of the win/fail judgment is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed, there is a special feature that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that can execute the game,
Game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) that transmits game information necessary for displaying effects executed on the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) to the side of the subsidiary game section (for example, the subsidiary control board S) MT),
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), control is performed so that the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit (e.g. performance display device SG). a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and it is configured such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner within one performance period,
When there are multiple types of first performance symbols and the result of the judgment is a win, when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed, a combination of first performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the validity determination is non-winning, the combination of the first performance symbols that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed,
When there are multiple types of second performance symbols and the result of the judgment is a win, when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed, a combination of second performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the validity determination is non-winning, the combination of the second performance symbols that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed,
The combination of second performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail determination is non-winning than the total number of combinations of first performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail determination is non-win. It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
It has multiple types of effect display modes as effect display modes depending on when controlling the effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
When displaying a certain first performance symbol among the plurality of types of first performance symbols, display attributes related to the first performance symbol in a certain type of performance display mode, and the certain type. The display attributes related to the certain first production symbol in a production display mode of a different type from the production display mode of are different,
When displaying a certain second performance symbol among the plurality of types of second performance symbols, display attributes related to the second performance symbol in a certain type of performance display mode, and the certain type. The display attribute of the certain second performance symbol in a different type of performance display mode from the performance display mode is configured to be different,
If the result of the win/fail determination is a non-win, the probability that the certain first performance symbol is included in a combination of first performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed is higher than the probability that the certain first performance symbol is included in the combination This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the probability that the certain second performance symbol is included in a combination of second performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed in a certain case is higher.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (9) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern are configured to be displayed on the presentation display section in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the first pending number image and the second pending number image are displayed on the effect display section,
A pachinko game characterized in that the effect display section is configured so that the first pending image and the second pending image are not displayed in a situation where the first identifying information and the second identifying information are both stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (10) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image, which is the number of reservations of the first reservation, can be displayed on the production display section,
A second pending number image, which is the pending number of the second pending, can be displayed on the production display section,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to have different display modes. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (11) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
Equipped with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
In the normal gaming state, it is possible to display on the performance display section a number of first pending images corresponding to the number of first pending reservations and a number of second pending images corresponding to the number of second pending reservations;
In a specific gaming state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the first hold is not displayed on the effect display section, and the number of second pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the second pending is displayed on the effect display section. It is possible to display
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a first reserved number image and a second reserved number image can be displayed on an effect display section in both a normal game state and a specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (12) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means) controls the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display section (for example, the effect display device SG). , production display control means SM20),
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
Performed when the number of pending images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information and the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. A variation-compatible image corresponding to the variation display of identification information is displayed,
In the normal gaming state, it is possible to display a variable-compatible image when the first identification information variable display start condition is met, while a variable-compatible image is displayed when the second identification information variable display start condition is satisfied. This is a pachinko machine that is characterized by the fact that

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (13) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning holes (for example, the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player;
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first pending image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the performance display section, the second performance symbol and the first pending image are configured so as not to be displayed overlappingly,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured not to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (14) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
The first pending number indicating the first pending number can be displayed on the production display section,
A second pending number indicating the second pending number can be displayed on the production display section,
The volume level of the performance sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or while the variable display is stopped,
A volume adjustment image can be displayed on the production display section when the volume level can be adjusted,
The volume adjustment image, the first presentation pattern, and the second presentation pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first presentation pattern, and the display priority of the second presentation pattern is higher than the display priority of the first presentation pattern,
The volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first held image or the second held image, and the display priority of the first held number image or the second held number image is higher than the first held image or the second held image. is configured to have a higher display priority than the
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second presentation pattern do not overlap,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the volume adjustment image and the second performance symbol are configured not to overlap even during variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (15) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image, which is the number of reservations of the first reservation, can be displayed on the production display section,
A second pending number image, which is the pending number of the second pending, can be displayed on the production display section,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (16) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
In normal gaming mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image when the image display mode is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is more likely to become the specific display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending display mode immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is easier to become a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image changes to the first pending number immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be used as the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. When the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start, the probability of the special display mode being the same as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image This is a pachinko game machine with special features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (17) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode are displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first production symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second production symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbol that can be displayed after changing to the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first performance symbol in the normal gaming state is the reach of the first performance symbol in the specific game state. This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the total number of combination patterns of first performance symbols that can be displayed after becoming a special display mode as a display mode is larger than the total number of combination patterns in a final display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (18) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; Equipped with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
When a new ball enters the first starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image,
When a new ball enters the second starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the second pending number image,
When a new variable display starts, a second update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
When execution of the held image movement effect is started while the held image generation effect is being executed, the held image generation effect and the held image movement effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image generation effect that is being executed, and , when the execution of the held image generation effect is started while the held image movement effect is being executed, the held image movement effect and the held image generation effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image movement effect that is being executed;
When a new variable display starts while the first update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is being executed, the first updated display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image After the execution is completed, execute a second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
When a new ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port during the execution of the second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first updated display of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is executed after the execution of the second updated display of the two reserved number images is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (19) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern are configured to be displayed on the presentation display section in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the first pending number image and the second pending number image are displayed on the effect display section,
A pachinko game characterized in that the effect display section is configured so that the first pending image and the second pending image are not displayed in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (20) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations in the first reservation and the number of reservations in the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to have different display modes,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number image can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (21) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
Equipped with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
In the normal gaming state, it is possible to display on the performance display section a number of first pending images corresponding to the number of first pending reservations and a number of second pending images corresponding to the number of second pending reservations;
In a specific gaming state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the first hold is not displayed on the effect display section, and the number of second pending images corresponding to the number of holds in the second pending is displayed on the effect display section. It is possible to display
In both the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, the first pending number image and the second pending number image are configured to be displayable on the effect display section,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number image can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (22) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
It has a first area and a second area different from the first area as a game area where the game ball can flow down,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
Performed when the number of pending images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information and the conditions for starting the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. A variation-compatible image corresponding to the variation display of identification information is displayed,
In the normal gaming state, it is possible to display a variable-compatible image when the first identification information variable display start condition is met, while a variable-compatible image is displayed when the second identification information variable display start condition is satisfied. It is configured so that
A first notification image that informs that the game ball should be fired towards the first area can be displayed on the production display section,
A second notification image can be displayed on the performance display unit to notify that the game ball should be fired toward the second area,
When the first pending number image is updated in a specific gaming state, it is configured to display a second notification image,
The second notification image can be displayed overlappingly with the first presentation design, and on the other hand, the second notification image, the first reservation image, the second reservation image, the first reservation number image, and the second reservation number image. are configured so that they are not displayed twice,
Regardless of whether or not the first pending number image has been updated in the specific gaming state, it is a different image from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be fired toward the second area side. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display a special notification image on an effect display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (23) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first pending image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the normal gaming state, the first performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section,
In the performance display section, the second performance symbol and the first pending image are configured so as not to be displayed overlappingly,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second performance symbol and the first reserved number image are configured not to be displayed overlappingly in the performance display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (24) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
Equipped with
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
The volume level of the performance sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or while the variable display is stopped,
A volume adjustment image can be displayed on the production display section when the volume level can be adjusted,
The volume adjustment image, the first presentation pattern, and the second presentation pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first presentation symbol, and the display priority of the second presentation symbol is configured to be higher than the display priority of the first presentation symbol,
The volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first held image or the second held image, and the display priority of the first held number image or the second held number image is higher than the first held image or the second held image. is configured to have a higher display priority than the
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first production pattern can be displayed overlappingly,
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second presentation pattern do not overlap,
Even during variable display, the volume adjustment image and the second presentation pattern are configured so as not to overlap.
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal gaming state. It's a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (25) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stopped display, a new variable display is not started for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
While the first identification information is being displayed as a change, the display mode of the first hold image that is displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to perform a pending change production that suggests that
The hold change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information in a situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first holds remain. In this case, the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, while the display mode of the first pending number image is not changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
The display of the first pending number image can be updated when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
The display update time of the first number of pending images or the second number of pending images is configured to be shorter than the pending image generation presentation time and shorter than the pending image movement presentation time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is configured to be shorter than the variation stop time of the first identification information or the variation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (26) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed on the production display section,
A first reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the first reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
A second reservation number image indicating the number of reservations of the second reservation can be displayed on the production display section,
In normal gaming mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image when the image display mode is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is the first pending image immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is more likely to become the specific display mode,
When the display mode of the first pending image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image is changed to the first pending display mode immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is easier to become a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending image,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image changes to the first pending number immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be used as the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
When the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image is determined by the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the special display mode will be used as the reach display mode of the first production symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal gaming state. It's a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (27) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbol that can be displayed after becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first performance symbol in the normal gaming state is the reach of the first performance symbol in the specific game state. The display mode is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first presentation symbol that can be displayed after becoming the special display mode,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
The first display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first production symbol corresponding to the first production mode, is different from the second display mode, which is the display format of the specific first production symbol, which corresponds to the second production mode. It is configured so that the display mode is
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the first production mode or a variable display of the second identification information in the first production mode, the specific first production symbol that is the first display mode can be displayed in a variable manner. It is composed of
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the second production mode or a variable display of the second identification information in the second production mode, the specific first production symbol, which is the second display mode, can be displayed in a variable manner. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (28) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed in a first pending image display area in the effect display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed in a second pending image display area in the effect display section,
The first reservation number, which is the number of remaining first reservations, can be displayed in the first reservation number display area in the production display section,
The second reservation number, which is the number of remaining second reservations, can be displayed in the second reservation number display area in the performance display section,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
While the first identification information is being displayed as a change, the display mode of the first hold image that is displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to perform a pending change production that suggests that
The hold change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information in a situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first holds remain. In this case, the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, while the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
When a new ball enters the first starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image,
When a new ball enters the second starting port, a first update display can be executed as a display update of the second pending number image,
When a new variable display starts, a second update display can be executed as a display update of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
It is possible to execute a held image movement effect for moving the first held image or the second held image when a new variable display starts,
When execution of the held image movement effect is started while the held image generation effect is being executed, the held image generation effect and the held image movement effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image generation effect that is being executed, and , when the execution of the held image generation effect is started while the held image movement effect is being executed, the held image movement effect and the held image generation effect can be executed simultaneously without interrupting the held image movement effect that is being executed;
When a new variable display starts while the first update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image is being executed, the first updated display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image After the execution is completed, execute a second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image,
When a new ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port during the execution of the second update display of the first pending number image or the second pending number image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first updated display of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is executed after the execution of the second updated display of the two reserved number images is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (29) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) that controls the
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first production symbol among the specific display modes of the type is determined by the preview effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently depending on the content of the game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (30) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of specific display modes is determined by the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the type is configured to differ depending on whether the type is a pre-read performance A or a pre-read performance B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (31) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) that controls the
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. Among the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that a specific display mode will be displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the look-ahead effect is relatively higher. This is a pachinko machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (32) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
In a situation where there is a specific hold that is a first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the degree of expectation for execution of a special game related to the specific hold,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. The configuration is such that when M types of lookahead effects are executed among the types of lookahead effects, the probability that the special display mode will be displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the lookahead effect is relatively higher. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (33) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is being displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The probability that the specific display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, and This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of displaying the specific display mode at a timing later than the timing at which the two-operation promotion effect is displayed is different from that of the pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (34) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is being displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. The probability that the special display mode is displayed is the probability that the special display mode is displayed in the case where the second operation promotion effect is displayed, and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing that the second operation promotion effect is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (35) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of development performances that are performances that are performed after the reach is established, and has multiple types of post-reach performances that can occur after the reach is established and before the execution of the development performance,
The pachinko machine is characterized in that the probability that the special display mode is displayed after the after-reach performance is generated differs depending on which performance type among the plurality of types of after-reach effects has occurred. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (36) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode are displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first production symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second production symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
The switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first production symbol in the first production mode is switched and displayed is different from the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first production symbol in the second production mode is switched and displayed. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the first production mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the second production mode are configured to be the same. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (37) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first production symbol among the specific display modes of the type is determined by the preview effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is structured differently depending on the content of
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain performance period is different depending on the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (38) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
The types of the specific display modes include a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of specific display modes is a temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol. The execution expectation degree of the special game is configured to differ depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is selected as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that the specific display mode B will be selected as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of specific display modes is determined by the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured differently depending on the type of
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain performance period is different depending on the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (39) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. Among the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that a specific display mode will be displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the look-ahead effect is relatively higher. and
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain performance period is different depending on the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (40) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of performance display formats, and when displaying a performance on the performance display section, it is configured to be able to display one that corresponds to the set performance display format,
Depending on which effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when re-variation is executed, or whether re-variation is executed. The display mode of the special display mode displayed when the special display mode is displayed is different,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
In the case where N (N>0) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, and in the case where M (M>N) types of look-ahead effects are executed out of multiple types of look-ahead effects, multiple types of look-ahead effects are executed. The configuration is such that when M types of lookahead effects are executed among the types of lookahead effects, the probability that the special display mode will be displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the lookahead effect is relatively higher. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (41) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, when the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the certain performance period, the first performance symbol When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, any one of multiple types of development effects may be executed after displaying the specific display mode,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period, or whether the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol within a certain performance period. The display mode is configured such that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed within a certain presentation period varies depending on the number of times the mode is displayed,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is being displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. , the probability that the specific display mode is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing when the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (42) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
An operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of performance display formats, and when displaying a performance on the performance display section, it is configured to be able to display one that corresponds to the set performance display format,
Depending on which effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when re-variation is executed, or whether re-variation is executed. The display mode of the special display mode displayed when the special display mode is displayed is different,
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that encourages operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to support multiple types of operations. It is configured to be able to display any of the performances,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. The probability that the special display mode will be displayed is the probability that the special display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing that the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (43) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
Execution expectation level of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within a certain performance period in the first performance mode and the special display mode within a certain performance period in the first performance mode The difference in the expected execution of the special game when is displayed N+1 times is the difference in the execution expectation of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within a certain performance period in the second performance mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the expectation level and the execution expectation level of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N+1 times within a certain performance period in the second performance mode,
It has multiple types of development performances that are performances that are performed after the reach is established, and has multiple types of post-reach performances that can occur after the reach is established and before the execution of the development performance,
Depending on which type of performance among the plurality of types of post-reach effects has occurred, whether or not the special display mode will be displayed after the post-reach effect has occurred, or the probability that the special display mode will be displayed. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured such that the characters are different from each other.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (44) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
A variable winning hole that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning hole C10, a second big winning hole C20),
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming section (for example, main control board M) is
a first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting hole (for example, first main game starting hole A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means, control is performed so that the first identification information is displayed variably in the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. a first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
a second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, second main game starting opening B10); ,
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, a 2 main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information;
A second control unit that controls the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop display the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning hole (for example, the first big prize hole C10, the second big prize hole C20) into a state advantageous to the player; ,
Comprising a game information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section,
The sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) is
gaming information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) that receives gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). a second effect pattern display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the symbol for the first production is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the special display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether special display mode A among the plurality of types of special display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol or the plurality of special display modes. The probability that special display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of special display modes is the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the special display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type is pre-reading effect A or pre-reading effect B,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
A switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first production symbol in the first production mode is different from a switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first production symbol in the second production mode,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the first production mode is the same as the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the second production symbol in the second production mode. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine (A1) according to aspect (45) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. control so that it can be displayed in
At least one or more production designs are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the production design,
If a power outage occurs during the changing display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, the identification information is displayed at the start of the changing display of the new identification information after the power is restored from the power outage. If a power outage occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner, the new identification information after the power outage is restored. It is configured so that the number combination of the production symbols displayed at the start of the variable display is the same,
It has multiple types of performance modes when special games are not being executed.
In a situation where a certain production mode is set, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, and if a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of the identification information, a new identification after the power outage is restored. The combination of numbers of the production symbols that are displayed when the variable display of information starts, and the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner under the situation where the certain production mode is set. In the case where a power outage occurs during a fluctuating display, the number combination of the production design displayed at the time of starting the fluctuating display of new identification information after returning from the power outage is the same; Also, when a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner under a situation in which the certain production mode is set, after the power is restored from the power outage. The display format of the production symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the new identification information starts, and the manner in which the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined format under the situation where the certain production mode is set. When a power outage occurs while the identification information is being displayed in a changing manner, the display format of the presentation pattern that is displayed at the time of starting the changing display of the new identification information after returning from the power outage is configured so that the display format can be different. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine (A2) according to aspect (46) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
An identification information display that controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on a random number related to the certain hold when a condition for starting a variable display of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied. control means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. control so that it can be displayed in
It is possible to perform a confirmation notice effect that foretells that the variable display of the identification information will definitely be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner during the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to perform a confirmation look-ahead effect that foretells that there is a hit hold for which execution of the special game is certain to occur among the remaining holds before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information regarding the hit hold is satisfied. can be,
If a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of the identification information for which the confirmed preview performance was executed, and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the fluctuating display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the final preview performance will be displayed in the predetermined manner. The combination of performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game that is executed by being stopped and displayed is the performance symbol combination A,
If a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of the identification information for which the fixed look-ahead performance was executed, and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the fluctuation display of the identification information corresponding to the pending hit that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead performance. is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, and the combination of performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the end of the execution of the special game is the performance symbol combination B,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbol combination A and the performance symbol combination B are configured to have different combinations of performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A3) according to aspect (47) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
The performance movable body is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, and the visibility of the performance display content displayed on the performance display section when the performance movable body executes the predetermined performance operation. is configured to reduce
The performance movable body is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after returning from a power cut,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, the first performance pattern is hidden, while the second performance pattern can be displayed. ,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power is restored from the power cut, the configuration is such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed. has been
During the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the identification information during which the movable body for performance is scheduled to execute the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period to the start of execution of the predetermined performance operation, the power supply is turned off. When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after returning from the start of execution of the predetermined initialization operation until the execution of the predetermined initialization operation ends. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that the period is longer than the period of .

The pachinko gaming machine (A4) according to aspect (48) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
If a power outage occurs in the normal gaming state and a combination of first presentation symbols is being displayed outside the one presentation period, the first presentation symbols that will be displayed after the power is restored from the power outage. The combination is configured such that it can become a first presentation symbol in a display format different from the display format of the first presentation symbol before the power outage occurred,
If a power outage occurs in a specific gaming state where a combination of first presentation symbols is being displayed outside the one presentation period, the first presentation symbols that will be displayed after the power is restored from the power outage. The combination is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the first performance symbol is configured to have the same display format as the first performance symbol before the power cutoff occurred.

The pachinko gaming machine (A5) according to aspect (49) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
An identification information display that controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on a random number related to the certain hold when a condition for starting a variable display of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied. control means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. control so that it can be displayed in
If a power outage occurs while the identification information is being displayed as a change in the identification information that triggers the transition from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and there is no pending status or new occurrence, When the combination of presentation symbols is displayed after recovering from a power outage, the combination of presentation symbols is displayed in the display format that corresponds to the specific gaming state, and then changed to the display format that corresponds to the normal gaming state. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a combination of performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A6) according to aspect (50) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
In response to the occurrence of a predetermined error, a predetermined error screen can be displayed on the production display section,
When the combination of the predetermined error screen and the first presentation symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first presentation symbol;
When the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first presentation symbol, and the second presentation symbol are displayed simultaneously, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first presentation symbol overlap. is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second performance symbol do not overlap,
Even if the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first presentation symbol, and the combination of the second presentation symbol are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen may be displayed based on a predetermined player operation to adjust the volume level. It is possible to adjust
When the volume adjustment screen, the combination of the first production symbol, and the second production symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first production symbol,
When the volume adjustment screen, the combination of the first production symbol, and the second production symbol are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first production symbol overlap, but the volume adjustment screen This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area and the display area of the second performance symbols are configured so as not to overlap.

The pachinko gaming machine (A7) according to aspect (51) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
Within the one performance period, an operation instruction performance that prompts the operation of a predetermined operation member can be displayed on the performance display section, and when the predetermined operation member is operated in a situation where the operation instruction performance is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined performance can be displayed on the performance display section,
When the operation instruction presentation and the first presentation symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction presentation has a higher display priority than the display of the first presentation symbol,
In a situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to an operation of a predetermined operating member under a situation where an operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the first effect symbol, and the second effect are displayed. When the predetermined effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol, while the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the second effect symbol. The display priority is lower than that of
The display area of the predetermined effect is larger than the display area of the operation instruction effect, and while the display area of the operation instruction effect and the display area of the first effect symbol may overlap, the display area of the operation instruction effect and the display area of the first effect symbol may overlap. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production symbol,
In a situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to an operation of a predetermined operation member under a situation where an operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the area of the first effect symbol. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to overlap both the display area and the display area of the second performance symbol.

The pachinko gaming machine (A8) according to aspect (52) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. a gaming state control means for controlling;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
Under the situation of the specific gaming state, the first variation state has at least a second variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different, and under the situation of the normal gaming state. Both the first variation state and the second variation state have at least a normal variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
It is configured to be able to transition from a specific gaming state and a first fluctuation state to a specific gaming state and a second fluctuation state, and to be able to transition from a specific gaming state and second fluctuation state to a normal gaming state and a normal fluctuation state,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
The display format of the first presentation symbols when the combination of the first presentation symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state, and the combination of the first presentation symbols in the specific game state and the second variation state. The display format is the same as the display format of the first presentation symbol when displayed, but the first presentation symbol when the combination of the first presentation symbol is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. The display format of the symbols and the display format of the first performance symbols when the combination of the first performance symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the second fluctuation state are also the same as the display format of the first performance symbols when the combination of the first performance symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the second fluctuation state. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display format of the first performance symbols is different from the display format when the combination of symbols for the game is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A9) according to aspect (53) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
It has at least a performance mode A and a performance mode B as performance modes when the special game is not executed,
Regarding the first presentation symbols that are displayed in a variable manner within the one presentation period under the situation where production mode A is set, the first presentation is performed before the final combination of the first presentation symbols is displayed. If the provisional display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, and the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, re-variation is executed in which the first production symbol is displayed again in a variable manner within the one production period. is possible, and when the temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol is displayed, the special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first presentation symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is configured not to be displayed for the first performance symbol that is variably displayed within the one performance period under the situation where the performance mode B is set,
The final combination of the first presentation symbols is displayed within the one presentation period corresponding to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner under a situation where presentation mode A is set. In some cases, a specific combination may be displayed; This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific combination is not displayed when the final combination of performance symbols is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A10) according to aspect (54) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
At least one or more first presentation symbols are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the first presentation symbols,
At least one or more second performance symbols are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the second performance symbols,
In the event that a power outage occurs during the changing display of identification information where identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, displayed when a new changing display of identification information starts after the power is restored from the power outage. If a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined manner and the combination of the first effect symbol that is is configured such that the combination of first presentation symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information is the same,
If a power outage occurs during the changing display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, the identification information is displayed at the start of the changing display of the new identification information after the power is restored from the power outage. If a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner, the number combination of the second effect symbol and the new number after the power outage is restored. It is configured such that the number combination of the second performance symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information is the same,
It has multiple types of performance modes when special games are not being executed.
In a situation where a certain production mode is set, identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, and if a power outage occurs while the identification information is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the new information after the power outage is restored. The combination of the first presentation symbol that is displayed at the time of the start of the variable display of the identification information, and the situation where the certain presentation mode is set, the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner. If a power outage occurs while the identification information is being displayed in a changing manner, the combination of first presentation symbols that are displayed at the time of starting the changing display of the new identification information after returning from the power outage is the same. Even in the case of
In a situation where a certain production mode is set, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, and if a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of the identification information, a new identification after the power outage is restored. The number combination of the second performance symbol that is displayed when the variable display of information starts, and the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner under the situation where the certain production mode is set. If a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of information, the number combination of the second performance symbol that is displayed when the new identification information fluctuating display starts after recovering from the power outage will be the same. Even if a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the specified manner under the situation where the certain production mode is set, The display format of the second performance symbol displayed at the time of starting the variable display of the new identification information after the return, and the display format of the second performance symbol when the display mode of the particular production mode is set, the identification information is in a format other than the above-mentioned predetermined format. In the event that a power outage occurs during the variable display of identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed, the display of the second effect pattern that is displayed when the new identification information starts to be displayed in a variable manner after recovery from the power outage. It is configured so that the format and are the same,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display form may be displayed before the final display form is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display form may be If displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation in which the first production symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the final display mode of the first production symbol It is configured such that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed,
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed within a certain performance period for the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period.

The pachinko gaming machine (A11) according to aspect (55) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
An identification information display that controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on a random number related to the certain hold when a condition for starting a variable display of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied. control means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, a provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In this case, when a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first production symbols is displayed, one of the multiple types of advanced productions is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. There may be cases where
The specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol. Among the plurality of specific display modes, whether the specific display mode A is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol or the plurality of types. Among the specific display modes, the probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol is determined by the content of the preview effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. They are configured differently depending on the
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of specific display modes is determined by the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type is pre-reading effect A or pre-reading effect B,
It is possible to perform a confirmation notice effect that foretells that the variable display of the identification information will definitely be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner during the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to perform a confirmation look-ahead effect that foretells that there is a hit hold for which execution of the special game is certain to occur among the remaining holds before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information regarding the hit hold is satisfied. can be,
If a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of the identification information for which the confirmed preview performance was executed, and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the fluctuating display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the final preview performance will be displayed in the predetermined manner. The combination of performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game that is executed by being stopped and displayed is the performance symbol combination A,
If a power outage occurs during the fluctuating display of the identification information for which the fixed look-ahead performance was executed, and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the fluctuation display of the identification information corresponding to the pending hit that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead performance. is stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, and the combination of performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the end of the execution of the special game is the performance symbol combination B,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbol combination A and the performance symbol combination B are configured to have different combinations of performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A12) according to aspect (56) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
The performance movable body is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, and the visibility of the performance display content displayed on the performance display section when the performance movable body executes the predetermined performance operation. is configured to reduce
The performance movable body is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after returning from a power cut,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, the first performance pattern is hidden, while the second performance pattern can be displayed. ,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power is restored from the power cut, the configuration is such that both the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern can be displayed. has been
During the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the identification information during which the movable body for performance is scheduled to execute the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period to the start of execution of the predetermined performance operation, the power supply is turned off. When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after returning from the start of execution of the predetermined initialization operation until the execution of the predetermined initialization operation ends. is configured to be longer than the period of
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns in the final combination of first performance symbols is larger than the total number of patterns in the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A13) according to aspect (57) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. a gaming state control means for controlling;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
If a power outage occurs in a situation where the combination of symbols for the first performance is displayed outside the one performance period in the normal gaming state, the combination of the symbols for the first performance will be displayed after the power is restored from the power outage. When displayed, it is configured so that the display format can be different from the display format of the first production symbol before the power outage occurs,
If a power outage occurs in a specific gaming state where the combination of first presentation symbols is displayed outside the one presentation period, the combination of first presentation symbols will be displayed after the power is restored from the power outage. When displayed, the display format is the same as the display format of the first production symbol before the power outage occurred,
It has at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode as a performance mode that depends on determining the performance display content to be displayed on the performance display section,
The first display format, which is the display format of the specific first production symbol corresponding to the first production mode, is different from the second display format, which is the display format of the specific first production symbol, which corresponds to the second production mode. It is configured in a display format,
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the first production mode or a variable display of the second identification information in the first production mode, it is possible to display the specific first production symbol in the first display format in a variable manner. It is composed of
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the second production mode or a variable display of the second identification information in the second production mode, it is possible to display the specific first production symbol in the second display format in a variable manner. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine (A14) according to aspect (58) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, first main game starting port A10, 2 main game start port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
An identification information display that controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on a random number related to the certain hold when a condition for starting a variable display of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied. control means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the starting hole more easily than the normal game state, and control is performed so that the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is finished. A game state control means,
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
If a power outage occurs during a change in display of identification information that is scheduled to transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state and no pending information remains, the performance symbols will be changed after the power is restored from the power outage. When a combination is displayed, the combination of presentation symbols is once displayed in a display format corresponding to a specific gaming state, and then the combination of presentation symbols is displayed in a display format corresponding to a normal gaming state. has been
It is possible to display a firing notification effect on the performance display section to encourage the user to fire a game ball into the second area, and while the firing notification effect is not displayed under normal gaming conditions, the shooting notification effect is is configured so that it can be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
The first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the firing notification presentation can all be displayed at the same time.
It is possible to display a specific preview performance on the performance display section within a certain performance period,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position overlapping with the first performance symbol, and the specific preview performance is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first performance symbol. ,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second performance symbol, while the specific preview performance is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second performance symbol. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine (A15) according to aspect (59) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
In response to the occurrence of a predetermined error, a predetermined error screen can be displayed on the production display section,
When the combination of the predetermined error screen and the first presentation symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first presentation symbol;
When the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first presentation symbol, and the second presentation symbol are displayed simultaneously, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first presentation symbol overlap. is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second presentation symbol do not overlap,
Even if the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first presentation symbol, and the combination of the second presentation symbol are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen may be displayed based on a predetermined player operation to adjust the volume level. It is possible to adjust
When the volume adjustment screen, the combination of the first production symbol, and the second production symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first production symbol,
When the volume adjustment screen, the combination of the first production symbol, and the second production symbol are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first production symbol overlap, but the volume adjustment screen The display area of the display area and the display area of the second production design are configured so as not to overlap,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, a provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In this case, when a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first production symbols is displayed, one of the multiple types of advanced productions is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. There may be cases where
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first production symbol among the specific display modes of the type is determined by the preview effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is structured differently depending on the content of
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display unit that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, or The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of specific display modes is determined by the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type is pre-reading effect A or pre-reading effect B,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns in the final combination of first performance symbols is larger than the total number of patterns in the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A16) according to aspect (60) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
Within the one performance period, an operation instruction performance that prompts the operation of a predetermined operation member can be displayed on the performance display section, and when the predetermined operation member is operated in a situation where the operation instruction performance is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined performance can be displayed on the performance display section,
When the operation instruction presentation and the first presentation symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction presentation has a higher display priority than the display of the first presentation symbol,
In a situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to an operation of a predetermined operating member under a situation where an operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the first effect symbol, and the second effect are displayed. When the predetermined effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol, while the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the second effect symbol. The display priority is lower than that of
The display area of the predetermined effect is larger than the display area of the operation instruction effect, and while the display area of the operation instruction effect and the display area of the first effect symbol may overlap, the display area of the operation instruction effect and the display area of the first effect symbol may overlap. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production symbol,
In a situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to an operation of a predetermined operation member under a situation where an operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the area of the first effect symbol. It is configured to overlap both the display area and the display area of the second production symbol,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, a provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In this case, when a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first production symbols is displayed, one of the multiple types of advanced productions is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. There may be cases where
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be If displayed, it is possible to perform a re-variation in which the first production symbol is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the final display mode of the first production symbol It is configured such that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed,
The specific display mode and the special display mode are different display modes,
The types of operation instruction effects include at least a first operation instruction effect and a second operation instruction effect, and when the first operation instruction effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation instruction effect is displayed. , the probability that the specific display mode is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing when the second operation instruction effect is displayed when the second operation instruction effect is displayed. are configured differently,
The probability that the special display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing when the first operation instruction effect is displayed when the first operation instruction effect is displayed, and the probability that the special display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing when the first operation instruction effect is displayed, and the This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the two-operation instruction performance is displayed is different from that of the pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine (A17) according to aspect (61) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. a gaming state control means for controlling;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
Under the situation of the specific gaming state, the first variation state has at least a second variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different, and under the situation of the normal gaming state. Both the first variation state and the second variation state have at least a normal variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
It is configured to be able to transition from a specific gaming state and a first fluctuation state to a specific gaming state and a second fluctuation state, and to be able to transition from a specific gaming state and second fluctuation state to a normal gaming state and a normal fluctuation state,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
The display format of the first presentation symbols when the combination of the first presentation symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state, and the combination of the first presentation symbols in the specific game state and the second variation state. The display format is the same as the display format of the first presentation symbol when displayed, but the first presentation symbol when the combination of the first presentation symbol is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. The display format of the symbols and the display format of the first performance symbols when the combination of the first performance symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the second fluctuation state are also the same as the display format of the first performance symbols when the combination of the first performance symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the second fluctuation state. It is configured to be different from the display format of the first production symbol when the combination of symbols for use is displayed,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, a provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In this case, when a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first production symbols is displayed, one of the multiple types of advanced productions is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. There may be cases where
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol or the plurality of types The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a provisional display mode of the first production symbol among the specific display modes of the type is determined by the preview effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is structured differently depending on the content of
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect on the effect display section that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining pending,
As the types of look-ahead performances, there are multiple types including at least look-ahead performances A and look-ahead performances B,
When the specific display mode is displayed as a temporary display mode of the first performance symbol, whether specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first performance symbol or the plurality of types The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as a temporary display mode of the first effect symbol among the types of specific display modes is determined by the pre-reading effect that will be displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type is pre-reading effect A or pre-reading effect B,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns in the final combination of first performance symbols is larger than the total number of patterns in the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A18) according to aspect (62) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
and effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is created. is displayed on the production display section, and after the second production symbols are variably displayed on the production display section within the one production period, the final combination of the second production symbols is produced and displayed. control so that it can be displayed in the section,
It has at least a performance mode A and a performance mode B as performance modes when the special game is not executed,
Regarding the first presentation symbols that are displayed in a variable manner within the one presentation period under the situation where production mode A is set, the first presentation is performed before the final combination of the first presentation symbols is displayed. If the provisional display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, and the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, re-variation is executed in which the first production symbol is displayed again in a variable manner within the one production period. is possible, and when the temporary display mode of the first presentation symbol is displayed, the special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first presentation symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is configured not to be displayed for the first performance symbol that is variably displayed within the one performance period under the situation where the performance mode B is set,
The final combination of the first presentation symbols is displayed within the one presentation period corresponding to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner under a situation where presentation mode A is set. In some cases, a specific combination may be displayed; When the final combination of production symbols is displayed, the specific combination is not displayed;
While the variable display format of the first production symbol in production mode A and the variable display format of the first production symbol in production mode B are configured to be different,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the variable display format of the second performance symbols in performance mode A and the variable display format of the second performance symbols in performance mode B are the same.

The pachinko gaming machine (B1) according to aspect (63) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may also become definitely stopped and displayed. When the change occurs, the system is configured so that a new change display will not be started for a predetermined change fixed time.
As constituent elements of the production design, it has at least a first element (for example, a character) and a second element (for example, a number),
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining;
The first rocking motion is such that the first element and the second element are rocking, and the second rocking motion is such that the first element is rocking while the second element is not rocking. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to:

When the first presentation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol fluctuation), the shaking motion of the first presentation symbol is changed to the fluctuation standby state where the first presentation symbol is definitively stopped and displayed. By applying this to the inside of the LCD screen, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen where the production design is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to add movement to the LCD screen. By displaying only the second element (number) in a fixed manner without performing a swinging motion, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause the player to misunderstand that the symbols are changing.

The pachinko gaming machine (B2) according to aspect (64) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may also become definitely stopped and displayed. When the change occurs, the system is configured so that a new change display will not be started for a predetermined change fixed time.
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining;
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the predetermined time is longer than the variable fixed time.

In addition to securing the time required to definitively stop displaying the first presentation symbol as a variable fixed time, the first presentation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol fluctuation). By applying the shaking motion of the performance symbols even during the fluctuation standby state in which the first performance symbol is displayed at a fixed stop, a dull screen ( If the design is configured to avoid a screen in which the presentation design is only static (gives movement to the LCD screen), the shaking motion should be started after at least a period of time equal to or longer than the fixed fluctuation time. By configuring this, it is possible to prevent it from being mistakenly recognized as the start of the next fluctuation.

The pachinko gaming machine (B3) according to aspect (65) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A speaker (for example, speaker D24) that outputs performance sound,
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may also become definitely stopped and displayed. When the change occurs, the system is configured so that a new change display will not be started for a predetermined change fixed time.
The production sound is configured such that the production sound can be output at least during the fluctuating display of the production symbols in a situation where a predetermined production mode is set when the special game is not executed;
The standby demo screen is configured to be able to be displayed on the production display section when a specific period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining.
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time that is shorter than the specific time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining. and
The second shaking operation can be performed even after the display of the standby demo screen is finished in a situation where no hold remains,
In the case where the second shaking motion is started after a predetermined period of time has passed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining, at the start timing of the second shaking motion: While production sound can be output,
A second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where there is no hold remaining (for example, a second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends) This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the effect sound is not output during execution of the third shaking motion (the third shaking motion).

When the first presentation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including while the symbol is fluctuating), the shaking motion of the first presentation symbol is changed to the fluctuation standby state where the first presentation symbol is definitively stopped and displayed. By applying this to the inside of the LCD screen, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen where the design design is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to add movement to the LCD screen. When the shaking motion (second shaking motion) is started for the first time in the variable standby state, while the production sound (stage BGM) continues to be output to appeal to the gaming machine, the standby demo screen (standby movie) is If a shaking operation occurs after passing through the display (for example, a second shaking operation or a third shaking operation that is a second shaking operation executed after the display of the standby demo screen has finished), the power saving Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate effect output mode according to the fluctuating standby state, such as stopping (muting) the output of the effect sound.

The pachinko gaming machine (B4) according to aspect (66) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
The predetermined motion includes at least a special motion (for example, Tenpai action) that can be executed when the production symbol forms a ready-to-reach state,
The performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol row are configured to be able to execute special actions, while the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows of the predetermined performance symbol row is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured not to execute special operations.

The first display column (the first display symbol in the left column, the first display symbol in the right column) that is the first display symbol other than the other display column that attracts the most attention (the first display symbol in the middle row, which is the last column) By preparing an action that may be performed only with the first display symbol of one display row (the first display symbol of the middle row, which is the final row), It is possible to visually notify the tenpai to be noticed in the process until the symbol stops.

The pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to aspect (67) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is configured such that a non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stop displaying a different type of performance symbol in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row among a plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
After a reach state or a non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to perform re-variation of the production design,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the production display section;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed,
Contains special actions that can be executed when the production design forms a reach state (for example, Tenpai action),
A movement pattern related to a predetermined action when performing a re-variation of the production symbols after a ready-to-reach state is formed, and a predetermined action when performing a re-variation of the production symbols after a non-reach state is formed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to have a different operation pattern.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to aspect (67) is
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the motion pattern related to the predetermined motion is the number of types and/or combination of the predetermined motion.

When a popular production in recent years such as pseudo-continuation production (production with re-variation) is performed, depending on the production process (temporary stop display of the first production symbol) until the pseudo-continuation is performed, By varying the chronological contents of the movements of the first performance symbols, the flow of the conventional uniform pseudo series performance can be diversified by visually different modes of the first performance symbols. I can do it.

The pachinko gaming machine (B6) according to aspect (68) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
The predetermined operation includes at least a fixed position operation that can be executed when the performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the performance display section,
If the final combination of performance symbols indicating that the special game will not be executed after the reach state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, a performance symbol corresponding to a performance symbol sequence other than the predetermined performance symbol sequence is displayed. The Pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the symbols are configured to be capable of performing fixed position actions, while the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row are configured not to perform fixed position actions. It is.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (B6) according to aspect (68), as shown in FIG. 179,
If the final combination of presentation symbols indicating that the special game will not be executed without a reach state being formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, presentation symbols other than the predetermined presentation symbol row (for example, the middle row) A pachinko machine characterized in that both the performance symbols corresponding to rows (for example, the left column and the right column) and the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol rows are configured to be able to perform fixed position movements. It is a gaming machine.

With this configuration, if it is a normal symbol variation for a loss or a normal reach variation for a loss, the first presentation symbol in the display row (middle row) that does not form a reach state can be temporarily moved by performing a fixed position operation. On the other hand, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the losing super reach effect and perform the fixed position operation again, so by omitting the fixed position movement, it is possible to It is possible to realize seamless movement of the first performance pattern according to the intermediate performance.

The pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to aspect (69) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is configured such that a non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stop displaying a different type of performance symbol in a performance symbol row other than the predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. Ori,
As a component of the production design, it has at least a first element and a second element,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
In the symbol variation in which a ready-to-reach state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that are being variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that are temporarily stopped and displayed. This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbols corresponding to the rows are configured so that they can overlap at a predetermined timing when a ready-to-win state is formed.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to aspect (69) is
The overlap ratio at which the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of another performance symbol row overlap in a predetermined movement of symbol variation that forms a reach state is: Greater than the overlap ratio at which the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row overlap in a predetermined movement of symbol variation resulting in a non-reach state. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by the following configuration.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-2) according to aspect (70) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is configured such that a non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stop displaying a different type of performance symbol in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row among a plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
As a component of the production design, it has at least a first element and a second element,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
At a predetermined timing within a certain performance period, the performance symbols of one performance symbol row and the performance symbols of another performance symbol row are configured to be able to overlap,
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of another performance symbol row overlap; This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that a second element of a performance symbol in a symbol row is configured so that the second element of a performance symbol in another performance symbol row does not overlap.

In this way, when adding movement to the first production design, for the character as the first element, in order to create a sense of dynamism, adjacent characters are allowed to overlap, while jackpots such as which number will stop are allowed. By configuring the numbers, which serve as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it will be a mode, so as not to overlap, it is possible to diversify the movement of the first presentation symbol itself, while still achieving the original purpose of the first presentation symbol. It is possible to avoid deviating from the role of reporting a certain jackpot or loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B8) according to aspect (71) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
In a situation where a specific reservation that satisfies a predetermined condition exists, a performance symbol pre-reading performance that uses a performance symbol to suggest or inform the execution expectation of a special game related to the specific reservation (for example, a chance immediate prediction performance) ) can be executed in the performance display section,
If a specific hold occurs when a ball enters the starting hole during a symbol change in a situation where no hold remains, is there a hold that will be extinguished before the specific hold during the symbol change? The performance mode of the performance symbol pre-reading performance is configured to differ depending on whether or not and/or depending on how many reservations are extinguished before the specific reservation during the symbol variation. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

With this configuration, the player can recognize or infer that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing the look-ahead effect (chance look-ahead effect) that is suggested or notified using the first effect symbol. By allowing the player to select whether or not to accumulate reservations at the same timing, it is possible to realize novel gameplay in which the subsequent effects are different.

The pachinko gaming machine (B9) according to aspect (72) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, three first performance symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column) are produced within the one performance period. A performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section after being variably displayed on the display section,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
In the normal gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of production symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of pending symbols starts to be varied and displayed is the first number, and the number of pending symbols changes as the second number is larger than the first number. The order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the display starts is different from the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed, while in a specific gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is different from the order in which the display starts changing when the number of pending symbols is the first number. The order in which the performance symbols of the number are stopped and displayed is the same as the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the pending number starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the second number. This is a pachinko game machine that features:

By configuring in this way, the display of the first performance symbol is different between the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) where the emphasis is placed on performance rather than the variable efficiency, and the specific game state (time reduction game state) where the emphasis is placed on variable efficiency. By differentiating between the different states, the player can recognize in which state the symbols are changing, and the pattern of the first performance symbols can be changed in a manner that is suitable for each state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B10) according to aspect (73) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
When a first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired first random number as a first hold until a first validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner by selecting the first identification information fluctuation display time, and after the first identification information is displayed in a fluctuation manner in the first identification information display section. a first identification information display control means for controlling the display to stop;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired second random number as a second hold until a second validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, and after the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the second identification information display section, the second identification information is displayed. a second identification information display control means for controlling the display to stop;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and within the one performance period, a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, three symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column) a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section after variably displaying the performance symbols) on the performance display section;
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
When the first identification information fluctuates and displays in the normal gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of first reservations starts to be displayed fluctuated at the first number, and the number of first reservations The order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is different from the order in which the predetermined number of presentation symbols are stopped and displayed when the variable display starts with a second number that is larger than the first number, and the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a specific gaming state. In this case, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of first holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the first number, and when the number of first holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the second number. is configured such that the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is the same,
When the second identification information fluctuates and displays in the normal gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed and the number of second suspensions when the number of second suspensions starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the first number. is configured such that the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is the same when the variable display starts with the second number, and when the second identification information is variable displayed in a specific gaming state, The order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of second holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the second number. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the order in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed is the same.

By configuring in this way, the first performance symbols corresponding to the fluctuations on the second identification information side after the end of the normal gaming state (non-time-reducing gaming state) or the specific gaming state (time-reducing gaming state), By configuring it to be consumed immediately, it is possible to return to the game on the first identification information side, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time reduction game state), which is the original gameplay, so the mode of the first performance symbol While keeping it simple, by performing the minimum operations corresponding to the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the game on the first identification information side. .

The pachinko gaming machine (B11) according to aspect (74) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may also become definitely stopped and displayed. When the change occurs, the system is configured so that a new change display will not be started for a predetermined change fixed time.
As constituent elements of the production design, it has at least a first element (for example, a character) and a second element (for example, a number),
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
The predetermined motion includes at least a shaking motion of the production design,
As a shaking motion,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining;
The first rocking motion is such that the first element and the second element are rocking, and the second rocking motion is such that the first element is rocking while the second element is not rocking. It is configured so that
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the execution time of one predetermined operation other than the shaking motion is shorter than the execution time of the shaking motion within a certain presentation period.

The shaking motion of the first presentation symbol when the first presentation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol fluctuation) is changed to the fluctuation standby state where the first presentation symbol is definitively stopped and displayed. By applying this to the inside of the LCD screen, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen where the design design is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to add movement to the LCD screen. By displaying only the second element (number) in a fixed manner without performing a swinging motion, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause the player to misunderstand that the symbols are changing.

The pachinko gaming machine (B12) according to aspect (75) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may also become definitely stopped and displayed. When the change occurs, the system is configured so that a new change display will not be started for a predetermined change fixed time.
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
The predetermined motion includes at least a shaking motion of the production design,
As a shaking motion,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining;
It is configured so that the predetermined time is longer than the variable fixed time,
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total time for executing predetermined actions other than the swinging action is longer than the variable fixed time within a certain performance period.

In addition to securing the time required to definitively stop displaying the first production symbol as a variable fixed time, the first production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including while the symbol is changing). By applying the shaking motion of the performance symbols even during the fluctuation standby state in which the first performance symbol is displayed at a fixed stop, a dull screen ( If the design is configured to avoid creating a screen where the presentation design is only static (by giving movement to the LCD screen), the shaking motion should be started after at least a period of time equal to or longer than the fixed fluctuation time. By configuring this, it is possible to prevent it from being mistakenly recognized as the start of the next fluctuation.

The pachinko gaming machine (B13) according to aspect (76) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A speaker (for example, speaker D24) that outputs performance sound,
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
A performance symbol that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain performance period, and may also become definitely stopped and displayed. When the change occurs, the system is configured so that a new change display will not be started for a predetermined change fixed time.
The production sound is configured such that the production sound can be output at least during the fluctuating display of the production symbols in a situation where a predetermined production mode is set when the special game is not executed;
The standby demo screen is configured to be able to be displayed on the production display section when a specific period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining.
The production design can perform a predetermined action,
The predetermined motion includes at least a shaking motion of the production design,
As a shaking motion,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time that is shorter than the specific time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where no hold remains. Ori,
The second shaking operation can be performed even after the display of the standby demo screen is finished in a situation where no hold remains,
In the case where the second shaking motion is started after a predetermined period of time has passed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined manner in a situation where there is no hold remaining, at the start timing of the second shaking motion: While production sound can be output,
A second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where there is no hold remaining (for example, a second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends) During the execution of the third shaking motion (the third shaking motion), the production sound is configured so that it is not output.
Within a certain performance period, the execution time of one predetermined action other than the shaking action is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the shaking action,
This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total time for executing predetermined actions other than the swinging action is longer than the variable fixed time within a certain performance period.

When the first presentation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol fluctuation), the shaking motion of the first presentation symbol is changed to the fluctuation standby state where the first presentation symbol is permanently displayed in a stopped state. By applying this to the inside of the LCD screen, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen where the production design is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to add movement to the LCD screen. When the shaking motion (second shaking motion) is started for the first time in the variable standby state, the production sound (stage BGM) continues to be output to appeal to the gaming machine, while the standby demo screen (standby movie) is If a shaking motion (for example, a second shaking motion or a third shaking motion that is a second shaking motion executed after the display of the standby demo screen) is performed after passing through the display, It is possible to set an appropriate performance output mode according to the fluctuating standby state, such as stopping (muting) the output of the performance sound to save power.

The pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to aspect (77) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
As a component of the production design, it has at least a first element and a second element,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
The predetermined motion includes at least a special motion (for example, Tenpai action) that can be executed when the production symbol forms a ready-to-reach state,
The performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol row are configured to be able to execute special actions, while the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows of the predetermined performance symbol row is configured not to perform any special operations,
In the symbol variation where a ready-to-reach state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that are being variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that are temporarily stopped and displayed This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbols corresponding to the rows are configured so that they can overlap at a predetermined timing when a ready-to-win state is formed.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to aspect (77) is
In a predetermined operation to be executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the presentation pattern in one display row and the first element of the presentation pattern in the other display row overlap, but the presentation pattern in the first display row This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of the second element of the display line and the second element of the effect pattern of other display rows are configured so as not to overlap.

The first display column (the first display symbol in the left column, the first display symbol in the right column) that is the first display symbol other than the other display column that attracts the most attention (the first display symbol in the middle row, which is the last column) By preparing an action that may be performed only with the first display symbol of one display row (one display symbol), the first display symbol of the other display row (the first display symbol of the middle row, which is the final row) In the process until the symbol stops, it is possible to visually notify the tenpai that should be noted.

The pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to aspect (78) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is configured such that a non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stop displaying a different type of performance symbol in a performance symbol row other than the predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. Ori,
After a reach state or a non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to perform re-variation of the production design,
As a component of the production design, it has at least a first element and a second element,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
The start operation when the production design starts to fluctuate display,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the production display section;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed,
Contains special actions that can be executed when the production design forms a reach state (for example, Tenpai action),
A movement pattern related to a predetermined action when performing a re-variation of the production symbols after a ready-to-reach state is formed, and a predetermined action when performing a re-variation of the production symbols after a non-reach state is formed. The operation pattern is configured to be different from that,
In the symbol variation in which a ready-to-reach state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that are being variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the production symbols corresponding to the rows can overlap at a predetermined timing when a reach state is formed,
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that at least one of the start operation, fixed position operation, and special operation is not performed within one performance period in a specific game state, while the swinging operation is configured to be executed. This is a pachinko game machine.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to aspect (78) is
In a predetermined operation to be executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the presentation pattern in one display column and the first element of the presentation pattern in the other display column overlap, but the presentation pattern in the first display column overlaps with the first element of the presentation pattern in the other display column. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of the second element of the display line and the second element of the effect pattern of other display rows are configured so as not to overlap with each other.

When a popular production in recent years such as pseudo-continuation production (production with re-variation) is performed, depending on the production process (temporary stop display of the first production symbol) until the pseudo-continuation is performed, By varying the chronological contents of the movements of the first performance symbols, the flow of the conventional uniform pseudo series performance can be diversified by visually different modes of the first performance symbols. Can be done.

The pachinko gaming machine (B16) according to aspect (79) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner; and a game state control means for controlling the special game state so that the ball can enter the special game state after the execution of the special game is completed,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
The start operation when the production design starts to fluctuate display,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the production display section;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed,
Contains special actions that can be executed when the production design forms a reach state (for example, Tenpai action),
If the final combination of performance symbols indicating that the special game will not be executed after the reach state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, a performance symbol corresponding to a performance symbol sequence other than the predetermined performance symbol sequence is displayed. The symbols are configured to be able to perform a fixed position operation, while the production symbols corresponding to the predetermined production symbol row are configured not to perform a fixed position operation,
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that at least one of the start operation, fixed position operation, and special operation is not performed within one performance period in a specific game state, while the swinging operation is configured to be executed. This is a pachinko game machine.

With this configuration, if it is a normal symbol variation for a loss or a normal reach variation for a loss, the first presentation symbol in the display row (middle row) that does not form a reach state can be temporarily moved by performing a fixed position operation. On the other hand, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the losing super reach effect and perform the fixed position operation again, so by omitting the fixed position movement, it is possible to It is possible to realize seamless movement of the first performance pattern according to the intermediate performance.

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to aspect (80) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner; and a game state control means for controlling the special game state so that the ball can enter the special game state after the execution of the special game is completed,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is configured such that a non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stop displaying a different type of performance symbol in a performance symbol row other than the predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. Ori,
As a component of the production design, it has at least a first element and a second element,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
The start operation when the production design starts to fluctuate display,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the production display section;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed,
Contains special actions that can be executed when the production design forms a reach state (for example, Tenpai action),
In the symbol variation in which a ready-to-reach state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that are being variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the production symbols corresponding to the rows can overlap at a predetermined timing when a reach state is formed,
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that at least one of the start operation, fixed position operation, and special operation is not performed within one performance period in a specific game state, while the swinging operation is configured to be executed. This is a pachinko game machine.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to aspect (80) is
The overlap ratio at which the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of another performance symbol row overlap in a predetermined movement of symbol variation that forms a reach state is: greater than the overlap ratio at which the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row overlap in a predetermined movement of symbol variation resulting in a non-reach state. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by the following configuration.

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-2) according to aspect (81) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner; and a game state control means for controlling the special game state so that the ball can enter the special game state after the execution of the special game is completed,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is configured such that a non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stop displaying a different type of performance symbol in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row among a plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
As a component of the production design, it has at least a first element and a second element,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
The start operation when the production design starts to fluctuate display,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the production display section;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed,
Contains special actions that can be executed when the production design forms a reach state (for example, Tenpai action),
In the symbol variation where the reach state is formed, at a predetermined timing when the reach state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that are being fluctuated and displayed are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured such that the production symbols corresponding to the production symbol rows other than the predetermined production symbol rows can overlap,
At a predetermined timing within a certain performance period, the performance symbols of one performance symbol row and the performance symbols of another performance symbol row are configured to be able to overlap,
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of another performance symbol row overlap; The second element of the production design of the symbol row and the second element of the production design of another production design row are configured so as not to overlap,
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that at least one of the start operation, fixed position operation, and special operation is not performed within one performance period in a specific game state, while the swinging operation is configured to be executed. This is a pachinko game machine.

In this way, when adding movement to the first production design, for the character as the first element, in order to create a sense of dynamism, adjacent characters are allowed to overlap, while jackpots such as which number will stop are allowed. By configuring the numbers, which serve as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it will be a mode, so as not to overlap, it is possible to diversify the movement of the first presentation symbol itself, while still achieving the original purpose of the first presentation symbol. It is possible to avoid deviating from the role of reporting a certain jackpot or loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B18) according to aspect (82) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the performance design (for example, the first performance design) is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the performance design and a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is configured such that a non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stop displaying a different type of performance symbol in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row among a plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
After a reach state or a non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to perform re-variation of the production design,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
A movement pattern related to a predetermined action when performing a re-variation of the production symbols after a ready-to-reach state is formed, and a predetermined action when performing a re-variation of the production symbols after a non-reach state is formed. The operation pattern is configured to be different from that,
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect display section executes a performance symbol pre-reading performance that suggests or informs the execution expectation of a special game related to the specific reservation using a performance symbol. It is possible and
If a specific hold occurs when a ball enters the starting hole during a symbol change in a situation where no hold remains, is there a hold that will be extinguished before the specific hold during the symbol change? The performance mode of the performance symbol pre-reading performance is configured to differ depending on whether or not and/or depending on how many reservations are extinguished before the specific reservation during the symbol variation. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by:

With this configuration, the player can recognize or infer that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing the look-ahead effect (chance look-ahead effect) that is suggested or notified using the first effect symbol. By allowing the player to select whether or not to accumulate reservations at the same timing, it is possible to realize novel gameplay in which the subsequent effects are different.

The pachinko gaming machine (B19) according to aspect (83) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section that can display identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The game state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters a predetermined winning hole more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, three first performance symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column) are produced within the one performance period. A performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section after being variably displayed on the display section,
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
The start operation when the production design starts to fluctuate display,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the production display section;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed,
Contains special actions that can be executed when the production design forms a reach state (for example, Tenpai action),
In the normal gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of production symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of pending symbols starts to be varied and displayed is the first number, and the number of pending symbols changes as the second number is larger than the first number. The order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the display starts is different from the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed, while in a specific gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is different from the order in which the display starts changing when the number of pending symbols is the first number. The order in which the performance symbols of the number are stopped and displayed is the same as the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of pending numbers starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the second number,
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that at least one of the start operation, fixed position operation, and special operation is not performed within one performance period in a specific game state, while the swinging operation is configured to be executed. This is a pachinko game machine.

With this configuration, in the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) that emphasizes production rather than variable efficiency, and in the specific game state (time reduction game state) that emphasizes variation efficiency, the display of the first performance symbol is different. By differentiating between the different states, the player can recognize in which state the symbols are fluctuating, and the pattern of the first performance symbols can be changed in a manner that matches each state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B20) according to aspect (84) is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, second main game starting port B10);
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-gaming unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
When a first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired first random number as a first hold until a first validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner by selecting the first identification information fluctuation display time, and after the first identification information is displayed in a fluctuation manner in the first identification information display section. a first identification information display control means for controlling the display to stop;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired second random number as a second hold until a second validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, and after the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the second identification information display section, the second identification information is displayed. a second identification information display control means for controlling the display to stop;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and within the one performance period, a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, three symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column) a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display section after variably displaying the performance symbols) on the performance display section;
It has a plurality of production symbol rows, and is configured so that the production symbols can be displayed variably in each of the plurality of production symbol rows.
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same type of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a performance symbol row other than a predetermined performance symbol row to form a ready-to-reach state,
It is possible to perform predetermined actions based on the production design,
For a given operation,
The start operation when the production design starts to fluctuate display,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the production display section;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the production design is temporarily stopped and displayed,
Contains special actions that can be executed when the production design forms a reach state (for example, Tenpai action),
When the first identification information fluctuates and displays in the normal gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of first reservations starts to be displayed fluctuated at the first number, and the number of first reservations The order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is different from the order in which the predetermined number of presentation symbols are stopped and displayed when the variable display starts with a second number that is larger than the first number, and the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a specific gaming state. In this case, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of first holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the first number, and when the number of first holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the second number. is configured such that the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is the same,
When the second identification information fluctuates and displays in the normal gaming state, the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed and the number of second suspensions when the number of second suspensions starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the first number. is configured such that the order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed is the same when the variable display starts with the second number, and when the second identification information is variable displayed in a specific gaming state, The order in which the predetermined number of performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the number of second holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second holds starts to be displayed in a variable manner at the second number. It is configured so that the stop display order of the production symbols is the same,
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that at least one of the start operation, fixed position operation, and special operation is not executed within one performance period in a specific game state, while the swinging operation is configured to be executed. This is a pachinko game machine.

By configuring in this way, the first performance symbols corresponding to the fluctuations on the second identification information side after the end of the normal gaming state (non-time-reducing gaming state) or the specific gaming state (time-reducing gaming state), By configuring it to be consumed immediately, it is possible to return to the game on the first identification information side, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time reduction game state), which is the original gameplay, so the mode of the first performance symbol While keeping it simple, by performing the minimum operations corresponding to the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the game on the first identification information side. .

The pachinko gaming machine (342) according to aspect (85) is
a first starting port arranged at a position where it is easier for a game ball flowing down the first area to enter the ball than a game ball flowing down the second area;
a second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a fluctuating display format of the first identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a fluctuating display format of the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling the
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-gaming section when displaying an effect executed by the sub-gaming section, and while the first identification information is being variably displayed, the second identification information is variably displayed. is configured such that the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner.
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to display a firing notification effect on the performance display section to encourage the user to fire a game ball into the second area, and while the firing notification effect is not displayed under normal gaming conditions, the firing notification effect is is configured so that it can be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
The first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the firing notification presentation can all be displayed at the same time.
It is possible to display a specific preview performance on the performance display section within a certain performance period,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position overlapping with the first performance symbol, and the specific preview performance is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first performance symbol. ,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second performance symbol, while the specific preview performance is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second performance symbol. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine (187) according to aspect (86) is
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a fluctuating display format of the first identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a fluctuating display format of the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol is displayed. While the display areas or display positions are different, even if a first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, a second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area or the display position of the second performance symbol is the same even when the second performance symbol is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (2342) according to aspect (87) is
A first starting port into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port into which game balls can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
When a first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired first random number as a first hold until a first validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired second random number as a second hold until a second validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows.
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed in a first pending image display area in the effect display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed in a second pending image display area in the effect display section,
The first reservation number, which is the number of remaining first reservations, can be displayed in the first reservation number display area in the production display section,
The second reservation number, which is the number of remaining second reservations, can be displayed in the second reservation number display area in the performance display section,
When a new first hold occurs, the display content displayed in the first hold image display area can be changed, and a new first hold can be displayed within a certain performance period corresponding to the fluctuating display of the first identification information. It is configured such that the display content displayed in the first pending image display area can be changed even without the occurrence of
When a new second hold occurs, the display content displayed in the second hold image display area can be changed, and a new second hold can be displayed within a certain performance period corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second identification information. It is configured such that the display content displayed in the second pending image display area can be changed even without the occurrence of
When a new first hold occurs, the display content displayed in the first hold number display area can be changed, and a new first hold can be displayed within a certain performance period corresponding to the change display of the first identification information. If there is no occurrence, the display contents displayed in the first pending number display area are configured not to be changed.
When a new second hold occurs, the display content displayed in the second hold number display area can be changed, and a new second hold can be displayed within a certain performance period corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second identification information. If there is no occurrence, the display contents displayed in the second pending number display area are configured not to be changed.
When changing the display content displayed in the first held image display area, the number of first held images displayed in the first held image display area can be changed without changing the number of first held images displayed in the first held image display area. changing the display mode of at least one first pending image among the first pending images displayed in the first pending image;
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first pending image is displayed in the first pending image display area; While the first pending image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, even if the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the plurality of types of effect display formats are displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a first reserved number is displayed in a first reserved number display area even if a second performance display format among the formats is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (536) according to aspect (88) is
a first starting port arranged at a position where it is easier for a game ball flowing down the first area to enter the ball than a game ball flowing down the second area;
a second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a fluctuating display format of the first identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a fluctuating display format of the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling the
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It is possible to display a firing notification effect on the performance display section to encourage the user to fire a game ball into the second area, and while the firing notification effect is not displayed under normal gaming conditions, the shooting notification effect is is configured so that it can be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
The first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the firing notification presentation can all be displayed at the same time.
It is possible to display a specific preview performance on the performance display section within a certain performance period,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position that may overlap with the first performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the specific preview performance is displayed in a position that may overlap with the first performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. It is configured so that it is displayed at the location where it is obtained.
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, while the specific preview performance is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the second performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. It is configured so that it is displayed at the location where it is obtained.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol is displayed. While the display mode or the display position of the first performance symbol is different, even if the first performance display format among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed, the second performance among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second performance symbol or the display position of the second performance symbol is configured to be the same,
The display size of the first production symbol when displaying the final display mode of the first production symbol on the production display section is the same as the display size of the first production symbol when displaying the final display mode of the second production symbol on the production display section. It is configured to be larger than the display size of the production design,
A first display mode that is a display mode of a specific first performance symbol corresponding to a first performance display format among the plurality of types of performance display formats, and the specific first performance corresponding to a second performance display format. The second display mode, which is the display mode of the symbol for use, is configured to be a different display mode,
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the case of the first effect display format or a variable display of the second identification information in the case of the first effect display format, the specific first effect symbol that is the first display mode It is configured to be able to display fluctuations,
Whether it is a variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second effect display format or a variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second effect display format, the specific first effect symbol that is the second display mode This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be able to display a variable display of.

The pachinko gaming machine (806) according to aspect (89) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
A variable prize opening that can be in an open state and a closed state,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the random number related to a certain suspension, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player after the result of the judgment based on the random number is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed;
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
A second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The game information receiving means has at least a look-ahead effect display content A and a look-ahead effect display content B different from the look-ahead effect display content A as the look-ahead effect display content to be displayed based on the information regarding the hold received by the game information receiving means. When information regarding a hold is received, when the received information regarding a hold satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect display section displays a look-ahead effect display content A that suggests or notifies the existence of a hold that satisfies the predetermined condition. and a pre-reading effect display control means for controlling the display so that the display can be performed at
It is configured such that the first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display,
When the identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the certain variable display mode, and the second effect symbol is changed in accordance with the certain variable display mode. It is configured to be able to display
When the identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop-display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop-display mode and the second effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop-display mode are It is configured so that the final display mode can be displayed,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol is displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol is displayed. While the display areas or display positions are different, even if a first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, a second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. However, the display area or display position of the second performance symbol is configured to be the same,
The timing at which the look-ahead effect display content A starts to be displayed is the timing at which the fluctuation display of the identification information starts after the suspension that satisfies the predetermined conditions occurs,
If pre-reading effect display content A is displayed in a situation where there is an earlier hold that satisfies the identification information change display start condition before the hold that satisfies the predetermined conditions, the identification regarding the earlier hold is displayed. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed within one performance period from the start of the variable display of identification information to the stop display that is performed when a condition for starting the variable display of information is satisfied. It is.

The pachinko gaming machine (537) according to aspect (90) is
a first starting port arranged at a position where it is easier for a game ball flowing down the first area to enter the ball than a game ball flowing down the second area;
a second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
When a first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired first random number as a first hold until a first validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired second random number as a second hold until a second validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling the
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
It is possible to display a firing notification effect on the performance display section to encourage the user to fire a game ball into the second area, and while the firing notification effect is not displayed under normal gaming conditions, the shooting notification effect is is configured so that it can be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
The first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the firing notification presentation can all be displayed at the same time.
It is possible to display a specific preview performance on the performance display section,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position that may overlap with the first performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the specific preview performance is displayed in a position that may overlap with the first performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. It is configured so that it is displayed at the location where it is obtained.
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, while the specific preview performance is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the second performance symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. It is configured so that it is displayed at the location where it is obtained.
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed in a first pending image display area in the effect display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed in a second pending image display area in the effect display section,
The first reservation number, which is the number of remaining first reservations, can be displayed in the first reservation number display area in the production display section,
The second reservation number, which is the number of remaining second reservations, can be displayed in the second reservation number display area in the performance display section,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first pending image is displayed in the first pending image display area; While the first pending image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, even if the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the plurality of types of effect display are displayed. This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that a first reserved number is displayed in a first reserved number display area even if a second performance display format among the formats is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (538) according to aspect (91) is
a first starting port arranged at a position where it is easier for a game ball flowing down the first area to enter the ball than a game ball flowing down the second area;
a second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
When a first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired first random number as a first hold until a first validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the first validity judgment permission condition regarding a certain first suspension is satisfied, the validity judgment is executed based on the first random number concerning the first suspension, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is determined based on the result of the validity judgment. a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When a second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired second random number as a second hold until a second validity determination permission condition is satisfied;
When the second validity determination permission condition regarding a certain second suspension is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the second random number regarding the certain second suspension, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is determined based on the result of the validity determination. a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling the
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol is displayed. While the display mode or the display position of the first performance symbol is different, even if the first performance display format among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed, the second performance among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second performance symbol or the display position of the second performance symbol is configured to be the same,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending images can be displayed in a first pending image display area in the effect display section,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending images can be displayed in a second pending image display area in the effect display section,
The first reservation number, which is the number of remaining first reservations, can be displayed in the first reservation number display area in the production display section,
The second reservation number, which is the number of remaining second reservations, can be displayed in the second reservation number display area in the performance display section,
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first pending image is displayed in the first pending image display area; While the first pending image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, even if the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the plurality of types of effect display are displayed. This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that a first reserved number is displayed in a first reserved number display area even if a second performance display format among the formats is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (343) according to aspect (92) is
a first starting port arranged at a position where it is easier for a game ball flowing down the first area to enter the ball than a game ball flowing down the second area;
a second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a fluctuating display format of the first identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a fluctuating display format of the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling the
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol is displayed. While the display mode or the display position of the first performance symbol is different, even if the first performance display format among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed, the second performance among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second performance symbol or the display position of the second performance symbol is configured to be the same,
It is possible to display a firing notification effect on the performance display section to encourage the user to fire a game ball into the second area, and while the firing notification effect is not displayed under normal gaming conditions, the shooting notification effect is is configured so that it can be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
The first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the firing notification presentation can all be displayed at the same time.
It is possible to display a specific preview performance on the performance display section within a certain performance period,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position overlapping with the first performance symbol, and the specific preview performance is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first performance symbol. ,
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second performance symbol, while the specific preview performance is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second performance symbol. This is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine (761) according to aspect (93) is
a first starting port arranged at a position where it is easier for a game ball flowing down the first area to enter the ball than a game ball flowing down the second area;
a second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter;
A variable prize opening that can be opened and closed,
a first identification information display section capable of displaying first identification information;
a second identification information display section capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
and a sub-gaming section that controls the performance display on the performance display section,
The main gaming department is
a first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a fluctuating display format of the first identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display section to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information in accordance with the determination by the first game content determining means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means that executes a validity determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a fluctuating display format of the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the second identification information in accordance with the determination by the second game content determining means;
After the result of the determination based on the first random number is a win and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second random number is a win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player;
As the game state while the special game is not being executed, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball enters the second starting port more easily than the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling the
and a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect to be executed on the sub-gaming section side to the sub-gaming section side,
The second identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the first identification information is not displayed in a variable manner while the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The sub-gaming club is
gaming information receiving means for receiving gaming information transmitted from the main gaming section;
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed on the effect display section based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
The first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within a period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is configured as follows,
When the first identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a certain variable display mode, the first effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to display fluctuations in
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the design,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the second identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
Regarding the first presentation symbol that is variably displayed within a certain presentation period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period, and the provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain presentation period. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to perform a pseudo variation in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner again within a certain production period, and when the temporary display mode of the first production symbol is displayed, the first production pattern It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, any of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display section, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured so that it can display the
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol is displayed. While the display mode or the display position of the first performance symbol is different, even if the first performance display format among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed, the second performance among the plurality of types of performance display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second performance symbol or the display position of the second performance symbol is configured to be the same,
It is possible to display a firing notification effect on the performance display section to encourage the user to fire a game ball into the second area, and while the firing notification effect is not displayed under normal gaming conditions, the shooting notification effect is is configured so that it can be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
The first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the firing notification presentation can all be displayed at the same time.
In the performance display section, the firing notification performance is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the first performance pattern and does not overlap with the second performance pattern,
The execution expectation level of the special game when the reach display is achieved using the first presentation symbol, which is the first display mode, and the special game execution expectation when the reach display is obtained using the first presentation symbol, which is the second display mode. It is configured so that the expected level of execution of the game is different,
While the first presentation symbol is being displayed in a variable manner within a certain presentation period, when the first presentation symbol is used to display the reach, the second presentation symbol is used to display the reach. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to prevent the player from playing the pachinko game.

Regarding the previous "stop display," the mode of stop display that was simply written as "stop display" instead of "temporarily stop display" or "definitely stop display" was changed to "stop display" temporarily. It includes both the display mode and the definitely stopped display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A1) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g) and main game reserve display section (for example, first main game symbol reserve display section A21h, second main game symbol reserve a main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least a display section B21h);
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
The performance information display section (for example, the first sub-symbol display section AS21g, the second sub-symbol display section BS21g) and the sub-game pending display section (for example, the first sub-scheduled display section AS21h, the second sub-scheduled display section BS21h). At least a sub-game display section (for example, sub-display device SH20),
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display section includes at least one lamp,
The main game hold display section includes at least one lamp,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game reservation display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
A hold display corresponding to the number of remaining holds can be displayed on the main game hold display section,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first performance information display control means for controlling the display to stop and display;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the second performance information is variably displayed on the performance information display section within the one performance period, the second performance information is displayed as performance information. and a second performance information display control means for controlling the display to stop at a certain point,
The number of remaining reservations can be displayed on the sub-game reservation display section,
The size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the identification information display section can be seen is the same as the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the main game hold display section can be seen.
The size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the production information display section can be seen is larger than the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the identification information display section can be seen.
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp of the sub-game reservation display section can be seen is larger than the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp of the main game reservation display section can be seen. It is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A2) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-game display section (e.g., sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display section (e.g., first sub-symbol display section AS21g, second sub-symbol display section BS21g);
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display section includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first performance information display control means for controlling the display to stop and display;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the second performance information is variably displayed on the performance information display section within the one performance period, the second performance information is displayed as performance information. and a second effect information display control means for controlling the display to stop at a certain point.
In a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the performance display section, a predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to be lit,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to have a case where the predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is lit in a situation where the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the lamp of the performance information display part is turned off in a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner on the performance display part.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-game display section (e.g., sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display section (e.g., first sub-symbol display section AS21g, second sub-symbol display section BS21g);
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display section includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first performance information display control means for controlling the display to stop and display;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the second performance information is variably displayed on the performance information display section within the one performance period, the second performance information is displayed as performance information. and a second effect information display control means for controlling the display to stop at a certain point.
In a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the performance display section, a predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to be lit,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to have a case where the predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is lit in a situation where the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section,
In a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner on the performance display section, the lamp of the performance information display section is configured to be off,
In a situation where the first effect information is being displayed in a variable manner on the effect display section, the shortest time from when the predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is turned on until it is turned on again after being turned off is the first time. and
In a situation where the first performance information is being displayed in a variable manner on the performance display section, the shortest time from when the lamp of the performance information display section is turned on until it is turned on again after being turned off is the second time,
the first time and the second time are different lengths;
When the starting port is set as the reference position, the identification information display section and the performance information display section are provided in different directions in the left and right direction of the reference position, and the identification information display section and the performance information display section are provided in different directions in the horizontal direction of the reference position. This pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that each of the machines is provided in a different direction above and below the reference position.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A4) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g) and main game reserve display section (for example, first main game symbol reserve display section A21h, second main game symbol reserve a main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least a display section B21h);
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
The performance information display section (for example, the first sub-symbol display section AS21g, the second sub-symbol display section BS21g) and the sub-game pending display section (for example, the first sub-scheduled display section AS21h, the second sub-scheduled display section BS21h). At least a sub-game display section (for example, sub-display device SH20),
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display section includes at least one lamp,
The main game hold display section includes at least one lamp,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game reservation display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The number of remaining reservations can be displayed on the main game reservation display section,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first performance information display control means for controlling the display to stop and display;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the second performance information is variably displayed on the performance information display section within the one performance period, the second performance information is displayed as performance information. and a second effect information display control means for controlling the display to stop at a certain point.
It is possible to display the number of remaining reservations on the sub-game reservation display section,
If a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is cut off at the first timing when the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, and the power is then restored, the display on the identification information display section will change to the second timing. The display on the main game pending display section returns at the second timing, the display on the sub game pending display section returns at the second timing, and the display on the performance information display section returns at the second timing. is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to return at the second timing.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A5) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g) and main game reserve display section (for example, first main game symbol reserve display section A21h, second main game symbol reserve a main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least a display section B21h);
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
The performance information display section (for example, the first sub-symbol display section AS21g, the second sub-symbol display section BS21g) and the sub-game pending display section (for example, the first sub-scheduled display section AS21h, the second sub-scheduled display section BS21h). At least a sub-game display section (for example, sub-display device SH20),
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display section includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The main game hold display section includes at least one lamp,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game reservation display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The number of remaining reservations can be displayed on the main game reservation display section,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
It is configured such that the first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display,
When the identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop-display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop-display mode and the second effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop-display mode are It is configured so that the final display mode can be displayed,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the same performance period. have,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
After the performance information is displayed in a variable manner on the performance information display section within a certain performance period, the performance information is stopped and displayed on the performance information display section,
It is possible to display the number of remaining reservations on the sub-game reservation display section,
The size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the identification information display section can be seen is the same as the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the main game hold display section can be seen.
The size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the production information display section can be seen is larger than the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the identification information display section can be seen.
The size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the sub-game hold display section can be seen is larger than the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp on the identification information display section can be seen.
When a special game is executed after the identification information is stopped and displayed, in the identification information display section, the display mode of the plurality of lamps in the situation where the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the display mode in the situation where the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. and the display mode of the plurality of lamps at a predetermined timing immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed is not the same,
When a special game is executed after the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed, the final display mode of the second performance symbol and the second performance symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the second performance symbol is This Pachinko game machine is characterized in that the final display mode of the symbols is configured so that the display mode of the second performance symbols at a predetermined timing immediately before the display is not the same as the display mode of the second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A6) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-game display section (e.g., sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display section (e.g., first sub-symbol display section AS21g, second sub-symbol display section BS21g);
A movable accessory that can be operated,
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The movable accessory has an accessory lamp that can emit light,
The identification information display section includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first performance information display control means for controlling the display to stop and display;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the second performance information is variably displayed on the performance information display section within the one performance period, the second performance information is displayed as performance information. and a second effect information display control means for controlling the display to stop at a certain point.
In a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the performance display section, a predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to be lit,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to have a case where the predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is lit in a situation where the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section,
In a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner on the performance display section, the lamp of the performance information display section is configured to be off,
If a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the pachinko game machine is cut off, and the power is then restored, the movable accessories are configured to operate in the initial operation pattern,
When the movable accessory operates in the initial movement pattern, the accessory lamp is configured to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern,
When a power outage occurs and the power is then restored, the display on the identification information display section is restored at the first timing, and the accessory lamp starts emitting light in the predetermined light emission pattern at a subsequent second timing. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the movable accessory starts the movement of the initial movement pattern at a third timing thereafter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
A sub-game display section (e.g., sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display section (e.g., first sub-symbol display section AS21g, second sub-symbol display section BS21g);
A movable accessory that can be operated,
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The movable accessory has an accessory lamp that can emit light,
The identification information display section includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section within the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first performance information display control means for controlling the display to stop and display;
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period, and after the second performance information is variably displayed on the performance information display section within the one performance period, the second performance information is displayed as performance information. and a second effect information display control means for controlling the display to stop at a certain point.
In a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the performance display section, a predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to be lit,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is configured to have a case where the predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is lit in a situation where the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section,
In a situation where the first performance information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner on the performance display section, the lamp of the performance information display section is configured to be off,
In a situation where the first effect information is being displayed in a variable manner on the effect display section, the shortest time from when the predetermined lamp of the identification information display section is turned on until it is turned on again after being turned off is the first time. and
In a situation where the first performance information is being displayed in a variable manner on the performance display section, the shortest time from when the lamp of the performance information display section is turned on until it is turned on again after being turned off is the second time,
the first time and the second time are different lengths;
When the starting port is set as the reference position, the identification information display section and the performance information display section are each provided in different directions in the left and right direction of the reference position, and the identification information display section and the performance information display section Each is provided in a different direction above and below the reference position,
When a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the pachinko game machine is cut off, and the power is then restored, the movable accessories are configured to operate in the initial operation pattern,
When the movable accessory operates in the initial movement pattern, the accessory lamp is configured to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern,
When a power outage occurs and the power is then restored, the display on the identification information display section is restored at the first timing, and at the subsequent second timing, the accessory lamp starts emitting light in the predetermined light emission pattern. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the movable accessory starts the movement of the initial movement pattern at a third timing thereafter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display section (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second main game symbol display section B21g) and main game reserve display section (for example, first main game symbol reserve display section A21h, second main game symbol reserve a main game display section (for example, main display device MH20) having at least a display section B21h);
A main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance display unit (for example, a performance display device SG) capable of displaying a performance,
The performance information display section (for example, the first sub-symbol display section AS21g, the second sub-symbol display section BS21g) and the sub-game pending display section (for example, the first sub-scheduled display section AS21h, the second sub-scheduled display section BS21h). At least a sub-game display section (for example, sub-display device SH20),
A sub-gaming section (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display section includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The main game hold display section includes at least one lamp,
The performance information display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game reservation display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
The number of remaining reservations can be displayed on the main game reservation display section,
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
A first performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the first performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbol to be displayed on the performance display section after the second performance symbol is variably displayed on the performance display section;
It is configured such that the first presentation symbol and the second presentation symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display,
When the identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop-display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop-display mode and the second effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop-display mode are It is configured so that the final display mode can be displayed,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is considered to be one performance period,
After the first performance symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner within a certain performance period, a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the first performance symbol is displayed within the same performance period. have,
With regard to the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period, the specific display mode is configured not to be displayed within the certain performance period,
After the performance information is displayed in a variable manner on the performance information display section within a certain performance period, the performance information is stopped and displayed on the performance information display section,
It is possible to display the number of remaining reservations on the sub-game reservation display section,
When a special game is executed after the identification information is stopped and displayed, the identification information display section shows the display mode of the plurality of lamps in the situation where the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the display mode in the situation where the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. and the display mode of the plurality of lamps at a predetermined timing immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed is configured so as not to be the same,
When a special game is executed after the final display mode of the second performance symbol is displayed, the final display mode of the second performance symbol and the second performance symbol are displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is configured so that the display mode of the second performance symbol at a predetermined timing immediately before the final display mode of the symbol is displayed is not the same,
If a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is cut off at the first timing when the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, and the power is then restored, the display on the identification information display section will change to the second timing. The display on the main game pending display section returns at the second timing, the display on the sub game pending display section returns at the second timing, and the display on the performance information display section returns at the second timing. is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to return at the second timing.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (204) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
It has multiple types of production modes (for example, stages), and can display any one of the plurality of production modes on the production display section, and when displaying the production display contents, it is possible to display the production mode according to the displayed production mode. It is configured so that the corresponding items can be displayed.
The variable right display includes a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) belonging to the first group (for example, the white icon, blue icon, and green icon of the low expectation group) and having a plurality of display modes, and a second variable right display (for example, a white icon) belonging to the first group (for example, the white icon, blue icon, and green icon of the low expectation group). For example, it has at least a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) that belongs to a high expectation group (red icon, rainbow icon) and has a different display mode from any of the plurality of first variable right displays,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The production mode includes at least a first production mode (for example, stage A) and a second production mode (for example, stage B) different from the first production mode,
The display mode of the first variable right display in the first production mode (for example, a circular outer shape) is configured to be different from the display mode of the first variable right display in the second production mode (for example, a triangular outer shape). On the other hand, the first variable right sound (for example, "do") in the first presentation mode and the first variable right sound (for example, "do") in the second presentation mode may be the same sound. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by the following configuration.

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by sharing multiple types of special hold music with low expectations (special hold music with blue icons and special hold music with green icons), Special hold music (red icon special hold music and rainbow icon special hold music) can create a sense of anticipation by providing dedicated sounds.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (205) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The second setting (e.g., third setting) in which the frequency at which the second variable right sound is output based on the operation of the operating member is a predetermined frequency, to the second setting (e.g., a third setting) in which the frequency at which the second variable right sound is output is lower than the predetermined frequency. This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be changeable to 4 settings).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of users who want to recognize a hold with a high expectation level not by the display mode (visual) but by the hold sound (auditory).

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (206) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
A first variable right sound that can be output as a variable right sound (for example, "do") when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and a first variable right sound that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The second setting (e.g., third setting) in which the frequency at which the second variable right sound is output based on the operation of the operating member is a predetermined frequency, to the second setting (e.g., a third setting) in which the frequency at which the second variable right sound is output is lower than the predetermined frequency. 4 settings).
As the second variable right display, at least a second variable right display A (for example, a blue icon) and a second variable right display B (for example, a red icon) that is in a different display mode from the second variable right display A. has,
In a situation where the first setting (for example, the third setting) is set and the second variable right display A is displayed as the variable right display, the variable right display is changed to the second variable right display A. (e.g., blue icon) to the second variable right display B (e.g., red icon), and is set to the second setting (e.g., fourth setting), and In a situation where the second variable right display A is displayed as a right display, the variable right display is changed from the second variable right display A (for example, a blue icon) to the second variable right display B (for example, a red icon). This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display information more frequently.

By configuring in this manner, a game feature is created in which even if a pending game with a low expectation level changes, one can expect subsequent changes.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (207) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The display content is configured to be able to execute a high expectation performance (for example, a performance in which a high expectation character is displayed) indicating that the execution expectation of the special game is high;
As the performance display content, a first predetermined performance (for example, a battle performance) can be executed after the high expectation performance is executed,
As the performance display content, after the high expectation performance is executed, a second predetermined performance (for example, a revival performance) different from the first predetermined performance can be executed,
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The second setting (e.g., third setting) in which the frequency at which the second variable right sound is output based on the operation of the operating member is a predetermined frequency, to the second setting (e.g., a third setting) in which the frequency at which the second variable right sound is output is lower than the predetermined frequency. 4 settings).
As the second variable right display, at least a second variable right display A (for example, a blue icon) and a second variable right display B (for example, a red icon) that is in a different display mode from the second variable right display A. has,
In a situation where the first setting (for example, the third setting) is set and the second variable right display A is displayed as the variable right display, the variable right display is changed to the second variable right display A. (e.g., blue icon) to the second variable right display B (e.g., red icon), and is set to the second setting (e.g., fourth setting), and In a situation where the second variable right display A is displayed as a right display, the variable right display is changed from the second variable right display A (for example, a blue icon) to the second variable right display B (for example, a red icon). It is configured so that it is displayed more frequently,
In a state where the high expectation level performance is being executed, the frequency at which the second holding tone is output based on the operation is configured to be changeable,
In a state in which the first predetermined effect is being executed, the frequency at which the second holding tone is output based on the operation cannot be changed, while in a state in which the second predetermined effect is being executed , configured to be able to change the frequency at which the second holding tone is output based on the operation;
If a new ball enters the starting hole while the first predetermined effect is being executed, the second holding tone is not output, while the second holding tone is not outputted. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second holding tone can be output when a new ball enters the pachinko game machine.

With this configuration, it is possible to optimize the period for adjusting the frequency of hold music.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (208) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The gaming state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
It has multiple types of production modes (for example, stages), and can display any one of the plurality of production modes on the production display section, and when displaying the production display contents, it is possible to display the production mode according to the displayed production mode. It is configured so that the corresponding items can be displayed.
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied;
The production mode includes at least a normal production mode (for example, stage A) corresponding to the normal gaming state and a specific production mode (for example, stage D) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when a new ball enters the starting port, and the first variable right sound when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when a variable right display different from the first variable right display is displayed can be the same sound,
In the normal production mode (for example, stage A), the second variable right sound is output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed in response to a new ball entering the starting port. The pachinko machine is configured such that the second variable right sound is not output in the specific performance mode (for example, stage D) when a new ball enters the starting hole. It is a gaming machine.

With this configuration, it is possible to output an appropriate holding tone depending on the gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (209) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the time when the first light emitting section ends is earlier than the time when the light emission of the first light emitting section ends in the second embodiment.

With this configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication with other voices.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (210) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
The second variable right sound is configured to be able to be output a plurality of times in response to a certain variable right display, and the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode a plurality of times. ,
The second variable right sound includes at least a second variable right sound A (e.g., “re”) and a second variable right sound B (e.g., “mi”) different from the second variable right sound A. and
The second aspect of the first light emitting unit has at least a second aspect A (for example, blue) and a second aspect B (for example, red) different from the second aspect A;
The second variable right sound B is configured not to be output for at least a predetermined period from the state in which the second variable right sound A is output, and the first light emitting section emits light in the second mode A. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode B within the predetermined period from the state.

With this configuration, the hold tone and light emission are executed multiple times when the hold occurs, increasing the sense of anticipation, and making it easy to recognize each sound of the hold tone and recognizing changes in the light emission. It can be made easier.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (211) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is one performance period,
The second variable right display is configured to be able to be displayed from the start of a certain performance period to a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a super reach performance develops),
The first light emitting unit is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode (for example, red) from after the start of the certain performance period until the predetermined timing,
While the second variable right display is not displayed after the predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the super reach effect ends) of the one performance period, the second variable right display is not displayed after the specific timing after the predetermined timing. The display (e.g. red icon) is configured to become visible again;
In the pachinko gaming machine, when the second variable right display is displayed after the specific timing, the first light emitting section emits light in a light emission mode different from the second mode (for example, red). be.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that does not place an undue burden on the lamp by emitting light in accordance with fluctuating conditions.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (212) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The gaming state while the special game is not being executed includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
It has multiple types of production modes, and can display any of the plurality of production modes on the production display section, and when displaying production display contents, displays the one corresponding to the displayed production mode. configured to allow
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
The production mode includes at least a first production mode (for example, stage A) corresponding to the normal gaming state and a specific production mode (for example, stage D) corresponding to the specific gaming state,
In the first performance mode (for example, stage A), when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed in response to a new ball entering the starting port, the first light emitting section While configured to be able to emit light in the second mode (for example, red), in the specific production mode (for example, Stage D), the second variable right display (for example, , white square icon) is displayed, the first light emitting section is configured not to emit light in the second mode (for example, red),
In the first performance mode (for example, stage A), upon satisfying the condition for starting the variable display of identification information, the certain variable right display is displayed as the second variable right display (for example, a red icon). While the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode (for example, red) when When the certain variable right indication is displayed in the second variable right indication (for example, a white square icon), the first light emitting part changes in the second mode (for example, red). This pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured so that no light is emitted.

With this configuration, it is possible to output appropriate light emission according to the gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (213) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The content of the performance display is configured to be able to execute the first preview performance,
The display content is configured to be able to execute a second preview performance that is different from the first preview performance,
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is one performance period,
The second variable right display is configured to be able to be displayed from the start of a certain performance period to a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a super reach performance develops),
The first preview effect (e.g., darkening effect) is configured to be executable before the predetermined timing (e.g., the timing when the super reach effect develops),
When the first notice effect (for example, blackout effect) is executed in a situation where the second variable right display is displayed and the first light emitting section is emitting light in the second mode, the second variable right is displayed. While the display is no longer displayed, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode (for example, red);
The second preview performance (e.g., super hot background performance) is configured to be executable before the predetermined timing (for example, the timing of developing into a super reach performance),
When the second preview effect (for example, intense heat background effect) is executed in a situation where the second variable right display is displayed and the first light emitting unit is emitting light in the second mode, the second The first light emitting section is configured to stop emitting light in the second mode (for example, red) while the variable right display continues to be displayed;
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first preview performance (for example, blackout performance) and the second preview performance (for example, extremely hot background performance) are configured so that they are not executed at the same time.

With this configuration, even in situations where each performance is performed, either the icon or the light emission is ensured, so the current level of expectation can always be grasped.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (214) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
The device is configured to be able to output a specified sound (e.g., initialization sound) from the speaker during a specific period after the power is restored from a power outage.
The first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in a prescribed manner (e.g., an initialization lamp pattern) during the specific period after recovery from a power-off,
At a first timing during the specific period, the second fluctuating right display (for example, a red icon) is configured to be displayed on the performance display section in response to a new ball entering the starting hole; It is configured such that the output of the two-variable right sound (for example, "mi") is limited,
At the first timing during the specific period, the second fluctuating right display (for example, a red icon) is configured to be displayed on the effect display section in response to a new ball entering the starting hole; The first light emitting section is configured to restrict light emission in the second mode (for example, red),
At a second timing after the first timing during the specific period, the output restriction of the second variable right sound (for example, "mi") is released,
The pachinko machine is configured such that at a third timing after the second timing during the specific period, the restriction on light emission of the first light emitting part in the second mode (for example, red) is canceled. It is a gaming machine.

With this configuration, even if there is a power outage during play due to an unforeseen situation, the power outage recovery notification can be executed appropriately, and at least one can be executed in advance. The performance can be restored as soon as possible.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (215) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
When displaying a fluctuating right display in the second fluctuating right display, the fluctuating right display is displayed in the second fluctuating right display without performing a change suggesting performance (for example, an action performance) that suggests that the display mode of the fluctuating right display changes. It is possible to execute either a first change pattern in which the fluctuating right display is displayed, or a second change pattern in which the fluctuating right display is displayed in the second fluctuating right display after executing the change suggestion performance,
The second variable right sound (e.g., "re") that can be output when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed according to the first change pattern; The second variable right sound (for example, "re") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The second aspect (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting part that can emit light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed according to the first change pattern; It is configured such that the second mode (for example, blue) of the first light emitting section that can emit light when the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) is displayed can be the same light emission mode;
In the case where the variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) according to the second change pattern and the second variable right sound (for example, "re") is output, the While a specific sound (e.g., action sound) is configured to be able to be output for a predetermined period of time before outputting the second variable right sound, the first change pattern changes the variable right display to the second variable right display (e.g., when the second variable right sound (e.g., "re") is output, the specific sound (e.g., action sound) is not output.
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of the identification information to the stop display is one performance period,
Even if a new ball enters the starting hole after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the first change pattern will cause the ball to enter the starting hole. The second variable right display is configured to display a variable right display corresponding to a ball entered, while the second variable pattern causes the variable right display corresponding to the ball entered to be displayed on the second variable right display (e.g. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so that it is not displayed with a blue icon).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a complicated performance even if there is some margin for variation.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (216) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
When displaying a fluctuating right display in the second fluctuating right display, the fluctuating right display is displayed in the second fluctuating right display without performing a change suggesting performance (for example, an action performance) that suggests that the display mode of the fluctuating right display changes. It is possible to execute either a first change pattern in which the fluctuating right display is displayed, or a second change pattern in which the fluctuating right display is displayed in the second fluctuating right display after executing the change suggestion performance,
The second variable right sound (e.g., "re") that can be output when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed according to the first change pattern; The second variable right sound (for example, "re") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The second aspect (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting part that can emit light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed according to the first change pattern; It is configured such that the second mode (for example, blue) of the first light emitting section that can emit light when the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) is displayed can be the same light emission mode;
In the case where the variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) according to the second change pattern and the second variable right sound (for example, "re") is output, the While a specific sound (e.g., action sound) is configured to be able to be output for a predetermined period of time before outputting the second variable right sound, the first change pattern changes the variable right display to the second variable right display (e.g., when the second variable right sound (e.g., "re") is output, the specific sound (e.g., action sound) is not output.
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is one performance period,
Even if a new ball enters the starting hole after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the first change pattern will cause the ball to enter the starting hole. The second variable right display is configured to display a variable right display corresponding to a ball entered, while the second variable pattern causes the variable right display corresponding to the ball entered to be displayed on the second variable right display (e.g. (blue icon) so that it is not displayed.
If a new ball enters the starting slot after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the performance period following the performance period. is configured such that a variable right display corresponding to the entered ball can be displayed in the second variable right display according to the first change pattern,
If a new ball enters the starting slot after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the performance period following the performance period. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second change pattern is configured such that a variable right display corresponding to the ball entry can be displayed in the second variable right display.

With this configuration, the next variation can be executed appropriately while avoiding complicated effects.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (217) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
The production display section is configured to be able to display a variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate.
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
The second light emitting section has at least a third mode (for example, white) and a fourth mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the third mode, as a light emission mode of the second light emitting section,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the performance display section, the first light emitting section is configured to be able to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the third mode. configured to allow
The timing at which the output of the second variable right sound starts and the timing at which the first light emitting section starts emitting light in the second aspect are configured to be substantially the same, and the output of the second variable right sound is configured to be substantially the same. is configured to end before the time when light emission from the first light emitting section ends in the second aspect,
When displaying a fluctuating right display in the second fluctuating right display, the fluctuating right display is displayed in the second fluctuating right display without performing a change suggesting performance (for example, an action performance) that suggests that the display mode of the fluctuating right display changes. It is possible to execute either a first change pattern in which the fluctuating right display is displayed, or a second change pattern in which the fluctuating right display is displayed in the second fluctuating right display after executing the change suggestion performance,
The second variable right sound (e.g., "re") that can be output when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed according to the first change pattern; The second variable right sound (for example, "re") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The second aspect (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting part that can emit light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed according to the first change pattern; It is configured such that the second mode (for example, blue) of the first light emitting section that can emit light when the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) is displayed can be the same light emission mode;
In the case where the variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) according to the second change pattern and the second variable right sound (for example, "re") is output, the While a specific sound (e.g., action sound) is configured to be able to be output for a predetermined period of time before outputting the second variable right sound, the first change pattern changes the variable right display to the second variable right display (e.g., when the second variable right sound (e.g., "re") is output, the specific sound (e.g., action sound) is not output.
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is one performance period,
Even if a new ball enters the starting hole after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the first change pattern will cause the ball to enter the starting hole. The second variable right display is configured to display a variable right display corresponding to a ball entered, while the second variable pattern causes the variable right display corresponding to the ball entered to be displayed on the second variable right display (e.g. (blue icon) so that it is not displayed.
If a new ball enters the starting slot after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the performance period following the performance period. is configured such that a variable right display corresponding to the entered ball can be displayed in the second variable right display according to the first change pattern,
If a new ball enters the starting slot after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the performance period following the performance period. is configured such that a variable right display corresponding to the entered ball can be displayed in the second variable right display according to the second change pattern,
If a new ball enters the starting slot after the start of a performance period and the remaining period of the performance period is longer than the predetermined time, the performance period following the performance period. Depending on the type of variable display of the identification information related to (for example, whether or not it is a variable display of trigger pending), the variable right display corresponding to the ball entering in the one performance period following the one performance period concerned. The Pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the frequency of displaying the second variable right display is configured to vary depending on the second change pattern.

With this configuration, the next variation can be executed appropriately according to the variation mode (number of reservations, expectation level, etc.) while avoiding a complicated performance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (218) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
It is configured such that a variable rights display (e.g., an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate can be displayed in the variable rights display area of the production display section,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
In a display area other than the fluctuating right display area, a display imitating the second fluctuating right display (for example, a red icon) or a second pseudo fluctuating right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) reminiscent of the second fluctuating right display. ) is configured so that it can be displayed.
When the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is not displayed in the variable right display area, the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed in the variable right display area. The second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) is configured to be more easily displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section than when there is a variable right display area,
When the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section, the second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") is configured so that it is not output.
When the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section, the first light emitting section causes the second This pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it does not emit light in a certain aspect (for example, red).

With this configuration, it is possible to spread awareness of icons with high expectations to an extent that does not mislead players.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (219) is
A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A speaker that outputs sound,
A first light emitting part and a second light emitting part provided on the game board or a frame containing the game board,
A production display section that can display production;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a validity judgment permission condition is satisfied;
A game content determining means that executes a validity determination when a validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a fluctuating display format of the identification information based on the result of the validity determination;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information in accordance with the determination by the game content determining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
and effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display section,
It is configured such that a variable rights display (e.g., an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting gate can be displayed in the variable rights display area of the production display section,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the production display section, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
The variable right display includes at least a first variable right display (for example, a white icon) and a second variable right display (for example, a red icon) different from the first variable right display,
As the variable right sound, a first variable right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the production display section, and the second variable right display is displayed on the production display section. has at least a second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The system is configured to be able to execute a first change effect in which, in response to a new ball entering the starting hole, a variable right display corresponding to the new ball entering the ball is displayed on the second variable right display;
The system is configured to be able to execute a second change effect in which a certain variable right display is displayed in the second variable right display when a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
The second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (for example, white) and a second mode (for example, red) that is a different light emission mode from the first mode, as a light emission mode of the first light emitting section,
In a display area other than the fluctuating right display area, a display imitating the second fluctuating right display (for example, a red icon) or a second pseudo fluctuating right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) reminiscent of the second fluctuating right display. ) is configured so that it can be displayed.
When the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is not displayed in the variable right display area, the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed in the variable right display area. The second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) is configured to be more easily displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section than when there is a variable right display area,
When the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section, the second variable right sound (for example, "Mi") is configured so that it is not output.
When the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section, the first light emitting section causes the second (e.g., red),
When the second pseudo variation rights display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation performance) is displayed in a display area other than the variation rights display area of the performance display section, the second pseudo variation rights display area is displayed in the variation rights display area. The second variable right display (for example, a blue icon) may be displayed in a display mode different from the right display (for example, a red icon),
When the second pseudo variable right display (for example, the red icon of the game explanation effect) is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section, the new ball enters the starting hole as a trigger. The second variable right display (for example, a red icon) may be displayed in the variable right display area,
The period from the start of the fluctuating display of identification information to the stop display is one performance period,
In a period after the start of a certain performance period and before a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the super reach performance develops), the second pseudo variable right is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the performance display section. While a display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation performance) is configured to be displayable, the variable rights display area of the performance display section is displayed during a period after the predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a super reach performance develops). This pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the second pseudo variable rights display (for example, a red icon for game explanation performance) is not displayed in a display area other than the above display area.

By configuring in this way, a situation is created in which it is possible to expect that the icon will actually change to a highly expected icon during or immediately after spreading awareness of the highly expected icon.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game starting opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game starting opening ball entry determination means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entry opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 1st big prize opening ball entry determination Means, MJ11-C20 Second grand prize opening ball entry determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ30 Suspension control means, MJ31 Suspension extinguishment control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means, MJ32 Symbol reservation means MJ32-A First main game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-A First main game symbol reservation information temporary Storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol retention means, MJ32b-B Second main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol retention means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol retention information temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Win/fail lottery means MN11-A First main game win/fail lottery means, MN11ta-A First main game win/fail lottery table MN11-B Second main game win/fail lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game win/fail lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game win/fail lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win/fail lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination Lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determining means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determining lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determining means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determining lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determining means , MN51-A First main game fluctuation mode determining means MN51ta-A First main game fluctuation mode determining lottery table, MN51-B Second main game fluctuation mode determining means MN51ta-B Second main game fluctuation mode determining lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP Game proceeding means MP10 Display control means, MP11-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11-C Second main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B Second main game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP21-B Second main Game starting opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determining means, MP22t-B Second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP30 Special game control means, MP31 Condition determining means MP32 Special game content determining means, MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special Game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 2nd big prize opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Variable end condition determination means, MP52 Time saving end condition determining means MP52c Time saving number counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH Prize ball payout decision Means A First main game peripheral device, A10 First main game starting port A11s First main game starting port ball entry detection device, A20 First main game symbol display device A21g First main game symbol display section, A21h First main game Symbol holding display section B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game starting opening B11s Second main game starting opening ball entry detection device, B11d Second main game starting opening electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display section B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st big prize opening, C11s 1st big prize mouth prize detection device C11d 1st big prize Mouth electric accessory, C20 2nd big winning hole C21s 2nd big winning hole winning detection device, C21d 2nd big winning hole electric accessory H Auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game starting hole H11s Auxiliary game starting hole entry ball detection device , H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display section, H21h Auxiliary game symbol holding display section S Sub-control board, SM Sub-game control means (sub-main control section)
SM10 Display information receiving means, SM11b Main side information temporary storage means SM20 Effect display control means, SM21 Decorative pattern display control means SM21n Drawing display content determining means, SM21ta Lottery table for drawing variation content determination SM21ta-2 Decorative pattern effect table, SM21b Drawing related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 First drawing variation time management timer, SM22 Drawing pending information display control means,
SM22b Drawing pending information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Preview effect display control means, SM24n Preview effect display content determination means SM24b Preview effect related information Temporary storage means, SM25 Reach performance display control means SM25n Reach performance display content determination means, SM25b Reach performance related information temporary storage means SM27 Right hit display control means, SM40 Information transmission/reception control means SS Performance display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 Sub Information transmission/reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area, SG12 First hold display area SG13 Second hold display area, KH Prize ball payout control Board KE Prize ball payout device MH20 Main display device, SH20 Sub display device R10 Round indicator light, R20 Round display section

Claims (1)

A starting port into which game balls can enter,
an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of the game;
A production display section that can display production;
an operable operation member;
A sub-gaming section that controls the presentation display on the presentation display section;
Equipped with
The main gaming department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means temporarily stores the acquired random number on hold until a condition for starting a variable display of identification information is satisfied;
When the permission condition for determining whether the validity judgment is satisfied regarding a certain hold is satisfied, the determination is executed based on the random number regarding the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the changing display mode of the identification information are determined based on the result of the validity judgment. A game content determining means,
an identification information display control means for controlling an identification information display section to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner.
Equipped with
The sub-gaming club is
Effect display content control means for controlling effect display content displayed on the effect display section;
Equipped with
There are multiple types of operation effects that enable the operation of the operation member and enable a predetermined effect to be executed by operating the operation member. There are cases where it is carried out,
In a situation where the operation of the operating member is enabled during the operation performance, a specific image can be displayed on the performance display section,
When performing an operation member movement when an operation effect is executed, the operation member movement can be executed by operating the operation member in a situation where a specific image is displayed on the effect display section, and the specific image It is configured so that it can be switched to hidden.
The specific images include at least a specific image A and a specific image B which has a display mode different from that of the specific image A, and the operation member is easier to operate when the specific image B is displayed than when the specific image A is displayed. It is structured so that the expectation of execution of the action is relatively high,
If there is a certain hold and one or more preemptive holds that satisfy the identification information change display start condition before the certain hold, the identification information change display start condition for the preemptive hold is satisfied. While the identification information is being displayed as a change at the time of the suspension, it is possible to perform at least one of a plurality of types of look-ahead effects that foretell the degree of expectation for execution of a special game in the future due to the certain suspension;
As a plurality of types of look-ahead effects, there is at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B which is a different performance form from the look-ahead effect A, and where the look-ahead effect B is executed more than the look-ahead effect A is executed. is configured such that the expected degree of execution of the operation member movement is relatively high,
Compared to the case where the prefetch effect A caused by a certain hold is executed and the specific image B is displayed during the fluctuation display of the identification information regarding the certain hold, the prefetch effect B caused by the certain hold is executed and the specific image B is displayed while the identification information regarding the certain hold is executed. When the specific image A is displayed while the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the expected degree of execution of the operating member operation when the operating member is operated in a situation where the specific image A or the specific image B is displayed is relatively higher. It is configured to be high,
The operating member has a light emitting part,
As the light emission mode of the light emitting part of the operation member during execution of the operation performance, there are multiple types of light emission modes depending on the type of operation performance,
As the light emission mode of the light emitting part of the operation member during execution of the operation member operation, there are multiple types of light emission modes depending on the execution timing of the operation member operation,
When a power outage occurs and the power is subsequently restored, the light emission mode of the light emitting portion of the operating member triggered by the power recovery is configured to be a light emission mode different from the specific light emission mode during execution of the operation effect. ,
A special performance can be displayed on the performance display unit in response to an operation of the operating member under a specific situation where a specific image is displayed on the performance display unit,
When the specific image and the first production design are displayed at the same time, the display of the specific image has a higher display priority than the display of the first production design,
In a situation where a special effect is displayed in response to an operation of an operating member under a specific situation where a specific image is displayed on the effect display section, the special effect, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol are displayed. are displayed at the same time, the display of the special effect has higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol, while the display of the special effect has higher display priority than the display of the second effect symbol. low degree,
The display area of the special effect is larger than the display area of the specific image, and while the display area of the specific image and the display area of the first effect pattern may overlap, the display area of the specific image and the second effect pattern may overlap. does not overlap with the display area of
In a situation where a special effect is displayed in response to an operation of an operating member under a specific situation where a specific image is displayed on the effect display section, the display area of the special effect is the display area of the first effect symbol. A pachinko game machine characterized in that the display area of the second effect pattern also overlaps with the display area of the second effect pattern .

Images